 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| revision date: feb 15 , 2006 16 h8s/2345 group, h8s/2345 f-ztat ? hardware manual renesas 16-bit single-chip microcomputer h8s family/h8s/2300 series h8s/2345 hd6432345, hd6472345, hd64f2345 h8s/2344 hd6432344 h8s/2341 hd6432341 h8s/2340 hd64f2340 rev. 4.00 rej09b0291-0400
rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page ii of xxiv 1. these materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the renesas technology corp. product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging to renesas technology corp. or a third party. 2. renesas technology corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any third- party's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or circuit application examples contained in these materials. 3. all information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are subject to change by renesas technology corp. without notice due to product improvements or other reasons. it is therefore recommended that customers contact renesas technology corp. or an authorized renesas technology corp. product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein. the information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. renesas technology corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors. please also pay attention to information published by renesas technology corp. by various means, including the renesas technology corp. semiconductor home page (http://www.renesas.com). 4. when using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs, and algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products. renesas technology corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein. 5. renesas technology corp. semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. please contact renesas technology corp. or an authorized renesas technology corp. product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use. 6. the prior written approval of renesas technology corp. is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials. 7. if these products or technologies are subject to the japanese export control restrictions, they must be exported under a license from the japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination. any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of japan and/or the country of destination is prohibited. 8. please contact renesas technology corp. for further details on these materials or the products contained therein. 1. renesas technology corp. puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage. remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or (iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap. keep safety first in your circuit designs! notes regarding these materials rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page iii of xxiv general precautions on the handling of product 1. treatment of nc pins note: do not connect anything to the nc pins. the nc (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are used as test pins or to reduce noise. if something is connected to the nc pins, the operation of the lsi is not guaranteed. 2. treatment of unused input pins note: fix all unused input pins to high or low level. generally, the input pins of cmos products are high-impedance input pins. if unused pins are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a pass- through current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur. 3. processing before initialization note: when power is first supplied, the product?s state is undefined. the states of internal circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the chip and a low level is input on the reset pin. during the period where the states are undefined, the register settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. design your system so that it does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this undefined state. for those products which have a reset function, reset the lsi immediately after the power supply has been turned on. 4. prohibition of access to undefined or reserved addresses note: access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited. the undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers may have been be allocated to these address. do not access these registers: the system?s operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed. rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page iv of xxiv rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page v of xxiv preface the h8s/2345 group is a series of high-performance microcontrollers with a 32-bit h8s/2000 cpu core, and a set of on-chip supporting functions required for system configuration. the h8s/2000 cpu can execute basic instructions in one state, and is provided with sixteen 16-bit general registers with a 32-bit internal configuration, and a concise and optimized instruction set. the cpu can handle a 16 mbyte linear address space (architecturally 4 gbytes). programs based on the high-level language c can also be run efficiently. the address space is divided into eight areas. the data bus width and access states can be selected for each of these areas, and various kinds of memory can be connected fast and easily. on-chip memory consists of large-capacity rom and ram. with regard to on-chip rom * 1 , single power supply flash memory (f-ztat? * 2 ), prom (ztat ? * 2 ), and mask rom versions are available, providing a quick and flexible response to conditions from ramp-up through full- scale volume production, even for applications with frequently changing specifications. on-chip supporting functions include a 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu), 8-bit timers, watchdog timer (wdt), serial communication interface (sci), a/d converter, d/a converter, and i/o ports. an on-chip data transfer controller (dtc) is also provided, enabling high-speed data transfer without cpu intervention. use of the h8s/2345 group enables compact, high-performance systems to be implemented easily. this manual describes the hardware of the h8s/2345 group. refer to the h8s/2600 series and h8s/2000 series programming manual for a detailed description of the instruction set. notes: 1. the h8s/2345, h8s/2344, h8s/2343, and h8s/2341 have on-chip rom. the h8s/2340 does not have on-chip rom. 2. f-ztat (flexible-ztat) is a trademark of renesas technology corp. ztat is a registered trademark of renesas technology corp. rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page vi of xxiv rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page vii of xxiv main revisions in this edition item page revision (see manual for details) all ? all references to hitachi, hitachi, ltd., hitachi semiconductors, and other hitachi brand names changed to renesas technology corp. designation for categories changed from ?series? to ?group? 9.7 usage notes figure 9.57 contention between tcnt write and overflow 370 figure 9.57 amended write signal address * , then writing 0 to ovf note * added note: * when ovf is polled and the interval timer interrupt is disabled. ovf = 1 must be read at least twice. 14.4.3 input sampling and a/d conversion time figure 14.5 a/d conversion timing 521 figure 14.5 amended (1) (2) t d t spl t conv rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page viii of xxiv item page revision (see manual for details) 20.1.6 flash memory characteristics table 20.10 flash memory characteristics 648 table 20.10 amended item symbol min typ max unit test conditions programming time * 1 * 2 * 4 t p ? 10 200 ms/ 32 bytes erase time * 1 * 3 * 5 t e ? 100 1200 ms/block reprogramming count n wec 100 * 7 10,000 * 8 ? times data retention time * 9 t drp 10 ? ? years programming wait time after setting swe bit * 1 x10 ?? c (as a guideline, rewriting should normally function up to this value). 9. data retention characteristic when rewriting is performed within the specification range, including the minimum value. appendix g package dimensions figure g.1 tfp-100b package dimensions 897 figure g.1 replaced figure g.2 tfp-100g package dimensions 898 figure g.2 replaced figure g.3 fp-100a package dimensions 899 figure g.3 replaced figure g.4 fp-100b package dimensions 900 figure g.4 replaced rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page ix of xxiv contents section 1 overview ............................................................................................................. 1 1.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ....... 1 1.2 block diagram ............................................................................................................... ... 6 1.3 pin description............................................................................................................. ..... 7 1.3.1 pin arrangement .................................................................................................. 7 1.3.2 pin functions in each operating mode ............................................................... 9 1.3.3 pin functions ....................................................................................................... 14 section 2 cpu ...................................................................................................................... 21 2.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ....... 21 2.1.1 features................................................................................................................ 21 2.1.2 differences between h8s/2600 cpu and h8s/2000 cpu .................................. 22 2.1.3 differences from h8/300 cpu ............................................................................ 23 2.1.4 differences from h8/300h cpu.......................................................................... 23 2.2 cpu operating modes ...................................................................................................... 24 2.3 address space............................................................................................................... .... 29 2.4 register configuration...................................................................................................... 30 2.4.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 30 2.4.2 general registers ................................................................................................. 31 2.4.3 control registers ................................................................................................. 32 2.4.4 initial register values.......................................................................................... 34 2.5 data formats................................................................................................................ ..... 35 2.5.1 general register data formats ............................................................................ 35 2.5.2 memory data formats ......................................................................................... 37 2.6 instruction set ............................................................................................................. ...... 38 2.6.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 38 2.6.2 instructions and addressing modes ..................................................................... 39 2.6.3 table of instructions classified by function ....................................................... 41 2.6.4 basic instruction formats .................................................................................... 48 2.7 addressing modes and effective address calculation ..................................................... 49 2.7.1 addressing mode................................................................................................. 49 2.7.2 effective address calculation ............................................................................. 52 2.8 processing states........................................................................................................... .... 56 2.8.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 56 2.8.2 reset state............................................................................................................ 57 2.8.3 exception-handling state .................................................................................... 58 2.8.4 program execution state...................................................................................... 61 2.8.5 bus-released state............................................................................................... 61 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page x of xxiv 2.8.6 power-down state ............................................................................................... 61 2.9 basic timing................................................................................................................ ..... 62 2.9.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 62 2.9.2 on-chip memory (rom, ram) ......................................................................... 62 2.9.3 on-chip supporting module access timing ...................................................... 64 2.9.4 external address space access timing .............................................................. 65 section 3 mcu operating modes .................................................................................. 67 3.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ....... 67 3.1.1 operating mode selection (f-ztat? version)................................................. 67 3.1.2 operating mode selection (ztat, mask rom, and romless versions) .......... 68 3.1.3 register configuration......................................................................................... 69 3.2 register descriptions ....................................................................................................... .70 3.2.1 mode control register (mdcr) ......................................................................... 70 3.2.2 system control register (syscr) ...................................................................... 71 3.2.3 system control register 2 (syscr2) (f-ztat version only) ......................... 72 3.3 operating mode descriptions ........................................................................................... 73 3.3.1 mode 1 (ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only)............................... 73 3.3.2 mode 2 (ztat and mask rom versions only)................................................. 73 3.3.3 mode 3 (ztat and mask rom versions only)................................................. 73 3.3.4 mode 4 ................................................................................................................. 73 3.3.5 mode 5 ................................................................................................................. 74 3.3.6 mode 6 ................................................................................................................. 74 3.3.7 mode 7 ................................................................................................................. 74 3.3.8 modes 8 and 9 (f-ztat version only) .............................................................. 75 3.3.9 mode 10 (f-ztat version only) ....................................................................... 75 3.3.10 mode 11 (f-ztat version only) ....................................................................... 75 3.3.11 modes 12 and 13.................................................................................................. 75 3.3.12 mode 14 (f-ztat version only) ....................................................................... 75 3.3.13 mode 15 (f-ztat version only) ....................................................................... 75 3.4 pin functions in each operating mode ............................................................................ 76 3.5 memory map in each operating mode ............................................................................ 77 section 4 exception handling ......................................................................................... 89 4.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ....... 89 4.1.1 exception handling types and priority............................................................... 89 4.1.2 exception handling operation............................................................................. 90 4.1.3 exception vector table ....................................................................................... 90 4.2 reset....................................................................................................................... ........... 92 4.2.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 92 4.2.2 reset types.......................................................................................................... 92 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xi of xxiv 4.2.3 reset sequence .................................................................................................... 93 4.2.4 interrupts after reset............................................................................................ 94 4.2.5 state of on-chip supporting modules after reset release ................................. 94 4.3 traces...................................................................................................................... .......... 95 4.4 interrupts .................................................................................................................. ......... 96 4.5 trap instruction............................................................................................................ ..... 97 4.6 stack status after exception handling.............................................................................. 98 4.7 notes on use of the stack ................................................................................................. 99 section 5 interrupt controller .......................................................................................... 101 5.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ....... 101 5.1.1 features................................................................................................................ 10 1 5.1.2 block diagram..................................................................................................... 102 5.1.3 pin configuration................................................................................................. 103 5.1.4 register configuration......................................................................................... 103 5.2 register descriptions ....................................................................................................... . 104 5.2.1 system control register (syscr) ...................................................................... 104 5.2.2 interrupt priority registers a to k (ipra to iprk) ............................................ 105 5.2.3 irq enable register (ier) .................................................................................. 106 5.2.4 irq sense control registers h and l (iscrh, iscrl)..................................... 107 5.2.5 irq status register (isr).................................................................................... 108 5.3 interrupt sources........................................................................................................... .... 109 5.3.1 external interrupts ............................................................................................... 109 5.3.2 internal interrupts................................................................................................. 110 5.3.3 interrupt exception handling vector table......................................................... 110 5.4 interrupt operation......................................................................................................... ... 114 5.4.1 interrupt control modes and interrupt operation ................................................ 114 5.4.2 interrupt control mode 0 ..................................................................................... 117 5.4.3 interrupt control mode 2 ..................................................................................... 119 5.4.4 interrupt exception handling sequence .............................................................. 121 5.4.5 interrupt response times .................................................................................... 123 5.5 usage notes ................................................................................................................. ..... 124 5.5.1 contention between interrupt generation and disabling..................................... 124 5.5.2 instructions that disable interrupts ...................................................................... 125 5.5.3 times when interrupts are disabled ................................................................... 125 5.5.4 interrupts during execution of eepmov instruction.......................................... 126 5.6 dtc activation by interrupt............................................................................................. 126 5.6.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 126 5.6.2 block diagram..................................................................................................... 127 5.6.3 operation ............................................................................................................. 127 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xii of xxiv section 6 bus controller ................................................................................................... 129 6.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ....... 129 6.1.1 features................................................................................................................ 12 9 6.1.2 block diagram..................................................................................................... 130 6.1.3 pin configuration................................................................................................. 131 6.1.4 register configuration......................................................................................... 131 6.2 register descriptions ....................................................................................................... . 132 6.2.1 bus width control register (abwcr)............................................................... 132 6.2.2 access state control register (astcr) ............................................................. 133 6.2.3 wait control registers h and l (wcrh, wcrl).............................................. 134 6.2.4 bus control register h (bcrh).......................................................................... 137 6.2.5 bus control register l (bcrl) .......................................................................... 139 6.3 bus control ................................................................................................................. ...... 140 6.3.1 area divisions ..................................................................................................... 140 6.3.2 bus specifications................................................................................................ 142 6.3.3 memory interfaces ............................................................................................... 143 6.3.4 advanced mode................................................................................................... 143 6.3.5 areas in normal mode (ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only) ...... 144 6.3.6 chip select signals .............................................................................................. 145 6.4 basic bus interface ......................................................................................................... .. 146 6.4.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 146 6.4.2 data size and data alignment............................................................................. 146 6.4.3 valid strobes........................................................................................................ 148 6.4.4 basic timing........................................................................................................ 149 6.4.5 wait control ........................................................................................................ 157 6.5 burst rom interface......................................................................................................... 159 6.5.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 159 6.5.2 basic timing........................................................................................................ 159 6.5.3 wait control ........................................................................................................ 161 6.6 idle cycle .................................................................................................................. ........ 162 6.6.1 operation ............................................................................................................. 162 6.6.2 pin states in idle cycle ........................................................................................ 165 6.7 bus release................................................................................................................. ...... 165 6.7.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 165 6.7.2 operation ............................................................................................................. 165 6.7.3 pin states in external bus released state............................................................ 166 6.7.4 transition timing ................................................................................................ 167 6.7.5 usage note........................................................................................................... 168 6.8 bus arbitration............................................................................................................. ..... 168 6.8.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 168 6.8.2 operation ............................................................................................................. 168 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xiii of xxiv 6.8.3 bus transfer timing ............................................................................................ 169 6.8.4 external bus release usage note........................................................................ 169 6.9 resets and the bus controller ........................................................................................... 169 section 7 data transfer controller ................................................................................. 171 7.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ....... 171 7.1.1 features................................................................................................................ 17 1 7.1.2 block diagram..................................................................................................... 172 7.1.3 register configuration......................................................................................... 173 7.2 register descriptions ....................................................................................................... . 174 7.2.1 dtc mode register a (mra) ............................................................................ 174 7.2.2 dtc mode register b (mrb)............................................................................. 176 7.2.3 dtc source address register (sar).................................................................. 177 7.2.4 dtc destination address register (dar).......................................................... 177 7.2.5 dtc transfer count register a (cra) .............................................................. 178 7.2.6 dtc transfer count register b (crb)............................................................... 178 7.2.7 dtc enable registers (dtcer) ......................................................................... 179 7.2.8 dtc vector register (dtvecr)........................................................................ 180 7.2.9 module stop control register (mstpcr) .......................................................... 181 7.3 operation ................................................................................................................... ....... 182 7.3.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 182 7.3.2 activation sources ............................................................................................... 184 7.3.3 dtc vector table................................................................................................ 185 7.3.4 location of register information in address space ............................................ 188 7.3.5 normal mode....................................................................................................... 189 7.3.6 repeat mode ........................................................................................................ 190 7.3.7 block transfer mode ........................................................................................... 191 7.3.8 chain transfer ..................................................................................................... 193 7.3.9 operation timing................................................................................................. 194 7.3.10 number of dtc execution states........................................................................ 195 7.3.11 procedures for using dtc................................................................................... 197 7.3.12 examples of use of the dtc ............................................................................... 198 7.4 interrupts .................................................................................................................. ......... 200 7.5 usage notes ................................................................................................................. ..... 200 section 8 i/o ports .............................................................................................................. 201 8.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ....... 201 8.2 port 1...................................................................................................................... ........... 206 8.2.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 206 8.2.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 207 8.2.3 pin functions ....................................................................................................... 209 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xiv of xxiv 8.3 port 2...................................................................................................................... ........... 217 8.3.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 217 8.3.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 218 8.3.3 pin functions ....................................................................................................... 220 8.4 port 3...................................................................................................................... ........... 228 8.4.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 228 8.4.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 228 8.4.3 pin functions ....................................................................................................... 231 8.5 port 4...................................................................................................................... ........... 233 8.5.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 233 8.5.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 233 8.5.3 pin functions ....................................................................................................... 234 8.6 port a...................................................................................................................... .......... 234 8.6.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 234 8.6.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 235 8.6.3 pin functions ....................................................................................................... 239 8.6.4 mos input pull-up function............................................................................... 240 8.7 port b ...................................................................................................................... .......... 241 8.7.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 241 8.7.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 242 8.7.3 pin functions ....................................................................................................... 244 8.7.4 mos input pull-up function............................................................................... 246 8.8 port c ...................................................................................................................... .......... 247 8.8.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 247 8.8.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 248 8.8.3 pin functions ....................................................................................................... 250 8.8.4 mos input pull-up function............................................................................... 252 8.9 port d...................................................................................................................... .......... 253 8.9.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 253 8.9.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 254 8.9.3 pin functions ....................................................................................................... 257 8.9.4 mos input pull-up function............................................................................... 258 8.10 port e ..................................................................................................................... ........... 259 8.10.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 259 8.10.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 260 8.10.3 pin functions ....................................................................................................... 262 8.10.4 mos input pull-up function............................................................................... 264 8.11 port f..................................................................................................................... ............ 265 8.11.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 265 8.11.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 266 8.11.3 pin functions ....................................................................................................... 268 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xv of xxiv 8.12 port g..................................................................................................................... ........... 270 8.12.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 270 8.12.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 271 8.12.3 pin functions ....................................................................................................... 274 section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) .................................................................... 277 9.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ....... 277 9.1.1 features................................................................................................................ 27 7 9.1.2 block diagram..................................................................................................... 281 9.1.3 pin configuration................................................................................................. 282 9.1.4 register configuration......................................................................................... 284 9.2 register descriptions ....................................................................................................... . 286 9.2.1 timer control register (tcr)............................................................................. 286 9.2.2 timer mode register (tmdr) ............................................................................ 291 9.2.3 timer i/o control register (tior) ..................................................................... 293 9.2.4 timer interrupt enable register (tier) .............................................................. 310 9.2.5 timer status register (tsr)................................................................................ 313 9.2.6 timer counter (tcnt)........................................................................................ 316 9.2.7 timer general register (tgr) ............................................................................ 317 9.2.8 timer start register (tstr)................................................................................ 318 9.2.9 timer synchro register (tsyr) ......................................................................... 319 9.2.10 module stop control register (mstpcr) .......................................................... 320 9.3 interface to bus master ..................................................................................................... 321 9.3.1 16-bit registers ................................................................................................... 321 9.3.2 8-bit registers ..................................................................................................... 321 9.4 operation ................................................................................................................... ....... 323 9.4.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 323 9.4.2 basic functions.................................................................................................... 324 9.4.3 synchronous operation........................................................................................ 330 9.4.4 buffer operation .................................................................................................. 332 9.4.5 cascaded operation ............................................................................................. 336 9.4.6 pwm modes ........................................................................................................ 338 9.4.7 phase counting mode .......................................................................................... 344 9.5 interrupts .................................................................................................................. ......... 350 9.5.1 interrupt sources and priorities............................................................................ 350 9.5.2 dtc activation.................................................................................................... 352 9.5.3 a/d converter activation.................................................................................... 352 9.6 operation timing............................................................................................................ .. 353 9.6.1 input/output timing ............................................................................................ 353 9.6.2 interrupt signal timing........................................................................................ 357 9.7 usage notes ................................................................................................................. ..... 361 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xvi of xxiv section 10 8-bit timers ..................................................................................................... 371 10.1 overview................................................................................................................... ........ 371 10.1.1 features................................................................................................................ 3 71 10.1.2 block diagram..................................................................................................... 372 10.1.3 pin configuration................................................................................................. 373 10.1.4 register configuration......................................................................................... 373 10.2 register descriptions ...................................................................................................... .. 374 10.2.1 timer counters 0 and 1 (tcnt0, tcnt1) ......................................................... 374 10.2.2 time constant registers a0 and a1 (tcora0, tcora1) ............................... 374 10.2.3 time constant registers b0 and b1 (tcorb0, tcorb1) ................................ 375 10.2.4 time control registers 0 and 1 (tcr0, tcr1) .................................................. 375 10.2.5 timer control/status registers 0 and 1 (tcsr0, tcsr1).................................. 378 10.2.6 module stop control register (mstpcr) .......................................................... 381 10.3 operation .................................................................................................................. ........ 382 10.3.1 tcnt incrementation timing ............................................................................. 382 10.3.2 compare match timing....................................................................................... 383 10.3.3 timing of external reset on tcnt ................................................................. 385 10.3.4 timing of overflow flag (ovf) setting ............................................................. 385 10.3.5 operation with cascaded connection.................................................................. 386 10.4 interrupts ................................................................................................................. .......... 387 10.4.1 interrupt sources and dtc activation ................................................................ 387 10.4.2 a/d converter activation.................................................................................... 387 10.5 sample application......................................................................................................... .. 388 10.6 usage notes ................................................................................................................ ...... 389 10.6.1 contention between tcnt write and clear........................................................ 389 10.6.2 contention between tcnt write and increment ................................................ 390 10.6.3 contention between tcor write and compare match ...................................... 391 10.6.4 contention between compare matches a and b ................................................. 392 10.6.5 switching of internal clocks and tcnt operation............................................. 392 10.6.6 usage note........................................................................................................... 394 section 11 watchdog timer ............................................................................................. 395 11.1 overview................................................................................................................... ........ 395 11.1.1 features................................................................................................................ 3 95 11.1.2 block diagram..................................................................................................... 396 11.1.3 pin configuration................................................................................................. 397 11.1.4 register configuration......................................................................................... 397 11.2 register descriptions ...................................................................................................... .. 398 11.2.1 timer counter (tcnt)........................................................................................ 398 11.2.2 timer control/status register (tcsr)................................................................ 399 11.2.3 reset control/status register (rstcsr) ............................................................ 401 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xvii of xxiv 11.2.4 notes on register access..................................................................................... 402 11.3 operation .................................................................................................................. ........ 404 11.3.1 watchdog timer operation ................................................................................. 404 11.3.2 interval timer operation ..................................................................................... 405 11.3.3 timing of setting overflow flag (ovf) ............................................................. 406 11.3.4 timing of setting of watchdog timer overflow flag (wovf) ......................... 407 11.4 interrupts ................................................................................................................. .......... 408 11.5 usage notes ................................................................................................................ ...... 408 11.5.1 contention between timer counter (tcnt) write and increment ..................... 408 11.5.2 changing value of cks2 to cks0...................................................................... 409 11.5.3 switching between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode................ 409 11.5.4 system reset by wdtovf signal...................................................................... 409 11.5.5 internal reset in watchdog timer mode............................................................. 410 section 12 serial communication interface (sci) .................................................... 411 12.1 overview................................................................................................................... ........ 411 12.1.1 features................................................................................................................ 4 11 12.1.2 block diagram..................................................................................................... 413 12.1.3 pin configuration................................................................................................. 414 12.1.4 register configuration......................................................................................... 415 12.2 register descriptions ...................................................................................................... .. 416 12.2.1 receive shift register (rsr) .............................................................................. 416 12.2.2 receive data register (rdr) .............................................................................. 416 12.2.3 transmit shift register (tsr) ............................................................................. 417 12.2.4 transmit data register (tdr)............................................................................. 417 12.2.5 serial mode register (smr)................................................................................ 418 12.2.6 serial control register (scr).............................................................................. 421 12.2.7 serial status register (ssr) ................................................................................ 425 12.2.8 bit rate register (brr) ...................................................................................... 429 12.2.9 smart card mode register (scmr) .................................................................... 438 12.2.10 module stop control register (mstpcr) .......................................................... 439 12.3 operation .................................................................................................................. ........ 440 12.3.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 440 12.3.2 operation in asynchronous mode ....................................................................... 442 12.3.3 multiprocessor communication function............................................................ 453 12.3.4 operation in clocked synchronous mode ........................................................... 461 12.4 sci interrupts............................................................................................................. ....... 470 12.5 usage notes ................................................................................................................ ...... 471 section 13 smart card interface ..................................................................................... 477 13.1 overview................................................................................................................... ........ 477 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xviii of xxiv 13.1.1 features................................................................................................................ 4 77 13.1.2 block diagram..................................................................................................... 478 13.1.3 pin configuration................................................................................................. 479 13.1.4 register configuration......................................................................................... 480 13.2 register descriptions ...................................................................................................... .. 481 13.2.1 smart card mode register (scmr) .................................................................... 481 13.2.2 serial status register (ssr) ................................................................................ 482 13.2.3 serial mode register (smr)................................................................................ 484 13.2.4 serial control register (scr).............................................................................. 485 13.3 operation .................................................................................................................. ........ 486 13.3.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 486 13.3.2 pin connections ................................................................................................... 486 13.3.3 data format ......................................................................................................... 488 13.3.4 register settings .................................................................................................. 490 13.3.5 clock.................................................................................................................... 492 13.3.6 data transfer operations..................................................................................... 494 13.3.7 operation in gsm mode ..................................................................................... 501 13.4 usage note................................................................................................................. ....... 502 section 14 a/d converter ................................................................................................. 507 14.1 overview................................................................................................................... ........ 507 14.1.1 features................................................................................................................ 5 07 14.1.2 block diagram..................................................................................................... 508 14.1.3 pin configuration................................................................................................. 509 14.1.4 register configuration......................................................................................... 510 14.2 register descriptions ...................................................................................................... .. 511 14.2.1 a/d data registers a to d (addra to addrd).............................................. 511 14.2.2 a/d control/status register (adcsr) ............................................................... 512 14.2.3 a/d control register (adcr) ............................................................................ 514 14.2.4 module stop control register (mstpcr) .......................................................... 515 14.3 interface to bus master .................................................................................................... . 516 14.4 operation .................................................................................................................. ........ 517 14.4.1 single mode (scan = 0) .................................................................................... 517 14.4.2 scan mode (scan = 1)....................................................................................... 519 14.4.3 input sampling and a/d conversion time ......................................................... 521 14.4.4 external trigger input timing............................................................................. 522 14.5 interrupts ................................................................................................................. .......... 523 14.6 usage notes ................................................................................................................ ...... 523 section 15 d/a converter ................................................................................................. 529 15.1 overview................................................................................................................... ........ 529 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xix of xxiv 15.1.1 features................................................................................................................ 5 29 15.1.2 block diagram..................................................................................................... 530 15.1.3 pin configuration................................................................................................. 531 15.1.4 register configuration......................................................................................... 531 15.2 register descriptions ...................................................................................................... .. 532 15.2.1 d/a data registers 0 and 1 (dadr0, dadr1) ................................................. 532 15.2.2 d/a control register (dacr) ............................................................................ 532 15.2.3 module stop control register (mstpcr) .......................................................... 534 15.3 operation .................................................................................................................. ........ 535 15.4 usage notes ................................................................................................................ ...... 536 section 16 ram .................................................................................................................. 537 16.1 overview................................................................................................................... ........ 537 16.1.1 block diagram..................................................................................................... 538 16.1.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 538 16.2 register descriptions ...................................................................................................... .. 539 16.2.1 system control register (syscr) ...................................................................... 539 16.3 operation .................................................................................................................. ........ 539 16.4 usage note................................................................................................................. ....... 539 section 17 rom .................................................................................................................. 541 17.1 overview................................................................................................................... ........ 541 17.1.1 block diagram..................................................................................................... 541 17.1.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 542 17.2 register descriptions ...................................................................................................... .. 542 17.2.1 mode control register (mdcr) ......................................................................... 542 17.2.2 bus control register l (bcrl) .......................................................................... 543 17.3 operation .................................................................................................................. ........ 543 17.4 prom mode.................................................................................................................. ... 546 17.4.1 prom mode setting............................................................................................ 546 17.4.2 socket adapter and memory map ....................................................................... 546 17.5 programming................................................................................................................ ..... 549 17.5.1 overview.............................................................................................................. 549 17.5.2 programming and verification............................................................................. 549 17.5.3 programming precautions.................................................................................... 553 17.5.4 reliability of programmed data .......................................................................... 554 17.6 overview of flash memory .............................................................................................. 555 17.6.1 features................................................................................................................ 5 55 17.6.2 block diagram..................................................................................................... 556 17.6.3 flash memory operating modes ......................................................................... 557 17.6.4 pin configuration................................................................................................. 562 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xx of xxiv 17.6.5 register configuration......................................................................................... 563 17.7 register descriptions ...................................................................................................... .. 564 17.7.1 flash memory control register 1 (flmcr1)..................................................... 564 17.7.2 flash memory control register 2 (flmcr2)..................................................... 566 17.7.3 erase block registers 1 and 2 (ebr1, ebr2)..................................................... 568 17.7.4 system control register 2 (syscr2) ................................................................. 569 17.7.5 ram emulation register (ramer)................................................................... 570 17.8 on-board programming modes........................................................................................ 572 17.8.1 boot mode ........................................................................................................... 573 17.8.2 user program mode............................................................................................. 577 17.9 programming/erasing flash memory ............................................................................... 579 17.9.1 program mode ..................................................................................................... 580 17.9.2 program-verify mode.......................................................................................... 581 17.9.3 erase mode .......................................................................................................... 583 17.9.4 erase-verify mode .............................................................................................. 583 17.10 flash memory protection.................................................................................................. 5 85 17.10.1 hardware protection ............................................................................................ 585 17.10.2 software protection.............................................................................................. 586 17.10.3 error protection.................................................................................................... 587 17.11 flash memory emulation in ram ................................................................................... 589 17.11.1 emulation in ram............................................................................................... 589 17.11.2 ram overlap ...................................................................................................... 590 17.12 interrupt handling when programming/erasing flash memory....................................... 591 17.13 flash memory writer mode ............................................................................................. 592 17.13.1 writer mode setting ............................................................................................ 592 17.13.2 socket adapters and memory map ..................................................................... 593 17.13.3 writer mode operation........................................................................................ 594 17.13.4 memory read mode ............................................................................................ 596 17.13.5 auto-program mode ............................................................................................ 600 17.13.6 auto-erase mode................................................................................................. 602 17.13.7 status read mode ................................................................................................ 603 17.13.8 status polling ....................................................................................................... 605 17.13.9 writer mode transition time .............................................................................. 606 17.13.10 notes on memory programming..................................................................... 607 17.14 flash memory programming and erasing precautions..................................................... 608 17.15 notes when converting the f?ztat application software to the mask-rom versions 613 section 18 clock pulse generator .................................................................................. 615 18.1 overview................................................................................................................... ........ 615 18.1.1 block diagram..................................................................................................... 615 18.1.2 register configuration......................................................................................... 616 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xxi of xxiv 18.2 register descriptions ...................................................................................................... .. 616 18.2.1 system clock control register (sckcr) ........................................................... 616 18.3 oscillator................................................................................................................. .......... 617 18.3.1 connecting a crystal resonator........................................................................... 617 18.3.2 external clock input ............................................................................................ 619 18.4 duty adjustment circuit................................................................................................... 6 21 18.5 medium-speed clock divider .......................................................................................... 621 18.6 bus master clock selection circuit .................................................................................. 621 section 19 power-down modes ...................................................................................... 623 19.1 overview................................................................................................................... ........ 623 19.1.1 register configuration......................................................................................... 624 19.2 register descriptions ...................................................................................................... .. 625 19.2.1 standby control register (sbycr) .................................................................... 625 19.2.2 system clock control register (sckcr) ........................................................... 627 19.2.3 module stop control register (mstpcr) .......................................................... 628 19.3 medium-speed mode........................................................................................................ 62 8 19.4 sleep mode ................................................................................................................. ...... 629 19.5 module stop mode ........................................................................................................... 630 19.5.1 module stop mode .............................................................................................. 630 19.5.2 usage notes ......................................................................................................... 631 19.6 software standby mode.................................................................................................... 63 2 19.6.1 software standby mode....................................................................................... 632 19.6.2 clearing software standby mode ........................................................................ 632 19.6.3 setting oscillation stabilization time after clearing software standby mode... 633 19.6.4 software standby mode application example.................................................... 634 19.6.5 usage notes ......................................................................................................... 634 19.7 hardware standby mode .................................................................................................. 635 19.7.1 hardware standby mode ..................................................................................... 635 19.7.2 hardware standby mode timing......................................................................... 635 19.8 clock output disabling function .................................................................................. 636 section 20 electrical characteristics .............................................................................. 637 20.1 electrical characteristics of f-ztat version .................................................................. 637 20.1.1 absolute maximum ratings ................................................................................ 637 20.1.2 dc characteristics ............................................................................................... 638 20.1.3 ac characteristics ............................................................................................... 641 20.1.4 a/d conversion characteristics........................................................................... 646 20.1.5 d/a conversion characteristics........................................................................... 647 20.1.6 flash memory characteristics ............................................................................. 648 20.2 electrical characteristics of ztat, mask rom, and romless versions........................ 650 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xxii of xxiv 20.2.1 absolute maximum ratings ................................................................................ 650 20.2.2 dc characteristics ............................................................................................... 651 20.2.3 ac characteristics ............................................................................................... 656 20.2.4 a/d conversion characteristics........................................................................... 663 20.2.5 d/a conversion characteristics........................................................................... 664 20.3 operation timing........................................................................................................... ... 665 20.3.1 clock timing ....................................................................................................... 665 20.3.2 control signal timing ......................................................................................... 666 20.3.3 bus timing .......................................................................................................... 667 20.3.4 timing for on-chip supporting modules............................................................ 673 20.4 usage note................................................................................................................. ....... 676 appendix a instruction set .............................................................................................. 677 a.1 instruction list ............................................................................................................ ...... 677 a.2 instruction codes ........................................................................................................... ... 701 a.3 operation code map......................................................................................................... 7 15 a.4 number of states required for instruction execution ...................................................... 719 a.5 bus states during instruction execution ........................................................................... 733 a.6 condition code modification ........................................................................................... 747 appendix b internal i/o register ................................................................................... 753 b.1 addresses ................................................................................................................... ....... 753 b.2 functions................................................................................................................... ........ 760 appendix c i/o port block diagrams ........................................................................... 862 c.1 port 1 block diagram ....................................................................................................... 8 62 c.2 port 2 block diagram ....................................................................................................... 8 66 c.3 port 3 block diagram ....................................................................................................... 8 70 c.4 port 4 block diagram ....................................................................................................... 8 73 c.5 port a block diagram....................................................................................................... 8 74 c.6 port b block diagram....................................................................................................... 8 75 c.7 port c block diagram....................................................................................................... 8 76 c.8 port d block diagram....................................................................................................... 8 77 c.9 port e block diagram ....................................................................................................... 8 78 c.10 port f block diagram ....................................................................................................... 879 c.11 port g block diagram....................................................................................................... 887 appendix d pin states ....................................................................................................... 891 d.1 port states in each mode .................................................................................................. 89 1 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xxiii of xxiv appendix e timing of transition to and recovery from hardware standby mode .............................................................................................. 895 appendix f product code lineup ................................................................................. 896 appendix g package dimensions .................................................................................. 897 rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page xxiv of xxiv section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 1 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 1 overview 1.1 overview the h8s/2345 group is a series of microcomputers (mcus: microcomputer units), built around the h8s/2000 cpu, employing renesas? proprietary architecture, and equipped with peripheral functions on-chip. the h8s/2000 cpu has an internal 32-bit architecture, is provided with sixteen 16-bit general registers and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for high-speed operation, and can address a 16-mbyte linear address space. the instruction set is upward-compatible with h8/300 and h8/300h cpu instructions at the object-code level, facilitating migration from the h8/300, h8/300l, or h8/300h series. on-chip peripheral functions required for system configuration include data transfer controller (dtc) bus masters, rom and ram, a 16-bit timer-pulse unit (tpu), an 8-bit timer, a watchdog timer (wdt), a serial communication interface (sci), an a/d converter, a d/a converter, and i/o ports. the on-chip rom * 1 is either single power supply flash memory (f-ztat? * 2 ), prom (ztat ?* 2 ), or mask rom, with a capacity of 128, 96, 64, or 32 kbytes. rom is connected to the cpu via a 16-bit data bus, enabling both byte and word data to be accessed in one state. instruction fetching has been speeded up, and processing speed increased. seven operating modes, modes 1 to 7, are provided, and there is a choice of address space and single-chip mode or external expansion mode. the features of the h8s/2345 group are shown in table 1.1. notes: 1. the h8s/2345, h8s/2344, h8s/2343, and h8s/2341 have on-chip rom. the h8s/2340 does not have on-chip rom. 2. f-ztat is a trademark of renesas technology corp. ztat is a registered trademark of renesas technology corp. section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 2 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 1.1 overview item specification cpu ? general-register machine ? sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) ? high-speed operation suitable for realtime control ? maximum clock rate: 20 mhz ? high-speed arithmetic operations 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract : 50 ns 16 16-bit register-register multiply : 1000 ns 32 16-bit register-register divide : 1000 ns ? instruction set suitable for high-speed operation ? sixty-five basic instructions ? 8/16/32-bit move/arithmetic and logic instructions ? unsigned/signed multiply and divide instructions ? powerful bit-manipulation instructions ? two cpu operating modes ? normal mode: 64-kbyte address space (ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only) ? advanced mode: 16-mbyte address space bus controller ? address space divided into 8 areas, with bus specifications settable independently for each area ? chip select output possible for areas 0 to 3 ? choice of 8-bit or 16-bit access space for each area ? 2-state or 3-state access space can be designated for each area ? number of program wait states can be set for each area ? burst rom directly connectable ? external bus release function data transfer controller (dtc) ? can be activated by internal interrupt or software ? multiple transfers or multiple types of transfer possible for one activation source ? transfer is possible in repeat mode, block transfer mode, etc. ? request can be sent to cpu for interrupt that activated dtc section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 3 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 item specification 16-bit timer-pulse unit (tpu) ? 6-channel 16-bit timer on-chip ? pulse i/o processing capability for up to 16 pins' ? automatic 2-phase encoder count capability 8-bit timer 2 channels ? 8-bit up-counter (external event count capability) ? two time constant registers ? two-channel connection possible watchdog timer ? watchdog timer or interval timer selectable serial communication interface (sci) 2 channels ? asynchronous mode or synchronous mode selectable ? multiprocessor communication function ? smart card interface function a/d converter ? resolution: 10 bits ? input: 8 channels ? high-speed conversion: 6.7 s minimum conversion time (at 20-mhz operation) ? single or scan mode selectable ? sample and hold circuit ? a/d conversion can be activated by external trigger or timer trigger d/a converter ? resolution: 8 bits ? output: 2 channels i/o ports ? 71 i/o pins, 8 input-only pins memory ? flash memory, prom, or mask rom ? high-speed static ram product name rom ram h8s/2345 128 kbytes 4 kbytes h8s/2344 96 kbytes 4 kbytes h8s/2343 64 kbytes 2 kbytes h8s/2341 32 kbytes 2 kbytes h8s/2340 ? 2 kbytes interrupt controller ? nine external interrupt pins (nmi, irq0 to irq7 ) ? 43 internal interrupt sources ? eight priority levels settable section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 4 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 item specification power-down state ? medium-speed mode ? sleep mode ? module stop mode ? software standby mode ? hardware standby mode operating modes ? eight mcu operating modes (f-ztat version) external data bus mode cpu operating mode description on-chip rom initial value maximum value 0? ? ? ? ? 1 2 3 4 advanced disabled 16 bits 16 bits 5 on-chip rom disabled expansion mode 8 bits 16 bits 6 on-chip rom enabled expansion mode enabled 8 bits 16 bits 7 single-chip mode ? ? 8? ? ? ? ? 9 10 advanced boot mode enabled 8 bits 16 bits 11 ? ? 12 ? ? ? ? ? 13 14 advanced enabled 8 bits 16 bits 15 user-programmable mode ?? section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 5 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 item specification operating modes ? seven mcu operating modes (ztat, mask rom, and romless versions) external data bus mode cpu operating mode description on-chip rom initial value maximum value 1 normal on-chip rom disabled expansion mode disabled 8 bits 16 bits 2 * on-chip rom enabled expansion mode enabled 8 bits 16 bits 3 * single-chip mode enabled ? 4 advanced on-chip rom disabled expansion mode disabled 16 bits 16 bits 5 on-chip rom disabled expansion mode disabled 8 bits 16 bits 6 * on-chip rom enabled expansion mode enabled 8 bits 16 bits 7 * single-chip mode enabled ? note: * not used on romless versions. clock pulse generator ? built-in duty correction circuit packages ? 100-pin plastic tqfp (tfp-100b, tfp-100g) ? 100-pin plastic qfp (fp-100a, fp-100b) product lineup model name mask rom version f-ztat ztat rom/ram (bytes) packages hd6432345 hd64f2345 hd6472345 128 k/4 k tfp-100b hd6432344 ? ? 96 k/4 k tfp-100g hd6432343 ? ? 64 k/2 k fp-100a hd6432341 ? ? 32 k/2 k fp-100b hd6412340 (romless versions) ???/2 k section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 6 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 1.2 block diagram figure 1.1 shows an internal block diagram of the h8s/2345 group. pe 7 /d 7 pe 6 /d 6 pe 5 /d 5 pe 4 /d 4 pe 3 /d 3 pe 2 /d 2 pe 1 /d 1 pe 0 /d 0 internal data bus peripheral data bus peripheral address bus pd 7 /d 15 pd 6 /d 14 pd 5 /d 13 pd 4 /d 12 pd 3 /d 11 pd 2 /d 10 pd 1 /d 9 pd 0 /d 8 port d v cc v cc v cc v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss port a pa 3 /a 19 pa 2 /a 18 pa 1 /a 17 pa 0 /a 16 pb 7 /a 15 pb 6 /a 14 pb 5 /a 13 pb 4 /a 12 pb 3 /a 11 pb 2 /a 10 pb 1 /a 9 pb 0 /a 8 pc 7 /a 7 pc 6 /a 6 pc 5 /a 5 pc 4 /a 4 pc 3 /a 3 pc 2 /a 2 pc 1 /a 1 pc 0 /a 0 port b port c port 3 p3 5 / sck1/ irq 5 p3 4 / sck0/ irq 4 p3 3 / rxd1 p3 2 / rxd0 p3 1 / txd1 p3 0 / txd0 p4 7 /an7/ da1 p4 6 /an6/ da0 p4 5 /an5 p4 4 /an4 p4 3 /an3 p4 2 /an2 p4 1 /an1 p4 0 /an0 v ref av cc av ss p2 0 /tioca3 p2 1 /tiocb3 p2 2 /tiocc3 / t m r i 0 p2 3 /tiocd3 / t m c i 0 p2 4 /tioca4 / t m r i 1 p2 5 /tiocb4 / t m c i 1 p2 6 /tioca5 / t m o 0 p2 7 /tiocb5 / t m o 1 p1 0 /tioca0 / a 20 p1 1 /tiocb0 / a 21 p1 2 /tiocc0 / tclka/a 22 p1 3 /tiocd0 / tclkb/a 23 p1 4 /tioca1 p1 5 /tiocb1 /tclkc p1 6 /tioca2 p1 7 /tiocb2 /tclkd pg 4 / cs0 pg 3 / cs1 pg 2 / cs2 pg 1 / cs3 / irq7 pg 0 / adtrg / irq6 port g pf 7 / as pf 5 / rd pf 4 / hwr pf 3 / lwr / irq3 pf 2 / wait / irq2 pf 1 / back / irq1 pf 0 / breq / irq0 port f clock pulse generator rom * 2 ram tpu sci md 2 md 1 md 0 extal xtal stby res wdtovf (fwe) * 1 nmi h8s/2000 cpu dtc interrupt controller port e port 4 port 2 port 1 internal address bus wdt 8-bit timer d/a converter a/d converter bus controller notes: 1. functions as wdtovf pin on ztat, mask rom, and romless versions. functions as fwe pin on f-ztat version, not as wdtovf pin. 2. not present on romless version. figure 1.1 block diagram section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 7 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 1.3 pin description 1.3.1 pin arrangement figures 1.2 and 1.3 show the pin arrangement of the h8s/2345 group. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 p1 2 /tiocc0/tclka/a 22 p1 3 /tiocd0/tclkb/a 23 p1 4 /tioca1 p1 5 /tiocb1/tclkc p1 6 /tioca2 p1 7 /tiocb2/tclkd v ss p3 0 /txd0 p3 1 /txd1 p3 2 /rxd0 p3 3 /rxd1 p3 4 /sck0/ irq4 p3 5 /sck1/ irq5 pe 0 /d 0 pe 1 /d 1 pe 2 /d 2 pe 3 /d 3 v ss pe 4 /d 4 pe 5 /d 5 pe 6 /d 6 pe 7 /d 7 pd 0 /d 8 pd 1 /d 9 pd 2 /d 10 pf 1 / back / irq1 pf 2 / wait / irq2 pf 3 / lwr / irq3 pf 4 / hwr pf 5 / rd pf 6 / as pf 7 / stby nmi res md 2 wdtovf (fwe * ) p2 3 /tiocd3/tmci0 md 1 md 0 p2 2 /tiocc3/tmri0 p2 1 /tiocb3 p2 0 /tioca3 pa 3 /a 19 pa 2 /a 18 pa 1 /a 17 pa 0 /a 16 v ss pb 7 /a 15 pb 6 /a 14 pb 5 /a 13 pb 4 /a 12 pb 3 /a 11 pb 2 /a 10 pb 1 /a 9 pb 0 /a 8 v cc pc 7 /a 7 pc 6 /a 6 pc 5 /a 5 pc 4 /a 4 pc 3 /a 3 pc 2 /a 2 pc 1 /a 1 pc 0 /a 0 v ss pd 7 /d 15 pd 6 /d 14 pd 5 /d 13 pd 4 /d 12 pd 3 /d 11 pf 0 / breq / irq0 av cc v ref p4 0 /an0 p4 1 /an1 p4 2 /an2 p4 3 /an3 p4 4 /an4 p4 5 /an5 p4 6 /an6/da0 p4 7 /an7/da1 av ss v ss p2 4 /tioca4/tmri1 p2 5 /tiocb4/tmci1 p2 6 /tioca5/tmo0 p2 7 /tiocb5/tmo1 pg 0 / adtrg / irq6 pg 1 / cs3 / irq7 pg 2 / cs2 pg 3 / cs1 pg 4 / cs0 v cc p1 0 /tioca0/a 20 p1 1 /tiocb0/a 21 note: * functions as wdtovf pin on ztat, mask rom, and romless versions. functions as fwe pin on f-ztat version, not as wdtovf pin. figure 1.2 pin arrangement (fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g: top view) section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 8 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 p1 0 /tioca0/a 20 p1 1 /tiocb0/a 21 p1 2 /tiocc0/tclka/a 22 p1 3 /tiocd0/tclkb/a 23 p1 4 /tioca1 p1 5 /tiocb1/tclkc p1 6 /tioca2 p1 7 /tiocb2/tclkd v ss p3 0 /txd0 p3 1 /txd1 p3 2 /rxd0 p3 3 /rxd1 p3 4 /sck0/ irq4 p3 5 /sck1/ irq5 pe 0 /d 0 pe 1 /d 1 pe 2 /d 2 pe 3 /d 3 v ss pe 4 /d 4 pe 5 /d 5 pe 6 /d 6 pe 7 /d 7 pd 0 /d 8 pd 1 /d 9 pd 2 /d 10 pd 3 /d 11 pd 4 /d 12 pd 5 /d 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 v ref av cc pf 0 / breq / irq0 pf 1 / back / irq1 pf 2 / wait / irq2 pf 3 / lwr / irq3 pf 4 / hwr pf 5 / rd pf 6 / as pf 7 / stby nmi res md 2 wdtovf (fwe * ) p2 3 /tiocd3/tmci0 md 1 md 0 p2 2 /tiocc3/tmri0 p2 1 /tiocb3 p2 0 /tioca3 pa 3 /a 19 pa 2 /a 18 pa 1 /a 17 pa 0 /a 16 v ss 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 pb 7 /a 15 pb 6 /a 14 pb 5 /a 13 pb 4 /a 12 pb 3 /a 11 pb 2 /a 10 pb 1 /a 9 pb 0 /a 8 v cc pc 7 /a 7 pc 6 /a 6 pc 5 /a 5 pc 4 /a 4 pc 3 /a 3 pc 2 /a 2 pc 1 /a 1 pc 0 /a 0 v ss pd 7 /d 15 pd 6 /d 14 p4 0 /an0 p4 1 /an1 p4 2 /an2 p4 3 /an3 p4 4 /an4 p4 5 /an5 p4 6 /an6/da0 p4 7 /an7/da1 av ss v ss p2 4 /tioca4/tmri1 p2 5 /tiocb4/tmci1 p2 6 /tioca5/tmo0 p2 7 /tiocb5/tmo1 pg 0 / adtrg / irq6 pg 1 / cs3 / irq7 pg 2 / cs2 pg 3 / cs1 pg 4 / cs0 v cc 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 note: * functions as wdtovf pin on ztat, mask rom, and romless versions. functions as fwe pin on f-ztat version, not as wdtovf pin. figure 1.3 pin arrangement (fp-100a: top view) section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 9 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 1.3.2 pin functions in each operating mode table 1.2 shows the pin functions of the h8s/2345 group in each of the operating modes. table 1.2 pin functions in each operating mode pin no. pin name fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g fp-100a mode 1 * 1 mode 2 * 1 * 2 mode 3 * 1 * 2 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 * 2 mode 7 * 2 prom mode * 3 flash memory writer mode * 4 13p1 2 / tiocc0/ tclka p1 2 / tiocc0/ tclka p1 2 / tiocc0/ tclka p1 2 / tiocc0/ tclka/ a 22 p1 2 / tiocc0/ tclka/ a 22 p1 2 / tiocc0/ tclka/ a 22 p1 2 / tiocc0/ tclka nc nc 24p1 3 / tiocd0/ tclkb p1 3 / tiocd0/ tclkb p1 3 / tiocd0/ tclkb p1 3 / tiocd0/ tclkb/ a 23 p1 3 / tiocd0/ tclkb/ a 23 p1 3 / tiocd0/ tclkb/ a 23 p1 3 / tiocd0/ tclkb nc nc 35p1 4 / tioca1 p1 4 / tioca1 p1 4 / tioca1 p1 4 / tioca1 p1 4 / tioca1 p1 4 / tioca1 p1 4 / tioca1 nc nc 46p1 5 / tiocb1/ tclkc p1 5 / tiocb1/ tclkc p1 5 / tiocb1/ tclkc p1 5 / tiocb1/ tclkc p1 5 / tiocb1/ tclkc p1 5 / tiocb1/ tclkc p1 5 / tiocb1/ tclkc nc nc 57p1 6 / tioca2 p1 6 / tioca2 p1 6 / tioca2 p1 6 / tioca2 p1 6 / tioca2 p1 6 / tioca2 p1 6 / tioca2 nc nc 68p1 7 / tiocb2/ tclkd p1 7 / tiocb2/ tclkd p1 7 / tiocb2/ tclkd p1 7 / tiocb2/ tclkd p1 7 / tiocb2/ tclkd p1 7 / tiocb2/ tclkd p1 7 / tiocb2/ tclkd nc nc 79v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss 810p3 0 /txd0 p3 0 /txd0 p3 0 /txd0 p3 0 /txd0 p3 0 /txd0 p3 0 /txd0 p3 0 /txd0 nc nc 911p3 1 /txd1 p3 1 /txd1 p3 1 /txd1 p3 1 /txd1 p3 1 /txd1 p3 1 /txd1 p3 1 /txd1 nc nc 10 12 p3 2 /rxd0 p3 2 /rxd0 p3 2 /rxd0 p3 2 /rxd0 p3 2 /rxd0 p3 2 /rxd0 p3 2 /rxd0 nc nc 11 13 p3 3 /rxd1 p3 3 /rxd1 p3 3 /rxd1 p3 3 /rxd1 p3 3 /rxd1 p3 3 /rxd1 p3 3 /rxd1 nc nc 12 14 p3 4 / sck0/ irq4 p3 4 / sck0/ irq4 p3 4 / sck0/ irq4 p3 4 / sck0/ irq4 p3 4 / sck0/ irq4 p3 4 / sck0/ irq4 p3 4 / sck0/ irq4 nc nc 13 15 p3 5 / sck1/ irq5 p3 5 / sck1/ irq5 p3 5 / sck1/ irq5 p3 5 / sck1/ irq5 p3 5 / sck1/ irq5 p3 5 / sck1/ irq5 p3 5 / sck1/ irq5 nc nc 14 16 pe 0 /d 0 pe 0 /d 0 pe 0 pe 0 /d 0 pe 0 /d 0 pe 0 /d 0 pe 0 nc nc 15 17 pe 1 /d 1 pe 1 /d 1 pe 1 pe 1 /d 1 pe 1 /d 1 pe 1 /d 1 pe 1 nc nc 16 18 pe 2 /d 2 pe 2 /d 2 pe 2 pe 2 /d 2 pe 2 /d 2 pe 2 /d 2 pe 2 nc nc 17 19 pe 3 /d 3 pe 3 /d 3 pe 3 pe 3 /d 3 pe 3 /d 3 pe 3 /d 3 pe 3 nc nc section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 10 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin no. pin name fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g fp-100a mode 1 * 1 mode 2 * 1 * 2 mode 3 * 1 * 2 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 * 2 mode 7 * 2 prom mode * 3 flash memory writer mode * 4 18 20 v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss 19 21 pe 4 /d 4 pe 4 /d 4 pe 4 pe 4 /d 4 pe 4 /d 4 pe 4 /d 4 pe 4 nc nc 20 22 pe 5 /d 5 pe 5 /d 5 pe 5 pe 5 /d 5 pe 5 /d 5 pe 5 /d 5 pe 5 nc nc 21 23 pe 6 /d 6 pe 6 /d 6 pe 6 pe 6 /d 6 pe 6 /d 6 pe 6 /d 6 pe 6 nc nc 22 24 pe 7 /d 7 pe 7 /d 7 pe 7 pe 7 /d 7 pe 7 /d 7 pe 7 /d 7 pe 7 nc nc 23 25 d 8 d 8 pd 0 d 8 d 8 d 8 pd 0 eo 0 fo 0 24 26 d 9 d 9 pd 1 d 9 d 9 d 9 pd 1 eo 1 fo 1 25 27 d 10 d 10 pd 2 d 10 d 10 d 10 pd 2 eo 2 fo 2 26 28 d 11 d 11 pd 3 d 11 d 11 d 11 pd 3 eo 3 fo 3 27 29 d 12 d 12 pd 4 d 12 d 12 d 12 pd 4 eo 4 fo 4 28 30 d 13 d 13 pd 5 d 13 d 13 d 13 pd 5 eo 5 fo 5 29 31 d 14 d 14 pd 6 d 14 d 14 d 14 pd 6 eo 6 fo 6 30 32 d 15 d 15 pd 7 d 15 d 15 d 15 pd 7 eo 7 fo 7 31 33 v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss 32 34 a 0 pc 0 /a 0 pc 0 a 0 a 0 pc 0 /a 0 pc 0 ea 0 fa 0 33 35 a 1 pc 1 /a 1 pc 1 a 1 a 1 pc 1 /a 1 pc 1 ea 1 fa 1 34 36 a 2 pc 2 /a 2 pc 2 a 2 a 2 pc 2 /a 2 pc 2 ea 2 fa 2 35 37 a 3 pc 3 /a 3 pc 3 a 3 a 3 pc 3 /a 3 pc 3 ea 3 fa 3 36 38 a 4 pc 4 /a 4 pc 4 a 4 a 4 pc 4 /a 4 pc 4 ea 4 fa 4 37 39 a 5 pc 5 /a 5 pc 5 a 5 a 5 pc 5 /a 5 pc 5 ea 5 fa 5 38 40 a 6 pc 6 /a 6 pc 6 a 6 a 6 pc 6 /a 6 pc 6 ea 6 fa 6 39 41 a 7 pc 7 /a 7 pc 7 a 7 a 7 pc 7 /a 7 pc 7 ea 7 fa 7 40 42 v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc 41 43 a 8 pb 0 /a 8 pb 0 a 8 a 8 pb 0 /a 8 pb 0 ea 8 fa 8 42 44 a 9 pb 1 /a 9 pb 1 a 9 a 9 pb 1 /a 9 pb 1 oe fa 9 43 45 a 10 pb 2 /a 10 pb 2 a 10 a 10 pb 2 /a 10 pb 2 ea 10 fa 10 44 46 a 11 pb 3 /a 11 pb 3 a 11 a 11 pb 3 /a 11 pb 3 ea 11 fa 11 45 47 a 12 pb 4 /a 12 pb 4 a 12 a 12 pb 4 /a 12 pb 4 ea 12 fa 12 46 48 a 13 pb 5 /a 13 pb 5 a 13 a 13 pb 5 /a 13 pb 5 ea 13 fa 13 47 49 a 14 pb 6 /a 14 pb 6 a 14 a 14 pb 6 /a 14 pb 6 ea 14 fa 14 48 50 a 15 pb 7 /a 15 pb 7 a 15 a 15 pb 7 /a 15 pb 7 ea 15 fa 15 49 51 v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss 50 52 pa 0 pa 0 pa 0 a 16 a 16 pa 0 /a 16 pa 0 ea 16 fa 16 section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 11 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin no. pin name fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g fp-100a mode 1 * 1 mode 2 * 1 * 2 mode 3 * 1 * 2 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 * 2 mode 7 * 2 prom mode * 3 flash memory writer mode * 4 51 53 pa 1 pa 1 pa 1 a 17 a 17 pa 1 /a 17 pa 1 v cc nc 52 54 pa 2 pa 2 pa 2 a 18 a 18 pa 2 /a 18 pa 2 v cc nc 53 55 pa 3 pa 3 pa 3 a 19 a 19 pa 3 /a 19 pa 3 nc nc 54 56 p2 0 / tioca3 p2 0 / tioca3 p2 0 / tioca3 p2 0 / tioca3 p2 0 / tioca3 p2 0 / tioca3 p2 0 / tioca3 nc oe 55 57 p2 1 / tiocb3 p2 1 / tiocb3 p2 1 / tiocb3 p2 1 / tiocb3 p2 1 / tiocb3 p2 1 / tiocb3 p2 1 / tiocb3 nc ce 56 58 p2 2 / tiocc3/ tmri0 p2 2 / tiocc3/ tmri0 p2 2 / tiocc3/ tmri0 p2 2 / tiocc3/ tmri0 p2 2 / tiocc3/ tmri0 p2 2 / tiocc3/ tmri0 p2 2 / tiocc3/ tmri0 nc we 57 59 md 0 md 0 md 0 md 0 md 0 md 0 md 0 v ss v ss 58 60 md 1 md 1 md 1 md 1 md 1 md 1 md 1 v ss v ss 59 61 p2 3 / tiocd3/ tmci0 p2 3 / tiocd3/ tmci0 p2 3 / tiocd3/ tmci0 p2 3 / tiocd3/ tmci0 p2 3 / tiocd3/ tmci0 p2 3 / tiocd3/ tmci0 p2 3 / tiocd3/ tmci0 nc v cc 60 62 wdtovf wdtovf wdtovf wdtovf (fwe * 5 ) wdtovf (fwe * 5 ) wdtovf (fwe * 5 ) wdtovf (fwe * 5 ) nc fwe 61 63 md 2 md 2 md 2 md 2 md 2 md 2 md 2 v ss v ss 62 64 res res res res res res res v pp res 63 65 nmi nmi nmi nmi nmi nmi nmi ea 9 v cc 64 66 stby stby stby stby stby stby stby v ss v cc 65 67 v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc 66 68 xtal xtal xtal xtal xtal xtal xtal nc xtal 67 69 extal extal extal extal extal extal extal nc extal 68 70 v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss 69 71 pf 7 / as as pf 6 as as as pf 6 nc nc 71 73 rd rd pf 5 rd rd rd pf 5 nc nc 72 74 hwr hwr pf 4 hwr hwr hwr pf 4 nc nc 73 75 lwr lwr pf 3 / irq3 lwr lwr lwr pf 3 / irq3 nc nc 74 76 pf 2 / wait / irq2 pf 2 / wait / irq2 pf 2 / irq2 pf 2 / wait / irq2 pf 2 / wait / irq2 pf 2 / wait / irq2 pf 2 / irq2 ce v cc 75 77 pf 1 / back / irq1 pf 1 / back / irq1 pf 1 / irq1 pf 1 / back / irq1 pf 1 / back / irq1 pf 1 / back / irq1 pf 1 / irq1 pgm v ss section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 12 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin no. pin name fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g fp-100a mode 1 * 1 mode 2 * 1 * 2 mode 3 * 1 * 2 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 * 2 mode 7 * 2 prom mode * 3 flash memory writer mode * 4 76 78 pf 0 / breq / irq0 pf 0 / breq / irq0 pf 0 / irq0 pf 0 / breq / irq0 pf 0 / breq / irq0 pf 0 / breq / irq0 pf 0 / irq0 nc v ss 77 79 av cc av cc av cc av cc av cc av cc av cc v cc v cc 78 80 v ref v ref v ref v ref v ref v ref v ref v cc v cc 79 81 p4 0 /an0 p4 0 /an0 p4 0 /an0 p4 0 /an0 p4 0 /an0 p4 0 /an0 p4 0 /an0 nc nc 80 82 p4 1 /an1 p4 1 /an1 p4 1 /an1 p4 1 /an1 p4 1 /an1 p4 1 /an1 p4 1 /an1 nc nc 81 83 p4 2 /an2 p4 2 /an2 p4 2 /an2 p4 2 /an2 p4 2 /an2 p4 2 /an2 p4 2 /an2 nc nc 82 84 p4 3 /an3 p4 3 /an3 p4 3 /an3 p4 3 /an3 p4 3 /an3 p4 3 /an3 p4 3 /an3 nc nc 83 85 p4 4 /an4 p4 4 /an4 p4 4 /an4 p4 4 /an4 p4 4 /an4 p4 4 /an4 p4 4 /an4 nc nc 84 86 p4 5 /an5 p4 5 /an5 p4 5 /an5 p4 5 /an5 p4 5 /an5 p4 5 /an5 p4 5 /an5 nc nc 85 87 p4 6 /an6/ da0 p4 6 /an6/ da0 p4 6 /an6/ da0 p4 6 /an6/ da0 p4 6 /an6/ da0 p4 6 /an6/ da0 p4 6 /an6/ da0 nc nc 86 88 p4 7 /an7/ da1 p4 7 /an7/ da1 p4 7 /an7/ da1 p4 7 /an7/ da1 p4 7 /an7/ da1 p4 7 /an7/ da1 p4 7 /an7/ da1 nc nc 87 89 av ss av ss av ss av ss av ss av ss av ss v ss v ss 88 90 v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss 89 91 p2 4 / tioca4/ tmri1 p2 4 / tioca4/ tmri1 p2 4 / tioca4/ tmri1 p2 4 / tioca4/ tmri1 p2 4 / tioca4/ tmri1 p2 4 / tioca4/ tmri1 p2 4 / tioca4/ tmri1 nc nc 90 92 p2 5 / tiocb4/ tmci1 p2 5 / tiocb4/ tmci1 p2 5 / tiocb4/ tmci1 p2 5 / tiocb4/ tmci1 p2 5 / tiocb4/ tmci1 p2 5 / tiocb4/ tmci1 p2 5 / tiocb4/ tmci1 nc v cc 91 93 p2 6 / tioca5/ tmo0 p2 6 / tioca5/ tmo0 p2 6 / tioca5/ tmo0 p2 6 / tioca5/ tmo0 p2 6 / tioca5/ tmo0 p2 6 / tioca5/ tmo0 p2 6 / tioca5/ tmo0 nc nc 92 94 p2 7 / tiocb5/ tmo1 p2 7 / tiocb5/ tmo1 p2 7 / tiocb5/ tmo1 p2 7 / tiocb5/ tmo1 p2 7 / tiocb5/ tmo1 p2 7 / tiocb5/ tmo1 p2 7 / tiocb5/ tmo1 nc nc 93 95 pg 0 / irq6 / adtrg pg 0 / irq6 / adtrg pg 0 / irq6 / adtrg pg 0 / irq6 / adtrg pg 0 / irq6 / adtrg pg 0 / irq6 / adtrg pg 0 / irq6 / adtrg nc nc 94 96 pg 1 / irq7 pg 1 / irq7 pg 1 / irq7 pg 1 / cs3 / irq7 pg 1 / cs3 / irq7 pg 1 / cs3 / irq7 pg 1 / irq7 nc nc 95 97 pg 2 pg 2 pg 2 pg 2 / cs2 pg 2 / cs2 pg 2 / cs2 pg 2 nc nc 96 98 pg 3 pg 3 pg 3 pg 3 / cs1 pg 3 / cs1 pg 3 / cs1 pg 3 nc nc 97 99 pg 4 / cs0 pg 4 / cs0 pg 4 pg 4 / cs0 pg 4 / cs0 pg 4 / cs0 pg 4 nc nc 98 100 v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 13 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin no. pin name fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g fp-100a mode 1 * 1 mode 2 * 1 * 2 mode 3 * 1 * 2 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 * 2 mode 7 * 2 prom mode * 3 flash memory writer mode * 4 99 1 p1 0 / tioca0 p1 0 / tioca0 p1 0 / tioca0 p1 0 / tioca0/ a 20 p1 0 / tioca0/ a 20 p1 0 / tioca0/ a 20 p1 0 / tioca0 nc nc 100 2 p1 1 / tiocb0 p1 1 / tiocb0 p1 1 / tiocb0 p1 1 / tiocb0/ a 21 p1 1 / tiocb0/ a 21 p1 1 / tiocb0/ a 21 p1 1 / tiocb0 nc nc notes: 1. modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. 2. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. 3. ztat version only. 4. f-ztat version only. 5. the fwe pin is only used on the f-ztat version. it cannot be used as a wdtovf pin on the f-ztat version. section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 14 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 1.3.3 pin functions table 1.3 outlines the pin functions of the h8s/2345 group. table 1.3 pin functions pin no. type symbol fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g fp-100a i/o name and function power supply v cc 40, 65, 98 42, 67, 100 input power supply: for connection to the power supply. all v cc pins should be connected to the system power supply. v ss 7, 18, 31, 49, 68, 88 9, 20, 33, 51, 70, 90 input ground: for connection to ground (0 v). all v ss pins should be connected to the system power supply (0 v). clock xtal 66 68 input connects to a crystal oscillator. see section 18, clock pulse generator, for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. extal 67 69 input connects to a crystal oscillator. the extal pin can also input an external clock. see section 18, clock pulse generator, for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 15 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin no. type symbol fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g fp-100a i/o name and function operating mode control md 2 to md 0 61, 58, 57 63, 60, 59 input mode pins: these pins set the operating mode. the relation between the settings of pins md 2 to md 0 and the operating mode is shown below. these pins should not be changed while the h8s/2345 group is operating. ? f-ztat version fwe md 2 md 1 md 0 operating mode 0000 ? 1 ? 10 ? 1 ? 1 0 0 mode 4 1 mode 5 1 0 mode 6 1 mode 7 1000 ? 1 ? 1 0 mode 10 1 mode 11 100 ? 1 ? 1 0 mode 14 1 mode 15 section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 16 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin no. type symbol fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g fp-100a i/o name and function operating mode control md 2 to md 0 61, 58, 57 63, 60, 59 input ? ztat, mask rom, and romless versions md 2 md 1 md 0 operating mode 000 ? 1 mode 1 1 0 mode 2 * 1 mode 3 * 100m ode 4 1 mode 5 1 0 mode 6 * 1 mode 7 * note: * not used on romless version. system control res 62 64 input reset input: when this pin is driven low, the chip is reset. the type of reset can be selected according to the nmi input level. at power-on, the nmi pin input level should be set high. stby 64 66 input standby: when this pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. breq 76 78 input bus request: used by an external bus master to issue a bus request to the h8s/2345 group. back 75 77 output bus request acknowledge: indicates that the bus has been released to an external bus master. fwe * 1 60 62 input flash write enable: enables or disables writing to flash memory. section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 17 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin no. type symbol fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g fp-100a i/o name and function interrupts nmi 63 65 input nonmaskable interrupt: requests a nonmaskable interrupt. when this pin is not used, it should be fixed high. irq7 to irq0 94, 93, 13, 12, 73 to 76 96, 95, 15, 14, 75 to 78 input interrupt request 7 to 0: these pins request a maskable interrupt. address bus a 23 to a 0 2, 1, 100, 99, 53 to 50, 48 to 41, 39 to 32 4 to 1, 55 to 52, 50 to 43, 41 to 34 output address bus: these pins output an address. data bus d 15 to d 0 30 to 19, 17 to 14 32 to 21, 19 to 16 i/o data bus: these pins constitute a bidirectional data bus. bus control cs3 to cs0 94 to 97 96 to 99 output chip select: signals for selecting areas 3 to 0. as 70 72 output address strobe: when this pin is low, it indicates that address output on the address bus is enabled. rd 71 73 output read: when this pin is low, it indicates that the external address space can be read. hwr 72 74 output high write: a strobe signal that writes to external space and indicates that the upper half (d 15 to d 8 ) of the data bus is enabled. lwr 73 75 output low write: a strobe signal that writes to external space and indicates that the lower half (d 7 to d 0 ) of the data bus is enabled. wait 74 76 input wait: requests insertion of a wait state in the bus cycle when accessing external 3-state address space. section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 18 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin no. type symbol fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g fp-100a i/o name and function tclkd to tclka 6, 4, 2, 1 8, 6, 4, 3 input clock input d to a: these pins input an external clock. 16-bit timer- pulse unit (tpu) tioca0, tiocb0, tiocc0, tiocd0 99, 100, 1, 2 1 to 4 i/o input capture/ output compare match a0 to d0: the tgr0a to tgr0d input capture input or output compare output, or pwm output pins. tioca1, tiocb1 3, 4 5, 6 i/o input capture/ output compare match a1 and b1: the tgr1a and tgr1b input capture input or output compare output, or pwm output pins. tioca2, tiocb2 5, 6 7, 8 i/o input capture/ output compare match a2 and b2: the tgr2a and tgr2b input capture input or output compare output, or pwm output pins. tioca3, tiocb3, tiocc3, tiocd3 54 to 56, 59 56 to 58, 61 i/o input capture/ output compare match a3 to d3: the tgr3a to tgr3d input capture input or output compare output, or pwm output pins. tioca4, tiocb4 89, 90 91, 92 i/o input capture/ output compare match a4 and b4: the tgr4a and tgr4b input capture input or output compare output, or pwm output pins. tioca5, tiocb5 91, 92 93, 94 i/o input capture/ output compare match a5 and b5: the tgr5a and tgr5b input capture input or output compare output, or pwm output pins. 8-bit timer tmo0, tmo1 91, 92 93, 94 output compare match output: the compare match output pins. tmci0, tmci1 59, 90 61, 92 input counter external clock input: input pins for the external clock input to the counter. tmri0, tmri1 56, 89 58, 91 input counter external reset input: the counter reset input pins. watchdog timer (wdt) wdtovf * 2 60 62 output watchdog timer overflows: the counter overflows signal output pin in watchdog timer mode. section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 19 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin no. type symbol fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g fp-100a i/o name and function txd1, txd0 9, 8 11, 10 output transmit data (channel 0, 1): data output pins. rxd1, rxd0 11, 10 13, 12 input receive data (channel 0, 1): data input pins. serial communication interface (sci) smart card interface sck1 sck0 13, 12 15, 14 i/o serial clock (channel 0, 1): clock i/o pins. a/d converter an7 to an0 86 to 79 88 to 81 input analog 7 to 0: analog input pins. adtrg 93 95 input a/d conversion external trigger input: pin for input of an external trigger to start a/d conversion. d/a converter da1, da0 86, 85 88, 87 output analog output: d/a converter analog output pins. a/d converter and d/a converters av cc 77 79 input this is the power supply pin for the a/d converter and d/a converter. when the a/d converter and d/a converter are not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+5 v). av ss 87 89 input this is the ground pin for the a/d converter and d/a converter. this pin should be connected to the system power supply (0 v). v ref 78 80 input this is the reference voltage input pin for the a/d converter and d/a converter. when the a/d converter and d/a converter are not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+5 v). i/o ports p1 7 to p1 0 6 to 1, 100, 99 8 to 1 i/o port 1: an 8-bit i/o port. input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port 1 data direction register (p1ddr). p2 7 to p2 0 92 to 89, 59, 56 to 54 94 to 91, 61, 58 to 56 i/o port 2: an 8-bit i/o port. input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port 2 data direction register (p2ddr). section 1 overview rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 20 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin no. type symbol fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g fp-100a i/o name and function i/o ports p3 5 to p3 0 13 to 8 15 to 10 i/o port 3: a 6-bit i/o port. input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port 3 data direction register (p3ddr). p4 7 to p4 0 86 to 79 88 to 81 input port 4: an 8-bit input port. pa 3 to pa 0 53 to 50 55 to 52 i/o port a: an 4-bit i/o port. input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port a data direction register (paddr). pb 7 to pb 0 48 to 41 50 to 43 i/o port b: an 8-bit i/o port. input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port b data direction register (pbddr). pc 7 to pc 0 39 to 32 41 to 34 i/o port c: an 8-bit i/o port. input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port c data direction register (pcddr). pd 7 to pd 0 30 to 23 32 to 25 i/o port d: an 8-bit i/o port. input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port d data direction register (pdddr). pe 7 to pe 0 22 to 19, 17 to 14 24 to 21, 19 to 16 i/o port e: an 8-bit i/o port. input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port e data direction register (peddr). pf 7 to pf 0 69 to 76 71 to 78 i/o port f: an 8-bit i/o port. input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port f data direction register (pfddr). pg 4 to pg 0 97 to 93 99 to 95 i/o port g: a 5-bit i/o port. input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port g data direction register (pgddr). notes: 1. f-ztat version only. 2. applies to ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 21 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 2 cpu 2.1 overview the h8s/2000 cpu is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with the h8/300 and h8/300h cpus. the h8s/2000 cpu has sixteen 16-bit general registers, can address a 16-mbyte (architecturally 4-gbyte) linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control. 2.1.1 features the h8s/2000 cpu has the following features. ? upward-compatible with h8/300 and h8/300h cpus ? can execute h8/300 and h8/300h object programs ? general-register architecture ? sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) ? sixty-five basic instructions ? 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions ? multiply and divide instructions ? powerful bit-manipulation instructions ? eight addressing modes ? register direct [rn] ? register indirect [@ern] ? register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ern) or @(d:32,ern)] ? register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ern+ or @?ern] ? absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32] ? immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32] ? program-counter relative [@(d:8,pc) or @(d:16,pc)] ? memory indirect [@@aa:8] ? 16-mbyte address space ? program: 16 mbytes ? data: 16 mbytes (4 gbytes architecturally) section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 22 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? high-speed operation ? all frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states ? maximum clock rate : 20 mhz ? 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract : 50 ns ? 8 8-bit register-register multiply : 600 ns ? 16 8-bit register-register divide : 600 ns ? 16 16-bit register-register multiply : 1000 ns ? 32 16-bit register-register divide : 1000 ns ? two cpu operating modes ? normal mode (supported on ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only) ? advanced mode ? power-down state ? transition to power-down state by sleep instruction ? cpu clock speed selection 2.1.2 differences between h8s/2600 cpu and h8s/2000 cpu the differences between the h8s/2600 cpu and the h8s/2000 cpu are as shown below. ? register configuration the mac register is supported only by the h8s/2600 cpu. ? basic instructions the four instructions mac, clrmac, ldmac, and stmac are supported only by the h8s/2600 cpu. ? number of execution states the number of execution states of the mulxu and mulxs instructions. internal operation instruction mnemonic h8s/2600 h8s/2000 mulxu mulxu.b rs, rd 3 12 mulxu.w rs, erd 4 20 mulxs mulxs.b rs, rd 4 13 mulxs.w rs, erd 5 21 there are also differences in the address space, ccr and exr register functions, power-down state, etc., depending on the product. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 23 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.1.3 differences from h8/300 cpu in comparison to the h8/300 cpu, the h8s/2000 cpu has the following enhancements. ? more general registers and control registers ? eight 16-bit expanded registers, and one 8-bit control register, have been added. ? expanded address space ? normal mode supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the h8/300 cpu. (ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only) ? advanced mode supports a maximum 16-mbyte address space. ? enhanced addressing ? the addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-mbyte address space. ? enhanced instructions ? addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. ? signed multiply and divide instructions have been added. ? two-bit shift instructions have been added. ? instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. ? a test and set instruction has been added. ? higher speed ? basic instructions execute twice as fast. 2.1.4 differences from h8/300h cpu in comparison to the h8/300h cpu, the h8s/2000 cpu has the following enhancements. ? additional control register ? one 8-bit control register has been added. ? enhanced instructions ? addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. ? two-bit shift instructions have been added. ? instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. ? a test and set instruction has been added. ? higher speed ? basic instructions execute twice as fast. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 24 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.2 cpu operating modes the h8s/2000 cpu has two operating modes: normal and advanced. normal mode supports a maximum 64-kbyte address space. advanced mode supports a maximum 16-mbyte total address space (architecturally a maximum 16-mbyte program area and a maximum of 4 gbytes for program and data areas combined). the mode is selected by the mode pins of the microcontroller. cpu operating modes normal mode (supported on ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only) advanced mode maximum 64 kbytes, program and data areas combined maximum 16-mbytes for program and data areas combined figure 2.1 cpu operating modes (1) normal mode (ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only) the exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the h8/300 cpu. address space: a maximum address space of 64 kbytes can be accessed. extended registers (en): the extended registers (e0 to e7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers. when en is used as a 16-bit register it can contain any value, even when the corresponding general register (rn) is used as an address register. if the general register is referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-decrement (@?rn) or post-increment (@rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the value in the corresponding extended register (en) will be affected. instruction set: all instructions and addressing modes can be used. only the lower 16 bits of effective addresses (ea) are valid. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 25 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 exception vector table and memory indirect branch addresses: in normal mode the top area starting at h'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. one branch address is stored per 16 bits. the configuration of the exception vector table in normal mode is shown in figure 2.2. for details of the exception vector table, see section 4, exception handling. h'0000 h'0001 h'0002 h'0003 h'0004 h'0005 h'0006 h'0007 h'0008 h'0009 h'000a h'000b power-on reset exception vector manual reset exception vector exception vector 1 exception vector 2 exception vector table (reserved for system use) figure 2.2 exception vector table (normal mode) the memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the jmp and jsr instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. in normal mode the operand is a 16-bit word operand, providing a 16- bit branch address. branch addresses can be stored in the top area from h'0000 to h'00ff. note that this area is also used for the exception vector table. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 26 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 stack structure: when the program counter (pc) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the pc, condition-code register (ccr), and extended control register (exr) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.3. when exr is invalid, it is not pushed onto the stack. for details, see section 4, exception handling. (a) subroutine branch (b) exception handling pc (16 bits) exr * 1 reserved * 1 * 3 ccr ccr * 3 pc (16 bits) sp sp notes: 1. 2. 3. when exr is not used it is not stored on the stack. sp when exr is not used. ignored when returning. (sp ) * 2 figure 2.3 stack structure in normal mode (2) advanced mode address space: linear access is provided to a 16-mbyte maximum address space (architecturally a maximum 16-mbyte program area and a maximum 4-gbyte data area, with a maximum of 4 gbytes for program and data areas combined). extended registers (en): the extended registers (e0 to e7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers or address registers. instruction set: all instructions and addressing modes can be used. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 27 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 exception vector table and memory indirect branch addresses: in advanced mode the top area starting at h'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector table in units of 32 bits. in each 32 bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address is stored in the lower 24 bits (figure 2.4). for details of the exception vector table, see section 4, exception handling. h'00000000 h'00000003 h'00000004 h'0000000b h'0000000c exception vector table reserved power-on reset exception vector (reserved for system use) reserved exception vector 1 reserved manual reset exception vector h'00000010 h'00000008 h'00000007 figure 2.4 exception vector table (advanced mode) the memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the jmp and jsr instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. in advanced mode the operand is a 32-bit longword operand, providing a 32-bit branch address. the upper 8 bits of these 32 bits are a reserved area that is regarded as h'00. branch addresses can be stored in the area from h'00000000 to h'000000ff. note that the first part of this range is also the exception vector table. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 28 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 stack structure: in advanced mode, when the program counter (pc) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the pc, condition-code register (ccr), and extended control register (exr) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.5. when exr is invalid, it is not pushed onto the stack. for details, see section 4, exception handling. (a) subroutine branch (b) exception handling pc (24 bits) exr * 1 reserved * 1 * 3 ccr pc (24 bits) sp sp notes: 1. 2. 3. when exr is not used it is not stored on the stack. sp when exr is not used. ignored when returning. (sp ) * 2 reserved figure 2.5 stack structure in advanced mode section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 29 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.3 address space figure 2.6 shows a memory map of the h8s/2000 cpu. the h8s/2000 cpu provides linear access to a maximum 64-kbyte address space in normal mode * , and a maximum 16-mbyte (architecturally 4-gbyte) address space in advanced mode. note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. (b) advanced mode h'0000 note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. h'ffff h'00000000 h'ffffffff h'00ffffff (a) normal mode * data area program area cannot be used by the h8s/2345 group figure 2.6 memory map section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 30 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.4 register configuration 2.4.1 overview the cpu has the internal registers shown in figure 2.7. there are two types of registers: general registers and control registers. t ???? i2 i1 i0 exr 76543210 pc 23 0 15 07 07 0 e0 e1 e2 e3 e4 e5 e6 e7 r0h r1h r2h r3h r4h r5h r6h r7h r0l r1l r2l r3l r4l r5l r6l r7l general registers (rn) and extended registers (en) control registers (cr) legend: stack pointer program counter extended control register trace bit interrupt mask bits condition-code register interrupt mask bit user bit or interrupt mask bit * sp: pc: exr: t: i2 to i0: ccr: i: ui: note: * in the h8s/2345 group, this bit cannot be used as an interrupt mask. er0 er1 er2 er3 er4 er5 er6 er7 (sp) i ui hunzvc ccr 76543210 half-carry flag user bit negative flag zero flag overflow flag carry flag h: u: n: z: v: c: figure 2.7 cpu registers section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 31 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.4.2 general registers the cpu has eight 32-bit general registers. these general registers are all functionally alike and can be used as both address registers and data registers. when a general register is used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. when the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by the letters er (er0 to er7). the er registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters e (e0 to e7) and r (r0 to r7). these registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 16-bit registers. the e registers (e0 to e7) are also referred to as extended registers. the r registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters rh (r0h to r7h) and rl (r0l to r7l). these registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 8-bit registers. figure 2.8 illustrates the usage of the general registers. the usage of each register can be selected independently. address registers 32-bit registers 16-bit registers 8-bit registers er registers (er0 to er7) e registers (extended registers) (e0 to e7) r registers (r0 to r7) rh registers (r0h to r7h) rl registers (r0l to r7l) figure 2.8 usage of general registers general register er7 has the function of stack pointer (sp) in addition to its general-register function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. figure 2.9 shows the stack. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 32 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 free area stack area sp (er7) figure 2.9 stack 2.4.3 control registers the control registers are the 24-bit program counter (pc), 8-bit extended control register (exr), and 8-bit condition-code register (ccr). (1) program counter (pc) this 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the cpu will execute. the length of all cpu instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant pc bit is ignored. (when an instruction is fetched, the least significant pc bit is regarded as 0.) (2) extended control register (exr) this 8-bit register contains the trace bit (t) and three interrupt mask bits (i2 to i0). bit 7?trace bit (t): selects trace mode. when this bit is cleared to 0, instructions are executed in sequence. when this bit is set to 1, a trace exception is generated each time an instruction is executed. bits 6 to 3?reserved: these bits are reserved. they are always read as 1. bits 2 to 0?interrupt mask bits (i2 to i0): these bits designate the interrupt mask level (0 to 7). for details, refer to section 5, interrupt controller. operations can be performed on the exr bits by the ldc, stc, andc, orc, and xorc instructions. all interrupts, including nmi, are disabled for three states after one of these instructions is executed, except for stc. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 33 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (3) condition-code register (ccr) this 8-bit register contains internal cpu status information, including an interrupt mask bit (i) and half-carry (h), negative (n), zero (z), overflow (v), and carry (c) flags. bit 7?interrupt mask bit (i): masks interrupts other than nmi when set to 1. (nmi is accepted regardless of the i bit setting.) the i bit is set to 1 by hardware at the start of an exception- handling sequence. for details, refer to section 5, interrupt controller. bit 6?user bit or interrupt mask bit (ui): can be written and read by software using the ldc, stc, andc, orc, and xorc instructions. with the h8s/2345 group, this bit cannot be used as an interrupt mask bit. bit 5?half-carry flag (h): when the add.b, addx.b, sub.b, subx.b, cmp.b, or neg.b instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. when the add.w, sub.w, cmp.w, or neg.w instruction is executed, the h flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. when the add.l, sub.l, cmp.l, or neg.l instruction is executed, the h flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise. bit 4?user bit (u): can be written and read by software using the ldc, stc, andc, orc, and xorc instructions. bit 3?negative flag (n): stores the value of the most significant bit (sign bit) of data. bit 2?zero flag (z): set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data. bit 1?overflow flag (v): set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 at other times. bit 0?carry flag (c): set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. used by: ? add instructions, to indicate a carry ? subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow ? shift and rotate instructions, to store the value shifted out of the end bit the carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions. some instructions leave some or all of the flag bits unchanged. for the action of each instruction on the flag bits, refer to appendix a.1, instruction list. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 34 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 operations can be performed on the ccr bits by the ldc, stc, andc, orc, and xorc instructions. the n, z, v, and c flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch (bcc) instructions. 2.4.4 initial register values reset exception handling loads the cpu's program counter (pc) from the vector table, clears the trace bit in exr to 0, and sets the interrupt mask bits in ccr and exr to 1. the other ccr bits and the general registers are not initialized. in particular, the stack pointer (er7) is not initialized. the stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an mov.l instruction executed immediately after a reset. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 35 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.5 data formats the cpu can process 1-bit, 4-bit (bcd), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data. bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ? , 7) of byte operand data. the daa and das decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit bcd data. 2.5.1 general register data formats figure 2.10 shows the data formats in general registers. 76543210 don ? t care 70 don ? t care 76543210 43 70 70 don ? t care upper lower lsb msb lsb data type register number data format 1-bit data 1-bit data 4-bit bcd data 4-bit bcd data byte data byte data rnh rnl rnh rnl rnh rnl msb don ? t care upper lower 43 70 don ? t care 70 don ? t care 70 figure 2.10 general register data formats section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 36 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 0 msb lsb 15 word data word data rn en 0 lsb 15 16 msb 31 en rn general register er general register e general register r general register rh general register rl most significant bit least significant bit legend: ern: en: rn: rnh: rnl: msb: lsb: 0 msb lsb 15 longword data ern data type register number data format figure 2.10 general register data formats (cont) section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 37 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.5.2 memory data formats figure 2.11 shows the data formats in memory. the cpu can access word data and longword data in memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. if an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. this also applies to instruction fetches. 76543210 70 msb lsb msb lsb msb lsb data type data format 1-bit data byte data word data longword data address address l address l address 2m address 2m + 1 address 2n address 2n + 1 address 2n + 2 address 2n + 3 figure 2.11 memory data formats when er7 is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word size or longword size. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 38 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.6 instruction set 2.6.1 overview the h8s/2000 cpu has 65 types of instructions. the instructions are classified by function in table 2.1. table 2.1 instruction classification function instructions size types data transfer mov bwl 5 pop * 1 , push * 1 wl ldm, stm l movfpe, movtpe * 3 b add, sub, cmp, neg bwl 19 arithmetic operations addx, subx, daa, das b inc, dec bwl adds, subs l mulxu, divxu, mulxs, divxs bw extu, exts wl tas b logic operations and, or, xor, not bwl 4 shift shal, shar, shll, shlr, rotl, rotr, rotxl, rotxr bwl 8 bit manipulation bset, bclr, bnot, btst, bld, bild, bst, bist, band, biand, bor, bior, bxor, bixor b14 branch bcc * 2 , jmp, bsr, jsr, rts ? 5 system control trapa, rte, sleep, ldc, stc, andc, orc, xorc, nop ? 9 block data transfer eepmov ? 1 legend: b: byte w: word l: longword notes: 1. pop.w rn and push.w rn are identical to mov.w @sp+, rn and mov.w rn, @-sp. pop.l ern and push.l ern are identical to mov.l @sp+, ern and mov.l ern, @-sp. 2. bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions. 3. cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 39 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.6.2 instructions and addressing modes table 2.2 indicates the combinations of instructions and addressing modes that the h8s/2600 cpu can use. table 2.2 combinations of instructions and addressing modes addressing modes function instruction #xx rn @ern @(d:16,ern) @(d:32,ern) @?ern/@ern+ @aa:8 @aa:16 @aa:24 @aa:32 @(d:8,pc) @(d:16,pc) @@aa:8 ? mov bwl bwl bwl bwl bwl bwl b bwl ? bwl ???? pop, push ????????????? wl ldm, stm ????????????? l data transfer movfpe * , movtpe * ??????? b ?????? add, cmp bwl bwl ???????????? sub wl bwl ???????????? addx, subx b b ???????????? adds, subs ? l ???????????? inc, dec ? bwl ???????????? daa, das ? b ???????????? mulxu, divxu ? bw ???????????? mulxs, divxs ? bw ???????????? neg ? bwl ???????????? extu, exts ? wl ???????????? arithmetic operations tas ?? b ??????????? and, or, xor bwl bwl ???????????? logic operations not ? bwl ???????????? shift ? bwl ???????????? bit manipulation ? bb ??? bb ? b ???? branch bcc, bsr ?????????? ?? jmp, jsr ???????? ??? ? rts ????????????? section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 40 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing modes function instruction #xx rn @ern @(d:16,ern) @(d:32,ern) @?ern/@ern+ @aa:8 @aa:16 @aa:24 @aa:32 @(d:8,pc) @(d:16,pc) @@aa:8 ? trapa ????????????? rte ????????????? sleep ????????????? ldc b b wwww ? w ? w ???? stc ? b wwww ? w ? w ???? system control andc, orc, xorc b ????????????? nop ????????????? block data transfer ????????????? bw legend: b: byte w: word l: longword note: * cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 41 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.6.3 table of instructions classified by function table 2.3 summarizes the instructions in each functional category. the notation used in table 2.3 is defined below. operation notation rd general register (destination) * rs general register (source) * rn general register * ern general register (32-bit register) (ead) destination operand (eas) source operand exr extended control register ccr condition-code register n n (negative) flag in ccr z z (zero) flag in ccr v v (overflow) flag in ccr c c (carry) flag in ccr pc program counter sp stack pointer #imm immediate data disp displacement + addition ? subtraction multiplication division logical and logical or logical exclusive or move ? not (logical complement) :8/:16/:24/:32 8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length note: * general registers include 8-bit registers (r0h to r7h, r0l to r7l), 16-bit registers (r0 to r7, e0 to e7), and 32-bit registers (er0 to er7). section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 42 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 2.3 instructions classified by function type instruction size * function data transfer mov b/w/l (eas) rd, rs (ead) moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register. movfpe b cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group. movtpe b cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group. pop w/l @sp+ rn pops a register from the stack. pop.w rn is identical to mov.w @sp+, rn. pop.l ern is identical to mov.l @sp+, ern. push w/l rn @ ? sp pushes a register onto the stack. push.w rn is identical to mov.w rn, @ ? sp. push.l ern is identical to mov.l ern, @ ? sp. ldm l @sp+ rn (register list) pops two or more general registers from the stack. stm l rn (register list) @ ? sp pushes two or more general registers onto the stack. arithmetic operations add sub b/w/l rd rs rd, rd #imm rd performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. (immediate byte data cannot be subtracted from byte data in a general register. use the subx or add instruction.) addx subx b rd rs c rd, rd #imm c rd performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on byte data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. inc dec b/w/l rd 1 rd, rd 2 rd increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (byte operands can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.) adds subs l rd 1 rd, rd 2 rd, rd 4 rd adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 43 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 type instruction size * function arithmetic operations daa das b rd decimal adjust rd decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to the ccr to produce 4-bit bcd data. mulxu b/w rd rs rd performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits 16 bits 32 bits. mulxs b/w rd rs rd performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits 16 bits 32 bits. divxu b/w rd rs rd performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder. divxs b/w rd rs rd performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder. cmp b/w/l rd ? rs, rd ? #imm compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data, and sets ccr bits according to the result. neg b/w/l 0 ? rd rd takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register. extu w/l rd (zero extension) rd extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the left. exts w/l rd (sign extension) rd extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit. tas b @erd ? 0, 1 ( section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 44 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 type instruction size * function logic operations and b/w/l rd rs rd, rd #imm rd performs a logical and operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. or b/w/l rd rs rd, rd #imm rd performs a logical or operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. xor b/w/l rd rs rd, rd #imm rd performs a logical exclusive or operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. not b/w/l ? (rd) (rd) takes the one's complement of general register contents. shift operations shal shar b/w/l rd (shift) rd performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents. 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible. shll shlr b/w/l rd (shift) rd performs a logical shift on general register contents. 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible. rotl rotr b/w/l rd (rotate) rd rotates general register contents. 1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible. rotxl rotxr b/w/l rd (rotate) rd rotates general register contents through the carry flag. 1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible. bit- manipulation instructions bset b 1 ( section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 45 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 type instruction size * function bit- manipulation instructions band biand b b c ( section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 46 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 type instruction size * function branch instructions bcc ? branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. the branching conditions are listed below. mnemonic description condition bra(bt) always (true) always brn(bf) never (false) never bhi high c z = 0 bls low or same c z = 1 bcc(bhs) carry clear c = 0 (high or same) bcs(blo) carry set (low) c = 1 bne not equal z = 0 beq equal z = 1 bvc overflow clear v = 0 bvs overflow set v = 1 bpl plus n = 0 bmi minus n = 1 bge greater or equal n v = 0 blt less than n v = 1 bgt greater than z (n v) = 0 ble less or equal z (n v) = 1 jmp ? branches unconditionally to a specified address. bsr ? branches to a subroutine at a specified address. jsr ? branches to a subroutine at a specified address. rts ? returns from a subroutine trapa ? starts trap-instruction exception handling. rte ? returns from an exception-handling routine. sleep ? causes a transition to a power-down state. system control instructions ldc b/w (eas) ccr, (eas) exr moves the source operand contents or immediate data to ccr or exr. although ccr and exr are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. the upper 8 bits are valid. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 47 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 type instruction size * function system control instructions stc b/w ccr (ead), exr (ead) transfers ccr or exr contents to a general register or memory. although ccr and exr are 8-bit registers, word- size transfers are performed between them and memory. the upper 8 bits are valid. andc b ccr #imm ccr, exr #imm exr logically ands the ccr or exr contents with immediate data. orc b ccr #imm ccr, exr #imm exr logically ors the ccr or exr contents with immediate data. xorc b ccr #imm ccr, exr #imm exr logically exclusive-ors the ccr or exr contents with immediate data. nop ? pc + 2 pc only increments the program counter. block data transfer instruction eepmov.b eepmov.w ? ? if r4l 0 then repeat @er5+ @er6+ r4l ? 1 r4l until r4l = 0 else next; if r4 0 then repeat @er5+ @er6+ r4 ? 1 r4 until r4 = 0 else next; transfers a data block according to parameters set in general registers r4l or r4, er5, and er6. r4l or r4: size of block (bytes) er5: starting source address er6: starting destination address execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is completed. note: * size refers to the operand size. b: byte w: word l: longword section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 48 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.6.4 basic instruction formats the cpu instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. an instruction consists of an operation field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (ea field), and a condition field (cc). figure 2.12 shows examples of instruction formats. op op rn rm nop, rts, etc. add.b rn, rm, etc. mov.b @(d:16, rn), rm, etc. (1) operation field only (2) operation field and register fields (3) operation field, register fields, and effective address extension rn rm op ea (disp) (4) operation field, effective address extension, and condition field op cc ea (disp) bra d:16, etc figure 2.12 instruction formats (examples) (1) operation field: indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out on the operand. the operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction. some instructions have two operation fields. (2) register field: specifies a general register. address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. some instructions have two register fields. some have no register field. (3) effective address extension: eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. (4) condition field: specifies the branching condition of bcc instructions. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 49 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.7 addressing modes and effective address calculation 2.7.1 addressing mode the cpu supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.4. each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter relative and memory indirect. bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (bset, bclr, bnot, and btst instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand. table 2.4 addressing modes no. addressing mode symbol 1 register direct rn 2 register indirect @ern 3 register indirect with displacement @(d:16,ern)/@(d:32,ern) 4 register indirect with post-increment register indirect with pre-decrement @ern+ @ ? ern 5 absolute address @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32 6 immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 7 program-counter relative @(d:8,pc)/@(d:16,pc) 8 memory indirect @@aa:8 (1) register direct?rn: the register field of the instruction specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing the operand. r0h to r7h and r0l to r7l can be specified as 8-bit registers. r0 to r7 and e0 to e7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. er0 to er7 can be specified as 32-bit registers. (2) register indirect?@ern: the register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ern) which contains the address of the operand on memory. if the address is a program instruction address, the lower 24 bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (h'00). (3) register indirect with displacement?@(d:16, ern) or @(d:32, ern): a 16-bit or 32-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ern) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a memory operand. a 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 50 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (4) register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement?@ern+ or @-ern: ? register indirect with post-increment ? @ern+ the register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ern) which contains the address of a memory operand. after the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents and the sum is stored in the address register. the value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word transfer instruction, or 4 for longword transfer instruction. for word or longword transfer instruction, the register value should be even. ? register indirect with pre-decrement ? @-ern the value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ern) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the result becomes the address of a memory operand. the result is also stored in the address register. the value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word transfer instruction, or 4 for longword transfer instruction. for word or longword transfer instruction, the register value should be even. (5) absolute address?@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32: the instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. the absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits long (@aa:32). to access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits (@aa:32) long. for an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are all assumed to be 1 (h'ffff). for a 16-bit absolute address the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. a 32-bit absolute address can access the entire address space. a 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (h'00). table 2.5 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges. table 2.5 absolute address access ranges absolute address normal mode * advanced mode data address 8 bits (@aa:8) h'ff00 to h'ffff h'ffff00 to h'ffffff 16 bits (@aa:16) h'0000 to h'ffff h'000000 to h'007fff, h'ff8000 to h'ffffff 32 bits (@aa:32) h'000000 to h'ffffff program instruction address 24 bits (@aa:24) note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 51 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (6) immediate?#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32: the instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an operand. the adds, subs, inc, and dec instructions contain immediate data implicitly. some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit number. the trapa instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a vector address. (7) program-counter relative?@(d:8, pc) or @(d:16, pc): this mode is used in the bcc and bsr instructions. an 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit pc contents to generate a branch address. only the lower 24 bits of this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (h'00). the pc value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is ? 126 to +128 bytes ( ? 63 to +64 words) or ? 32766 to +32768 bytes ( ? 16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. the resulting value should be an even number. (8) memory indirect?@@aa:8: this mode can be used by the jmp and jsr instructions. the instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. this memory operand contains a branch address. the upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255 (h'0000 to h'00ff in normal mode, h'000000 to h'0000ff in advanced mode). in normal mode * the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address is 16 bits long. in advanced mode the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of which is assumed to be all 0 (h'00). note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area. for further details, refer to section 4, exception handling. note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 52 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (a) normal mode * (b) advanced mode branch address specified by @aa:8 specified by @aa:8 reserved branch address note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. figure 2.13 branch address specification in memory indirect mode if an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address, the least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or instruction code to be fetched at the address preceding the specified address. (for further information, see section 2.5.2, memory data formats.) 2.7.2 effective address calculation table 2.6 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. in normal mode * the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit address. note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 53 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 2.6 effective address calculation no. addressing mode and instruction format effective address calculation effective address (ea) 1 register direct (rn) op rm rn operand is general register contents. 2 register indirect (@ern) general register contents 31 0 31 0 r op 24 23 don ? t care 3 register indirect with displacement @(d:16, ern) or @(d:32, ern) general register contents sign extension disp 31 0 31 0 31 0 op r disp don ? t care 24 23 4 register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement ? register indirect with post-increment @ern+ general register contents 1, 2, or 4 31 0 31 0 r op don ? t care 24 23 ? register indirect with pre-decrement @ ? ern general register contents 1, 2, or 4 byte word longword 1 2 4 operand size value added 31 0 31 0 op r don ? t care 24 23 section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 54 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 no. addressing mode and instruction format effective address calculation effective address (ea) 5 absolute address @aa:8 @aa:16 @aa:32 31 0 8 7 @aa:24 31 0 16 15 31 0 31 0 op abs op abs abs op op abs h'ffff 24 23 don ? t care don ? t care don ? t care don ? t care 24 23 24 23 24 23 sign exten- sion 6 immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 op imm operand is immediate data. 7 program-counter relative @(d:8, pc)/@(d:16, pc) 0 0 23 23 disp 31 0 24 23 op disp pc contents don ? t care sign exten- sion section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 55 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 no. addressing mode and instruction format effective address calculation effective address (ea) 8 memory indirect @@aa:8 ? normal mode * 0 0 31 8 7 0 15 h'000000 31 0 16 15 op abs abs memory contents h'00 24 23 don ? t care ? advanced mode 31 0 31 8 7 0 abs h'000000 31 0 24 23 op abs memory contents don ? t care note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 56 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.8 processing states 2.8.1 overview the cpu has five main processing states: the reset state, exception handling state, program execution state, bus-released state, and power-down state. figure 2.14 shows a diagram of the processing states. figure 2.15 indicates the state transitions. reset state the cpu and all on-chip supporting modules have been initialized and are stopped. exception-handling state a transient state in which the cpu changes the normal processing flow in response to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. program execution state the cpu executes program instructions in sequence. bus-released state the external bus has been released in response to a bus request signal from a bus master other than the cpu. power-down state cpu operation is stopped to conserve power. * sleep mode software standby mode hardware standby mode processing states note: * the power-down state also includes a medium-speed mode, module stop mode etc. figure 2.14 processing states section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 57 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 end of bus request bus request program execution state bus-released state sleep mode exception-handling state external interrupt software standby mode res = high reset state * 1 stby = high, res = low hardware standby mode * 2 power-down state notes: 1. 2. from any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever res goes low. a transition can also be made to the reset state when the watchdog timer overflows. from any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when stby goes low. sleep instruction with ssby = 0 sleep instruction with ssby = 1 interrupt request end of bus request bus request request for exception handling end of exception handling figure 2.15 state transitions 2.8.2 reset state when the res input goes low all current processing stops and the cpu enters the reset state. the cpu enters the power-on reset state when the nmi pin is high, or the manual reset state when the nmi pin is low. all interrupts are masked in the reset state. reset exception handling starts when the res signal changes from low to high. the reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. for details, refer to section 11, watchdog timer. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 58 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.8.3 exception-handling state the exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the cpu alters the normal processing flow due to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. the cpu fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that address. (1) types of exception handling and their priority exception handling is performed for traces, resets, interrupts, and trap instructions. table 2.7 indicates the types of exception handling and their priority. trap instruction exception handling is always accepted, in the program execution state. exception handling and the stack structure depend on the interrupt control mode set in syscr. table 2.7 exception handling types and priority priority type of exception detection timing start of exception handling high reset synchronized with clock exception handling starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the res pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows. trace end of instruction execution or end of exception-handling sequence * 1 when the trace (t) bit is set to 1, the trace starts at the end of the current instruction or current exception-handling sequence interrupt end of instruction execution or end of exception-handling sequence * 2 when an interrupt is requested, exception handling starts at the end of the current instruction or current exception-handling sequence low trap instruction when trapa instruction is executed exception handling starts when a trap (trapa) instruction is executed * 3 notes: 1. traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. trace exception-handling is not executed at the end of the rte instruction. 2. interrupts are not detected at the end of the andc, orc, xorc, and ldc instructions, or immediately after reset exception handling. 3. trap instruction exception handling is always accepted, in the program execution state. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 59 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (2) reset exception handling after the res pin has gone low and the reset state has been entered, when res goes high again, reset exception handling starts. the cpu enters the power-on reset state when the nmi pin is high, or the manual reset state when the nmi pin is low. when reset exception handling starts the cpu fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and starts program execution from that address. all interrupts, including nmi, are disabled during reset exception handling and after it ends. (3) traces traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. trace mode is entered when the t bit of exr is set to 1. when trace mode is established, trace exception handling starts at the end of each instruction. at the end of a trace exception-handling sequence, the t bit of exr is cleared to 0 and trace mode is cleared. interrupt masks are not affected. the t bit saved on the stack retains its value of 1, and when the rte instruction is executed to return from the trace exception-handling routine, trace mode is entered again. trace exception- handling is not executed at the end of the rte instruction. trace mode is not entered in interrupt control mode 0, regardless of the state of the t bit. (4) interrupt exception handling and trap instruction exception handling when interrupt or trap-instruction exception handling begins, the cpu references the stack pointer (er7) and pushes the program counter and other control registers onto the stack. next, the cpu alters the settings of the interrupt mask bits in the control registers. then the cpu fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and program execution starts from that start address. figure 2.16 shows the stack after exception handling ends. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 60 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (c) interrupt control mode 0 (d) interrupt control mode 2 ccr pc (24 bits) sp notes: 1. ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. 2. ignored when returning. ccr pc (24 bits) sp exr reserved * 2 (a) interrupt control mode 0 (b) interrupt control mode 2 ccr ccr * 2 pc (16 bits) sp ccr ccr * 2 pc (16 bits) sp exr reserved * 2 normal mode * 1 advanced mode figure 2.16 stack structure after exception handling (examples) section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 61 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.8.4 program execution state in this state the cpu executes program instructions in sequence. 2.8.5 bus-released state this is a state in which the bus has been released in response to a bus request from a bus master other than the cpu. while the bus is released, the cpu halts operations. there is one other bus master in addition to the cpu: the data transfer controller (dtc). for further details, refer to section 6, bus controller. 2.8.6 power-down state the power-down state includes both modes in which the cpu stops operating and modes in which the cpu does not stop. there are three modes in which the cpu stops operating: sleep mode, software standby mode, and hardware standby mode. there are also two other power-down modes: medium-speed mode, and module stop mode. in medium-speed mode the cpu and other bus masters operate on a medium-speed clock. module stop mode permits halting of the operation of individual modules, other than the cpu. for details, refer to section 19, power-down modes. (1) sleep mode: a transition to sleep mode is made if the sleep instruction is executed while the software standby bit (ssby) in the standby control register (sbycr) is cleared to 0. in sleep mode, cpu operations stop immediately after execution of the sleep instruction. the contents of cpu registers are retained. (2) software standby mode: a transition to software standby mode is made if the sleep instruction is executed while the ssby bit in sbycr is set to 1. in software standby mode, the cpu and clock halt and all mcu operations stop. as long as a specified voltage is supplied, the contents of cpu registers and on-chip ram are retained. the i/o ports also remain in their existing states. (3) hardware standby mode: a transition to hardware standby mode is made when the stby pin goes low. in hardware standby mode, the cpu and clock halt and all mcu operations stop. the on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied, on-chip ram contents are retained. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 62 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.9 basic timing 2.9.1 overview the cpu is driven by a system clock, denoted by the symbol 2.9.2 on-chip memory (rom, ram) on-chip memory is accessed in one state. the data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and word transfer instruction. figure 2.17 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. figure 2.18 shows the pin states. internal address bus internal read signal internal data bus internal write signal internal data bus bus cycle t1 address read data write data read access write access figure 2.17 on-chip memory access cycle section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 63 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bus cycle t1 unchanged address bus as rd hwr , lwr data bus high high high high-impedance state figure 2.18 pin states during on-chip memory access section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 64 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 2.9.3 on-chip supporting module access timing the on-chip supporting modules are accessed in two states. the data bus is either 8 bits or 16 bits wide, depending on the particular internal i/o register being accessed. figure 2.19 shows the access timing for the on-chip supporting modules. figure 2.20 shows the pin states. bus cycle t1 t2 address read data write data internal read signal internal data bus internal write signal internal data bus read access write access internal address bus figure 2.19 on-chip supporting module access cycle section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 65 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bus cycle t1 t2 unchanged address bus as rd hwr , lwr data bus high high high high-impedance state figure 2.20 pin states during on-chip supporting module access 2.9.4 external address space access timing the external address space is accessed with an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus width in a two-state or three-state bus cycle. in three-state access, wait states can be inserted. for further details, refer to section 6, bus controller. section 2 cpu rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 66 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 67 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 3 mcu operating modes 3.1 overview 3.1.1 operating mode selection (f-ztat? version) the h8s/2345 group has eight operating modes (modes 4 to 7, 10, 11, 14 and 15). these modes are determined by the mode pin (md 2 to md 0 ) and flash write enable pin (fwe) settings. the cpu operating mode and initial bus width can be selected as shown in table 3.1. table 3.1 lists the mcu operating modes. table 3.1 mcu operating mode selection (f-ztat? version) external data bus mcu operating mode fwe md 2 md 1 md 0 cpu operating mode description on-chip rom initial width max. width 0 0000? ? ? ? ? 11 210 31 4 100advanced disabled16 bits16 bits 51 on-chip rom disabled, expanded mode 8 bits 16 bits 6 1 0 on-chip rom enabled, expanded mode enabled 8 bits 16 bits 7 1 single-chip mode ? ? 8 1000? ? ? ? ? 91 10 1 0 advanced boot mode enabled 8 bits 16 bits 11 1 ? ? 12 100? ? ? ? ? 13 1 14 1 0 advanced user program mode enabled 8 bits 16 bits 15 1 ? ? the cpu's architecture allows for 4 gbytes of address space, but the h8s/2345 group actually accesses a maximum of 16 mbytes. section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 68 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 modes 4 to 6 are externally expanded modes that allow access to external memory and peripheral devices. the external expansion modes allow switching between 8-bit and 16-bit bus modes. after program execution starts, an 8-bit or 16-bit address space can be set for each area, depending on the bus controller setting. if 16-bit access is selected for any one area, 16-bit bus mode is set; if 8-bit access is selected for all areas, 8-bit bus mode is set. note that the functions of each pin depend on the operating mode. modes 10, 11, 14, and 15 are boot modes and user program modes in which the flash memory can be programmed and erased. for details, see section 17, rom. the h8s/2345 group can only be used in modes 4 to 7, 10, 11, 14, and 15. this means that the flash write enable pin and mode pins must be set to select one of these modes. do not change the inputs at the mode pins during operation. 3.1.2 operating mode selection (ztat, mask rom, and romless versions) the h8s/2345 group has seven operating modes (modes 1 to 7). these modes enable selection of the cpu operating mode, enabling/disabling of on-chip rom, and the initial bus width setting, by setting the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ). table 3.2 lists the mcu operating modes. section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 69 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 3.2 mcu operating mode selection external data bus mcu operating mode md 2 md 1 md 0 cpu operating mode description on-chip rom initial width max. width 0 000 ? ? ? ? 1 1 normal on-chip rom disabled, expanded mode disabled 8 bits 16 bits 2 * 1 0 on-chip rom enabled, expanded mode enabled 8 bits 16 bits 3 * 1 single-chip mode ? 4 1 0 0 advanced disabled 16 bits 16 bits 51 on-chip rom disabled, expanded mode 8 bits 16 bits 6 * 1 0 on-chip rom enabled, expanded mode enabled 8 bits 16 bits 7 * 1 single-chip mode ? note: * not used on romless version. the cpu's architecture allows for 4 gbytes of address space, but the h8s/2345 group actually accesses a maximum of 16 mbytes. modes 1, 2, and 4 to 6 are externally expanded modes that allow access to external memory and peripheral devices. the external expansion modes allow switching between 8-bit and 16-bit bus modes. after program execution starts, an 8-bit or 16-bit address space can be set for each area, depending on the bus controller setting. if 16-bit access is selected for any one area, 16-bit bus mode is set; if 8-bit access is selected for all areas, 8-bit bus mode is set. note that the functions of each pin depend on the operating mode. the h8s/2345 group can be used only in modes 1 to 7. this means that the mode pins must be set to select one of these modes. do not change the inputs at the mode pins during operation. 3.1.3 register configuration the h8s/2345 group has a mode control register (mdcr) that indicates the inputs at the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ), and a system control register (syscr) and a system control register 2 (syscr2) * 2 that control the operation of the h8s/2345 group. table 3.3 summarizes these registers. section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 70 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 3.3 mcu registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * 1 mode control register mdcr r undetermined h'ff3b system control register syscr r/w h'01 h'ff39 system control register 2 * 2 syscr2 r/w h'00 h'ff42 notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. the syscr2 register can only be used in the f-ztat version. in the ztat, mask rom, and romless versions, this register cannot be written to and will return an undefined value of read. 3.2 register descriptions 3.2.1 mode control register (mdcr) 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 0 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 ? 0 ? 0 mds0 ? * r 2 mds2 ? * r 1 mds1 ? * r note: * determined by pins md 2 to md 0 . bit initial value r/w : : : mdcr is an 8-bit read-only register that indicates the current operating mode of the h8s/2345 group. bit 7?reserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. bits 6 to 3?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. bits 2 to 0?mode select 2 to 0 (mds2 to mds0): these bits indicate the input levels at pins md 2 to md 0 (the current operating mode). bits mds2 to mds0 correspond to md 2 to md 0 . mds2 to mds0 are read-only bits-they cannot be written to. the mode pin (md 2 to md 0 ) input levels are latched into these bits when mdcr is read. these latches are canceled by a power-on reset, but are retained after a manual reset. section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 71 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 3.2.2 system control register (syscr) 7 ? 0 r/w 6 ? 0 r/w 5 intm1 0 r/w 4 intm0 0 r/w 3 nmieg 0 r/w 0 rame 1 r/w 2 ? 0 r/w 1 ? 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : bits 7 and 6?reserved: only 0 should be written to these bits. bits 5 and 4?interrupt control mode 1 and 0 (intm1, intm0): these bits select the control mode of the interrupt controller. for details of the interrupt control modes, see section 5.4.1, interrupt control modes and interrupt operation. bit 5 bit 4 intm1 intm0 interrupt control mode description 0 0 0 control of interrupts by i bit (initial value) 1 ? setting prohibited 1 0 2 control of interrupts by i2 to i0 bits and ipr 1 ? setting prohibited bit 3?nmi edge select (nmieg): selects the valid edge of the nmi interrupt input. bit 3 nmieg description 0 an interrupt is requested at the falling edge of nmi input (initial value) 1 an interrupt is requested at the rising edge of nmi input bits 2 and 1?reserved: only 0 should be written to these bits. bit 0?ram enable (rame): enables or disables the on-chip ram. the rame bit is initialized when the reset status is released. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 0 rame description 0 on-chip ram is disabled 1 on-chip ram is enabled (initial value ) section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 72 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 3.2.3 system control register 2 (syscr2) (f-ztat version only) bit:76543210 ???? flshe ??? initial value:00000000 r/w : ???? r/w ??? syscr2 is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs on-chip flash memory control. syscr2 is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. syscr2 can only be accessed in the f-ztat version. in other versions, this register cannot be written to and will return an undefined value if read. bits 7 to 4?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. bit 3?flash memory control register enable (flshe): controls cpu access to the flash memory control registers (flmcr1, flmcr2, ebr1, and ebr2). for details, see section 17, rom. bit 3 flshe description 0 flash control registers are not selected for addresses h'ffffc8 to h'ffffcb (initial value) 1 flash control registers are selected for addresses h'ffffc8 to h'ffffcb bits 2 to 0?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 73 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 3.3 operating mode descriptions 3.3.1 mode 1 (ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only) the cpu can access a 64-kbyte address space in normal mode. the on-chip rom is disabled, and 8-bit bus mode is set, immediately after a reset. ports b and c function as an address bus, port d functions as a data bus, and part of port f carries bus control signals. however, note that if 16-bit access is designated by the bus controller, the bus mode switches to 16 bits and port e becomes a data bus. 3.3.2 mode 2 * 1 (ztat and mask rom versions only) the cpu can access a 64-kbyte address space in normal mode. the on-chip rom is enabled, and 8-bit bus mode is set. immediately after a reset. ports b and c function as input ports immediately after a reset. they can each be set to output addresses by setting the corresponding bits in the data direction register (ddr) to 1. port d functions as a data bus, and part of port f carries bus control signals. however, note that if 16-bit access is designated by the bus controller, the bus mode switches to 16 bits and port e becomes a data bus. the amount of on-chip rom that can be used is limited to 56 kbytes. 3.3.3 mode 3 * 1 (ztat and mask rom versions only) the cpu can access a 64-kbyte address space in normal mode. the on-chip rom is enabled, but external addresses cannot be accessed. all i/o ports are available for use as input-output ports. the amount of on-chip rom that can be used is limited to 56 kbytes. 3.3.4 mode 4 * 2 the cpu can access a 16-mbyte address space in advanced mode. the on-chip rom is disabled. pins p1 3 to p1 0 , ports a, b, and c function as an address bus, ports d and e function as a data bus, and part of port f carries bus control signals. pins p1 3 to p1 0 function as inputs immediately after a reset. each of these pins can be set to output addresses by setting the corresponding bit in the data direction register (ddr) to 1. section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 74 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 the initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas. however, note that if 8-bit access is designated by the bus controller for all areas, the bus mode switches to 8 bits. 3.3.5 mode 5 * 2 the cpu can access a 16-mbyte address space in advanced mode. the on-chip rom is disabled. pins p1 3 to p1 0 , ports a, b, and c function as an address bus, port d function as a data bus, and part of port f carries bus control signals. pins p1 3 to p1 0 function as inputs immediately after a reset. they can each be set to output addresses by setting the corresponding bits in the data direction register (ddr) to 1. the initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. however, note that if at least one area is designated for 16-bit access by the bus controller, the bus mode switches to 16 bits and port e becomes a data bus. 3.3.6 mode 6 * 1 the cpu can access a 16-mbyte address space in advanced mode. the on-chip rom is enabled. pins p1 3 to p1 0 , ports a, b, and c function as input ports immediately after a reset. they can each be set to output addresses by setting the corresponding bits in the data direction register (ddr) to 1. port d functions as a data bus, and part of port f carries bus control signals. the initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. however, if any area is designated as 16-bit access space by the bus controller, 16-bit bus mode is set and port e becomes a data bus. 3.3.7 mode 7 * 1 the cpu can access a 16-mbyte address space in advanced mode. the on-chip rom is enabled, but external addresses cannot be accessed. all i/o ports are available for use as input-output ports. notes: 1. not used on romless version. 2. the upper address pins (a 23 to a 20 ) cannot be used as outputs in mode 4 or 5 immediately after a reset. to use the upper address pins (a 23 to a 20 ) as outputs, it is necessary to first set the corresponding bits in the port 1 data direction register (p1ddr) to 1. section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 75 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 3.3.8 modes 8 and 9 (f-ztat version only) modes 8 and 9 are not supported in the h8s/2345 group, and must not be set. 3.3.9 mode 10 (f-ztat version only) this is a flash memory boot mode. for details, see section 17, rom. mcu operation is the same as in mode 6. 3.3.10 mode 11 (f-ztat version only) this is a flash memory boot mode. for details, see section 17, rom. mcu operation is the same as in mode 7. 3.3.11 modes 12 and 13 modes 12 and 13 are not supported in the h8s/2345 group, and must not be set. 3.3.12 mode 14 (f-ztat version only) this is a flash memory user program mode. for details, see section 17, rom. mcu operation is the same as in mode 6. 3.3.13 mode 15 (f-ztat version only) this is a flash memory user program mode. for details, see section 17, rom. mcu operation is the same as in mode 7. section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 76 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 3.4 pin functions in each operating mode the pin functions of ports 1 and a to f vary depending on the operating mode. table 3.3 shows their functions in each operating mode. table 3.3 pin functions in each mode port mode 1 * 2 mode 2 * 3 mode 3 * 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 * 3 mode 10 * 4 mode 14 * 4 mode 7 * 3 mode 11 * 4 mode 15 * 4 port 1 p1 3 to p1 0 p * 1 /t p * 1 /t p * 1 /t p * 1 /t/a p * 1 /t/a p * 1 /t/a p * 1 /t port a pa 3 to pa 0 pp p aap * 1 /a p port b a p * 1 /ap aap * 1 /a p port c a p * 1 /ap aap * 1 /a p port d dd p ddd p port e p * 1 /d p * 1 /d p p/d p * 1 /d p * 1 /d p port f pf 7 p/c * 1 p/c * 1 p * 1 /c p/c * 1 p/c * 1 p/c * 1 p * 1 /c pf 6 to pf 3 cc p ccc p pf 2 to pf 0 p * 1 /c p * 1 /c p * 1 /c p * 1 /c p * 1 /c legend: p: i/o port t: timer i/o a: address bus output d: data bus i/o c: control signals, clock i/o notes: 1. after reset 2. not used on f-ztat. 3. not used on romless version. 4. applies to f-ztat version only. section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 77 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 3.5 memory map in each operating mode memory maps for the h8s/2345, h8s/2344, h8s/2343, h8s/2341, and h8s/2340 are shown in figure 3.1 to figure 3.5. the address space is 64 kbytes in modes 1 to 3 (normal modes) * , and 16 mbytes in modes 4 to 7, 10, 11, 14, and 15 (advanced modes). the on-chip rom capacity of the h8s/2345 is 128 kbytes, that of the h8s/2344 96 kbytes, and that of the h8s/2343 64 kbytes. however, only 56 kbytes are available in modes 2 and 3 (normal modes) * . the address space is divided into eight areas for modes 4 to 6, 10, and 14. for details, see section 6, bus controller. note: * not available on f-ztat version. section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 78 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 mode 1 * 2 (normal expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled) mode 2 * 2 (normal expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 3 * 2 (normal single-chip mode) external address space on-chip rom on-chip ram * 1 notes: 1. external addresses can be accessed by clearing the rame bit in syscr to 0. 2. not available on f-ztat version. internal i/o registers on-chip rom external address space external address space on-chip ram * 1 on-chip ram internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers external address space external address space internal i/o registers external address space h'0000 h'0000 h'0000 h'dfff h'e000 h'dfff h'ec00 h'fc00 h'fe40 h'fe40 h'ffff h'ec00 h'fc00 h'ffff h'ec00 h'fbff h'ffff h'ff08 h'ff08 h'fe40 h'ff07 h'ff28 h'ff28 h'ff28 figure 3.1 memory map in each operating mode in the h8s/2345 section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 79 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 modes 4 and 5 (advanced expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) mode 6 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 7 (advanced single-chip mode) external address space on-chip rom on-chip ram * 3 notes: internal i/o registers on-chip rom external address space external address space on-chip ram * 3 on-chip ram internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers external address space external address space internal i/o registers external address space h'000000 h'000000 h'000000 h'020000 h'01ffff h'ffec00 h'fffc00 h'fffe40 h'fffe40 h'ffffff h'ffec00 h'fffc00 h'ffffff h'01ffff h'ffec00 h'fffbff h'ffffff h'ffff08 h'ffff08 h'fffe40 h'ffff07 h'ffff28 h'ffff28 h'ffff28 on-chip rom/ external address space * 1 on-chip rom/ reserved area * 2 h'010000 h'00ffff h'00ffff h'010000 when the eae bit in bcrl is set to 1, this area is external address space. when the eae bit is cleared to 0, it is on-chip rom. when the eae bit in bcrl is set to 1, this area is reserved. when the eae bit is cleared to 0, it is on-chip rom. external addresses can be accessed by clearing the rame bit in syscr to 0. 1. 2. 3. figure 3.1 memory map in each operating mode in the h8s/2345 (cont) section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 80 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 mode 10 * 4 boot mode (advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 11 * 4 boot mode (advanced single-chip mode) on-chip rom notes: 1. when the eae bit in bcrl is set to 1, this area is external address space. when the eae bit is cleared to 0, it is on-chip rom. 2. when the eae bit in bcrl is set to 1, this area is reserved. when the eae bit is cleared to 0, it is on-chip rom. 3. on-chip ram is used for flash memory programming. do not clear the rame bit to 0 in syscr. 4. modes 10 and 11 are provided in the f-ztat version only. on-chip rom external address space on-chip ram * 3 on-chip ram * 3 on-chip rom/ reserved area * 2 internal i/o registers external address space internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers external address space h'000000 h'000000 h'01ffff h'020000 h'01ffff h'ffec00 h'fffbff h'ffffff h'fffe40 h'ffff07 h'ffff28 on-chip rom/ external address space * 1 h'00ffff h'010000 h'00ffff h'010000 h'ffec00 h'fffc00 h'fffe40 h'ffffff h'ffff08 h'ffff28 figure 3.1 memory map in each operating mode in the h8s/2345 (cont) section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 81 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 mode 14 * 4 user program mode (advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 15 * 4 user program mode (advanced single-chip mode) on-chip rom notes: 1. when the eae bit in bcrl is set to 1, this area is external address space. when the eae bit is cleared to 0, it is on-chip rom. 2. when the eae bit in bcrl is set to 1, this area is reserved. when the eae bit is cleared to 0, it is on-chip rom. 3. on-chip ram is used for flash memory programming. do not clear the rame bit to 0 in syscr. 4. modes 14 and 15 are provided in the f-ztat version only. on-chip rom external address space on-chip ram * 3 on-chip ram * 3 on-chip rom/ reserved area * 2 internal i/o registers external address space internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers external address space h'000000 h'000000 h'01ffff h'020000 h'01ffff h'ffec00 h'fffbff h'ffffff h'fffe40 h'ffff07 h'ffff28 on-chip rom/ external address space * 1 h'00ffff h'010000 h'00ffff h'010000 h'ffec00 h'fffc00 h'fffe40 h'ffffff h'ffff08 h'ffff28 figure 3.1 memory map in each operating mode in the h8s/2345 (cont) section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 82 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 mode 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled) mode 2 (normal expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 3 (normal single-chip mode) external address space on-chip rom on-chip ram * note: * external addresses can be accessed by clearing the rame bit in syscr to 0. internal i/o registers on-chip rom external address space external address space on-chip ram * on-chip ram internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers external address space external address space internal i/o registers external address space h'0000 h'0000 h'0000 h'dfff h'e000 h'dfff h'ec00 h'fc00 h'fe40 h'fe40 h'ffff h'ec00 h'fc00 h'ffff h'ec00 h'fbff h'ffff h'ff08 h'ff08 h'fe40 h'ff07 h'ff28 h'ff28 h'ff28 figure 3.2 memory map in each operating mode in the h8s/2344 section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 83 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 modes 4 and 5 (advanced expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) mode 6 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 7 (advanced single-chip mode) external address space on-chip rom on-chip ram * 4 notes: internal i/o registers on-chip rom external address space external address space on-chip ram * 4 on-chip ram internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers external address space external address space internal i/o registers external address space h'000000 h'000000 h'000000 h'01ffff h'020000 h'ffec00 h'fffc00 h'fffe40 h'fffe40 h'ffffff h'ffec00 h'fffc00 h'ffffff h'01ffff h'ffec00 h'fffbff h'ffffff h'ffff08 h'ffff08 h'fffe40 h'ffff07 h'ffff28 h'ffff28 h'ffff28 on-chip rom/ external address space * 1 reserved area/ external address space * 2 on-chip rom/ reserved area * 3 reserved area h'00ffff h'010000 h'017fff h'018000 h'00ffff h'010000 h'017fff h'018000 when the eae bit in bcrl is set to 1, this area is external address space. when the eae bit is cleared to 0, it is on-chip rom. when the eae bit in bcrl is set to 1, this area is external address space. when the eae bit is cleared to 0, it is a reserved area. this area is reserved when the eae bit in bcrl is set to 1, and on-chip rom when the eae bit is cleared to 0. external addresses can be accessed by clearing the rame bit in syscr to 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. figure 3.2 memory map in each operating mode in the h8s/2344 (cont) section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 84 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 mode 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled) mode 2 (normal expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 3 (normal single-chip mode) external address space on-chip rom on-chip ram * note: * external addresses can be accessed by clearing the rame bit in syscr to 0. internal i/o registers on-chip rom external address space external address space on-chip ram * reserved area * reserved area * on-chip ram internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers external address space external address space internal i/o registers external address space h'0000 h'0000 h'0000 h'dfff h'dfff h'e000 h'ec00 h'f400 h'fc00 h'ffff h'ec00 h'f400 h'f400 h'fc00 h'ffff h'fbff h'ffff h'fe40 h'ff08 h'fe40 h'ff08 h'fe40 h'ff07 h'ff28 h'ff28 h'ff28 figure 3.3 memory map in each operating mode in the h8s/2343 section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 85 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 modes 4 and 5 (advanced expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) mode 6 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 7 (advanced single-chip mode) external address space on-chip rom on-chip ram * 2 notes: internal i/o registers on-chip rom external address space external address space on-chip ram * 2 reserved area * 2 reserved area * 2 on-chip ram internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers external address space external address space internal i/o registers external address space h'000000 h'000000 h'000000 h'01ffff h'020000 h'ffec00 h'fff400 h'fff400 h'fffc00 h'ffffff h'ffec00 h'fffc00 h'ffffff h'fffbff h'fff400 h'ffffff h'ffff08 h'ffff08 h'fffe40 h'ffff07 h'ffff28 h'ffff28 h'ffff28 external address space/reserved area * 1 h'fffe40 h'fffe40 h'00ffff h'010000 h'00ffff when the eae bit in bcrl is set to 1, this area is external address space. when the eae bit is cleared to 0, it is on-chip rom. external addresses can be accessed by clearing the rame bit in syscr to 0. 1. 2. figure 3.3 memory map in each operating mode in the h8s/2343 (cont) section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 86 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 mode 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled) mode 2 (normal expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 3 (normal single-chip mode) external address space on-chip rom on-chip ram * note: * external addresses can be accessed by clearing the rame bit in syscr to 0. internal i/o registers on-chip rom external address space external address space on-chip ram * reserved area * reserved area * reserved area on-chip ram internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers external address space external address space internal i/o registers external address space h'0000 h'0000 h'0000 h'7fff h'dfff h'e000 h'7fff h'8000 h'ec00 h'f400 h'fc00 h'ffff h'ec00 h'f400 h'f400 h'fc00 h'ffff h'fbff h'ffff h'fe40 h'ff08 h'fe40 h'ff08 h'fe40 h'ff07 h'ff28 h'ff28 h'ff28 figure 3.4 memory map in each operating mode in the h8s/2341 section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 87 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 modes 4 and 5 (advanced expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) mode 6 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 7 (advanced single-chip mode) external address space on-chip rom on-chip ram * 2 notes: internal i/o registers on-chip rom external address space external address space on-chip ram * 2 reserved area * 2 reserved area * 2 on-chip ram internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers internal i/o registers external address space external address space internal i/o registers external address space h'000000 h'000000 h'000000 h'01ffff h'020000 h'ffec00 h'fff400 h'fff400 h'fffc00 h'ffffff h'ffec00 h'fffc00 h'ffffff h'fffbff h'fff400 h'ffffff h'ffff08 h'ffff08 h'fffe40 h'ffff07 h'ffff28 h'ffff28 h'ffff28 external address space/reserved area * 1 reserved area h'fffe40 h'fffe40 h'00ffff h'010000 h'007fff h'008000 h'007fff when the eae bit in bcrl is set to 1, this area is external address space. when the eae bit is cleared to 0, it is on-chip rom. external addresses can be accessed by clearing the rame bit in syscr to 0. 1. 2. figure 3.4 memory map in each operating mode in the h8s/2341 (cont) section 3 mcu operating modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 88 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 modes 4 and 5 (advanced expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) external address space on-chip ram * note: * external addresses can be accessed by clearing the rame bit in syscr to 0. internal i/o registers reserved area * external address space internal i/o registers external address space h'000000 h'ffec00 h'fff400 h'fffc00 h'ffffff h'ffff08 h'ffff28 h'fffe40 mode 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled) external address space on-chip ram * internal i/o registers reserved area * external address space internal i/o registers external address space h'0000 h'ec00 h'f400 h'fc00 h'ffff h'fe40 h'ff08 h'ff28 figure 3.5 memory map in each operating mode in the h8s/2340 (modes 1, 4, and 5 only) section 4 exception handling rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 89 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 4 exception handling 4.1 overview 4.1.1 exception handling types and priority as table 4.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trap instruction, or interrupt. exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4.1. if two or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times, in the program execution state. exception handling sources, the stack structure, and the operation of the cpu vary depending on the interrupt control mode set by the intm0 and intm1 bits of syscr. table 4.1 exception types and priority priority exception type start of exception handling high reset starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the res pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows. the cpu enters the power-on reset state when the nmi pin is high, or the manual reset state when the nmi pin is low. trace * 1 starts when execution of the current instruction or exception handling ends, if the trace (t) bit is set to 1 interrupt starts when execution of the current instruction or exception handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued * 2 low trap instruction (trapa) * 3 started by execution of a trap instruction (trapa) notes: 1. traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. trace exception handling is not executed after execution of an rte instruction. 2. interrupt detection is not performed on completion of andc, orc, xorc, or ldc instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling. 3. trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in program execution state. section 4 exception handling rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 90 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 4.1.2 exception handling operation exceptions originate from various sources. trap instructions and interrupts are handled as follows: 1. the program counter (pc), condition code register (ccr), and extended register (exr) are pushed onto the stack. 2. the interrupt mask bits are updated. the t bit is cleared to 0. 3. a vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution starts from that address. for a reset exception, steps 2 and 3 above are carried out. 4.1.3 exception vector table the exception sources are classified as shown in figure 4.1. different vector addresses are assigned to different exception sources. table 4.2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses. exception sources reset trace interrupts trap instruction power-on reset manual reset external interrupts: nmi, irq7 to irq0 internal interrupts: 43 interrupt sources in on-chip supporting modules figure 4.1 exception sources in modes 6 and 7 in the h8s/2345, the on-chip rom available for use after a power-on reset is the 64-kbyte area comprising addresses h'000000 to h'00ffff. care is required when setting vector addresses. in this case, clearing the eae bit in bcrl enables the 128-kbyte area comprising addresses h'000000 to h'01ffff to be used. section 4 exception handling rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 91 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 4.2 exception vector table vector address * 1 exception source vector number normal mode * 3 advanced mode power-on reset 0 h'0000 to h'0001 h'0000 to h'0003 manual reset 1 h'0002 to h'0003 h'0004 to h'0007 reserved for system use 2 h'0004 to h'0006 h'0008 to h'000b 3 h'0006 to h'0007 h'000c to h'000f 4 h'0008 to h'0009 h'0010 to h'0013 trace 5 h'000a to h'000b h'0014 to h'0017 reserved for system use 6 h'000c to h'000d h'0018 to h'001b external interrupt nmi 7 h'000e to h'000f h'001c to h'001f trap instruction (4 sources) 8 h'0010 to h'0011 h'0020 to h'0023 9 h'0012 to h'0013 h'0024 to h'0027 10 h'0014 to h'0015 h'0028 to h'002b 11 h'0016 to h'0017 h'002c to h'002f reserved for system use 12 h'0018 to h'0019 h'0030 to h'0033 13 h'001a to h'001b h'0034 to h'0037 14 h'001c to h'001d h'0038 to h'003b 15 h'001e to h'001f h'003c to h'003f external interrupt irq0 16 h'0020 to h'0021 h'0040 to h'0043 irq1 17 h'0022 to h'0023 h'0044 to h'0047 irq2 18 h'0024 to h'0025 h'0048 to h'004b irq3 19 h'0026 to h'0027 h'004c to h'004f irq4 20 h'0028 to h'0029 h'0050 to h'0053 irq5 21 h'002a to h'002b h'0054 to h'0057 irq6 22 h'002c to h'002d h'0058 to h'005b irq7 23 h'002e to h'002f h'005c to h'005f internal interrupt * 2 24 ? 87 h'0030 to h'0031 ? h'00ae to h'00af h'0060 to h'0063 ? h'015c to h'015f notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. for details of internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.3.3, interrupt exception handling vector table. 3. ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. section 4 exception handling rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 92 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 4.2 reset 4.2.1 overview a reset has the highest exception priority. when the res pin goes low, all processing halts and the h8s/2345 group enters the reset state. a reset initializes the internal state of the cpu and the registers of on-chip supporting modules. immediately after a reset, interrupt control mode 0 is set. reset exception handling begins when the res pin changes from low to high. the level of the nmi pin at reset determines whether the type of reset is a power-on reset or a manual reset. the h8s/2345 group can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. for details see section 11, watchdog timer. 4.2.2 reset types a reset can be of either of two types: a power-on reset or a manual reset. reset types are shown in table 4.3. a power-on reset should be used when powering on. the internal state of the cpu is initialized by either type of reset. a power-on reset also initializes all the registers in the on-chip supporting modules, while a manual reset initializes all the registers in the on-chip supporting modules except for the bus controller and i/o ports, which retain their previous states. with a manual reset, since the on-chip supporting modules are initialized, ports used as on-chip supporting module i/o pins are switched to i/o ports controlled by ddr and dr. table 4.3 reset types reset transition conditions internal state type nmi res res res res cpu on-chip supporting modules power-on reset high low initialized initialized manual reset low low initialized initialized, except for bus controller and i/o ports a reset caused by the watchdog timer can also be of either of two types: a power-on reset or a manual reset. section 4 exception handling rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 93 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 4.2.3 reset sequence the h8s/2345 group enters the reset state when the res pin goes low. to ensure that the h8s/2345 group is reset, hold the res pin low for at least 20 ms at power-up. to reset the h8s/2345 group during operation, hold the res pin low for at least 20 states. when the res pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, the h8s/2345 group starts reset exception handling as follows: 1. the internal state of the cpu and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are initialized, the t bit is cleared to 0 in exr, and the i bit is set to 1 in exr and ccr. 2. the reset exception handling vector address is read and transferred to the pc, and program execution starts from the address indicated by the pc. figures 4.2 and 4.3 show examples of the reset sequence. internal address bus internal read signal internal write signal internal data bus (1) (3) vector fetch internal processing prefetch of first program instruction high (1) reset exception handling vector address ((1) = h'0000) (2) start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) (3) start address ((3) = (2)) (4) first program instruction (2) (4) res figure 4.2 reset sequence (modes 2 and 3) section 4 exception handling rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 94 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 address bus vector fetch internal processing prefetch of first program instruction (1) (3) reset exception handling vector address ((1) = h'000000, (3) = h'000002) (2) (4) start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) (5) start address ((5) = (2) (4)) (6) first program instruction res (1) (5) high (2) (4) (3) (6) rd hwr , lwr d 15 to d 0 * note: * 3 program wait states are inserted. ** figure 4.3 reset sequence (mode 4) 4.2.4 interrupts after reset if an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (sp) is initialized, the pc and ccr will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. to prevent this, all interrupt requests, including nmi, are disabled immediately after a reset. since the first instruction of a program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes the stack pointer (example: mov.l #xx:32, sp). 4.2.5 state of on-chip supporting modules after reset release after reset release, mstpcr is initialized to h'3fff and all modules except the dtc enter module stop mode. consequently, on-chip supporting module registers cannot be read or written to. register reading and writing is enabled when module stop mode is exited. section 4 exception handling rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 95 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 4.3 traces traces are enabled in interrupt control mode 2. trace mode is not activated in interrupt control mode 0, irrespective of the state of the t bit. for details of interrupt control modes, see section 5, interrupt controller. if the t bit in exr is set to 1, trace mode is activated. in trace mode, a trace exception occurs on completion of each instruction. trace mode is canceled by clearing the t bit in exr to 0. it is not affected by interrupt masking. table 4.4 shows the state of ccr and exr after execution of trace exception handling. interrupts are accepted even within the trace exception handling routine. the t bit saved on the stack retains its value of 1, and when control is returned from the trace exception handling routine by the rte instruction, trace mode resumes. trace exception handling is not carried out after execution of the rte instruction. table 4.4 status of ccr and exr after trace exception handling ccr exr interrupt control mode i ui i2 to i0 t 0 trace exception handling cannot be used. 21??0 legend: 1: set to 1 0: cleared to 0 ?: retains value prior to execution. section 4 exception handling rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 96 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 4.4 interrupts interrupt exception handling can be requested by nine external sources (nmi, irq7 to irq0) and 43 internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. figure 4.4 classifies the interrupt sources and the number of interrupts of each type. the on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts include the watchdog timer (wdt), 16-bit timer-pulse unit (tpu), 8-bit timer, serial communication interface (sci), data transfer controller (dtc), and a/d converter. each interrupt source has a separate vector address. nmi is the highest-priority interrupt. interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. the interrupt controller has two interrupt control modes and can assign interrupts other than nmi to eight priority/mask levels to enable multiplexed interrupt control. for details of interrupts, see section 5, interrupt controller. interrupts external interrupts internal interrupts nmi (1) irq7 to irq0 (8) wdt * (1) tpu (26) 8-bit timer (6) sci (8) dtc (1) a/d converter (1) numbers in parentheses are the numbers of interrupt sources. * when the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt request at each counter overflow. notes: figure 4.4 interrupt sources and number of interrupts section 4 exception handling rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 97 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 4.5 trap instruction trap instruction exception handling starts when a trapa instruction is executed. trap instruction exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state. the trapa instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code. table 4.5 shows the status of ccr and exr after execution of trap instruction exception handling. table 4.5 status of ccr and exr after trap instruction exception handling ccr exr interrupt control mode i ui i2 to i0 t 01 ??? 21 ?? 0 legend: 1: set to 1 0: cleared to 0 ? : retains value prior to execution. section 4 exception handling rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 98 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 4.6 stack status after exception handling figure 4.5 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt exception handling. sp sp ccr ccr * pc (16 bits) ccr ccr * pc (16 bits) reserved * exr (a) interrupt control mode 0 (b) interrupt control mode 2 note: * ignored on return. figure 4.5 (1) stack status after exception handling (normal modes) (ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only) sp sp ccr pc (24 bits) ccr pc (24 bits) reserved * exr (a) interrupt control mode 0 (b) interrupt control mode 2 note: * ignored on return. figure 4.5 (2) stack status after exception handling (advanced modes) section 4 exception handling rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 99 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 4.7 notes on use of the stack when accessing word data or longword data, the h8s/2345 group assumes that the lowest address bit is 0. the stack should always be accessed by word transfer instruction or longword transfer instruction, and the value of the stack pointer (sp, er7) should always be kept even. use the following instructions to save registers: push.w rn (or mov.w rn, @-sp) push.l ern (or mov.l ern, @-sp) use the following instructions to restore registers: pop.w rn (or mov.w @sp+, rn) pop.l ern (or mov.l @sp+, ern) setting sp to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. figure 4.6 shows an example of what happens when the sp value is odd. sp legend: note: this diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode is 0, in advanced mode. sp sp ccr pc r1l pc h'fffefa h'fffefb h'fffefc h'fffefd h'fffeff mov.b r1l, @ ? er7 sp set to h'fffeff trap instruction executed data saved above sp contents of ccr lost ccr: condition code register pc: program counter r1l: general register r1l sp: stack pointer figure 4.6 operation when sp value is odd section 4 exception handling rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 100 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 101 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 5 interrupt controller 5.1 overview 5.1.1 features the h8s/2345 group controls interrupts by means of an interrupt controller. the interrupt controller has the following features: ? two interrupt control modes ? any of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the intm1 and intm0 bits in the system control register (syscr). ? priorities settable with ipr ? an interrupt priority register (ipr) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. eight priority levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except nmi. ? nmi is assigned the highest priority level of 8, and can be accepted at all times. ? independent vector addresses ? all interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine. ? nine external interrupts ? nmi is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. rising edge or falling edge can be selected for nmi. ? falling edge, rising edge, or both edge detection, or level sensing, can be selected for irq7 to irq0. ? dtc control ? dtc activation is performed by means of interrupts. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 102 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 5.1.2 block diagram a block diagram of the interrupt controller is shown in figure 5.1. syscr nmi input irq input internal interrupt request wovi to tei intm1 intm0 nmieg nmi input unit irq input unit isr iscr ier ipr interrupt controller priority determination interrupt request vector number i, ui i2 to i0 ccr exr cpu iscr ier isr ipr syscr : irq sense control register : irq enable register : irq status register : interrupt priority register : system control register legend: figure 5.1 block diagram of interrupt controller section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 103 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 5.1.3 pin configuration table 5.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller. table 5.1 interrupt controller pins name symbol i/o function nonmaskable interrupt nmi input nonmaskable external interrupt; rising or falling edge can be selected external interrupt requests 7 to 0 irq7 to irq0 input maskable external interrupts; rising, falling, or both edges, or level sensing, can be selected 5.1.4 register configuration table 5.2 summarizes the registers of the interrupt controller. table 5.2 interrupt controller registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * 1 system control register syscr r/w h'01 h'ff39 irq sense control register h iscrh r/w h'00 h'ff2c irq sense control register l iscrl r/w h'00 h'ff2d irq enable register ier r/w h'00 h'ff2e irq status register isr r/(w) * 2 h'00 h'ff2f interrupt priority register a ipra r/w h'77 h'fec4 interrupt priority register b iprb r/w h'77 h'fec5 interrupt priority register c iprc r/w h'77 h'fec6 interrupt priority register d iprd r/w h'77 h'fec7 interrupt priority register e ipre r/w h'77 h'fec8 interrupt priority register f iprf r/w h'77 h'fec9 interrupt priority register g iprg r/w h'77 h'feca interrupt priority register h iprh r/w h'77 h'fecb interrupt priority register i ipri r/w h'77 h'fecc interrupt priority register j iprj r/w h'77 h'fecd interrupt priority register k iprk r/w h'77 h'fece notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 104 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 5.2 register descriptions 5.2.1 system control register (syscr) 7 ? 0 r/w 6 ? 0 r/w 5 intm1 0 r/w 4 intm0 0 r/w 3 nmieg 0 r/w 0 rame 1 r/w 2 ? 0 r/w 1 ? 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : syscr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the interrupt control mode, and the detected edge for nmi. only bits 5 to 3 are described here; for details of the other bits, see section 3.2.2, system control register (syscr). syscr is initialized to h'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 5 and 4?interrupt control mode 1 and 0 (intm1, intm0): these bits select one of two interrupt control modes for the interrupt controller. bit 5 bit 4 intm1 intm0 interrupt control mode description 0 0 0 interrupts are controlled by i bit (initial value ) 1 ? setting prohibited 1 0 2 interrupts are controlled by bits i2 to i0, and ipr 1 ? setting prohibited bit 3?nmi edge select (nmieg): selects the input edge for the nmi pin. bit 3 nmieg description 0 interrupt request generated at falling edge of nmi input (initial value ) 1 interrupt request generated at rising edge of nmi input section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 105 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 5.2.2 interrupt priority registers a to k (ipra to iprk) 7 ? 0 ? 6 ipr6 1 r/w 5 ipr5 1 r/w 4 ipr4 1 r/w 3 ? 0 ? 0 ipr0 1 r/w 2 ipr2 1 r/w 1 ipr1 1 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : the ipr registers are eleven 8-bit readable/writable registers that set priorities (levels 7 to 0) for interrupts other than nmi. the correspondence between ipr settings and interrupt sources is shown in table 5.3. the ipr registers set a priority (level 7 to 0) for each interrupt source other than nmi. the ipr registers are initialized to h'77 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bits 7 and 3?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. table 5.3 correspondence between interrupt sources and ipr settings bits register 6 to 4 2 to 0 ipra irq0 irq1 iprb irq2 irq3 irq4 irq5 iprc irq6 irq7 dtc iprd watchdog timer ? * ipre ? * a/d converter iprf tpu channel 0 tpu channel 1 iprg tpu channel 2 tpu channel 3 iprh tpu channel 4 tpu channel 5 ipri 8-bit timer channel 0 8-bit timer channel 1 iprj ? * sci channel 0 iprk sci channel 1 ? * note: * reserved bits. only 1 should be written to these bits. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 106 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 as shown in table 5.3, multiple interrupts are assigned to one ipr. setting a value in the range from h'0 to h'7 in the 3-bit groups of bits 6 to 4 and 2 to 0 sets the priority of the corresponding interrupt. the lowest priority level, level 0, is assigned by setting h'0, and the highest priority level, level 7, by setting h'7. when interrupt requests are generated, the highest-priority interrupt according to the priority levels set in the ipr registers is selected. this interrupt level is then compared with the interrupt mask level set by the interrupt mask bits (i2 to i0) in the extend register (exr) in the cpu, and if the priority level of the interrupt is higher than the set mask level, an interrupt request is issued to the cpu. 5.2.3 irq enable register (ier) ier is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls enabling and disabling of interrupt requests irq7 to irq0. 7 irq7e 0 r/w 6 irq6e 0 r/w 5 irq5e 0 r/w 4 irq4e 0 r/w 3 irq3e 0 r/w 0 irq0e 0 r/w 2 irq2e 0 r/w 1 irq1e 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : ier is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bits 7 to 0?irq7 to irq0 enable (irq7e to irq0e): these bits select whether irq7 to irq0 are enabled or disabled. bit n irqne description 0 irqn interrupts disabled (initial value ) 1 irqn interrupts enabled (n = 7 to 0) section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 107 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 5.2.4 irq sense control registers h and l (iscrh, iscrl) iscrh 15 irq7scb 0 r/w 14 irq7sca 0 r/w 13 irq6scb 0 r/w 12 irq6sca 0 r/w 11 irq5scb 0 r/w 8 irq4sca 0 r/w 10 irq5sca 0 r/w 9 irq4scb 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : iscrl 7 irq3scb 0 r/w 6 irq3sca 0 r/w 5 irq2scb 0 r/w 4 irq2sca 0 r/w 3 irq1scb 0 r/w 0 irq0sca 0 r/w 2 irq1sca 0 r/w 1 irq0scb 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : the iscr registers are 16-bit readable/writable registers that select rising edge, falling edge, or both edge detection, or level sensing, for the input at pins irq7 to irq0 . the iscr registers are initialized to h'0000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bits 15 to 0: irq7 sense control a and b (irq7sca, irq7scb) to irq0 sense control a and b (irq0sca, irq0scb) bits 15 to 0 irq7scb to irq0scb irq7sca to irq0sca description 0 0 interrupt request generated at irq7 to irq0 input low level (initial value) 1 interrupt request generated at falling edge of irq7 to irq0 input 1 0 interrupt request generated at rising edge of irq7 to irq0 input 1 interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of irq7 to irq0 input section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 108 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 5.2.5 irq status register (isr) 7 irq7f 0 r/(w) * 6 irq6f 0 r/(w) * 5 irq5f 0 r/(w) * 4 irq4f 0 r/(w) * 3 irq3f 0 r/(w) * 0 irq0f 0 r/(w) * 2 irq2f 0 r/(w) * 1 irq1f 0 r/(w) * bit initial value r/w note: * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. : : : isr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of irq7 to irq0 interrupt requests. isr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bits 7 to 0?irq7 to irq0 flags (irq7f to irq0f): these bits indicate the status of irq7 to irq0 interrupt requests. bit n irqnf description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value) ? cleared by reading irqnf flag when irqnf = 1, then writing 0 to irqnf flag ? when interrupt exception handling is executed when low-level detection is set (irqnscb = irqnsca = 0) and irqn input is high ? when irqn interrupt exception handling is executed when falling, rising, or both- edge detection is set (irqnscb = 1 or irqnsca = 1) ? when the dtc is activated by an irqn interrupt, and the disel bit in mrb of the dtc is cleared to 0 1 [setting conditions] ? when irqn input goes low when low-level detection is set (irqnscb = irqnsca = 0) ? when a falling edge occurs in irqn input when falling edge detection is set (irqnscb = 0, irqnsca = 1) ? when a rising edge occurs in irqn input when rising edge detection is set (irqnscb = 1, irqnsca = 0) ? when a falling or rising edge occurs in irqn input when both-edge detection is set (irqnscb = irqnsca = 1) (n = 7 to 0) section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 109 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 5.3 interrupt sources interrupt sources comprise external interrupts (nmi and irq7 to irq0) and internal interrupts (43 sources). 5.3.1 external interrupts there are nine external interrupts: nmi and irq7 to irq0. of these, nmi and irq2 to irq0 can be used to restore the h8s/2345 group from software standby mode. nmi interrupt: nmi is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by the cpu regardless of the status of the cpu interrupt mask bits. the nmieg bit in syscr can be used to select whether an interrupt is requested at a rising edge or a falling edge on the nmi pin. the vector number for nmi interrupt exception handling is 7. irq7 to irq0 interrupts: interrupts irq7 to irq0 are requested by an input signal at pins irq7 to irq0 . interrupts irq7 to irq0 have the following features: ? using iscr, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level, falling edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pins irq7 to irq0 . ? enabling or disabling of interrupt requests irq7 to irq0 can be selected with ier. ? the interrupt priority level can be set with ipr. ? the status of interrupt requests irq7 to irq0 is indicated in isr. isr flags can be cleared to 0 by software. a block diagram of interrupts irq7 to irq0 is shown in figure 5.2. irqn interrupt request irqne irqnf s r q clear signal edge/level detection circuit irqnsca, irqnscb irqn input note: n: 7 to 0 figure 5.2 block diagram of interrupts irq7 to irq0 section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 110 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 figure 5.3 shows the timing of setting irqnf. irqn input pin irqnf figure 5.3 timing of setting irqnf the vector numbers for irq7 to irq0 interrupt exception handling are 23 to 16. detection of irq7 to irq0 interrupts does not depend on whether the relevant pin has been set for input or output. however, when a pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, do not clear the corresponding ddr to 0 and use the pin as an i/o pin for another function. 5.3.2 internal interrupts there are 43 sources for internal interrupts from on-chip supporting modules. ? for each on-chip supporting module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status, and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. if both of these are set to 1 for a particular interrupt source, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller. ? the interrupt priority level can be set by means of ipr. ? the dtc can be activated by a tpu, 8-bit timer, sci, or other interrupt request. when the dtc is activated by an interrupt, the interrupt control mode and interrupt mask bits are not affected. 5.3.3 interrupt exception handling vector table table 5.4 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities. for default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority. priorities among modules can be set by means of the ipr. the situation when two or more modules are set to the same priority, and priorities within a module, are fixed as shown in table 5.4. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 111 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 5.4 interrupt sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities vector address * 1 interrupt source origin of interrupt source vector number normal mode * 2 advanced mode ipr priority nmi 7 h'000e h'001c high irq0 external pin 16 h'0020 h'0040 ipra6 to 4 irq1 17 h'0022 h'0044 ipra2 to 0 irq2 irq3 18 19 h'0024 h'0026 h'0048 h'004c iprb6 to 4 irq4 irq5 20 21 h'0028 h'002a h'0050 h'0054 iprb2 to 0 irq6 irq7 22 23 h'002c h'002e h'0058 h'005c iprc6 to 4 swdtend (software activation interrupt end) dtc 24 h'0030 h'0060 iprc2 to 0 wovi (interval timer) watchdog timer 25 h'0032 h'0064 iprd6 to 4 reserved ? 26 27 h'0034 h'0036 h'0068 h'006c adi (a/d conversion end) a/d 28 h'0038 h'0070 ipre2 to 0 reserved ? 29 30 31 h'003a h'003c h'003e h'0074 h'0078 h'007c tgi0a (tgr0a input capture/compare match) tpu channel 0 32 h'0040 h'0080 iprf6 to 4 tgi0b (tgr0b input capture/compare match) 33 h'0042 h'0084 tgi0c (tgr0c input capture/compare match) 34 h'0044 h'0088 tgi0d (tgr0d input capture/compare match) 35 h'0046 h'008c tci0v (overflow 0) 36 h'0048 h'0090 reserved ? 37 38 39 h'004a h'004c h'004e h'0094 h'0098 h'009c low section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 112 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 vector address * 1 interrupt source origin of interrupt source vector number normal mode * 2 advanced mode ipr priority tgi1a (tgr1a input capture/compare match) tpu channel 1 40 h'0050 h'00a0 iprf2 to 0 high tgi1b (tgr1b input capture/compare match) 41 h'0052 h'00a4 tci1v (overflow 1) 42 h'0054 h'00a8 tci1u (underflow 1) 43 h'0056 h'00ac tgi2a (tgr2a input capture/compare match) tpu channel 2 44 h'0058 h'00b0 iprg6 to 4 tgi2b (tgr2b input capture/compare match) 45 h'005a h'00b4 tci2v (overflow 2) 46 h'005c h'00b8 tci2u (underflow 2) 47 h'005e h'00bc tgi3a (tgr3a input capture/compare match) tpu channel 3 48 h'0060 h'00c0 iprg2 to 0 tgi3b (tgr3b input capture/compare match) 49 h'0062 h'00c4 tgi3c (tgr3c input capture/compare match) 50 h'0064 h'00c8 tgi3d (tgr3d input capture/compare match) 51 h'0066 h'00cc tci3v (overflow 1) 52 h'0068 h'00d0 reserved ? 53 54 55 h'006a h'006c h'006e h'00d4 h'00d8 h'00dc tgi4a (tgr4a input capture/compare match) tpu channel 4 56 h'0070 h'00e0 iprh6 to 4 tgi4b (tgr4b input capture/compare match) 57 h'0072 h'00e4 tci4v (overflow 4) 58 h'0074 h'00e8 tci4u (underflow 4) 59 h'0076 h'00ec tgi5a (tgr5a input capture/compare match) tpu channel 5 60 h'0078 h'00f0 iprh2 to 0 tgi5b (tgr5b input capture/compare match) 61 h'007a h'00f4 tci5v (overflow 5) 62 h'007c h'00f8 tci5u (underflow 5) 63 h'007e h'00fc low section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 113 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 vector address * 1 interrupt source origin of interrupt source vector number normal mode * 2 advanced mode ipr priority cmia0 (compare match a0) 64 h'0080 h'0100 ipri6 to 4 high cmib0 (compare match b0) 8-bit timer channel 0 65 h'0082 h'0104 ovi0 (overflow 0) 66 h'0084 h'0108 reserved ? 67 h'0086 h'010c cmia1 (compare match a1) 68 h'0088 h'0110 ipri2 to 0 cmib1 (compare match b1) 8-bit timer channel 1 69 h'008a h'0114 ovi1 (overflow 1) 70 h'008c h'0118 reserved ? 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 h'008e h'0090 h'0092 h'0094 h'0096 h'0098 h'009a h'009c h'009e h'011c h'0120 h'0124 h'0128 h'012c h'0130 h'0134 h'0138 h'013c eri0 (receive error 0) 80 h'00a0 h'0140 iprj2 to 0 rxi0 (reception completed 0) sci channel 0 81 h'00a2 h'0144 txi0 (transmit data empty 0) 82 h'00a4 h'0148 tei0 (transmission end 0) 83 h'00a6 h'014c eri1 (receive error 1) 84 h'00a8 h'0150 iprk6 to 4 rxi1 (reception completed 1) sci channel 1 85 h'00aa h'0154 txi1 (transmit data empty 1) 86 h'00ac h'0158 tei1 (transmission end 1) 87 h'00ae h'015c low notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the start address. 2. ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 114 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 5.4 interrupt operation 5.4.1 interrupt control modes and interrupt operation interrupt operations in the h8s/2345 group differ depending on the interrupt control mode. nmi interrupts are accepted at all times except in the reset state and the hardware standby state. in the case of irq interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts, an enable bit is provided for each interrupt. clearing an enable bit to 0 disables the corresponding interrupt request. interrupt sources for which the enable bits are set to 1 are controlled by the interrupt controller. table 5.5 shows the interrupt control modes. the interrupt controller performs interrupt control according to the interrupt control mode set by the intm1 and intm0 bits in syscr, the priorities set in ipr, and the masking state indicated by the i and ui bits in the cpu?s ccr, and bits i2 to i0 in exr. table 5.5 interrupt control modes syscr interrupt control mode intm1 intm0 priority setting registers interrupt mask bits description 000 ? i interrupt mask control is performed by the i bit. ? 1 ?? setting prohibited 2 1 0 ipr i2 to i0 8-level interrupt mask control is performed by bits i2 to i0. 8 priority levels can be set with ipr. ? 1 ?? setting prohibited section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 115 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 figure 5.4 shows a block diagram of the priority decision circuit. interrupt acceptance control 8-level mask control default priority determination vector number interrupt control mode 2 ipr interrupt source i2 to i0 interrupt control mode 0 i figure 5.4 block diagram of interrupt control operation (1) interrupt acceptance control in interrupt control mode 0, interrupt acceptance is controlled by the i bit in ccr. table 5.6 shows the interrupts selected in each interrupt control mode. table 5.6 interrupts selected in each interrupt control mode (1) interrupt mask bits interrupt control mode i selected interrupts 0 0 all interrupts 1 nmi interrupts 2 * all interrupts legend: * : don't care section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 116 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (2) 8-level control in interrupt control mode 2, 8-level mask level determination is performed for the selected interrupts in interrupt acceptance control according to the interrupt priority level (ipr). the interrupt source selected is the interrupt with the highest priority level, and whose priority level set in ipr is higher than the mask level. table 5.7 interrupts selected in each interrupt control mode (2) interrupt control mode selected interrupts 0 all interrupts 2 highest-priority-level (ipr) interrupt whose priority level is greater than the mask level (ipr > i2 to i0). (3) default priority determination when an interrupt is selected by 8-level control, its priority is determined and a vector number is generated. if the same value is set for ipr, acceptance of multiple interrupts is enabled, and so only the interrupt source with the highest priority according to the preset default priorities is selected and has a vector number generated. interrupt sources with a lower priority than the accepted interrupt source are held pending. table 5.8 shows operations and control signal functions in each interrupt control mode. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 117 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 5.8 operations and control signal functions in each interrupt control mode setting interrupt acceptance control 8-level control interrupt control mode intm1 intm0 i i2 to i0 ipr default priority determination t (trace) 000 im x ?? * 2 ? 210x ? * 1 im pr t legend: : interrupt operation control performed x : no operation. (all interrupts enabled) im : used as interrupt mask bit pr : sets priority. ? : not used. note: 1. set to 1 when interrupt is accepted. 2. keep the initial setting. 5.4.2 interrupt control mode 0 enabling and disabling of irq interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts can be set by means of the i bit in the cpu?s ccr. interrupts are enabled when the i bit is cleared to 0, and disabled when set to 1. figure 5.5 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case. [1] if an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. [2] the i bit is then referenced. if the i bit is cleared to 0, the interrupt request is accepted. if the i bit is set to 1, only an nmi interrupt is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. [3] interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the highest-ranked interrupt according to the priority system is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. [4] when an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. [5] the pc and ccr are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. the pc saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. [6] next, the i bit in ccr is set to 1. this masks all interrupts except nmi. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 118 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 [7] a vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address. program execution status interrupt generated? nmi irq0 irq1 tei1 i=0 save pc and ccr i 1 read vector address branch to interrupt handling routine yes no yes yes yes no no no yes yes no hold pending figure 5.5 flowchart of procedure up to interrupt acceptance in interrupt control mode 0 section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 119 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 5.4.3 interrupt control mode 2 eight-level masking is implemented for irq interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts by comparing the interrupt mask level set by bits i2 to i0 of exr in the cpu with ipr. figure 5.6 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case. [1] if an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. [2] when interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the interrupt with the highest priority according to the interrupt priority levels set in ipr is selected, and lower-priority interrupt requests are held pending. if a number of interrupt requests with the same priority are generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the priority system shown in table 5.4 is selected. [3] next, the priority of the selected interrupt request is compared with the interrupt mask level set in exr. an interrupt request with a priority no higher than the mask level set at that time is held pending, and only an interrupt request with a priority higher than the interrupt mask level is accepted. [4] when an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. [5] the pc, ccr, and exr are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. the pc saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. [6] the t bit in exr is cleared to 0. the interrupt mask level is rewritten with the priority level of the accepted interrupt. if the accepted interrupt is nmi, the interrupt mask level is set to h'7. [7] a vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 120 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 yes program execution status interrupt generated? nmi level 6 interrupt? mask level 5 or below? level 7 interrupt? mask level 6 or below? save pc, ccr, and exr clear t bit to 0 update mask level read vector address branch to interrupt handling routine hold pending level 1 interrupt? mask level 0 yes yes no yes yes yes no yes yes no no no no no no figure 5.6 flowchart of procedure up to interrupt acceptance in interrupt control mode 2 section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 121 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 5.4.4 interrupt exception handling sequence figure 5.7 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. the example shown is for the case where interrupt control mode 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are in on-chip memory. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 122 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (14) (12) (10) (8) (6) (4) (2) (1) (5) (7) (9) (11) (13) interrupt service routine instruction prefetch internal operation vector fetch stack instruction prefetch internal operation interrupt acceptance interrupt level determination wait for end of instruction interrupt request signal internal address bus internal read signal internal write signal internal data us (3) (1) (2) (4) (3) (5) (7) instruction prefetch address (not executed. this is the contents of the saved pc, the return address.) instruction code (not executed.) instruction prefetch address (not executed.) sp-2 sp-4 saved pc and saved ccr vector address interrupt handling routine start address (vector address contents) interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10) (12)) first instruction of interrupt handling routine (6) (8) (9) (11) (10) (12) (13) (14) figure 5.7 interrupt exception handling section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 123 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 5.4.5 interrupt response times the h8s/2345 group is capable of fast word transfer instruction to on-chip memory, and the program area is provided in on-chip rom and the stack area in on-chip ram, enabling high- speed processing. table 5.9 shows interrupt response times - the interval between generation of an interrupt request and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. the execution status symbols used in table 5.9 are explained in table 5.10. table 5.9 interrupt response times normal mode * 5 advanced mode no. execution status intm1 = 0 intm1 = 1 intm1 = 0 intm1 = 1 1 interrupt priority determination * 1 33 33 2 number of wait states until executing instruction ends * 2 1 to 19+2 s i 1 to 19+2 s i 1 to 19+2 s i 1 to 19+2 s i 3 pc, ccr, exr stack save 2 s k 3 s k 2 s k 3 s k 4 vector fetch s i s i 2 s i 2 s i 5 instruction fetch * 3 2 s i 2 s i 2 s i 2 s i 6 internal processing * 4 22 22 total (using on-chip memory) 11 to 31 12 to 32 12 to 32 13 to 33 notes: 1. two states in case of internal interrupt. 2. refers to mulxs and divxs instructions. 3. prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch. 4. internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch. 5. ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 124 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 5.10 number of states in interrupt handling routine execution statuses object of access external device 8-bit bus 16-bit bus symbol internal memory 2-state access 3-state access 2-state access 3-state access instruction fetch s i 146+2m23+m branch address read s j stack manipulation s k legend: m: number of wait states in an external device access. 5.5 usage notes 5.5.1 contention between interrupt generation and disabling when an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupts, the disabling becomes effective after execution of the instruction. in other words, when an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as bclr or mov, if an interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will still be enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that interrupt will be executed on completion of the instruction. however, if there is an interrupt request of higher priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the higher-priority interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored. the same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared. figure 5.8 shows and example in which the cmiea bit in 8-bit timer tcr is cleared to 0. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 125 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 internal address bus internal write signal cmiea cmfa cmia interrupt signal tcr write cycle by cpu cmia exception handling tcr address figure 5.8 contention between interrupt generation and disabling the above contention will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while the interrupt is masked. 5.5.2 instructions that disable interrupts instructions that disable interrupts are ldc, andc, orc, and xorc. after any of these instructions is executed, all interrupts including nmi are disabled and the next instruction is always executed. when the i bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value becomes valid two states after execution of the instruction ends. 5.5.3 times when interrupts are disabled there are times when interrupt acceptance is disabled by the interrupt controller. the interrupt controller disables interrupt acceptance for a 3-state period after the cpu has updated the mask level with an ldc, andc, orc, or xorc instruction. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 126 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 5.5.4 interrupts during execution of eepmov instruction interrupt operation differs between the eepmov.b instruction and the eepmov.w instruction. with the eepmov.b instruction, an interrupt request (including nmi) issued during the transfer is not accepted until the move is completed. with the eepmov.w instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. the pc value saved on the stack in this case is the address of the next instruction. therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an eepmov.w instruction, the following coding should be used. l1: eepmov.w mov.w r4,r4 bne l1 5.6 dtc activation by interrupt 5.6.1 overview the dtc can be activated by an interrupt. in this case, the following options are available: ? interrupt request to cpu ? activation request to dtc ? selection of a number of the above for details of interrupt requests that can be used with to activate the dtc, see section 7, data transfer controller. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 127 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 5.6.2 block diagram figure 5.9 shows a block diagram of the dtc interrupt controller. selection circuit dtcer dtvecr control logic determination of priority cpu dtc dtc activation request vector number clear signal cpu interrupt request vector number select signal interrupt request interrupt source clear signal irq interrupt on-chip supporting module clear signal interrupt controller i, i2 to i0 swdte clear signal figure 5.9 interrupt control for dtc and dmac 5.6.3 operation the interrupt controller has three main functions in dtc control. (1) selection of interrupt source interrupt sources can be specified as dtc activation requests or cpu interrupt requests by means of the dtce bit of dtcea to dtcee in the dtc. after a dtc data transfer, the dtce bit can be cleared to 0 and an interrupt request sent to the cpu in accordance with the specification of the disel bit of mrb in the dtc. when the dtc has performed the specified number of data transfers and the transfer counter value is zero, the dtce bit is cleared to 0 and an interrupt request is sent to the cpu after the dtc data transfer. section 5 interrupt controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 128 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (2) determination of priority the dtc activation source is selected in accordance with the default priority order, and is not affected by mask or priority levels. see section 7.3.3, dtc vector table, for the respective priorities. (3) operation order if the same interrupt is selected as a dtc activation source and a cpu interrupt source, the dtc data transfer is performed first, followed by cpu interrupt exception handling. if the same interrupt is selected as a dtc activation source or cpu interrupt source, operations are performed for them independently according to their respective operating statuses and bus mastership priorities. table 5.11 summarizes interrupt source selection and interrupt source clearance control according to the settings of the dtce bit of dtcea to dtcee in the dtc and the disel bit of mrb in the dtc. table 5.11 interrupt source selection and clearing control settings dtc interrupt source selection/clearing control dtce disel dtc cpu 0 * x ? 10 ? x 1 ? legend: ? : the relevant interrupt is used. interrupt source clearing is performed. (the cpu should clear the source flag in the interrupt handling routine.) : the relevant interrupt is used. the interrupt source is not cleared. x : the relevant bit cannot be used. * : don't care (4) notes on use sci and a/d converter interrupt sources are cleared when the dtc reads or writes to the prescribed register, and are not dependent upon the disel bit. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 129 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 6 bus controller 6.1 overview the h8s/2345 group has a built-in bus controller (bsc) that manages the external address space divided into eight areas. the bus specifications, such as bus width and number of access states, can be set independently for each area, enabling multiple memories to be connected easily. the bus controller also has a bus arbitration function, and controls the operation of the internal bus masters: the cpu and data transfer controller (dtc). 6.1.1 features the features of the bus controller are listed below. ? manages external address space in area units ? in advanced mode, manages the external space as 8 areas of 2-mbytes ? in normal mode * , manages the external space as a single area ? bus specifications can be set independently for each area ? basic bus interface ? chip select ( cs0 to cs3 ) can be output for areas 0 to 3 ? 8-bit access or 16-bit access can be selected for each area ? 2-state access or 3-state access can be selected for each area ? program wait states can be inserted for each area ? burst rom interface ? burst rom interface can be set for area 0 ? choice of 1- or 2-state burst access ? idle cycle insertion ? an idle cycle can be inserted in case of an external read cycle between different areas ? an idle cycle can be inserted in case of an external write cycle immediately after an external read cycle ? bus arbitration function ? includes a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus mastership among the cpu and dtc ? other features ? external bus release function note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 130 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.1.2 block diagram figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the bus controller. area decoder bus controller abwcr astcr bcrh bcrl internal address bus cs0 to cs3 external bus control signals breq back internal control signals wait controller wcrh wcrl bus mode signal bus arbiter cpu bus request signal dtc bus request signal cpu bus acknowledge signal dtc bus acknowledge signal wait internal data bus figure 6.1 block diagram of bus controller section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 131 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.1.3 pin configuration table 6.1 summarizes the pins of the bus controller. table 6.1 bus controller pins name symbol i/o function address strobe as output strobe signal indicating that address output on address bus is enabled. read rd output strobe signal indicating that external space is being read. high write hwr output strobe signal indicating that external space is to be written, and upper half (d 15 to d 8 ) of data bus is enabled. low write lwr output strobe signal indicating that external space is to be written, and lower half (d 7 to d 0 ) of data bus is enabled. chip select 0 to 3 cs0 to cs3 output strobe signal indicating that areas 0 to 3 are selected. wait wait input wait request signal when accessing external 3-state access space. bus request breq input request signal that releases bus to external device. bus request acknowledge back output acknowledge signal indicating that bus has been released. 6.1.4 register configuration table 6.2 summarizes the registers of the bus controller. table 6.2 bus controller registers initial value name abbreviation r/w power-on reset manual reset address * 1 bus width control register abwcr r/w h'ff/h'00 * 2 retained h'fed0 access state control register astcr r/w h'ff retained h'fed1 wait control register h wcrh r/w h'ff retained h'fed2 wait control register l wcrl r/w h'ff retained h'fed3 bus control register h bcrh r/w h'd0 retained h'fed4 bus control register l bcrl r/w h'3c retained h'fed5 notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. determined by the mcu operating mode. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 132 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.2 register descriptions 6.2.1 bus width control register (abwcr) 7 abw7 1 r/w 0 r/w 6 abw6 1 r/w 0 r/w 5 abw5 1 r/w 0 r/w 4 abw4 1 r/w 0 r/w 3 abw3 1 r/w 0 r/w 0 abw0 1 r/w 0 r/w 2 abw2 1 r/w 0 r/w 1 abw1 1 r/w 0 r/w bit : initial value : modes 1 to 3 * , 5 to 7 mode 4 : rw initial value : : rw abwcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that designates each area for either 8-bit access or 16-bit access. abwcr sets the data bus width for the external memory space. the bus width for on-chip memory and internal i/o registers is fixed regardless of the settings in abwcr. in normal mode * , the settings of bits abw7 to abw1 have no effect on operation. after a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, abwcr is initialized to h'ff in modes 1, 2, 3 * , and 5, 6, 7, and to h'00 in mode 4. it is not initialized by a manual reset or in software standby mode. bits 7 to 0?area 7 to 0 bus width control (abw7 to abw0): these bits select whether the corresponding area is to be designated for 8-bit access or 16-bit access. in normal mode * , only part of area 0 is enabled, and the abw0 bit selects whether external space is to be designated for 8-bit access or 16-bit access. note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. bit n abwn description 0 area n is designated for 16-bit access 1 area n is designated for 8-bit access (n = 7 to 0) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 133 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.2.2 access state control register (astcr) 7 ast7 1 r/w 6 ast6 1 r/w 5 ast5 1 r/w 4 ast4 1 r/w 3 ast3 1 r/w 0 ast0 1 r/w 2 ast2 1 r/w 1 ast1 1 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : astcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that designates each area as either a 2-state access space or a 3-state access space. astcr sets the number of access states for the external memory space. the number of access states for on-chip memory and internal i/o registers is fixed regardless of the settings in astcr. in normal mode * , the settings of bits ast7 to ast1 have no effect on operation. astcr is initialized to h'ff by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized by a manual reset or in software standby mode. bits 7 to 0?area 7 to 0 access state control (ast7 to ast0): these bits select whether the corresponding area is to be designated as a 2-state access space or a 3-state access space. in normal mode * , only part of area 0 is enabled, and the ast0 bit selects whether external space is to be designated for 2-state access or 3-state access. wait state insertion is enabled or disabled at the same time. note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. bit n astn description 0 area n is designated for 2-state access wait state insertion in area n external space is disabled 1 area n is designated for 3-state access (initial value ) wait state insertion in area n external space is enabled (n = 7 to 0) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 134 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.2.3 wait control registers h and l (wcrh, wcrl) wcrh and wcrl are 8-bit readable/writable registers that select the number of program wait states for each area. in normal mode * , only part of area is 0 is enabled, and bits w01 and w00 select the number of program wait states for the external space . the settings of bits w71, w70 to w11, and w10 have no effect on operation. program waits are not inserted in the case of on-chip memory or internal i/o registers. wcrh and wcrl are initialized to h'ff by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. they are not initialized by a manual reset or in software standby mode. note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. (1) wcrh 7 w71 1 r/w 6 w70 1 r/w 5 w61 1 r/w 4 w60 1 r/w 3 w51 1 r/w 0 w40 1 r/w 2 w50 1 r/w 1 w41 1 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : bits 7 and 6?area 7 wait control 1 and 0 (w71, w70): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 7 in external space is accessed while the ast7 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 7 bit 6 w71 w70 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 7 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 7 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 7 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 7 is accessed (initial value) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 135 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bits 5 and 4?area 6 wait control 1 and 0 (w61, w60): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 6 in external space is accessed while the ast6 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 5 bit 4 w61 w60 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 6 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 6 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 6 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 6 is accessed (initial value) bits 3 and 2?area 5 wait control 1 and 0 (w51, w50): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 5 in external space is accessed while the ast5 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 3 bit 2 w51 w50 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 5 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 5 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 5 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 5 is accessed (initial value) bits 1 and 0?area 4 wait control 1 and 0 (w41, w40): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 4 in external space is accessed while the ast4 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 1 bit 0 w41 w40 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 4 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 4 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 4 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 4 is accessed (initial value) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 136 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (2) wcrl 7 w31 1 r/w 6 w30 1 r/w 5 w21 1 r/w 4 w20 1 r/w 3 w11 1 r/w 0 w00 1 r/w 2 w10 1 r/w 1 w01 1 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : bits 7 and 6?area 3 wait control 1 and 0 (w31, w30): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 3 in external space is accessed while the ast3 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 7 bit 6 w31 w30 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 3 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 3 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 3 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 3 is accessed (initial value) bits 5 and 4?area 2 wait control 1 and 0 (w21, w20): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 2 in external space is accessed while the ast2 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 5 bit 4 w21 w20 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 2 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 2 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 2 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 2 is accessed (initial value) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 137 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bits 3 and 2?area 1 wait control 1 and 0 (w11, w10): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 1 in external space is accessed while the ast1 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 3 bit 2 w11 w10 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 1 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 1 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 1 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 1 is accessed (initial value) bits 1 and 0?area 0 wait control 1 and 0 (w01, w00): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 0 in external space is accessed while the ast0 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 1 bit 0 w01 w00 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 0 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 0 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 0 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 0 is accessed (initial value) 6.2.4 bus control register h (bcrh) 7 icis1 1 r/w 6 icis0 1 r/w 5 brstrm 0 r/w 4 brsts1 1 r/w 3 brsts0 0 r/w 0 ? 0 r/w 2 ? 0 r/w 1 ? 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : bcrh is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects enabling or disabling of idle cycle insertion, and the memory interface for areas 2 to 5 and area 0. bcrh is initialized to h'd0 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized by a manual reset or in software standby mode. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 138 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 7?idle cycle insert 1 (icis1): selects whether or not one idle cycle state is to be inserted between bus cycles when successive external read cycles are performed in different areas. bit 7 icis1 description 0 idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external read cycles in different areas 1 idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read cycles in different areas (initial value ) bit 6?idle cycle insert 0 (icis0): selects whether or not one idle cycle state is to be inserted between bus cycles when successive external read and external write cycles are performed. bit 6 icis0 description 0 idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles 1 idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles (initial value ) bit 5?burst rom enable (brstrm): selects whether area 0 is used as a burst rom interface. in normal mode * , the selection can be made from the entire external space. burst rom interface and psram burst operation cannot be set at the same time. note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. bit 5 brstrm description 0 area 0 is basic bus interface (initial value ) 1 area 0 is burst rom interface bit 4?burst cycle select 1 (brsts1): selects the number of burst cycles for the burst rom interface. bit 4 brsts1 description 0 burst cycle comprises 1 state 1 burst cycle comprises 2 states (initial value ) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 139 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 3?burst cycle select 0 (brsts0): selects the number of words that can be accessed in a burst rom interface burst access. bit 3 brsts0 description 0 max. 4 words in burst access (initial value ) 1 max. 8 words in burst access bits 2 to 0?reserved: only 0 should be written to these bits. 6.2.5 bus control register l (bcrl) 7 brle 0 r/w 6 ? 0 r/w 5 eae 1 r/w 4 ? 1 r/w 3 ? 1 r/w 0 waite 0 r/w 2 ? 1 r/w 1 ? 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : bcrl is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs selection of the external bus-released state protocol, and enabling or disabling of wait pin input. bcrl is initialized to h'3c by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized by a manual reset or in software standby mode. bit 7?bus release enable (brle): enables or disables external bus release. bit 7 brle description 0 external bus release is disabled. breq and back can be used as i/o ports. (initial value ) 1 external bus release is enabled. bit 6?reserved: only 0 should be written to this bit. bit 5?external address enable (eae): selects whether addresses h'010000 to h'01ffff are to be internal addresses or external addresses. this setting is invalid in normal mode * . note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 140 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 5 eae description 0 addresses h'010000 to h'01ffff are in on-chip rom (in the h8s/2345) addresses h'010000 to h'017fff are in on-chip rom and addresses h'018000 to h'01ffff are a reserved area (in the h8s/2344) addresses h'010000 to h'01ffff are a reserved area (in the h8s/2343 and h8s/2341) 1 addresses h'010000 to h'01ffff are external addresses (external expansion mode) or a reserved area * (single-chip mode) (initial value ) note: * reserved areas should not be accessed. bits 4 to 2?reserved: only 1 should be written to these bits. bit 1?reserved: only 0 should be written to this bit. bit 0?wait pin enable (waite): selects enabling or disabling of wait input by the wait pin. bit 0 waite description 0 wait input by wait pin disabled. wait pin can be used as i/o port. (initial value ) 1 wait input by wait pin enabled 6.3 bus control 6.3.1 area divisions in advanced mode, the bus controller partitions the 16-mbyte address space into eight areas, 0 to 7, in 2-mbyte units, and performs bus control for external space in area units. in normal mode * , it controls a 64-kbyte address space comprising part of area 0. figure 6.2 shows an outline of the memory map. chip select signals ( cs0 to cs3 ) can be output for areas 0 to 3. note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 141 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 area 0 (2 mbytes) h'000000 h'ffffff (1) (2) h'0000 h'1fffff h'200000 area 1 (2 mbytes) h'3fffff h'400000 area 2 (2 mbytes) h'5fffff h'600000 area 3 (2 mbytes) h'7fffff h'800000 area 4 (2 mbytes) h'9fffff h'a00000 area 5 (2 mbytes) h'bfffff h'c00000 area 6 (2 mbytes) h'dfffff h'e00000 area 7 (2 mbytes) h'ffff advanced mode normal mode * note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. figure 6.2 overview of area partitioning section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 142 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.3.2 bus specifications the external space bus specifications consist of three elements: bus width, number of access states, and number of program wait states. the bus width and number of access states for on-chip memory and internal i/o registers are fixed, and are not affected by the bus controller. (1) bus width: a bus width of 8 or 16 bits can be selected with adwcr. an area for which an 8-bit bus is selected functions as an 8-bit access space, and an area for which a 16-bit bus is selected functions as a16-bit access space. if all areas are designated for 8-bit access, 8-bit bus mode is set; if any area is designated for 16-bit access, 16-bit bus mode is set. when the burst rom interface is designated, 16-bit bus mode is always set. (2) number of access states: two or three access states can be selected with astcr. an area for which 2-state access is selected functions as a 2-state access space, and an area for which 3- state access is selected functions as a 3-state access space. with the burst rom interface, the number of access states may be determined without regard to astcr. when 2-state access space is designated, wait insertion is disabled. (3) number of program wait states: when 3-state access space is designated by astcr, the number of program wait states to be inserted automatically is selected with wcrh and wcrl. from 0 to 3 program wait states can be selected. table 6.3 shows the bus specifications for each basic bus interface area. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 143 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 6.3 bus specifications for each area (basic bus interface) abwcr astcr wcrh, wcrl bus specifications (basic bus interface) abwn astn wn1 wn0 bus width access states program wait states 00 ?? 16 2 0 100 3 0 11 10 2 13 10 ?? 82 0 100 3 0 11 10 2 13 6.3.3 memory interfaces the h8s/2345 group memory interfaces comprise a basic bus interface that allows direct connection of rom, sram, and so on, and a burst rom interface (for area 0 only) that allows direct connection of burst rom. an area for which the basic bus interface is designated functions as normal space, and an area for which the burst rom interface is designated functions as burst rom space. 6.3.4 advanced mode the initial state of each area is basic bus interface, 3-state access space. the initial bus width is selected according to the operating mode. the bus specifications described here cover basic items only, and the sections on each memory interface (6.4, basic bus interface and 6.5, burst rom interface) should be referred to for further details. area 0: area 0 includes on-chip rom, and in rom-disabled expansion mode, all of area 0 is external space. in rom-enabled expansion mode, the space excluding on-chip rom is external space. when area 0 external space is accessed, the cs0 signal can be output. either basic bus interface or burst rom interface can be selected for area 0. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 144 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 areas 1 to 6: in external expansion mode, all of areas 1 to 6 is external space. when area 1 to 3 external space is accessed, the cs1 to cs3 pin signals respectively can be output. only the basic bus interface can be used for areas 1 to 6. area 7: area 7 includes the on-chip ram and internal i/o registers. in external expansion mode, the space excluding the on-chip ram and internal i/o registers is external space. the on-chip ram is enabled when the rame bit in the system control register (syscr) is set to 1; when the rame bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip ram is disabled and the corresponding space becomes external space. only the basic bus interface can be used for the area 7 memory interface. 6.3.5 areas in normal mode (ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only) in normal mode, a 64-kbyte address space comprising part of area 0 is controlled. area partitioning is not performed in normal mode. in rom-disabled expansion mode, the space excluding the on-chip ram and internal i/o registers is external space. in rom-enabled expansion mode the space excluding the on-chip rom, on-chip ram, and internal i/o registers is external space. the on-chip ram is enabled when the rame bit in the system control register (syscr) is set to 1; when the rame bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip ram is disabled and the corresponding space becomes external space . when external space is accessed, the cs0 signal can be output. the basic bus interface or burst rom interface can be selected. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 145 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.3.6 chip select signals the h8s/2345 group can output chip select signals ( cs0 to cs3 ) to areas 0 to 3, the signal being driven low when the corresponding external space area is accessed. in normal mode * , only the cs0 signal can be output. figure 6.3 shows an example of csn (n = 0 to 3) output timing. enabling or disabling of the csn signal is performed by setting the data direction register (ddr) for the port corresponding to the particular csn pin. in rom-disabled expansion mode, the cs0 pin is placed in the output state after a power-on reset. pins cs1 to cs3 are placed in the input state after a power-on reset, and so the corresponding ddr should be set to 1 when outputting signals cs1 to cs3 . in rom-enabled expansion mode, pins cs0 to cs3 are all placed in the input state after a power- on reset, and so the corresponding ddr should be set to 1 when outputting signals cs0 to cs3 . for details, see section 8, i/o ports. note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. bus cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 area n external address address bus csn figure 6.3 csn csn csn csn signal output timing (n = 0 to 3) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 146 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.4 basic bus interface 6.4.1 overview the basic bus interface enables direct connection of rom, sram, and so on. the bus specifications can be selected with abwcr, astcr, wcrh, and wcrl (see table 6.3). 6.4.2 data size and data alignment data sizes for the cpu and other internal bus masters are byte, word, and longword. the bus controller has a data alignment function, and when accessing external space, controls whether the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) or lower data bus (d 7 to d 0 ) is used according to the bus specifications for the area being accessed (8-bit access space or 16-bit access space) and the data size. 8-bit access space: figure 6.4 illustrates data alignment control for the 8-bit access space. with the 8-bit access space, the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) is always used for accesses. the amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte; a word transfer instruction is performed as two byte accesses, and a longword transfer instruction, as four byte accesses. d 15 d 8 d 7 d 0 upper data bus lower data bus byte size word size 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle longword size 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle 3rd bus cycle 4th bus cycle figure 6.4 access sizes and data alignment control (8-bit access space) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 147 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 16-bit access space: figure 6.5 illustrates data alignment control for the 16-bit access space. with the 16-bit access space, the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) and lower data bus (d 7 to d 0 ) are used for accesses. the amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte or one word, and a longword transfer instruction is executed as two word transfer instructions. in byte access, whether the upper or lower data bus is used is determined by whether the address is even or odd. the upper data bus is used for an even address, and the lower data bus for an odd address. d 15 d 8 d 7 d 0 upper data bus byte size word size 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle longword size even address byte size odd address lower data bus figure 6.5 access sizes and data alignment control (16-bit access space) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 148 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.4.3 valid strobes table 6.4 shows the data buses used and valid strobes for the access spaces. in a read, the rd signal is valid without discrimination between the upper and lower halves of the data bus. in a write, the hwr signal is valid for the upper half of the data bus, and the lwr signal for the lower half. table 6.4 data buses used and valid strobes area access size read/ write address valid strobe upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) lower data bus (d 7 to d 0 ) byte read ? rd valid invalid 8-bit access space write ? hwr hi-z byte read even rd valid invalid 16-bit access space odd invalid valid write even hwr valid hi-z odd lwr hi-z valid word read ? rd valid valid write ? hwr , lwr valid valid notes: hi-z: high impedance. invalid: input state; input value is ignored. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 149 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.4.4 basic timing 8-bit 2-state access space: figure 6.6 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 2-state access space. when an 8-bit access space is accessed , the upper half (d 15 to d 8 ) of the data bus is used. the lwr pin is fixed high. wait states cannot be inserted. bus cycle t 1 t 2 address bus csn as rd d 15 to d 8 valid d 7 to d 0 invalid read hwr lwr d 15 to d 8 valid d 7 to d 0 write note: n = 0 to 3 high high impedance figure 6.6 bus timing for 8-bit 2-state access space section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 150 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8-bit 3-state access space: figure 6.7 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 3-state access space. when an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (d 15 to d 8 ) of the data bus is used. the lwr pin is fixed high. wait states can be inserted. bus cycle t 1 t 2 address bus csn as rd d 15 to d 8 valid d 7 to d 0 invalid read hwr lwr d 15 to d 8 valid d 7 to d 0 high impedance write high note: n = 0 to 3 t 3 figure 6.7 bus timing for 8-bit 3-state access space section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 151 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 16-bit 2-state access space: figures 6.8 to 6.10 show bus timings for a 16-bit 2-state access space. when a 16-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (d 15 to d 8 ) of the data bus is used for the even address, and the lower half (d 7 to d 0 ) for the odd address. wait states cannot be inserted. bus cycle t 1 t 2 address bus csn as rd d 15 to d 8 valid d 7 to d 0 invalid read hwr lwr d 15 to d 8 valid d 7 to d 0 write high note: n = 0 to 3 high impedance figure 6.8 bus timing for 16-bit 2-state access space (1) (even address byte access) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 152 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bus cycle t 1 t 2 address bus csn as rd d 15 to d 8 invalid d 7 to d 0 valid read hwr lwr d 15 to d 8 d 7 to d 0 valid write note: n = 0 to 3 high high impedance figure 6.9 bus timing for 16-bit 2-state access space (2) (odd address byte access) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 153 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bus cycle t 1 t 2 address bus csn as rd d 15 to d 8 valid d 7 to d 0 valid read hwr lwr d 15 to d 8 valid d 7 to d 0 valid write note: n = 0 to 3 figure 6.10 bus timing for 16-bit 2-state access space (3) (word access) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 154 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 16-bit 3-state access space: figures 6.11 to 6.13 show bus timings for a 16-bit 3-state access space. when a 16-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (d 15 to d 8 ) of the data bus is used for the even address, and the lower half (d 7 to d 0 ) for the odd address. wait states can be inserted. bus cycle t 1 t 2 address bus csn as rd d 15 to d 8 valid d 7 to d 0 invalid read hwr lwr d 15 to d 8 valid d 7 to d 0 high impedance write high note: n = 0 to 3 t 3 figure 6.11 bus timing for 16-bit 3-state access space (1) (even address byte access) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 155 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bus cycle t 1 t 2 address bus csn as rd d 15 to d 8 invalid d 7 to d 0 valid read hwr lwr d 15 to d 8 d 7 to d 0 valid write high note: n = 0 to 3 t 3 high impedance figure 6.12 bus timing for 16-bit 3-state access space (2) (odd address byte access) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 156 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bus cycle t 1 t 2 address bus csn as rd d 15 to d 8 valid d 7 to d 0 valid read hwr lwr d 15 to d 8 valid d 7 to d 0 valid write note: n = 0 to 3 t 3 figure 6.13 bus timing for 16-bit 3-state access space (3) (word access) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 157 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.4.5 wait control when accessing external space, the h8s/2345 group can extend the bus cycle by inserting one or more wait states (t w ). there are two ways of inserting wait states: program wait insertion and pin wait insertion using the wait pin. program wait insertion from 0 to 3 wait states can be inserted automatically between the t 2 state and t 3 state on an individual area basis in 3-state access space, according to the settings of bwcrh and bwcrl. pin wait insertion setting the waite bit in bcrl to 1 enables wait insertion by means of the wait pin. program wait insertion is first carried out according to the settings in wcrh and wcrl. then, if the wait pin is low at the falling edge of in the last t 2 or t w state, a t w state is inserted. if the wait pin is held low, t w states are inserted until it goes high. this is useful when inserting four or more t w states, or when changing the number of t w states for different external devices. the waite bit setting applies to all areas. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 158 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 figure 6.14 shows an example of wait state insertion timing. by program wait t 1 address bus as rd data bus read data read hwr , lwr write data write note: indicates the timing of wait pin sampling. wait data bus t 2 t w t w t w t 3 by wait pin figure 6.14 example of wait state insertion timing the settings after a power-on reset are: 3-state access, 3 program wait state insertion, and wait input disabled. when a manual reset is performed, the contents of bus controller registers are retained, and the wait control settings remain the same as before the reset. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 159 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.5 burst rom interface 6.5.1 overview with the h8s/2345 group, external space area 0 can be designated as burst rom space, and burst rom interfacing can be performed. the burst rom space interface enables 16-bit configuration rom with burst access capability to be accessed at high speed. area 0 can be designated as burst rom space by means of the brstrm bit in bcrh. consecutive burst accesses of a maximum of 4 words or 8 words can be performed for cpu instruction fetches only. one or two states can be selected for burst access. 6.5.2 basic timing the number of states in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst rom interface is in accordance with the setting of the ast0 bit in astcr. also, when the ast0 bit is set to 1, wait state insertion is possible. one or two states can be selected for the burst cycle, according to the setting of the brsts1 bit in bcrh. wait states cannot be inserted. when area 0 is designated as burst rom space, it becomes 16-bit access space regardless of the setting of the abw0 bit in abwcr. when the brsts0 bit in bcrh is cleared to 0, burst access of up to 4 words is performed; when the brsts0 bit is set to 1, burst access of up to 8 words is performed. the basic access timing for burst rom space is shown in figures 6.15 (a) and (b). the timing shown in figure 6.15 (a) is for the case where the ast0 and brsts1 bits are both set to 1, and that in figure 6.15 (b) is for the case where both these bits are cleared to 0. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 160 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 t 1 address bus cs0 as data bus t 2 t 3 t 1 t 2 t 1 full access t 2 rd burst access only lower address changed read data read data read data figure 6.15 (a) example of burst rom access timing (when ast0 = brsts1 = 1) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 161 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 t 1 address bus cs0 as data bus t 2 t 1 t 1 full access rd burst access only lower address changed read data read data read data figure 6.15 (b) example of burst rom access timing (when ast0 = brsts1 = 0) 6.5.3 wait control as with the basic bus interface, either program wait insertion or pin wait insertion using the wait pin can be used in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst rom interface. see section 6.4.5, wait control. wait states cannot be inserted in a burst cycle. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 162 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.6 idle cycle 6.6.1 operation when the h8s/2345 group accesses external space, it can insert a 1-state idle cycle (t i ) between bus cycles in the following two cases: (1) when read accesses between different areas occur consecutively, and (2) when a write cycle occurs immediately after a read cycle. by inserting an idle cycle it is possible, for example, to avoid data collisions between rom, with a long output floating time, and high-speed memory, i/o interfaces, and so on. (1) consecutive reads between different areas if consecutive reads between different areas occur while the icis1 bit in bcrh is set to 1, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the second read cycle. this is enabled in advanced mode. figure 6.16 shows an example of the operation in this case. in this example, bus cycle a is a read cycle from rom with a long output floating time, and bus cycle b is a read cycle from sram, each being located in a different area. in (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in cycle b between the read data from rom and that from sram. in (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented. t 1 address bus rd bus cycle a data bus t 2 t 3 t 1 t 2 bus cycle b bus cycle a bus cycle b long output floating time data collision (a) idle cycle not inserted (icis1 = 0) (b) idle cycle inserted (initial value icis1 = 1) t 1 address bus rd data bus t 2 t 3 t i t 1 t 2 cs (area a) cs (area b) cs (area a) cs (area b) figure 6.16 example of idle cycle operation (1) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 163 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (2) write after read if an external write occurs after an external read while the icis0 bit in bcrh is set to 1, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the write cycle. figure 6.17 shows an example of the operation in this case. in this example, bus cycle a is a read cycle from rom with a long output floating time, and bus cycle b is a cpu write cycle. in (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in cycle b between the read data from rom and the cpu write data. in (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented. t 1 address bus rd bus cycle a data bus t 2 t 3 t 1 t 2 bus cycle b long output floating time data collision t 1 address bus rd bus cycle a data bus t 2 t 3 t i t 1 bus cycle b t 2 hwr hwr cs (area a) cs (area b) cs (area a) cs (area b) (a) idle cycle not inserted (icis1 = 0) (b) idle cycle inserted (initial value icis1 = 1) figure 6.17 example of idle cycle operation (2) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 164 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (3) relationship between chip select ( cs cs cs cs ) signal and read ( rd rd rd rd ) signal depending on the system?s load conditions, the rd signal may lag behind the cs signal. an example is shown in figure 6.18. in this case, with the setting for no idle cycle insertion (a), there may be a period of overlap between the bus cycle a rd signal and the bus cycle b cs signal. setting idle cycle insertion, as in (b), however, will prevent any overlap between the rd and cs signals. in the initial state after reset release, idle cycle insertion (b) is set. t 1 address bus rd bus cycle a t 2 t 3 t 1 t 2 bus cycle b possibility of overlap between cs (area b) and rd t 1 address bus bus cycle a t 2 t 3 t i t 1 bus cycle b t 2 cs (area a) cs (area b) rd cs (area a) cs (area b) (a) idle cycle not inserted (icis1 = 0) (b) idle cycle inserted (initial value icis1 = 1) figure 6.18 relationship between chip select ( cs cs cs cs ) and read ( rd rd rd rd ) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 165 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.6.2 pin states in idle cycle table 6.5 shows pin states in an idle cycle. table 6.5 pin states in idle cycle pins pin state a 23 to a 0 contents of next bus cycle d 15 to d 0 high impedance csn high as high rd high hwr high lwr high 6.7 bus release 6.7.1 overview the h8s/2345 group can release the external bus in response to a bus request from an external device. in the external bus released state, the internal bus master continues to operate as long as there is no external access. 6.7.2 operation in external expansion mode, the bus can be released to an external device by setting the brle bit in bcrl to 1. driving the breq pin low issues an external bus request to the h8s/2345 group. when the breq pin is sampled, at the prescribed timing the back pin is driven low, and the address bus, data bus, and bus control signals are placed in the high-impedance state, establishing the external bus-released state. in the external bus released state, an internal bus master can perform accesses using the internal bus. when an internal bus master wants to make an external access, it temporarily defers activation of the bus cycle, and waits for the bus request from the external bus master to be dropped. when the breq pin is driven high, the back pin is driven high at the prescribed timing and the external bus released state is terminated. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 166 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 in the event of simultaneous external bus release request and external access request generation, the order of priority is as follows: (high) external bus release > internal bus master external access (low) 6.7.3 pin states in external bus released state table 6.6 shows pin states in the external bus released state. table 6.6 pin states in bus released state pins pin state a 23 to a 0 high impedance d 15 to d 0 high impedance csn high impedance as high impedance rd high impedance hwr high impedance lwr high impedance section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 167 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.7.4 transition timing figure 6.19 shows the timing for transition to the bus-released state. cpu cycle external bus released state cpu cycle address minimum 1 state t 0 t 1 t 2 address bus data bus as hwr , lwr breq back high impedance [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] low level of breq pin is sampled at rise of t 2 state. back pin is driven low at end of cpu read cycle, releasing bus to external bus master. breq pin state is still sampled in external bus released state. high level of breq pin is sampled. back pin is driven high, ending bus release cycle. high impedance high impedance high impedance rd high impedance figure 6.19 bus-released state transition timing section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 168 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.7.5 usage note when mstpcr is set to h'ffff or h'efff and a transition is made to sleep mode, the external bus release function halts. therefore, mstpcr should not be set to h'ffff or h'efff if the external bus release function is to be used in sleep mode. 6.8 bus arbitration 6.8.1 overview the h8s/2345 group has a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus master operations. there are two bus masters, the cpu and dtc, which perform read/write operations when they have possession of the bus. each bus master requests the bus by means of a bus request signal. the bus arbiter determines priorities at the prescribed timing, and permits use of the bus by means of a bus request acknowledge signal. the selected bus master then takes possession of the bus and begins its operation. 6.8.2 operation the bus arbiter detects the bus masters' bus request signals, and if the bus is requested, sends a bus request acknowledge signal to the bus master making the request. if there are bus requests from more than one bus master, the bus request acknowledge signal is sent to the one with the highest priority. when a bus master receives the bus request acknowledge signal, it takes possession of the bus until that signal is canceled. the order of priority of the bus masters is as follows: (high) dtc > cpu (low) an internal bus access by an internal bus master, and external bus release, can be executed in parallel. in the event of simultaneous external bus release request, and internal bus master external access request generation, the order of priority is as follows: (high) external bus release > internal bus master external access (low) section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 169 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 6.8.3 bus transfer timing even if a bus request is received from a bus master with a higher priority than that of the bus master that has acquired the bus and is currently operating, the bus is not necessarily transferred immediately. there are specific times at which each bus master can relinquish the bus. cpu: the cpu is the lowest-priority bus master, and if a bus request is received from the dtc, the bus arbiter transfers the bus to the bus master that issued the request. the timing for transfer of the bus is as follows: ? the bus is transferred at a break between bus cycles. however, if a bus cycle is executed in discrete operations, as in the case of a longword-size access, the bus is not transferred between the operations. see appendix a.5, bus states during instruction execution, for timings at which the bus is not transferred. ? if the cpu is in sleep mode, it transfers the bus immediately. dtc: the dtc sends the bus arbiter a request for the bus when an activation request is generated. the dtc can release the bus after a vector read, a register information read (3 states), a single data transfer, or a register information write (3 states). it does not release the bus during a register information read (3 states), a single data transfer, or a register information write (3 states). 6.8.4 external bus release usage note external bus release can be performed on completion of an external bus cycle. the rd signal and cs0 to cs3 signals remain low until the end of the external bus cycle. therefore, when external bus release is performed, the rd and cs0 to cs3 signals may change from the low level to the high-impedance state. 6.9 resets and the bus controller in a power-on reset, the h8s/2345, including the bus controller, enters the reset state at that point, and an executing bus cycle is discontinued. in a manual reset, the bus controller?s registers and internal state are maintained, and an executing external bus cycle is completed. in this case, wait input is ignored and write data is not guaranteed. section 6 bus controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 170 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 171 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 7 data transfer controller 7.1 overview the h8s/2345 group includes a data transfer controller (dtc). the dtc can be activated by an interrupt or software, to transfer data. 7.1.1 features the features of the dtc are: ? transfer possible over any number of channels ? transfer information is stored in memory ? one activation source can trigger a number of data transfers (chain transfer) ? wide range of transfer modes ? normal, repeat, and block transfer modes available ? incrementing, decrementing, and fixing of source and destination addresses can be selected ? direct specification of 16-mbyte address space possible ? 24-bit transfer source and destination addresses can be specified ? transfer can be set in byte or word units ? a cpu interrupt can be requested for the interrupt that activated the dtc ? an interrupt request can be issued to the cpu after one data transfer ends ? an interrupt request can be issued to the cpu after the specified data transfers have completely ended ? activation by software is possible ? module stop mode can be set ? the initial setting enables dtc registers to be accessed. dtc operation is halted by setting module stop mode. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 172 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.1.2 block diagram figure 7.1 shows a block diagram of the dtc. the dtc?s register information is stored in the on-chip ram * . a 32-bit bus connects the dtc to the on-chip ram (1 kbyte), enabling 32-bit/1-state reading and writing of the dtc register information and hence helping to increase processing speed. note: * when the dtc is used, the rame bit in syscr must be set to 1. interrupt request interrupt controller dtc internal address bus dtc service request control logic register information mra mrb cra crb dar sar cpu interrupt request on-chip ram internal data bus legend: mra, mrb cra, crb sar dar dtcera to dtcere dtvecr dtcera to dtcere dtvecr : dtc mode registers a and b : dtc transfer count registers a and b : dtc source address register : dtc destination address register : dtc enable registers a to e : dtc vector register figure 7.1 block diagram of dtc section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 173 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.1.3 register configuration table 7.1 summarizes the dtc registers. table 7.1 dtc registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * 1 dtc mode register a mra ? * 2 undefined ? * 3 dtc mode register b mrb ? * 2 undefined ? * 3 dtc source address register sar ? * 2 undefined ? * 3 dtc destination address register dar ? * 2 undefined ? * 3 dtc transfer count register a cra ? * 2 undefined ? * 3 dtc transfer count register b crb ? * 2 undefined ? * 3 dtc enable registers dtcer r/w h'00 h'ff30 to h'ff34 dtc vector register dtvecr r/w h'00 h'ff37 module stop control register mstpcr r/w h'3fff h'ff3c notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. registers within the dtc cannot be read or written to directly. 3. register information is located in on-chip ram addresses h'f800 to h'fbff. it cannot be located in external space. when the dtc is used, do not clear the rame bit in syscr to 0. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 174 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.2 register descriptions 7.2.1 dtc mode register a (mra) mra is an 8-bit register that controls the dtc operating mode. 7 sm1 6 sm0 5 dm1 4 dm0 3 md1 0 sz 2 md0 1 dts bit initial value : : ? unde- fined r/w : ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined bits 7 and 6?source address mode 1 and 0 (sm1, sm0): these bits specify whether sar is to be incremented, decremented, or left fixed after a data transfer. bit 7 bit 6 sm1 sm0 description 0 ? sar is fixed 1 0 sar is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when sz = 0; by +2 when sz = 1) 1 sar is decremented after a transfer (by ? 1 when sz = 0; by ? 2 when sz = 1) bits 5 and 4?destination address mode 1 and 0 (dm1, dm0): these bits specify whether dar is to be incremented, decremented, or left fixed after a data transfer. bit 5 bit 4 dm1 dm0 description 0 ? dar is fixed 1 0 dar is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when sz = 0; by +2 when sz = 1) 1 dar is decremented after a transfer (by ? 1 when sz = 0; by ? 2 when sz = 1) section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 175 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bits 3 and 2?dtc mode (md1, md0): these bits specify the dtc transfer mode. bit 3 bit 2 md1 md0 description 0 0 normal mode 1 repeat mode 1 0 block transfer mode 1 ? bit 1?dtc transfer mode select (dts): specifies whether the source side or the destination side is set to be a repeat area or block area, in repeat mode or block transfer mode. bit 1 dts description 0 destination side is repeat area or block area 1 source side is repeat area or block area bit 0?dtc data transfer size (sz): specifies the size of data to be transferred. bit 0 sz description 0 byte-size transfer 1 word-size transfer section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 176 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.2.2 dtc mode register b (mrb) 7 chne 6 disel 5 ? 4 ? 3 ? 0 ? 2 ? 1 ? bit initial value : : r/w : ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined mrb is an 8-bit register that controls the dtc operating mode. bit 7?dtc chain transfer enable (chne): specifies chain transfer. with chain transfer, a number of data transfers can be performed consecutively in response to a single transfer request. in data transfer with chne set to 1, determination of the end of the specified number of transfers, clearing of the interrupt source flag, and clearing of dtcer is not performed. bit 7 chne description 0 end of dtc data transfer (activation waiting state is entered) 1 dtc chain transfer (new register information is read, then data is transferred) bit 6?dtc interrupt select (disel): specifies whether interrupt requests to the cpu are disabled or enabled after a data transfer. bit 6 disel description 0 after a data transfer ends, the cpu interrupt is disabled unless the transfer counter is 0 (the dtc clears the interrupt source flag of the activating interrupt to 0) 1 after a data transfer ends, the cpu interrupt is enabled (the dtc does not clear the interrupt source flag of the activating interrupt to 0) bits 5 to 0?reserved: these bits have no effect on dtc operation in the h8s/2345 group, and should always be written with 0 in a write. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 177 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.2.3 dtc source address register (sar) 23 22 21 20 19 43210 bit initial value : : ? unde- fined r/w : ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined sar is a 24-bit register that designates the source address of data to be transferred by the dtc. for word-size transfer, specify an even source address. 7.2.4 dtc destination address register (dar) 23 22 21 20 19 43210 bit initial value : : ? unde- fined r/w : ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined dar is a 24-bit register that designates the destination address of data to be transferred by the dtc. for word-size transfer, specify an even destination address. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 178 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.2.5 dtc transfer count register a (cra) 15 14 13 12 11109876543210 crah cral bit initial value : : ? unde- fined r/w : ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined cra is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the dtc. in normal mode, the entire cra functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65536). it is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches h'0000. in repeat mode or block transfer mode, the cra is divided into two parts: the upper 8 bits (crah) and the lower 8 bits (cral). crah holds the number of transfers while cral functions as an 8-bit transfer counter (1 to 256). cral is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and the contents of crah are sent when the count reaches h'00. this operation is repeated. 7.2.6 dtc transfer count register b (crb) 15 14 13 12 11109876543210 bit initial value : : ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?? ? ? ?? ? ? unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined r/w : crb is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the dtc in block transfer mode. it functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65536) that is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches h'0000. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 179 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.2.7 dtc enable registers (dtcer) 7 dtce7 0 r/w 6 dtce6 0 r/w 5 dtce5 0 r/w 4 dtce4 0 r/w 3 dtce3 0 r/w 0 dtce0 0 r/w 2 dtce2 0 r/w 1 dtce1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : the dtc enable registers comprise five 8-bit readable/writable registers, dtcera to dtcere, with bits corresponding to the interrupt sources that can activate the dtc. these bits enable or disable dtc service for the corresponding interrupt sources. the dtc enable registers are initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. a dtce bit can be set for each interrupt source that can activate the dtc. the correspondence between interrupt sources and dtce bits is shown in table 7.4, together with the vector number generated for each interrupt controller. for dtce bit setting, read/write operations must be performed using bit-manipulation instructions such as bset and bclr. for the initial setting only, however, when multiple activation sources are set at one time, it is possible to disable interrupts and write after executing a dummy read on the relevant register. bit n?dtc activation enable (dtcen) bit n dtcen description 0 dtc activation by this interrupt is disabled (initial value ) [clearing conditions] ? when the disel bit is 1 and the data transfer has ended ? when the specified number of transfers have ended 1 dtc activation by this interrupt is enabled [holding condition] when the disel bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended (n = 7 to 0) a dtce bit can be set for each interrupt source that can activate the dtc. the correspondence between interrupt sources and dtce bits is shown in table 7.4, together with the vector number generated for each interrupt controller. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 180 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.2.8 dtc vector register (dtvecr) 7 swdte 0 r/(w) * 6 dtvec6 0 r/w 5 dtvec5 0 r/w 4 dtvec4 0 r/w 3 dtvec3 0 r/w 0 dtvec0 0 r/w 2 dtvec2 0 r/w 1 dtvec1 0 r/w a value of 1 can always be written to the swdte bit, but 0 can only be written after 1 is read. bit initial value r/w : : : note: * dtvecr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables dtc activation by software, and sets a vector number for the software activation interrupt. dtvecr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bit 7?dtc software activation enable (swdte): enables or disables dtc activation by software. when clearing the swdte bit to 0 by software, write 0 to swdte after reading swdte set to 1. bit 7 swdte description 0 dtc software activation is disabled (initial value ) [clearing condition] when the disel bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended 1 dtc software activation is enabled [holding conditions] ? when the disel bit is 1 and data transfer has ended ? when the specified number of transfers have ended ? during data transfer due to software activation bits 6 to 0?dtc software activation vectors 6 to 0 (dtvec6 to dtvec0): these bits specify a vector number for dtc software activation. the vector address is expressed as h'0400 + ((vector number) << 1). <<1 indicates a one-bit left- shift. for example, when dtvec6 to dtvec0 = h'10, the vector address is h'0420. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 181 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.2.9 module stop control register (mstpcr) 15 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : 14 0 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w mstpcrh mstpcrl mstpcr is a 16-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control. when the mstp14 bit in mstpcr is set to 1, the dtc operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. however, 1 cannot be written in the mstp14 bit while the dtc is operating. for details, see section 19.5, module stop mode. mstpcr is initialized to h'3fff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 14?module stop (mstp14): specifies the dtc module stop mode. bit 14 mstp14 description 0 dtc module stop mode cleared (initial value ) 1 dtc module stop mode set section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 182 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.3 operation 7.3.1 overview when activated, the dtc reads register information that is already stored in memory and transfers data on the basis of that register information. after the data transfer, it writes updated register information back to memory. pre-storage of register information in memory makes it possible to transfer data over any required number of channels. setting the chne bit to 1 makes it possible to perform a number of transfers with a single activation. figure 7.2 shows a flowchart of dtc operation. start read dtc vector next transfer read register information data transfer write register information clear an activation flag chne =1 end no no yes yes transfer counter = 0 or disel = 1 clear dtcer interrupt exception handling figure 7.2 flowchart of dtc operation section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 183 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 the dtc transfer mode can be normal mode, repeat mode, or block transfer mode. the 24-bit sar designates the dtc transfer source address and the 24-bit dar designates the transfer destination address. after each transfer, sar and dar are independently incremented, decremented, or left fixed. table 7.2 outlines the functions of the dtc. table 7.2 dtc functions address registers transfer mode activation source transfer source transfer destination ? normal mode ? one transfer request transfers one byte or one word ? memory addresses are incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 ? up to 65,536 transfers possible ? repeat mode ? one transfer request transfers one byte or one word ? memory addresses are incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 ? after the specified number of transfers (1 to 256), the initial state resumes and operation continues ? block transfer mode ? one transfer request transfers a block of the specified size ? block size is from 1 to 256 bytes or words ? up to 65,536 transfers possible ? a block area can be designated at either the source or destination ? irq ? tpu tgi ? 8-bit timer cmi ? sci txi or rxi ? a/d converter adi ? software 24 bits 24 bits section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 184 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.3.2 activation sources the dtc operates when activated by an interrupt or by a write to dtvecr by software. an interrupt request can be directed to the cpu or dtc, as designated by the corresponding dtcer bit. an interrupt becomes a dtc activation source when the corresponding bit is set to 1, and a cpu interrupt source when the bit is cleared to 0. at the end of a data transfer (or the last consecutive transfer in the case of chain transfer), the activation source or corresponding dtcer bit is cleared. table 7.3 shows activation source and dtcer clearance. the activation source flag, in the case of rxi0, for example, is the rdrf flag of sci0. table 7.3 activation source and dtcer clearance activation source when the disel bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended when the disel bit is 1, or when the specified number of transfers have ended software activation the swdte bit is cleared to 0 the swdte bit remains set to 1 an interrupt is issued to the cpu interrupt activation the corresponding dtcer bit remains set to 1 the activation source flag is cleared to 0 the corresponding dtcer bit is cleared to 0 the activation source flag remains set to 1 a request is issued to the cpu for the activation source interrupt figure 7.3 shows a block diagram of activation source control. for details see section 5, interrupt controller. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 185 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 on-chip supporting module irq interrupt dtvecr selection circuit interrupt controller cpu dtc dtcer clear controller select interrupt request source flag cleared clear clear request interrupt mask figure 7.3 block diagram of dtc activation source control when an interrupt has been designated a dtc activation source, existing cpu mask level and interrupt controller priorities have no effect. if there is more than one activation source at the same time, the dtc operates in accordance with the default priorities. 7.3.3 dtc vector table figure 7.4 shows the correspondence between dtc vector addresses and register information. table 7.4 shows the correspondence between activation, vector addresses, and dtcer bits. when the dtc is activated by software, the vector address is obtained from: h'0400 + (dtvecr[6:0] << 1) (where << 1 indicates a 1-bit left shift). for example, if dtvecr is h'10, the vector address is h'0420. the dtc reads the start address of the register information from the vector address set for each activation source, and then reads the register information from that start address. the register information can be placed at predetermined addresses in the on-chip ram. the start address of the register information should be an integral multiple of four. the configuration of the vector address is the same in both normal and advanced modes, a 2-byte unit being used in both cases. these two bytes specify the lower bits of the address in the on-chip ram. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 186 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 7.4 interrupt sources, dtc vector addresses, and corresponding dtces interrupt source origin of interrupt source vector number vector address dtce * priority write to dtvecr software dtvecr h'0400+ (dtvecr [6:0] <<1) ? high irq0 external pin 16 h'0420 dtcea7 irq1 17 h'0422 dtcea6 irq2 18 h'0424 dtcea5 irq3 19 h'0426 dtcea4 irq4 20 h'0428 dtcea3 irq5 21 h'042a dtcea2 irq6 22 h'042c dtcea1 irq7 23 h'042e dtcea0 adi (a/d conversion end) a/d 28 h'0438 dtceb6 tgi0a (gr0a compare match/ input capture) tpu channel 0 32 h'0440 dtceb5 tgi0b (gr0b compare match/ input capture) 33 h'0442 dtceb4 tgi0c (gr0c compare match/ input capture) 34 h'0444 dtceb3 tgi0d (gr0d compare match/ input capture) 35 h'0446 dtceb2 tgi1a (gr1a compare match/ input capture) tpu channel 1 40 h'0450 dtceb1 tgi1b (gr1b compare match/ input capture) 41 h'0452 dtceb0 tgi2a (gr2a compare match/ input capture) tpu channel 2 44 h'0458 dtcec7 tgi2b (gr2b compare match/ input capture) 45 h'045a dtcec6 low section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 187 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 interrupt source origin of interrupt source vector number vector address dtce * priority tgi3a (gr3a compare match/ input capture) tpu channel 3 48 h'0460 dtcec5 high tgi3b (gr3b compare match/ input capture) 49 h'0462 dtcec4 tgi3c (gr3c compare match/ input capture) 50 h'0464 dtcec3 tgi3d (gr3d compare match/ input capture) 51 h'0466 dtcec2 tgi4a (gr4a compare match/ input capture) tpu channel 4 56 h'0470 dtcec1 tgi4b (gr4b compare match/ input capture) 57 h'0472 dtcec0 tgi5a (gr5a compare match/ input capture) tpu channel 5 60 h'0478 dtced5 tgi5b (gr5b compare match/ input capture) 61 h'047a dtced4 cmia0 64 h'0480 dtced3 cmib0 8-bit timer channel 0 65 h'0482 dtced2 cmia1 68 h'0488 dtced1 cmib1 8-bit timer channel 1 69 h'048a dtced0 rxi0 (reception complete 0) 81 h'04a2 dtcee3 txi0 (transmit data empty 0) sci channel 0 82 h'04a4 dtcee2 rxi1 (reception complete 1) 85 h'04aa dtcee1 txi1 (transmit data empty 1) sci channel 1 86 h'04ac dtcee0 low note: * dtce bits with no corresponding interrupt are reserved, and should be written with 0. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 188 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 register information start address register information chain transfer dtc vector address figure 7.4 correspondence between dtc vector address and register information 7.3.4 location of register information in address space figure 7.5 shows how the register information should be located in the address space. locate the mra, sar, mrb, dar, cra, and crb registers, in that order, from the start address of the register information (contents of the vector address). in the case of chain transfer, register information should be located in consecutive areas. locate the register information in the on-chip ram (addresses: h'fff800 to h'fffbff). register information start address chain transfer register information for 2nd transfer in chain transfer mra sar mrb dar cra crb 4 bytes lower address cra crb register information mra 0123 sar mrb dar figure 7.5 location of register information in address space section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 189 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.3.5 normal mode in normal mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data. from 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. once the specified number of transfers have ended, a cpu interrupt can be requested. table 7.5 lists the register information in normal mode and figure 7.6 shows memory mapping in normal mode. table 7.5 register information in normal mode name abbreviation function dtc source address register sar designates source address dtc destination address register dar designates destination address dtc transfer count register a cra designates transfer count dtc transfer count register b crb not used transfer sar dar figure 7.6 memory mapping in normal mode section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 190 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.3.6 repeat mode in repeat mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data. from 1 to 256 transfers can be specified. once the specified number of transfers have ended, the initial state of the transfer counter and the address register specified as the repeat area is restored, and transfer is repeated. in repeat mode the transfer counter value does not reach h'00, and therefore cpu interrupts cannot be requested when disel = 0. table 7.6 lists the register information in repeat mode and figure 7.7 shows memory mapping in repeat mode. table 7.6 register information in repeat mode name abbreviation function dtc source address register sar designates source address dtc destination address register dar designates destination address dtc transfer count register ah crah holds number of transfers dtc transfer count register al cral designates transfer count (8 bits 2) dtc transfer count register b crb not used transfer sar or dar dar or sar repeat area figure 7.7 memory mapping in repeat mode section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 191 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.3.7 block transfer mode in block transfer mode, one operation transfers one block of data. the block size is 1 to 256. when the transfer of one block ends, the initial state of the block size counter and the address register specified as the block area is restored. the other address register is then incremented, decremented, or left fixed. from 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. once the specified number of transfers have ended, a cpu interrupt is requested. table 7.7 lists the register information in block transfer mode and figure 7.8 shows memory mapping in block transfer mode. table 7.7 register information in block transfer mode name abbreviation function dtc source address register sar designates transfer source address dtc destination address register dar designates destination address dtc transfer count register ah crah holds block size dtc transfer count register al cral designates block size count dtc transfer count register b crb transfer count section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 192 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 transfer sar or dar dar or sar block area first block nth block figure 7.8 memory mapping in block transfer mode section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 193 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.3.8 chain transfer setting the chne bit to 1 enables a number of data transfers to be performed consecutively in response to a single transfer request. sar, dar, cra, crb, mra, and mrb, which define data transfers, can be set independently. figure 7.9 shows the memory map for chain transfer. source source destination destination dtc vector address register information start address register information chne = 1 register information chne = 0 figure 7.9 chain transfer memory map in the case of transfer with chne set to 1, an interrupt request to the cpu is not generated at the end of the specified number of transfers or by setting of the disel bit to 1, and the interrupt source flag for the activation source is not affected. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 194 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.3.9 operation timing figures 7.10 to 7.12 show an example of dtc operation timing. dtc activation request dtc request address vector read transfer information read transfer information write data transfer read write figure 7.10 dtc operation timing (example in normal mode or repeat mode) read write read write data transfer transfer information write transfer information read vector read dtc activation request dtc request address figure 7.11 dtc operation timing (example of block transfer mode, with block size of 2) section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 195 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 read write read write address dtc activation request dtc request data transfer data transfer transfer information write transfer information write transfer information read transfer information read vector read figure 7.12 dtc operation timing (example of chain transfer) 7.3.10 number of dtc execution states table 7.8 lists execution statuses for a single dtc data transfer, and table 7.9 shows the number of states required for each execution status. table 7.8 dtc execution statuses mode vector read i register information read/write j data read k data write l internal operations m normal1 6 113 repeat 1 6 1 1 3 block transfer 1 6 n n 3 n: block size (initial setting of crah and cral) section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 196 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 7.9 number of states required for each execution status object to be accessed on- chip ram on- chip rom on-chip i/o registers external devices bus width 32 16 8 16 8 16 access states 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 vector read s i ? 1 ?? 46+2m2 3+m register information read/write s j 1 ??????? byte data read s k 112223+m23+m word data read s k 114246+2m23+m byte data write s l 112223+m23+m word data write s l 114246+2m23+m execution status internal operation s m 1 the number of execution states is calculated from the formula below. note that means the sum of all transfers activated by one activation event (the number in which the chne bit is set to 1, plus 1). number of execution states = i s i + (j s j + k s k + l s l ) + m s m for example, when the dtc vector address table is located in on-chip rom, normal mode is set, and data is transferred from the on-chip rom to an internal i/o register, the time required for the dtc operation is 13 states. the time from activation to the end of the data write is 10 states. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 197 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.3.11 procedures for using dtc activation by interrupt: the procedure for using the dtc with interrupt activation is as follows: [1] set the mra, mrb, sar, dar, cra, and crb register information in the on-chip ram. [2] set the start address of the register information in the dtc vector address. [3] set the corresponding bit in dtcer to 1. [4] set the enable bits for the interrupt sources to be used as the activation sources to 1. the dtc is activated when an interrupt used as an activation source is generated. [5] after the end of one data transfer, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended, the dtce bit is cleared to 0 and a cpu interrupt is requested. if the dtc is to continue transferring data, set the dtce bit to 1. activation by software: the procedure for using the dtc with software activation is as follows: [1] set the mra, mrb, sar, dar, cra, and crb register information in the on-chip ram. [2] set the start address of the register information in the dtc vector address. [3] check that the swdte bit is 0. [4] write 1 to swdte bit and the vector number to dtvecr. [5] check the vector number written to dtvecr. [6] after the end of one data transfer, if the disel bit is 0 and a cpu interrupt is not requested, the swdte bit is cleared to 0. if the dtc is to continue transferring data, set the swdte bit to 1. when the disel bit is 1, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended, the swdte bit is held at 1 and a cpu interrupt is requested. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 198 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.3.12 examples of use of the dtc (1) normal mode an example is shown in which the dtc is used to receive 128 bytes of data via the sci. [1] set mra to fixed source address (sm1 = sm0 = 0), incrementing destination address (dm1 = 1, dm0 = 0), normal mode (md1 = md0 = 0), and byte size (sz = 0). the dts bit can have any value. set mrb for one data transfer by one interrupt (chne = 0, disel = 0). set the sci rdr address in sar, the start address of the ram area where the data will be received in dar, and 128 (h'0080) in cra. crb can be set to any value. [2] set the start address of the register information at the dtc vector address. [3] set the corresponding bit in dtcer to 1. [4] set the sci to the appropriate receive mode. set the rie bit in scr to 1 to enable the reception complete (rxi) interrupt. since the generation of a receive error during the sci reception operation will disable subsequent reception, the cpu should be enabled to accept receive error interrupts. [5] each time reception of one byte of data ends on the sci, the rdrf flag in ssr is set to 1, an rxi interrupt is generated, and the dtc is activated. the receive data is transferred from rdr to ram by the dtc. dar is incremented and cra is decremented. the rdrf flag is automatically cleared to 0. [6] when cra becomes 0 after the 128 data transfers have ended, the rdrf flag is held at 1, the dtce bit is cleared to 0, and an rxi interrupt request is sent to the cpu. the interrupt handling routine should perform wrap-up processing. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 199 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (2) software activation an example is shown in which the dtc is used to transfer a block of 128 bytes of data by means of software activation. the transfer source address is h'1000 and the destination address is h'2000. the vector number is h'60, so the vector address is h'04c0. [1] set mra to incrementing source address (sm1 = 1, sm0 = 0), incrementing destination address (dm1 = 1, dm0 = 0), block transfer mode (md1 = 1, md0 = 0), and byte size (sz = 0). the dts bit can have any value. set mrb for one block transfer by one interrupt (chne = 0). set the transfer source address (h'1000) in sar, the destination address (h'2000) in dar, and 128 (h'8080) in cra. set 1 (h'0001) in crb. [2] set the start address of the register information at the dtc vector address (h'04c0). [3] check that the swdte bit in dtvecr is 0. check that there is currently no transfer activated by software. [4] write 1 to the swdte bit and the vector number (h'60) to dtvecr. the write data is h'e0. [5] read dtvecr again and check that it is set to the vector number (h'60). if it is not, this indicates that the write failed. this is presumably because an interrupt occurred between steps 3 and 4 and led to a different software activation. to activate this transfer, go back to step 3. [6] if the write was successful, the dtc is activated and a block of 128 bytes of data is transferred. [7] after the transfer, an swdtend interrupt occurs. the interrupt handling routine should clear the swdte bit to 0 and perform other wrap-up processing. section 7 data transfer controller rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 200 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 7.4 interrupts an interrupt request is issued to the cpu when the dtc finishes the specified number of data transfers, or a data transfer for which the disel bit was set to 1. in the case of interrupt activation, the interrupt set as the activation source is generated. these interrupts to the cpu are subject to cpu mask level and interrupt controller priority level control. in the case of activation by software, a software activated data transfer end interrupt (swdtend) is generated. when the disel bit is 1 and one data transfer has ended, or the specified number of transfers have ended, after data transfer ends, the swdte bit is held at 1 and an swdtend interrupt is generated. the interrupt handling routine should clear the swdte bit to 0. when the dtc is activated by software, an swdtend interrupt is not generated during a data transfer wait or during data transfer even if the swdte bit is set to 1. 7.5 usage notes module stop: when the mstp14 bit in mstpcr is set to 1, the dtc clock stops, and the dtc enters the module stop state. however, 1 cannot be written in the mstp14 bit while the dtc is operating. on-chip ram: the mra, mrb, sar, dar, cra, and crb registers are all located in on-chip ram. when the dtc is used, the rame bit in syscr must not be cleared to 0. dtce bit setting: for dtce bit setting, read/write operations must be performed using bit- manipulation instructions such as bset and bclr. for the initial setting only, however, when multiple activation sources are set at one time, it is possible to disable interrupts and write after executing a dummy read on the relevant register. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 201 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 8 i/o ports 8.1 overview the h8s/2345 group has 10 i/o ports (ports 1, 2, 3, and a to g), and one input-only port (port 4). table 8.1 summarizes the port functions. the pins of each port also have other functions. each port includes a data direction register (ddr) that controls input/output (not provided for the input-only port), a data register (dr) that stores output data, and a port register (port) used to read the pin states. ports a to e have a built-in mos input pull-up function, and in addition to dr and ddr, have a mos input pull-up control register (pcr) to control the on/off state of mos input pull-up. ports 3 and a include an open-drain control register (odr) that controls the on/off state of the output buffer pmos. ports 1, and a to f can drive a single ttl load and 90 pf capacitive load, and ports 2, 3, and g can drive a single ttl load and 30 pf capacitive load. all the i/o ports can drive a darlington transistor when in output mode. ports 1, and a to c can drive an led (10 ma sink current). port 2, and interrupt input pins ( irq0 to irq7 ) are schmitt-triggered inputs. for block diagrams of the ports see appendix c, i/o port block diagrams. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 202 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 8.1 port functions port description pins mode 1 * 1 mode 2 * 1 * 2 mode 3 * 1 * 2 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 * 2 mode 7 * 2 port 1 ? 8-bit i/o port p1 7 /tiocb2/ tclkd p1 6 /tioca2 p1 5 /tiocb1/ tclkc p1 4 /tioca1 8-bit i/o port also functioning as tpu i/o pins (tclka, tclkb, tclkc, tclkd, tioca0, tiocb0, tiocc0, tiocd0, tioca1, tiocb1, tioca2, tiocb2) p1 3 /tiocd0/ tclkb/a 23 p1 2 /tiocc0/ tclka/a 22 p1 1 /tiocb0/ a 21 p1 0 /tioca0/ a 20 when ddr = 0: input port also functioning as tpu i/o pins (tclka, tclkb, tioca0, tiocb0, tiocc0, tiocd0) when ddr = 1: address output port 2 8-bit i/o port schmitt- triggered input p2 7 /tiocb5/ tmo1 p2 6 /tioca5/ tmo0 p2 5 /tiocb4/ tmci1 p2 4 /tioca4/ tmri1 p2 3 /tiocd3/ tmci0 p2 2 /tiocc3/ tmri0 p2 1 /tiocb3 p2 0 /tioca3 8-bit i/o port also functioning as tpu i/o pins (tioca3, tiocb3, tiocc3, tiocd3, tioca4, tiocb4, tioca5, tiocb5), and 8-bit timer (channels 0 and 1) i/o pins (tmri0, tmci0, tmo0, tmri1, tmci1, tmo1) port 3 6-bit i/o port open-drain output capability schmitt- triggered input ( irq5 , irq4 ) p3 5 /sck1/ irq5 p3 4 /sck0/ irq4 p3 3 /rxd1 p3 2 /rxd0 p3 1 /txd1 p3 0 /txd0 6-bit i/o port also functioning as sci (channels 0 and 1) i/o pins (txd0, rxd0, sck0, txd1, rxd1, sck1) and interrupt input pins ( irq5 , irq4 ) section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 203 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port description pins mode 1 * 1 mode 2 * 1 * 2 mode 3 * 1 * 2 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 * 2 mode 7 * 2 port 4 8-bit input port p4 7 /an7/ da1 p4 6 /an6/ da0 p4 5 /an5 p4 4 /an4 p4 3 /an3 p4 2 /an2 p4 1 /an1 p4 0 /an0 8-bit input port also functioning as a/d converter analog inputs (an7 to an0) and d/a converter analog outputs (da1 and da0) port a 4-bit i/o port built-in mos input pull-up open-drain output capability pa 3 /a 19 to pa 0 /a 16 i/o ports address output when ddr = 0 (after reset): input ports when ddr = 1: address output i/o ports port b 8-bit i/o port built-in mos input pull-up pb 7 /a 15 to pb 0 /a 8 address output when ddr = 0 (after reset): input port when ddr = 1: address output i/o port address output when ddr = 0 (after reset): input port when ddr = 1: address output i/o port port c 8-bit i/o port built-in mos input pull-up pc 7 /a 7 to pc 0 /a 0 address output when ddr = 0 (after reset): input port when ddr = 1: address output i/o port address output when ddr = 0 (after reset): input port when ddr = 1: address output i/o port port d 8-bit i/o port built-in mos input pull-up pd 7 /d 15 to pd 0 /d 8 data bus input/ output i/o port data bus input/output i/o port section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 204 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port description pins mode 1 * 1 mode 2 * 1 * 2 mode 3 * 1 * 2 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 * 2 mode 7 * 2 port e 8-bit i/o port built-in mos input pull-up pe 7 /d 7 to pe 0 /d 0 in 8-bit bus mode: i/o port in 16-bit bus mode: data bus input/output i/o port in 8-bit bus mode: i/o port in 16-bit bus mode: data bus input/output i/o port pf 7 / when ddr = 0: input port when ddr = 1 (after reset): output when ddr = 0 (after reset): input port when ddr = 1: output when ddr = 0: input port when ddr = 1 (after reset): output when ddr = 0 (after reset): input port when ddr = 1: output pf 6 / as pf 5 / rd pf 4 / hwr i/o port i/o port pf 3 / lwr / irq3 as , rd , hwr , lwr output as , rd , hwr , lwr output when waite = 0 (after reset): i/o port also functioning as interrupt input pin ( irq2 ) when waite = 0 (after reset): i/o port also functioning as interrupt input pin ( irq2 ) pf 2 / wait / irq2 when waite = 1: wait input also functioning as interrupt input pin ( irq2 ) when waite = 1: wait input also functioning as interrupt input pin ( irq2 ) port f 8-bit i/o port schmitt- triggered input ( irq 3 to irq0 ) pf 1 / back / irq1 pf 0 / breq / irq0 when brle = 0 (after reset): i/o port also functioning as interrupt input pins ( irq1 , irq0 ) i/o port also func- tioning as interrupt input pins ( irq3 to irq0 ) when brle = 0 (after reset): i/o port also functioning as interrupt input pins ( irq1 , irq0 ) i/o port also func- tioning as interrupt input pins ( irq3 to irq0 ) when brle = 1: breq input, back output also functioning as interrupt input pins ( irq1 , irq0 ) when brle = 1: breq input, back output also functioning as interrupt input pins ( irq1 , irq0 ) section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 205 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port description pins mode 1 * 1 mode 2 * 1 * 2 mode 3 * 1 * 2 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 * 2 mode 7 * 2 pg 4 / cs0 when ddr = 0 * 3 : input port when ddr = 1 * 4 : cs0 output when ddr = 0 * 3 : input port when ddr = 1 * 4 : cs0 output pg 3 / cs1 pg 2 / cs2 pg 1 / cs3 / irq7 when ddr = 0 (after reset): input port also functioning as interrupt input pin ( irq7 ) when ddr = 1: cs1 , cs2 , cs3 output also functioning as interrupt input pin ( irq7 ) port g 5-bit i/o port schmitt- triggered input ( irq7 , irq6 ) pg 0 / irq6 / adtrg i/o port also functioning as interrupt input pins ( irq7 , irq6 ) and a/d converter input pin ( adtrg ) i/o port also func- tioning as interrupt input pins ( irq7 , irq6 ) and a/d converter input pin ( a dtr g ) i/o port also functioning as interrupt input pin ( irq6 ) and a/d converter input pin ( adtrg ) i/o port also func- tions as interrupt input pins ( irq7 , irq6 ) and a/d converter input pin ( adtr g ) notes: 1. modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. 2. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. 3. after a reset in mode 2 or 6. 4. after a reset in mode 1, 4 or 5. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 206 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.2 port 1 8.2.1 overview port 1 is an 8-bit i/o port. port 1 pins also function as tpu i/o pins (tclka, tclkb, tclkc, tclkd, tioca0, tiocb0, tiocc0, tiocd0, tioca1, tiocb1, tioca2, and tiocb2) and an address bus output function. port 1 pin functions change according to the operating mode. figure 8.1 shows the port 1 pin configuration. p1 7 (i/o)/tiocb2 (i/o)/tclkd (input) p1 6 (i/o)/tioca2 (i/o) p1 5 (i/o)/tiocb1 (i/o)/tclkc (input) p1 4 (i/o)/tioca1 (i/o) p1 3 (i/o)/tiocd0 (i/o)/tclkb (input)/a 23 (output) p1 2 (i/o)/tiocc0 (i/o)/tclka (input)/a 22 (output) p1 1 (i/o)/tiocb0 (i/o)/a 21 (output) p1 0 (i/o)/tioca0 (i/o)/a 20 (output) port 1 note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. port 1 pins p1 7 (i/o)/tiocb2 (i/o)/tclkd (input) p1 6 (i/o)/tioca2 (i/o) p1 5 (i/o)/tiocb1 (i/o)/tclkc (input) p1 4 (i/o)/tioca1 (i/o) p1 3 (i/o)/tiocd0 (i/o)/tclkb (input) p1 2 (i/o)/tiocc0 (i/o)/tclka (input) p1 1 (i/o)/tiocb0 (i/o) p1 0 (i/o)/tioca0 (i/o) pin functions in modes 1 to 3 and 7 * p1 7 (i/o)/tiocb2 (i/o)/tclkd (input) p1 6 (i/o)/tioca2 (i/o) p1 5 (i/o)/tiocb1 (i/o)/tclkc (input) p1 4 (i/o)/tioca1 (i/o) p1 3 (input)/tiocd0 (i/o)/tclkb (input)/a 23 (output) p1 2 (input)/tiocc0 (i/o)/tclka (input)/a 22 (output) p1 1 (input)/tiocb0 (i/o)/a 21 (output) p1 0 (input)/tioca0 (i/o)/a 20 (output) pin functions in modes 4 to 6 * figure 8.1 port 1 pin functions section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 207 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.2.2 register configuration table 8.2 shows the port 1 register configuration. table 8.2 port 1 registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * port 1 data direction register p1ddr w h'00 h'feb0 port 1 data register p1dr r/w h'00 h'ff60 port 1 register port1 r undefined h'ff50 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port 1 data direction register (p1ddr) 7 p17ddr 0 w 6 p16ddr 0 w 5 p15ddr 0 w 4 p14ddr 0 w 3 p13ddr 0 w 0 p10ddr 0 w 2 p12ddr 0 w 1 p11ddr 0 w bit initial value r/w : : : p1ddr is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 1. p1ddr cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. setting a p1ddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. p1ddr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. as the tpu is initialized by a manual reset, the pin states are determined by the p1ddr and p1dr specifications. whether the address output pins maintain their output state or go to the high-impedance state in a transition to software standby mode is selected by the ope bit in sbycr. ? modes 1 to 3 and 7 * the corresponding port 1 pins are output ports when p1ddr is set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. ? modes 4 to 6 * the corresponding port 1 pins are address outputs when p13ddr to p10ddr are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. the corresponding port 1 pins are output ports when p17ddr to p14ddr are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 208 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. port 1 data register (p1dr) 7 p17dr 0 r/w 6 p16dr 0 r/w 5 p15dr 0 r/w 4 p14dr 0 r/w 3 p13dr 0 r/w 0 p10dr 0 r/w 2 p12dr 0 r/w 1 p11dr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : p1dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 1 pins (p1 7 to p1 0 ). p1dr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. port 1 register (port1) 7 p17 ? * r 6 p16 ? * r 5 p15 ? * r 4 p14 ? * r 3 p13 ? * r 0 p10 ? * r 2 p12 ? * r 1 p11 ? * r bit initial value r/w note: * determined by state of pins p1 7 to p1 0 . : : : port1 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. it cannot be written to. writing of output data for the port 1 pins (p1 7 to p1 0 ) must always be performed on p1dr. if a port 1 read is performed while p1ddr bits are set to 1, the p1dr values are read. if a port 1 read is performed while p1ddr bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. after a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, port1 contents are determined by the pin states, as p1ddr and p1dr are initialized. port1 retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 209 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.2.3 pin functions port 1 pins also function as tpu i/o pins (tclka, tclkb, tclkc, tclkd, tioca0, tiocb0, tiocc0, tiocd0, tioca1, tiocb1, tioca2, and tiocb2) and address output pins (a 23 to a 20 ). port 1 pin functions are shown in table 8.3. table 8.3 port 1 pin functions pin selection method and pin functions p1 7 /tiocb2/ tclkd the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the tpu channel 2 setting by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr2, bits iob3 to iob0 in tior2, bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr2, bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr0 and tcr5, and bit p17ddr. tpu channel 2 setting table below (1) table below (2) p17ddr ? 01 pin function tiocb2 output p1 7 input p1 7 output tiocb2 input * 1 tclkd input * 2 tpu channel 2 setting (2) (1) (2) (2) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000, b'01xx b'0010 b'0011 iob3 to iob0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 ? b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr1, cclr0 ???? other than b'10 b'10 output function ? output compare output ?? pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care notes: 1. tiocb2 input when tpu channel 2 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (iob3 to iob0 = b'1xxx). 2. tclkd input when the setting for either tcr0 or tcr5 is: tpsc2 to tpsc0 = b'111. tclkd input when channels 2 and 4 are set to phase counting mode (md3 to md0 = b'01xx). section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 210 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p1 6 /tioca2 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the tpu channel 2 setting by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr2, bits ioa3 to ioa0 in tior2, bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr2, and bit p16ddr. tpu channel 2 setting table below (1) table below (2) p16ddr ? 01 pin function tioca2 output p1 6 input p1 6 output tioca2 input * 1 tpu channel 2 setting (2) (1) (2) (1) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000, b'01xx b'001x b'0011 b'0011 ioa3 to ioa0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr1, cclr0 ???? other than b'01 b'01 output function ? output compare output ? pwm mode 1 output * 2 pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care notes: 1. tioca2 input when tpu channel 2 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (ioa3 to ioa0 = b'10xx). 2. tiocb2 output is disabled. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 211 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p1 5 /tiocb1/ tclkc the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the tpu channel 1 setting by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr1, bits iob3 to iob0 in tior1, bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr1, bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr0, tcr2, tcr4, and tcr5, and bit p15ddr. tpu channel 1 setting table below (1) table below (2) p15ddr ? 01 pin function tiocb1 output p1 5 input p1 5 output tiocb1 input * 1 tclkc input * 2 tpu channel 1 setting (2) (1) (2) (2) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000, b'01xx b'0010 b'0011 iob3 to iob0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 ? b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr1, cclr0 ???? other than b'10 b'10 output function ? output compare output ?? pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care notes: 1. tiocb1 input when tpu channel 1 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (iob3 to iob0 = b'10xx). 2. tclkc input when the setting for either tcr0 or tcr2 is: tpsc2 to tpsc0 = b'110; or when the setting for either tcr4 or tcr5 is tpsc2 to tpsc0 = b'101. tclkc input when channels 2 and 4 are set to phase counting mode (md3 to md0 = b'01xx). section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 212 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p1 4 /tioca1 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the tpu channel 1 setting by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr1, bits ioa3 to ioa0 in tior1, bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr1, and bit p14ddr. tpu channel 1 setting table below (1) table below (2) p14ddr ? 01 pin function tioca1 output p1 4 input p1 4 output tioca1 input * 1 tpu channel 1 setting (2) (1) (2) (1) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000, b'01xx b'001x b'0010 b'0011 ioa3 to ioa0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr1, cclr0 ???? other than b'01 b'01 output function ? output compare output ? pwm mode 1 output * 2 pwm mode 2 output ? x: don't care notes: 1. tioca1 input when tpu channel 1 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (ioa3 to ioa0 = b'10xx). 2. tiocb1 output is disabled. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 213 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p1 3 /tiocd0/ tclkb/a 23 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, tpu channel 0 setting (by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr0, bits iod3 to iod0 in tior0l, and bits cclr2 to cclr0 in tcr0), bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr0 to tcr2, and bit p13ddr. operating mode modes 1, 2, 3, 7 * 1 modes 4, 5, 6 * 1 tpu channel 0 setting table below (1) table below (2) table below (1) table below (2) p13ddr ? 01 0 1 0 1 pin function tiocd0 output p1 3 input p1 3 output tiocd0 output a 23 output p1 3 input a 23 output tiocd0 input * 2 tiocd0 input * 2 tclkb input * 3 tpu channel 0 setting (2) (1) (2) (2) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000 b'0010 b'0011 iod3 to iod0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 ? b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr2 to cclr0 ???? other than b'110 b'110 output function ? output compare output ?? pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care notes: 1. modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. 2. tiocd0 input when tpu channel 0 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (iod3 to iod0 = b'10xx). 3. tclkb input when the tcr0, tcr1, or tcr2 setting is: tpsc2 to tpsc0 = b'101. tclkb input when channels 1 and 5 are set to phase counting mode (md3 to md0 = b'01xx). section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 214 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p1 2 /tiocc0/ tclka/a 22 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, tpu channel 0 setting (by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr0, bits ioc3 to ioc0 in tior0l, and bits cclr2 to cclr0 in tcr0), bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr0 to tcr2, and bit p12ddr. operating mode modes 1, 2, 3, 7 * 1 modes 4, 5, 6 * 1 tpu channel 0 setting table below (1) table below (2) table below (1) table below (2) p12ddr ? 01 0 101 pin function tiocc0 output p1 2 input p1 2 output tiocc0 output a 22 output p1 2 input a 22 output tiocc0 input * 2 tiocc0 input * 2 tclka input * 3 tpu channel 0 setting (2) (1) (2) (1) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000 b'001x b'0010 b'0011 ioc3 to ioc0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr2 to cclr0 ???? other than b'101 b'101 output function ? output compare output ? pwm mode 1 output * 4 pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care notes: 1. modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. 2. tiocc0 input when tpu channel 0 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (ioc3 to ioc0 = b'10xx). 3. tclka input when the tcr0 to tcr5 setting is: tpsc2 to tpsc0 = b'100. tclka input when channel 1 and 5 are set to phase counting mode (md3 to md0 = b'01xx). 4. tiocd0 output is disabled. when bfa = 1 or bfb = 1 in tmdr0, output is disabled and setting (2) applies. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 215 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p1 1 /tiocb0/ a 21 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, tpu channel 0 setting (by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr0, bits iob3 to iob0 in tior0h, and bits cclr2 to cclr0 in tcr0), and bit p11ddr. operating mode modes 1, 2, 3, 7 * 1 modes 4, 5, 6 * 1 tpu channel 0 setting table below (1) table below (2) table below (1) table below (2) p11ddr ? 010 101 pin function tiocb0 output p1 1 input p1 1 output tiocb0 output a 21 output p1 1 input a 21 output tiocb0 input * 2 tiocb0 input * 2 tpu channel 0 setting (2) (1) (2) (2) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000 b'0010 b'0011 iob3 to iob0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 ? b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr2 to cclr0 ???? other than b'010 b'010 output function ? output compare output ?? pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care notes: 1. modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. 2. tiocb0 input when tpu channel 0 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (iob3 to iob0 = b'10xx). section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 216 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p1 0 /tioca0/ a 20 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, tpu channel 0 setting (by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr0, bits ioa3 to ioa0 in tior0h, and bits cclr2 to cclr0 in tcr0), and bit p10ddr. operating mode modes 1, 2, 3, 7 * 1 modes 4, 5, 6 * 1 tpu channel 0 setting table below (1) table below (2) table below (1) table below (2) p10ddr ? 010 101 pin function tioca0 output p1 0 input p1 0 output tioca0 output a 20 output p1 0 input a 20 output tioca0 input * 2 tioca0 input * 2 tpu channel 0 setting (2) (1) (2) (1) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000 b'001x b'0010 b'0011 ioa3 to ioa0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr2 to cclr0 ???? other than b'001 b'001 output function ? output compare output ? pwm mode 1 output * 3 pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care notes: 1. modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. 2. tioca0 input when tpu channel 0 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (ioa3 to ioa0 = b'10xx). 3. tiocb0 output is disabled. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 217 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.3 port 2 8.3.1 overview port 2 is an 8-bit i/o port. port 2 pins also function as tpu i/o pins (tioca3, tiocb3, tiocc3, tiocd3, tioca4, tiocb4, tioca5, and tiocb5), and 8-bit timer i/o pins (tmri0, tmci0, tmo0, tmri1, tmci1, and tmo1). port 2 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. port 2 uses schmitt-triggered input. figure 8.2 shows the port 2 pin configuration. p2 7 (i/o)/tiocb5 (i/o)/tmo1 (output) p2 6 (i/o)/tioca5 (i/o)/tmo0 (output) p2 5 (i/o)/tiocb4 (i/o)/tmci1 (input) p2 4 (i/o)/tioca4 (i/o)/tmri1 (input) p2 3 (i/o)/tiocd3 (i/o)/tmci0 (input) p2 2 (i/o)/tiocc3 (i/o)/tmri0 (input) p2 1 (i/o)/tiocb3 (i/o) p2 0 (i/o)/tioca3 (i/o) port 2 port 2 pins figure 8.2 port 2 pin functions section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 218 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.3.2 register configuration table 8.4 shows the port 2 register configuration. table 8.4 port 2 registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * port 2 data direction register p2ddr w h'00 h'feb1 port 2 data register p2dr r/w h'00 h'ff61 port 2 register port2 r undefined h'ff51 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port 2 data direction register (p2ddr) 7 p27ddr 0 w 6 p26ddr 0 w 5 p25ddr 0 w 4 p24ddr 0 w 3 p23ddr 0 w 0 p20ddr 0 w 2 p22ddr 0 w 1 p21ddr 0 w bit initial value r/w : : : p2ddr is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 2. p2ddr cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. setting a p2ddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 2 pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. p2ddr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. as the tpu and 8-bit timer are initialized by a manual reset, the pin states are determined by the p2ddr and p2dr specifications. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 219 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port 2 data register (p2dr) 7 p27dr 0 r/w 6 p26dr 0 r/w 5 p25dr 0 r/w 4 p24dr 0 r/w 3 p23dr 0 r/w 0 p20dr 0 r/w 2 p22dr 0 r/w 1 p21dr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : p2dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 2 pins (p2 7 to p2 0 ). p2dr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. port 2 register (port2) 7 p27 ? * r 6 p26 ? * r 5 p25 ? * r 4 p24 ? * r 3 p23 ? * r 0 p20 ? * r 2 p22 ? * r 1 p21 ? * r bit initial value r/w : : : note: * determined by state of pins p2 7 to p2 0 . port2 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. it cannot be written to. writing of output data for the port 2 pins (p2 7 to p2 0 ) must always be performed on p2dr. if a port 2 read is performed while p2ddr bits are set to 1, the p2dr values are read. if a port 2 read is performed while p2ddr bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. after a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, port2 contents are determined by the pin states, as p2ddr and p2dr are initialized. port2 retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 220 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.3.3 pin functions port 2 pins also function as tpu i/o pins (tioca3, tiocb3, tiocc3, tiocd3, tioca4, tiocb4, tioca5, and tiocb5), and 8-bit timer i/o pins (tmri0, tmci0, tmo0, tmri1, tmci1, and tmo1). port 2 pin functions are shown in table 8.5. table 8.5 port 2 pin functions pin selection method and pin functions p2 7 /tiocb5/ tmo1 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the tpu channel 5 setting by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr5, bits iob3 to iob0 in tior5, bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr5, bits os3 to os0 in tcsr1, and bit p27ddr. os3 to os0 all 0 any 1 tpu channel 5 setting table below (1) table below (2) ? p27ddr ? 01 ? pin function p2 7 input p2 7 output tmo1 output tiocb5 output tiocb5 input * tpu channel 5 setting (2) (1) (2) (2) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000, b'01xx b'0010 b'0011 iob3 to iob0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 ? b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr1, cclr0 ???? other than b'10 b'10 output function ? output compare output ?? pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care note: * tiocb5 input when tpu channel 5 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (iob3 to iob0 = b'1xxx). section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 221 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p2 6 /tioca5/ tmo0 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the tpu channel 5 setting by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr5, bits ioa3 to ioa0 in tior5, bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr5, bits os3 to os0 in tcsr0, and bit p26ddr. os3 to os0 all 0 any 1 tpu channel 5 setting table below (1) table below (2) ? p26ddr ? 01 ? nder6 ?? 0 ? pin function p2 6 input p2 6 output tmo0 output tioca5 output tioca5 input * 1 tpu channel 5 setting (2) (1) (2) (1) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000, b'01xx b'001x b'0010 b'0011 ioa3 to ioa0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr1, cclr0 ???? other than b'01 b'01 output function ? output compare output ? pwm mode 1 output * 2 pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care notes: 1. tioca5 input when tpu channel 5 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (ioa3 to ioa0 = b'1xxx). 2. tiocb5 output is disabled. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 222 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p2 5 /tiocb4/ tmci1 this pin is used as the 8-bit timer external clock input pin when external clock is selected with bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr1. the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the tpu channel 4 setting by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr4 and bits iob3 to iob0 in tior4, bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr4, and bit p25ddr. tpu channel 4 setting table below (1) table below (2) p25ddr ? 01 pin function tiocb4 output p2 5 input p2 5 output tiocb4 input * tmci1 input tpu channel 4 setting (2) (1) (2) (2) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000, b'01xx b'0010 b'0011 iob3 to iob0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 ? b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr1, cclr0 ???? other than b'10 b'10 output function ? output compare output ?? pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care note: * tiocb4 input when tpu channel 4 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (iob3 to iob0 = b'10xx). section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 223 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p2 4 /tioca4/ tmri1 this pin is used as the 8-bit timer counter reset pin when bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr1 are both set to 1. the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the tpu channel 4 setting by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr4, bits ioa3 to ioa0 in tior4, bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr4, and bit p24ddr. tpu channel 4 setting table below (1) table below (2) p24ddr ? 01 pin function tioca4 output p2 4 input p2 4 output tioca4 input * 1 tmri1 input tpu channel 4 setting (2) (1) (2) (1) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000, b'01xx b'001x b'0010 b'0011 ioa3 to ioa0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr1, cclr0 ???? other than b'01 b'01 output function ? output compare output ? pwm mode 1 output * 2 pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care notes: 1. tioca4 input when tpu channel 4 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (ioa3 to ioa0 = b'10xx). 2. tiocb4 output is disabled. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 224 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p2 3 /tiocd3/ tmci0 this pin is used as the 8-bit timer external clock input pin when external clock is selected with bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr0. the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the tpu channel 3 setting by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr3, bits iod3 to iod0 in tior3l, bits cclr2 to cclr0 in tcr3, and bit p23ddr. tpu channel 3 setting table below (1) table below (2) p23ddr ? 01 pin function tiocd3 output p2 3 input p2 3 output tiocd3 input * tmci0 input tpu channel 3 setting (2) (1) (2) (2) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000 b'0010 b'0011 iod3 to iod0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 ? b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr2 to cclr0 ???? other than b'110 b'110 output function ? output compare output ?? pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care note: * tiocd3 input when tpu channel 3 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (iod3 to iod0 = b'10xx). section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 225 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p2 2 /tiocc3/ tmci0 this pin is used as the 8-bit timer counter reset pin when bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr0 are both set to 1. the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the tpu channel 3 setting by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr3, bits ioc3 to ioc0 in tior3l, bits cclr2 to cclr0 in tcr3, and bit p22ddr. tpu channel 3 setting table below (1) table below (2) p22ddr ? 01 pin function tiocc3 output p2 2 input p2 2 output tiocc3 input * 1 tmri0 input tpu channel 3 setting (2) (1) (2) (1) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000 b'001x b'0010 b'0011 ioc3 to ioc0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr2 to cclr0 ???? other than b'101 b'101 output function ? output compare output ? pwm mode 1 output * 2 pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care notes: 1. tiocc3 input when tpu channel 3 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (ioc3 to ioc0 = b'10xx). 2. tiocd3 output is disabled. when bfa = 1 or bfb = 1 in tmdr3, output is disabled and setting (2) applies. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 226 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p2 1 /tiocb3 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the tpu channel 3 setting by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr3, bits iob3 to iob0 in tior3h, bits cclr2 to cclr0 in tcr3, and bit p21ddr. tpu channel 3 setting table below (1) table below (2) p21ddr ? 01 pin function tiocb3 output p2 1 input p2 1 output tiocb3 input * tpu channel 3 setting (2) (1) (2) (2) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000 b'0010 b'0011 iob3 to iob0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 ? b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr2 to cclr0 ???? other than b'010 b'010 output function ? output compare output ?? pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care note: * tiocb3 input when tpu channel 3 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (iob3 to iob0 = b'10xx). section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 227 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p2 0 /tioca3 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the tpu channel 3 setting by bits md3 to md0 in tmdr3, bits ioa3 to ioa0 in tior3h, bits cclr2 to cclr0 in tcr3, and bit p20ddr. tpu channel 3 setting table below (1) table below (2) p20ddr ? 01 pin function tioca3 output p2 0 input p2 0 output tioca3 input * 1 tpu channel 3 setting (2) (1) (2) (1) (1) (2) md3 to md0 b'0000 b'001x b'0010 b'0011 ioa3 to ioa0 b'0000 b'0100 b'1xxx b'0001 to b'0011 b'0101 to b'0111 b'xx00 other than b'xx00 cclr2 to cclr0 ???? other than b'001 b'001 output function ? output compare output ? pwm mode 1 output * 2 pwm mode 2 output ? x: don ? t care notes: 1. tioca3 input when tpu channel 3 is in normal operation mode (md3 to md0 = b'0000) and input capture is set (ioa3 to ioa0 = b'10xx). 2. tiocb3 output is disabled. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 228 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.4 port 3 8.4.1 overview port 3 is a 6-bit i/o port. port 3 pins also function as sci i/o pins (txd0, rxd0, sck0, txd1, rxd1, and sck1) and interrupt input pins ( irq4 , irq5 ). port 3 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. the interrupt input pins ( irq4 , irq5 ) are schmitt-triggered inputs. figure 8.3 shows the port 3 pin configuration. p3 5 p3 4 p3 3 p3 2 p3 1 p3 0 (i/o)/ (i/o)/ (i/o)/ (i/o)/ (i/o)/ (i/o)/ sck1 sck0 rxd1 rxd0 txd1 txd0 (i/o)/ (i/o)/ (input) (input) (output) (output) port 3 pins port 3 irq5 (input) irq4 (input) figure 8.3 port 3 pin functions 8.4.2 register configuration table 8.6 shows the port 3 register configuration. table 8.6 port 3 registers name abbreviation r/w initial value * 1 address * 2 port 3 data direction register p3ddr w h'00 h'feb2 port 3 data register p3dr r/w h'00 h'ff62 port 3 register port3 r undefined h'ff52 port 3 open drain control register p3odr r/w h'00 h'ff76 notes: 1. value of bits 5 to 0. 2 . lower 16 bits of the address. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 229 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port 3 data direction register (p3ddr) 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 p35ddr 0 w 4 p34ddr 0 w 3 p33ddr 0 w 0 p30ddr 0 w 2 p32ddr 0 w 1 p31ddr 0 w bit initial value r/w : : : p3ddr is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 3. bits 7 and 6 are reserved. p3ddr cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. setting a p3ddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 3 pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. p3ddr is initialized to h'00 (bits 5 to 0) by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. as the sci is initialized, the pin states are determined by the p3ddr and p3dr specifications. port 3 data register (p3dr) 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 p35dr 0 r/w 4 p34dr 0 r/w 3 p33dr 0 r/w 0 p30dr 0 r/w 2 p32dr 0 r/w 1 p31dr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : p3dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 3 pins (p3 5 to p3 0 ). bits 7 and 6 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. p3dr is initialized to h'00 (bits 5 to 0) by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 230 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port 3 register (port3) 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 p35 ? * r 4 p34 ? * r 3 p33 ? * r 0 p30 ? * r 2 p32 ? * r 1 p31 ? * r bit initial value r/w : : : note: * determined by state of pins p3 5 to p3 0 . port3 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. writing of output data for the port 3 pins (p3 5 to p3 0 ) must always be performed on p3dr. bits 7 and 6 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. if a port 3 read is performed while p3ddr bits are set to 1, the p3dr values are read. if a port 3 read is performed while p3ddr bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. after a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, port3 contents are determined by the pin states, as p3ddr and p3dr are initialized. port3 retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. port 3 open drain control register (p3odr) 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 p35odr 0 r/w 4 p34odr 0 r/w 3 p33odr 0 r/w 0 p30odr 0 r/w 2 p32odr 0 r/w 1 p31odr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : p3odr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the pmos on/off status for each port 3 pin (p3 5 to p3 0 ). bits 7 and 6 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. setting a p3odr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 3 pin an nmos open-drain output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin a cmos output pin. p3odr is initialized to h'00 (bits 5 to 0) by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 231 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.4.3 pin functions port 3 pins also function as sci i/o pins (txd0, rxd0, sck0, txd1, rxd1, and sck1) and interrupt input pins ( irq4 , irq5 ). port 3 pin functions are shown in table 8.7. table 8.7 port 3 pin functions pin selection method and pin functions p3 5 /sck1/ irq5 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit c/ a in the sci1 smr, bits cke0 and cke1 in scr, and bit p35ddr. cke1 0 1 c/ a 01 ? cke0 0 1 ?? p35ddr 0 1 ??? pin function p3 5 input pin p3 5 output pin * 1 sck1 output pin * 1 sck1 output pin * 1 sck1 input pin irq5 interrupt input pin * 2 notes: 1. when p35odr = 1, the pin becomes on nmos open-drain output. 2. when this pin is used as an external interrupt input, it should not be used as an input/output pin with other functions. p3 4 /sck0/ irq4 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit c/ a in the sci0 smr, bits cke0 and cke1 in scr, and bit p34ddr. cke1 0 1 c/ a 01 ? cke0 0 1 ?? p34ddr 0 1 ??? pin function p3 4 input pin p3 4 output pin * 1 sck0 output pin * 1 sck0 output pin * 1 sck0 input pin irq4 interrupt input pin * 2 notes: 1. when p34odr = 1, the pin becomes an nmos open-drain output. 2. when this pin is used as an external interrupt input, it should not be used as an input/output pin with other functions. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 232 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions p3 3 /rxd1 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit re in the sci1 scr, and bit p33ddr. re 0 1 p33ddr 0 1 ? pin function p3 3 input pin p3 3 output pin * rxd1 input pin note: * when p33odr = 1, the pin becomes an nmos open-drain output. p3 2 /rxd0 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit re in the sci0 scr, and bit p32ddr. re 0 1 p32ddr 0 1 ? pin function p3 2 input pin p3 2 output pin * rxd0 input pin note: * when p32odr = 1, the pin becomes an nmos open-drain output. p3 1 /txd1 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit te in the sci1 scr, and bit p31ddr. te 0 1 p31ddr 0 1 ? pin function p3 1 input pin p3 1 output pin * txd1 output pin note: * when p31odr = 1, the pin becomes an nmos open-drain output. p3 0 /txd0 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit te in the sci0 scr, and bit p30ddr. te 0 1 p30ddr 0 1 ? pin function p3 0 input pin p3 0 output pin * txd0 output pin note: * when p30odr = 1, the pin becomes an nmos open-drain output. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 233 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.5 port 4 8.5.1 overview port 4 is an 8-bit input-only port. port 4 pins also function as a/d converter analog input pins (an0 to an7) and d/a converter analog output pins (da0 and da1). port 4 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. figure 8.4 shows the port 4 pin configuration. p4 7 p4 6 p4 5 p4 4 p4 3 p4 2 p4 1 p4 0 (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ an7 (input)/da1 (output) an6 (input)/da0 (output) an5 (input) an4 (input) an3 (input) an2 (input) an1 (input) an0 (input) port 4 pins port 4 figure 8.4 port 4 pin functions 8.5.2 register configuration table 8.8 shows the port 4 register configuration. port 4 is an input-only port, and does not have a data direction register or data register. table 8.8 port 4 registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * port 4 register port4 r undefined h'ff53 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 234 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port 4 register (port4) 7 p47 ? * r 6 p46 ? * r 5 p45 ? * r 4 p44 ? * r 3 p43 ? * r 0 p40 ? * r 2 p42 ? * r 1 p41 ? * r bit initial value r/w : : : note: * determined by state of pins p4 7 to p4 0 . port4 is an 8-bit read-only port. a read always returns the pin states. writes are invalid. 8.5.3 pin functions port 4 pins also function as a/d converter analog input pins (an0 to an7) and d/a converter analog output pins (da0 and da1). 8.6 port a 8.6.1 overview port a is an 4-bit i/o port. port a pins also function as address bus outputs. the pin functions change according to the operating mode. port a has a built-in mos input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. figure 8.5 shows the port a pin configuration. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 235 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pa 3 /a 19 pa 2 /a 18 pa 1 /a 17 pa 0 /a 16 a 19 a 18 a 17 a 16 note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. (output) (output) (output) (output) port a pins pin functions in modes 4 and 5 pin functions in mode 6 * pa 3 pa 2 pa 1 pa 0 (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) pin functions in modes 1, 2, 3, and 7 * pa 3 pa 2 pa 1 pa 0 (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ a 19 a 18 a 17 a 16 (output) (output) (output) (output) port a figure 8.5 port a pin functions 8.6.2 register configuration table 8.9 shows the port a register configuration. table 8.9 port a registers name abbreviation r/w initial value * 1 address * 2 port a data direction register paddr w h'0 h'feb9 port a data register padr r/w h'0 h'ff69 port a register porta r undefined h'ff59 port a mos pull-up control register papcr r/w h'0 h'ff70 port a open-drain control register paodr r/w h'0 h'ff77 notes: 1. value of bits 3 to 0. 2. lower 16 bits of the address. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 236 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port a data direction register (paddr) 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 ? undefined ? 3 pa3ddr 0 w 0 pa0ddr 0 w 2 pa2ddr 0 w 1 pa1ddr 0 w bit initial value r/w : : : paddr is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port a. paddr cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. bits 7 to 4 are reserved. paddr is initialized to h'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. the ope bit in sbycr is used to select whether the address output pins retain their output state or become high- impedance when a transition is made to software standby mode. ? modes 1, 2, 3, and 7 * setting a paddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port a pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. ? modes 4 and 5 the corresponding port a pins are address outputs irrespective of the value of bits pa3ddr to pa0ddr. ? mode 6 * setting a paddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port a pin an address output while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 237 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port a data register (padr) 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 ? undefined ? 3 pa3dr 0 r/w 0 pa0dr 0 r/w 2 pa2dr 0 r/w 1 pa1dr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : padr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port a pins (pa 3 to pa 0 ). bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. padr is initialized to h'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. port a register (porta) 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 ? undefined ? 3 pa3 ? * r 0 pa0 ? * r 2 pa2 ? * r 1 pa1 ? * r bit initial value r/w note: * determined by state of pins pa 3 to pa 0 . : : : porta is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. it cannot be written to. writing of output data for the port a pins (pa 3 to pa 0 ) must always be performed on padr. bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. if a port a read is performed while paddr bits are set to 1, the padr values are read. if a port a read is performed while paddr bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. after a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, porta contents are determined by the pin states, as paddr and padr are initialized. porta retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 238 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port a mos pull-up control register (papcr) 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 ? undefined ? 3 pa3pcr 0 r/w 0 pa0pcr 0 r/w 2 pa2pcr 0 r/w 1 pa1pcr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : papcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the mos input pull-up function incorporated into port a on an individual bit basis. bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. bits 3 to 0 are valid in modes 1, 2, 3, 6, and 7, and all the bits are invalid in modes 4 and 5. when a paddr bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting), setting the corresponding papcr bit to 1 turns on the mos input pull-up for the corresponding pin. papcr is initialized to h'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. port a open drain control register (paodr) 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 ? undefined ? 3 pa3odr 0 r/w 0 pa0odr 0 r/w 2 pa2odr 0 r/w 1 pa1odr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : paodr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls whether pmos is on or off for each port a pin (pa 3 to pa 0 ). bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. all bits are valid in modes 1, 2, 3, and 7. * setting a paodr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port a pin an nmos open-drain output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin a cmos output. paodr is initialized to h'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 239 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.6.3 pin functions modes 1, 2, 3 and 7 * : in mode 1, 2, 3, and 7 * , port a pins function as i/o ports. input or output can be specified for each pin on an individual bit basis. setting a paddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port a pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. port a pin functions in modes 1, 2, 3, and 7 are shown in figure 8.6. pa 3 pa 2 pa 1 pa 0 (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) port a figure 8.6 port a pin functions (modes 1, 2, 3, and 7) * modes 4 and 5: in modes 4 and 5, the lower 4 bits of port a are designated as address outputs automatically. port a pin functions in modes 4 and 5 are shown in figure 8.7. a 19 a 18 a 17 a 16 (output) (output) (output) (output) port a figure 8.7 port a pin functions (modes 4 and 5) mode 6 * : in mode 6 * , port a pins function as address outputs or input ports. input or output can be specified on an individual bit basis. setting a paddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port a pin an address output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. port a pin functions in mode 6 are shown in figure 8.8. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 240 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 a 19 a 18 a 17 a 16 pa 3 pa 2 pa 1 pa 0 (input) (input) (input) (input) (output) (output) (output) (output) port a when paddr = 1 when paddr = 0 figure 8.8 port a pin functions (mode 6) * 8.6.4 mos input pull-up function port a has a built-in mos input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. this mos input pull-up function can be used in modes 1, 2, 3, 6, and 7 * , and cannot be used in modes 4 and 5. mos input pull-up can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. when a paddr bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding papcr bit to 1 turns on the mos input pull-up for that pin. the mos input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. the prior state is retained after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. table 8.10 summarizes the mos input pull-up states. table 8.10 mos input pull-up states (port a) modes power-on reset hardware standby mode manual reset software standby mode in other operations 1 to 3, 6, 7 * pa 3 to pa 0 off off on/off on/off on/off 4, 5 pa 3 to pa 0 off off off legend: off: mos input pull-up is always off. on/off: on when paddr = 0 and papcr = 1; otherwise off. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 241 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.7 port b 8.7.1 overview port b is an 8-bit i/o port. port b has an address bus output function, and the pin functions change according to the operating mode. port b has a built-in mos input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. figure 8.9 shows the port b pin configuration. pb 7 /a 15 pb 6 /a 14 pb 5 /a 13 pb 4 /a 12 pb 3 /a 11 pb 2 /a 10 pb 1 /a 9 pb 0 /a 8 pb 7 pb 6 pb 5 pb 4 pb 3 pb 2 pb 1 pb 0 note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ a 15 a 14 a 13 a 12 a 11 a 10 a 9 a 8 (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) port b pins pin functions in modes 2 and 6 * pin functions in modes 3 and 7 * a 15 a 14 a 13 a 12 a 11 a 10 a 9 a 8 (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) pin functions in modes 1, 4, and 5 * pb 7 pb 6 pb 5 pb 4 pb 3 pb 2 pb 1 pb 0 (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) port b figure 8.9 port b pin functions section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 242 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.7.2 register configuration table 8.11 shows the port b register configuration. table 8.11 port b registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * port b data direction register pbddr w h'00 h'feba port b data register pbdr r/w h'00 h'ff6a port b register portb r undefined h'ff5a port b mos pull-up control register pbpcr r/w h'00 h'ff71 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port b data direction register (pbddr) 7 pb7ddr 0 w 6 pb6ddr 0 w 5 pb5ddr 0 w 4 pb4ddr 0 w 3 pb3ddr 0 w 0 pb0ddr 0 w 2 pb2ddr 0 w 1 pb1ddr 0 w bit initial value r/w : : : pbddr is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port b. pbddr cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. pbddr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. the ope bit in sbycr is used to select whether the address output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby mode. ? modes 1, 4, and 5 * the corresponding port b pins are address outputs irrespective of the value of the pbddr bits. ? modes 2 and 6 * setting a pbddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port b pin an address output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. ? modes 3 and 7 * setting a pbddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port b pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 243 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port b data register (pbdr) 7 pb7dr 0 r/w 6 pb6dr 0 r/w 5 pb5dr 0 r/w 4 pb4dr 0 r/w 3 pb3dr 0 r/w 0 pb0dr 0 r/w 2 pb2dr 0 r/w 1 pb1dr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : pbdr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port b pins (pb 7 to pb 0 ). pbdr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. port b register (portb) 7 pb7 ? * r 6 pb6 ? * r 5 pb5 ? * r 4 pb4 ? * r 3 pb3 ? * r 0 pb0 ? * r 2 pb2 ? * r 1 pb1 ? * r bit initial value r/w note: * determined by state of pins pb 7 to pb 0 . : : : portb is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. it cannot be written to. writing of output data for the port b pins (pb 7 to pb 0 ) must always be performed on pbdr. if a port b read is performed while pbddr bits are set to 1, the pbdr values are read. if a port b read is performed while pbddr bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. after a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, portb contents are determined by the pin states, as pbddr and pbdr are initialized. portb retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 244 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port b mos pull-up control register (pbpcr) 7 pb7pcr 0 r/w 6 pb6pcr 0 r/w 5 pb5pcr 0 r/w 4 pb4pcr 0 r/w 3 pb3pcr 0 r/w 0 pb0pcr 0 r/w 2 pb2pcr 0 r/w 1 pb1pcr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : pbpcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the mos input pull-up function incorporated into port b on an individual bit basis. when a pbddr bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting) in mode 2, 3, 6, or 7 * , setting the corresponding pbpcr bit to 1 turns on the mos input pull-up for the corresponding pin. pbpcr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. 8.7.3 pin functions modes 1, 4, and 5 * : in modes 1, 4, and 5 * , port b pins are automatically designated as address outputs. port b pin functions in modes 1, 4, and 5 are shown in figure 8.10. a 15 a 14 a 13 a 12 a 11 a 10 a 9 a 8 (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) port b figure 8.10 port b pin functions (modes 1, 4, and 5) * note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 245 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 modes 2 and 6 * : in modes 2 and 6 * , port b pins function as address outputs or input ports. input or output can be specified on an individual bit basis. setting a pbddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port b pin an address output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. port b pin functions in modes 2 and 6 are shown in figure 8.11. a 15 a 14 a 13 a 12 a 11 a 10 a 9 a 8 pb 7 pb 6 pb 5 pb 4 pb 3 pb 2 pb 1 pb 0 (input) (input) (input) (input) (input) (input) (input) (input) when pbddr = 1 when pbddr = 0 (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) port b figure 8.11 port b pin functions (modes 2 and 6) * modes 3 and 7 * : in modes 3 and 7 * , port b pins function as i/o ports. input or output can be specified for each pin on an individual bit basis. setting a pbddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port b pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. port b pin functions in modes 3 and 7 are shown in figure 8.12. pb 7 pb 6 pb 5 pb 4 pb 3 pb 2 pb 1 pb 0 port b (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) figure 8.12 port b pin functions (modes 3 and 7) * note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 246 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.7.4 mos input pull-up function port b has a built-in mos input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. this mos input pull-up function can be used in modes 2, 3, 6, and 7, and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. when a pbddr bit is cleared to 0 in mode 2, 3, 6, or 7, setting the corresponding pbpcr bit to 1 turns on the mos input pull-up for that pin. the mos input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. the prior state is retained after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. table 8.12 summarizes the mos input pull-up states. table 8.12 mos input pull-up states (port b) modes power-on reset hardware standby mode manual reset software standby mode in other operations 1, 4, 5 * off off off off off 2, 3, 6, 7 * on/off on/off on/off legend: off: mos input pull-up is always off. on/off: on when pbddr = 0 and pbpcr = 1; otherwise off. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 247 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.8 port c 8.8.1 overview port c is an 8-bit i/o port. port c has an address bus output function, and the pin functions change according to the operating mode. port c has a built-in mos input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. figure 8.13 shows the port c pin configuration. pc 7 /a 7 pc 6 /a 6 pc 5 /a 5 pc 4 /a 4 pc 3 /a 3 pc 2 /a 2 pc 1 /a 1 pc 0 /a 0 port c pc 7 pc 6 pc 5 pc 4 pc 3 pc 2 pc 1 pc 0 note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ a 7 a 6 a 5 a 4 a 3 a 2 a 1 a 0 (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) port c pins pin functions in modes 2 and 6 * pin functions in modes 3 and 7 * a 7 a 6 a 5 a 4 a 3 a 2 a 1 a 0 (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) pin functions in modes 1, 4, and 5 * pc 7 pc 6 pc 5 pc 4 pc 3 pc 2 pc 1 pc 0 (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) figure 8.13 port c pin functions section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 248 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.8.2 register configuration table 8.13 shows the port c register configuration. table 8.13 port c registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * port c data direction register pcddr w h'00 h'febb port c data register pcdr r/w h'00 h'ff6b port c register portc r undefined h'ff5b port c mos pull-up control register pcpcr r/w h'00 h'ff72 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port c data direction register (pcddr) 7 pc7ddr 0 w 6 pc6ddr 0 w 5 pc5ddr 0 w 4 pc4ddr 0 w 3 pc3ddr 0 w 0 pc0ddr 0 w 2 pc2ddr 0 w 1 pc1ddr 0 w bit initial value r/w : : : pcddr is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port c. pcddr cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. pcddr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. the ope bit in sbycr is used to select whether the address output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby mode. ? modes 1, 4, and 5 * the corresponding port c pins are address outputs irrespective of the value of the pcddr bits. ? modes 2 and 6 * setting a pcddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port c pin an address output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. ? modes 3 and 7 * setting a pcddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port c pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 249 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port c data register (pcdr) 7 pc7dr 0 r/w 6 pc6dr 0 r/w 5 pc5dr 0 r/w 4 pc4dr 0 r/w 3 pc3dr 0 r/w 0 pc0dr 0 r/w 2 pc2dr 0 r/w 1 pc1dr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : pcdr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port c pins (pc 7 to pc 0 ). pcdr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. port c register (portc) 7 pc7 ? * r 6 pc6 ? * r 5 pc5 ? * r 4 pc4 ? * r 3 pc3 ? * r 0 pc0 ? * r 2 pc2 ? * r 1 pc1 ? * r bit initial value r/w note: * determined by state of pins pc 7 to pc 0 . : : : portc is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. it cannot be written to. writing of output data for the port c pins (pc 7 to pc 0 ) must always be performed on pcdr. if a port c read is performed while pcddr bits are set to 1, the pcdr values are read. if a port c read is performed while pcddr bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. after a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, portc contents are determined by the pin states, as pcddr and pcdr are initialized. portc retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 250 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port c mos pull-up control register (pcpcr) 7 pc7pcr 0 r/w 6 pc6pcr 0 r/w 5 pc5pcr 0 r/w 4 pc4pcr 0 r/w 3 pc3pcr 0 r/w 0 pc0pcr 0 r/w 2 pc2pcr 0 r/w 1 pc1pcr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : pcpcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the mos input pull-up function incorporated into port c on an individual bit basis. when a pcddr bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting) in mode 2, 3, 6, or 7 * , setting the corresponding pcpcr bit to 1 turns on the mos input pull-up for the corresponding pin. pcpcr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. 8.8.3 pin functions modes 1, 4, and 5 * : in modes 1, 4, and 5 * , port c pins are automatically designated as address outputs. port c pin functions in modes 1, 4, and 5 are shown in figure 8.14. a 7 a 6 a 5 a 4 a 3 a 2 a 1 a 0 (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) port c figure 8.14 port c pin functions (modes 1, 4, and 5) * note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 251 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 modes 2 and 6 * : in modes 2 and 6 * , port c pins function as address outputs or input ports. input or output can be specified on an individual bit basis. setting a pcddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port c pin an address output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. port c pin functions in modes 2 and 6 are shown in figure 8.15. a 7 a 6 a 5 a 4 a 3 a 2 a 1 a 0 port c pc 7 pc 6 pc 5 pc 4 pc 3 pc 2 pc 1 pc 0 (input) (input) (input) (input) (input) (input) (input) (input) when pcddr = 1 when pcddr = 0 (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) figure 8.15 port c pin functions (modes 2 and 6) * modes 3 and 7 * : in modes 3 and 7 * , port c pins function as i/o ports. input or output can be specified for each pin on an individual bit basis. setting a pcddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port c pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. port c pin functions in modes 3 and 7 are shown in figure 8.16. pc 7 pc 6 pc 5 pc 4 pc 3 pc 2 pc 1 pc 0 port c (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) figure 8.16 port c pin functions (modes 3 and 7) * note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 252 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.8.4 mos input pull-up function port c has a built-in mos input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. this mos input pull-up function can be used in modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 * , and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. when a pcddr bit is cleared to 0 in mode 2, 3, 6, or 7 * , setting the corresponding pcpcr bit to 1 turns on the mos input pull-up for that pin. the mos input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. the prior state is retained after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. table 8.14 summarizes the mos input pull-up states. table 8.14 mos input pull-up states (port c) modes power-on reset hardware standby mode manual reset software standby mode in other operations 1, 4, 5 * off off off off off 2, 3, 6, 7 * on/off on/off on/off legend: off: mos input pull-up is always off. on/off: on when pcddr = 0 and pcpcr = 1; otherwise off. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 253 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.9 port d 8.9.1 overview port d is an 8-bit i/o port. port d has a data bus i/o function, and the pin functions change according to the operating mode. port d has a built-in mos input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. figure 8.17 shows the port d pin configuration. pd 7 /d 15 pd 6 /d 14 pd 5 /d 13 pd 4 /d 12 pd 3 /d 11 pd 2 /d 10 pd 1 /d 9 pd 0 /d 8 port d note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. d 15 d 14 d 13 d 12 d 11 d 10 d 9 d 8 (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) port d pins pin functions in modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 * pd 7 pd 6 pd 5 pd 4 pd 3 pd 2 pd 1 pd 0 (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) pin functions in modes 3 and 7 * figure 8.17 port d pin functions section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 254 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.9.2 register configuration table 8.15 shows the port d register configuration. table 8.15 port d registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * port d data direction register pdddr w h'00 h'febc port d data register pddr r/w h'00 h'ff6c port d register portd r undefined h'ff5c port d mos pull-up control register pdpcr r/w h'00 h'ff73 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port d data direction register (pdddr) 7 pd7ddr 0 w 6 pd6ddr 0 w 5 pd5ddr 0 w 4 pd4ddr 0 w 3 pd3ddr 0 w 0 pd0ddr 0 w 2 pd2ddr 0 w 1 pd1ddr 0 w bit initial value r/w : : : pdddr is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port d. pdddr cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read.. pdddr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. ? modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 * the input/output direction specification by pdddr is ignored, and port d is automatically designated for data i/o. ? modes 3 and 7 * setting a pdddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port d pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 255 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port d data register (pddr) 7 pd7dr 0 r/w 6 pd6dr 0 r/w 5 pd5dr 0 r/w 4 pd4dr 0 r/w 3 pd3dr 0 r/w 0 pd0dr 0 r/w 2 pd2dr 0 r/w 1 pd1dr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : pddr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port d pins (pd 7 to pd 0 ). pddr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. port d register (portd) 7 pd7 ? * r 6 pd6 ? * r 5 pd5 ? * r 4 pd4 ? * r 3 pd3 ? * r 0 pd0 ? * r 2 pd2 ? * r 1 pd1 ? * r bit initial value r/w note: * determined by state of pins pd 7 to pd 0 . : : : portd is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. it cannot be written to. writing of output data for the port d pins (pd 7 to pd 0 ) must always be performed on pddr. if a port d read is performed while pdddr bits are set to 1, the pddr values are read. if a port d read is performed while pdddr bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. after a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, portd contents are determined by the pin states, as pdddr and pddr are initialized. portd retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 256 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port d mos pull-up control register (pdpcr) 7 pd7pcr 0 r/w 6 pd6pcr 0 r/w 5 pd5pcr 0 r/w 4 pd4pcr 0 r/w 3 pd3pcr 0 r/w 0 pd0pcr 0 r/w 2 pd2pcr 0 r/w 1 pd1pcr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : pdpcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the mos input pull-up function incorporated into port d on an individual bit basis. when a pdddr bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting) in mode 3 or 7, setting the corresponding pdpcr bit to 1 turns on the mos input pull-up for the corresponding pin. pdpcr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 257 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.9.3 pin functions modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 * : in modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 * , port d pins are automatically designated as data i/o pins. port d pin functions in modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 are shown in figure 8.18. d 15 d 14 d 13 d 12 d 11 d 10 d 9 d 8 port d (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) figure 8.18 port d pin functions (modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6) * modes 3 and 7 * : in modes 3 and 7 * , port d pins function as i/o ports. input or output can be specified for each pin on an individual bit basis. setting a pdddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port d pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. port d pin functions in modes 3 and 7 are shown in figure 8.19. pd 7 pd 6 pd 5 pd 4 pd 3 pd 2 pd 1 pd 0 port d (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) figure 8.19 port d pin functions (modes 3 and 7) * section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 258 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.9.4 mos input pull-up function port d has a built-in mos input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. this mos input pull-up function can be used in modes 3 and 7 * , and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. when a pdddr bit is cleared to 0 in mode 3 or 7 * , setting the corresponding pdpcr bit to 1 turns on the mos input pull-up for that pin. the mos input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. the prior state is retained after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. table 8.16 summarizes the mos input pull-up states. table 8.16 mos input pull-up states (port d) modes power-on reset hardware standby mode manual reset software standby mode in other operations 1, 2, 4 to 6 * off off off off off 3, 7 * on/off on/off on/off legend: off: mos input pull-up is always off. on/off: on when pdddr = 0 and pdpcr = 1; otherwise off. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 259 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.10 port e 8.10.1 overview port e is an 8-bit i/o port. port e has a data bus i/o function, and the pin functions change according to the operating mode and whether 8-bit or 16-bit bus mode is selected. port e has a built-in mos input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. figure 8.20 shows the port e pin configuration. pe 7 /d 7 pe 6 /d 6 pe 5 /d 5 pe 4 /d 4 pe 3 /d 3 pe 2 /d 2 pe 1 /d 1 pe 0 /d 0 pe 7 pe 6 pe 5 pe 4 pe 3 pe 2 pe 1 pe 0 (i/o)/ (i/o)/ (i/o)/ (i/o)/ (i/o)/ (i/o)/ (i/o)/ (i/o)/ port e pins pin functions in modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 * pin functions in modes 3 and 7 * d 7 d 6 d 5 d 4 d 3 d 2 d 1 d 0 (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) pe 7 pe 6 pe 5 pe 4 pe 3 pe 2 pe 1 pe 0 (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) port e note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. figure 8.20 port e pin functions section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 260 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.10.2 register configuration table 8.17 shows the port e register configuration. table 8.17 port e registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * port e data direction register peddr w h'00 h'febd port e data register pedr r/w h'00 h'ff6d port e register porte r undefined h'ff5d port e mos pull-up control register pepcr r/w h'00 h'ff74 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port e data direction register (peddr) 7 pe7ddr 0 w 6 pe6ddr 0 w 5 pe5ddr 0 w 4 pe4ddr 0 w 3 pe3ddr 0 w 0 pe0ddr 0 w 2 pe2ddr 0 w 1 pe1ddr 0 w bit initial value r/w : : : peddr is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port e. peddr cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. peddr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. ? modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 * when 8-bit bus mode has been selected, port e pins function as i/o ports. setting a peddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port e pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. when 16-bit bus mode has been selected, the input/output direction specification by peddr is ignored, and port e is designated for data i/o. for details of 8-bit and 16-bit bus modes, see section 6, bus controller. ? modes 3 and 7 * setting a peddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port e pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 261 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port e data register (pedr) 7 pe7dr 0 r/w 6 pe6dr 0 r/w 5 pe5dr 0 r/w 4 pe4dr 0 r/w 3 pe3dr 0 r/w 0 pe0dr 0 r/w 2 pe2dr 0 r/w 1 pe1dr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : pedr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port e pins (pe 7 to pe 0 ). pedr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. port e register (porte) 7 pe7 ? * r 6 pe6 ? * r 5 pe5 ? * r 4 pe4 ? * r 3 pe3 ? * r 0 pe0 ? * r 2 pe2 ? * r 1 pe1 ? * r bit initial value r/w note: * determined by state of pins pe 7 to pe 0 . : : : porte is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. it cannot be written to. writing of output data for the port e pins (pe 7 to pe 0 ) must always be performed on pedr. if a port e read is performed while peddr bits are set to 1, the pedr values are read. if a port e read is performed while peddr bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. after a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, porte contents are determined by the pin states, as peddr and pedr are initialized. porte retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. port e mos pull-up control register (pepcr) 7 pe7pcr 0 r/w 6 pe6pcr 0 r/w 5 pe5pcr 0 r/w 4 pe4pcr 0 r/w 3 pe3pcr 0 r/w 0 pe0pcr 0 r/w 2 pe2pcr 0 r/w 1 pe1pcr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : pepcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the mos input pull-up function incorporated into port e on an individual bit basis. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 262 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 when a peddr bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting) when 8-bit bus mode is selected in mode 1, 2, 4, 5, or 6 * , or in mode 3 or 7 * , setting the corresponding pepcr bit to 1 turns on the mos input pull-up for the corresponding pin. pepcr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. 8.10.3 pin functions modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 * : in modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 * , when 8-bit access is designated and 8-bit bus mode is selected, port e pins are automatically designated as i/o ports. setting a peddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port e pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. when 16-bit bus mode is selected, the input/output direction specification by peddr is ignored, and port e is designated for data i/o. port e pin functions in modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 are shown in figure 8.21. pe 7 pe 6 pe 5 pe 4 pe 3 pe 2 pe 1 pe 0 port e d 7 d 6 d 5 d 4 d 3 d 2 d 1 d 0 (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) 8-bit bus mode 16-bit bus mode (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) figure 8.21 port e pin functions (modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6) * section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 263 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 modes 3 and 7 * : in modes 3 and 7 * , port e pins function as i/o ports. input or output can be specified for each pin on a bit-by-bit basis. setting a peddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port e pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. port e pin functions in modes 3 and 7 are shown in figure 8.22. pe 7 pe 6 pe 5 pe 4 pe 3 pe 2 pe 1 pe 0 port e (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) figure 8.22 port e pin functions (modes 3 and 7) * section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 264 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.10.4 mos input pull-up function port e has a built-in mos input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. this mos input pull-up function can be used in modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 * when 8-bit bus mode is selected, or in mode 3 or 7 * , and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. when a peddr bit is cleared to 0 in mode 1, 2, 4, 5, or 6 * when 8-bit bus mode is selected, or in mode 3 or 7 * , setting the corresponding pepcr bit to 1 turns on the mos input pull-up for that pin. the mos input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. the prior state is retained after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. table 8.18 summarizes the mos input pull-up states. table 8.18 mos input pull-up states (port e) modes power-on reset hardware standby mode manual reset software standby mode in other operations 3, 7 * off off on/off on/off on/off 1, 2, 4 to 6 * 8-bit bus 16-bit bus off off off legend: off: mos input pull-up is always off. on/off: on when peddr = 0 and pepcr = 1; otherwise off. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 265 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.11 port f 8.11.1 overview port f is an 8-bit i/o port. port f pins also function as bus control signal input/output pins ( as , rd , hwr , lwr , wait , breq , and back ), the system clock ( ) output pin and interrupt input pins ( irq0 to irq3 ). the interrupt input pins ( irq0 to irq3 ) are schmitt-triggered inputs. figure 8.23 shows the port f pin configuration. pf 7 / pf 6 / as pf 5 / rd pf 4 / hwr pf 3 / lwr / irq3 pf 2 / wait / irq2 pf 1 / back / irq1 pf 0 / breq / irq0 port f note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. pf 7 (input)/ (output) as (output) rd (output) hwr (output) lwr (output) pf 2 (i/o)/ wait (input)/ irq2 (input) pf 1 (i/o)/ back (output)/ irq1 (input) pf 0 (i/o)/ breq (input)/ irq0 (input) port f pins pin functions in modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 * pf 7 (input)/ (output) pf 6 (i/o) pf 5 (i/o) pf 4 (i/o) pf 3 (i/o)/ irq3 (input) pf 2 (i/o)/ irq2 (input) pf 1 (i/o)/ irq1 (input) pf 0 (i/o)/ irq0 (input) pin functions in modes 3 and 7 * figure 8.23 port f pin functions section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 266 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.11.2 register configuration table 8.19 shows the port f register configuration. table 8.19 port f registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * 1 port f data direction register pfddr w h'80/h'00 * 2 h'febe port f data register pfdr r/w h'00 h'ff6e port f register portf r undefined h'ff5e notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. initial value depends on the mode. port f data direction register (pfddr) 7 pf7ddr 1 w 0 w 6 pf6ddr 0 w 0 w 5 pf5ddr 0 w 0 w 4 pf4ddr 0 w 0 w 3 pf3ddr 0 w 0 w 0 pf0ddr 0 w 0 w 2 pf2ddr 0 w 0 w 1 pf1ddr 0 w 0 w bit modes 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 * initial value r/w modes 3 and 7 * initial value r/w : : : : : pfddr is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port f. pfddr cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. pfddr is initialized by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode, to h'80 in modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 * , and to h'00 in modes 3 and 7 * . it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. the ope bit in sbycr is used to select whether the bus control output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby mode. ? modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 * pin pf 7 functions as the output pin when the corresponding pfddr bit is set to 1, and as an input port when the bit is cleared to 0. the input/output direction specified by pfddr is ignored for pins pf 6 to pf 3 , which are automatically designated as bus control outputs ( as , rd , hwr , and lwr ). section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 267 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pins pf 2 to pf 0 are designated as bus control input/output pins ( wait , back , breq ) by means of bus controller settings. at other times, setting a pfddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port f pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. ? modes 3 and 7 * setting a pfddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port f pin pf 6 to pf 0 an output port, or in the case of pin pf 7 , the output pin. clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. port f data register (pfdr) 7 pf7dr 0 r/w 6 pf6dr 0 r/w 5 pf5dr 0 r/w 4 pf4dr 0 r/w 3 pf3dr 0 r/w 0 pf0dr 0 r/w 2 pf2dr 0 r/w 1 pf1dr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : pfdr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port f pins (pf 7 to pf 0 ). pfdr is initialized to h'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. port f register (portf) 7 pf7 ? * r 6 pf6 ? * r 5 pf5 ? * r 4 pf4 ? * r 3 pf3 ? * r 0 pf0 ? * r 2 pf2 ? * r 1 pf1 ? * r bit initial value r/w note: * determined by state of pins pf 7 to pf 0 . : : : portf is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. writing of output data for the port f pins (pf 7 to pf 0 ) must always be performed on pfdr. if a port f read is performed while pfddr bits are set to 1, the pfdr values are read. if a port f read is performed while pfddr bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. after a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, portf contents are determined by the pin states, as pfddr and pfdr are initialized. portf retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 268 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.11.3 pin functions port f pins also function as bus control signal input/output pins ( as , rd , hwr , lwr , wait , breq , and back ) the system clock ( ) output pin and interrupt input pins ( irq0 to irq3 ). the pin functions differ between modes 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 * , and modes 3 and 7 * . port f pin functions are shown in table 8.20. table 8.20 port f pin functions pin selection method and pin functions pf 7 / the pin function is switched as shown below according to bit pf7ddr. pf7ddr 0 1 pin function pf 7 input pin output pin pf 6 / as the pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit pf6ddr. operating mode modes 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 * modes 3 and 7 * pf6ddr ? 01 pin function as output pin pf 6 input pin pf 6 output pin note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. pf 5 / rd the pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit pf5ddr. operating mode modes 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 * modes 3 and 7 * pf5ddr ? 01 pin function rd output pin pf 5 input pin pf 5 output pin note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. pf 4 / hwr the pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit pf4ddr. operating mode modes 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 * modes 3 and 7 * pf4ddr ? 01 pin function hwr output pin pf 4 input pin pf 4 output pin note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 269 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions pf 3 / lwr / irq3 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit pf3ddr. operating mode modes 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 * 1 modes 3 and 7 * 1 pf3ddr ? 01 pin function lwr output pin pf 3 input pin pf 3 output pin irq3 interrupt input pin * 2 notes: 1. modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. 2. when this pin is used as an external interrupt input, the pin function should be set as a port (pf 3 ) input pin. pf 2 / wait / irq2 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, and waite bit in bcrl, and pf2ddr bit. operating mode modes 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 * 1 modes 3 and 7 * 1 waite 0 1 ? pf2ddr 0 1 ? 01 pin function pf 2 input pin pf 2 output pin wait input pin pf 2 input pin pf 2 output pin irq2 interrupt input pin * 2 notes: 1. modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. 2. when this pin is used as an external interrupt input, the pin function should be set as a port (pf 2 ) input pin. pf 1 / back / irq1 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, and the brle bit in bcrl and pf1ddr bit. operating mode modes 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 * 1 modes 3 and 7 * 1 brle 0 1 ? pf1ddr 0 1 ? 01 pin function pf 1 input pin pf 1 output pin back output pin pf 1 input pin pf 1 output pin irq1 interrupt input pin * 2 notes: 1. modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. 2. when this pin is used as an external interrupt input, the pin function should be set as a port (pf 1 ) input pin. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 270 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions pf 0 / breq / irq0 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, and the brle bit in bcrl and pf0ddr bit. operating mode modes 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 * 1 modes 3 and 7 * 1 brle 0 1 ? pf0ddr 0 1 ? 01 pin function pf 0 input pin pf 0 output pin breq input pin pf 0 input pin pf 0 output pin irq0 interrupt input pin * 2 notes: 1. modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. 2. when this pin is used as an external interrupt input, the pin function should be set as a port (pf 0 ) input pin. 8.12 port g 8.12.1 overview port g is a 5-bit i/o port. port g pins also function as bus control signal output pins ( cs0 to cs3 ). the a/d converter input pin ( adtrg ), and interrupt input pins ( irq6 , irq7 ). the interrupt input pins ( irq6 , irq7 ) are schmitt-triggered inputs. figure 8.24 shows the port g pin configuration. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 271 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pg 4 / cs0 pg 3 / cs1 pg 2 / cs2 pg 1 / cs3 / irq7 pg 0 / adtrg / irq6 pg 4 pg 3 pg 2 pg 1 pg 0 note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. (i/o) (i/o) (i/o) (i/o)/ irq7 (input) (i/o)/ port g pins pin functions in modes 3 and 7 * pin functions in modes 4 to 6 * pg 4 pg 3 pg 2 pg 1 pg 0 (input)/ (i/o) (i/o) (i/o)/ irq7 (input) (i/o)/ adtrg (input)/ irq6 (input) cs0 (output) pin functions in modes 1 and 2 * pg 4 pg 3 pg 2 pg 1 pg 0 (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (input)/ (i/o)/ cs0 cs1 cs2 cs3 (output) (output) (output) (output)/ irq7 (input) port g adtrg (input)/ irq6 (input) adtrg (input)/ irq6 (input) figure 8.24 port g pin functions 8.12.2 register configuration table 8.21 shows the port g register configuration. table 8.21 port g registers name abbreviation r/w initial value * 1 address * 2 port g data direction register pgddr w h'10/h'00 * 3 h'febf port g data register pgdr r/w h'00 h'ff6f port g register portg r undefined h'ff5f notes: 1. value of bits 4 to 0. 2. lower 16 bits of the address. 3. initial value depends on the mode. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 272 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port g data direction register (pgddr) 7 ? undefined ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? undefined ? 4 pg4ddr 1 w 0 w 3 pg3ddr 0 w 0 w 0 pg0ddr 0 w 0 w 2 pg2ddr 0 w 0 w 1 pg1ddr 0 w 0 w bit modes 1, 4, 5 * initial value r/w modes 2, 3, 6, 7 * initial value r/w : : : : : pgddr is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port g. pgddr cannot be read, and bits 7 to 5 are reserved. if pgddr is read, an undefined value will be read. the pgddr is initialized by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, to h'10 (bits 4 to 0) in modes 1, 4, and 5 * , and to h'00 (bits 4 to 0) in modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 * . it retains its prior state after a manual reset and in software standby mode. the ope bit in sbycr is used to select whether the bus control output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby mode. ? modes 1 and 2 * pin pg 4 functions as a bus control output pin ( cs0 ) when the corresponding pgddr bit is set to 1, and as an input port when the bit is cleared to 0. for pins pg 3 to pg 0 , setting the corresponding pgddr bit to 1 makes the pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. ? modes 3 and 7 * setting a pgddr bit to 1 makes the corresponding port g pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. ? modes 4, 5, and 6 * pins pg 4 to pg 1 function as bus control output pins ( cs0 to cs3 ) when the corresponding pgddr bits are set to 1, and as input ports when the bits are cleared to 0. note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 273 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port g data register (pgdr) 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 pg4dr 0 r/w 3 pg3dr 0 r/w 0 pg0dr 0 r/w 2 pg2dr 0 r/w 1 pg1dr 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : pgdr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port g pins (pg 4 to pg 0 ). bits 7 to 5 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. pgdr is initialized to h'00 (bits 4 to 0) by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. it retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. port g register (portg) 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 pg4 ? * r 3 pg3 ? * r 0 pg0 ? * r 2 pg2 ? * r 1 pg1 ? * r bit initial value r/w note: * determined by state of pins pg 4 to pg 0 . : : : portg is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. it cannot be written to. writing of output data for the port g pins (pg 4 to pg 0 ) must always be performed on pgdr. bits 7 to 5 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. if a port g read is performed while pgddr bits are set to 1, the pgdr values are read. if a port g read is performed while pgddr bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. after a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, portg contents are determined by the pin states, as pgddr and pgdr are initialized. portg retains its prior state after a manual reset, and in software standby mode. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 274 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 8.12.3 pin functions port g pins also function as bus control signal output pins ( cs0 to cs3 ) the a/d converter input pin ( adtrg ), and interrupt input pins ( irq6 , irq7 ). the pin functions are different in modes 1 and 2, modes 3 and 7, and modes 4 to 6. port g pin functions are shown in table 8.22. table 8.22 port g pin functions pin selection method and pin functions pg 4 / cs0 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit pg4ddr. operating mode modes 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 * modes 3 and 7 * pg4ddr0101 pin function pg 4 input pin cs0 output pin pg 4 input pin pg 4 output pin note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. pg 3 / cs1 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit pg3ddr. operating mode modes 1, 2, 3, 7 * modes 4 to 6 * pg3ddr0101 pin function pg 3 input pin pg 3 output pin pg 3 input pin cs1 output pin note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. pg 2 / cs2 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit pg2ddr. operating mode modes 1, 2, 3, 7 * modes 4 to 6 * pg2ddr0101 pin function pg 2 input pin pg 2 output pin pg 2 input pin cs2 output pin note: * modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 275 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pin selection method and pin functions pg 1 / cs3 / irq7 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode and bit pg1ddr. operating mode modes 1, 2, 3, 7 * 1 modes 4 to 6 * 1 pg1ddr0101 pin function pg 1 input pin pg 1 output pin pg 1 input pin cs3 output pin irq7 interrupt input pin * 2 notes: 1. modes 1 to 3 are not available on the f-ztat version. modes 2, 3, 6, and 7 are not available on the romless version. 2. when this pin is used as an external interrupt input, it should not be used as an input/output pin with other functions. pg 0 / adtrg / irq6 the pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bits trgs1 and trgs0 (trigger select 1 and 0) in the a/d control register (adcr). pg0ddr 0 1 pin function pg 0 input pg 0 output adtrg input pin * 1 irq6 interrupt input pin * 2 notes: 1. adtrg input when trgs1 = trgs0 = 1. 2. when this pin is used as an external interrupt input, it should not be used as an input/output pin with other functions. section 8 i/o ports rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 276 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 277 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) 9.1 overview the h8s/2345 group has an on-chip 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) that comprises six 16-bit timer channels. 9.1.1 features ? maximum 16-pulse input/output ? a total of 16 timer general registers (tgrs) are provided (four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5), each of which can be set independently as an output compare/input capture register ? tgrc and tgrd for channels 0 and 3 can also be used as buffer registers ? selection of 8 counter input clocks for each channel ? the following operations can be set for each channel: ? waveform output at compare match: selection of 0, 1, or toggle output ? input capture function: selection of rising edge, falling edge, or both edge detection ? counter clear operation: counter clearing possible by compare match or input capture ? synchronous operation: multiple timer counters (tcnt) can be written to simultaneously simultaneous clearing by compare match and input capture possible register simultaneous input/output possible by counter synchronous operation ? pwm mode: any pwm output duty can be set maximum of 15-phase pwm output possible by combination with synchronous operation ? buffer operation settable for channels 0 and 3 ? input capture register double-buffering possible ? automatic rewriting of output compare register possible ? phase counting mode settable independently for each of channels 1, 2, 4, and 5 ? two-phase encoder pulse up/down-count possible ? cascaded operation ? channel 2 (channel 5) input clock operates as 32-bit counter by setting channel 1 (channel 4) overflow/underflow ? fast access via internal 16-bit bus ? fast access is possible via a 16-bit bus interface section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 278 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? 26 interrupt sources ? for channels 0 and 3, four compare match/input capture dual-function interrupts and one overflow interrupt can be requested independently ? for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, two compare match/input capture dual-function interrupts, one overflow interrupt, and one underflow interrupt can be requested independently ? automatic transfer of register data ? block transfer, 1-word data transfer, and 1-byte data transfer possible by data transfer controller (dtc) activation ? a/d converter conversion start trigger can be generated ? channel 0 to 5 compare match a/input capture a signals can be used as a/d converter conversion start trigger ? module stop mode can be set ? as the initial setting, tpu operation is halted. register access is enabled by exiting module stop mode. table 9.1 lists the functions of the tpu. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 279 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 9.1 tpu functions item channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 channel 3 channel 4 channel 5 count clock /1 /4 /16 /64 tclka tclkb tclkc tclkd /1 /4 /16 /64 /256 tclka tclkb /1 /4 /16 /64 /1024 tclka tclkb tclkc /1 /4 /16 /64 /256 /1024 /4096 tclka /1 /4 /16 /64 /1024 tclka tclkc /1 /4 /16 /64 /256 tclka tclkc tclkd general registers tgr0a tgr0b tgr1a tgr1b tgr2a tgr2b tgr3a tgr3b tgr4a tgr4b tgr5a tgr5b general registers/ buffer registers tgr0c tgr0d ??tgr3c tgr3d ?? i/o pins tioca0 tiocb0 tiocc0 tiocd0 tioca1 tiocb1 tioca2 tiocb2 tioca3 tiocb3 tiocc3 tiocd3 tioca4 tiocb4 tioca5 tiocb5 counter clear function tgr compare match or input capture tgr compare match or input capture tgr compare match or input capture tgr compare match or input capture tgr compare match or input capture tgr compare match or input capture 0 output 1 output compare match output toggle output input capture function synchronous operation pwm mode phase counting mode ? ? buffer operation ?? ?? dtc activation tgr compare match or input capture tgr compare match or input capture tgr compare match or input capture tgr compare match or input capture tgr compare match or input capture tgr compare match or input capture section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 280 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 item channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 channel 3 channel 4 channel 5 a/d converter trigger tgr0a compare match or input capture tgr1a compare match or input capture tgr2a compare match or input capture tgr3a compare match or input capture tgr4a compare match or input capture tgr5a compare match or input capture interrupt sources 5 sources compare match or input capture 0a compare match or input capture 0b compare match or input capture 0c compare match or input capture 0d overflow 4 sources compare match or input capture 1a compare match or input capture 1b overflow underflow 4 sources compare match or input capture 2a compare match or input capture 2b overflow underflow 5 sources compare match or input capture 3a compare match or input capture 3b compare match or input capture 3c compare match or input capture 3d overflow 4 sources compare match or input capture 4a compare match or input capture 4b overflow underflow 4 sources compare match or input capture 5a compare match or input capture 5b overflow underflow legend: ? : not possible : possible section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 281 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.1.2 block diagram figure 9.1 shows a block diagram of the tpu. channel 3 tmdr tiorl tsr tcr tiorh tier tgra tcnt tgrb tgrc tgrd channel 4 tmdr tsr tcr tior tier tgra tcnt tgrb control logic tmdr tsr tcr tior tier tgra tcnt tgrb control logic for channels 3 to 5 tmdr tsr tcr tior tier tgra tcnt tgrb tgrc channel 1 tmdr tsr tcr tior tier tgra tcnt tgrb channel 0 tmdr tsr tcr tiorh tier control logic for channels 0 to 2 tgra tcnt tgrb tgrd tsyr tstr input pins tioca3 tiocb3 tiocc3 tiocd3 tioca4 tiocb4 tioca5 tiocb5 clock input /1 /4 /16 /64 /256 /1024 /4096 tclka tclkb tclkc tclkd input pins tioca0 tiocb0 tiocc0 tiocd0 tioca1 tiocb1 tioca2 tiocb2 interrupt request signals channel 3: channel 4: channel 5: interrupt request signals channel 0: channel 1: channel 2: internal data bus a/d conversion start request signal tiorl module data bus tgi3a tgi3b tgi3c tgi3d tci3v tgi4a tgi4b tci4v tci4u tgi5a tgi5b tci5v tci5u tgi0a tgi0b tgi0c tgi0d tci0v tgi1a tgi1b tci1v tci1u tgi2a tgi2b tci2v tci2u channel 3: channel 4: channel 5: internal clock: external clock: channel 0: channel 1: channel 2: channel 2 common channel 5 bus interface figure 9.1 block diagram of tpu section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 282 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.1.3 pin configuration table 9.2 summarizes the tpu pins. table 9.2 tpu pins channel name symbol i/o function all clock input a tclka input external clock a input pin (channel 1 and 5 phase counting mode a phase input) clock input b tclkb input external clock b input pin (channel 1 and 5 phase counting mode b phase input) clock input c tclkc input external clock c input pin (channel 2 and 4 phase counting mode a phase input) clock input d tclkd input external clock d input pin (channel 2 and 4 phase counting mode b phase input) 0 input capture/out compare match a0 tioca0 i/o tgr0a input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin input capture/out compare match b0 tiocb0 i/o tgr0b input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin input capture/out compare match c0 tiocc0 i/o tgr0c input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin input capture/out compare match d0 tiocd0 i/o tgr0d input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin 1 input capture/out compare match a1 tioca1 i/o tgr1a input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin input capture/out compare match b1 tiocb1 i/o tgr1b input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin 2 input capture/out compare match a2 tioca2 i/o tgr2a input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin input capture/out compare match b2 tiocb2 i/o tgr2b input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 283 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 channel name symbol i/o function 3 input capture/out compare match a3 tioca3 i/o tgr3a input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin input capture/out compare match b3 tiocb3 i/o tgr3b input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin input capture/out compare match c3 tiocc3 i/o tgr3c input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin input capture/out compare match d3 tiocd3 i/o tgr3d input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin 4 input capture/out compare match a4 tioca4 i/o tgr4a input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin input capture/out compare match b4 tiocb4 i/o tgr4b input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin 5 input capture/out compare match a5 tioca5 i/o tgr5a input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin input capture/out compare match b5 tiocb5 i/o tgr5b input capture input/output compare output/pwm output pin section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 284 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.1.4 register configuration table 9.3 summarizes the tpu registers. table 9.3 tpu registers channel name abbreviation r/w initial value address * 1 0 timer control register 0 tcr0 r/w h'00 h'ffd0 timer mode register 0 tmdr0 r/w h'c0 h'ffd1 timer i/o control register 0h tior0h r/w h'00 h'ffd2 timer i/o control register 0l tior0l r/w h'00 h'ffd3 timer interrupt enable register 0 tier0 r/w h'40 h'ffd4 timer status register 0 tsr0 r/(w) * 2 h'c0 h'ffd5 timer counter 0 tcnt0 r/w h'0000 h'ffd6 timer general register 0a tgr0a r/w h'ffff h'ffd8 timer general register 0b tgr0b r/w h'ffff h'ffda timer general register 0c tgr0c r/w h'ffff h'ffdc timer general register 0d tgr0d r/w h'ffff h'ffde 1 timer control register 1 tcr1 r/w h'00 h'ffe0 timer mode register 1 tmdr1 r/w h'c0 h'ffe1 timer i/o control register 1 tior1 r/w h'00 h'ffe2 timer interrupt enable register 1 tier1 r/w h'40 h'ffe4 timer status register 1 tsr1 r/(w) * 2 h'c0 h'ffe5 timer counter 1 tcnt1 r/w h'0000 h'ffe6 timer general register 1a tgr1a r/w h'ffff h'ffe8 timer general register 1b tgr1b r/w h'ffff h'ffea 2 timer control register 2 tcr2 r/w h'00 h'fff0 timer mode register 2 tmdr2 r/w h'c0 h'fff1 timer i/o control register 2 tior2 r/w h'00 h'fff2 timer interrupt enable register 2 tier2 r/w h'40 h'fff4 timer status register 2 tsr2 r/(w) * 2 h'c0 h'fff5 timer counter 2 tcnt2 r/w h'0000 h'fff6 timer general register 2a tgr2a r/w h'ffff h'fff8 timer general register 2b tgr2b r/w h'ffff h'fffa section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 285 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 channel name abbreviation r/w initial value address * 1 3 timer control register 3 tcr3 r/w h'00 h'fe80 timer mode register 3 tmdr3 r/w h'c0 h'fe81 timer i/o control register 3h tior3h r/w h'00 h'fe82 timer i/o control register 3l tior3l r/w h'00 h'fe83 timer interrupt enable register 3 tier3 r/w h'40 h'fe84 timer status register 3 tsr3 r/(w) * 2 h'c0 h'fe85 timer counter 3 tcnt3 r/w h'0000 h'fe86 timer general register 3a tgr3a r/w h'ffff h'fe88 timer general register 3b tgr3b r/w h'ffff h'fe8a timer general register 3c tgr3c r/w h'ffff h'fe8c timer general register 3d tgr3d r/w h'ffff h'fe8e 4 timer control register 4 tcr4 r/w h'00 h'fe90 timer mode register 4 tmdr4 r/w h'c0 h'fe91 timer i/o control register 4 tior4 r/w h'00 h'fe92 timer interrupt enable register 4 tier4 r/w h'40 h'fe94 timer status register 4 tsr4 r/(w) * 2 h'c0 h'fe95 timer counter 4 tcnt4 r/w h'0000 h'fe96 timer general register 4a tgr4a r/w h'ffff h'fe98 timer general register 4b tgr4b r/w h'ffff h'fe9a 5 timer control register 5 tcr5 r/w h'00 h'fea0 timer mode register 5 tmdr5 r/w h'c0 h'fea1 timer i/o control register 5 tior5 r/w h'00 h'fea2 timer interrupt enable register 5 tier5 r/w h'40 h'fea4 timer status register 5 tsr5 r/(w) * 2 h'c0 h'fea5 timer counter 5 tcnt5 r/w h'0000 h'fea6 timer general register 5a tgr5a r/w h'ffff h'fea8 timer general register 5b tgr5b r/w h'ffff h'feaa all timer start register tstr r/w h'00 h'ffc0 timer synchro register tsyr r/w h'00 h'ffc1 module stop control register mstpcr r/w h'3fff h'ff3c notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 286 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.2 register descriptions 9.2.1 timer control register (tcr) 7 cclr2 0 r/w 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : channel 0: tcr0 channel 3: tcr3 7 ? 0 ? 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w channel 1: tcr1 channel 2: tcr2 channel 4: tcr4 channel 5: tcr5 bit initial value r/w : : : the tcr registers are 8-bit registers that control the tcnt channels. the tpu has six tcr registers, one for each of channels 0 to 5. the tcr registers are initialized to h'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. note: make tcr settings only when tcnt operation is stopped. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 287 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bits 7, 6, 5?counter clear 2, 1, and 0 (cclr2, cclr1, cclr0): these bits select the tcnt counter clearing source. bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 channel cclr2 cclr1 cclr0 description 0, 3 0 0 0 tcnt clearing disabled (initial value ) 1 tcnt cleared by tgra compare match/input capture 1 0 tcnt cleared by tgrb compare match/input capture 1 tcnt cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ synchronous operation * 1 1 0 0 tcnt clearing disabled 1 tcnt cleared by tgrc compare match/input capture * 2 1 0 tcnt cleared by tgrd compare match/input capture * 2 1 tcnt cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ synchronous operation * 1 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 channel reserved * 3 cclr1 cclr0 description 1, 2, 4, 5 0 0 0 tcnt clearing disabled (initial value ) 1 tcnt cleared by tgra compare match/input capture 1 0 tcnt cleared by tgrb compare match/input capture 1 tcnt cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ synchronous operation * 1 notes: 1. synchronous operation setting is performed by setting the sync bit in tsyr to 1. 2. when tgrc or tgrd is used as a buffer register, tcnt is not cleared because the buffer register setting has priority, and compare match/input capture does not occur. 3. bit 7 is reserved in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. it is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 288 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bits 4 and 3?clock edge 1 and 0 (ckeg1, ckeg0): these bits select the input clock edge. when the input clock is counted using both edges, the input clock period is halved (e.g. /4 both edges = /2 rising edge). if phase counting mode is used on channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, this setting is ignored and the phase counting mode setting has priority. bit 4 bit 3 ckeg1 ckeg0 description 0 0 count at rising edge (initial value) 1 count at falling edge 1 ? count at both edges note: internal clock edge selection is valid when the input clock is /4 or slower. this setting is ignored if the input clock is /1, or when overflow/underflow of another channel is selected. bits 2, 1, and 0?time prescaler 2, 1, and 0 (tpsc2 to tpsc0): these bits select the tcnt counter clock. the clock source can be selected independently for each channel. table 9.4 shows the clock sources that can be set for each channel. table 9.4 tpu clock sources internal clock external clock channel /1 /4 /16 /64 /256 /1024 /4096 tclka tclkb tclkc tclkd overflow/ underflow on another channel 0 1 2 3 4 5 legend: : setting blank : no setting section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 289 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 description 0 0 0 0 internal clock: counts on /1 (initial value ) 1 internal clock: counts on /4 1 0 internal clock: counts on /16 1 internal clock: counts on /64 1 0 0 external clock: counts on tclka pin input 1 external clock: counts on tclkb pin input 1 0 external clock: counts on tclkc pin input 1 external clock: counts on tclkd pin input bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 description 1 0 0 0 internal clock: counts on /1 (initial value ) 1 internal clock: counts on /4 1 0 internal clock: counts on /16 1 internal clock: counts on /64 1 0 0 external clock: counts on tclka pin input 1 external clock: counts on tclkb pin input 1 0 internal clock: counts on /256 1 counts on tcnt2 overflow/underflow note: this setting is ignored when channel 1 is in phase counting mode. bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 description 2 0 0 0 internal clock: counts on /1 (initial value ) 1 internal clock: counts on /4 1 0 internal clock: counts on /16 1 internal clock: counts on /64 1 0 0 external clock: counts on tclka pin input 1 external clock: counts on tclkb pin input 1 0 external clock: counts on tclkc pin input 1 internal clock: counts on /1024 note: this setting is ignored when channel 2 is in phase counting mode. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 290 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 description 3 0 0 0 internal clock: counts on /1 (initial value ) 1 internal clock: counts on /4 1 0 internal clock: counts on /16 1 internal clock: counts on /64 1 0 0 external clock: counts on tclka pin input 1 internal clock: counts on /1024 1 0 internal clock: counts on /256 1 internal clock: counts on /4096 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 description 4 0 0 0 internal clock: counts on /1 (initial value ) 1 internal clock: counts on /4 1 0 internal clock: counts on /16 1 internal clock: counts on /64 1 0 0 external clock: counts on tclka pin input 1 external clock: counts on tclkc pin input 1 0 internal clock: counts on /1024 1 counts on tcnt5 overflow/underflow note: this setting is ignored when channel 4 is in phase counting mode. bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 description 5 0 0 0 internal clock: counts on /1 (initial value ) 1 internal clock: counts on /4 1 0 internal clock: counts on /16 1 internal clock: counts on /64 1 0 0 external clock: counts on tclka pin input 1 external clock: counts on tclkc pin input 1 0 internal clock: counts on /256 1 external clock: counts on tclkd pin input note: this setting is ignored when channel 5 is in phase counting mode. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 291 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.2.2 timer mode register (tmdr) 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 bfb 0 r/w 4 bfa 0 r/w 3 md3 0 r/w 0 md0 0 r/w 2 md2 0 r/w 1 md1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : channel 0: tmdr0 channel 3: tmdr3 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 md3 0 r/w 0 md0 0 r/w 2 md2 0 r/w 1 md1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : channel 1: tmdr1 channel 2: tmdr2 channel 4: tmdr4 channel 5: tmdr5 the tmdr registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that are used to set the operating mode for each channel. the tpu has six tmdr registers, one for each channel. the tmdr registers are initialized to h'c0 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. note: make tmdr settings only when tcnt operation is stopped. bits 7 and 6?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 5?buffer operation b (bfb): specifies whether tgrb is to operate in the normal way, or tgrb and tgrd are to be used together for buffer operation. when tgrd is used as a buffer register, tgrd input capture/output compare is not generated. in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no tgrd, bit 5 is reserved. it is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. bit 5 bfb description 0 tgrb operates normally (initial value ) 1 tgrb and tgrd used together for buffer operation section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 292 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 4?buffer operation a (bfa): specifies whether tgra is to operate in the normal way, or tgra and tgrc are to be used together for buffer operation. when tgrc is used as a buffer register, tgrc input capture/output compare is not generated. in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no tgrc, bit 4 is reserved. it is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. bit 4 bfa description 0 tgra operates normally (initial value ) 1 tgra and tgrc used together for buffer operation bits 3 to 0?modes 3 to 0 (md3 to md0): these bits are used to set the timer operating mode. bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 md3 * 1 md2 * 2 md1 md0 description 0 0 0 0 normal operation (initial value) 1 reserved 1 0 pwm mode 1 1 pwm mode 2 1 0 0 phase counting mode 1 1 phase counting mode 2 1 0 phase counting mode 3 1 phase counting mode 4 1 *** ? * : don ? t care notes: 1. md3 is a reserved bit. in a write, it should always be written with 0. 2. phase counting mode cannot be set for channels 0 and 3. in this case, 0 should always be written to md2. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 293 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.2.3 timer i/o control register (tior) 7 iob3 0 r/w 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 ioa3 0 r/w 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : channel 0: tior0h channel 1: tior1 channel 2: tior2 channel 3: tior3h channel 4: tior4 channel 5: tior5 7 iod3 0 r/w 6 iod2 0 r/w 5 iod1 0 r/w 4 iod0 0 r/w 3 ioc3 0 r/w 0 ioc0 0 r/w 2 ioc2 0 r/w 1 ioc1 0 r/w channel 0: tior0l channel 3: tior3l note: when tgrc or tgrd is designated for buffer operation, this setting is invalid and the register operates as a buffer register. bit initial value r/w : : : the tior registers are 8-bit registers that control the tgr registers. the tpu has eight tior registers, two each for channels 0 and 3, and one each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. the tior registers are initialized to h'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. care is required since tior is affected by the tmdr setting. the initial output specified by tior is valid when the counter is stopped (the cst bit in tstr is cleared to 0). note also that, in pwm mode 2, the output at the point at which the counter is cleared to 0 is specified. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 294 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bits 7 to 4? i/o control b3 to b0 (iob3 to iob0) i/o control d3 to d0 (iod3 to iod0): bits iob3 to iob0 specify the function of tgrb. bits iod3 to iod0 specify the function of tgrd. ? tior0h bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 channel iob3 iob2 iob1 iob0 description 0 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 10 initial output is 0 output 1 output at compare match 1 tgr0b is output compare register toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * capture input source is tiocb0 pin input capture at both edges 1 ** tgr0b is input capture register capture input source is channel 1/count clock input capture at tcnt1 count- up/count-down * 1 * : don ? t care note: 1. when bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr1 are set to b'000 and /1 is used as the tcnt1 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 295 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior0l bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 channel iod3 iod2 iod1 iod0 description 0 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 tgr0d is output compare register * 2 initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * capture input source is tiocd0 pin input capture at both edges 1 ** tgr0d is input capture register * 2 capture input source is channel 1/count clock input capture at tcnt1 count-up/count-down * 1 * : don ? t care notes: 1. when bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr1 are set to b'000 and /1 is used as the tcnt1 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. 2. when the bfb bit in tmdr0 is set to 1 and tgr0d is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 296 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior1 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 channel iob3 iob2 iob1 iob0 description 1 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 tgr1b is output compare register initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * capture input source is tiocb1 pin input capture at both edges 1 ** tgr1b is input capture register capture input source is tgr0c compare match/ input capture input capture at generation of tgr0c compare match/input capture * : don ? t care section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 297 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior2 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 channel iob3 iob2 iob1 iob0 description 2 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 tgr2b is output compare register initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 * 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * tgr2b is input capture register capture input source is tiocb2 pin input capture at both edges * : don ? t care section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 298 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior3h bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 channel iob3 iob2 iob1 iob0 description 3 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 tgr3b is output compare register initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * capture input source is tiocb3 pin input capture at both edges 1 ** tgr3b is input capture register capture input source is channel 4/count clock input capture at tcnt4 count-up/count-down * 1 * : don ? t care note: 1. when bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr4 are set to b'000 and /1 is used as the tcnt4 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 299 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior3l bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 channel iod3 iod2 iod1 iod0 description 3 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 tgr3d is output compare register * 2 initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * capture input source is tiocd3 pin input capture at both edges 1 ** tgr3d is input capture register * 2 capture input source is channel 4/count clock input capture at tcnt4 count-up/count-down * 1 * : don ? t care notes: 1. when bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr4 are set to b'000 and /1 is used as the tcnt4 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. 2. when the bfb bit in tmdr3 is set to 1 and tgr3d is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 300 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior4 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 channel iob3 iob2 iob1 iob0 description 4 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 tgr4b is output compare register initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * capture input source is tiocb4 pin input capture at both edges 1 ** tgr4b is input capture register capture input source is tgr3c compare match/ input capture input capture at generation of tgr3c compare match/ input capture * : don ? t care section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 301 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior5 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 channel iob3 iob2 iob1 iob0 description 5 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 tgr5b is output compare register initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 * 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * tgr5b is input capture register capture input source is tiocb5 pin input capture at both edges * : don ? t care section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 302 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bits 3 to 0? i/o control a3 to a0 (ioa3 to ioa0) i/o control c3 to c0 (ioc3 to ioc0): ioa3 to ioa0 specify the function of tgra. ioc3 to ioc0 specify the function of tgrc. ? tior0h bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel ioa3 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 description 0 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 tgr0a is output compare register initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * capture input source is tioca0 pin input capture at both edges 1 ** tgr0a is input capture register capture input source is channel 1/ count clock input capture at tcnt1 count-up/count-down * : don ? t care section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 303 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior0l bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel ioc3 ioc2 ioc1 ioc0 description 0 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 tgr0c is output compare register * 1 initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * capture input source is tiocc0 pin input capture at both edges 1 ** tgr0c is input capture register * 1 capture input source is channel 1/count clock input capture at tcnt1 count-up/count-down * : don ? t care note: 1. when the bfa bit in tmdr0 is set to 1 and tgr0c is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 304 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior1 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel ioa3 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 description 1 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 tgr1a is output compare register initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * capture input source is tioca1 pin input capture at both edges 1 ** tgr1a is input capture register capture input source is tgr0a compare match/ input capture input capture at generation of channel 0/tgr0a compare match/input capture * : don ? t care section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 305 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior2 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel ioa3 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 description 2 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 100 tgr2a is output compare register output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 * 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * tgr2a is input capture register capture input source is tioca2 pin input capture at both edges * : don ? t care section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 306 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior3h bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel ioa3 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 description 3 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 100 tgr3a is output compare register output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * capture input source is tioca3 pin input capture at both edges 1 ** tgr3a is input capture register capture input source is channel 4/count clock input capture at tcnt4 count-up/count-down * : don ? t care section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 307 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior3l bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel ioc3 ioc2 ioc1 ioc0 description 3 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value ) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 tgr3c is output compare register * 1 initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * capture input source is tiocc3 pin input capture at both edges 1 ** tgr3c is input capture register * 1 capture input source is channel 4/count clock input capture at tcnt4 count-up/count-down * : don ? t care note: 1. when the bfa bit in tmdr3 is set to 1 and tgr3c is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 308 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel ioa3 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 description 4 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 tgr4a is output compare register initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 0 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * capture input source is tioca4 pin input capture at both edges 1 ** tgr4a is input capture register capture input source is tgr3a compare match/ input capture input capture at generation of tgr3a compare match/input capture * : don ? t care section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 309 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? tior5 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 channel ioa3 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 description 5 0 0 0 0 output disabled (initial value) 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 0 output toggle output at compare match 100 tgr5a is output compare register output disabled 1 0 output at compare match 1 0 1 output at compare match 1 initial output is 1 output toggle output at compare match 1 * 0 0 input capture at rising edge 1 input capture at falling edge 1 * tgr5a is input capture register capture input source is tioca5 pin input capture at both edges * : don ? t care section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 310 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.2.4 timer interrupt enable register (tier) 7 ttge 0 r/w 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 tciev 0 r/w 3 tgied 0 r/w 0 tgiea 0 r/w 2 tgiec 0 r/w 1 tgieb 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : channel 0: tier0 channel 3: tier3 7 ttge 0 r/w 6 ? 1 ? 5 tcieu 0 r/w 4 tciev 0 r/w 3 ? 0 ? 0 tgiea 0 r/w 2 ? 0 ? 1 tgieb 0 r/w channel 1: tier1 channel 2: tier2 channel 4: tier4 channel 5: tier5 bit initial value r/w : : : the tier registers are 8-bit registers that control enabling or disabling of interrupt requests for each channel. the tpu has six tier registers, one for each channel. the tier registers are initialized to h'40 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. bit 7?a/d conversion start request enable (ttge): enables or disables generation of a/d conversion start requests by tgra input capture/compare match. bit 7 ttge description 0 a/d conversion start request generation disabled (initial value ) 1 a/d conversion start request generation enabled bit 6?reserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 311 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 5?underflow interrupt enable (tcieu): enables or disables interrupt requests (tciu) by the tcfu flag when the tcfu flag in tsr is set to 1 in channels 1 and 2. in channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. it is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. bit 5 tcieu description 0 interrupt requests (tciu) by tcfu disabled (initial value ) 1 interrupt requests (tciu) by tcfu enabled bit 4?overflow interrupt enable (tciev): enables or disables interrupt requests (tciv) by the tcfv flag when the tcfv flag in tsr is set to 1. bit 4 tciev description 0 interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv disabled (initial value ) 1 interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv enabled bit 3?tgr interrupt enable d (tgied): enables or disables interrupt requests (tgid) by the tgfd bit when the tgfd bit in tsr is set to 1 in channels 0 and 3. in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. it is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. bit 3 tgied description 0 interrupt requests (tgid) by tgfd bit disabled (initial value ) 1 interrupt requests (tgid) by tgfd bit enabled bit 2?tgr interrupt enable c (tgiec): enables or disables interrupt requests (tgic) by the tgfc bit when the tgfc bit in tsr is set to 1 in channels 0 and 3. in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. it is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. bit 2 tgiec description 0 interrupt requests (tgic) by tgfc bit disabled (initial value ) 1 interrupt requests (tgic) by tgfc bit enabled section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 312 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 1?tgr interrupt enable b (tgieb): enables or disables interrupt requests (tgib) by the tgfb bit when the tgfb bit in tsr is set to 1. bit 1 tgieb description 0 interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit disabled (initial value ) 1 interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit enabled bit 0?tgr interrupt enable a (tgiea): enables or disables interrupt requests (tgia) by the tgfa bit when the tgfa bit in tsr is set to 1. bit 0 tgiea description 0 interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit disabled (initial value ) 1 interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit enabled section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 313 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.2.5 timer status register (tsr) 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 tcfv 0 r/(w) * 3 tgfd 0 r/(w) * 0 tgfa 0 r/(w) * 2 tgfc 0 r/(w) * 1 tgfb 0 r/(w) * bit initial value r/w note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. : : : channel 0: tsr0 channel 3: tsr3 7 tcfd 1 r 6 ? 1 ? 5 tcfu 0 r/(w) * 4 tcfv 0 r/(w) * 3 ? 0 ? 0 tgfa 0 r/(w) * 2 ? 0 ? 1 tgfb 0 r/(w) * channel 1: tsr1 channel 2: tsr2 channel 4: tsr4 channel 5: tsr5 bit initial value r/w note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. : : : the tsr registers are 8-bit registers that indicate the status of each channel. the tpu has six tsr registers, one for each channel. the tsr registers are initialized to h'c0 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. bit 7?count direction flag (tcfd): status flag that shows the direction in which tcnt counts in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. in channels 0 and 3, bit 7 is reserved. it is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. bit 7 tcfd description 0 tcnt counts down 1 tcnt counts up (initial value ) bit 6?reserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 314 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 5?underflow flag (tcfu): status flag that indicates that tcnt underflow has occurred when channels 1, 2, 4, and 5 are set to phase counting mode. in channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. it is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. bit 5 tcfu description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value ) when 0 is written to tcfu after reading tcfu = 1 1 [setting condition] when the tcnt value underflows (changes from h'0000 to h'ffff) bit 4?overflow flag (tcfv): status flag that indicates that tcnt overflow has occurred. bit 4 tcfv description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value ) when 0 is written to tcfv after reading tcfv = 1 1 [setting condition] when the tcnt value overflows (changes from h'ffff to h'0000 ) bit 3?input capture/output compare flag d (tgfd): status flag that indicates the occurrence of tgrd input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3. in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. it is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. bit 3 tgfd description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value ) ? when dtc is activated by tgid interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 ? when 0 is written to tgfd after reading tgfd = 1 1 [setting conditions] ? when tcnt = tgrd while tgrd is functioning as output compare register ? when tcnt value is transferred to tgrd by input capture signal while tgrd is functioning as input capture register section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 315 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 2?input capture/output compare flag c (tgfc): status flag that indicates the occurrence of tgrc input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3. in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. it is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. bit 2 tgfc description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value ) ? when dtc is activated by tgic interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 ? when 0 is written to tgfc after reading tgfc = 1 1 [setting conditions] ? when tcnt = tgrc while tgrc is functioning as output compare register ? when tcnt value is transferred to tgrc by input capture signal while tgrc is functioning as input capture register bit 1?input capture/output compare flag b (tgfb): status flag that indicates the occurrence of tgrb input capture or compare match. bit 1 tgfb description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value ) ? when dtc is activated by tgib interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 ? when 0 is written to tgfb after reading tgfb = 1 1 [setting conditions] ? when tcnt = tgrb while tgrb is functioning as output compare register ? when tcnt value is transferred to tgrb by input capture signal while tgrb is functioning as input capture register section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 316 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 0?input capture/output compare flag a (tgfa): status flag that indicates the occurrence of tgra input capture or compare match. bit 0 tgfa description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value ) ? when dtc is activated by tgia interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 ? when 0 is written to tgfa after reading tgfa = 1 1 [setting conditions] ? when tcnt = tgra while tgra is functioning as output compare register ? when tcnt value is transferred to tgra by input capture signal while tgra is functioning as input capture register 9.2.6 timer counter (tcnt) 15 0 r/w 14 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 9 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w channel 0: tcnt0 (up-counter) channel 1: tcnt1 (up/down-counter * ) channel 2: tcnt2 (up/down-counter * ) channel 3: tcnt3 (up-counter) channel 4: tcnt4 (up/down-counter * ) channel 5: tcnt5 (up/down-counter * ) note: * these counters can be used as up/down-counters only in phase counting mode or when counting overflow/underflow on another channel. in other cases they function as up-counters. the tcnt registers are 16-bit counters. the tpu has six tcnt counters, one for each channel. the tcnt counters are initialized to h'0000 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. the tcnt counters cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 317 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.2.7 timer general register (tgr) 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w the tgr registers are 16-bit registers with a dual function as output compare and input capture registers. the tpu has 16 tgr registers, four each for channels 0 and 3 and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. tgrc and tgrd for channels 0 and 3 can also be designated for operation as buffer registers * . the tgr registers are initialized to h'ffff by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. the tgr registers cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit. note: * tgr buffer register combinations are tgra?tgrc and tgrb?tgrd. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 318 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.2.8 timer start register (tstr) 7 ? 0 ? 6 ? 0 ? 5 cst5 0 r/w 4 cst4 0 r/w 3 cst3 0 r/w 0 cst0 0 r/w 2 cst2 0 r/w 1 cst1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : tstr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects operation/stoppage for channels 0 to 5. tstr is initialized to h'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. note: when setting the operating mode in tmdr or setting the count clock in tcr, first stop the tcnt counter. bits 7 and 6 ? reserved: should always be written with 0. bits 5 to 0 ? counter start 5 to 0 (cst5 to cst0): these bits select operation or stoppage for tcnt. bit n cstn description 0 tcntn count operation is stopped (initial value ) 1 tcntn performs count operation n = 5 to 0 note: if 0 is written to the cst bit during operation with the tioc pin designated for output, the counter stops but the tioc pin output compare output level is retained. if tior is written to when the cst bit is cleared to 0, the pin output level will be changed to the set initial output value. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 319 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.2.9 timer synchro register (tsyr) 7 ? 0 ? 6 ? 0 ? 5 sync5 0 r/w 4 sync4 0 r/w 3 sync3 0 r/w 0 sync0 0 r/w 2 sync2 0 r/w 1 sync1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : tsyr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects independent operation or synchronous operation for the channel 0 to 5 tcnt counters. a channel performs synchronous operation when the corresponding bit in tsyr is set to 1. tsyr is initialized to h'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. bits 7 and 6 ? reserved: should always be written with 0. bits 5 to 0 ? timer synchro 5 to 0 (sync5 to sync0): these bits select whether operation is independent of or synchronized with other channels. when synchronous operation is selected, synchronous presetting of multiple channels * 1 , and synchronous clearing through counter clearing on another channel * 2 are possible. bit n syncn description 0 tcntn operates independently (tcnt presetting/clearing is unrelated to other channels) (initial value ) 1 tcntn performs synchronous operation tcnt synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible n = 5 to 0 notes: 1. to set synchronous operation, the sync bits for at least two channels must be set to 1. 2. to set synchronous clearing, in addition to the sync bit, the tcnt clearing source must also be set by means of bits cclr2 to cclr0 in tcr. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 320 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.2.10 module stop control register (mstpcr) 15 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : 14 0 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w mstpcrh mstpcrl mstpcr is a 16-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control. when the mstp13 bit in mstpcr is set to 1, tpu operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. for details, see section 19.5, module stop mode. mstpcr is initialized to h'3fff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 13 ? module stop (mstp13): specifies the tpu module stop mode. bit 13 mstp13 description 0 tpu module stop mode cleared 1 tpu module stop mode set (initial value ) section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 321 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.3 interface to bus master 9.3.1 16-bit registers tcnt and tgr are 16-bit registers. as the data bus to the bus master is 16 bits wide, these registers can be read and written to in 16-bit units. these registers cannot be read or written to in 8-bit units; 16-bit access must always be used. an example of 16-bit register access operation is shown in figure 9.2. bus interface h internal data bus l bus master module data bus tcnth tcntl figure 9.2 16-bit register access operation [bus master ? ? ? ? tcnt (16 bits)] 9.3.2 8-bit registers registers other than tcnt and tgr are 8-bit. as the data bus to the cpu is 16 bits wide, these registers can be read and written to in 16-bit units. they can also be read and written to in 8-bit units. examples of 8-bit register access operation are shown in figures 9.3 to 9.5. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 322 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bus interface h internal data bus l module data bus tcr bus master figure 9.3 8-bit register access operation [bus master ? ? ? ? tcr (upper 8 bits)] bus interface h internal data bus l module data bus tmdr bus master figure 9.4 8-bit register access operation [bus master ? ? ? ? tmdr (lower 8 bits)] bus interface h internal data bus l module data bus tcr tmdr bus master figure 9.5 8-bit register access operation [bus master ? ? ? ? tcr and tmdr (16 bits)] section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 323 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.4 operation 9.4.1 overview operation in each mode is outlined below. normal operation: each channel has a tcnt and tgr register. tcnt performs up-counting, and is also capable of free-running operation, synchronous counting, and external event counting. each tgr can be used as an input capture register or output compare register. synchronous operation: when synchronous operation is designated for a channel, tcnt for that channel performs synchronous presetting. that is, when tcnt for a channel designated for synchronous operation is rewritten, the tcnt counters for the other channels are also rewritten at the same time. synchronous clearing of the tcnt counters is also possible by setting the timer synchronization bits in tsyr for channels designated for synchronous operation. buffer operation ? when tgr is an output compare register when a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the relevant channel is transferred to tgr. ? when tgr is an input capture register when input capture occurs, the value in tcnt is transfer to tgr and the value previously held in tgr is transferred to the buffer register. cascaded operation: the channel 1 counter (tcnt1), channel 2 counter (tcnt2), channel 4 counter (tcnt4), and channel 5 counter (tcnt5) can be connected together to operate as a 32- bit counter. pwm mode: in this mode, a pwm waveform is output. the output level can be set by means of tior. a pwm waveform with a duty of between 0% and 100% can be output, according to the setting of each tgr register. phase counting mode: in this mode, tcnt is incremented or decremented by detecting the phases of two clocks input from the external clock input pins in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. when phase counting mode is set, the corresponding tclk pin functions as the clock pin, and tcnt performs up- or down-counting. this can be used for two-phase encoder pulse input. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 324 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.4.2 basic functions counter operation: when one of bits cst0 to cst5 is set to 1 in tstr, the tcnt counter for the corresponding channel starts counting. tcnt can operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter, and so on. ? example of count operation setting procedure figure 9.6 shows an example of the count operation setting procedure. select counter clock operation selection select counter clearing source periodic counter set period start count operation section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 325 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? free-running count operation and periodic count operation immediately after a reset, the tpu?s tcnt counters are all designated as free-running counters. when the relevant bit in tstr is set to 1 the corresponding tcnt counter starts up- count operation as a free-running counter. when tcnt overflows (from h'ffff to h'0000), the tcfv bit in tsr is set to 1. if the value of the corresponding tciev bit in tier is 1 at this point, the tpu requests an interrupt. after overflow, tcnt starts counting up again from h'0000. figure 9.7 illustrates free-running counter operation. tcnt value h'ffff h'0000 cst bit tcfv time figure 9.7 free-running counter operation when compare match is selected as the tcnt clearing source, the tcnt counter for the relevant channel performs periodic count operation. the tgr register for setting the period is designated as an output compare register, and counter clearing by compare match is selected by means of bits cclr2 to cclr0 in tcr. after the settings have been made, tcnt starts up-count operation as periodic counter when the corresponding bit in tstr is set to 1. when the count value matches the value in tgr, the tgf bit in tsr is set to 1 and tcnt is cleared to h'0000. if the value of the corresponding tgie bit in tier is 1 at this point, the tpu requests an interrupt. after a compare match, tcnt starts counting up again from h'0000. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 326 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 figure 9.8 illustrates periodic counter operation. tcnt value tgr h'0000 cst bit tgf time counter cleared by tgr compare match flag cleared by software or dtc activation figure 9.8 periodic counter operation waveform output by compare match: the tpu can perform 0, 1, or toggle output from the corresponding output pin using compare match. ? example of setting procedure for waveform output by compare match figure 9.9 shows an example of the setting procedure for waveform output by compare match select waveform output mode output selection set output timing start count operation section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 327 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? examples of waveform output operation figure 9.10 shows an example of 0 output/1 output. in this example tcnt has been designated as a free-running counter, and settings have been made so that 1 is output by compare match a, and 0 is output by compare match b. when the set level and the pin level coincide, the pin level does not change. tcnt value h'ffff h'0000 tioca tiocb time tgra tgrb no change no change no change no change 1 output 0 output figure 9.10 example of 0 output/1 output operation figure 9.11 shows an example of toggle output. in this example tcnt has been designated as a periodic counter (with counter clearing performed by compare match b), and settings have been made so that output is toggled by both compare match a and compare match b. tcnt value h'ffff h'0000 tiocb tioca time tgrb tgra toggle output toggle output counter cleared by tgrb compare match figure 9.11 example of toggle output operation section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 328 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 input capture function: the tcnt value can be transferred to tgr on detection of the tioc pin input edge. rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected as the detected edge. for channels 0, 1, 3, and 4, it is also possible to specify another channel?s counter input clock or compare match signal as the input capture source. note: when another channel?s counter input clock is used as the input capture input for channels 0 and 3, /1 should not be selected as the counter input clock used for input capture input. input capture will not be generated if /1 is selected. ? example of input capture operation setting procedure figure 9.12 shows an example of the input capture operation setting procedure. select input capture input input selection start count [1] [2] [1] designate tgr as an input capture register by means of tior, and select rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input capture source and input signal edge. [2] set the cst bit in tstr to 1 to start the count operation. figure 9.12 example of input capture operation setting procedure section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 329 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? example of input capture operation figure 9.13 shows an example of input capture operation. in this example both rising and falling edges have been selected as the tioca pin input capture input edge, falling edge has been selected as the tiocb pin input capture input edge, and counter clearing by tgrb input capture has been designated for tcnt. tcnt value h'0180 h'0000 tioca tgra time h'0010 h'0005 counter cleared by tiocb input (falling edge) h'0160 h'0005 h'0160 h'0010 tgrb h'0180 tiocb figure 9.13 example of input capture operation section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 330 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.4.3 synchronous operation in synchronous operation, the values in a number of tcnt counters can be rewritten simultaneously (synchronous presetting). also, a number of tcnt counters can be cleared simultaneously by making the appropriate setting in tcr (synchronous clearing). synchronous operation enables tgr to be incremented with respect to a single time base. channels 0 to 5 can all be designated for synchronous operation. example of synchronous operation setting procedure: figure 9.14 shows an example of the synchronous operation setting procedure. set synchronous operation synchronous operation selection set tcnt synchronous presetting section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 331 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 example of synchronous operation: figure 9.15 shows an example of synchronous operation. in this example, synchronous operation and pwm mode 1 have been designated for channels 0 to 2, tgr0b compare match has been set as the channel 0 counter clearing source, and synchronous clearing has been set for the channel 1 and 2 counter clearing source. three-phase pwm waveforms are output from pins tioc0a, tioc1a, and tioc2a. at this time, synchronous presetting, and synchronous clearing by tgr0b compare match, is performed for channel 0 to 2 tcnt counters, and the data set in tgr0b is used as the pwm cycle. for details of pwm modes, see section 9.4.6, pwm modes. tcnt0 to tcnt2 values h'0000 tioc0a tioc1a time tgr0b synchronous clearing by tgr0b compare match tgr2a tgr1a tgr2b tgr0a tgr1b tioc2a figure 9.15 example of synchronous operation section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 332 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.4.4 buffer operation buffer operation, provided for channels 0 and 3, enables tgrc and tgrd to be used as buffer registers. buffer operation differs depending on whether tgr has been designated as an input capture register or as a compare match register. table 9.5 shows the register combinations used in buffer operation. table 9.5 register combinations in buffer operation channel timer general register buffer register 0tgr0a tgr0c tgr0b tgr0d 3tgr3a tgr3c tgr3b tgr3d ? when tgr is an output compare register when a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the corresponding channel is transferred to the timer general register. this operation is illustrated in figure 9.16. buffer register timer general register tcnt comparator compare match signal figure 9.16 compare match buffer operation section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 333 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? when tgr is an input capture register when input capture occurs, the value in tcnt is transferred to tgr and the value previously held in the timer general register is transferred to the buffer register. this operation is illustrated in figure 9.17. buffer register timer general register tcnt input capture signal figure 9.17 input capture buffer operation example of buffer operation setting procedure: figure 9.18 shows an example of the buffer operation setting procedure. select tgr function buffer operation set buffer operation start count section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 334 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 examples of buffer operation ? when tgr is an output compare register figure 9.19 shows an operation example in which pwm mode 1 has been designated for channel 0, and buffer operation has been designated for tgra and tgrc. the settings used in this example are tcnt clearing by compare match b, 1 output at compare match a, and 0 output at compare match b. as buffer operation has been set, when compare match a occurs the output changes and the value in buffer register tgrc is simultaneously transferred to timer general register tgra. this operation is repeated each time compare match a occurs. for details of pwm modes, see section 9.4.6, pwm modes. tcnt value tgr0b h'0000 tgr0c time tgr0a h'0200 h'0520 tioca h'0200 h'0450 h'0520 h'0450 tgr0a h'0450 h'0200 transfer figure 9.19 example of buffer operation (1) section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 335 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? when tgr is an input capture register figure 9.20 shows an operation example in which tgra has been designated as an input capture register, and buffer operation has been designated for tgra and tgrc. counter clearing by tgra input capture has been set for tcnt, and both rising and falling edges have been selected as the tioca pin input capture input edge. as buffer operation has been set, when the tcnt value is stored in tgra upon occurrence of input capture a, the value previously stored in tgra is simultaneously transferred to tgrc. tcnt value h'09fb h'0000 tgrc time h'0532 tioca tgra h'0f07 h'0532 h'0f07 h'0532 h'0f07 h'09fb figure 9.20 example of buffer operation (2) section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 336 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.4.5 cascaded operation in cascaded operation, two 16-bit counters for different channels are used together as a 32-bit counter. this function works by counting the channel 1 (channel 4) counter clock upon overflow/underflow of tcnt2 (tcnt5) as set in bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr. underflow occurs only when the lower 16-bit tcnt is in phase-counting mode. table 9.6 shows the register combinations used in cascaded operation. note: when phase counting mode is set for channel 1 or 4, the counter clock setting is invalid and the counter operates independently in phase counting mode. table 9.6 cascaded combinations combination upper 16 bits lower 16 bits channels 1 and 2 tcnt1 tcnt2 channels 4 and 5 tcnt4 tcnt5 example of cascaded operation setting procedure: figure 9.21 shows an example of the setting procedure for cascaded operation. set cascading cascaded operation start count section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 337 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 examples of cascaded operation: figure 9.22 illustrates the operation when counting upon tcnt2 overflow/underflow has been set for tcnt1, tgr1a and tgr2a have been designated as input capture registers, and tioc pin rising edge has been selected. when a rising edge is input to the tioca1 and tioca2 pins simultaneously, the upper 16 bits of the 32-bit data are transferred to tgr1a, and the lower 16 bits to tgr2a. tcnt2 clock tcnt2 h'ffff h'0000 h'0001 tioca1, tioca2 tgr1a h'03a2 tgr2a h'0000 tcnt1 clock tcnt1 h'03a1 h'03a2 figure 9.22 example of cascaded operation (1) figure 9.23 illustrates the operation when counting upon tcnt2 overflow/underflow has been set for tcnt1, and phase counting mode has been designated for channel 2. tcnt1 is incremented by tcnt2 overflow and decremented by tcnt2 underflow. tclka tcnt2 fffd tcnt1 0001 tclkb fffe ffff 0000 0001 0002 0001 0000 ffff 0000 0000 figure 9.23 example of cascaded operation (2) section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 338 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.4.6 pwm modes in pwm mode, pwm waveforms are output from the output pins. 0, 1, or toggle output can be selected as the output level in response to compare match of each tgr. designating tgr compare match as the counter clearing source enables the period to be set in that register. all channels can be designated for pwm mode independently. synchronous operation is also possible. there are two pwm modes, as described below. ? pwm mode 1 pwm output is generated from the tioca and tiocc pins by pairing tgra with tgrb and tgrc with tgrd. the output specified by bits ioa3 to ioa0 and ioc3 to ioc0 in tior is output from the tioca and tiocc pins at compare matches a and c, and the output specified by bits iob3 to iob0 and iod3 to iod0 in tior is output at compare matches b and d. the initial output value is the value set in tgra or tgrc. if the set values of paired tgrs are identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs. in pwm mode 1, a maximum 8-phase pwm output is possible. ? pwm mode 2 pwm output is generated using one tgr as the cycle register and the others as duty registers. the output specified in tior is performed by means of compare matches. upon counter clearing by a synchronization register compare match, the output value of each pin is the initial value set in tior. if the set values of the cycle and duty registers are identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs. in pwm mode 2, a maximum 15-phase pwm output is possible by combined use with synchronous operation. the correspondence between pwm output pins and registers is shown in table 9.7. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 339 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 9.7 pwm output registers and output pins output pins channel registers pwm mode 1 pwm mode 2 0 tgr0a tioca0 tioca0 tgr0b tiocb0 tgr0c tiocc0 tiocc0 tgr0d tiocd0 1 tgr1a tioca1 tioca1 tgr1b tiocb1 2 tgr2a tioca2 tioca2 tgr2b tiocb2 3 tgr3a tioca3 tioca3 tgr3b tiocb3 tgr3c tiocc3 tiocc3 tgr3d tiocd3 4 tgr4a tioca4 tioca4 tgr4b tiocb4 5 tgr5a tioca5 tioca5 tgr5b tiocb5 note: in pwm mode 2, pwm output is not possible for the tgr register in which the period is set. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 340 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 example of pwm mode setting procedure: figure 9.24 shows an example of the pwm mode setting procedure. select counter clock pwm mode select counter clearing source select waveform output level section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 341 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 examples of pwm mode operation: figure 9.25 shows an example of pwm mode 1 operation. in this example, tgra compare match is set as the tcnt clearing source, 0 is set for the tgra initial output value and output value, and 1 is set as the tgrb output value. in this case, the value set in tgra is used as the period, and the values set in tgrb registers as the duty. tcnt value tgra h'0000 tioca time tgrb counter cleared by tgra compare match figure 9.25 example of pwm mode operation (1) section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 342 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 figure 9.26 shows an example of pwm mode 2 operation. in this example, synchronous operation is designated for channels 0 and 1, tgr1b compare match is set as the tcnt clearing source, and 0 is set for the initial output value and 1 for the output value of the other tgr registers (tgr0a to tgr0d, tgr1a), to output a 5-phase pwm waveform. in this case, the value set in tgr1b is used as the cycle, and the values set in the other tgrs as the duty. tcnt value tgr1b h'0000 tioca0 counter cleared by tgr1b compare match tgr1a tgr0d tgr0c tgr0b tgr0a tiocb0 tiocc0 tiocd0 tioca1 time figure 9.26 example of pwm mode operation (2) section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 343 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 figure 9.27 shows examples of pwm waveform output with 0% duty and 100% duty in pwm mode. tcnt value tgra h'0000 tioca time tgrb 0% duty tgrb rewritten tgrb rewritten tgrb rewritten tcnt value tgra h'0000 tioca time tgrb 100% duty tgrb rewritten tgrb rewritten tgrb rewritten output does not change when cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously tcnt value tgra h'0000 tioca time tgrb 100% duty tgrb rewritten tgrb rewritten tgrb rewritten output does not change when cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously 0% duty figure 9.27 example of pwm mode operation (3) section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 344 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.4.7 phase counting mode in phase counting mode, the phase difference between two external clock inputs is detected and tcnt is incremented/decremented accordingly. this mode can be set for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. when phase counting mode is set, an external clock is selected as the counter input clock and tcnt operates as an up/down-counter regardless of the setting of bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 and bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 in tcr. however, the functions of bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr, and of tior, tier, and tgr are valid, and input capture/compare match and interrupt functions can be used. when overflow occurs while tcnt is counting up, the tcfv flag in tsr is set; when underflow occurs while tcnt is counting down, the tcfu flag is set. the tcfd bit in tsr is the count direction flag. reading the tcfd flag provides an indication of whether tcnt is counting up or down. table 9.8 shows the correspondence between external clock pins and channels. table 9.8 phase counting mode clock input pins external clock pins channels a-phase b-phase when channel 1 or 5 is set to phase counting mode tclka tclkb when channel 2 or 4 is set to phase counting mode tclkc tclkd example of phase counting mode setting procedure: figure 9.28 shows an example of the phase counting mode setting procedure. select phase counting mode phase counting mode start count section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 345 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 examples of phase counting mode operation: in phase counting mode, tcnt counts up or down according to the phase difference between two external clocks. there are four modes, according to the count conditions. ? phase counting mode 1 figure 9.29 shows an example of phase counting mode 1 operation, and table 9.9 summarizes the tcnt up/down-count conditions. tcnt value time down-count up-count tclka (channels 1 and 5) tclkc (channels 2 and 4) tclkb (channels 1 and 5) tclkd (channels 2 and 4) figure 9.29 example of phase counting mode 1 operation table 9.9 up/down-count conditions in phase counting mode 1 tclka (channels 1 and 5) tclkc (channels 2 and 4) tclkb (channels 1 and 5) tclkd (channels 2 and 4) operation high level up-count low level low level high level high level down-count low level high level low level legend: : rising edge : falling edge section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 346 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? phase counting mode 2 figure 9.30 shows an example of phase counting mode 2 operation, and table 9.10 summarizes the tcnt up/down-count conditions. tcnt value time down-count up-count tclka (channels 1 and 5) tclkc (channels 2 and 4) tclkb (channels 1 and 5) tclkd (channels 2 and 4) figure 9.30 example of phase counting mode 2 operation table 9.10 up/down-count conditions in phase counting mode 2 tclka (channels 1 and 5) tclkc (channels 2 and 4) tclkb (channels 1 and 5) tclkd (channels 2 and 4) operation high level low level low level don ? t care high level up-count high level low level high level don ? t care low level down-count legend: : rising edge : falling edge section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 347 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? phase counting mode 3 figure 9.31 shows an example of phase counting mode 3 operation, and table 9.11 summarizes the tcnt up/down-count conditions. tcnt value time up-count tclka (channels 1 and 5) tclkc (channels 2 and 4) tclkb (channels 1 and 5) tclkd (channels 2 and 4) down-count figure 9.31 example of phase counting mode 3 operation table 9.11 up/down-count conditions in phase counting mode 3 tclka (channels 1 and 5) tclkc (channels 2 and 4) tclkb (channels 1 and 5) tclkd (channels 2 and 4) operation high level low level low level don ? t care high level up-count high level down-count low level high level low level don ? t care legend: : rising edge : falling edge section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 348 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? phase counting mode 4 figure 9.32 shows an example of phase counting mode 4 operation, and table 9.12 summarizes the tcnt up/down-count conditions. time tclka (channels 1 and 5) tclkc (channels 2 and 4) tclkb (channels 1 and 5) tclkd (channels 2 and 4) up-count down-count tcnt value figure 9.32 example of phase counting mode 4 operation table 9.12 up/down-count conditions in phase counting mode 4 tclka (channels 1 and 5) tclkc (channels 2 and 4) tclkb (channels 1 and 5) tclkd (channels 2 and 4) operation high level up-count low level low level don ? t care high level high level down-count low level high level don ? t care low level legend: : rising edge : falling edge section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 349 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 phase counting mode application example: figure 9.33 shows an example in which phase counting mode is designated for channel 1, and channel 1 is coupled with channel 0 to input servo motor 2-phase encoder pulses in order to detect the position or speed. channel 1 is set to phase counting mode 1, and the encoder pulse a-phase and b-phase are input to tclka and tclkb. channel 0 operates with tcnt counter clearing by tgr0c compare match; tgr0a and tgr0c are used for the compare match function, and are set with the speed control period and position control period. tgr0b is used for input capture, with tgr0b and tgr0d operating in buffer mode. the channel 1 counter input clock is designated as the tgr0b input capture source, and detection of the pulse width of 2-phase encoder 4-multiplication pulses is performed. tgr1a and tgr1b for channel 1 are designated for input capture, channel 0 tgr0a and tgr0c compare matches are selected as the input capture source, and store the up/down-counter values for the control periods. this procedure enables accurate position/speed detection to be achieved. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 350 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcnt1 tcnt0 channel 1 tgr1a (speed period capture) tgr0a (speed control period) tgr1b (position period capture) tgr0c (position control period) tgr0b (pulse width capture) tgr0d (buffer operation) channel 0 tclka tclkb edge detection circuit + ? + ? figure 9.33 phase counting mode application example 9.5 interrupts 9.5.1 interrupt sources and priorities there are three kinds of tpu interrupt source: tgr input capture/compare match, tcnt overflow, and tcnt underflow. each interrupt source has its own status flag and enable/disabled bit, allowing generation of interrupt request signals to be enabled or disabled individually. when an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding status flag in tsr is set to 1. if the corresponding enable/disable bit in tier is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt is requested. the interrupt request is cleared by clearing the status flag to 0. relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller, but the priority order within a channel is fixed. for details, see section 5, interrupt controller. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 351 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 9.13 lists the tpu interrupt sources. table 9.13 tpu interrupts channel interrupt source description dtc activation priority 0 tgi0a tgr0a input capture/compare match possible high tgi0b tgr0b input capture/compare match possible tgi0c tgr0c input capture/compare match possible tgi0d tgr0d input capture/compare match possible tci0v tcnt0 overflow not possible 1 tgi1a tgr1a input capture/compare match possible tgi1b tgr1b input capture/compare match possible tci1v tcnt1 overflow not possible tci1u tcnt1 underflow not possible 2 tgi2a tgr2a input capture/compare match possible tgi2b tgr2b input capture/compare match possible tci2v tcnt2 overflow not possible tci2u tcnt2 underflow not possible 3 tgi3a tgr3a input capture/compare match possible tgi3b tgr3b input capture/compare match possible tgi3c tgr3c input capture/compare match possible tgi3d tgr3d input capture/compare match possible tci3v tcnt3 overflow not possible 4 tgi4a tgr4a input capture/compare match possible tgi4b tgr4b input capture/compare match possible tci4v tcnt4 overflow not possible tci4u tcnt4 underflow not possible 5 tgi5a tgr5a input capture/compare match possible tgi5b tgr5b input capture/compare match possible tci5v tcnt5 overflow not possible tci5u tcnt5 underflow not possible low note: this table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. the relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 352 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 input capture/compare match interrupt: an interrupt is requested if the tgie bit in tier is set to 1 when the tgf flag in tsr is set to 1 by the occurrence of a tgr input capture/compare match on a particular channel. the interrupt request is cleared by clearing the tgf flag to 0. the tpu has 16 input capture/compare match interrupts, four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. overflow interrupt: an interrupt is requested if the tciev bit in tier is set to 1 when the tcfv flag in tsr is set to 1 by the occurrence of tcnt overflow on a channel. the interrupt request is cleared by clearing the tcfv flag to 0. the tpu has six overflow interrupts, one for each channel. underflow interrupt: an interrupt is requested if the tcieu bit in tier is set to 1 when the tcfu flag in tsr is set to 1 by the occurrence of tcnt underflow on a channel. the interrupt request is cleared by clearing the tcfu flag to 0. the tpu has four overflow interrupts, one each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. 9.5.2 dtc activation dtc activation: the dtc can be activated by the tgr input capture/compare match interrupt for a channel. for details, see section 7, data transfer controller. a total of 16 tpu input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as dtc activation sources, four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. 9.5.3 a/d converter activation the a/d converter can be activated by the tgra input capture/compare match for a channel. if the ttge bit in tier is set to 1 when the tgfa flag in tsr is set to 1 by the occurrence of a tgra input capture/compare match on a particular channel, a request to start a/d conversion is sent to the a/d converter. if the tpu conversion start trigger has been selected on the a/d converter side at this time, a/d conversion is started. in the tpu, a total of six tgra input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as a/d converter conversion start sources, one for each channel. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 353 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.6 operation timing 9.6.1 input/output timing tcnt count timing: figure 9.34 shows tcnt count timing in internal clock operation, and figure 9.35 shows tcnt count timing in external clock operation. tcnt tcnt input clock internal clock n ? 1 n n+1 n+2 falling edge rising edge figure 9.34 count timing in internal clock operation tcnt tcnt input clock external clock n ? 1 n n+1 n+2 rising edge falling edge falling edge figure 9.35 count timing in external clock operation output compare output timing: a compare match signal is generated in the final state in which tcnt and tgr match (the point at which the count value matched by tcnt is updated). when a compare match signal is generated, the output value set in tior is output at the output compare output pin. after a match between tcnt and tgr, the compare match signal is not generated until the tcnt input clock is generated. section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 354 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 figure 9.36 shows output compare output timing. tgr tcnt tcnt input clock n n n+1 compare match signal tioc pin figure 9.36 output compare output timing input capture signal timing: figure 9.37 shows input capture signal timing. tcnt input capture input n n+1 n+2 n n+2 tgr input capture signal figure 9.37 input capture input signal timing section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 355 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 timing for counter clearing by compare match/input capture: figure 9.38 shows the timing when counter clearing by compare match occurrence is specified, and figure 9.39 shows the timing when counter clearing by input capture occurrence is specified. tcnt counter clear signal compare match signal tgr n n h'0000 figure 9.38 counter clear timing (compare match) tcnt counter clear signal input capture signal tgr n h'0000 n figure 9.39 counter clear timing (input capture) section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 356 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 buffer operation timing: figures 9.40 and 9.41 show the timing in buffer operation. tgra, tgrb compare match signal tcnt tgrc, tgrd nn n n n+1 figure 9.40 buffer operation timing (compare match) tgra, tgrb tcnt input capture signal tgrc, tgrd n n n n+1 n n n+1 figure 9.41 buffer operation timing (input capture) section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 357 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.6.2 interrupt signal timing tgf flag setting timing in case of compare match: figure 9.42 shows the timing for setting of the tgf flag in tsr by compare match occurrence, and tgi interrupt request signal timing. tgr tcnt tcnt input clock n n n+1 compare match signal tgf flag tgi interrupt figure 9.42 tgi interrupt timing (compare match) section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 358 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tgf flag setting timing in case of input capture: figure 9.43 shows the timing for setting of the tgf flag in tsr by input capture occurrence, and tgi interrupt request signal timing. tgr tcnt input capture signal n n tgf flag tgi interrupt figure 9.43 tgi interrupt timing (input capture) section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 359 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcfv flag/tcfu flag setting timing: figure 9.44 shows the timing for setting of the tcfv flag in tsr by overflow occurrence, and tciv interrupt request signal timing. figure 9.45 shows the timing for setting of the tcfu flag in tsr by underflow occurrence, and tciu interrupt request signal timing. overflow signal tcnt (overflow) tcnt input clock h'ffff h'0000 tcfv flag tciv interrupt figure 9.44 tciv interrupt setting timing underflow signal tcnt (underflow) tcnt input clock h'0000 h'ffff tcfu flag tciu interrupt figure 9.45 tciu interrupt setting timing section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 360 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 status flag clearing timing: after a status flag is read as 1 by the cpu, it is cleared by writing 0 to it. when the dtc is activated, the flag is cleared automatically. figure 9.46 shows the timing for status flag clearing by the cpu, and figure 9.47 shows the timing for status flag clearing by the dtc. status flag write signal address tsr address interrupt request signal tsr write cycle t1 t2 figure 9.46 timing for status flag clearing by cpu interrupt request signal status flag address source address dtc read cycle t1 t2 destination address t1 t2 dtc write cycle figure 9.47 timing for status flag clearing by dtc activation section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 361 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 9.7 usage notes note that the kinds of operation and contention described below occur during tpu operation. input clock restrictions: the input clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states in the case of single-edge detection, and at least 2.5 states in the case of both-edge detection. the tpu will not operate properly with a narrower pulse width. in phase counting mode, the phase difference and overlap between the two input clocks must be at least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. figure 9.48 shows the input clock conditions in phase counting mode. overlap phase differ- ence phase differ- ence overlap tclka (tclkc) tclkb (tclkd) pulse width pulse width pulse width pulse width notes: phase difference and overlap pulse width : 1.5 states or more : 2.5 states or more figure 9.48 phase difference, overlap, and pulse width in phase counting mode caution on period setting: when counter clearing by compare match is set, tcnt is cleared in the final state in which it matches the tgr value (the point at which the count value matched by tcnt is updated). consequently, the actual counter frequency is given by the following formula: f = (n + 1) where f : counter frequency : operating frequency n : tgr set value section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 362 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 contention between tcnt write and clear operations: if the counter clear signal is generated in the t2 state of a tcnt write cycle, tcnt clearing takes precedence and the tcnt write is not performed. figure 9.49 shows the timing in this case. counter clear signal write signal address tcnt address tcnt tcnt write cycle t1 t2 n h'0000 figure 9.49 contention between tcnt write and clear operations section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 363 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 contention between tcnt write and increment operations: if incrementing occurs in the t2 state of a tcnt write cycle, the tcnt write takes precedence and tcnt is not incremented. figure 9.50 shows the timing in this case. tcnt input clock write signal address tcnt address tcnt tcnt write cycle t1 t2 n m tcnt write data figure 9.50 contention between tcnt write and increment operations section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 364 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 contention between tgr write and compare match: if a compare match occurs in the t2 state of a tgr write cycle, the tgr write takes precedence and the compare match signal is inhibited. a compare match does not occur even if the same value as before is written. figure 9.51 shows the timing in this case. compare match signal write signal address tgr address tcnt tgr write cycle t1 t2 n m tgr write data tgr n n+1 prohibited figure 9.51 contention between tgr write and compare match section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 365 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 contention between buffer register write and compare match: if a compare match occurs in the t2 state of a tgr write cycle, the data transferred to tgr by the buffer operation will be the data prior to the write. figure 9.52 shows the timing in this case. compare match signal write signal address buffer register address buffer register tgr write cycle t1 t2 n tgr n m buffer register write data figure 9.52 contention between buffer register write and compare match section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 366 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 contention between tgr read and input capture: if the input capture signal is generated in the t1 state of a tgr read cycle, the data that is read will be the data after input capture transfer. figure 9.53 shows the timing in this case. input capture signal read signal address tgr address tgr tgr read cycle t1 t2 m internal data bus x m figure 9.53 contention between tgr read and input capture section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 367 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 contention between tgr write and input capture: if the input capture signal is generated in the t2 state of a tgr write cycle, the input capture operation takes precedence and the write to tgr is not performed. figure 9.54 shows the timing in this case. input capture signal write signal address tcnt tgr write cycle t1 t2 m tgr m tgr address figure 9.54 contention between tgr write and input capture section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 368 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 contention between buffer register write and input capture: if the input capture signal is generated in the t2 state of a buffer write cycle, the buffer operation takes precedence and the write to the buffer register is not performed. figure 9.55 shows the timing in this case. input capture signal write signal address tcnt buffer register write cycle t1 t2 n tgr n m m buffer register buffer register address figure 9.55 contention between buffer register write and input capture section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 369 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 contention between overflow/underflow and counter clearing: if overflow/underflow and counter clearing occur simultaneously, the tcfv/tcfu flag in tsr is not set and tcnt clearing takes precedence. figure 9.56 shows the operation timing when a tgr compare match is specified as the clearing source, and h'ffff is set in tgr. counter clear signal tcnt input clock tcnt tgf prohibited tcfv h'ffff h'0000 figure 9.56 contention between overflow and counter clearing section 9 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 370 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 contention between tcnt write and overflow/underflow: if there is an up-count or down- count in the t2 state of a tcnt write cycle, and overflow/underflow occurs, the tcnt write takes precedence and the tcfv/tcfu flag in tsr is not set . figure 9.57 shows the operation timing when there is contention between a tcnt write and overflow. write signal address tcnt address tcnt tcnt write cycle t1 t2 h'ffff m tcnt write data tcfv flag prohibited figure 9.57 contention between tcnt write and overflow multiplexing of i/o pins: in the h8s/2345 group, the tclka input pin is multiplexed with the tiocc0 i/o pin, the tclkb input pin with the tiocd0 i/o pin, the tclkc input pin with the tiocb1 i/o pin, and the tclkd input pin with the tiocb2 i/o pin. when an external clock is input, compare match output should not be performed from a multiplexed pin. interrupts and module stop mode: if module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the cpu interrupt source or dtc activation source. interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode. section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 371 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 10 8-bit timers 10.1 overview the h8s/2345 group includes an 8-bit timer module with two channels (tmr0 and tmr1). each channel has an 8-bit counter (tcnt) and two time constant registers (tcora and tcorb) that are constantly compared with the tcnt value to detect compare match events. the 8-bit timer module can thus be used for a variety of functions, including pulse output with an arbitrary duty cycle. 10.1.1 features the features of the 8-bit timer module are listed below. ? selection of four clock sources the counters can be driven by one of three internal clock signals ( /8, /64, or /8192) or an external clock input (enabling use as an external event counter). ? selection of three ways to clear the counters the counters can be cleared on compare match a or b, or by an external reset signal. ? timer output control by a combination of two compare match signals the timer output signal in each channel is controlled by a combination of two independent compare match signals, enabling the timer to generate output waveforms with an arbitrary duty cycle or pwm output. ? provision for cascading of two channels ? operation as a 16-bit timer is possible, using channel 0 for the upper 8 bits and channel 1 for the lower 8 bits (16-bit count mode). ? channel 1 can be used to count channel 0 compare matches (compare match count mode). ? three independent interrupts compare match a and b and overflow interrupts can be requested independently. ? a/d converter conversion start trigger can be generated channel 0 compare match a signal can be used as an a/d converter conversion start trigger. ? module stop mode can be set ? as the initial setting, 8-bit timer operation is halted. register access is enabled by exiting module stop mode. section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 372 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.1.2 block diagram figure 10.1 shows a block diagram of the 8-bit timer module. external clock source internal clock sources /8 /64 /8192 clock 1 clock 0 compare match a1 compare match a0 clear 1 cmia0 cmib0 ovi0 cmia1 cmib1 ovi1 interrupt signals tmo0 tmri0 internal bus tcora0 comparator a0 comparator b0 tcorb0 tcsr0 tcr0 tcora1 comparator a1 tcnt1 comparator b1 tcorb1 tcsr1 tcr1 tmci0 tmci1 tcnt0 overflow 1 overflow 0 compare match b1 compare match b0 tmo1 tmri1 a/d conversion start request signal clock select control logic clear 0 figure 10.1 block diagram of 8-bit timer section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 373 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.1.3 pin configuration table 10.1 summarizes the input and output pins of the 8-bit timer. table 10.1 input and output pins of 8-bit timer channel name symbol i/o function 0 timer output pin 0 tmo0 output outputs at compare match timer clock input pin 0 tmci0 input inputs external clock for counter timer reset input pin 0 tmri0 input inputs external reset to counter 1 timer output pin 1 tmo1 output outputs at compare match timer clock input pin 1 tmci1 input inputs external clock for counter timer reset input pin 1 tmri1 input inputs external reset to counter 10.1.4 register configuration table 10.2 summarizes the registers of the 8-bit timer module. table 10.2 8-bit timer registers channel name abbreviation r/w initial value address * 1 0 timer control register 0 tcr0 r/w h'00 h'ffb0 timer control/status register 0 tcsr0 r/(w) * 2 h'00 h'ffb2 time constant register a0 tcora0 r/w h'ff h'ffb4 time constant register b0 tcorb0 r/w h'ff h'ffb6 timer counter 0 tcnt0 r/w h'00 h'ffb8 1 timer control register 1 tcr1 r/w h'00 h'ffb1 timer control/status register 1 tcsr1 r/(w) * 2 h'10 h'ffb3 time constant register a1 tcora1 r/w h'ff h'ffb5 time constant register b1 tcorb1 r/w h'ff h'ffb7 timer counter 1 tcnt1 r/w h'00 h'ffb9 all module stop control register mstpcr r/w h'3fff h'ff3c notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address 2. only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. each pair of registers for channel 0 and channel 1 is a 16-bit register with the upper 8 bits for channel 0 and the lower 8 bits for channel 1, so they can be accessed together by word transfer instruction. section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 374 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.2 register descriptions 10.2.1 timer counters 0 and 1 (tcnt0, tcnt1) 15 0 r/w 14 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 9 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 0 0 r/w tcnt0 tcnt1 bit initial value r/w : : : tcnt0 and tcnt1 are 8-bit readable/writable up-counters that increment on pulses generated from an internal or external clock source. this clock source is selected by clock select bits cks2 to cks0 of tcr. the cpu can read or write to tcnt0 and tcnt1 at all times. tcnt0 and tcnt1 comprise a single 16-bit register, so they can be accessed together by word transfer instruction. tcnt0 and tcnt1 can be cleared by an external reset input or by a compare match signal. which signal is to be used for clearing is selected by clock clear bits cclr1 and cclr0 of tcr. when a timer counter overflows from h'ff to h'00, ovf in tcsr is set to 1. tcnt0 and tcnt1 are each initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 10.2.2 time constant registers a0 and a1 (tcora0, tcora1) 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w tcora0 tcora1 bit initial value r/w : : : tcora0 and tcora1 are 8-bit readable/writable registers. tcora0 and tcora1 comprise a single 16-bit register so they can be accessed together by word transfer instruction. tcora is continually compared with the value in tcnt. when a match is detected, the corresponding cmfa flag of tcsr is set. note, however, that comparison is disabled during the t2 state of a tcor write cycle. section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 375 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 the timer output can be freely controlled by these compare match signals and the settings of bits os1 and os0 of tcsr. tcora0 and tcora1 are each initialized to h'ff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 10.2.3 time constant registers b0 and b1 (tcorb0, tcorb1) 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w tcorb0 tcorb1 bit initial value r/w : : : tcorb0 and tcorb1 are 8-bit readable/writable registers. tcorb0 and tcorb1 comprise a single 16-bit register so they can be accessed together by word transfer instruction. tcorb is continually compared with the value in tcnt. when a match is detected, the corresponding cmfb flag of tcsr is set. note, however, that comparison is disabled during the t2 state of a tcor write cycle. the timer output can be freely controlled by these compare match signals and the settings of output select bits os3 and os2 of tcsr. tcorb0 and tcorb1 are each initialized to h'ff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 10.2.4 time control registers 0 and 1 (tcr0, tcr1) 7 cmieb 0 r/w 6 cmiea 0 r/w 5 ovie 0 r/w 4 cclr1 0 r/w 3 cclr0 0 r/w 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 cks2 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : tcr0 and tcr1 are 8-bit readable/writable registers that select the clock source and the time at which tcnt is cleared, and enable interrupts. tcr0 and tcr1 are each initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. for details of this timing, see section 10.3, operation. section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 376 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 7?compare match interrupt enable b (cmieb): selects whether cmfb interrupt requests (cmib) are enabled or disabled when the cmfb flag of tcsr is set to 1. bit 7 cmieb description 0 cmfb interrupt requests (cmib) are disabled (initial value ) 1 cmfb interrupt requests (cmib) are enabled bit 6?compare match interrupt enable a (cmiea): selects whether cmfa interrupt requests (cmia) are enabled or disabled when the cmfa flag of tcsr is set to 1. bit 6 cmiea description 0 cmfa interrupt requests (cmia) are disabled (initial value ) 1 cmfa interrupt requests (cmia) are enabled bit 5?timer overflow interrupt enable (ovie): selects whether ovf interrupt requests (ovi) are enabled or disabled when the ovf flag of tcsr is set to 1. bit 5 ovie description 0 ovf interrupt requests (ovi) are disabled (initial value ) 1 ovf interrupt requests (ovi) are enabled bits 4 and 3?counter clear 1 and 0 (cclr1 and cclr0): these bits select the method by which tcnt is cleared: by compare match a or b, or by an external reset input. bit 4 bit 3 cclr1 cclr0 description 0 0 clear is disabled (initial value) 1 clear by compare match a 1 0 clear by compare match b 1 clear by rising edge of external reset input section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 377 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bits 2 to 0?clock select 2 to 0 (cks2 to cks0): these bits select whether the clock input to tcnt is an internal or external clock. three internal clocks can be selected, all divided from the system clock ( ): /8, /64, and /8192. the falling edge of the selected internal clock triggers the count. when use of an external clock is selected, three types of count can be selected: at the rising edge, the falling edge, and both rising and falling edges. some functions differ between channel 0 and channel 1. bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 cks2 cks1 cks0 description 0 0 0 clock input disabled (initial value ) 1 internal clock, counted at falling edge of /8 1 0 internal clock, counted at falling edge of /64 1 internal clock, counted at falling edge of /8192 1 0 0 for channel 0: count at tcnt1 overflow signal * for channel 1: count at tcnt0 compare match a * 1 external clock, counted at rising edge 1 0 external clock, counted at falling edge 1 external clock, counted at both rising and falling edges note: * if the count input of channel 0 is the tcnt1 overflow signal and that of channel 1 is the tcnt0 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. do not use this setting. section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 378 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.2.5 timer control/status registers 0 and 1 (tcsr0, tcsr1) 7 cmfb 0 r/(w) * 6 cmfa 0 r/(w) * 5 ovf 0 r/(w) * 4 adte 0 r/w 3 os3 0 r/w 0 os0 0 r/w 2 os2 0 r/w 1 os1 0 r/w only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. bit initial value r/w : : : note: * 7 cmfb 0 r/(w) * 6 cmfa 0 r/(w) * 5 ovf 0 r/(w) * 4 ? 1 ? 3 os3 0 r/w 0 os0 0 r/w 2 os2 0 r/w 1 os1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : tcsr0 tcsr1 tcsr0 and tcsr1 are 8-bit registers that display compare match and overflow statuses, and control compare match output. tcsr0 is initialized to h'00, and tcsr1 to h'10, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bit 7?compare match flag b (cmfb): status flag indicating whether the values of tcnt and tcorb match. bit 7 cmfb description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value ) ? cleared by reading cmfb when cmfb = 1, then writing 0 to cmfb ? when dtc is activated by cmib interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 1 [setting condition] set when tcnt matches tcorb section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 379 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 6?compare match flag a (cmfa): status flag indicating whether the values of tcnt and tcora match. bit 6 cmfa description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value ) ? cleared by reading cmfa when cmfa = 1, then writing 0 to cmfa ? when dtc is activated by cmia interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 1 [setting condition] set when tcnt matches tcora bit 5?timer overflow flag (ovf): status flag indicating that tcnt has overflowed (changed from h'ff to h'00). bit 5 ovf description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value ) cleared by reading ovf when ovf = 1, then writing 0 to ovf 1 [setting condition] set when tcnt overflows from h'ff to h'00 bit 4?a/d trigger enable (adte) (tcsr0 only): selects enabling or disabling of a/d converter start requests by compare-match a. in tcsr1, this bit is reserved: it is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. bit 4 adte description 0 a/d converter start requests by compare match a are disabled (initial value ) 1 a/d converter start requests by compare match a are enabled section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 380 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bits 3 to 0?output select 3 to 0 (os3 to os0): these bits specify how the timer output level is to be changed by a compare match of tcor and tcnt. bits os3 and os2 select the effect of compare match b on the output level, bits os1 and os0 select the effect of compare match a on the output level, and both of them can be controlled independently. note, however, that priorities are set such that: toggle output > 1 output > 0 output. if compare matches occur simultaneously, the output changes according to the compare match with the higher priority. timer output is disabled when bits os3 to os0 are all 0. after a reset, the timer output is 0 until the first compare match event occurs. bit 3 bit 2 os3 os2 description 0 0 no change when compare match b occurs (initial value ) 1 0 is output when compare match b occurs 1 0 1 is output when compare match b occurs 1 output is inverted when compare match b occurs (toggle output) bit 1 bit 0 os1 os0 description 0 0 no change when compare match a occurs (initial value ) 1 0 is output when compare match a occurs 1 0 1 is output when compare match a occurs 1 output is inverted when compare match a occurs (toggle output) section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 381 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.2.6 module stop control register (mstpcr) 15 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : 14 0 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w mstpcrh mstpcrl mstpcr is a 16-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control. when the mstp12 bit in mstpcr is set to 1, the 8-bit timer operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. for details, see section 19.5, module stop mode. mstpcr is initialized to h'3fff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 12?module stop (mstp12): specifies the 8-bit timer stop mode. bit 12 mstp12 description 0 8-bit timer module stop mode cleared 1 8-bit timer module stop mode set (initial value ) section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 382 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.3 operation 10.3.1 tcnt incrementation timing tcnt is incremented by input clock pulses (either internal or external). internal clock: three different internal clock signals ( /8, /64, or /8192) divided from the system clock ( ) can be selected, by setting bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr. figure 10.2 shows the count timing. ? 1 n n+1 figure 10.2 count timing for internal clock input external clock: three incrementation methods can be selected by setting bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr: at the rising edge, the falling edge, and both rising and falling edges. note that the external clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states for incrementation at a single edge, and at least 2.5 states for incrementation at both edges. the counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is less than these values. figure 10.3 shows the timing of incrementation at both edges of an external clock signal. section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 383 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? 1 n n+1 figure 10.3 count timing for external clock input 10.3.2 compare match timing setting of compare match flags a and b (cmfa, cmfb): the cmfa and cmfb flags in tcsr are set to 1 by a compare match signal generated when the tcor and tcnt values match. the compare match signal is generated at the last state in which the match is true, just before the timer counter is updated. therefore, when tcor and tcnt match, the compare match signal is not generated until the next incrementation clock input. figure 10.4 shows this timing. figure 10.4 timing of cmf setting section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 384 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 timer output timing: when compare match a or b occurs, the timer output changes a specified by bits os3 to os0 in tcsr. depending on these bits, the output can remain the same, change to 0, change to 1, or toggle. figure 10.5 shows the timing when the output is set to toggle at compare match a. figure 10.5 timing of timer output timing of compare match clear: the timer counter is cleared when compare match a or b occurs, depending on the setting of the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr. figure 10.6 shows the timing of this operation. figure 10.6 timing of compare match clear section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 385 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.3.3 timing of external reset on tcnt tcnt is cleared at the rising edge of an external reset input, depending on the settings of the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr. the clear pulse width must be at least 1.5 states. figure 10.7 shows the timing of this operation. ? 1 figure 10.7 timing of external reset 10.3.4 timing of overflow flag (ovf) setting the ovf in tcsr is set to 1 when the timer count overflows (changes from h'ff to h'00). figure 10.8 shows the timing of this operation. figure 10.8 timing of ovf setting section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 386 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.3.5 operation with cascaded connection if bits cks2 to cks0 in either tcr0 or tcr1 are set to b'100, the 8-bit timers of the two channels are cascaded. with this configuration, a single 16-bit timer could be used (16-bit timer mode) or compare matches of the 8-bit channel 0 could be counted by the timer of channel 1 (compare match counter mode). in this case, the timer operates as below. 16-bit counter mode: when bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr0 are set to b'100, the timer functions as a single 16-bit timer with channel 0 occupying the upper 8 bits and channel 1 occupying the lower 8 bits. ? setting of compare match flags ? the cmf flag in tcsr0 is set to 1 when a 16-bit compare match event occurs. ? the cmf flag in tcsr1 is set to 1 when a lower 8-bit compare match event occurs. ? counter clear specification ? if the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr0 have been set for counter clear at compare match, the 16-bit counter (tcnt0 and tcnt1 together) is cleared when a 16-bit compare match event occurs. the 16-bit counter (tcnt0 and tcnt1 together) is cleared even if counter clear by the tmri0 pin has also been set. ? the settings of the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr1 are ignored. the lower 8 bits cannot be cleared independently. ? pin output ? control of output from the tmo0 pin by bits os3 to os0 in tcsr0 is in accordance with the 16-bit compare match conditions. ? control of output from the tmo1 pin by bits os3 to os0 in tcsr1 is in accordance with the lower 8-bit compare match conditions. compare match counter mode: when bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr1 are b'100, tcnt1 counts compare match a?s for channel 0. channels 0 and 1 are controlled independently. conditions such as setting of the cmf flag, generation of interrupts, output from the tmo pin, and counter clear are in accordance with the settings for each channel. note on usage: if the 16-bit counter mode and compare match counter mode are set simultaneously, the input clock pulses for tcnt0 and tcnt1 are not generated and thus the counters will stop operating. software should therefore avoid using both these modes. section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 387 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.4 interrupts 10.4.1 interrupt sources and dtc activation there are three 8-bit timer interrupt sources: cmia, cmib, and ovi. their relative priorities are shown in table 10.3. each interrupt source is set as enabled or disabled by the corresponding interrupt enable bit in tcr, and independent interrupt requests are sent for each to the interrupt controller. it is also possible to activate the dtc by means of cmia and cmib interrupts. table 10.3 8-bit timer interrupt sources interrupt source description dtc activation priority cmia0 interrupt by cmfa possible high cmib0 interrupt by cmfb possible ovi0 interrupt by ovf not possible cmia1 interrupt by cmfa possible cmib1 interrupt by cmfb possible ovi1 interrupt by ovf not possible low note: this table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. the relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller. 10.4.2 a/d converter activation the a/d converter can be activated only by channel 0 compare match a. if the adte bit in tcsr0 is set to 1 when the cmfa flag is set to 1 by the occurrence of channel 0 compare match a, a request to start a/d conversion is sent to the a/d converter. if the 8-bit timer conversion start trigger has been selected on the a/d converter side at this time, a/d conversion is started. section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 388 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.5 sample application in the example below, the 8-bit timer is used to generate a pulse output with a selected duty cycle, as shown in figure 10.9. the control bits are set as follows: [1] in tcr, bit cclr1 is cleared to 0 and bit cclr0 is set to 1 so that the timer counter is cleared when its value matches the constant in tcora. [2] in tcsr, bits os3 to os0 are set to b'0110, causing the output to change to 1 at a tcora compare match and to 0 at a tcorb compare match. with these settings, the 8-bit timer provides output of pulses at a rate determined by tcora with a pulse width determined by tcorb. no software intervention is required. tcnt h'ff counter clear tcora tcorb h'00 tmo figure 10.9 example of pulse output section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 389 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.6 usage notes application programmers should note that the following kinds of contention can occur in the 8-bit timer. 10.6.1 contention between tcnt write and clear if a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the t 2 state of a tcnt write cycle, the clear takes priority, so that the counter is cleared and the write is not performed. figure 10.10 shows this operation. figure 10.10 contention between tcnt write and clear section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 390 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.6.2 contention between tcnt write and increment if a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the t 2 state of a tcnt write cycle, the write takes priority and the counter is not incremented. figure 10.11 shows this operation. figure 10.11 contention between tcnt write and increment section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 391 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.6.3 contention between tcor write and compare match during the t 2 state of a tcor write cycle, the tcor write has priority and the compare match signal is disabled even if a compare match event occurs. figure 10.12 shows this operation. figure 10.12 contention between tcor write and compare match section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 392 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 10.6.4 contention between compare matches a and b if compare match events a and b occur at the same time, the 8-bit timer operates in accordance with the priorities for the output statuses set for compare match a and compare match b, as shown in table 10.4. table 10.4 timer output priorities output setting priority toggle output high 1 output 0 output no change low 10.6.5 switching of internal clocks and tcnt operation tcnt may increment erroneously when the internal clock is switched over. table 10.5 shows the relationship between the timing at which the internal clock is switched (by writing to the cks1 and cks0 bits) and the tcnt operation. when the tcnt clock is generated from an internal clock, the falling edge of the internal clock pulse is detected. if clock switching causes a change from high to low level, as shown in case 3 in table 10.5, a tcnt clock pulse is generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge. this increments tcnt. the erroneous incrementation can also happen when switching between internal and external clocks. section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 393 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 10.5 switching of internal clock and tcnt operation no. timing of switchover by means of cks1 and cks0 bits tcnt clock operation 1 switching from low to low * 1 clock before switchover clock after switchover tcnt clock tcnt cks bit write n n+1 2 switching from low to high * 2 clock before switchover clock after switchover tcnt clock tcnt cks bit write nn+1 n+2 3 switching from high to low * 3 clock before switchover clock after switchover tcnt clock tcnt cks bit write nn+1 n+2 * 4 section 10 8-bit timers rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 394 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 no. timing of switchover by means of cks1 and cks0 bits tcnt clock operation 4 switching from high to high clock before switchover clock after switchover tcnt clock tcnt cks bit write nn+1 n+2 notes: 1. includes switching from low to stop, and from stop to low. 2. includes switching from stop to high. 3. includes switching from high to stop. 4. generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge; tcnt is incremented. 10.6.6 usage note interrupts and module stop mode: if module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the cpu interrupt source or dtc activation source. interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode. section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 395 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 11 watchdog timer 11.1 overview the h8s/2345 group has a single-channel on-chip watchdog timer (wdt) for monitoring system operation. the wdt outputs an overflow signal ( wdtovf ) * if a system crash prevents the cpu from writing to the timer counter, allowing it to overflow. at the same time, the wdt can also generate an internal reset signal for the h8s/2345 group. when this watchdog function is not needed, the wdt can be used as an interval timer. in interval timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows. 11.1.1 features wdt features are listed below. ? switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode ? wdtovf output * when in watchdog timer mode if the counter overflows, the wdt outputs wdtovf . * it is possible to select whether or not the entire h8s/2345 group is reset at the same time. this internal reset can be a power-on reset or a manual reset. ? interrupt generation when in interval timer mode if the counter overflows, the wdt generates an interval timer interrupt. ? choice of eight counter clock sources. note: * the wdtovf pin function is not supported by the f-ztat version. section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 396 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 11.1.2 block diagram figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of the wdt. overflow interrupt control wovi (interrupt request signal) wdtovf * 2 internal reset signal * 1 reset control rstcsr tcnt tscr /2 /64 /128 /512 /2048 /8192 /32768 /131072 clock clock select internal clock sources bus interface module bus legend: tcsr tcnt rstcsr notes: 1. the type of internal reset signal depends on a register setting. either power-on reset or manual reset can be selected. 2. the wdtovf pin function is not supported by the f-ztat version. : timer control/status register : timer counter : reset control/status register internal bus wdt figure 11.1 block diagram of wdt section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 397 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 11.1.3 pin configuration table 11.1 describes the wdt output pin. table 11.1 wdt pin name symbol i/o function watchdog timer overflow wdtovf * output outputs counter overflow signal in watchdog timer mode note: * the wdtovf pin function is not supported by the f-ztat version. 11.1.4 register configuration the wdt has three registers, as summarized in table 11.2. these registers control clock selection, wdt mode switching, and the reset signal. table 11.2 wdt registers address * 1 name abbreviation r/w initial value write * 2 read timer control/status register tcsr r/(w) * 3 h'18 h'ffbc h'ffbc timer counter tcnt r/w h'00 h'ffbc h'ffbd reset control/status register rstcsr r/(w) * 3 h'1f h'ffbe h'ffbf notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. for details of write operations, see section 11.2.4, notes on register access. 3. only a write of 0 is permitted to bit 7, to clear the flag. section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 398 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 11.2 register descriptions 11.2.1 timer counter (tcnt) 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : tcnt is an 8-bit readable/writable * 1 up-counter. when the tme bit is set to 1 in tcsr, tcnt starts counting pulses generated from the internal clock source selected by bits cks2 to cks0 in tcsr. when the count overflows (changes from h'ff to h'00), either the watchdog timer overflow signal ( wdtovf ) * 2 or an interval timer interrupt (wovi) is generated, depending on the mode selected by the wt/ it bit in tcsr. tcnt is initialized to h'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode, or when the tme bit is cleared to 0. it is not initialized in software standby mode. note: 1. the method for writing to tcnt is different from that for general registers to prevent inadvertent overwriting. for details see section 11.2.4, notes on register access. 2. the wdtovf pin function is not supported by the f-ztat version. section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 399 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 11.2.2 timer control/status register (tcsr) 7 ovf 0 r/(w) * 6 wt/it 0 r/w 5 tme 0 r/w 4 ? 1 ? 3 ? 1 ? 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 cks2 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. tcsr is an 8-bit readable/writable * register. its functions include selecting the clock source to be input to tcnt, and the timer mode. tcr is initialized to h'18 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. note: * the method for writing to tcsr is different from that for general registers to prevent inadvertent overwriting. for details see section 11.2.4, notes on register access. bit 7?overflow flag (ovf): indicates that tcnt has overflowed from h'ff to h'00, when in interval timer mode. this flag cannot be set during watchdog timer operation. bit 7 ovf description 0 [clearing condition] cleared by reading tcsr when ovf = 1 * , then writing 0 to ovf (initial value ) 1 [setting condition] set when tcnt overflows (changes from h'ff to h'00) in interval timer mode note: * when ovf is polled and the interval timer interrupt is disabled. ovf = 1 must be read at least twice. bit 6?timer mode select (wt/ it it it it ): selects whether the wdt is used as a watchdog timer or interval timer. if used as an interval timer, the wdt generates an interval timer interrupt request (wovi) when tcnt overflows. if used as a watchdog timer, the wdt generates the wdtovf signal * when tcnt overflows. note: * the wdtovf pin function is not supported by the f-ztat version. section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 400 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 6 wt/ it it it it description 0 interval timer: sends the cpu an interval timer interrupt request (wovi) when tcnt overflows (initial value ) 1 watchdog timer: generates the wdtovf signal * 1 when tcnt overflows * 2 notes: 1. the wdtovf pin function is not supported by the f-ztat version. 2. for details of the case where tcnt overflows in watchdog timer mode, see section 11.2.3, reset control/status register (rstcsr). bit 5?timer enable (tme): selects whether tcnt runs or is halted. bit 5 tme description 0 tcnt is initialized to h'00 and halted (initial value ) 1 tcnt counts bits 4 and 3?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bits 2 to 0: clock select 2 to 0 (cks2 to cks0): these bits select one of eight internal clock sources, obtained by dividing the system clock ( ), for input to tcnt. bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 description cks2 cks1 cks0 clock overflow period (when * 000 /2 (initial value) 25.6 s 1 /64 819.2 s 10 /128 1.6 ms 1 /512 6.6 ms 100 /2048 26.2 ms 1 /8192 104.9 ms 10 /32768 419.4 ms 1 /131072 1.68 s note: * the overflow period is the time from when tcnt starts counting up from h'00 until overflow occurs. section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 401 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 11.2.3 reset control/status register (rstcsr) 7 wovf 0 r/(w) * 6 rste 0 r/w 5 rsts 0 r/w 4 ? 1 ? 3 ? 1 ? 0 ? 1 ? 2 ? 1 ? 1 ? 1 ? note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. bit initial value r/w : : : rstcsr is an 8-bit readable/writable * register that controls the generation of the internal reset signal when tcnt overflows, and selects the type of internal reset signal. rstcsr is initialized to h'1f by a reset signal from the res pin, but not by the wdt internal reset signal caused by overflows. note: * the method for writing to rstcsr is different from that for general registers to prevent inadvertent overwriting. for details see section 11.2.4, notes on register access. bit 7?watchdog overflow flag (wovf): indicates that tcnt has overflowed (changed from h'ff to h'00) during watchdog timer operation. this bit is not set in interval timer mode. bit 7 wovf description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value ) cleared by reading rstcsr when wovf = 1, then writing 0 to wovf 1 [setting condition] set when tcnt overflows (changed from h'ff to h'00) during watchdog timer operation section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 402 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 6?reset enable (rste): specifies whether or not a reset signal is generated in the h8s/2345 group if tcnt overflows during watchdog timer operation. bit 6 rste description 0 reset signal is not generated if tcnt overflows * (initial value ) 1 reset signal is generated if tcnt overflows note: * the modules within the h8s/2345 group are not reset, but tcnt and tcsr within the wdt are reset. bit 5?reset select (rsts): selects the type of internal reset generated if tcnt overflows during watchdog timer operation. for details of the types of resets, see section 4, exception handling. bit 5 rsts description 0 power-on reset (initial value ) 1 manual reset bits 4 to 0?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. 11.2.4 notes on register access the watchdog timer?s tcnt, tcsr, and rstcsr registers differ from other registers in being more difficult to write to. the procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given below. writing to tcnt and tcsr: these registers must be written to by a word transfer instruction. they cannot be written to with byte instructions. figure 11.2 shows the format of data written to tcnt and tcsr. tcnt and tcsr both have the same write address. for a write to tcnt, the upper byte of the written word must contain h'5a and the lower byte must contain the write data. for a write to tcsr, the upper byte of the written word must contain h'a5 and the lower byte must contain the write data. this transfers the write data from the lower byte to tcnt or tcsr. section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 403 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcnt write tcsr write address: h'ffbc address: h'ffbc h'5a write data 15 8 7 0 h'a5 write data 15 8 7 0 figure 11.2 format of data written to tcnt and tcsr writing to rstcsr: rstcsr must be written to by word transfer instruction to address h'ffbe. it cannot be written to with byte instructions. figure 11.3 shows the format of data written to rstcsr. the method of writing 0 to the wovf bit differs from that for writing to the rste and rsts bits. to write 0 to the wovf bit, the write data must have h'a5 in the upper byte and h'00 in the lower byte. this clears the wovf bit to 0, but has no effect on the rste and rsts bits. to write to the rste and rsts bits, the upper byte must contain h'5a and the lower byte must contain the write data. this writes the values in bits 6 and 5 of the lower byte into the rste and rsts bits, but has no effect on the wovf bit. h'a5 h'00 15 8 7 0 h'5a write data 15 8 7 0 writing 0 to wovf bit writing to rste and rsts bits address: h'ffbe address: h'ffbe figure 11.3 format of data written to rstcsr reading tcnt, tcsr, and rstcsr: these registers are read in the same way as other registers. the read addresses are h'ffbc for tcsr, h'ffbd for tcnt, and h'ffbf for rstcsr. section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 404 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 11.3 operation 11.3.1 watchdog timer operation to use the wdt as a watchdog timer, set the wt/ it and tme bits to 1. software must prevent tcnt overflows by rewriting the tcnt value (normally be writing h'00) before overflows occurs. this ensures that tcnt does not overflow while the system is operating normally. if tcnt overflows without being rewritten because of a system crash or other error, the wdtovf signal * is output. this is shown in figure 11.4. this wdtovf signal * can be used to reset the system. the wdtovf signal * is output for 132 states when rste = 1, and for 130 states when rste = 0. if tcnt overflows when 1 is set in the rste bit in rstcsr, a signal that resets the h8s/2345 group internally is generated at the same time as the wdtovf signal * . this reset can be selected as a power-on reset or a manual reset, depending on the setting of the rsts bit in rstcsr. the internal reset signal is output for 518 states. if a reset caused by a signal input to the res pin occurs at the same time as a reset caused by a wdt overflow, the res pin reset has priority and the wovf bit in rstcsr is cleared to 0. note: * the wdtovf pin function is not supported by the f-ztat version. section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 405 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcnt count h'00 time h'ff wt/ it = 1 tme = 1 h'00 written to tcnt wt/ it = 1 tme = 1 h'00 written to tcnt 132 states * 2 518 states wdtovf signal * 3 internal reset signal * 1 wt/ it tme notes: 1. the internal reset signal is generated only if the rste bit is set to 1. 2. 130 states when the rste bit is cleared to 0. 3. the wdtovf pin function is not supported by the f-ztat version. overflow wdtovf * 3 and internal reset are generated wovf=1 : timer mode select bit : timer enable bit legend: figure 11.4 watchdog timer operation 11.3.2 interval timer operation to use the wdt as an interval timer, clear the wt/ it bit in tcsr to 0 and set the tme bit to 1. an interval timer interrupt (wovi) is generated each time tcnt overflows, provided that the wdt is operating as an interval timer, as shown in figure 11.5. this function can be used to generate interrupt requests at regular intervals. section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 406 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcnt count h'00 time h'ff wt/ it = 0 tme = 1 wovi overflow overflow overflow overflow legend: wovi: interval timer interrupt request generation wovi wovi wovi figure 11.5 interval timer operation 11.3.3 timing of setting overflow flag (ovf) the ovf flag is set to 1 if tcnt overflows during interval timer operation. at the same time, an interval timer interrupt (wovi) is requested. this timing is shown in figure 11.6. tcnt h'ff h'00 overflow signal (internal signal) ovf figure 11.6 timing of setting of ovf section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 407 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 11.3.4 timing of setting of watchdog timer overflow flag (wovf) the wovf flag is set to 1 if tcnt overflows during watchdog timer operation. at the same time, the wdtovf signal * goes low. if tcnt overflows while the rste bit in rstcsr is set to 1, an internal reset signal is generated for the entire h8s/2345 group chip. figure 11.7 shows the timing in this case. note: * the wdtovf pin function is not supported by the f-ztat version. tcnt note: * the wdtovf pin function is not supported by the f-ztat version. h'ff h'00 overflow signal (internal signal) wovf wdtovf signal * internal reset signal 132 states 518 states figure 11.7 timing of setting of wovf section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 408 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 11.4 interrupts during interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (wovi). the interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the ovf flag is set to 1 in tcsr. 11.5 usage notes 11.5.1 contention between timer counter (tcnt) write and increment if a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the t 2 state of a tcnt write cycle, the write takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. figure 11.8 shows this operation. address internal write signal tcnt input clock tcnt nm t 1 t 2 tcnt write cycle counter write data figure 11.8 contention between tcnt write and increment section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 409 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 11.5.2 changing value of cks2 to cks0 if bits cks2 to cks0 in tcsr are written to while the wdt is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the tme bit to 0) before changing the value of bits cks2 to cks0. 11.5.3 switching between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode if the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer, or vice versa, while the wdt is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the tme bit to 0) before switching the mode. 11.5.4 system reset by wdtovf wdtovf wdtovf wdtovf signal if the wdtovf output signal * is input to the res pin of the h8s/2345 group, the h8s/2345 group will not be initialized correctly. make sure that the wdtovf signal * is not input logically to the res pin. to reset the entire system by means of the wdtovf signal * , use the circuit shown in figure 11.9. note: * the wdtovf pin function is not supported by the f-ztat version. reset input reset signal to entire system h8s/2345 note: * the wdtovf pin function is not supported by the f-ztat version. res wdtovf * figure 11.9 circuit for system reset by wdtovf wdtovf wdtovf wdtovf signal (example) section 11 watchdog timer rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 410 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 11.5.5 internal reset in watchdog timer mode the h8s/2345 group is not reset internally if tcnt overflows while the rste bit is cleared to 0 during watchdog timer operation, but tcnt and tscr of the wdt are reset. tcnt, tcsr, and rstcr cannot be written to while the wdtovf signal * is low. also note that a read of the wovf flag is not recognized during this period. to clear the wovf flag, therefore, read tcsr after the wdtovf signal * goes high, then write 0 to the wovf flag. note: * the wdtovf pin function is not supported by the f-ztat version. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 411 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 12 serial communication interface (sci) 12.1 overview the h8s/2345 group is equipped with a 2-channel serial communication interface (sci). both channels have the same functions. the sci can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. a function is also provided for serial communication between processors (multiprocessor communication function). 12.1.1 features sci features are listed below. ? choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode asynchronous mode ? serial data communication executed using asynchronous system in which synchronization is achieved character by character ? serial data communication can be carried out with standard asynchronous communication chips such as a universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (uart) or asynchronous communication interface adapter (acia) ? a multiprocessor communication function is provided that enables serial data communication with a number of processors ? choice of 12 serial data transfer formats data length : 7 or 8 bits stop bit length : 1 or 2 bits parity : even, odd, or none multiprocessor bit : 1 or 0 ? receive error detection : parity, overrun, and framing errors ? break detection : break can be detected by reading the rxd pin level directly in case of a framing error clocked synchronous mode ? serial data communication synchronized with a clock serial data communication can be carried out with other chips that have a synchronous communication function ? one serial data transfer format data length : 8 bits ? receive error detection : overrun errors detected section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 412 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? full-duplex communication capability ? the transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to be executed simultaneously ? double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous transmission and continuous reception of serial data ? on-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected ? choice of serial clock source: internal clock from baud rate generator or external clock from sck pin ? four interrupt sources ? four interrupt sources ? transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive error ? that can issue requests independently ? the transmit-data-empty interrupt and receive data full interrupts can activate the data transfer controller (dtc) to execute data transfer ? choice of lsb-first or msb-first transfer ? can be selected regardless of the communication mode * (except in the case of asynchronous mode bit data) ? module stop mode can be set ? as the initial setting, sci operation is halted. register access is enabled by exiting module stop mode. note: * descriptions in this section refer to lsb-first transfer. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 413 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.1.2 block diagram figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of the sci. bus interface tdr rsr rdr module data bus tsr scmr ssr scr transmission/ reception control brr baud rate generator internal data bus rxd txd sck parity generation parity check clock external clock /4 /16 /64 txi tei rxi eri smr legend: scmr rsr rdr tsr tdr smr scr ssr brr : smart card mode register : receive shift register : receive data register : transmit shift register : transmit data register : serial mode register : serial control register : serial status register : bit rate register figure 12.1 block diagram of sci section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 414 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.1.3 pin configuration table 12.1 shows the serial pins for each sci channel. table 12.1 sci pins channel pin name symbol i/o function 0 serial clock pin 0 sck0 i/o sci0 clock input/output receive data pin 0 rxd0 input sci0 receive data input transmit data pin 0 txd0 output sci0 transmit data output 1 serial clock pin 1 sck1 i/o sci1 clock input/output receive data pin 1 rxd1 input sci1 receive data input transmit data pin 1 txd1 output sci1 transmit data output section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 415 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.1.4 register configuration the sci has the internal registers shown in table 12.2. these registers are used to specify asynchronous mode or clocked synchronous mode, the data format, and the bit rate, and to control transmitter/receiver. table 12.2 sci registers channel name abbreviation r/w initial value address * 1 0 serial mode register 0 smr0 r/w h'00 h'ff78 bit rate register 0 brr0 r/w h'ff h'ff79 serial control register 0 scr0 r/w h'00 h'ff7a transmit data register 0 tdr0 r/w h'ff h'ff7b serial status register 0 ssr0 r/(w) * 2 h'84 h'ff7c receive data register 0 rdr0 r h'00 h'ff7d smart card mode register 0 scmr0 r/w h'f2 h'ff7e 1 serial mode register 1 smr1 r/w h'00 h'ff80 bit rate register 1 brr1 r/w h'ff h'ff81 serial control register 1 scr1 r/w h'00 h'ff82 transmit data register 1 tdr1 r/w h'ff h'ff83 serial status register 1 ssr1 r/(w) * 2 h'84 h'ff84 receive data register 1 rdr1 r h'00 h'ff85 smart card mode register 1 scmr1 r/w h'f2 h'ff86 all module stop control register mstpcr r/w h'3fff h'ff3c notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 416 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.2 register des c riptions 12.2.1 receive shift register (rsr) 7 ? 6 ? 5 ? 4 ? 3 ? 0 ? 2 ? 1 ? bit r/w : : rsr is a register used to receive serial data. the sci sets serial data input from the rxd pin in rsr in the order received, starting with the lsb (bit 0), and converts it to parallel data. when one byte of data has been received, it is transferred to rdr automatically. rsr cannot be directly read or written to by the cpu. 12.2.2 receive data register (rdr) 7 0 r 6 0 r 5 0 r 4 0 r 3 0 r 0 0 r 2 0 r 1 0 r bit initial value r/w : : : rdr is a register that stores received serial data. when the sci has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from rsr to rdr where it is stored, and completes the receive operation. after this, rsr is receive-enabled. since rsr and rdr function as a double buffer in this way, enables continuous receive operations to be performed. rdr is a read-only register, and cannot be written to by the cpu. rdr is initialized to h'00 by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 417 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.2.3 transmit shift register (tsr) 7 ? 6 ? 5 ? 4 ? 3 ? 0 ? 2 ? 1 ? bit r/w : : tsr is a register used to transmit serial data. to perform serial data transmission, the sci first transfers transmit data from tdr to tsr, then sends the data to the txd pin starting with the lsb (bit 0). when transmission of one byte is completed, the next transmit data is transferred from tdr to tsr, and transmission started, automatically. however, data transfer from tdr to tsr is not performed if the tdre bit in ssr is set to 1. tsr cannot be directly read or written to by the cpu. 12.2.4 transmit data register (tdr) 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : tdr is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission. when the sci detects that tsr is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in tdr to tsr and starts serial transmission. continuous serial transmission can be carried out by writing the next transmit data to tdr during serial transmission of the data in tsr. tdr can be read or written to by the cpu at all times. tdr is initialized to h'ff by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 418 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.2.5 serial mode register (smr) 7 c/ a 0 r/w 6 chr 0 r/w 5 pe 0 r/w 4 o/ e 0 r/w 3 stop 0 r/w 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 mp 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : smr is an 8-bit register used to set the sci?s serial transfer format and select the baud rate generator clock source. smr can be read or written to by the cpu at all times. smr is initialized to h'00 by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode. bit 7?communication mode (c/ a a a a ): selects asynchronous mode or clocked synchronous mode as the sci operating mode. bit 7 c/ a a a a description 0 asynchronous mode (initial value ) 1 clocked synchronous mode bit 6?character length (chr): selects 7 or 8 bits as the data length in asynchronous mode. in clocked synchronous mode, a fixed data length of 8 bits is used regardless of the chr setting. bit 6 chr description 0 8-bit data (initial value ) 1 7-bit data * note: * when 7-bit data is selected, the msb (bit 7) of tdr is not transmitted, and it is not possible to choose between lsb-first or msb-first transfer. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 419 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 5?parity enable (pe): in asynchronous mode, selects whether or not parity bit addition is performed in transmission, and parity bit checking in reception. in clocked synchronous mode, parity bit addition and checking is not performed, regardless of the pe bit setting. bit 5 pe description 0 parity bit addition and checking disabled (initial value ) 1 parity bit addition and checking enabled * note: * when the pe bit is set to 1, the parity (even or odd) specified by the o/ e bit is added to transmit data before transmission. in reception, the parity bit is checked for the parity (even or odd) specified by the o/ e bit. bit 4?parity mode (o/ e e e e ): selects either even or odd parity for use in parity addition and checking. the o/ e bit setting is only valid when the pe bit is set to 1, enabling parity bit addition and checking, in asynchronous mode. the o/ e bit setting is invalid in clocked synchronous mode, and when parity addition and checking is disabled in asynchronous mode. bit 4 o/ e e e e description 0 even parity * 1 (initial value ) 1 odd parity * 2 notes: 1. when even parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is even. in reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity bit is even. 2. when odd parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is odd. in reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity bit is odd. bit 3?stop bit length (stop): selects 1 or 2 bits as the stop bit length in asynchronous mode. the stop bits setting is only valid in asynchronous mode. if clocked synchronous mode is set the stop bit setting is invalid since stop bits are not added. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 420 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 3 stop description 0 1 stop bit: in transmission, a single 1 bit (stop bit) is added to the end of each transmitted character before it is sent (initial value ) 1 2 stop bits: in transmission, two 1 bits (stop bits) are added to the end of each transmitted character before it is sent in reception, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the stop bit setting. if the second stop bit is 1, it is treated as a stop bit; if it is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit character. bit 2?multiprocessor mode (mp): selects multiprocessor format. when multiprocessor format is selected, the pe bit and o/ e bit parity settings are invalid. the mp bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode; it is invalid in clocked synchronous mode. for details of the multiprocessor communication function, see section 12.3.3, multiprocessor communication function. bit 2 mp description 0 multiprocessor function disabled (initial value ) 1 multiprocessor format selected bits 1 and 0?clock select 1 and 0 (cks1, cks0): these bits select the clock source for the baud rate generator. the clock source can be selected from , /4, /16, and /64, according to the setting of bits cks1 and cks0. for the relation between the clock source, the bit rate register setting, and the baud rate, see section 12.2.8, bit rate register (brr). bit 1 bit 0 cks1 cks0 description 00 section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 421 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.2.6 serial control register (scr) 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 0 cke0 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : scr is a register that performs enabling or disabling of sci transfer operations, serial clock output in asynchronous mode, and interrupt requests, and selection of the serial clock source. scr can be read or written to by the cpu at all times. scr is initialized to h'00 by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode. bit 7?transmit interrupt enable (tie): enables or disables transmit data empty interrupt (txi) request generation when serial transmit data is transferred from tdr to tsr and the tdre flag in ssr is set to 1. bit 7 tie description 0 transmit data empty interrupt (txi) requests disabled * (initial value ) 1 transmit data empty interrupt (txi) requests enabled note: * txi interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the tdre flag, then clearing it to 0, or clearing the tie bit to 0. bit 6?receive interrupt enable (rie): enables or disables receive data full interrupt (rxi) request and receive error interrupt (eri) request generation when serial receive data is transferred from rsr to rdr and the rdrf flag in ssr is set to 1. bit 6 rie description 0 receive data full interrupt (rxi) request and receive error interrupt (eri) request disabled * (initial value ) 1 receive data full interrupt (rxi) request and receive error interrupt (eri) request enabled note: * rxi and eri interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the rdrf flag, or the fer, per, or orer flag, then clearing the flag to 0, or clearing the rie bit to 0. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 422 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 5?transmit enable (te): enables or disables the start of serial transmission by the sci. bit 5 te description 0 transmission disabled * 1 (initial value ) 1 transmission enabled * 2 notes: 1. the tdre flag in ssr is fixed at 1. 2. in this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to tdr and the tdre flag in ssr is cleared to 0. smr setting must be performed to decide the transfer format before setting the te bit to 1. bit 4?receive enable (re): enables or disables the start of serial reception by the sci. bit 4 re description 0 reception disabled * 1 (initial value ) 1 reception enabled * 2 notes: 1. clearing the re bit to 0 does not affect the rdrf, fer, per, and orer flags, which retain their states. 2. serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode or serial clock input is detected in clocked synchronous mode. smr setting must be performed to decide the transfer format before setting the re bit to 1. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 423 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 3?multiprocessor interrupt enable (mpie): enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts. the mpie bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode when the mp bit in smr is set to 1. the mpie bit setting is invalid in clocked synchronous mode or when the mp bit is cleared to 0. bit 3 mpie description 0 multiprocessor interrupts disabled (normal reception performed) (initial value ) [clearing conditions] ? when the mpie bit is cleared to 0 ? when mpb= 1 data is received 1 multiprocessor interrupts enabled * receive interrupt (rxi) requests, receive error interrupt (eri) requests, and setting of the rdrf, fer, and orer flags in ssr are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received. note: * when receive data including mpb = 0 is received, receive data transfer from rsr to rdr, receive error detection, and setting of the rdrf, fer, and orer flags in ssr , is not performed. when receive data including mpb = 1 is received, the mpb bit in ssr is set to 1, the mpie bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and generation of rxi and eri interrupts (when the tie and rie bits in scr are set to 1) and fer and orer flag setting is enabled. bit 2?transmit end interrupt enable (teie): enables or disables transmit end interrupt (tei) request generation when there is no valid transmit data in tdr in msb data transmission. bit 2 teie description 0 transmit end interrupt (tei) request disabled * (initial value ) 1 transmit end interrupt (tei) request enabled * note: * tei cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the tdre flag in ssr, then clearing it to 0 and clearing the tend flag to 0, or clearing the teie bit to 0. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 424 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bits 1 and 0?clock enable 1 and 0 (cke1, cke0): these bits are used to select the sci clock source and enable or disable clock output from the sck pin. the combination of the cke1 and cke0 bits determines whether the sck pin functions as an i/o port, the serial clock output pin, or the serial clock input pin. the setting of the cke0 bit, however, is only valid for internal clock operation (cke1 = 0) in asynchronous mode. the cke0 bit setting is invalid in clocked synchronous mode, and in the case of external clock operation (cke1 = 1). note that the sci?s operating mode must be decided using smr before setting the cke1 and cke0 bits. for details of clock source selection, see table 12.9. bit 1 bit 0 cke1 cke0 description 0 0 asynchronous mode internal clock/sck pin functions as i/o port * 1 clocked synchronous mode internal clock/sck pin functions as serial clock output 1 asynchronous mode internal clock/sck pin functions as clock output * 2 clocked synchronous mode internal clock/sck pin functions as serial clock output 1 0 asynchronous mode external clock/sck pin functions as clock input * 3 clocked synchronous mode external clock/sck pin functions as serial clock input 1 asynchronous mode external clock/sck pin functions as clock input * 3 clocked synchronous mode external clock/sck pin functions as serial clock input notes: 1. initial value 2. outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate. 3. inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 425 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.2.7 serial status register (ssr) 7 tdre 1 r/(w) * 6 rdrf 0 r/(w) * 5 orer 0 r/(w) * 4 fer 0 r/(w) * 3 per 0 r/(w) * 0 mpbt 0 r/w 2 tend 1 r 1 mpb 0 r bit initial value r/w : : : note: * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. ssr is an 8-bit register containing status flags that indicate the operating status of the sci, and multiprocessor bits. ssr can be read or written to by the cpu at all times. however, 1 cannot be written to flags tdre, rdrf, orer, per, and fer. also note that in order to clear these flags they must be read as 1 beforehand. the tend flag and mpb flag are read-only flags and cannot be modified. ssr is initialized to h'84 by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode. bit 7?transmit data register empty (tdre): indicates that data has been transferred from tdr to tsr and the next serial data can be written to tdr. bit 7 tdre description 0 [clearing conditions] ? when 0 is written to tdre after reading tdre = 1 ? when the dtc is activated by a txi interrupt and writes data to tdr 1 [setting conditions] (initial value ) ? when the te bit in scr is 0 ? when data is transferred from tdr to tsr and data can be written to tdr section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 426 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 6?receive data register full (rdrf): indicates that the received data is stored in rdr. bit 6 rdrf description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value ) ? when 0 is written to rdrf after reading rdrf = 1 ? when the dtc is activated by an rxi interrupt and reads data from rdr 1 [setting condition] when serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from rsr to rdr note: rdr and the rdrf flag are not affected and retain their previous values when an error is detected during reception or when the re bit in scr is cleared to 0. if reception of the next data is completed while the rdrf flag is still set to 1, an overrun error will occur and the receive data will be lost. bit 5?overrun error (orer): indicates that an overrun error occurred during reception, causing abnormal termination. bit 5 orer description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) * 1 when 0 is written to orer after reading orer = 1 1 [setting condition] when the next serial reception is completed while rdrf = 1 * 2 notes: 1. the orer flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the re bit in scr is cleared to 0. 2. the receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in rdr, and the data received subsequently is lost. also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the orer flag is set to 1. in clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 427 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 4?framing error (fer): indicates that a framing error occurred during reception in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination. bit 4 fer description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) * 1 when 0 is written to fer after reading fer = 1 1 [setting condition] when the sci checks whether the stop bit at the end of the receive data when reception ends, and the stop bit is 0 * 2 notes: 1. the fer flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the re bit in scr is cleared to 0. 2. in 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked for a value of 0; the second stop bit is not checked. if a framing error occurs, the receive data is transferred to rdr but the rdrf flag is not set. also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the fer flag is set to 1. in clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. bit 3?parity error (per): indicates that a parity error occurred during reception using parity addition in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination. bit 3 per description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) * 1 when 0 is written to per after reading per = 1 1 [setting condition] when, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit does not match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the o/ e bit in smr * 2 notes: 1. the per flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the re bit in scr is cleared to 0. 2. if a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to rdr but the rdrf flag is not set. also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the per flag is set to 1. in clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 428 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 2?transmit end (tend): indicates that there is no valid data in tdr when the last bit of the transmit character is sent, and transmission has been ended. the tend flag is read-only and cannot be modified. bit 2 tend description 0 [clearing conditions] ? when 0 is written to tdre after reading tdre = 1 ? when the dtc is activated by a txi interrupt and writes data to tdr 1 [setting conditions] (initial value ) ? when the te bit in scr is 0 ? when tdre = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character bit 1?multiprocessor bit (mpb): when reception is performed using multiprocessor format in asynchronous mode, mpb stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive data. mpb is a read-only bit, and cannot be modified. bit 1 mpb description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) * when data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received 1 [setting condition] when data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received note: * retains its previous state when the re bit in scr is cleared to 0 with multiprocessor format. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 429 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 0?multiprocessor bit transfer (mpbt): when transmission is performed using multiprocessor format in asynchronous mode, mpbt stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to the transmit data. the mpbt bit setting is invalid when multiprocessor format is not used, when not transmitting, and in clocked synchronous mode. bit 0 mpbt description 0 data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted (initial value ) 1 data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted 12.2.8 bit rate register (brr) 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : brr is an 8-bit register that sets the serial transfer bit rate in accordance with the baud rate generator operating clock selected by bits cks1 and cks0 in smr. brr can be read or written to by the cpu at all times. brr is initialized to h'ff by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode. as baud rate generator control is performed independently for each channel, different values can be set for each channel. table 12.3 shows sample brr settings in asynchronous mode, and table 12.4 shows sample brr settings in clocked synchronous mode. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 430 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 12.3 brr settings for various bit rates (asynchronous mode) = 2 mhz = 2.097152 mhz = 2.4576 mhz = 3 mhz bit rate (bit/s) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) 110 1 141 0.03 1 148 ? 0.04 1 174 ? 0.26 1 212 0.03 150 1 103 0.16 1 108 0.21 1 127 0.00 1 155 0.16 300 0 207 0.16 0 217 0.21 0 255 0.00 1 77 0.16 600 0 103 0.16 0 108 0.21 0 127 0.00 0 155 0.16 1200 0 51 0.16 0 54 ? 0.70 0 63 0.00 0 77 0.16 2400 0 25 0.16 0 26 1.14 0 31 0.00 0 38 0.16 4800 0 12 0.16 0 13 ? 2.48 0 15 0.00 0 19 ? 2.34 9600 0 6 ? 06 ? 2.48 0 7 0.00 0 9 ? 2.34 19200 0 2 ? 02 ? 0 3 0.00 0 4 ? 2.34 31250 0 1 0.00 0 1 ? 01 ? 0 2 0.00 38400 0 1 ? 01 ? 0 1 0.00 ?? ? = 3.6864 mhz = 4 mhz = 4.9152 mhz = 5 mhz bit rate (bit/s) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) 110 2 64 0.70 2 70 0.03 2 86 0.31 2 88 ? 0.25 150 1 191 0.00 1 207 0.16 1 255 0.00 2 64 0.16 300 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16 1 127 0.00 1 129 0.16 600 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16 0 255 0.00 1 64 0.16 1200 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16 0 127 0.00 0 129 0.16 2400 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16 0 63 0.00 0 64 0.16 4800 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16 0 31 0.00 0 32 ? 1.36 9600 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16 0 15 0.00 0 15 1.73 19200 0 5 0.00 0 6 ? 0 7 0.00 0 7 1.73 31250 ?? ? 0 3 0.00 0 4 ? 1.70 0 4 0.00 38400 0 2 0.00 0 2 ? 0 3 0.00 0 3 1.73 section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 431 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 = 6 mhz = 6.144 mhz = 7.3728 mhz = 8 mhz bit rate (bit/s) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) 110 2 106 ? 0.44 2 108 0.08 2 130 ? 0.07 2 141 0.03 150 2 77 0.16 2 79 0.00 2 95 0.00 2 103 0.16 300 1 155 0.16 1 159 0.00 1 191 0.00 1 207 0.16 600 1 77 0.16 1 79 0.00 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16 1200 0 155 0.16 0 159 0.00 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16 2400 0 77 0.16 0 79 0.00 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16 4800 0 38 0.16 0 39 0.00 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16 9600 0 19 ? 2.34 0 19 0.00 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16 19200 0 9 ? 2.34 0 9 0.00 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16 31250 0 5 0.00 0 5 2.40 0 6 ? 0 7 0.00 38400 0 4 ? 2.34 0 4 0.00 0 5 0.00 0 6 ? = 9.8304 mhz = 10 mhz = 12 mhz = 12.288 mhz bit rate (bit/s) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) 110 2 174 ? 0.26 2 177 ? 0.25 2 212 0.03 2 217 0.08 150 2 127 0.00 2 129 0.16 2 155 0.16 2 159 0.00 300 1 255 0.00 2 64 0.16 2 77 0.16 2 79 0.00 600 1 127 0.00 1 129 0.16 1 155 0.16 1 159 0.00 1200 0 255 0.00 1 64 0.16 1 77 0.16 1 79 0.00 2400 0 127 0.00 0 129 0.16 0 155 0.16 0 159 0.00 4800 0 63 0.00 0 64 0.16 0 77 0.16 0 79 0.00 9600 0 31 0.00 0 32 ? 1.36 0 38 0.16 0 39 0.00 19200 0 15 0.00 0 15 1.73 0 19 ? 2.34 0 19 0.00 31250 0 9 ? 1.70 0 9 0.00 0 11 0.00 0 11 2.40 38400 0 7 0.00 0 7 1.73 0 9 ? 2.34 0 9 0.00 section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 432 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 = 14 mhz = 14.7456 mhz = 16 mhz = 17.2032 mhz bit rate (bit/s) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) 110 2 248 ? 0.17 3 64 0.70 3 70 0.03 3 75 0.48 150 2 181 0.16 2 191 0.00 2 207 0.16 2 223 0.00 300 2 90 0.16 2 95 0.00 2 103 0.16 2 111 0.00 600 1 181 0.16 1 191 0.00 1 207 0.16 1 223 0.00 1200 1 90 0.16 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16 1 111 0.00 2400 0 181 0.16 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16 0 223 0.00 4800 0 90 0.16 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16 0 111 0.00 9600 0 45 ? 0.93 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16 0 55 0.00 19200 0 22 ? 0.93 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16 0 27 0.00 31250 0 13 0.00 0 14 ? 1.70 0 15 0.00 0 16 1.20 38400 0 10 ? 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16 0 13 0.00 = 18 mhz = 19.6608 mhz = 20 mhz bit rate (bit/s) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) 110 3 79 ? 0.12 3 86 0.31 3 88 ? 0.25 150 2 233 0.16 2 255 0.00 3 64 0.16 300 2 116 0.16 2 127 0.00 2 129 0.16 600 1 233 0.16 1 255 0.00 2 64 0.16 1200 1 116 0.16 1 127 0.00 1 129 0.16 2400 0 233 0.16 0 255 0.00 1 64 0.16 4800 0 116 0.16 0 127 0.00 0 129 0.16 9600 0 58 ? 0.69 0 63 0.00 0 64 0.16 19200 0 28 1.02 0 31 0.00 0 32 ? 1.36 31250 0 17 0.00 0 19 ? 1.70 0 19 0.00 38400 0 14 ? 2.34 0 15 0.00 0 15 1.73 note: settings with an error of 1% or less are recommended. legend: ? : setting possible, but error occurs section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 433 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 12.4 brr settings for various bit rates (clocked synchronous mode) bit rate = 2 mhz = 4 mhz = 8 mhz = 10 mhz = 16 mhz = 20 mhz (bit/s) nnnnnnnnnnnn 110 3 70 ?? 250 2 124 2 249 3 124 ?? 3 249 500 1 249 2 124 2 249 ?? 3 124 ?? 1 k 1 124 1 249 2 124 ?? 2 249 ?? 2.5 k 0 199 1 99 1 199 1 249 2 99 2 124 5 k 0 99 0 199 1 99 1 124 1 199 1 249 10 k 0 49 0 99 0 199 0 249 1 99 1 124 25 k 0 19 0 39 0 79 0 99 0 159 0 199 50 k 0 9 0 19 0 39 0 49 0 79 0 99 100 k 0 4 0 9 0 19 0 24 0 39 0 49 250 k 0 1 0 3 0 7 0 9 0 15 0 19 500 k 0 0 * 01 03 04 07 09 1 m 0 0 * 01 ?? 03 04 2.5 m ?? 00 * ?? 01 5 m ?? 00 * legend: blank : cannot be set. ? : can be set, but there will be a degree of error. * : continuous transfer is not possible. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 434 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 the brr setting is f ound from the following formulas. asynchronous mode: n = ? 1 ? 1 clocked synchronous mode: n = ? 1 ? 1 where b: bit rate (bit/s) n: brr setting for baud rate generator (0 smr setting n clock cks1 cks0 0 ? 1 ? 1 section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 435 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 12.5 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in asynchronous mode. tables 12.6 and 12.7 show the maximum bit rates with external clock input. table 12.5 maximum bit rate for each frequency (asynchronous mode) (mhz) maximum bit rate (bit/s) n n 2 62500 0 0 2.097152 65536 0 0 2.4576 76800 0 0 3 93750 0 0 3.6864 115200 0 0 4 125000 0 0 4.9152 153600 0 0 5 156250 0 0 6 187500 0 0 6.144 192000 0 0 7.3728 230400 0 0 8 250000 0 0 9.8304 307200 0 0 10 312500 0 0 12 375000 0 0 12.288 384000 0 0 14 437500 0 0 14.7456 460800 0 0 16 500000 0 0 17.2032 537600 0 0 18 562500 0 0 19.6608 614400 0 0 20 625000 0 0 section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 436 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 12.6 maximum bit rate with external clock input (asynchronous mode) (mhz) external input clock (mhz) maximum bit rate (bit/s) 2 0.5000 31250 2.097152 0.5243 32768 2.4576 0.6144 38400 3 0.7500 46875 3.6864 0.9216 57600 4 1.0000 62500 4.9152 1.2288 76800 5 1.2500 78125 6 1.5000 93750 6.144 1.5360 96000 7.3728 1.8432 115200 8 2.0000 125000 9.8304 2.4576 153600 10 2.5000 156250 12 3.0000 187500 12.288 3.0720 192000 14 3.5000 218750 14.7456 3.6864 230400 16 4.0000 250000 17.2032 4.3008 268800 18 4.5000 281250 19.6608 4.9152 307200 20 5.0000 312500 section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 437 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 12.7 maximum bit rate with external clock input (clocked synchronous mode) (mhz) external input clock (mhz) maximum bit rate (bit/s) 2 0.3333 333333.3 4 0.6667 666666.7 6 1.0000 1000000.0 8 1.3333 1333333.3 10 1.6667 1666666.7 12 2.0000 2000000.0 14 2.3333 2333333.3 16 2.6667 2666666.7 18 3.0000 3000000.0 20 3.3333 3333333.3 section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 438 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.2.9 smart card mode register (scmr) 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 1 ? 4 ? 1 ? 3 sdir 0 r/w 0 smif 0 r/w 2 sinv 0 r/w 1 ? 1 ? bit initial value r/w : : : scmr selects lsb-first or msb-first by means of bit sdir. except in the case of asynchronous mode 7-bit data, lsb-first or msb-first can be selected regardless of the serial communication mode. the descriptions in this chapter refer to lsb-first transfer. for details of the other bits in scmr, see section 13.2.1, smart card mode register (scmr). scmr is initialized to h'f2 by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode. bits 7 to 4?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 3?smart card data transfer direction (sdir): selects the serial/parallel conversion format. the transmit/receive format is valid for 8-bit data. bit 3 sdir description 0 tdr contents are transmitted lsb-first (initial value ) receive data is stored in rdr lsb-first 1 tdr contents are transmitted msb-first receive data is stored in rdr msb-first bit 2?smart card data invert (sinv): when the smart card interface operates as a normal sci, 0 should be written in this bit. bit 1?reserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. bit 0?smart card interface mode select (smif): when the smart card interface operates as a normal sci, 0 should be written in this bit. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 439 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.2.10 module stop control register (mstpcr) 15 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : 14 0 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w mstpcrh mstpcrl mstpcr is a 16-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control. when the corresponding bit of bit mstp6 or mstp5 is set to 1, sci operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. for details, see section 19.5, module stop mode. mstpcr is initialized to h'3fff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 6?module stop (mstp6): specifies the sci channel 1 module stop mode. bit 6 mstp6 description 0 sci channel 1 module stop mode cleared 1 sci channel 1 module stop mode set (initial value ) bit 5?module stop (mstp5): specifies the sci channel 0 module stop mode. bit 5 mstp5 description 0 sci channel 0 module stop mode cleared 1 sci channel 0 module stop mode set (initial value ) section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 440 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.3 operation 12.3.1 overview the sci can carry out serial communication in two modes: asynchronous mode in which synchronization is achieved character by character, and clocked synchronous mode in which synchronization is achieved with clock pulses. selection of asynchronous or clocked synchronous mode and the transmission format is made using smr as shown in table 12.8. the sci clock is determined by a combination of the c/ a bit in smr and the cke1 and cke0 bits in scr, as shown in table 12.9. asynchronous mode ? data length: choice of 7 or 8 bits ? choice of parity addition, multiprocessor bit addition, and addition of 1 or 2 stop bits (the combination of these parameters determines the transfer format and character length) ? detection of framing, parity, and overrun errors, and breaks, during reception ? choice of internal or external clock as sci clock source ? when internal clock is selected: the sci operates on the baud rate generator clock and a clock with the same frequency as the bit rate can be output ? when external clock is selected: a clock with a frequency of 16 times the bit rate must be input (the on-chip baud rate generator is not used) clocked synchronous mode ? transfer format: fixed 8-bit data ? detection of overrun errors during reception ? choice of internal or external clock as sci clock source ? when internal clock is selected: the sci operates on the baud rate generator clock and a serial clock is output off-chip ? when external clock is selected: the on-chip baud rate generator is not used, and the sci operates on the input serial clock section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 441 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 12.8 smr settings and serial transfer format selection smr settings sci transfer format bit 7 bit 6 bit 2 bit 5 bit 3 c/ a a a a chr mp pe stop mode data length multi- processor bit parity bit stop bit length 00000 8-bit datano no1 bit 12 bits 10 yes1 bit 12 bits 1 0 0 7-bit data no 1 bit 12 bits 10 yes1 bit 1 asynchronous mode 2 bits 01 ? 0 8-bit data yes no 1 bit ? 12 bits 1 ? 0 7-bit data 1 bit ? 1 asynchronous mode (multi- processor format) 2 bits 1 ???? clocked synchronous mode 8-bit data no none table 12.9 smr and scr settings and sci clock source selection smr scr setting sci transmit/receive clock bit 7 bit 1 bit 0 c/ a a a a cke1 cke0 mode clock source sck pin function 0 0 0 internal sci does not use sck pin 1 outputs clock with same frequency as bit rate 10 external 1 asynchronous mode inputs clock with frequency of 16 times the bit rate 1 0 0 internal outputs serial clock 1 1 0 external inputs serial clock 1 clocked synchronous mode section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 442 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.3.2 operation in asynchronous mode in asynchronous mode, characters are sent or received, each preceded by a start bit indicating the start of communication and one or two stop bits indicating the end of communication. serial communication is thus carried out with synchronization established on a character-by-character basis. inside the sci, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication. both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. figure 12.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. in asynchronous serial communication, the transmission line is usually held in the mark state (high level). the sci monitors the transmission line, and when it goes to the space state (low level), recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication. one serial communication character consists of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in lsb- first order), a parity bit (high or low level), and finally one or two stop bits (high level). in asynchronous mode, the sci performs synchronization at the falling edge of the start bit in reception. the sci samples the data on the 8th pulse of a clock with a frequency of 16 times the length of one bit, so that the transfer data is latched at the center of each bit. lsb start bit msb idle state (mark state) stop bit 0 transmit/receive data d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 0/1 1 1 1 1 serial data parity bit 1 bit 1 or 2 bits 7 or 8 bits 1 bit, or none one unit of transfer data (character or frame) figure 12.2 data format in asynchronous communication (example with 8-bit data, parity, two stop bits) section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 443 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 data transfer format table 12.10 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. any of 12 transfer formats can be selected according to the smr setting. table 12.10 serial transfer formats (asynchronous mode) pe 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 ? ? ? ? s 8-bit data stop s 7-bit data stop s 8-bit data stop stop s 8-bit data p stop s 7-bit data stop p s 8-bit data mpb stop s 8-bit data mpb stop stop s 7-bit data stop mpb s 7-bit data stop mpb stop s 7-bit data stop stop chr 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 mp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 stop 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 smr settings 123456789101112 serial transfer format and frame length stop s 8-bit data p stop s 7-bit data stop p stop legend: s : start bit stop : stop bit p: parity bit mpb : multiprocessor bit section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 444 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 clock either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at the sck pin can be selected as the sci ? s serial clock, according to the setting of the c/ a bit in smr and the cke1 and cke0 bits in scr. for details of sci clock source selection, see table 12.9. when an external clock is input at the sck pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate used. when the sci is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the sck pin. the frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as shown in figure 12.3. 0 1 frame d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 0/1 1 1 figure 12.3 relation between output clock and transfer data phase (asynchronous mode) data transfer operations sci initialization (asynchronous mode): before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the te and re bits in scr to 0, then initialize the sci as described below. when the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the te and re bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. when the te bit is cleared to 0, the tdre flag is set to 1 and tsr is initialized. note that clearing the re bit to 0 does not change the contents of the rdrf, per, fer, and orer flags, or the contents of rdr. when an external clock is used the clock should not be stopped during operation, including initialization, since operation is uncertain. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 445 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 figure 12.4 shows a sample sci initialization flowchart. wait section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 446 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 serial data transmission (asynchronous mode): figure 12.5 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission. the following procedure should be used for serial data transmission. no section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 447 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 in serial transmission, the sci operates as described below. [1] the sci monitors the tdre flag in ssr, and if is 0, recognizes that data has been written to tdr, and transfers the data from tdr to tsr. [2] after transferring data from tdr to tsr, the sci sets the tdre flag to 1 and starts transmission. if the tie bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (txi) is generated. the serial transmit data is sent from the txd pin in the following order. [a] start bit: one 0-bit is output. [b] transmit data: 8-bit or 7-bit data is output in lsb-first order. [c] parity bit or multiprocessor bit: one parity bit (even or odd parity), or one multiprocessor bit is output. a format in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also be selected. [d] stop bit(s): one or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output. [e] mark state: 1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent. [3] the sci checks the tdre flag at the timing for sending the stop bit. if the tdre flag is cleared to 0, the data is transferred from tdr to tsr, the stop bit is sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started. if the tdre flag is set to 1, the tend flag in ssr is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the ? mark state ? is entered in which 1 is output continuously. if the teie bit in scr is set to 1 at this time, a tei interrupt request is generated. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 448 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 figure 12.6 shows an example of the operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. tdre tend 0 1 frame d0 d1 d7 0/1 1 0 d0 d1 d7 0/1 1 1 1 data start bit parity bit stop bit start bit data parity bit stop bit txi interrupt request generated data written to tdr and tdre flag cleared to 0 in txi interrupt service routine tei interrupt request generated idle state (mark state) txi interrupt request generated figure 12.6 example of operation in transmission in asynchronous mode (example with 8-bit data, parity, one stop bit) section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 449 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 serial data reception (asynchronous mode): figure 12.7 shows a sample flowchart for serial reception. the following procedure should be used for serial data reception. yes section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 450 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 451 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 in serial reception, the sci operates as described below. [1] the sci monitors the transmission line, and if a 0 stop bit is detected, performs internal synchronization and starts reception. [2] the received data is stored in rsr in lsb-to-msb order. [3] the parity bit and stop bit are received. after receiving these bits, the sci carries out the following checks. [a] parity check: the sci checks whether the number of 1 bits in the receive data agrees with the parity (even or odd) set in the o/ e bit in smr. [b] stop bit check: the sci checks whether the stop bit is 1. if there are two stop bits, only the first is checked. [c] status check: the sci checks whether the rdrf flag is 0, indicating that the receive data can be transferred from rsr to rdr. if all the above checks are passed, the rdrf flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in rdr. if a receive error * is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 12.11. note: * subsequent receive operations cannot be performed when a receive error has occurred. also note that the rdrf flag is not set to 1 in reception, and so the error flags must be cleared to 0. [4] if the rie bit in scr is set to 1 when the rdrf flag changes to 1, a receive data full interrupt (rxi) request is generated. also, if the rie bit in scr is set to 1 when the orer, per, or fer flag changes to 1, a receive error interrupt (eri) request is generated. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 452 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 12.11 receive errors and conditions for occurrence receive error abbreviation occurrence condition data transfer overrun error orer when the next data reception is completed while the rdrf flag in ssr is set to 1 receive data is not transferred from rsr to rdr. framing error fer when the stop bit is 0 receive data is transferred from rsr to rdr. parity error per when the received data differs from the parity (even or odd) set in smr receive data is transferred from rsr to rdr. figure 12.8 shows an example of the operation for reception in asynchronous mode. rdrf fer 0 1 frame d0 d1 d7 0/1 1 0 d0 d1 d7 0/1 0 1 1 data start bit parity bit stop bit start bit data parity bit stop bit rxi interrupt request generated eri interrupt request generated by framing error idle state (mark state) rdr data read and rdrf flag cleared to 0 in rxi interrupt service routine figure 12.8 example of sci operation in reception (example with 8-bit data, parity, one stop bit) section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 453 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.3.3 multiprocessor communication function the multiprocessor communication function performs serial communication using the multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data, in asynchronous mode. use of this function enables data transfer to be performed among a number of processors sharing transmission lines. when multiprocessor communication is carried out, each receiving station is addressed by a unique id code. the serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles: an id transmission cycle which specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. the multiprocessor bit is used to differentiate between the id transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. the transmitting station first sends the id of the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1 multiprocessor bit added. it then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added. the receiving station skips the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. when data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its own id. the station whose id matches then receives the data sent next. stations whose id does not match continue to skip the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received. in this way, data communication is carried out among a number of processors. figure 12.9 shows an example of inter-processor communication using the multiprocessor format. data transfer format there are four data transfer formats. when the multiprocessor format is specified, the parity bit specification is invalid. for details, see table 12.10. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 454 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 clock see the section on asynchronous mode. transmitting station receiving station a (id = 01) receiving station b (id = 02) receiving station c (id = 03) receiving station d (id = 04) serial transmission line serial data id transmission cycle = receiving station specification data transmission cycle = data transmission to receiving station specified by id (mpb = 1) (mpb = 0) h'01 h'aa legend: mpb: multiprocessor bit figure 12.9 example of inter-processor communication using multiprocessor format (transmission of data h'aa to receiving station a) data transfer operations multiprocessor serial data transmission: figure 12.10 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. the following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data transmission. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 455 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 no section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 456 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 in serial transmission, the sci operates as described below. [1] the sci monitors the tdre flag in ssr, and if is 0, recognizes that data has been written to tdr, and transfers the data from tdr to tsr. [2] after transferring data from tdr to tsr, the sci sets the tdre flag to 1 and starts transmission. if the tie bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (txi) is generated. the serial transmit data is sent from the txd pin in the following order. [a] start bit: one 0-bit is output. [b] transmit data: 8-bit or 7-bit data is output in lsb-first order. [c] multiprocessor bit one multiprocessor bit (mpbt value) is output. [d] stop bit(s): one or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output. [e] mark state: 1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent. [3] the sci checks the tdre flag at the timing for sending the stop bit. if the tdre flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from tdr to tsr, the stop bit is sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started. if the tdre flag is set to 1, the tend flag in ssr is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the mark state is entered in which 1 is output continuously. if the teie bit in scr is set to 1 at this time, a transmission end interrupt (tei) request is generated. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 457 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 figure 12.11 shows an example of sci operation for transmission using the multiprocessor format. tdre tend 0 1 frame d0 d1 d7 0/1 1 0 d0 d1 d7 0/1 1 1 1 data start bit multi- proce- ssor bit stop bit start bit data multi- proces- sor bit stop bit txi interrupt request generated data written to tdr and tdre flag cleared to 0 in txi interrupt service routine tei interrupt request generated idle state (mark state) txi interrupt request generated figure 12.11 example of sci operation in transmission (example with 8-bit data, multiprocessor bit, one stop bit) multiprocessor serial data reception: figure 12.12 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial reception. the following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data reception. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 458 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 yes section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 459 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 460 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 figure 12.13 shows an example of sci operation for multiprocessor format reception. mpie rdr value 0 d0 d1 d7 1 1 0 d0 d1 d7 0 1 1 1 data (id1) start bit mpb stop bit start bit data (data1) mpb stop bit rxi interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated mpie = 0 idle state (mark state) rdrf rdr data read and rdrf flag cleared to 0 in rxi interrupt service routine if not this station ? s id, mpie bit is set to 1 again rxi interrupt request is not generated, and rdr retains its state id1 (a) data does not match station ? s id mpie rdr value 0 d0 d1 d7 1 1 0 d0 d1 d7 0 1 1 1 data (id2) start bit mpb stop bit start bit data (data2) mpb stop bit rxi interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated mpie = 0 idle state (mark state) rdrf rdr data read and rdrf flag cleared to 0 in rxi interrupt service routine matches this station ? s id, so reception continues, and data is received in rxi interrupt service routine mpie bit set to 1 again id2 (b) data matches station ? s id data2 id1 figure 12.13 example of sci operation in reception (example with 8-bit data, multiprocessor bit, one stop bit) section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 461 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.3.4 operation in clocked synchronous mode in clocked synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received in synchronization with clock pulses, making it suitable for high-speed serial communication. inside the sci, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication by use of a common clock. both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. figure 12.14 shows the general format for clocked synchronous serial communication. don ? t care don ? t care one unit of transfer data (character or frame) bit 0 serial data serial clock bit 1 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 lsb msb bit 2 bit 6 bit 7 * * note: * high except in continuous transfer figure 12.14 data format in synchronous communication in clocked synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. data confirmation is guaranteed at the rising edge of the serial clock. in clocked serial communication, one character consists of data output starting with the lsb and ending with the msb. after the msb is output, the transmission line holds the msb state. in clocked synchronous mode, the sci receives data in synchronization with the rising edge of the serial clock. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 462 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 data transfer format a fixed 8-bit data format is used. no parity or multiprocessor bits are added. clock either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external serial clock input at the sck pin can be selected, according to the setting of the c/ a bit in smr and the cke1 and cke0 bits in scr. for details of sci clock source selection, see table 12.9. when the sci is operated on an internal clock, the serial clock is output from the sck pin. eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is performed the clock is fixed high. when only receive operations are performed, however, the serial clock is output until an overrun error occurs or the re bit is cleared to 0. if you want to perform receive operations in units of one character, you should select an external clock as the clock source. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 463 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 data transfer operations sci initialization (clocked synchronous mode): before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the te and re bits in scr to 0, then initialize the sci as described below. when the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the te and re bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. when the te bit is cleared to 0, the tdre flag is set to 1 and tsr is initialized. note that clearing the re bit to 0 does not change the contents of the rdrf, per, fer, and orer flags, or the contents of rdr. figure 12.15 shows a sample sci initialization flowchart. wait section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 464 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 serial data transmission (clocked synchronous mode): figure 12.16 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission. the following procedure should be used for serial data transmission. no section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 465 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 in serial transmission, the sci operates as described below. [1] the sci monitors the tdre flag in ssr, and if is 0, recognizes that data has been written to tdr, and transfers the data from tdr to tsr. [2] after transferring data from tdr to tsr, the sci sets the tdre flag to 1 and starts transmission. if the tie bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (txi) is generated. when clock output mode has been set, the sci outputs 8 serial clock pulses. when use of an external clock has been specified, data is output synchronized with the input clock. the serial transmit data is sent from the txd pin starting with the lsb (bit 0) and ending with the msb (bit 7). [3] the sci checks the tdre flag at the timing for sending the msb (bit 7). if the tdre flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from tdr to tsr, and serial transmission of the next frame is started. if the tdre flag is set to 1, the tend flag in ssr is set to 1, the msb (bit 7) is sent, and the txd pin maintains its state. if the teie bit in scr is set to 1 at this time, a tei interrupt request is generated. [4] after completion of serial transmission, the sck pin is fixed. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 466 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 figure 12.17 shows an example of sci operation in transmission. transfer direction bit 7 serial data serial clock 1 frame tdre tend bit 0 bit 7 bit 0 bit 1 bit 7 bit 6 data written to tdr and tdre flag cleared to 0 in txi interrupt service routine tei interrupt request generated txi interrupt request generated txi interrupt request generated figure 12.17 example of sci operation in transmission serial data reception (clocked synchronous mode): figure 12.18 shows a sample flowchart for serial reception. the following procedure should be used for serial data reception. when changing the operating mode from asynchronous to clocked synchronous, be sure to check that the orer, per, and fer flags are all cleared to 0. the rdrf flag will not be set if the fer or per flag is set to 1, and neither transmit nor receive operations will be possible. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 467 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 yes section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 468 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 in serial reception, the sci operates as described below. [1] the sci performs internal initialization in synchronization with serial clock input or output. [2] the received data is stored in rsr in lsb-to-msb order. after reception, the sci checks whether the rdrf flag is 0 and the receive data can be transferred from rsr to rdr. if this check is passed, the rdrf flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in rdr. if a receive error is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 12.11. neither transmit nor receive operations can be performed subsequently when a receive error has been found in the error check. [3] if the rie bit in scr is set to 1 when the rdrf flag changes to 1, a receive data full interrupt (rxi) request is generated. also, if the rie bit in scr is set to 1 when the orer flag changes to 1, a receive error interrupt (eri) request is generated. figure 12.19 shows an example of sci operation in reception. bit 7 serial data serial clock 1 frame rdrf orer bit 0 bit 7 bit 0 bit 1 bit 6 bit 7 rxi interrupt request generated rdr data read and rdrf flag cleared to 0 in rxi interrupt service routine rxi interrupt request generated eri interrupt request generated by overrun error figure 12.19 example of sci operation in reception simultaneous serial data transmission and reception (clocked synchronous mode): figure 12.20 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations. the following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive operations. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 469 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 yes section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 470 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 12.4 sci interrupts the sci has four interrupt sources: the transmit-end interrupt (tei) request, receive-error interrupt (eri) request, receive-data-full interrupt (rxi) request, and transmit-data-empty interrupt (txi) request. table 12.12 shows the interrupt sources and their relative priorities. individual interrupt sources can be enabled or disabled with the tie, rie, and teie bits in the scr. each kind of interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller independently. when the tdre flag in ssr is set to 1, a txi interrupt request is generated. when the tend flag in ssr is set to 1, a tei interrupt request is generated. a txi interrupt can activate the dtc to perform data transfer. the tdre flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the dtc. the dtc cannot be activated by a tei interrupt request. when the rdrf flag in ssr is set to 1, an rxi interrupt request is generated. when the orer, per, or fer flag in ssr is set to 1, an eri interrupt request is generated. an rxi interrupt can activate the dtc to perform data transfer. the rdrf flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the dtc. the dtc cannot be activated by an eri interrupt request. table 12.12 sci interrupt sources channel interrupt source description dtc activation priority * 0 eri interrupt due to receive error (orer, fer, or per) not possible high rxi interrupt due to receive data full state (rdrf) possible txi interrupt due to transmit data empty state (tdre) possible tei interrupt due to transmission end (tend) not possible 1 eri interrupt due to receive error (orer, fer, or per) not possible rxi interrupt due to receive data full state (rdrf) possible txi interrupt due to transmit data empty state (tdre) possible tei interrupt due to transmission end (tend) not possible low note: * this table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. relative priorities among channels can be changed by means of icr and ipr. a tei interrupt is requested when the tend flag is set to 1 while the teie bit is set to 1. the tend flag is cleared at the same time as the tdre flag. consequently, if a tei interrupt and a txi interrupt are requested simultaneously, the txi interrupt may be accepted first, with the section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 471 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 result that the tdre and tend flags are cleared. note that the tei interrupt will not be accepted in this case. 12.5 usage notes the following points should be noted when using the sci. relation between writes to tdr and the tdre flag the tdre flag in ssr is a status flag that indicates that transmit data has been transferred from tdr to tsr. when the sci transfers data from tdr to tsr, the tdre flag is set to 1. data can be written to tdr regardless of the state of the tdre flag. however, if new data is written to tdr when the tdre flag is cleared to 0, the data stored in tdr will be lost since it has not yet been transferred to tsr. it is therefore essential to check that the tdre flag is set to 1 before writing transmit data to tdr. operation when multiple receive errors occur simultaneously if a number of receive errors occur at the same time, the state of the status flags in ssr is as shown in table 12.13. if there is an overrun error, data is not transferred from rsr to rdr, and the receive data is lost. table 12.13 state of ssr status flags and transfer of receive data ssr status flags rdrf orer fer per receive data transfer rsr to rdr receive error status 1 1 0 0 x overrun error 0010 framing error 0001 parity error 1 1 1 0 x overrun error + framing error 1 1 0 1 x overrun error + parity error 0011 framing error + parity error 1 1 1 1 x overrun error + framing error + parity error notes: : receive data is transferred from rsr to rdr. x: receive data is not transferred from rsr to rdr. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 472 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 break detection and processing (asynchronous mode only): when framing error (fer) detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the rxd pin value directly. in a break, the input from the rxd pin becomes all 0s, and so the fer flag is set, and the parity error flag (per) may also be set. note that, since the sci continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if the fer flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again. sending a break (asynchronous mode only): the txd pin has a dual function as an i/o port whose direction (input or output) is determined by dr and ddr. this can be used to send a break. between serial transmission initialization and setting of the te bit to 1, the mark state is replaced by the value of dr (the pin does not function as the txd pin until the te bit is set to 1). consequently, ddr and dr for the port corresponding to the txd pin are first set to 1. to send a break during serial transmission, first clear dr to 0, then clear the te bit to 0. when the te bit is cleared to 0, the transmitter is initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the txd pin becomes an i/o port, and 0 is output from the txd pin. receive error flags and transmit operations (clocked synchronous mode only): transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (orer, per, or fer) is set to 1, even if the tdre flag is cleared to 0. be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting transmission. note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the re bit is cleared to 0. receive data sampling timing and reception margin in asynchronous mode: in asynchronous mode, the sci operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer rate. in reception, the sci samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs internal synchronization. receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 8th pulse of the basic clock. this is illustrated in figure 12.21. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 473 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 internal basic clock 16 clocks 8 clocks receive data (rxd) synchronization sampling timing start bit d0 d1 data sampling timing 15 0 7 15 0 07 figure 12.21 receive data sampling timing in asynchronous mode thus the reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by formula (1) below. m = (0.5 ? 1 2n d ? 0.5 n ) ? (l ? 0.5) f ? (1 + f) ? 2 section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 474 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 restrictions on use of dtc ? when an external clock source is used as the serial clock, the transmit clock should not be input until at least 5 ? when rdr is read by the dtc, be sure to set the activation source to the relevant sci reception end interrupt (rxi). t d0 lsb serial data sck d1 d3 d4 d5 d2 d6 d7 note: when operating on an external clock, set t >4 clocks. tdre figure 12.22 example of clocked synchronous transmission by dtc interrupts and module stop mode: if module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the cpu interrupt source or dtc activation source. interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode. section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 475 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 switching from sck pin function to port pin function ? problem in operation: when switching the sck pin function to the output port function (high- level output) by making the following settings while ddr = 1, dr = 1, c/ a = 1, cke1 = 0, cke0 = 0, and te = 1 (synchronous mode), low-level output occurs for one half-cycle. 1. end of serial data transmission 2. te bit = 0 3. c/ a bit = 0 ... switchover to port output 4. occurrence of low-level output (see figure 12.23) sck/port data te c/a cke1 cke0 bit 7 bit 6 1. end of transmission 4. low-level output 3. c/ a = 0 2. te = 0 half-cycle low-level output figure 12.23 operation when switching from sck pin function to port pin function section 12 serial communication interface (sci) rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 476 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? sample procedure for avoiding low-level output: as this sample procedure temporarily places the sck pin in the input state, the sck/port pin should be pulled up beforehand with an external circuit. with ddr = 1, dr = 1, c/ a = 1, cke1 = 0, cke0 = 0, and te = 1, make the following settings in the order shown. 1. end of serial data transmission 2. te bit = 0 3. cke1 bit = 1 4. c/ a bit = 0 ... switchover to port output 5. cke1 bit = 0 sck/port data te c/a cke1 cke0 bit 7 bit 6 1. end of transmission 3. cke1 = 1 5. cke1 = 0 4. c/ a = 0 2. te = 0 high-level outputte figure 12.24 operation when switching from sck pin function to port pin function (example of preventing low-level output) section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 477 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 13 smart card interface 13.1 overview sci supports an ic card (smart card) interface conforming to iso/iec 7816-3 (identification card) as a serial communication interface extension function. switching between the normal serial communication interface and the smart card interface is carried out by means of a register setting. 13.1.1 features features of the smart card interface supported by the h8s/2345 group are as follows. ? asynchronous mode ? data length: 8 bits ? parity bit generation and checking ? transmission of error signal (parity error) in receive mode ? error signal detection and automatic data retransmission in transmit mode ? direct convention and inverse convention both supported ? on-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected ? three interrupt sources ? three interrupt sources (transmit data empty, receive data full, and transmit/receive error) that can issue requests independently ? the transmit data empty interrupt and receive data full interrupt can activate the data transfer controller (dtc) to execute data transfer section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 478 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 13.1.2 block diagram figure 13.1 shows a block diagram of the smart card interface. bus interface tdr rsr rdr module data bus tsr scmr ssr scr transmission/ reception control brr baud rate generator internal data bus rxd txd sck parity generation parity check clock /4 /16 /64 txi rxi eri smr legend: scmr rsr rdr tsr tdr smr scr ssr brr : smart card mode register : receive shift register : receive data register : transmit shift register : transmit data register : serial mode register : serial control register : serial status register : bit rate register figure 13.1 block diagram of smart card interface section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 479 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 13.1.3 pin configuration table 13.1 shows the smart card interface pin configuration. table 13.1 smart card interface pins channel pin name symbol i/o function 0 serial clock pin 0 sck0 i/o sci0 clock input/output receive data pin 0 rxd0 input sci0 receive data input transmit data pin 0 txd0 output sci0 transmit data output 1 serial clock pin 1 sck1 i/o sci1 clock input/output receive data pin 1 rxd1 input sci1 receive data input transmit data pin 1 txd1 output sci1 transmit data output section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 480 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 13.1.4 register configuration table 13.2 shows the registers used by the smart card interface. details of smr, brr, scr, tdr, rdr, and mstpcr are the same as for the normal sci function; see the register descriptions in section 12, serial communication interface (sci). table 13.2 smart card interface registers channel name abbreviation r/w initial value address * 1 0 serial mode register 0 smr0 r/w h'00 h'ff78 bit rate register 0 brr0 r/w h'ff h'ff79 serial control register 0 scr0 r/w h'00 h'ff7a transmit data register 0 tdr0 r/w h'ff h'ff7b serial status register 0 ssr0 r/(w) * 2 h'84 h'ff7c receive data register 0 rdr0 r h'00 h'ff7d smart card mode register 0 scmr0 r/w h'f2 h'ff7e 1 serial mode register 1 smr1 r/w h'00 h'ff80 bit rate register 1 brr1 r/w h'ff h'ff81 serial control register 1 scr1 r/w h'00 h'ff82 transmit data register 1 tdr1 r/w h'ff h'ff83 serial status register 1 ssr1 r/(w) * 2 h'84 h'ff84 receive data register 1 rdr1 r h'00 h'ff85 smart card mode register 1 scmr1 r/w h'f2 h'ff86 all module stop control register mstpcr r/w h'3fff h'ff3c notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 481 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 13.2 register descriptions registers added with the smart card interface and bits for which the function changes are described here. 13.2.1 smart card mode register (scmr) 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 1 ? 4 ? 1 ? 3 sdir 0 r/w 0 smif 0 r/w 2 sinv 0 r/w 1 ? 1 ? bit initial value r/w : : : scmr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the smart card interface function. scmr is initialized to h'f2 by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode. bits 7 to 4?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 3?smart card data transfer direction (sdir): selects the serial/parallel conversion format. bit 3 sdir description 0 tdr contents are transmitted lsb-first (initial value ) receive data is stored in rdr lsb-first 1 tdr contents are transmitted msb-first receive data is stored in rdr msb-first section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 482 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 2?smart card data invert (sinv): specifies inversion of the data logic level. this function is used together with the sdir bit for communication with an inverse convention card. the sinv bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit. for parity-related setting procedures, see section 13.3.4, register settings. bit 2 sinv description 0 tdr contents are transmitted as they are (initial value ) receive data is stored as it is in rdr 1 tdr contents are inverted before being transmitted receive data is stored in inverted form in rdr bit 1?reserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. bit 0?smart card interface mode select (smif): enables or disables the smart card interface function. bit 0 smif description 0 smart card interface function is disabled (initial value ) 1 smart card interface function is enabled 13.2.2 serial status register (ssr) 7 tdre 1 r/(w) * 6 rdrf 0 r/(w) * 5 orer 0 r/(w) * 4 ers 0 r/(w) * 3 per 0 r/(w) * 0 mpbt 0 r/w 2 tend 1 r 1 mpb 0 r bit initial value r/w : : : note: * only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 3, to clear these flags. bit 4 of ssr has a different function in smart card interface mode. coupled with this, the setting conditions for bit 2, tend, are also different. bits 7 to 5? operate in the same way as for the normal sci. for details, see section 12.2.7, serial status register (ssr). section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 483 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 4?error signal status (ers): in smart card interface mode, bit 4 indicates the status of the error signal sent back from the receiving end in transmission. framing errors are not detected in smart card interface mode. bit 4 ers description 0 indicates that data was received normally and no error signal was sent [clearing conditions] (initial value ) ? upon reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode ? when 0 is written to ers after reading ers = 1 1 indicates that an error signal was sent from the receiving side showing that a parity error was detected [setting condition] when the low level of the error signal is sampled note: clearing the te bit in scr to 0 does not affect the ers flag, which retains its previous state. bits 3 to 0? operate in the same way as for the normal sci. for details, see section 12.2.7, serial status register (ssr). however, the setting conditions for the tend bit, are as shown below. bit 2 tend description 0 indicates data transmission in progress [clearing conditions] (initial value ) ? when 0 is written to tdre after reading tdre = 1 ? when the dtc is activated by a txi interrupt and writes data to tdr 1 indicates that data transmission is finished [setting conditions] ? upon reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode ? when the te bit in scr is 0 and the ers bit is also 0 ? when tdre = 1 and ers = 0 (normal transmission) 2.5 etu after a 1-byte serial character is transmitted when gm = 0 ? when tdre = 1 and ers = 0 (normal transmission) 1.0 etu after a 1-byte serial character is transmitted when gm = 1. note: etu: elementary time unit (time for transfer of 1 bit) section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 484 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 13.2.3 serial mode register (smr) 7 gm 0 gm r/w 6 chr 0 0 r/w 5 pe 0 1 r/w 4 o/ e 0 o/ e r/w 3 stop 0 1 r/w 0 cks0 0 cks0 r/w 2 mp 0 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 cks1 r/w bit initial value set value * r/w : : : : note: * when the smart card interface is used, be sure to make the 0 or 1 setting shown for bits 6, 5, 3, and 2. bit 7 of smr has a different function in smart card interface mode. bit 7?gsm mode (gm): sets the smart card interface function to gsm mode. this bit is cleared to 0 when the normal smart card interface is used. in gsm mode, this bit is set to 1, the timing of setting of the tend flag that indicates transmission completion is advanced and clock output control mode addition is performed. the contents of the clock output control mode addition are specified by bits 1 and 0 of the serial control register (scr). bit 7 gm description 0 normal smart card interface mode operation (initial value) ? tend flag generation 12.5 etu after beginning of start bit ? clock output on/off control only 1 gsm mode smart card interface mode operation ? tend flag generation 11.0 etu after beginning of start bit ? high/low fixing control possible in addition to clock output on/off control (set by scr) note: etu: elementary time unit (time for transfer of 1 bit) bits 6 to 0?operate in the same way as for the normal sci. for details, see section 12.2.5, serial mode register (smr). section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 485 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 13.2.4 serial control register (scr) 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 0 cke0 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : bits 1 and 0 of scr have a different function in smart card interface mode. bits 7 to 2?operate in the same way as for the normal sci. for details, see section 12.2.6, serial control register (scr). bits 1 and 0?clock enable (cke1, cke0): selects the clock source, and enables or disables clock output from the sck pin. in smart card interface mode, it is possible to switch between enabling and disabling of the normal clock output, and specify a fixed high level or fixed low level for the clock output. scmr smr scr setting smif c/ a a a a , gm cke1 cke0 sck pin function description 0 refer to sci designation 0 the pin functions as an i/o port 0 1 the pin outputs the clock as the sck output pin 0 the pin outputs fixed low level as the sck output pin 0 1 the pin outputs the clock as the sck output pin 0 the pin outputs fixed high level as the sck output pin 1 1 1 1 the pin outputs the clock as the sck output pin section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 486 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 13.3 operation 13.3.1 overview the main functions of the smart card interface are as follows. ? one frame consists of 8-bit data plus a parity bit. ? in transmission, a guard time of at least 2 etu (elementary time unit: the time for transfer of one bit) is left between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame. ? if a parity error is detected during reception, a low error signal level is output for one etu period, 10.5 etu after the start bit. ? if the error signal is sampled during transmission, the same data is transmitted automatically after the elapse of 2 etu or longer. ? only start-stop asynchronous communication is supported; there is no clocked synchronous communication function. 13.3.2 pin connections figure 13.2 shows a schematic diagram of smart card interface related pin connections. in communication with an ic card, since both transmission and reception are carried out on a single data transmission line, the txd pin and rxd pin should be connected with the lsi pin. the data transmission line should be pulled up to the v cc power supply with a resistor. when the clock generated on the smart card interface is used by an ic card, the sck pin output is input to the clk pin of the ic card. no connection is needed if the ic card uses an internal clock. lsi port output is used as the reset signal. other pins must normally be connected to the power supply or ground. section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 487 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 txd rxd sck px (port) h8s/2345 group i/o clk rst v cc connected equipment ic card clock line reset line figure 13.2 schematic diagram of smart card interface pin connections note: if an ic card is not connected, and the te and re bits are both set to 1, closed transmission/reception is possible, enabling self-diagnosis to be carried out. section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 488 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 13.3.3 data format figure 13.3 shows the smart card interface data format. in reception in this mode, a parity check is carried out on each frame, and if an error is detected an error signal is sent back to the transmitting end, and retransmission of the data is requested. if an error signal is sampled during transmission, the same data is retransmitted. ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp when there is no parity error transmitting station output ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp when a parity error occurs transmitting station output de receiving station output : start bit : data bits : parity bit : error signal legend: ds d0 to d7 dp de figure 13.3 smart card interface data format section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 489 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 the operation sequence is as follows. [1] when the data line is not in use it is in the high-impedance state, and is fixed high with a pull- up resistor. [2] the transmitting station starts transfer of one frame of data. the data frame starts with a start bit (ds, low-level), followed by 8 data bits (d0 to d7) and a parity bit (dp). [3] with the smart card interface, the data line then returns to the high-impedance state. the data line is pulled high with a pull-up resistor. [4] the receiving station carries out a parity check. if there is no parity error and the data is received normally, the receiving station waits for reception of the next data. if a parity error occurs, however, the receiving station outputs an error signal (de, low-level) to request retransmission of the data. after outputting the error signal for the prescribed length of time, the receiving station places the signal line in the high-impedance state again. the signal line is pulled high again by a pull-up resistor. [5] if the transmitting station does not receive an error signal, it proceeds to transmit the next data frame. if it does receive an error signal, however, it returns to step [2] and retransmits the erroneous data. section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 490 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 13.3.4 register settings table 13.3 shows a bit map of the registers used by the smart card interface. bits indicated as 0 or 1 must be set to the value shown. the setting of other bits is described below. table 13.3 smart card interface register settings bit register bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 smr gm 0 1 o/ e 1 0 cks1 cks0 brr brr7 brr6 brr5 brr4 brr3 brr2 brr1 brr0 scr tie rie te re 0 0 cke1 * cke0 tdr tdr7 tdr6 tdr5 tdr4 tdr3 tdr2 tdr1 tdr0 ssr tdre rdrf orer ers per tend 0 0 rdr rdr7 rdr6 rdr5 rdr4 rdr3 rdr2 rdr1 rdr0 scmr ???? sdir sinv ? smif notes: ? : unused bit. * : the cke1 bit must be cleared to 0 when the gm bit in smr is cleared to 0. smr setting: the gm bit is cleared to 0 in normal smart card interface mode, and set to 1 in gsm mode. the o/ e bit is cleared to 0 if the ic card is of the direct convention type, and set to 1 if of the inverse convention type. bits cks1 and cks0 select the clock source of the on-chip baud rate generator. see section 13.3.5, clock. brr setting: brr is used to set the bit rate. see section 13.3.5, clock, for the method of calculating the value to be set. scr setting: the function of the tie, rie, te, and re bits is the same as for the normal sci. for details, see section 12, serial communication interface (sci). bits cke1 and cke0 specify the clock output. when the gm bit in smr is cleared to 0, set these bits to b'00 if a clock is not to be output, or to b'01 if a clock is to be output. when the gm bit in smr is set to 1, clock output is performed. the clock output can also be fixed high or low. section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 491 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 smart card mode register (scmr) setting: the sdir bit is cleared to 0 if the ic card is of the direct convention type, and set to 1 if of the inverse convention type. the sinv bit is cleared to 0 if the ic card is of the direct convention type, and set to 1 if of the inverse convention type. the smif bit is set to 1 in the case of the smart card interface. examples of register settings and the waveform of the start character are shown below for the two types of ic card (direct convention and inverse convention). ? direct convention (sdir = sinv = o/ e = 0) ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp azzazzzaaz (z) (z) state with the direct convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state z and the logic 0 level to state a, and transfer is performed in lsb-first order. the start character data above is h'3b. the parity bit is 1 since even parity is stipulated for the smart card. ? inverse convention (sdir = sinv = o/ e = 1) ds d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 dp azzaaaaaaz (z) (z) state with the inverse convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state a and the logic 0 level to state z, and transfer is performed in msb-first order. the start character data above is h'3f. the parity bit is 0, corresponding to state z, since even parity is stipulated for the smart card. with the h8s/2345 group, inversion specified by the sinv bit applies only to the data bits, d7 to d0. for parity bit inversion, the o/ e bit in smr is set to odd parity mode (the same applies to both transmission and reception). section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 492 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 13.3.5 clock only an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator can be used as the transmit/receive clock for the smart card interface. the bit rate is set with brr and the cks1 and cks0 bits in smr. the formula for calculating the bit rate is as shown below. table 13.5 shows some sample bit rates. if clock output is selected by setting cke0 to 1, a clock with a frequency of 372 times the bit rate is output from the sck pin. b = ? 1 where: n = value set in brr (0 n 255) b = bit rate (bit/s) = operating frequency (mhz) n = see table 13.4 table 13.4 correspondence between n and cks1, cks0 n cks1 cks0 000 11 210 31 table 13.5 examples of bit rate b (bit/s) for various brr settings (when n = 0) (mhz) n 10.00 10.714 13.00 14.285 16.00 18.00 20.00 0 13441 14400 17473 19200 21505 24194 26882 1 6720 7200 8737 9600 10753 12097 13441 2 4480 4800 5824 6400 7168 8065 8961 note: bit rates are rounded to the nearest whole number. section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 493 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 the method of calculating the value to be set in the bit rate register (brr) from the operating frequency and bit rate, on the other hand, is shown below. n is an integer, 0 n 255, and the smaller error is specified. n = ? 1 ? 1 table 13.6 examples of brr settings for bit rate b (bit/s) (when n = 0) (mhz) 7.1424 10.00 10.7136 13.00 14.2848 16.00 18.00 20.00 bit/s n error n error n error n error n error n error n error n error 9600 0 0.00 1 30 1 25 1 8.99 1 0.00 1 12.01 2 15.99 2 6.60 table 13.7 maximum bit rate at various frequencies (smart card interface mode) (mhz) maximum bit rate (bit/s) n n 7.1424 9600 0 0 10.00 13441 0 0 10.7136 14400 0 0 13.00 17473 0 0 14.2848 19200 0 0 16.00 21505 0 0 18.00 24194 0 0 20.00 26882 0 0 the bit rate error is given by the following formula: error (%) = ? 1 section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 494 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 13.3.6 data transfer operations initialization: before transmitting and receiving data, initialize the sci as described below. initialization is also necessary when switching from transmit mode to receive mode, or vice versa. [1] clear the te and re bits in scr to 0. [2] clear the error flags ers, per, and orer in ssr to 0. [3] set the o/ e bit and cks1 and cks0 bits in smr. clear the c/ a , chr, and mp bits to 0, and set the stop and pe bits to 1. [4] set the smif, sdir, and sinv bits in scmr. when the smif bit is set to 1, the txd and rxd pins are both switched from ports to sci pins, and are placed in the high-impedance state. [5] set the value corresponding to the bit rate in brr. [6] set the cke0 bit in scr. clear the tie, rie, te, re, mpie, teie, and cke1 bits to 0. if the cke0 bit is set to 1, the clock is output from the sck pin. [7] wait at least one bit interval, then set the tie, rie, te, and re bits in scr. do not set the te bit and re bit at the same time, except for self-diagnosis. section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 495 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 serial data transmission: as data transmission in smart card mode involves error signal sampling and retransmission processing, the processing procedure is different from that for the normal sci. figure 13.4 shows an example of the transmission processing flow. also, figure 13.5 shows the relationship between transmission operations and the internal registers. [1] perform smart card interface mode initialization as described above in initialization. [2] check that the ers error flag in ssr is cleared to 0. [3] repeat steps [2] and [3] until it can be confirmed that the tend flag in ssr is set to 1. [4] write the transmit data to tdr, clear the tdre flag to 0, and perform the transmit operation. the tend flag is cleared to 0. [5] when transmitting data continuously, go back to step [2]. [6] to end transmission, clear the te bit to 0. with the above processing, interrupt servicing or data transfer by the dtc is possible. if transmission ends and the tend flag is set to 1 while the tie bit is set to 1 and interrupt requests are enabled, a transmit data empty interrupt (txi) request will be generated. if an error occurs in transmission and the ers flag is set to 1 while the rie bit is set to 1 and interrupt requests are enabled, a transfer error interrupt (eri) request will be generated. the timing for setting the tend flag depends on the value of the gm bit in smr. the tend timing is shown in figure 13.6. if the dtc is activated by a txi request, the number of bytes set in the dtc can be transmitted automatically, including automatic retransmission. for details, see interrupt operations and data transfer operation by dtc below. section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 496 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 initialization no yes clear te bit to 0 start transmission start no no no yes yes yes yes no end write data to tdr, and clear tdre flag in ssr to 0 error processing error processing tend = 1? all data transmitted? tend = 1? ers = 0? ers = 0? figure 13.4 example of transmission processing flow section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 497 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (1) data write tdr tsr (shift register) data 1 (2) transfer from tdr to tsr data 1 data 1 ; data remains in tdr (3) serial data output note: when the ers flag is set, it should be cleared until transfer of the last bit (d7 in lsb-first transmission, d0 in msb-first transmission) of the next transfer data to be transmitted has been completed. in case of normal transmission: tend flag is set in case of transmit error: ers flag is set steps (2) and (3) above are repeated until the tend flag is set i/o signal line output data 1 data 1 figure 13.5 relation between transmit operation and internal registers ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp i/o data 12.5etu txi (tend interrupt) 11.0etu de guard time when gm = 1 legend: ds : start bit d0 to d7 : data bits dp : parity bit de : error signal when gm = 0 figure 13.6 tend flag generation timing in transmission operation section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 498 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 serial data reception: data reception in smart card mode uses the same processing procedure as for the normal sci. figure 13.7 shows an example of the transmission processing flow. [1] perform smart card interface mode initialization as described above in initialization. [2] check that the orer flag and per flag in ssr are cleared to 0. if either is set, perform the appropriate receive error processing, then clear both the orer and the per flag to 0. [3] repeat steps [2] and [3] until it can be confirmed that the rdrf flag is set to 1. [4] read the receive data from rdr. [5] when receiving data continuously, clear the rdrf flag to 0 and go back to step [2]. [6] to end reception, clear the re bit to 0. initialization read rdr and clear rdrf flag in ssr to 0 clear re bit to 0 start reception start error processing no no no yes yes orer = 0 and per = 0 rdrf = 1? all data received? yes figure 13.7 example of reception processing flow section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 499 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 with the above processing, interrupt servicing or data transfer by the dtc is possible. if reception ends and the rdrf flag is set to 1 while the rie bit is set to 1 and interrupt requests are enabled, a receive data full interrupt (rxi) request will be generated. if an error occurs in reception and either the orer flag or the per flag is set to 1, a transfer error interrupt (eri) request will be generated. if the dtc is activated by an rxi request, the receive data in which the error occurred is skipped, and only the number of bytes of receive data set in the dtc are transferred. for details, see interrupt operation and data transfer operation by dtc below. if a parity error occurs during reception and the per is set to 1, the received data is still transferred to rdr, and therefore this data can be read. mode switching operation: when switching from receive mode to transmit mode, first confirm that the receive operation has been completed, then start from initialization, clearing re bit to 0 and setting te bit to 1. the rdrf flag or the per and orer flags can be used to check that the receive operation has been completed. when switching from transmit mode to receive mode, first confirm that the transmit operation has been completed, then start from initialization, clearing te bit to 0 and setting re bit to 1. the tend flag can be used to check that the transmit operation has been completed. fixing clock output level: when the gm bit in smr is set to 1, the clock output level can be fixed with bits cke1 and cke0 in scr. at this time, the minimum clock pulse width can be made the specified width. figure 13.8 shows the timing for fixing the clock output level. in this example, gm is set to 1, cke1 is cleared to 0, and the cke0 bit is controlled. sck specified pulse width scr write (cke0 = 0) scr write (cke0 = 1) specified pulse width figure 13.8 timing for fixing clock output level section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 500 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 interrupt operation: there are three interrupt sources in smart card interface mode: transmit data empty interrupt (txi) requests, transfer error interrupt (eri) requests, and receive data full interrupt (rxi) requests. the transmit end interrupt (tei) request is not used in this mode. when the tend flag in ssr is set to 1, a txi interrupt request is generated. when the rdrf flag in ssr is set to 1, an rxi interrupt request is generated. when any of flags orer, per, and ers in ssr is set to 1, an eri interrupt request is generated. the relationship between the operating states and interrupt sources is shown in table 13.8. table 13.8 smart card mode operating states and interrupt sources operating state flag enable bit interrupt source dtc activation transmit mode normal operation tend tie txi possible error ers rie eri not possible receive mode normal operation rdrf rie rxi possible error per, orer rie eri not possible data transfer operation by dtc: in smart card mode, as with the normal sci, transfer can be carried out using the dtc. in a transmit operation, the tdre flag is also set to 1 at the same time as the tend flag in ssr, and a txi interrupt is generated. if the txi request is designated beforehand as a dtc activation source, the dtc will be activated by the txi request, and transfer of the transmit data will be carried out. the tdre and tend flags are automatically cleared to 0 when data transfer is performed by the dtc. in the event of an error, the sci retransmits the same data automatically. however, the ers flag is not cleared automatically when an error occurs, and so the rie bit should be set to 1 beforehand so that an eri request will be generated in the event of an error, and the ers flag will be cleared. when performing transfer using the dtc, it is essential to set and enable the dtc before carrying out sci setting. for details of the dtc setting procedures, see section 7, data transfer controller. in a receive operation, an rxi interrupt request is generated when the rdrf flag in ssr is set to 1. if the rxi request is designated beforehand as a dtc activation source, the dtc will be activated by the rxi request, and transfer of the receive data will be carried out. the rdrf flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the dtc. if an error occurs, an error flag is set but the rdrf flag is not. the dtc is not activated, but instead, an eri interrupt request is sent to the cpu. therefore, the error flag should be cleared. section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 501 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 13.3.7 operation in gsm mode switching the mode: when switching between smart card interface mode and software standby mode, the following switching procedure should be followed in order to maintain the clock duty. ? when changing from smart card interface mode to software standby mode [1] set the data register (dr) and data direction register (ddr) corresponding to the sck pin to the value for the fixed output state in software standby mode. [2] write 0 to the te bit and re bit in the serial control register (scr) to halt transmit/receive operation. at the same time, set the cke1 bit to the value for the fixed output state in software standby mode. [3] write 0 to the cke0 bit in scr to halt the clock. [4] wait for one serial clock period. during this interval, clock output is fixed at the specified level, with the duty preserved. [5] write h'00 to smr and scmr. [6] make the transition to the software standby state. ? when returning to smart card interface mode from software standby mode [7] exit the software standby state. [8] set the cke1 bit in scr to the value for the fixed output state (current sck pin state) when software standby mode is initiated. [9] set smart card interface mode and output the clock. signal generation is started with the normal duty. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] software standby normal operation normal operation figure 13.9 clock halt and restart procedure section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 502 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 powering on: to secure the clock duty from power-on, the following switching procedure should be followed. [1] the initial state is port input and high impedance. use a pull-up resistor or pull-down resistor to fix the potential. [2] fix the sck pin to the specified output level with the cke1 bit in scr. [3] set smr and scmr, and switch to smart card mode operation. [4] set the cke0 bit in scr to 1 to start clock output. 13.4 usage note the following points should be noted when using the sci as a smart card interface. receive data sampling timing and reception margin in smart card interface mode: in smart card interface mode, the sci operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 372 times the transfer rate. in reception, the sci samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs internal synchronization. receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 186th pulse of the basic clock. this is illustrated in figure 13.10. section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 503 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 internal basic clock 372 clocks 186 clocks receive data (rxd) synchro- nization sampling timing d0 d1 data sampling timing 185 371 0 371 185 0 0 start bit figure 13.10 receive data sampling timing in smart card mode thus the reception margin in smart card interface mode is given by the following formula. m = (0.5 ? 1 2n d ? 0.5 n ) ? (l ? 0.5) f ? (1 + f) where m: reception margin (%) n: ratio of bit rate to clock (n = 372) d: clock duty (d = 0 to 1.0) l: frame length (l = 10) f: absolute value of clock frequency deviation assuming values of f = 0 and d = 0.5 in the above formula, the reception margin formula is as follows. when d = 0.5 and f = 0, m = (0.5 ? 1/2 section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 504 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 retransfer operations: retransfer operations are performed by the sci in receive mode and transmit mode as described below. ? retransfer operation when sci is in receive mode figure 13.11 illustrates the retransfer operation when the sci is in receive mode. [1] if an error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the per bit in ssr is automatically set to 1. if the rie bit in scr is enabled at this time, an eri interrupt request is generated. the per bit in ssr should be kept cleared to 0 until the next parity bit is sampled. [2] the rdrf bit in ssr is not set for a frame in which an error has occurred. [3] if no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the per bit in ssr is not set to 1. [4] if no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the receive operation is judged to have been completed normally, and the rdrf flag in ssr is automatically set to 1. if the rie bit in scr is enabled at this time, an rxi interrupt request is generated. if dtc data transfer by an rxi source is enabled, the contents of rdr can be read automatically. when the rdr data is read by the dtc, the rdrf flag is automatically cleared to 0. [5] when a normal frame is received, the pin retains the high-impedance state at the timing for error signal transmission. d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp de ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp (de) ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 ds transfer frame n+1 retransferred frame nth transfer frame rdrf [1] per [2] [3] [4] figure 13.11 retransfer operation in sci receive mode section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 505 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? retransfer operation when sci is in transmit mode figure 13.12 illustrates the retransfer operation when the sci is in transmit mode. [6] if an error signal is sent back from the receiving end after transmission of one frame is completed, the ers bit in ssr is set to 1. if the rie bit in scr is enabled at this time, an eri interrupt request is generated. the ers bit in ssr should be kept cleared to 0 until the next parity bit is sampled. [7] the tend bit in ssr is not set for a frame for which an error signal indicating an abnormality is received. [8] if an error signal is not sent back from the receiving end, the ers bit in ssr is not set. [9] if an error signal is not sent back from the receiving end, transmission of one frame, including a retransfer, is judged to have been completed, and the tend bit in ssr is set to 1. if the tie bit in scr is enabled at this time, a txi interrupt request is generated. if data transfer by the dtc by means of the txi source is enabled, the next data can be written to tdr automatically. when data is written to tdr by the dtc, the tdre bit is automatically cleared to 0. d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp de ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp (de) ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 ds transfer frame n+1 retransferred frame nth transfer frame tdre tend [6] fer/ers transfer to tsr from tdr [7] [9] [8] transfer to tsr from tdr transfer to tsr from tdr figure 13.12 retransfer operation in sci transmit mode section 13 smart card interface rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 506 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 507 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 14 a/d converter 14.1 overview the h8s/2345 group incorporates a successive approximation type 10-bit a/d converter that allows up to eight analog input channels to be selected. 14.1.1 features a/d converter features are listed below ? 10-bit resolution ? eight input channels ? settable analog conversion voltage range ? conversion of analog voltages with the reference voltage pin (v ref ) as the analog reference voltage ? high-speed conversion ? minimum conversion time: 6.7 s per channel (at 20-mhz operation) ? choice of single mode or scan mode ? single mode: single-channel a/d conversion ? scan mode: continuous a/d conversion on 1 to 4 channels ? four data registers ? conversion results are held in a 16-bit data register for each channel ? sample and hold function ? three kinds of conversion start ? choice of software or timer conversion start trigger (tpu or 8-bit timer), or adtrg pin ? a/d conversion end interrupt generation ? a/d conversion end interrupt (adi) request can be generated at the end of a/d conversion ? module stop mode can be set ? as the initial setting, a/d converter operation is halted. register access is enabled by exiting module stop mode section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 508 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 14.1.2 block diagram figure 14.1 shows a block diagram of the a/d converter. module data bus control circuit internal data bus 10-bit d/a comparator + ? sample-and- hold circuit adi interrupt bus interface a d c s r a d c r a d d r d a d d r c a d d r b a d d r a av cc v ref av ss an0 an1 an2 an3 an4 an5 an6 an7 adtrg conversion start trigger from 8-bit timer or tpu successive approximations register multiplexer legend: adcr adcsr addra addrb addrc addrd : a/d control register : a/d control/status register : a/d data register a : a/d data register b : a/d data register c : a/d data register d figure 14.1 block diagram of a/d converter section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 509 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 14.1.3 pin configuration table 14.1 summarizes the input pins used by the a/d converter. the av cc and av ss pins are the power supply pins for the analog block in the a/d converter. the v ref pin is the a/d conversion reference voltage pin. the eight analog input pins are divided into two groups: group 0 (an0 to an3), and group 1 (an4 to an7). table 14.1 a/d converter pins pin name symbol i/o function analog power supply pin av cc input analog block power supply analog ground pin av ss input analog block ground and a/d conversion reference voltage reference voltage pin v ref input a/d conversion reference voltage analog input pin 0 an0 input group 0 analog inputs analog input pin 1 an1 input analog input pin 2 an2 input analog input pin 3 an3 input analog input pin 4 an4 input group 1 analog inputs analog input pin 5 an5 input analog input pin 6 an6 input analog input pin 7 an7 input a/d external trigger input pin adtrg input external trigger input for starting a/d conversion section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 510 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 14.1.4 register configuration table 14.2 summarizes the registers of the a/d converter. table 14.2 a/d converter registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * 1 a/d data register ah addrah r h'00 h'ff90 a/d data register al addral r h'00 h'ff91 a/d data register bh addrbh r h'00 h'ff92 a/d data register bl addrbl r h'00 h'ff93 a/d data register ch addrch r h'00 h'ff94 a/d data register cl addrcl r h'00 h'ff95 a/d data register dh addrdh r h'00 h'ff96 a/d data register dl addrdl r h'00 h'ff97 a/d control/status register adcsr r/(w) * 2 h'00 h'ff98 a/d control register adcr r/w h'3f h'ff99 module stop control register mstpcr r/w h'3fff h'ff3c notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. bit 7 can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 511 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 14.2 register descriptions 14.2.1 a/d data registers a to d (addra to addrd) 15 ad9 0 r bit initial value r/w : : : 14 ad8 0 r 13 ad7 0 r 12 ad6 0 r 11 ad5 0 r 10 ad4 0 r 9 ad3 0 r 8 ad2 0 r 7 ad1 0 r 6 ad0 0 r 5 ? 0 r 4 ? 0 r 3 ? 0 r 2 ? 0 r 1 ? 0 r 0 ? 0 r there are four 16-bit read-only addr registers, addra to addrd, used to store the results of a/d conversion. the 10-bit data resulting from a/d conversion is transferred to the addr register for the selected channel and stored there. the upper 8 bits of the converted data are transferred to the upper byte (bits 15 to 8) of addr, and the lower 2 bits are transferred to the lower byte (bits 7 and 6) and stored. bits 5 to 0 are always read as 0. the correspondence between the analog input channels and addr registers is shown in table 14.3. addr can always be read by the cpu. the upper byte can be read directly, but for the lower byte, data transfer is performed via a temporary register (temp). for details, see section 14.3, interface to bus master. the addr registers are initialized to h'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode. table 14.3 analog input channels and corresponding addr registers analog input channel group 0 group 1 a/d data register an0 an4 addra an1 an5 addrb an2 an6 addrc an3 an7 addrd section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 512 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 14.2.2 a/d control/status register (adcsr) 7 adf 0 r/(w) * 6 adie 0 r/w 5 adst 0 r/w 4 scan 0 r/w 3 cks 0 r/w 0 ch0 0 r/w 2 ch2 0 r/w 1 ch1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : note: * only 0 can be written to bit 7, to clear this flag. adcsr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls a/d conversion operations and shows the status of the operation. adcsr is initialized to h'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode or module stop mode. bit 7?a/d end flag (adf): status flag that indicates the end of a/d conversion. bit 7 adf description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value ) ? when 0 is written to the adf flag after reading adf = 1 ? when the dtc is activated by an adi interrupt and addr is read 1 [setting conditions] ? single mode: when a/d conversion ends ? scan mode: when a/d conversion ends on all specified channels bit 6?a/d interrupt enable (adie): selects enabling or disabling of interrupt (adi) requests at the end of a/d conversion. bit 6 adie description 0 a/d conversion end interrupt (adi) request disabled (initial value ) 1 a/d conversion end interrupt (adi) request enabled section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 513 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 5?a/d start (adst): selects starting or stopping on a/d conversion. holds a value of 1 during a/d conversion. the adst bit can be set to 1 by software, a timer conversion start trigger, or the a/d external trigger input pin ( adtrg ). bit 5 adst description 0 a/d conversion stopped (initial value) 1 ? single mode: a/d conversion is started. cleared to 0 automatically when conversion on the specified channel ends ? scan mode: a/d conversion is started. conversion continues sequentially on the selected channels until adst is cleared to 0 by software, a reset, or a transition to standby mode or module stop mode. bit 4?scan mode (scan): selects single mode or scan mode as the a/d conversion operating mode. see section 14.4, operation, for single mode and scan mode operation. only set the scan bit while conversion is stopped. bit 4 scan description 0 single mode (initial value) 1 scan mode bit 3?clock select (cks): sets the a/d conversion time. only change the conversion time while adst = 0. bit 3 cks description 0 conversion time = 266 states (max.) (initial value) 1 conversion time = 134 states (max.) bits 2 to 0?channel select 2 to 0 (ch2 to ch0): together with the scan bit, these bits select the analog input channels. only set the input channel while conversion is stopped. section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 514 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 group selection channel selection description ch2 ch1 ch2 single mode scan mode 000an0 (initial value)an0 1 an1 an0, an1 1 0 an2 an0 to an2 1 an3 an0 to an3 100an4 an4 1 an5 an4, an5 1 0 an6 an4 to an6 1 an7 an4 to an7 14.2.3 a/d control register (adcr) 7 trgs1 0 r/w 6 trgs0 0 r/w 5 ? 1 ? 4 ? 1 ? 3 ? 1 r/w 0 ? 1 ? 2 ? 1 ? 1 ? 1 ? bit initial value r/w : : : adcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables external triggering of a/d conversion operations. adcr is initialized to h'3f by a reset, and in standby mode or module stop mode. bits 7 and 6?timer trigger select 1 and 0 (trgs1, trgs0): select enabling or disabling of the start of a/d conversion by a trigger signal. only set bits trgs1 and trgs0 while conversion is stopped. bit 7 bit 6 trgs1 trgs0 description 0 0 a/d conversion start by external trigger is disabled (initial value) 1 a/d conversion start by external trigger (tpu) is enabled 1 0 a/d conversion start by external trigger (8-bit timer) is enabled 1 a/d conversion start by external trigger pin ( adtrg ) is enabled bits 5 to 0?reserved: these bits are reserved; write as 1 in a write. section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 515 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 14.2.4 module stop control register (mstpcr) 15 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : 14 0 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w mstpcrh mstpcrl mstpcr is a 16-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control. when the mstp9 bit in mstpcr is set to 1, a/d converter operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. for details, see section 19.5, module stop mode. mstpcr is initialized to h'3fff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 9?module stop (mstp9): specifies the a/d converter module stop mode. bit 9 mstp9 description 0 a/d converter module stop mode cleared 1 a/d converter module stop mode set (initial value ) section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 516 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 14.3 interface to bus master addra to addrd are 16-bit registers, and the data bus to the bus master is 8 bits wide. therefore, in accesses by the bus master, the upper byte is accessed directly, but the lower byte is accessed via a temporary register (temp). a data read from addr is performed as follows. when the upper byte is read, the upper byte value is transferred to the cpu and the lower byte value is transferred to temp. next, when the lower byte is read, the temp contents are transferred to the cpu. when reading addr. always read the upper byte before the lower byte. it is possible to read only the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained. figure 14.2 shows the data flow for addr access. bus master (h'aa) addrnh (h'aa) addrnl (h'40) lower byte read addrnh (h'aa) addrnl (h'40) temp (h'40) temp (h'40) (n = a to d) (n = a to d) module data bus module data bus bus interface upper byte read bus master (h'40) bus interface figure 14.2 addr access operation (reading h'aa40) section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 517 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 14.4 operation the a/d converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. it has two operating modes: single mode and scan mode. 14.4.1 single mode (scan = 0) single mode is selected when a/d conversion is to be performed on a single channel only. a/d conversion is started when the adst bit is set to 1, according to the software or external trigger input. the adst bit remains set to 1 during a/d conversion, and is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. on completion of conversion, the adf flag is set to 1. if the adie bit is set to 1 at this time, an adi interrupt request is generated. the adf flag is cleared by writing 0 after reading adcsr. when the operating mode or analog input channel must be changed during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the adst bit to 0 in adcsr to halt a/d conversion. after making the necessary changes, set the adst bit to 1 to start a/d conversion again. the adst bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or input channel is changed. typical operations when channel 1 (an1) is selected in single mode are described next. figure 14.3 shows a timing diagram for this example. [1] single mode is selected (scan = 0), input channel an1 is selected (ch2 = 0, ch1 = 0, ch0 = 1), the a/d interrupt is enabled (adie = 1), and a/d conversion is started (adst = 1). [2] when a/d conversion is completed, the result is transferred to addrb. at the same time the adf flag is set to 1, the adst bit is cleared to 0, and the a/d converter becomes idle. [3] since adf = 1 and adie = 1, an adi interrupt is requested. [4] the a/d interrupt handling routine starts. [5] the routine reads adcsr, then writes 0 to the adf flag. [6] the routine reads and processes the connection result (addrb). [7] execution of the a/d interrupt handling routine ends. after that, if the adst bit is set to 1, a/d conversion starts again and steps [2] to [7] are repeated. section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 518 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 adie adst adf state of channel 0 (an0) a/d conversion starts 2 1 addra addrb addrc addrd state of channel 1 (an1) state of channel 2 (an2) state of channel 3 (an3) note: * vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. set * set * clear * clear * a/d conversion result 1 a/d conversion a/d conversion result 2 read conversion result read conversion result idle idle idle idle idle idle a/d conversion set * figure 14.3 example of a/d converter operation (single mode, channel 1 selected) section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 519 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 14.4.2 scan mode (scan = 1) scan mode is useful for monitoring analog inputs in a group of one or more channels. when the adst bit is set to 1 by a software, timer or external trigger input, a/d conversion starts on the first channel in the group (an0). when two or more channels are selected, after conversion of the first channel ends, conversion of the second channel (an1) starts immediately. a/d conversion continues cyclically on the selected channels until the adst bit is cleared to 0. the conversion results are transferred for storage into the addr registers corresponding to the channels. when the operating mode or analog input channel must be changed during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the adst bit to 0 in adcsr to halt a/d conversion. after making the necessary changes, set the adst bit to 1 to start a/d conversion again. the adst bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or input channel is changed. typical operations when three channels (an0 to an2) are selected in scan mode are described next. figure 14.4 shows a timing diagram for this example. [1] scan mode is selected (scan = 1), scan group 0 is selected (ch2 = 0), analog input channels an0 to an2 are selected (ch1 = 1, ch0 = 0), and a/d conversion is started (adst = 1) [2] when a/d conversion of the first channel (an0) is completed, the result is transferred to addra. next, conversion of the second channel (an1) starts automatically. [3] conversion proceeds in the same way through the third channel (an2). [4] when conversion of all the selected channels (an0 to an2) is completed, the adf flag is set to 1 and conversion of the first channel (an0) starts again. if the adie bit is set to 1 at this time, an adi interrupt is requested after a/d conversion ends. [5] steps [2] to [4] are repeated as long as the adst bit remains set to 1. when the adst bit is cleared to 0, a/d conversion stops. after that, if the adst bit is set to 1, a/d conversion starts again from the first channel (an0). section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 520 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 adst adf addra addrb addrc addrd state of channel 0 (an0) state of channel 1 (an1) state of channel 2 (an2) state of channel 3 (an3) set * 1 clear * 1 idle notes: 1. vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. 2. data currently being converted is ignored. clear * 1 idle idle a/d conversion time idle continuous a/d conversion execution a/d conversion 1 idle idle idle idle idle transfer * 2 a/d conversion 3 a/d conversion 2 a/d conversion 5 a/d conversion 4 a/d conversion result 1 a/d conversion result 2 a/d conversion result 3 a/d conversion result 4 figure 14.4 example of a/d converter operation (scan mode, channels an0 to an2 selected) section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 521 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 14.4.3 input sampling and a/d conversion time the a/d converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. the a/d converter samples the analog input at a time t d after the adst bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. figure 14.5 shows the a/d conversion timing. table 14.4 indicates the a/d conversion time. as indicated in figure 14.5, the a/d conversion time includes t d and the input sampling time. the length of t d varies depending on the timing of the write access to adcsr. the total conversion time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 14.4. in scan mode, the values given in table 14.4 apply to the first conversion time. in the second and subsequent conversions the conversion time is fixed at 256 states when cks = 0 or 128 states when cks = 1. (1) (2) t d t spl t conv input sampling timing adf address bus write signal legend: (1) : adcsr write cycle (2) : adcsr address t d : a/d conversion start delay t spl : input sampling time t conv : a/d conversion time figure 14.5 a/d conversion timing section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 522 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 14.4 a/d conversion time (single mode) cks = 0 cks = 1 item symbol min typ max min typ max a/d conversion start delay t d 10 ? 17 6 ? 9 input sampling time t spl ? 63 ?? 31 ? a/d conversion time t conv 259 ? 266 131 ? 134 note: values in the table are the number of states. 14.4.4 external trigger input timing a/d conversion can be externally triggered. when the trgs1 and trgs0 bits are set to 11 in adcr, external trigger input is enabled at the adtrg pin. a falling edge at the adtrg pin sets the adst bit to 1 in adcsr, starting a/d conversion. other operations, in both single and scan modes, are the same as if the adst bit has been set to 1 by software. figure 14.6 shows the timing. adtrg internal trigger signal adst a/d conversion figure 14.6 external trigger input timing section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 523 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 14.5 interrupts the a/d converter generates an a/d conversion end interrupt (adi) at the end of a/d conversion. adi interrupt requests can be enabled or disabled by means of the adie bit in adcsr. the dtc can be activated by an adi interrupt. having the converted data read by the dtc in response to an adi interrupt enables continuous conversion to be achieved without imposing a load on software. the a/d converter interrupt source is shown in table 14.5. table 14.5 a/d converter interrupt source interrupt source description dtc activation adi interrupt due to end of conversion possible 14.6 usage notes the following points should be noted when using the a/d converter. setting range of analog power supply and other pins: (1) analog input voltage range the voltage applied to analog input pins an0 to an7 during a/d conversion should be in the range av ss ann v ref . (2) relation between av cc , av ss and v cc , v ss as the relationship between av cc , av ss and v cc , v ss , set, av cc = v cc and av ss = v ss . if the a/d converter is not used, the av cc and av ss pins must on no account be left open. (3) v ref input range the analog reference voltage input at the v ref pin set in the range v ref av cc . if conditions (1), (2), and (3) above are not met, the reliability of the device may be adversely affected. notes on board design: in board design, digital circuitry and analog circuitry should be as mutually isolated as possible, and layout in which digital circuit signal lines and analog circuit signal lines cross or are in close proximity should be avoided as far as possible. failure to do so may result in incorrect operation of the analog circuitry due to inductance, adversely affecting a/d conversion values. section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 524 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 also, digital circuitry must be isolated from the analog input signals (an0 to an7), analog reference power supply (v ref ), and analog power supply (av cc ) by the analog ground (av ss ). also, the analog ground (av ss ) should be connected at one point to a stable digital ground (v ss ) on the board. notes on noise countermeasures: a protection circuit connected to prevent damage due to an abnormal voltage such as an excessive surge at the analog input pins (an0 to an7) and analog reference power supply (v ref ) should be connected between av cc and av ss as shown in figure 14.7. also, the bypass capacitors connected to av cc and v ref and the filter capacitor connected to an0 to an7 must be connected to av ss . if a filter capacitor is connected as shown in figure 14.7, the input currents at the analog input pins (an0 to an7) are averaged, and so an error may arise. also, when a/d conversion is performed frequently, as in scan mode, if the current charged and discharged by the capacitance of the sample-and-hold circuit in the a/d converter exceeds the current input via the input impedance (r in ), an error will arise in the analog input pin voltage. careful consideration is therefore required when deciding the circuit constants. av cc * 1 * 1 v ref an0 to an7 av ss notes: values are reference values. 1. 2. r in : input impedance r in * 2 100 ? 0.1 f 0.01 f 10 f figure 14.7 example of analog input protection circuit section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 525 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 14.6 analog pin specifications item min max unit analog input capacitance ? 20 pf permissible signal source impedance ? 10 * k ? note: * when v cc = 4.0 v to 5.5 v and 12 mhz 20 pf to a/d converter an0 to an7 10 k ? note: values are reference values. figure 14.8 analog input pin equivalent circuit a/d conversion precision definitions: h8s/2345 group a/d conversion precision definitions are given below. ? resolution the number of a/d converter digital output codes ? offset error the deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal a/d conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value b'0000000000 (h'000) to b'0000000001 (h'001) (see figure 14.10). ? full-scale error the deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal a/d conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from b'1111111110 (h'3fe) to b'1111111111 (h'3ff) (see figure 14.10). ? quantization error the deviation inherent in the a/d converter, given by 1/2 lsb (see figure 14.9). ? nonlinearity error the error with respect to the ideal a/d conversion characteristic between the zero voltage and the full-scale voltage. does not include the offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error. ? absolute precision the deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. includes the offset error, full-scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error. section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 526 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 h'3ff h'3fe h'3fd h'002 h'001 h'000 fs quantization error digital output ideal a/d conversion characteristic analog input voltage 1 1024 2 1024 1022 1024 1023 1024 figure 14.9 a/d conversion precision definitions (1) fs offset error nonlinearity error actual a/d conversion characteristic analog input voltage digital output ideal a/d conversion characteristic full-scale error figure 14.10 a/d conversion precision definitions (2) section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 527 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 permissible signal source impedance: h8s/2345 group analog input is designed so that conversion precision is guaranteed for an input signal for which the signal source impedance is 10 k ? or less. this specification is provided to enable the a/d converter's sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling time; if the sensor output impedance exceeds 10 k ? , charging may be insufficient and it may not be possible to guarantee the a/d conversion precision. however, if a large capacitance is provided externally, the input load will essentially comprise only the internal input resistance of 10 k ? , and the signal source impedance is ignored. however, since a low-pass filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an analog signal with a large differential coefficient (e.g., 5 mv/s or greater). when converting a high-speed analog signal, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted. influences on absolute precision: adding capacitance results in coupling with gnd, and therefore noise in gnd may adversely affect absolute precision. be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable gnd such as av ss . care is also required to insure that filter circuits do not communicate with digital signals on the mounting board, so acting as antennas. a/d converter equivalent circuit h8/2345 group 20 pf c in = 15 pf 10 k ? to 10 k ? low-pass filter c to 0.1 f sensor output impedance sensor input note: values are reference values. figure 14.11 example of analog input circuit section 14 a/d converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 528 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 15 d/a converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 529 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 15 d/a converter 15.1 overview the h8s/2345 group includes a two-channel d/a converter. 15.1.1 features d/a converter features are listed below ? 8-bit resolution ? two output channels ? maximum conversion time of 10 s (with 20 pf load) ? output voltage of 0 v to v ref ? d/a output hold function in software standby mode section 15 d/a converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 530 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 15.1.2 block diagram figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the d/a converter. module data bus internal data bus v ref av cc da1 da0 av ss 8-bit d/a control circuit dadr0 bus interface dadr1 dacr figure 15.1 block diagram of d/a converter section 15 d/a converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 531 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 15.1.3 pin configuration table 15.1 summarizes the input and output pins of the d/a converter. table 15.1 pin configuration pin name symbol i/o function analog power pin av cc input analog power source analog ground pin av ss input analog ground and reference voltage analog output pin 0 da0 output channel 0 analog output analog output pin 1 da1 output channel 1 analog output reference voltage pin v ref input analog reference voltage 15.1.4 register configuration table 15.2 summarizes the registers of the d/a converter. table 15.2 d/a converter registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * d/a data register 0 dadr0 r/w h'00 h'ffa4 d/a data register 1 dadr1 r/w h'00 h'ffa5 d/a control register dacr r/w h'1f h'ffa6 module stop control register mstpcr r/w h'3fff h'ff3c note: * lower 16 bits of the address. section 15 d/a converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 532 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 15.2 register descriptions 15.2.1 d/a data registers 0 and 1 (dadr0, dadr1) 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : dadr0 and dadr1 are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store data for conversion. whenever output is enabled, the values in dadr0 and dadr1 are converted and output from the analog output pins. dadr0 and dadr1 are each initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 15.2.2 d/a control register (dacr) 7 daoe1 0 r/w 6 daoe0 0 r/w 5 dae 0 r/w 4 ? 1 ? 3 ? 1 ? 0 ? 1 ? 2 ? 1 ? 1 ? 1 ? bit initial value r/w : : : dacr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of the d/a converter. dacr is initialized to h'1f by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bit 7?d/a output enable 1 (daoe1): controls d/a conversion and analog output for channel 1. bit 7 daoe1 description 0 analog output da1 is disabled (initial value ) 1 channel 1 d/a conversion is enabled; analog output da1 is enabled section 15 d/a converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 533 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 6?d/a output enable 0 (daoe0): controls d/a conversion and analog output for channel 0. bit 6 daoe0 description 0 analog output da0 is disabled (initial value ) 1 channel 0 d/a conversion is enabled; analog output da0 is enabled bit 5?d/a enable (dae): the daoe0 and daoe1 bits both control d/a conversion. when the dae bit is cleared to 0, the channel 0 and 1 d/a conversions are controlled independently. when the dae bit is set to 1, the channel 0 and 1 d/a conversions are controlled together. output of resultant conversions is always controlled independently by the daoe0 and daoe1 bits. bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 daoe1 daoe0 dae description 00 * channel 0 and 1 d/a conversions disabled 1 0 channel 0 d/a conversion enabled channel 1 d/a conversion disabled 1 channel 0 and 1 d/a conversions enabled 1 0 0 channel 0 d/a conversion disabled channel 1 d/a conversion enabled 1 channel 0 and 1 d/a conversions enabled 1 * channel 0 and 1 d/a conversions enabled * : don?t care if the h8s/2345 group enters software standby mode when d/a conversion is enabled, the d/a output is held and the analog power current is the same as during d/a conversion. when it is necessary to reduce the analog power current in software standby mode, clear the dae, daoe0 and daoe1 bits to 0 to disable d/a output. bits 4 to 0?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. section 15 d/a converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 534 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 15.2.3 module stop control register (mstpcr) 15 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : 14 0 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w mstpcrh mstpcrl mstpcr is a 16-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control. when the mstp10 bit in mstpcr is set to 1, d/a converter operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. for details, see section 19.5, module stop mode. mstpcr is initialized to h'3fff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 10?module stop (mstp10): specifies the d/a converter module stop mode. bit 10 mstp10 description 0 d/a converter module stop mode cleared 1 d/a converter module stop mode set (initial value ) section 15 d/a converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 535 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 15.3 operation the d/a converter includes d/a conversion circuits for two channels, each of which can operate independently. d/a conversion is performed continuously while enabled by dacr. if either dadr0 or dadr1 is written to, the new data is immediately converted. the conversion result is output by setting the corresponding daoe0 or daoe1 bit to 1. the operation example described in this section concerns d/a conversion on channel 0. figure 15.2 shows the timing of this operation. [1] write the conversion data to dadr0. [2] set the daoe0 bit in dacr to 1. d/a conversion is started and the da0 pin becomes an output pin. the conversion result is output after the conversion time has elapsed. the output value is expressed by the following formula: v ref dadr contents 256 the conversion results are output continuously until dadr0 is written to again or the daoe0 bit is cleared to 0. [3] if dadr0 is written to again, the new data is immediately converted. the new conversion result is output after the conversion time has elapsed. [4] if the daoe0 bit is cleared to 0, the da0 pin becomes an input pin. section 15 d/a converter rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 536 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 conversion data 1 conversion result 1 high-impedance state t dconv dadr0 write cycle da0 daoe0 dadr0 address dacr write cycle conversion data 2 conversion result 2 t dconv legend: t dconv : d/a conversion time dadr0 write cycle dacr write cycle figure 15.2 example of d/a converter operation 15.4 usage notes setting range for pins other than analog power pin (1) relationship between av cc , v cc , av ss , and vss the relationship between av cc , v cc , av ss , and v ss is av cc = v cc and av ss = v ss . also, the av cc and av ss pins should never be left open, even if the d/a converter is not used. (2) vref setting range the setting range for the reference voltage from the vref pin is vref av cc . note: failure to observe (1) and (2) above could have an adverse effect on the reliability of the lsi. section 16 ram rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 537 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 16 ram 16.1 overview the h8s/2345 and h8s/2344 have 4 kbytes of on-chip high-speed static ram, and the h8s/2343, h8s/2341, and h8s/2340 have 2 kbytes. the ram is connected to the cpu by a 16-bit data bus, enabling one-state access by the cpu to both byte data and word data. this makes it possible to perform fast word data transfer. the on-chip ram of the h8s/2345 and h8s/2344 is allocated addresses h'ec00 to h'fbff (4 kbytes) in the normal modes (modes 1 to 3) * , and addresses h'ffec00 to h'fffbff (4 kbytes) in the advanced modes (modes 4 to 7). the on-chip ram of the h8s/2343, h8s/2341, and h8s/2340 is allocated addresses h'f400 to h'fbff (2 kbytes) in the normal modes (modes 1 to 3) * , and addresses h'fff400 to h'fffbff (2 kbytes) in the advanced modes (modes 4 to 7). the on-chip ram can be enabled or disabled by means of the ram enable bit (rame) in the system control register (syscr). note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. section 16 ram rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 538 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 16.1.1 block diagram figure 16.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip ram. internal data bus (upper 8 bits) internal data bus (lower 8 bits) h'ffec00 h'ffec02 h'ffec04 h'fffbfe h'ffec01 h'ffec03 h'ffec05 h'fffbff figure 16.1 block diagram of ram (h8s/2345, advanced mode) 16.1.2 register configuration the on-chip ram is controlled by syscr. table 16.1 shows the address and initial value of syscr. table 16.1 ram register name abbreviation r/w initial value address * system control register syscr r/w h'01 h'ff39 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. section 16 ram rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 539 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 16.2 register descriptions 16.2.1 system control register (syscr) 7 ? 0 r/w 6 ? 0 r/w 5 intm1 0 r/w 4 intm0 0 r/w 3 nmieg 0 r/w 0 rame 1 r/w 2 ? 0 r/w 1 ? 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : the on-chip ram is enabled or disabled by the rame bit in syscr. for details of other bits in syscr, see section 3.2.2, system control register (syscr). bit 0?ram enable (rame): enables or disables the on-chip ram. the rame bit is initialized when the reset state is released. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 0 rame description 0 on-chip ram is disabled 1 on-chip ram is enabled (initial value ) 16.3 operation when the rame bit is set to 1, accesses to addresses h'ffec00 to h'fffbff (in the case of the h8s/2345 and h8s/2344) or addresses h'fff400 to h'fffbff (in the case of the h8s/2343, h8s/2341, and h8s/2340) are directed to the on-chip ram. when the rame bit is cleared to 0, the off-chip address space is accessed. since the on-chip ram is connected to the cpu by an internal 16-bit data bus, it can be written to and read in byte or word units. each type of access can be performed in one state. even addresses use the upper 8 bits, and odd addresses use the lower 8 bits. word data must start at an even address. 16.4 usage note dtc register information can be located in addresses h'fff800 to h'fffbff. when the dtc is used, the rame bit must not be cleared to 0. section 16 ram rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 540 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 541 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 17 rom 17.1 overview the h8s/2345 has 128 kbytes of on-chip rom (flash memory, prom, or mask rom); the h8s/2344 has 96 kbytes of on-chip rom (mask rom); the h8s/2343 has 64 kbytes of on-chip rom (mask rom); and the h8s/2341 has 32 kbytes of on-chip rom (mask rom). the rom is connected to the h8s/2000 cpu by a 16-bit data bus. the cpu accesses both byte data and word data in one state, making possible rapid instruction fetches and high-speed processing. the on-chip rom is enabled or disabled by setting the mode pins (md 2 , md 1 , and md 0 ) and bit eae in bcrl. the flash memory versions of the h8s/2345 group can be erased and programmed on-board as well as with a prom programmer. the prom version of the h8s/2345 group can be programmed with a prom programmer, by setting prom mode. 17.1.1 block diagram figure 17.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip rom. internal data bus (upper 8 bits) internal data bus (lower 8 bits) h'000000 h'000002 h'000001 h'000003 h'01fffe h'01ffff figure 17.1 block diagram of rom (h8s/2345) section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 542 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.1.2 register configuration the h8s/2345?s on-chip rom is controlled by the mode pins and register bcrl. the register configuration is shown in table 17.1. table 17.1 rom register name abbreviation r/w initial value address * mode control register mdcr r/w undefined h'ff3b bus control register l bcrl r/w undefined h'fed5 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. 17.2 register descriptions 17.2.1 mode control register (mdcr) bit:76543210 ? ? ? ? ? mds2 mds1 mds0 initial value:10000? * ? * ? * r/w:????? r r r note: * determined by pins md 2 to md 0 . mdcr is an 8-bit read-only register that indicates the current operating mode of the h8s/2345 group. bit 7?reserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. bits 6 to 3?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. bits 2 to 0?mode select 2 to 0 (mds2 to mds0): these bits indicate the input levels at pins md 2 to md 0 (the current operating mode). bits mds2 to mds0 correspond to pins md 2 to md 0 . mds2 to mds0 are read-only bits, and cannot be written to. the mode pin (md 2 to md 0 ) input levels are latched into these bits when mdcr is read. these latches are canceled by a power-on reset, but are retained after a manual reset. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 543 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.2.2 bus control register l (bcrl) bit:76543210 brle?eae????waite initial value:00111100 r/w : r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w enabling or disabling of part of the h8s/2345?s on-chip rom area can be selected by means of the eae bit in bcrl. for details of the other bits in bcrl, see section 6.2.5, bus control register l (bcrl). bit 5?external address enable (eae): selects whether addresses h'010000 to h'01ffff are to be internal addresses or external addresses. bit 5 eae description 0 addresses h'010000 to h'01ffff are in on-chip rom (h8s/2345). addresses h'010000 to h'017fff are in on-chip rom and addresses h'018000 to h'01ffff are a reserved area (in the h8s/2344). addresses h'010000 to h'01ffff are a reserved area (in the h8s/2343 and h8s/2341). 1 addresses h'010000 to h'01ffff are external addresses (external expansion mode) or a reserved area * (single-chip mode). (initial value) note: * reserved areas should not be accessed. 17.3 operation the on-chip rom is connected to the cpu by a 16-bit data bus, and both byte and word data can be accessed in one state. even addresses are connected to the upper 8 bits, and odd addresses to the lower 8 bits. word data must start at an even address. the on-chip rom is enabled and disabled by setting the mode pins (md 2 , md 1 , and md 0 ) and bit eae in bcrl. these settings are shown in tables 17.2 and 17.3. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 544 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 17.2 operating modes and rom area (f-ztat) mode pin bcrl operating mode fwe md 2 md 1 md 0 eae on-chip rom mode 0 ? 0 0 0 0 ? ? mode 1 1 mode 2 1 0 mode 3 1 mode 4 advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled 1 0 0 ? disabled mode 5 advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled 1 mode 6 1 0 0 enabled (128 kbytes) * 1 advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled 1 enabled (64 kbytes) mode 7 advanced single-chip mode 1 0 enabled (128 kbytes) * 1 1 enabled (64 kbytes) mode 8 ? 1 0 0 0 ? ? mode 9 1 mode 10 1 0 0 enabled (128 kbytes) * 2 boot mode (advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) * 3 1 enabled (64 kbytes) mode 11 1 0 enabled (128 kbytes) * 2 boot mode (advanced single-chip mode) * 4 1 enabled (64 kbytes) mode 12 ? 1 0 0 ? ? mode 13 1 mode 14 1 0 0 enabled (128 kbytes) * 1 user program mode (advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) * 3 1 enabled (64 kbytes) mode 15 1 0 enabled (128 kbytes) * 1 user program mode (advanced single-chip mode) * 4 1 enabled (64 kbytes) notes: 1. note that in modes 6, 7, 14, and 15, the on-chip rom that can be used after a power- on reset is the 64-kbyte area from h'000000 to h'00ffff. 2. note that in the mode 10 and mode 11 boot modes, the on-chip rom that can be used immediately after all flash memory is erased by the boot program is the 64-kbyte area from h'000000 to h'00ffff. 3. apart from the fact that flash memory can be erased and programmed, operation is the same as in advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled. 4. apart from the fact that flash memory can be erased and programmed, operation is the same as in advanced single-chip mode. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 545 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 17.3 operating modes and rom area (ztat or mask rom) mode pin bcrl operating mode md2 md1 md0 eae on-chip rom mode 0 ? 0 0 0 ? h8s/2345 h8s/2344 h8s/2343 h8s/2341 mode 1 normal expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled 1 ???? mode 2 * 1 normal expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled 1 0 disabled disabled disabled disabled mode 3 * 1 normal single-chip mode 1 enabled (56 kbytes) enabled (56 kbytes) enabled (56 kbytes) enabled (32 kbytes) mode 4 advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled 1 0 0 ? disabled disabled disabled disabled mode 5 advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled 1 mode 6 * 1 1 0 0 enabled (128 kbytes) * 2 enabled * 2 (96 kbytes) enabled (64 kbytes) enabled (32 kbytes) advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled 1 enabled (64 kbytes) enabled (64 kbytes) mode 7 * 1 advanced single- chip mode 1 0 enabled (128 kbytes) * 2 enabled * 2 (96 kbytes) 1 enabled (64 kbytes) enabled (64 kbytes) notes: 1. not used on romless version. 2. in h8s/2345 modes 6 and 7, the on-chip rom available after a power-on reset is the 64-kbyte area comprising addresses h'000000 to h'00ffff. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 546 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.4 prom mode 17.4.1 prom mode setting the prom version of the h8s/2345 suspends its microcontroller functions when placed in prom mode, enabling the on-chip prom to be programmed. this programming can be done with a prom programmer set up in the same way as for the hn27c101 eprom (v pp = 12.5 v). use of a 100-pin/32-pin socket adapter enables programming with a commercial prom programmer. note that the prom programmer should not be set to page mode as the h8s/2345 does not support page programming. table 17.4 shows how prom mode is selected. table 17.4 selecting prom mode pin names setting md 2 , md 1 , md 0 low stby pa 2 , pa 1 high 17.4.2 socket adapter and memory map programs can be written and verified by attaching a socket adapter to the prom programmer to convert from a 100-pin arrangement to a 32-pin arrangement. table 17.5 gives ordering information for the socket adapter, and figure 17.2 shows the wiring of the socket adapter. figure 17.3 shows the memory map in prom mode. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 547 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 fp-100b, tfp-100b, tfp-100g 62 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 63 43 44 45 46 47 48 50 74 42 75 40, 65, 98 77 78 51 52 7, 18, 31, 49, 68, 88 87 64 57 58 61 pin res pd 0 pd 1 pd 2 pd 3 pd 4 pd 5 pd 6 pd 7 pc 0 pc 1 pc 2 pc 3 pc 4 pc 5 pc 6 pc 7 pb 0 nmi pb 2 pb 3 pb 4 pb 5 pb 6 pb 7 pa 0 pf 2 pb 1 pf 1 v cc av cc v ref pa 1 pa 2 v ss av ss stby md 0 md 1 md 2 1 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 27 26 23 25 4 28 29 3 2 22 24 31 32 16 pin v pp eo 0 eo 1 eo 2 eo 3 eo 4 eo 5 eo 6 eo 7 ea 0 ea 1 ea 2 ea 3 ea 4 ea 5 ea 6 ea 7 ea 8 ea 9 ea 10 ea 11 ea 12 ea 13 ea 14 ea 15 ea 16 ce oe pgm v cc v ss h8s/2345 group eprom socket note: pins not shown in this figure should be left open. legend: v pp eo 7 to eo 0 ea 16 to ea 0 oe ce pgm : programming power supply (12.5 v) : data input/output : address input : output enable : chip enable : program fp-100a 64 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 43 65 45 46 47 48 49 50 52 76 44 77 42, 67, 100 79 80 53 54 9, 20, 33 51, 70, 90 89 66 59 60 63 hn27c101 (32 pins) figure 17.2 wiring of 100-pin/32-pin socket adapter section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 548 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 17.5 socket adapter socket adapter microcontroller package minato electronics inc. data i/o co. h8s/2345 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) me2345esns1h h72345t100d3201 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100g) me2345esms1h h7234gt100d3201 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) me2345esfs1h h7234aq100d3201 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) me2345eshs1h h7234bq100d3201 on-chip prom addresses in mcu mode addresses in prom mode h'000000 h'01ffff h'00000 h'1ffff figure 17.3 memory map in prom mode section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 549 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.5 programming 17.5.1 overview table 17.6 shows how to select the program, verify, and program-inhibit modes in prom mode. table 17.6 mode selection in prom mode pins mode ce ce ce ce oe oe oe oe pgm pgm pgm pgm v pp v cc eo 7 to eo 0 ea 16 to ea 0 program l h l v pp v cc data input address input verify llhv pp v cc data output address input program-inhibit lllv pp v cc high impedance address input lhh hl l hhh legend: l: low voltage level h: high voltage level v pp : v pp voltage level v cc : v cc voltage level programming and verification should be carried out using the same specifications as for the standard hn27c101 eprom. however, do not set the prom programmer to page mode, as the h8s/2345 does not support page programming. a prom programmer that only supports page programming cannot be used. when choosing a prom programmer, check that it supports high-speed programming in byte units. always set addresses within the range h'00000 to h'1ffff. 17.5.2 programming and verification an efficient, high-speed programming procedure can be used to program and verify prom data. this procedure writes data quickly without subjecting the chip to voltage stress or sacrificing data reliability. it leaves the data h'ff in unused addresses. figure 17.4 shows the basic high-speed programming flowchart. tables 17.7 and 17.8 list the electrical characteristics of the chip during programming. figure 17.5 shows a timing chart. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 550 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 set programming/verification mode address = 0 verification ok? yes no n = 0 n + 1 n program with t pw = 0.2 ms5% program with t opw = 0.2n ms last address? set read mode v cc = 5.0 v 0.25 v v pp = v cc all addresses read? v cc = 6.0v0.25v, v pp = 12.5v0.3v yes no no yes go address + 1 address n<25? fail no go start end figure 17.4 high-speed programming flowchart section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 551 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 17.7 dc characteristics in prom mode (when v cc = 6.0 v 0.25 v, v pp = 12.5 v 0.3 v, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25c 5c) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions input high voltage eo 7 to eo 0 , ea 16 to ea 0 , oe , ce , pgm v ih 2.4 ? v cc + 0.3 v input low voltage eo 7 to eo 0 , ea 16 to ea 0 , oe , ce , pgm v il ? 0.3 ? 0.8 v output high voltage eo 7 to eo 0 v oh 2.4 ?? vi oh = ? 200 a output low voltage eo 7 to eo 0 v ol ?? 0.45 v i ol = 1.6 ma input leakage current eo 7 to eo 0 , ea 16 to ea 0 , oe , ce , pgm | i li | ?? 2av in = 5.25 v/0.5 v v cc current i cc ?? 40 ma v pp current i pp ?? 40 ma section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 552 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 17.8 ac characteristics in prom mode (when v cc = 6.0 v 0.25 v, v pp = 12.5 v 0.3 v, t a = 25c 5c) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions address setup time t as 2 ?? s figure 17.5 * 1 oe setup time t oes 2 ?? s data setup time t ds 2 ?? s address hold time t ah 0 ?? s data hold time t dh 2 ?? s data output disable time t df * 2 ?? 130 ns v pp setup time t vps 2 ?? s programming pulse width t pw 0.19 0.20 0.21 ms pgm pulse width for overwrite programming t opw * 3 0.19 ? 5.25 ms v cc setup time t vcs 2 ?? s ce setup time t ces 2 ?? s data output delay time t oe 0 ? 150 ns notes: 1. input pulse level: 0.8 v to 2.2 v input rise time and fall time 20 ns timing reference levels: input: 1.0 v, 2.0 v output: 0.8 v, 2.0 v 2. t df is defined to be when output has reached the open state, and the output level can no longer be referenced. 3. t opw is defined by the value shown in the flowchart. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 553 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 program verify input data output data t as t ah t df t dh t ds t vps t vcs t ces t pw t opw * t oes t oe address data v pp v cc ce pgm oe v pp v cc v cc +1 v cc note: * t opw is defined by the value shown in the flowchart. figure 17.5 prom programming/verification timing 17.5.3 programming precautions ? program using the specified voltages and timing. the programming voltage (v pp ) in prom mode is 12.5 v. if the prom programmer is set to renesas technology hn27c101 specifications, v pp will be 12.5 v. applied voltages in excess of the specified values can permanently destroy the mcu. be particularly careful about the prom programmer ? s overshoot characteristics. ? before programming, check that the mcu is correctly mounted in the prom programmer. overcurrent damage to the mcu can result if the index marks on the prom programmer, socket adapter, and mcu are not correctly aligned. ? do not touch the socket adapter or mcu while programming. touching either of these can cause contact faults and programming errors. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 554 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? the mcu cannot be programmed in page programming mode. select the programming mode carefully. ? the size of the h8s/2345 group prom is 128 kbytes. always set addresses within the range h'00000 to h'1ffff. during programming, write h'ff to unused addresses to avoid verification errors. 17.5.4 reliability of programmed data an effective way to assure the data retention characteristics of the programmed chips is to bake them at 150 c, then screen them for data errors. this procedure quickly eliminates chips with prom memory cells prone to early failure. figure 17.6 shows the recommended screening procedure. mount program chip and verify data bake chip for 24 to 48 hours at 125 c to 150 c with power off read and check program figure 17.6 recommended screening procedure if a series of programming errors occurs while the same prom programmer is being used, stop programming and check the prom programmer and socket adapter for defects. please inform renesas technology of any abnormal conditions noted during or after programming or in screening of program data after high-temperature baking. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 555 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.6 overview of flash memory 17.6.1 features the features of the flash memory are summarized below. ? four flash memory operating modes ? program mode ? erase mode ? program-verify mode ? erase-verify mode ? programming/erase methods the flash memory is programmed 32 bytes at a time. erasing is performed by block erase (in single-block units). when erasing multiple blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially. block erasing can be performed as required on 1-kbyte, 8-kbyte, 16-kbyte, 28- kbyte, and 32-kbyte blocks. ? programming/erase times (5 v version) the flash memory programming time is 10 ms (typ.) for simultaneous 32-byte programming, equivalent to 300 s (typ.) per byte, and the erase time is 100 ms (typ.) per block. ? reprogramming capability the flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times. ? on-board programming modes there are two modes in which flash memory can be programmed/erased/verified on-board: ? boot mode ? user program mode ? automatic bit rate adjustment with data transfer in boot mode, the bit rate of the h8s/2345 group chip can be automatically adjusted to match the transfer bit rate of the host. (9600 bps, 4800 bps) ? flash memory emulation by ram part of the ram area can be overlapped onto flash memory, to emulate flash memory updates in real time. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 556 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? protect modes there are three protect modes, hardware, software, and error protect, which allow protected status to be designated for flash memory program/erase/verify operations. ? writer mode flash memory can be programmed/erased in writer mode, using a prom programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode. 17.6.2 block diagram module bus bus interface/controller flash memory (128 kbytes) operating mode flmcr2 * 2 h'000000 h'000001 h'000002 h'000003 h'01fffc h'01fffd h'01fffe h'01ffff even addresses odd addresses internal data bus (lower 8 bits) internal data bus (upper 8 bits) fwe pin * 1 mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) ebr1 * 2 ebr2 * 2 flmcr1 * 2 syscr2 * 2 ramer * 2 legend: syscr2: system control register 2 flmcr1: flash memory control register 1 flmcr2: flash memory control register 2 ebr1: erase block register 1 ebr2: erase block register 2 ramer: ram emulation register notes: 1. functions as fwe pin on f-ztat version. functions as wdtovf pin on ztat, mask rom, and romless versions. 2. the flash memory control registers (syscr2, flmcr1, flmcr2, ebr1, ebr2, ramer) are enabled on the f-ztat version only. they do not exist on the ztat, mask rom, and romless versions, so an undefined value will be returned if they are read, and it is not possible to write to these registers. figure 17.7 block diagram of flash memory section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 557 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.6.3 flash memory operating modes mode transitions: when the mode pins and the fwe pin are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed, the mcu enters one of the operating modes shown in figure 17.8. in user mode, flash memory can be read but not programmed or erased. flash memory can be programmed and erased in boot mode, user program mode, and writer mode. boot mode on-board programming mode user program mode user mode with on-chip rom enabled reset state writer mode res = 0 fwe = 1, swe = 1 fwe = 0 or swe = 0 * 2 * 1 notes: only make a transition between user mode and user program mode when the cpu is not accessing the flash memory. 1. nmi = 1, md 2 = md 1 = md 0 = 0, pf 2 = 1, pf 1 = pf 0 = 0 2. nmi = 1, fwe = 1, md 2 = 0, md 1 = 1 res = 0 res = 0 res = 0 fwe = 0, md 2 = md 1 = 1 figure 17.8 flash memory mode transitions section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 558 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 on-board programming modes ? boot mode flash memory h8s/2345 f-ztat chip ram host programming control program sci application program (old version) new application program flash memory h8s/2345 f-ztat chip ram host sci boot program area new application program flash memory h8s/2345 f-ztat chip ram host sci flash memory erase boot program new application program flash memory h8s/2345 f-ztat chip program execution state ram host sci new application program boot program programming control program 1. initial state the old program version or data remains written in the flash memory. the user should prepare the programming control program and new application program beforehand in the host. 2. programming control program transfer when boot mode is entered, the boot program in the h8s/2345 chip (originally incorporated in the chip) is started and the programming control program in the host is transferred to ram via sci communication. the boot program required for flash memory erasing is automatically transferred to the ram boot program area. 3. flash memory initialization the erase program in the boot program area (in ram) is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to h'ff). in boot mode, entire flash memory erasure is performed, without regard to blocks. 4. writing new application program the programming control program transferred from the host to ram is executed, and the new application program in the host is written into the flash memory. programming control program boot program boot program boot program area boot program area programming control program application program (old version) figure 17.9 boot mode section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 559 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? user program mode flash memory h8s/2345 f-ztat chip ram host programming/ erase control program sci boot program new application program flash memory h8s/2345 f-ztat chip ram host sci new application program flash memory h8s/2345 f-ztat chip ram host sci flash memory erase boot program new application program flash memory h8s/2345 f-ztat chip program execution state ram host sci boot program boot program fwe assessment program application program (old version) new application program 1. initial state (1) the fwe assessment program that confirms that the fwe pin has been driven high, and (2) the program that will transfer the programming/ erase control program to on-chip ram should be written into the flash memory by the user beforehand. (3) the programming/erase control program should be prepared in the host or in the flash memory. 2. programming/erase control program transfer when the fwe pin is driven high, user software confirms this fact, executes the transfer program in the flash memory, and transfers the programming/erase control program to ram. 3. flash memory initialization the programming/erase program in ram is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to h'ff). erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte units. 4. writing new application program next, the new application program in the host is written into the erased flash memory blocks. do not write to unerased blocks. programming/ erase control program programming/ erase control program programming/ erase control program transfer program application program (old version) transfer program fwe assessment program fwe assessment program transfer program fwe assessment program transfer program figure 17.10 user program mode (example) section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 560 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 flash memory emulation in ram: emulation should be performed in user mode or user program mode. when the emulation block set in ramer is accessed while the emulation function is being executed, data written in the overlap ram is read. ? reading overlap data in user mode and user program mode application program execution state flash memory emulation block ram sci overlap ram (emulation is performed on data written in ram) figure 17.11 reading overlap data in user mode and user program mode ? writing overlap data in user program mode when overlap ram data is confirmed, the rams bit is cleared, ram overlap is released, and writes should actually be performed to the flash memory. when the programming control program is transferred to ram, ensure that the transfer destination and the overlap ram do not overlap, as this will cause data in the overlap ram to be rewritten. application program flash memory ram sci overlap ram (programming data) programming data programming control program execution state figure 17.12 writing overlap data in user program mode section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 561 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 17.9 differences between boot mode and user program mode boot mode user program mode entire memory erase yes yes block erase no yes programming control program * program/program-verify program/program-verify erase/erase-verify note: * to be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm. block configuration: the flash memory is divided into four 1-kbyte blocks, one 28-kbyte block, one 16-kbyte block, two 8-kbyte blocks, and two 32-kbyte blocks. address h'000000 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 1 kbyte address h'01ffff flash memory 128 kbytes 32 kbytes 32 kbytes 8 kbytes 8 kbytes 16 kbytes 28 kbytes figure 17.13 flash memory block configuration section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 562 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.6.4 pin configuration the flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 17.10. table 17.10 flash memory pins pin name abbreviation i/o function reset res input reset flash write enable fwe * input flash program/erase protection by hardware mode 2 md 2 input sets mcu operating mode mode 1 md 1 input sets mcu operating mode mode 0 md 0 input sets mcu operating mode port f 2 pf 2 input sets mcu operating mode in writer mode port f 1 pf 1 input sets mcu operating mode in writer mode port f 0 pf 0 input sets mcu operating mode in writer mode transmit data txd1 output serial transmit data output receive data rxd1 input serial receive data input note: * fwe pin functions as wdtovf pin on ztat, mask rom, and romless versions. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 563 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.6.5 register configuration the registers used to control the on-chip flash memory when enabled are shown in table 17.11. in order for these registers to be accessed, the flshe bit must be set to 1 in syscr2. table 17.11 flash memory registers register name abbreviation r/w initial value address * 1 flash memory control register 1 flmcr1 * 6 r/w * 3 h'00 * 4 h'ffc8 * 2 flash memory control register 2 flmcr2 * 6 r/w * 3 h'00 * 5 h'ffc9 * 2 erase block register 1 ebr1 * 6 r/w * 3 h'00 * 5 h'ffca * 2 erase block register 2 ebr2 * 6 r/w * 3 h'00 * 5 h'ffcb * 2 system control register 2 syscr2 r/w h'00 h'ff42 ram emulation register ramer r/w h'00 h'fedb notes: the registers listed in table 7.11 are enabled on the f-ztat version only. they do not exist on the ztat, mask rom, and romless versions, so an undefined value will be returned if they are read, and it is not possible to write to these registers. 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. flash memory registers share addresses with other registers. register selection is performed by the flshe bit in the system control register 2 (syscr2). 3. in modes in which the on-chip flash memory is disabled (modes 4 and 5), a read will return h'00, and writes are invalid. writes are also disabled when the fwe bit is cleared to 0 in flmcr1. 4. when a high level is input to the fwe pin, the initial value is h'80. 5. when a low level is input to the fwe pin, or if a high level is input and the swe bit in flmcr1 is not set, these registers are initialized to h'00. 6. flmcr1, flmcr2, ebr1, and ebr2 are 8-bit registers. only byte accesses are valid for these registers, the access requiring 2 states. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 564 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.7 register descriptions 17.7.1 flash memory control register 1 (flmcr1) bit 76543210 fwe swe ?? ev pv e p initial value ? * 0000000 read/write r r/w ?? r/w r/w r/w r/w note: * determined by the state of the fwe pin. flmcr1 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. program-verify mode or erase-verify mode is entered by setting swe to 1 when fwe = 1. program mode is entered by setting swe to 1 when fwe = 1, then setting the psu bit in flmcr2, and finally setting the p bit. erase mode is entered by setting swe to 1 when fwe = 1, then setting the esu bit in flmcr2, and finally setting the e bit. flmcr1 is initialized by a reset, and in hardware standby mode and software standby mode. its initial value is h'80 when a high level is input to the fwe pin, and h'00 when a low level is input. when on-chip flash memory is disabled (modes 4 and 5), a read will return h'00, and writes are invalid. writes to the swe bit in flmcr1 are enabled only when fwe = 1; writes to the ev and pv bits only when fwe=1 and swe=1; writes to the e bit only when fwe = 1, swe = 1, and esu = 1; and writes to the p bit only when fwe = 1, swe = 1, and psu = 1. bit 7?flash write enable bit (fwe): sets hardware protection against flash memory programming/erasing. see section 17.14, flash memory programming and erasing precautions, before using this bit. bit 7 fwe description 0 when a low level is input to the fwe pin (hardware-protected state) 1 when a high level is input to the fwe pin section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 565 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 6?software write enable bit (swe): enables or disables flash memory programming. swe should be set before setting bits esu, psu, ev, pv, e, p, and eb9 to eb0, and should not be cleared at the same time as these bits. bit 6 swe description 0 writes/erasing disabled (initial value) 1 writes/erasing enabled [setting condition] when fwe = 1 bit 5 and 4?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. bit 3?erase-verify (ev): selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing. do not set the swe, esu, psu, pv, e, or p bit at the same time. bit 3 ev description 0 erase-verify mode cleared (initial value) 1 transition to erase-verify mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1 and swe = 1 bit 2?program-verify (pv): selects program-verify mode transition or clearing. do not set the swe, esu, psu, ev, e, or p bit at the same time. bit 2 pv description 0 program-verify mode cleared (initial value) 1 transition to program-verify mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1 and swe = 1 section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 566 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 1?erase (e): selects erase mode transition or clearing. do not set the swe, esu, psu, ev, pv, or p bit at the same time. bit 1 e description 0 erase mode cleared (initial value) 1 transition to erase mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1, swe = 1, and esu = 1 bit 0?program (p): selects program mode transition or clearing. do not set the swe, esu, psu, ev, pv, or e bit at the same time. bit 0 p description 0 program mode cleared (initial value) 1 transition to program mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1, swe = 1, and psu = 1 17.7.2 flash memory control register 2 (flmcr2) bit 76543210 fler ????? esu psu initial value00000000 read/write r ????? r/w r/w flmcr2 is an 8-bit register that monitors the presence or absence of flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) and performs setup for flash memory program/erase mode. flmcr2 is initialized to h'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. the esu and psu bits are cleared to 0 in software standby mode, hardware protect mode, and software protect mode. when on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return h'00. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 567 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 7?flash memory error (fler): indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on flash memory (programming or erasing). when fler is set to 1, flash memory goes to the error- protect mode. bit 7 fler description 0 flash memory is operating normally flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled [clearing condition] reset or hardware standby mode (initial value) 1 an error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled [setting condition] see section 17.10.3, error protection bits 6 to 2?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. bit 1?erase setup (esu): prepares for a transition to erase mode. set this bit to 1 before setting the e bit to 1 in flmcr1. do not set the swe, psu, ev, pv, e, or p bit at the same time. bit 1 esu description 0 erase setup cleared (initial value) 1 erase setup [setting condition] when fwe = 1, and swe = 1 bit 0?program setup (psu): prepares for a transition to program mode. set this bit to 1 before setting the p bit to 1 in flmcr1. do not set the swe, esu, ev, pv, e, or p bit at the same time. bit 0 psu description 0 program setup cleared (initial value) 1 program setup [setting condition] when fwe = 1, and swe = 1 section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 568 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.7.3 erase block registers 1 and 2 (ebr1, ebr2) bit 76543210 ebr1 ?????? eb9 eb8 initial value00000000 read/write ?????? r/w r/w bit 76543210 ebr2 eb7 eb6 eb5 eb4 eb3 eb2 eb1 eb0 initial value00000000 read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w ebr1 and ebr2 are registers that specify the flash memory erase area block by block; bits 1 and 2 in ebr1 and bits 7 to 0 in ebr2 are readable/writable bits. ebr1 and ebr2 are each initialized to h'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode and software standby mode, when a low level is input to the fwe pin, and when a high level is input to the fwe pin and the swe bit in flmcr1 is cleared to 0. when a bit in ebr1 or ebr2 is set, the corresponding block can be erased. other blocks are erase-protected. blocks are erased separately (in one-block units), so set only one bit in ebr1 or ebr2 (more than one bit cannot be set to 1). to erase all blocks, erase one block at a time, once after another in sequence. then on-chip flash memory is disabled (modes 4 and 5), a read with return h'00, and writes are disabled. the flash memory block configuration is shown in table 17.12. table 17.12 flash memory erase blocks block (size) address eb0 (1 kbyte) h'000000 to h'0003ff eb1 (1 kbyte) h'000400 to h'0007ff eb2 (1 kbyte) h'000800 to h'000bff eb3 (1 kbyte) h'000c00 to h'000fff eb4 (28 kbytes) h'001000 to h'007fff eb5 (16 kbytes) h'008000 to h'00bfff eb6 (8 kbytes) h'00c000 to h'00dfff eb7 (8 kbytes) h'00e000 to h'00ffff eb8 (32 kbytes) h'010000 to h'017fff eb9 (32 kbytes) h'018000 to h'01ffff section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 569 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.7.4 system control register 2 (syscr2) bit 76543210 ???? flshe ??? initial value00000000 read/write ???? r/w ??? syscr2 is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls on-chip flash memory (in f-ztat versions). syscr2 is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. syscr2 is available only in the f-ztat version. in the mask rom and ztat versions, this register cannot be written to and will return an undefined value if read. bits 7 to 4?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. bit 3?flash memory control register enable (flshe): controls cpu access to the flash memory control registers (flmcr1, flmcr2, ebr1, and ebr2). setting the flshe bit to 1 enables read/write access to the flash memory control registers. if flshe is cleared to 0, the flash memory control registers are deselected. in this case, the flash memory control register contents are retained. bit 3 flshe description 0 flash control registers deselected in area h'ffffc8 to h'ffffcb (initial value) 1 flash control registers selected in area h'ffffc8 to h'ffffcb bits 2 to 0?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 570 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.7.5 ram emulation register (ramer) bit 76543210 ????? rams ram1 ram0 initial value00000000 r/w ????? r/w r/w r/w ramer specifies the area of flash memory to be overlapped with part of ram when emulating real-time flash memory programming. ramer is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. ramer settings should be made in user mode or user program mode. flash memory area divisions are shown in table 17.13. to ensure correct operation of the emulation function, the rom for which ram emulation is performed should not be accessed immediately after this register has been modified. normal execution of an access immediately after register modification is not guaranteed. bits 7 to 3?reserved: these bits are always read as 0. bit 2?ram select (rams): specifies selection or non-selection of flash memory emulation in ram. when rams = 1, all flash memory block are program/erase-protected. bit 2 rams description 0 emulation not selected program/erase-protection of all flash memory blocks is disabled (initial value) 1 emulation selected program/erase-protection of all flash memory blocks is enabled bits 1 and 0?flash memory area selection (ram1, ram0): these bits are used together with bit 2 to select the flash memory area to be overlapped with ram. (see table 17.13.) section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 571 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 17.13 flash memory area divisions bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 addresses block name rams ram1 ram0 description h'ffec00 ? h'ffefff ram area 1 kbyte 0 ** ram emulation not selected h'000000 ? h'0003ff eb0 (1 kbyte) 1 0 0 h'000400 ? h'0007ff eb1 (1 kbyte) 1 0 1 ram emulation selected h'000800 ? h'000bff eb2 (1 kbyte) 1 1 0 h'000c00 ? h'000fff eb3 (1 kbyte) 1 1 1 notes: to use ram for flash memory emulation, set the rame bit of syscr to 1. * : don ? t care emulation block eb1 eb0 h'000000 h'0003ff h'000400 h'0007ff h'000800 h'000bff h'000c00 h'000fff h'001000 h'01ffff eb2 eb3 eb4 eb9 overlap ram (1 kbyte) ram area ram (3 kbytes) flash memory area h'ffec00 h'fffbff h'ffefff h'fff000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . figure 17.14 example of overlap between flash memory area and ram area (when rams = 1, ram1 = 0, and ram0 = 1) section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 572 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.8 on-board programming modes when pins are set to an on-board programming mode, they enter an on-board programming status in which program, erase, and verify operations can be performed on the on-chip flash memory. there are two on-board programming modes: boot mode and user program mode. the pin settings for transition to each of these modes are shown in table 17.14. for a diagram of the transitions to the various flash memory modes, see figure 17.8. table 17.14 setting on-board programming modes mode mode name cpu operating mode fwe md 2 md 1 md 0 boot mode mode 10 advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled 1010 mode 11 advanced single-chip mode 1 user program mode * 1 mode 14 advanced expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled 1 * 2 110 mode 15 advanced single-chip mode 1 notes: 1. normally, user mode (modes 6 and 7) should be used. set fwe to 1 to make a transition to user program mode (modes 14 and 15) before performing a program/erase/verify operation. 2. refer to section 17.14, flash memory programming and erasing precautions, for information on programming and clearing fwe. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 573 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.8.1 boot mode when boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the host beforehand. the channel 1 sci to be used is set to asynchronous mode. when a reset-start is executed after the h8s/2345 mcu ? s pins have been set to boot mode, the boot program built into the mcu is started and the programming control program prepared in the host is serially transmitted to the mcu via the sci. in the mcu, the programming control program received via the sci is written into the programming control program area in on-chip ram. after the transfer is completed, control branches to the start address of the programming control program area and the programming control program execution state is entered (flash memory programming is performed). the transferred programming control program must therefore include coding that follows the programming algorithm given later. the system configuration in boot mode is shown in figure 17.15, and the boot program mode execution procedure in figure 17.16. rxd1 txd1 sci1 h8s/2345 chip flash memory write data reception verify data transmission host on-chip ram figure 17.15 system configuration in boot mode section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 574 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 note: if a memory cell does not operate normally and cannot be erased, one h'ff byte is transmitted as an erase error, and the erase operation and subsequent operations are halted. start set pins to boot mode and execute reset-start host transfers data (h'00) continuously at prescribed bit rate h8s/2345 measures low period of h'00 data transmitted by host h8s/2345 calculates bit rate and sets value in bit rate register after bit rate adjustment, h8s/2345 transmits one h'00 data byte to host to indicate end of adjustment host confirms normal reception of bit rate adjustment end indication (h'00), and transmits one h'55 data byte after receiving h'55, h8s/2345 transmits one h'aa data byte to host host transmits number of programming control program bytes (n), upper byte followed by lower byte h8s/2345 transmits received number of bytes to host as verify data (echo-back) n = 1 host transmits programming control program sequentially in byte units h8s/2345 transmits received programming control program to host as verify data (echo-back) transfer received programming control program to on-chip ram n = n? no yes end of transmission check flash memory data, and if data has already been written, erase all blocks after confirming that all flash memory data has been erased, h8s/2345 transmits one h'aa data byte to host execute programming control program transferred to on-chip ram n + 1 n figure 17.16 boot mode execution procedure section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 575 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 automatic sci bit rate adjustment start bit stop bit d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 low period (9 bits) measured (h'00 data) high period (1 or more bits) figure 17.17 measurement of low period of host transmission data when boot mode is initiated, the h8s/2345 mcu measures the low period of the asynchronous sci communication data (h'00) transmitted continuously from the host, see figure 17.17. the sci transmit/receive format should be set as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, no parity. the mcu calculates the bit rate of the transmission from the host from the measured low period, and transmits one h'00 byte to the host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. the host should confirm that this adjustment end indication (h'00) has been received normally, and transmit one h'55 byte to the mcu. if reception cannot be performed normally, initiate boot mode again (reset), and repeat the above operations. depending on the host ? s transmission bit rate and the mcu ? s system clock frequency, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the mcu. to ensure correct sci operation, the host ? s transfer bit rate should be set to (4800, or 9600) bps. table 17.15 shows typical host transfer bit rates and system clock frequencies for which automatic adjustment of the mcu ? s bit rate is possible. the boot program should be executed within this system clock range. table 17.15 system clock frequencies for which automatic adjustment of h8s/2345 bit rate is possible host bit rate system clock frequency for which automatic adjustment of h8s/2345 bit rate is possible 9600 bps 8 mhz to 20 mhz 4800 bps 4 mhz to 20 mhz on-chip ram area divisions in boot mode: in boot mode, the 2 kbytes area from h'ffec00 to h'fff3ff is reserved for use by the boot program, as shown in figure 17.18. the area to which the programming control program is transferred is h'fff400 to h'fffbff. the boot program area can be used when the programming control program transferred into ram enters the execution state. a stack area should be set up as required. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 576 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 h'ffec00 h'fff3ff h'fff400 programming control program area (2 kbytes) h'fffbff boot program area * (2 kbytes) note: * the boot program area cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution state for the programming control program transferred to ram. note that the boot program remains stored in this area after a branch is made to the programming control program. on chip ram (4 kbytes) figure 17.18 ram areas in boot mode notes on use of user mode: ? when the chip comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low-level period of the input at the sci ? s rxd1 pin. the reset should end with rxd1 high. after the reset ends, it takes approximately 100 states before the chip is ready to measure the low-level period of the rxd1 pin. ? in boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data is not 1), all flash memory blocks are erased. boot mode is for use when user program mode is unavailable, such as the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the program activated in user program mode is accidentally erased. ? interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased. ? the rxd1 and txd1 pins should be pulled up on the board. ? before branching to the programming control program (ram area h'fff400), the chip terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip sci (channel 1) (by clearing the re and te bits in scr to 0), but the adjusted bit rate value remains set in brr. the transmit data output pin, txd1, goes to the high-level output state (p31ddr = 1, p31dr = 1). section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 577 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 the contents of the cpu ? s internal general registers are undefined at this time, so these registers must be initialized immediately after branching to the programming control program. in particular, since the stack pointer (sp) is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc., a stack area must be specified for use by the programming control program. initial settings must also be made for the other on-chip registers. ? boot mode can be entered by making the settings to the fwe pin and the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) shown in table 17.14 and executing a reset-start. (see figure 17.36.) to change from boot mode to another mode (user mode, etc.), the microcomputer's internal boot mode status must first be cleared by inputting a reset using the res pin * 1 . in this case, the res pin must be kept low (t resw ) for at least 20 states. (see figure 17.38.) ? do not change the fwe pin and mode pin input levels in boot mode, and do not drive the fwe pin low while the boot program is being executed or while flash memory is being programmed or erased. * 2 ? if the fwe pin or mode pin input levels are changed (for example, from low to high) during a reset, the state of ports with multiplexed address functions and bus control output pins ( as , rd , hwr , lwr ) will change according to the change in the microcomputer ? s operating mode * 3 . therefore, care must be taken to make pin settings to prevent these pins from becoming output signal pins during a reset, or to prevent collision with signals outside the microcomputer. notes: 1. fwe pin and mode pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (t mds = 200 ns) with respect to the reset release timing, as shown in figures 17.36 to 17.38. 2. for further information on fwe application and disconnection, see section 17.14, flash memory programming and erasing precautions. 3. see appendix d, pin states. 17.8.2 user program mode when set to user program mode, the chip can program and erase its flash memory by executing a user program/erase control program. therefore, on-board reprogramming of the on-chip flash memory can be carried out by providing on-board means of fwe control and supply of programming data, and storing a program/erase control program in part of the program area as necessary. to select user program mode, select a mode that enables the on-chip flash memory (mode 6 or 7), and apply a high level to the fwe pin. in this mode, on-chip supporting modules other than flash memory operate as they normally would in modes 6 and 7, see figures 17.37 and 17.38. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 578 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 the flash memory itself cannot be read while the swe bit is set to 1 to perform programming or erasing, so the control program that performs programming and erasing should be run in on-chip ram or external memory. figure 17.19 shows the procedure for executing the program/erase control program when transferred to on-chip ram. clear fwe * (clear user program mode) fwe = high * (enter user program mode) branch to flash memory application program branch to program/erase control program in ram area execute program/erase control program (flash memory rewriting) transfer program/erase control program to ram md 2 , md 1 , md 0 = 110, 111 reset-start notes: do not apply a constant high level to the fwe pin. apply a high level to the fwe pin only when the flash memory is programmed or erased. also, while a high level is applied to the fwe pin, the watchdog timer should be activated to prevent overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway, etc. * for further information on fwe application and disconnection, see section 17.14, flash memory programming and erasing precautions. write the fwe assessment program and transfer program (and the program/ erase control program if necessary) to flash memory beforehand figure 17.19 user program mode execution procedure section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 579 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.9 programming/erasing flash memory in the on-board programming modes, flash memory programming and erasing is performed by software, using the cpu. there are four flash memory operating modes: program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. transitions to these modes can be made by setting the psu and esu bits in flmcr2, and the p, e, pv, and ev bits in flmcr1. refer to figure 17.20 regarding mode transitions using the settings of the bits in flmcr1 and flmcr2. the flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. therefore, the program that controls flash memory programming/erasing (the programming control program) should be located and executed in on-chip ram or external memory. notes: 1. operation is not guaranteed if setting/resetting of the swe, ev, pv, e, and p bits in flmcr1, and the esu and psu bits in flmcr2, is executed by a program in flash memory. 2. when programming or erasing, set fwe to 1 (programming/erasing will not be executed if fwe = 0). 3. perform programming in the erased state. do not perform additional programming on previously programmed addresses. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 580 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 notes: 1. : user mode, : on-board programming mode 2. do not make transitions by setting or clearing multiple bits simultaneously. 3. after changing from erase mode to erase setup status, do not change back to erase mode except via software overwrite enable status. 4. after changing from program mode to program setup status, do not change back to program mode except via software overwrite enable status. on-board programming mode software overwrite disabled status software overwrite enabled status erase setup status erase verify mode program setup status program verify mode erase mode program mode psu = 1 psu = 0 pv = 1 pv = 0 ev = 0 ev = 1 esu = 0 esu = 1 e = 1 e = 0 p = 1 p = 0 swe = 1 swe = 0 fwe = 0 fwe = 1 * 1 * 2 * 3 * 4 user mode figure 17.20 mode transitions using settings of bits in flmcr1 and flmcr2 17.9.1 program mode follow the procedure shown in the program/program-verify flowchart in figure 17.21 to write data or programs to flash memory. performing program operations according to this flowchart will enable data or programs to be written to flash memory without subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. programming should be carried out 32 bytes at a time. the wait times (x, y, z, ? , , , ) section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 581 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 following the elapse of (x) s or more after the swe bit is set to 1 in flmcr1, 32-byte program data is stored in the program data area and reprogram data area, and the 32-byte data in the reprogram data area written consecutively to the write addresses. the lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be h'00, h'20, h'40, h'60, h'80, h'a0, h'c0, or h'e0. thirty-two consecutive byte data transfers are performed. the program address and program data are latched in the flash memory. a 32-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in this case, h'ff data must be written to the extra addresses. next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overprogramming in the event of program runaway, etc. set a value greater than (y + z + ? ) s as the wdt overflow period. after this, preparation for program mode (program setup) is carried out by setting the psu bit in flmcr2, and after the elapse of (y) s or more, the operating mode is switched to program mode by setting the p bit in flmcr1. the time during which the p bit is set is the flash memory programming time. make a program setting so that the time for one programming operation is within the range of (z) s. 17.9.2 program-verify mode in program-verify mode, the data written in program mode is read to check whether it has been correctly written in the flash memory. after the elapse of a given programming time, the programming mode is exited (the p bit in flmcr1 is cleared to 0, then the psu bit in flmcr2 is cleared to 0 at least ( section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 582 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 set swe bit in flmcr1 wait (x) s n = 1 m = 0 write 32-byte data in ram reprogram data area consecutively to flash memory enable wdt set psu bit in flmcr2 wait (y) s set p bit in flmcr1 wait (z) s start of programming clear p bit in flmcr1 wait ( ) s wait ( ) s ng ng ng ng ok ok ok wait ( ) s wait ( ) s * 5 * 3 * 4 * 2 * 5 * 5 * 5 * 5 * 5 * 5 * 5 store 32-byte program data in program data area and reprogram data area * 4 * 1 * 3 * 5 wait ( ) s clear psu bit in flmcr2 disable wdt set pv bit in flmcr1 h'ff dummy write to verify address read verify data reprogram data computation clear pv bit in flmcr1 clear swe bit in flmcr1 m = 1 end of programming program data = verify data? end of 32-byte data verification? m = 0? increment address programming failure ok clear swe bit in flmcr1 n n? n n + 1 notes: 1. data transfer is performed by byte transfer. the lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be h'00, h'20, h'40, h'60, h'80, h'a0, h'c0, or h'e0. a 32-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in this case, h'ff data must be written to the extra addresses. 2. verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units. 3. even bits for which programming has been completed in a 32-byte programming loop will be subjected to additional programming if the subsequent verify operation fails. 4. an area for storing program data (32 bytes) and reprogram data (32 bytes) must be provided in ram. the contents of the latter are rewritten as programming progresses. 5. the values of x, y, z, , , , , , and n are shown in section 20.1.6, flash memory characteristics. start program data note: the memory erased state is 1. programming is performed on 0 reprogram data. reprogram data comments programmed bits are not reprogrammed programming incomplete; reprogram ? still in erased state; no action ram program data storage area (32 bytes) reprogram data storage area (32 bytes) transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area verify data 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 end of programming perform programming in the erased state. do not perform additional programming on previously programmed addresses. figure 17.21 program/program-verify flowchart section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 583 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.9.3 erase mode flash memory erasing should be performed block by block following the procedure shown in the erase/erase-verify flowchart (single-block erase) shown in figure 17.22. the wait times (x, y, z, ? , , , ) ? ) s as the wdt overflow period. after this, preparation for erase mode (erase setup) is carried out by setting the esu bit in flmcr2, and after the elapse of (y) s or more, the operating mode is switched to erase mode by setting the e bit in flmcr1. the time during which the e bit is set is the flash memory erase time. ensure that the erase time does not exceed (z) ms. note: with flash memory erasing, preprogramming (setting all data in the memory to be erased to 0) is not necessary before starting the erase procedure. 17.9.4 erase-verify mode in erase-verify mode, data is read after memory has been erased to check whether it has been correctly erased. after the elapse of the erase time, erase mode is exited (the e bit in flmcr1 is cleared to 0, then the esu bit in flmcr2 is cleared to 0 at least ( section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 584 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 end of erasing start set swe bit in flmcr1 set esu bit in flmcr2 set e bit in flmcr1 wait (x) s wait (y) s n = 1 set ebr1, ebr2 enable wdt * 2 * 2 * 4 wait (z) ms * 2 wait ( ) s * 2 wait ( ) s * 2 wait ( ) s set block start address to verify address * 2 wait ( ) s * 2 * 3 * 2 wait ( ) s * 2 * 2 * 5 start of erase clear e bit in flmcr1 clear esu bit in flmcr2 set ev bit in flmcr1 h'ff dummy write to verify address read verify data clear ev bit in flmcr1 wait ( ) s clear ev bit in flmcr1 clear swe bit in flmcr1 disable wdt halt erase * 1 verify data = all 1? last address of block? end of erasing of all erase blocks? erase failure clear swe bit in flmcr1 n n? ng ng ng ng ok ok ok ok n n + 1 increment address notes: 1. preprogramming (setting erase block data to all 0) is not necessary. 2. the values of x, y, z, , , , , , and n are shown in section 20.1.6, flash memory characteristics. 3. verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units. 4. set only one bit in ebr1or ebr2. more than one bit cannot be set. 5. erasing is performed in block units. to erase a number of blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially. figure 17.22 erase/erase-verify flowchart (single-block erase) section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 585 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.10 flash memory protection there are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software protection, and error protection. 17.10.1 hardware protection hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly disabled or aborted. hardware protection is reset by settings in flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (flmcr1, flmcr2) and erase block registers 1 and 2 (ebr1, ebr2). (see table 17.16.) table 17.16 hardware protection functions item description program erase verify * fwe pin protection ? when a low level is input to the fwe pin, flmcr1, flmcr2 (excluding the fler bit), ebr1, and ebr2 are initialized, and the program/erase-protected state is entered. no no no reset/standby protection ? in a reset (including a wdt overflow reset) and in standby mode, flmcr1, flmcr2, ebr1, and ebr2 are initialized, and the program/erase-protected state is entered. ? in a reset via the res pin, the reset state is not entered unless the res pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. in the case of a reset during operation, hold the res pin low for the res pulse width (t resw ) specified in the ac characteristics section. no no no note: * program verify and erase verify modes. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 586 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.10.2 software protection software protection can be implemented by setting the swe bit in flmcr1, erase block registers 1 and 2 (ebr1, ebr2), and the rams bit in ramer. when software protection is in effect, setting the p or e bit in flash memory control register 1 (flmcr1) does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. (see table 17.17.) table 17.17 software protection functions item description program erase verify * swe bit protection ? clearing the swe bit to 0 in flmcr1 sets the program/erase-protected state for all blocks. (execute in on-chip ram or external memory.) no no no block specification protection ? erase protection can be set for individual blocks by settings in erase block registers 1 and 2 (ebr1, ebr2). however, write protection is disabled. ? setting ebr1 and ebr2 to h'00 places all blocks in the erase-protected state. ? no yes emulation protection ? setting the rams bit to 1 in the ram emulation register (ramer) places all blocks in the program/erase-protected state. no no yes note: * program verify and erase verify modes. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 587 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.10.3 error protection in error protection, an error is detected when mcu runaway occurs during flash memory programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. aborting the program/erase operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing. if the mcu malfunctions during flash memory programming/erasing, the fler bit is set to 1 in flmcr2 and the error protection state is entered. the flmcr1, flmcr2, ebr1, and ebr2 settings are retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. when the fler bit is set to 1, it is not possible to re-enter the program mode or erase mode by resetting the p and e bits of flmcr1. however, setting of the pv and ev bits of flmcr1 is enabled, and a transition can be made to verify mode. fler bit setting conditions are as follows: ? when flash memory is read during programming/erasing (including a vector read or instruction fetch) ? immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing ? when a sleep instruction (including software standby) is executed during programming/erasing ? when the cpu loses the bus during programming/erasing error protection is released only by a reset and in hardware standby mode. figure 17.23 shows the flash memory state transition diagram. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 588 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 rd vf pr er fler = 0 error occurrence res = 0 or stby = 0 res = 0 or stby = 0 rd vf pr er fler = 0 normal operating mode program mode erase mode reset or hardware standby (hardware protection) rd vf pr er fler = 1 rd vf pr er fler = 1 error protection mode error protection mode (software standby) software standby mode flmcr1, flmcr2 (except fler bit), ebr1, ebr2 initialization state flmcr1, flmcr2, ebr1, ebr2 initialization state software standby mode release rd: memory read possible vf: verify-read possible pr: programming possible er: erasing possible rd : memory read not possible vf : verify-read not possible pr : programming not possible er : erasing not possible legend: res = 0 or stby = 0 error occurrence (software standby) memory read verify mode rd vf pr er fler = 0 res = 0 or stby = 0 or software standby reset release and hardware standby release and software standby release p = 1 or e = 1 p = 0 and e = 0 figure 17.23 flash memory state transitions the error protect function has no effect on illegal operations unrelated to the setting conditions for the fler bit. also, if a significant amount of time has elapsed before the transition to the protect status, there is a possibility that the data in flash memory may already have become corrupted. consequently, this function is not able to provide complete protection against corruption of the data in flash memory. for this reason, it is necessary to run program and erase algorithms correctly while flash write enable (fwe) is being applied and to monitor the internal operation of the microcomputer for abnormalities using a watchdog timer, or the like, in order to prevent illegal operations of the sort mentioned above. also, at the point when the transition is made to the protect mode, in some cases the flash memory may be in an erroneously programmed or erased status, or the programming or erasing may be incomplete due to a forced shutdown. in such a case, make sure to force a recovery section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 589 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (program rewrite) using the boot mode. note that there may still be cases in which boot mode cannot be started normally due to excessive programming or erasing of the flash memory. 17.11 flash memory emulation in ram 17.11.1 emulation in ram since programming or erasing the flash memory takes time, it may be difficult to perform tuning by overwriting parameters and other data in real time. in such cases, making a setting in the ram emulation register (ramer) enables part of ram to be overlapped onto the flash memory area so that data to be written to flash memory can be emulated in ram in real time. after the ramer setting has been made, accesses can be made from the flash memory area or the ram area overlapping flash memory. emulation can be performed in user mode and user program mode. figure 17.24 shows an example of emulation of real-time flash memory programming. start emulation program end of emulation program tuning ok? yes no set ramer write tuning data to overlap ram execute application program clear ramer write to flash memory emulation block figure 17.24 flowchart for flash memory emulation in ram section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 590 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.11.2 ram overlap an example in which flash memory block area eb1 is overlapped is shown below. h'000000 h'000400 h'000800 h'000c00 flash memory eb4 to eb9 this area can be accessed from both the ram area and flash memory area h'ffec00 h'ffefff eb3 eb2 eb1 eb0 on-chip ram figure 17.25 example of ram overlap operation example in which flash memory block area (eb1) is overlapped 1. set bits rams, ram1, and ram0 in ramer to 1, 0, 1, to overlap part of ram onto the area (eb1) for which real-time programming is required. 2. real-time programming is performed using the overlapping ram. 3. after the program data has been confirmed, the rams bit is cleared, releasing ram overlap. 4. the data written in the overlapping ram is written into the flash memory space (eb1). notes: 1. when the rams bit is set to 1, program/erase protection is enabled for all blocks regardless of the value of ram1 and ram0 (emulation protection). in this state, setting the p or e bit in flash memory control register 1 (flmcr1) will not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. when actually programming a flash memory area, the rams bit should be cleared to 0. 2. a ram area cannot be erased by execution of software in accordance with the erase algorithm while flash memory emulation in ram is being used. 3. block area eb0 includes the vector table. when performing ram emulation, the vector table is needed by the overlap ram. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 591 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.12 interrupt handling when programming/erasing flash memory all interrupts, including nmi interrupt is disabled when flash memory is being programmed or erased (when the p or e bit is set in flmcr1), and while the boot program is executing in boot mode * 1 , to give priority to the program or erase operation. there are three reasons for this: 1. interrupt during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the programming or erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation could not be assured. 2. in the interrupt exception handling sequence during programming or erasing, the vector would not be read correctly * 2 , possibly resulting in mcu runaway. 3. if interrupt occurred during boot program execution, it would not be possible to execute the normal boot mode sequence. for these reasons, in on-board programming mode alone there are conditions for disabling interrupt, as an exception to the general rule. however, this provision does not guarantee normal erasing and programming or mcu operation. all requests, including nmi interrupt, must therefore be restricted inside and outside the mcu when programming or erasing flash memory. nmi interrupt is also disabled in the error-protection state while the p or e bit remains set in flmcr1. notes: 1. interrupt requests must be disabled inside and outside the mcu until the programming control program has completed programming. 2. the vector may not be read correctly in this case for the following two reasons: if flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the p or e bit is set in flmcr1), correct read data will not be obtained (undetermined values will be returned). if the interrupt entry in the vector table has not been programmed yet, interrupt exception handling will not be executed correctly. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 592 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.13 flash memory writer mode 17.13.1 writer mode setting programs and data can be written and erased in writer mode as well as in the on-board programming modes. in writer mode, the on-chip rom can be freely programmed using a prom programmer that supports the renesas technology microcomputer device type with 128-kbyte on- chip flash memory. flash memory read mode, auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status read mode are supported with this device type. in auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status read mode, a status polling procedure is used, and in status read mode, detailed internal signals are output after execution of an auto-program or auto-erase operation. table 17.18 shows writer mode pin settings. table 17.18 writer mode pin settings pin names settings/external circuit connection mode pins: md 2 , md 1 , md 0 low-level input mode setting pins: pf 2 , pf 1 , pf 0 high-level input to pf 2 , low-level input to pf 1 and pf 0 fwe pin high-level input (in auto-program and auto-erase modes) stby pin high-level input (do not select hardware standby mode) res pin power-on reset circuit nmi pin high-level input (for power-on reset) xtal, extal pins oscillator circuit other pins requiring setting: p2 3 , p2 5 high-level input to p2 3 and p2 5 section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 593 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.13.2 socket adapters and memory map in writer mode, a socket adapter is mounted on the writer programmer to match the package concerned. socket adapters are available for each writer manufacturer supporting the renesas technology microcomputer device type with 128-kbyte on-chip flash memory. the model numbers of compatible socket adapters are listed in table 17.19. figure 17.26 shows socket adapter pin correspondences and figure 17.26 shows the memory map in writer mode. for pin names in writer mode, see section 1.3.2, pin functions in each operating mode. table 17.19 socket adapter name socket adapter name product model package name minato electronics data i/o japan hd64f2345 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) me2345esnf1h hf234bt100d3201 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100g) me2345esmf1h hf234gt100d3201 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) me2345esff1h hf234aq100d3201 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) me2345eshf1h hf234bq100d3201 h'000000 mcu mode writer mode h8s/2345 h'01ffff h'00000 h'1ffff on-chip rom area figure 17.26 memory map in writer mode section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 594 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.13.3 writer mode operation table 17.20 shows how the different operating modes are set when using writer mode, and table 17.21 lists the commands used in writer mode. details of each mode are given below. ? memory read mode memory read mode supports byte reads. ? auto-program mode auto-program mode supports programming of 128 bytes at a time. status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-programming. ? auto-erase mode auto-erase mode supports automatic erasing of the entire flash memory. status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-erasing. ? status read mode status polling is used for auto-programming and auto-erasing, and normal termination can be confirmed by reading the fo 6 signal. in status read mode, error information is output if an error occurs. table 17.20 settings for each operating mode in writer mode pin names mode fwe ce ce ce ce oe oe oe oe we we we we fo 0 to fo 7 fa 0 to fa 16 read h or l l l h data output ain * 2 output disable h or l l h h hi-z x command write h or l * 3 l h l data input ain * 2 chip disable * 1 h or l h x x hi-z x legend: h: high level l: low level x: don ? t care hi-z: high impedance notes: 1. chip disable is not a standby state; internally, it is an operation state. 2. ain indicates that there is also address input in auto-program mode. 3. for command writes when making a transition to auto-program or auto-erase mode, input a high level to the fwe pin. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 595 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 17.21 writer mode commands 1st cycle 2nd cycle command name number of cycles mode address data mode address data memory read mode 1 + n * 1 write x h'00 read ra dout auto-program mode 129 * 2 write x h'40 write wa din auto-erase mode 2 write x h'20 write x h'20 status read mode 2 write x h'71 write x h'71 legend: ra: read address wa: program address (write address) dout: read data din: program data notes: 1. in memory read mode, the number of cycles depends on the number of address write cycles (n). 2. in auto-program mode. 129 cycles are required for command writing by a simultaneous 128-byte write. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 596 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 17.22 dc characteristics in writer mode conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c item symbol min typ max unit test conditions input high-level voltage fo 7 ? fo 0 , fa 16 ? fa 0 v ih 2.2 ? v cc + 0.3 v input low-level voltage fo 7 ? fo 0 , fa 16 ? fa 0 v il 0.3 ? 0.8 v schmitt trigger input voltage oe , ce , we v t ? 1.0 ? 2.5 v v t+ 2.0 ? 3.5 v v t+ ? v t ? 0.4 ?? v output high-level voltage fo 7 ? fo 0 v oh v cc ? 0.5 ?? vi oh = ? 200 a output low-level voltage fo 7 ? fo 0 v ol ?? 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma input leak current fo 7 ? fo 0 , fa 16 ? fa 0 | i li | ?? 2a v cc current during read i cc ? 60 89 ma during programming i cc ? 70 89 ma during erasing i cc ? 70 89 ma note: refer to the maximum rating for the f-ztat version ? 20.1.1 absolute maximum ratings. ? if the maximum rating is exceeded, the lsi may be damaged permanently. 17.13.4 memory read mode ? after the end of an auto-program, auto-erase, or status read operation, the command wait state is entered. to read memory contents, a transition must be made to memory read mode by means of a command write before the read is executed. ? command writes can be performed in memory read mode, just as in the command wait state. ? once memory read mode has been entered, consecutive reads can be performed. ? after power-on, memory read mode is entered. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 597 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ac characteristics table 17.23 ac characteristics in memory read mode transition ac characteristics conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c item symbol min max unit notes command write cycle t nxtc 20 s ce hold time t ceh 0ns ce setup time t ces 0ns data hold time t dh 50 ns data setup time t ds 50 ns write pulse width t wep 70 ns we rise time t r 30 ns we fall time t f 30 ns ce address data h'00 oe we command write t wep t ceh t dh t ds t f t r t nxtc note: data is latched on the rising edge of we . t ces memory read mode address stable data figure 17.27 memory read mode transition timing waveforms section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 598 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 17.24 ac characteristics in memory read mode conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c item symbol min max unit notes access time t acc 20 s ce output delay time t ce 150 ns oe output delay time t oe 150 ns output disable delay time t df 100 ns data output hold time t oh 5ns ce address data vil vil vih oe we t acc t acc address stable address stable data data t oh t oh figure 17.28 timing waveforms for ce ce ce ce / oe oe oe oe enable state read ce address data vih oe we t ce t acc t oe t oh t oh t df t ce t acc t oe address stable address stable data data t df figure 17.29 timing waveforms for ce ce ce ce / oe oe oe oe clocked read section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 599 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 17.25 ac characteristics when entering another mode from memory read mode conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c item symbol min max unit notes command write cycle t nxtc 20 s ce hold time t ceh 0ns ce setup time t ces 0ns data hold time t dh 50 ns data setup time t ds 50 ns write pulse width t wep 70 ns we rise time t r 30 ns we fall time t f 30 ns ce address data h'xx oe we xx mode command write memory read mode t wep t ceh t dh t ds t nxtc t ces address stable data t f t r note: do not enable we and oe at the same time. figure 17.30 timing waveforms when entering another mode from memory read mode section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 600 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.13.5 auto-program mode ac characteristics: the auto-program mode supports the writing of 128 bytes simultaneously. table 17.26 ac characteristics in auto-program mode conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c item symbol min max unit notes command write cycle t nxtc 20 s ce hold time t ceh 0ns ce setup time t ces 0ns data hold time t dh 50 ns data setup time t ds 50 ns write pulse width t wep 70 ns status polling start time t wsts 1ms status polling access time t spa 150 ns address setup time t as 0ns address hold time t ah 60 ns memory write time t write 1 3000 ms we rise time t r 30 ns we fall time t f 30 ns write setup time t pns 100 ns write end setup time t pnh 100 ns section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 601 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 data ce fwe address data fo 6 fo 7 oe we t nxtc t wsts t nxtc t ces t ds t dh t wep t as t ah t ceh address stable programming wait data transfer 1 byte to 128 bytes h'40 data fo 0 to fo 5 = 0 t f t r t spa t pns t write (1 to 3000 ms) programming normal end identification signal programming operation end identification signal t pnh figure 17.31 auto-program mode timing waveforms notes on use of auto-program mode ? in auto-program mode, 128 bytes are programmed simultaneously. this should be carried out by executing 128 consecutive byte transfers. ? a 128-byte data transfer is necessary even when programming fewer than 128 bytes. in this case, h'ff data must be written to the extra addresses. ? the lower 8 bits of the transfer address must be h'00 or h'80. if a value other than an effective address is input, processing will switch to a memory write operation but a write error will be flagged. ? memory address transfer is performed in the second cycle (figure 17.31). do not perform memory address transfer after the second cycle. ? do not perform a command write during a programming operation. ? perform one auto-programming operation for a 128-byte block for each address. characteristics are not guaranteed for two or more programming operations. ? confirm normal end of auto-programming by checking fo 6 . alternatively, status read mode can also be used for this purpose (fo 7 status polling uses the auto-program operation end identification pin). ? the status polling fo 6 and fo 7 pin information is retained until the next command write. until the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling ce and oe . section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 602 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.13.6 auto-erase mode autro-erase mode supports only automatic erasure of the entire flash memory mat. ac characteristics table 17.27 ac characteristics in auto-erase mode conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c item symbol min max unit notes command write cycle t nxtc 20 s ce hold time t ceh 0ns ce setup time t ces 0ns data hold time t dh 50 ns data setup time t ds 50 ns write pulse width t wep 70 ns status polling start time t ests 1ms status polling access time t spa 150 ns memory erase time t erase 100 40000 ms we rise time t r 30 ns we fall time t f 30 ns erase setup time t ens 100 ns erase end setup time t enh 100 ns section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 603 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ce fwe address data fo 6 fo 7 oe we t ests t nxtc t nxtc t ces t ceh t dh cl in dl in t wep t ens fo 0 to fo 5 = 0 h'20 h'20 t enh erase normal end confirmation signal t f t r t ds t spa t erase (100 to 40000 ms) erase end identification signal figure 17.32 auto-erase mode timing waveforms notes on use of erase-program mode ? auto-erase mode supports only entire memory erasing. ? do not perform a command write during auto-erasing. ? confirm normal end of auto-erasing by checking fo 6 . alternatively, status read mode can also be used for this purpose (fo 7 status polling uses the auto-erase operation end identification pin). ? the status polling fo 6 and fo 7 pin information is retained until the next command write. until the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling ce and oe . 17.13.7 status read mode ? status read mode is used to identify what type of abnormal end has occurred. use this mode when an abnormal end occurs in auto-program mode or auto-erase mode. ? the return code is retained until a command write for other than status read mode is performed. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 604 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ac characteristics table 17.28 ac characteristics in status read mode conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c item symbol min max unit notes command write cycle t nxtc 20 s ce hold time t ceh 0ns ce setup time t ces 0ns data hold time t dh 50 ns data setup time t ds 50 ns write pulse width t wep 70 ns oe output delay time t oe 150 ns disable delay time t df 100 ns ce output delay time t ce 150 ns we rise time t r 30 ns we fall time t f 30 ns ce address data oe we t ces t nxtc t nxtc t df note: fo 2 and fo 3 are undefined. t ces t dh t wep t wep data t dh t oe t ce t nxtc h'71 t f t r t f t r t ceh t ds t ds h'71 t ceh figure 17.33 status read mode timing waveforms section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 605 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 17.29 status read mode return commands pin name fo 7 fo 6 fo 5 fo 4 fo 3 * fo 2 * fo 1 fo 0 attribute normal end identification command error program- ming error erase error ?? program- ming or erase count exceeded effective address error initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 indications normal end: 0 abnormal end: 1 command error: 1 otherwise: 0 program- ming error: 1 otherwise: 0 erase error: 1 otherwise: 0 ?? count exceeded: 1 otherwise: 0 effective address error: 1 otherwise: 0 note: * fo 2 and fo 3 are undefined. status read mode usage note : after the auto-program mode or auto-erase mode has completed, make sure to enter the status read mode before powering off the system. the return commands are undefined immediately after power-on or if the system has been powered off once. 17.13.8 status polling ? the fo 7 status polling flag indicates the operating status in auto-program or auto-erase mode. ? the fo 6 status polling flag indicates a normal or abnormal end in auto-program or auto-erase mode. table 17.30 status polling output truth table pin names internal operation in progress abnormal end ? normal end fo 7 0101 fo 6 0011 fo 0 to fo 5 0000 section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 606 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.13.9 writer mode transition time commands cannot be accepted during the oscillation stabilization period or the writer mode setup period. after the writer mode setup time, a transition is made to memory read mode. table 17.31 command wait state transition time specifications item symbol min max unit notes standby release (oscillation stabilization time) t osc1 10 ? ms writer mode setup time t bmv 10 ? ms v cc hold time t dwn 0 ? ms vcc res fwe memory read mode command wait state command wait state normal/ abnormal end identification auto-program mode auto-erase mode t osc1 t bmv t dwn note: except in auto-program mode and auto-erase mode, drive the fwe input pin low. don't care don't care figure 17.34 oscillation stabilization time, writer mode setup time, and power supply fall sequence section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 607 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.13.10 notes on memory programming ? when programming addresses which have previously been programmed, carry out auto- erasing before auto-programming. (see figure 17.35.) ? when performing programming using writer mode on a chip that has been programmed/erased in an on-board programming mode, auto-erasing is recommended before carrying out auto- programming. notes: 1. the flash memory is initially in the erased state when the device is shipped by renesas technology. for other chips for which the erasure history is unknown, it is recommended that auto-erasing be executed to check and supplement the initialization (erase) level. 2. auto-programming in the writer mode should be performed only once for each 128- byte write unit block. it is not possible to write additional data to a 128-byte write unit block that has already been programmed. to reprogram a block, first use the auto-erase mode and then use the auto-program mode. reprogramming an address that has already been programmed auto-erase (all of flash memory) auto-program end figure 17.35 reprogramming an address that has already been programmed section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 608 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.14 flash memory programming and erasing precautions precautions concerning the use of on-board programming mode, the ram emulation function, and writer mode are summarized below. use the specified voltages and timing for programming and erasing: applied voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. use a prom programmer that supports renesas technology microcomputer device types with 128-kbyte on-chip flash memory. do not select the hn28f101 setting for the prom programmer, and only use the specified socket adapter. incorrect use will result in damaging the device. powering on and off (see figures 17.36 to 17.38): do not apply a high level to the fwe pin until v cc has stabilized. also, drive the fwe pin low before turning off v cc . when applying or disconnecting v cc , fix the fwe pin low and place the flash memory in the hardware protection state. the power-on and power-off timing requirements should also be satisfied in the event of a power failure and subsequent recovery. if these timing requirements are not satisfied, the microcomputer experience program runaway, possibly resulting in excessive programming and erasing that could cause the memory cell to no longer operate properly. fwe pin application/disconnection (see figures 17.36 to 17.38): fwe pin application should be carried out when mcu operation is in a stable condition. if mcu operation is not stable, fix the fwe pin low and set the protection state. the following points must be observed concerning fwe pin application and disconnection to prevent unintentional programming or erasing of flash memory: ? apply the fwe pin when the v cc voltage has stabilized within its rated voltage range. apply the fwe pin when oscillation has stabilized (after the oscillation settling time t osc1 has elapsed). ? in boot mode, apply and disconnect the fwe pin during a reset. ? in user program mode, the fwe pin can be switched between high and low level regardless of the reset state. fwe pin input can also be switched during program execution in flash memory. ? do not apply the fwe pin if program runaway has occurred. ? disconnect the fwe pin only when the swe, esu, psu, ev, pv, p, and e bits in flmcr1 and flmcr2 are cleared. ? make sure that the swe, esu, psu, ev, pv, p, and e bits are not set by mistake when applying or disconnecting the fwe pin. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 609 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 do not apply a constant high level to the fwe pin: the only time a high level should be applied to the fwe pin in order to prevent erroneous programming or erasing due to program runaway is when programming or erasing flash memory (including when ram is being used to emulate flash memory). a system configuration in which a high level is constantly applied to the fwe should be avoided. also, while a high level is applied to the fwe pin, the watchdog timer should be activated to prevent overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway, etc. use the recommended algorithm when programming and erasing flash memory: the recommended algorithm enables programming and erasing to be carried out without subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. when setting the p or e bit in flmcr1, the watchdog timer should be set beforehand as a precaution against program runaway, etc. do not set or clear the swe bit during program execution in flash memory: clear the swe bit before executing a program or reading data in flash memory. when the swe bit is set, data in flash memory can be rewritten, but flash memory should only be accessed for verify operations (verification during programming/erasing). similarly, when using the ram emulation function while a high level is being input to the fwe pin, the swe bit must be cleared before executing a program or reading data in flash memory. however, the ram area overlapping flash memory space can be read and written to regardless of whether the swe bit is set or cleared. do not use interrupts while flash memory is being programmed or erased: all interrupt requests, including nmi, should be disabled during fwe application to give priority to program/erase operations (including when ram is being used to emulate flash memory). also, it is necessary to prohibit release of the bus. do not perform additional programming. erase the memory before reprogramming: in on- board programming, perform only one programming operation on a 32-byte programming unit block. in writer mode, too, perform only one programming operation on a 128-byte programming unit block. programming should be carried out with the entire programming unit block erased. before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the prom programmer: overcurrent damage to the device can result if the index marks on the prom programmer socket, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned. do not touch the socket adapter or chip during programming: touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 610 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 flash memory access disabled period (x: wait time after swe setting) * 2 flash memory reprogrammable period (flash memory program execution and data read, other than verify, are disabled.) notes: 1. always fix the level by pulling down or pulling up the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) until powering off, except for mode switching. 2. see section 20.1.6, flash memory characteristics. 3. mode programming setup time t mds (min) = 200 ns . v cc fwe t osc1 min 0 s min 0 s t mds * 3 t mds * 3 md 2 to md 0 * 1 res swe bit swe clear programming and erase possible wait time: x swe set figure 17.36 powering on/off timing (boot mode) section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 611 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 flash memory access disabled period (x: wait time after swe setting) * 2 flash memory reprogrammable period (flash memory program execution and data read, other than verify, are disabled.) notes: 1. always fix the level by pulling down or pulling up the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) up to powering off, except for mode switching. 2. see section 20.1.6, flash memory characteristics. 3. mode programming setup time t mds (min) = 200 ns. v cc fwe t osc1 min 0 s md 2 to md 0 * 1 res swe bit programming and erase possible swe set swe clear user program mode user mode wait time: x t mds * 3 figure 17.37 powering on/off timing (user program mode) section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 612 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 flash memory access disabled period (x: wait time after swe setting) * 3 flash memory reprogammable period (flash memory program execution and data read, other than verify, are disabled.) notes: 1. in transition to the boot mode and transition from the boot mode to another mode, mode switching via res input is necessary. during this switching period (period during which a low level is input to the res pin), the state of the address dual port and bus control output signals ( as , rd , hur , lwr ) changes. therefore, do not use these pins as output signals during this switching period. 2. when making a transition from the boot mode to another mode, the mode programming setup time t mds ( min) = 200 ns relative to the res clear timing is necessary. 3. see section 20.1.6, flash memory characteristics. v cc fwe t osc1 min 0 s t mds t mds t mds t resw md 2 to md 0 res swe bit mode switching * 1 mode switching * 1 boot mode user mode user mode user program mode user program mode swe set swe clear programming and erase possible wait time: x programming and erase possible programming and erase possible wait time: x programming and erase possible wait time: x wait time: x * 2 figure 17.38 mode transition timing (example: boot mode user mode ? ? ? ? user program mode section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 613 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 17.15 notes when converting the f?ztat application software to the mask-rom versions please note the following when converting the f-ztat application software to the mask-rom versions. the values read from the internal registers for the flash rom of the mask-rom version and f ? ztat version differ as follows. status register bit f?ztat version mask-rom version flmcr1 fwe 0: application software running 1: programming 0: is not read out 1: application software running note: this difference applies to all the f-ztat versions and all the mask-rom versions that have different rom size. section 17 rom rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 614 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 18 clock pulse generator rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 615 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 18 clock pulse generator 18.1 overview the h8s/2345 group has a built-in clock pulse generator (cpg) that generates the system clock ( ), the bus master clock, and internal clocks. the clock pulse generator consists of an oscillator circuit, a duty adjustment circuit, a medium- speed clock divider, and a bus master clock selection circuit. 18.1.1 block diagram figure 18.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator. extal xtal duty adjustment circuit oscillator medium- speed divider system clock to pin internal clock to supporting modules bus master cloc k to cpu and dtc /2 to /32 sck2 to sck0 sckcr bus master clock selection circuit figure 18.1 block diagram of clock pulse generator section 18 clock pulse generator rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 616 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 18.1.2 register configuration the clock pulse generator is controlled by sckcr. table 18.1 shows the register configuration. table 18.1 clock pulse generator register name abbreviation r/w initial value address * system clock control register sckcr r/w h'00 h'ff3a note: * lower 16 bits of the address. 18.2 register descriptions 18.2.1 system clock control register (sckcr) 7 pstop 0 r/w 6 ? 0 r/w 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 ? 0 ? 0 sck0 0 r/w 2 sck2 0 r/w 1 sck1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : sckcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs clock output control and medium- speed mode control. sckcr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 7? clock output disable (pstop): controls output. description bit 7 pstop normal operation sleep mode software standby mode hardware standby mode 0 output (initial value) output fixed high high impedance 1 fixed high fixed high fixed high high impedance bit 6?reserved: this bit can be read or written to, but only 0 should be written. bits 5 to 3?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. section 18 clock pulse generator rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 617 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bits 2 to 0?system clock select 2 to 0 (sck2 to sck0): these bits select the clock for the bus master. bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 sck2 sck1 sck0 description 0 0 0 bus master is in high-speed mode (initial value ) 1 medium-speed clock is /2 1 0 medium-speed clock is /4 1 medium-speed clock is /8 1 0 0 medium-speed clock is /16 1 medium-speed clock is /32 1?? 18.3 oscillator clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock. 18.3.1 connecting a crystal resonator circuit configuration: a crystal resonator can be connected as shown in the example in figure 18.2. select the damping resistance r d according to table 18.2. an at-cut parallel-resonance crystal should be used. extal xtal r d c l2 c l1 c l1 = c l2 = 10 to 22pf figure 18.2 connection of crystal resonator (example) table 18.2 damping resistance value frequency (mhz)24810121620 r d ( ? ) 1k 500 200 100 0 0 0 section 18 clock pulse generator rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 618 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 crystal resonator: figure 18.3 shows the equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. use a crystal resonator that has the characteristics shown in table 18.3 and the same resonance frequency as the system clock ( ). xtal c l at-cut parallel-resonance type extal c 0 lr s figure 18.3 crystal resonator equivalent circuit table 18.3 crystal resonator parameters frequency (mhz) 2 4 8 10 12 16 20 r s max ( ? ) 500 120 80 60 60 50 40 c 0 max (pf) 7777777 note on board design: when a crystal resonator is connected, the following points should be noted: other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation. see figure 18.4. when designing the board, place the crystal resonator and its load capacitors as close as possible to the xtal and extal pins. c l2 signal a signal b c l1 h8s/2345 xtal extal avoid figure 18.4 example of incorrect board design section 18 clock pulse generator rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 619 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 18.3.2 external clock input circuit configuration: an external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure 18.5. if the xtal pin is left open, make sure that stray capacitance is no more than 10 pf. in example (b), make sure that the external clock is held high in standby mode. extal xtal external clock input open (a) xtal pin left open extal xtal external clock input (b) complementary clock input at xtal pin figure 18.5 external clock input (examples) section 18 clock pulse generator rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 620 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 external clock: the external clock signal should have the same frequency as the system clock ( ). table 18.4 and figure 18.6 show the input conditions for the external clock. table 18.4 external clock input conditions v cc = 2.7 v * to 5.5 v v cc = 5.0 v 10% item symbol min max min max unit test conditions external clock input low pulse width t exl 40 ? 20 ? ns figure 18.6 external clock input high pulse width t exh 40 ? 20 ? ns external clock rise time t exr ? 10 ? 5ns external clock fall time t exf ? 10 ? 5ns clock low pulse width t cl 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 t cyc 5 mhz figure 20.4 level 80 ? 80 ? ns < 5 mhz clock high pulse width t ch 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 t cyc 5 mhz level 80 ? 80 ? ns < 5 mhz note: * ztat, mask rom, and romless versions only. t exh t exl t exr t exf v cc 0.5 extal figure 18.6 external clock input timing section 18 clock pulse generator rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 621 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 18.4 duty adjustment circuit when the oscillator frequency is 5 mhz or higher, the duty adjustment circuit adjusts the duty cycle of the clock signal from the oscillator to generate the system clock ( ). 18.5 medium-speed clock divider the medium-speed clock divider divides the system clock to generate /2, /4, /8, /16, and /32. 18.6 bus master clock selection circuit the bus master clock selection circuit selects the system clock ( ) or one of the medium-speed clocks ( /2, /4, or /8, /16, and /32) to be supplied to the bus master, according to the settings of the sck2 to sck0 bits in sckcr. section 18 clock pulse generator rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 622 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 623 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 19 power-down modes 19.1 overview in addition to the normal program execution state, the h8s/2345 group has five power-down modes in which operation of the cpu and oscillator is halted and power dissipation is reduced. low-power operation can be achieved by individually controlling the cpu, on-chip supporting modules, and so on. the h8s/2345 group operating modes are as follows: (1) high-speed mode (2) medium-speed mode (3) sleep mode (4) module stop mode (5) software standby mode (6) hardware standby mode of these, (2) to (6) are power-down modes. sleep mode is a cpu mode, medium-speed mode is a cpu and bus master mode, and module stop mode is an on-chip supporting module mode (including bus masters other than the cpu). a combination of these modes can be set. after a reset, the h8s/2345 group is in high-speed mode. table 19.1 shows the conditions for transition to the various modes, the status of the cpu, on-chip supporting modules, etc., and the method of clearing each mode. section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 624 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 19.1 operating modes cpu modules operating mode transition condition clearing condition oscillator registers registers i/o ports high speed mode control register functions high speed functions high speed functions high speed medium- speed mode control register functions medium speed functions high/ medium speed * 1 functions high speed sleep mode instruction interrupt functions halted retained high speed functions high speed module stop mode control register functions high/ medium speed functions halted retained/ reset * 2 retained software standby mode instruction external interrupt halted halted retained halted retained/ reset * 2 retained hardware standby mode pin halted halted undefined halted reset high impedance notes: 1. the bus master operates on the medium-speed clock, and other on-chip supporting modules on the high-speed clock. 2. the sci and a/d converter are reset, and other on-chip supporting modules retain their state. 19.1.1 register configuration power-down modes are controlled by the sbycr, sckcr, and mstpcr registers. table 19.2 summarizes these registers. table 19.2 power-down mode registers name abbreviation r/w initial value address * standby control register sbycr r/w h'08 h'ff38 system clock control register sckcr r/w h'00 h'ff3a module stop control register h mstpcrh r/w h'3f h'ff3c module stop control register l mstpcrl r/w h'ff h'ff3d note: * lower 16 bits of the address. section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 625 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 19.2 register descriptions 19.2.1 standby control register (sbycr) 7 ssby 0 r/w 6 sts2 0 r/w 5 sts1 0 r/w 4 sts0 0 r/w 3 ope 1 r/w 0 ? 0 r/w 2 ? 0 ? 1 ? 0 ? bit initial value r/w : : : sbycr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs software standby mode control. sbycr is initialized to h'08 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 7?software standby (ssby): specifies a transition to software standby mode. remains set to 1 when software standby mode is released by an external interrupt, and a transition is made to normal operation. the ssby bit should be cleared by writing 0 to it. bit 7 ssby description 0 transition to sleep mode after execution of sleep instruction (initial value ) 1 transition to software standby mode after execution of sleep instruction bits 6 to 4?standby timer select 2 to 0 (sts2 to sts0): these bits select the time the mcu waits for the clock to stabilize when software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt. with crystal oscillation, refer to table 19.4 and make a selection according to the operating frequency so that the standby time is at least 8 ms (the oscillation stabilization time). with an external clock, any selection * can be made. note: * the 16-state standby time cannot be used in the f-ztat version; a standby time of 8192 states or longer should be used. section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 626 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 sts2 sts1 sts0 description 0 0 0 standby time = 8192 states (initial value ) 1 standby time = 16384 states 1 0 standby time = 32768 states 1 standby time = 65536 states 1 0 0 standby time = 131072 states 1 standby time = 262144 states 10reserved 1 standby time = 16 states * note: * not used on the f-ztat version. bit 3?output port enable (ope): specifies whether the output of the address bus and bus control signals ( cs0 to cs3 , as , rd , hwr , lwr ) is retained or set to the high-impedance state in software standby mode. bit 3 ope description 0 in software standby mode, address bus and bus control signals are high-impedance 1 in software standby mode, address bus and bus control signals retain output state (initial value ) bits 2 and 1?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. bit 0?reserved: this bit can be read or written to, but only 0 should be written. section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 627 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 19.2.2 system clock control register (sckcr) 7 pstop 0 r/w 6 ? 0 r/w 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 ? 0 ? 0 sck0 0 r/w 2 sck2 0 r/w 1 sck1 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : sckcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs clock output control and medium- speed mode control. sckcr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 7? clock output disable (pstop): controls output. description bit 7 pstop normal operating mode sleep mode software standby mode hardware standby mode 0 output (initial value) output fixed high high impedance 1 fixed high fixed high fixed high high impedance bits 6?reserved: this bit can be read or written to, but only 0 should be written. bits 5 to 3?reserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. bits 2 to 0?system clock select (sck2 to sck0): these bits select the clock for the bus master. bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 sck2 sck1 sck0 description 0 0 0 bus master in high-speed mode (initial value ) 1 medium-speed clock is /2 1 0 medium-speed clock is /4 1 medium-speed clock is /8 1 0 0 medium-speed clock is /16 1 medium-speed clock is /32 1 ?? section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 628 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 19.2.3 module stop control register (mstpcr) 15 0 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : 14 0 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w mstpcrh mstpcrl mstpcr is a 16-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control. mstpcr is initialized to h'3fff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 15 to 0?module stop (mstp 15 to mstp 0): these bits specify module stop mode. see table 19.3 for the method of selecting on-chip supporting modules. bits 15 to 0 mstp15 to mstp0 description 0 module stop mode cleared 1 module stop mode set 19.3 medium-speed mode when the sck2 to sck0 bits in sckcr are set to 1, the operating mode changes to medium- speed mode as soon as the current bus cycle ends. in medium-speed mode, the cpu operates on the operating clock ( /2, /4, /8, /16, or /32) specified by the sck2 to sck0 bits. the bus masters other than the cpu (the dtc) also operate in medium-speed mode. on-chip supporting modules other than the bus masters always operate on the high-speed clock ( ). in medium-speed mode, a bus access is executed in the specified number of states with respect to the bus master operating clock. for example, if /4 is selected as the operating clock, on-chip memory is accessed in 4 states, and internal i/o registers in 8 states. medium-speed mode is cleared by clearing all of bits sck2 to sck0 to 0. a transition is made to high-speed mode and medium-speed mode is cleared at the end of the current bus cycle. if a sleep instruction is executed when the ssby bit in sbycr is cleared to 0, a transition is made to sleep mode. when sleep mode is cleared by an interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored. section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 629 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 if a sleep instruction is executed when the ssby bit in sbycr is set to 1, a transition is made to software standby mode. when software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored. when the res pin is driven low, a transition is made to the reset state, and medium-speed mode is cleared. the same applies in the case of a reset caused by overflow of the watchdog timer. when the stby pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. figure 19.1 shows the timing for transition to and clearance of medium-speed mode. , bus master clock supporting module clock internal address bus internal write signal medium-speed mode sckcr sckcr figure 19.1 medium-speed mode transition and clearance timing 19.4 sleep mode if a sleep instruction is executed when the ssby bit in sbycr is cleared to 0, the cpu enters sleep mode. in sleep mode, cpu operation stops but the contents of the cpu?s internal registers are retained. other supporting modules do not stop. sleep mode is cleared by a reset or any interrupt, and the cpu returns to the normal program execution state via the exception handling state. sleep mode is not cleared if interrupts are disabled, or if interrupts other than nmi are masked by the cpu. when the stby pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 630 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 19.5 module stop mode 19.5.1 module stop mode module stop mode can be set for individual on-chip supporting modules. when the corresponding mstp bit in mstpcr is set to 1, module operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. the cpu continues operating independently. table 19.3 shows mstp bits and the corresponding on-chip supporting modules. when the corresponding mstp bit is cleared to 0, module stop mode is cleared and the module starts operating at the end of the bus cycle. in module stop mode, the internal states of modules other than the sci and a/d converter are retained. after reset clearance, all modules other than dtc are in module stop mode. when an on-chip supporting module is in module stop mode, read/write access to its registers is disabled. if a transition is made to sleep mode when all modules are stopped (mstpcr = h'ffff), or modules other than the 8-bit timers are stopped (mstpcr = h'efff), operation of the bus controller and i/o ports is also halted, enabling current dissipation to be further reduced. section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 631 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 19.3 mstp bits and corresponding on-chip supporting modules register bit module mstpcrh mstp15 ? mstp14 data transfer controller (dtc) mstp13 16-bit timer pulse unit (tpu) mstp12 8-bit timer mstp11 ? mstp10 d/a converter mstp9 a/d converter mstp8 ? mstpcrl mstp7 ? mstp6 serial communication interface (sci) channel 1 mstp5 serial communication interface (sci) channel 0 mstp4 ? mstp3 ? mstp2 ? mstp1 ? mstp0 ? note: bits 15, 11, 8, 7, and 4 to 0 can be read or written to, but do not affect operation. 19.5.2 usage notes dtc module stop: depending on the operating status of the dtc, the mstp14 bit may not be set to 1. setting of the dtc module stop mode should be carried out only when the respective module is not activated. for details, refer to section 7, data transfer controller. on-chip supporting module interrupt: relevant interrupt operations cannot be performed in module stop mode. consequently, if module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the cpu interrupt source or the dtc activation source. interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode. writing to mstpcr: mstpcr should only be written to by the cpu. section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 632 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 19.6 software standby mode 19.6.1 software standby mode if a sleep instruction is executed when the ssby bit in sbycr is set to 1, software standby mode is entered. in this mode, the cpu, on-chip supporting modules, and oscillator all stop. however, the contents of the cpu?s internal registers, ram data, and the states of on-chip supporting modules other than the sci and a/d converter, and i/o ports, are retained. whether the address bus and bus control signals are placed in the high-impedance state or retain the output state can be specified by the ope bit in sbycr. in this mode the oscillator stops, and therefore power dissipation is significantly reduced. 19.6.2 clearing software standby mode software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt (nmi pin, or pins irq0 to irq2 ), or by means of the res pin or stby pin. ? clearing with an interrupt when an nmi or irq0 to irq2 interrupt request signal is input, clock oscillation starts, and after the elapse of the time set in bits sts2 to sts0 in syscr, stable clocks are supplied to the entire h8s/2345 group chip, software standby mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling is started. when clearing software standby mode with an irq0 to irq2 interrupt, set the corresponding enable bit to 1 and ensure that no interrupt with a higher priority than interrupts irq0 to irq2 is generated. software standby mode cannot be cleared if the interrupt has been masked on the cpu side or has been designated as a dtc activation source. ? clearing with the res pin when the res pin is driven low, clock oscillation is started. at the same time as clock oscillation starts, clocks are supplied to the entire h8s/2345 group chip. note that the res pin must be held low until clock oscillation stabilizes. when the res pin goes high, the cpu begins reset exception handling. ? clearing with the stby pin when the stby pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 633 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 19.6.3 setting oscillation stabilization time after clearing software standby mode bits sts2 to sts0 in sbycr should be set as described below. using a crystal oscillator: set bits sts2 to sts0 so that the standby time is at least 8 ms (the oscillation stabilization time). table 19.4 shows the standby times for different operating frequencies and settings of bits sts2 to sts0. table 19.4 oscillation stabilization time settings sts2 sts1 sts0 standby time 20 mhz 16 mhz 12 mhz 10 mhz 8 mhz 6 mhz 4 mhz 2 mhz unit 0 0 0 8192 states 0.41 0.51 0.68 0.8 1.0 1.3 2.0 4.1 ms 1 16384 states 0.82 1.0 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.7 4.1 8.2 1 0 32768 states 1.6 2.0 2.7 3.3 4.1 5.5 8.2 16.4 1 65536 states 3.3 4.1 5.5 6.6 8.2 10.9 16.4 32.8 1 0 0 131072 states 6.6 8.2 10.9 13.1 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 1 262144 states 13.1 16.4 21.8 26.2 32.8 43.6 65.6 131.2 1 0 reserved ???????? ? 1 16 states 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.7 4.0 8.0 s : recommended time setting using an external clock: any value can be set. normally, use of the minimum time is recommended. * note: * the 16-state standby time cannot be used in the f-ztat version; a standby time of 8192 states or longer should be used. 19.6.4 software standby mode application example figure 19.2 shows an example in which a transition is made to software standby mode at the falling edge on the nmi pin, and software standby mode is cleared at the rising edge on the nmi pin. in this example, an nmi interrupt is accepted with the nmieg bit in syscr cleared to 0 (falling edge specification), then the nmieg bit is set to 1 (rising edge specification), the ssby bit is set to 1, and a sleep instruction is executed, causing a transition to software standby mode. software standby mode is then cleared at the rising edge on the nmi pin. section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 634 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 oscillator nmi nmieg ssby nmi exception handling nmieg=1 ssby=1 sleep instruction software standby mode (power-down mode) oscillation stabilization time t osc2 nmi exception handling figure 19.2 software standby mode application example 19.6.5 usage notes i/o port status: in software standby mode, i/o port states are retained. if the ope bit is set to 1, the address bus and bus control signal output is also retained. therefore, there is no reduction in current dissipation for the output current when a high-level signal is output. current dissipation during oscillation stabilization wait period: current dissipation increases during the oscillation stabilization wait period. section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 635 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 19.7 hardware standby mode 19.7.1 hardware standby mode when the stby pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode from any mode. in hardware standby mode, all functions enter the reset state and stop operation, resulting in a significant reduction in power dissipation. as long as the prescribed voltage is supplied, on-chip ram data is retained. i/o ports are set to the high-impedance state. in order to retain on-chip ram data, the rame bit in syscr should be cleared to 0 before driving the stby pin low. do not change the state of the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) while the h8s/2345 group is in hardware standby mode. hardware standby mode is cleared by means of the stby pin and the res pin. when the stby pin is driven high while the res pin is low, the reset state is set and clock oscillation is started. ensure that the res pin is held low until the clock oscillator stabilizes (at least 8 ms?the oscillation stabilization time?when using a crystal oscillator). when the res pin is subsequently driven high, a transition is made to the program execution state via the reset exception handling state. 19.7.2 hardware standby mode timing figure 19.3 shows an example of hardware standby mode timing. when the stby pin is driven low after the res pin has been driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. hardware standby mode is cleared by driving the stby pin high, waiting for the oscillation stabilization time, then changing the res pin from low to high. section 19 power-down modes rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 636 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 oscillator res stby oscillation stabilization time reset exception handling figure 19.3 hardware standby mode timing (example) 19.8 clock output disabling function output of the clock can be controlled by means of the pstop bit in sckcr, and ddr for the corresponding port. when the pstop bit is set to 1, the clock stops at the end of the bus cycle, and output goes high. clock output is enabled when the pstop bit is cleared to 0. when ddr for the corresponding port is cleared to 0, clock output is disabled and input port mode is set. table 19.5 shows the state of the pin in each processing state. table 19.5 pin state in each processing state ddr 0 1 pstop ? 01 hardware standby mode high impedance software standby mode high impedance fixed high sleep mode high impedance output fixed high normal operating state high impedance output fixed high section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 637 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 section 20 electrical characteristics 20.1 electrical characteristics of f-ztat version 20.1.1 absolute maximum ratings table 20.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings. table 20.1 absolute maximum ratings item symbol value unit power supply voltage v cc ?0.3 to +7.0 v input voltage (fwe) * 1 v in ?0.3 to v cc +0.3 v input voltage (except port 4) v in ?0.3 to v cc +0.3 v input voltage (port 4) v in ?0.3 to av cc +0.3 v reference voltage v ref ?0.3 to av cc +0.3 v analog power supply voltage av cc ?0.3 to +7.0 v analog input voltage v an ?0.3 to av cc +0.3 v operating temperature t opr regular specifications: ?20 to +75 * 2 c wide-range specifications: ?40 to +85 * 2 c storage temperature t stg ?55 to +125 c caution: permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum rating are exceeded. notes: 1. never apply 12 v to any of the pins. doing so could permanently damage the lsi. 2. the operating temperature range for flash memory programming/erase operations is t a = 0 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = 0 to +85c (wide-range specifications). section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 638 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 20.1.2 dc characteristics table 20.2 lists the dc characteristics. table 20.3 lists the permissible output currents. table 20.2 dc characteristics conditions: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v * 1 , t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions v t ? 1.0 ? ? v v t + ??v cc 0.7 v schmitt trigger input voltage port 2, irq0 to irq7 v t + ? v t ? 0.4 ? ? v input high voltage res , stby , nmi, md 2 to md 0 , fwe v ih v cc ? 0.7 ? v cc + 0.3 v extal v cc 0.7 ? v cc + 0.3 v ports 1, 3, a to g 2.0 ? v cc + 0.3 v port 4 2.0 ? av cc + 0.3 v input low voltage res , stby , md 2 to md 0 , fwe v il ?0.3 ? 0.5 v nmi, extal, ports 1, 3, 4, a to g ?0.3 ? 0.8 v all output pins v oh v cc ? 0.5 ? ? v i oh = ?200 a output high voltage 3.5 ? ? v i oh = ?1 ma all output pins v ol ??0.4vi ol = 1.6 ma output low voltage ports 1, a to c ? ? 1.0 v i ol = 10 ma res | i in | ? ? 10.0 a input leakage current stby , nmi, md 2 to md 0 , fwe ??1.0a v in = 0.5 to v cc ? 0.5 v port 4 ? ? 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to av cc ? 0.5 v three-state leakage current (off state) ports 1 to 3, a to g ? i tsi ? ??1.0av in = 0.5 to v cc ? 0.5 v section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 639 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 item symbol min typ max unit test conditions mos input pull-up current port a to e ?i p 50 ? 300 a v in = 0 v res c in ? ? 80 pf nmi ? ? 50 pf input capacitance all input pins except res and nmi ? ? 15 pf v in = 0 v f = 1 mhz t a = 25c current dissipation * 2 normal operation i cc * 4 ?60 (5.0 v) 89 ma f = 20 mhz sleep mode ? 40 (5.0 v) 73 ma f = 20 mhz ? 0.01 5.0 a t a 50c standby mode * 3 ? ? 20 50c < t a during flash memory programming/ erase ?70 (5.0 v) 89 ma 0c t a 75c f = 20 mhz during a/d and d/a conversion al cc ?0.8 (5.0 v) 2.0 ma analog power supply current idle ? 0.01 5.0 a reference current during a/d and d/a conversion al cc ?1.9 (5.0 v) 3.0 ma v ref = 5.0 v idle ? 0.01 5.0 a ram standby voltage v ram 2.0 ? ? v notes: 1. if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . 2. current dissipation values are for v ih min = v cc ?0.5 v and v il max = 0.5v with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state. 3. the values are for v ram v cc < 4.5v, v ih min = v cc 0.9, and v il max = 0.3 v. 4. i cc depends on v cc and f as follows: i cc max = 1.0 (ma) + 0.80 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f [normal mode] i cc max = 1.0 (ma) + 0.65 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f [sleep mode] section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 640 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 20.3 permissible output currents conditions: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit ports 1, a to c i ol ??10ma permissible output low current (per pin) other output pins ? ? 2.0 ma permissible output low current (total) total of 28 pins including ports 1 and a to c i ol ??80ma total of all output pins, including the above ? ? 120 ma permissible output high current (per pin) all output pins ?i oh ??2.0ma permissible output high current (total) total of all output pins ?i oh ??40ma notes: 1. to protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 20.3. 2. when driving a darlington pair or led directly, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as show in figures 20.1 and 20.2. 2 k ? h8s/2345 group port darlington pair figure 20.1 darlington pair drive circuit (example) section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 641 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 600 ? h8s/2345 group ports 1, a to c led figure 20.2 led drive circuit (example) 20.1.3 ac characteristics figure 20.3 show, the test conditions for the ac characteristics. c lsi output pin r h r l c = 90 pf: ports 1, a to f c = 30 pf: ports 2, 3, g r l = 2.4 k ? r h = 12 k ? i/o timing test levels low level: 0.8 v high level: 2.0 v 5 v figure 20.3 output load circuit section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 642 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 clock timing: table 20.4 lists the clock timing table 20.4 clock timing conditions: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 20 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) item symbol min max unit test conditions clock cycle time t cyc 50 500 ns clock high pulse width t ch 20 ? ns figure 20.7 clock low pulse width t cl 20 ? ns clock rise time t cr ? 5ns clock fall time t cf ? 5ns clock oscillator setting time at reset (crystal) t osc1 10 ? ms figure 20.8 clock oscillator setting time in software standby (crystal) t osc2 8 ? ms figure 19.2 external clock output stabilization delay time t dext 500 ? s figure 20.8 section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 643 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 control signal timing: table 20.5 lists the control signal timing. table 20.5 control signal timing conditions: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 20 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) item symbol min max unit test conditions res setup time t ress 200 ? ns figure 20.9 res pulse width t resw 20 ? t cyc nmi reset setup time t nmirs 200 ? ns nmi reset hold time t nmirh 200 ? ns mode programming setup time t mds 200 ? ns nmi setup time t nmis 150 ? ns figure 20.10 nmi hold time t nmih 10 ? ns nmi pulse width (exiting software standby mode) t nmiw 200 ? ns irq setup time t irqs 150 ? ns irq hold time t irqh 10 ? ns irq pulse width (exiting software standby mode) t irqw 200 ? ns section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 644 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bus timing: table 20.6 lists the bus timing. table 20.6 bus timing conditions: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 20 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) item symbol min max unit test conditions address delay time t ad ? 20 ns address setup time t as 0.5 t cyc ? 15 ? ns figure 20.11 to figure 20.15 address hold time t ah 0.5 t cyc ? 10 ? ns cs delay time 1 t csd1 ? 20 ns as delay time t asd ? 20 ns rd delay time 1 t rsd1 ? 20 ns rd delay time 2 t rsd2 ? 20 ns cas delay time t casd ? 20 ns read data setup time t rds 15 ? ns read data hold time t rdh 0 ? ns read data access time 1 t acc1 ? 1.0 t cyc ? 25 ns read data access time 2 t acc2 ? 1.5 t cyc ? 25 ns read data access time 3 t acc3 ? 2.0 t cyc ? 25 ns read data access time 4 t acc4 ? 2.5 t cyc ? 25 ns read data access time 5 t acc5 ? 3.0 t cyc ? 25 ns wr delay time 1 t wrd1 ? 20 ns wr delay time 2 t wrd2 ? 20 ns wr pulse width 1 t wsw1 1.0 t cyc ? 20 ? ns wr pulse width 2 t wsw2 1.5 t cyc ? 20 ? ns write data delay time t wdd ? 30 ns write data setup time t wds 0.5 t cyc ? 20 ? ns write data hold time t wdh 0.5 t cyc ? 10 ? ns wait setup time t wts 30 ? ns figure 20.13 wait hold time t wth 5 ? ns breq setup time t brqs 30 ? ns figure 20.16 back delay time t bacd ? 15 ns bus-floating time t bzd ? 50 ns section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 645 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 timing of on-chip supporting modules: table 20.7 lists the timing of on-chip supporting modules. table 20.7 timing of on-chip supporting modules conditions: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 20 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) item symbol min max unit test conditions i/o port output data delay time t pwd ? 50 ns figure 20.17 input data setup time t prs 30 ? input data hold time t prh 30 ? tpu timer output delay time t tocd ? 50 ns figure 20.18 timer input setup time t tics 30 ? timer clock input setup time t tcks 30 ? ns figure 20.19 single edge t tckwh 1.5 ? t cyc timer clock pulse width both edges t tckwl 2.5 ? 8-bit timer timer output delay time t tmod ? 50 ns figure 20.20 timer reset input setup time t tmrs 30 ? ns figure 20.22 timer clock input setup time t tmcs 30 ? ns figure 20.21 single edge t tmcwh 1.5 ? t cyc timer clock pulse width both edges t tmcwl 2.5 ? sci asynchronous t scyc 4 ? t cyc figure 20.24 input clock cycle synchronous 6 ? input clock pulse width t sckw 0.4 0.6 t scyc input clock rise time t sckr ? 1.5 t cyc input clock fall time t sckf ? 1.5 transmit data delay time t txd ? 50 ns figure 20.25 receive data setup time (synchronous) t rxs 50 ? ns receive data hold time (synchronous) t rxh 50 ? ns a/d converter trigger input setup time t trgs 30 ? ns figure 20.26 section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 646 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 20.1.4 a/d conversion characteristics table 20.8 lists the a/d conversion characteristics. table 20.8 a/d conversion characteristics conditions: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 20 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) item min typ max unit resolution 10 10 10 bits conversion time ?? 6.7 s analog input capacitance ?? 20 pf permissible signal-source ?? 10 * 1 k ? impedance ?? 5 * 2 nonlinearity error ?? 3.5 lsb offset error ?? 3.5 lsb full-scale error ?? 3.5 lsb quantization ?? 0.5 lsb absolute accuracy ?? 4.0 lsb notes: 1. 12 mhz 2. > 12 mhz section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 647 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 20.1.5 d/a conversion characteristics table 20.9 lists the d/a conversion characteristics. table 20.9 d/a conversion characteristics conditions: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 20 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) item min typ max unit test conditions resolution 888bit conversion time ?? 10 s 20-pf capacitive load absolute accuracy ? 1.0 1.5 lsb 2-m ? resistive load ?? 1.0 lsb 4-m ? resistive load section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 648 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 20.1.6 flash memory characteristics table 20.10 lists the flash memory characteristics. table 20.10 flash memory characteristics conditions: v cc = av cc = 4.5 to 5.5 v, v ss = av ss = 0 v, t a = 0 to +75c (flash memory programming/erase operating temperature range; regular specifications), t a = 0 to +85c (flash memory programming/erase operating temperature range; wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions programming time * 1 * 2 * 4 t p ? 10 200 ms/ 32 bytes erase time * 1 * 3 * 5 t e ? 100 1200 ms/block reprogramming count n wec ? ? 100 times programming wait time after setting swe bit * 1 x10?? s wait time after setting psu bit * 1 y50?? s wait time after setting p bit * 1 * 4 z 150 ? 200 s wait time after clearing p bit * 1 10 ? ? s wait time after clearing psu bit * 1 10 ? ? s wait time after setting pv bit * 1 4? ? s wait time after h'ff dummy write * 1 2? ? s wait time after clearing pv bit * 1 4? ? s max. number of programmings * 1 * 4 n ? ? 1000 * 5 times z = 200 s erase wait time after setting swe bit * 1 x10?? s wait time after setting esu bit * 1 y 200 ? ? s wait time after setting e bit * 1 * 6 z5?10 s wait time after clearing e bit * 1 10 ? ? s wait time after clearing esu bit * 1 10 ? ? s wait time after setting ev bit * 1 20 ? ? s wait time after h'ff dummy write * 1 2? ? s wait time after clearing ev bit * 1 5? ? s max. number of erases * 1 * 6 n 120 ? 240 times notes: 1. time settings should be made in accordance with the programming/erase algorithm. 2. programming time per 32 bytes. (indicates the total time the p bit in the flash memory control register 1 (flmcr1) is set. the program verification time is not included.) 3. time to erase one block. (indicates the total time the e bit in flmcr1 is set. the erase verification time is not included.) section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 649 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 4. write time maximum value (t p (max.) = wait time after p bit setting (z) maximum number of programmings (n)). 5. number of times when the wait time after p bit setting (z) = 200 s. the maximum number of writes (n) should be set according to the actual set value of z so as not to exceed the maximum programming time (t p (max)). 6. for the maximum erase time (t e (max)), the following relationship applies between the wait time after e bit setting (z) and the maximum number of erases (n): t e (max) = wait time after e bit setting (z) maximum number of erases (n) the values of z and n should be set so as to satisfy the above formula. examples: when z = 5 [ms], n = 240 times when z = 10 [ms], n = 120 times section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 650 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 20.2 electrical characteristics of ztat, mask rom, and romless versions 20.2.1 absolute maximum ratings table 20.11 lists the absolute maximum ratings. table 20.11 absolute maximum ratings item symbol value unit power supply voltage v cc ? 0.3 to +7.0 v programming voltage * v pp ? 0.3 to +13.5 v input voltage (except port 4) v in ? 0.3 to v cc +0.3 v input voltage (port 4) v in ? 0.3 to av cc +0.3 v reference voltage v ref ? 0.3 to av cc +0.3 v analog power supply voltage av cc ? 0.3 to +7.0 v analog input voltage v an ? 0.3 to av cc +0.3 v operating temperature t opr regular specifications: ? 20 to +75 c wide-range specifications: ? 40 to +85 c storage temperature t stg ? 55 to +125 c caution: permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum rating are exceeded. note: * ztat version only. section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 651 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 20.2.2 dc characteristics table 20.12 lists the dc characteristics. table 20.13 lists the permissible output currents. table 20.12 dc characteristics (1) conditions: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v * 1 , t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions v t ? 1.0 ?? v v t + ?? v cc 0.7 v schmitt trigger input voltage port 2, irq0 to irq7 v t + ? v t ? 0.4 ?? v input high voltage res , stby , nmi, md 2 to md 0 v ih v cc ? 0.7 ? v cc + 0.3 v extal v cc 0.7 ? v cc + 0.3 v ports 1, 3, a to g 2.0 ? v cc + 0.3 v port 4 2.0 ? av cc + 0.3 v input low voltage res , stby , md 2 to md 0 v il ? 0.3 ? 0.5 v nmi, extal, ports 1, 3, 4, a to g ? 0.3 ? 0.8 v all output pins v oh v cc ? 0.5 ?? vi oh = ? 200 a output high voltage 3.5 ?? vi oh = ? 1 ma all output pins v ol ?? 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma output low voltage ports 1, a to c ?? 1.0 v i ol = 10 ma res | i in | ?? 10.0 a input leakage current stby , nmi, md 2 to md 0 ?? 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to v cc ? 0.5 v port 4 ?? 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to av cc ? 0.5 v three-state leakage current (off state) ports 1 to 3, a to g ? i tsi ? ?? 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to v cc ? 0.5 v section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 652 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 item symbol min typ max unit test conditions mos input pull-up current ports a to e ? i p 50 ? 300 a v in = 0 v res c in ?? 80 pf input capacitance nmi ?? 50 pf all input pins except res and nmi ?? 15 pf v in = 0 v f = 1 mhz t a = 25 c current dissipation * 2 normal operation i cc * 4 ? 60 (5.0 v) 89 ma f = 20 mhz sleep mode ? 40 (5.0 v) 73 ma f = 20 mhz ? 0.01 5.0 a t a 50 c standby mode * 3 ?? 20 50 c < t a during a/d and d/a conversion al cc ? 0.8 (5.0 v) 2.0 ma analog power supply current idle ? 0.01 5.0 a reference current during a/d and d/a conversion al cc ? 1.9 (5.0 v) 3.0 ma v ref = 5.0 v idle ? 0.01 5.0 a ram standby voltage v ram 2.0 ?? v notes: 1. if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . 2. current dissipation values are for v ih min = v cc ? 0.5 v and v il max = 0.5v with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state. 3. the values are for v ram v cc < 4.5v, v ih min = v cc 0.9, and v il max = 0.3 v. 4. i cc depends on v cc and f as follows: i cc max = 1.0 (ma) + 0.80 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f [normal mode] i cc max = 1.0 (ma) + 0.65 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f [sleep mode] section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 653 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 20.12 dc characteristics (2) conditions: v cc = av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v * 1 , t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions v t ? v cc 0.2 ?? v v t + ?? v cc 0.7 v schmitt trigger input voltage port 2, irq0 to irq7 v t + ? v t ? v cc 0.07 ?? v input high voltage res , stby , nmi, md 2 to md 0 v ih v cc 0.9 ? v cc +0.3 v extal v cc 0.7 ? v cc +0.3 v ports 1, 3, a to g v cc 0.7 ? v cc +0.3 v port 4 v cc 0.7 ? av cc +0.3 v input low voltage res , stby , md 2 to md 0 v il ? 0.3 ? v cc 0.1 v nmi, extal, ports 1, 3, 4, a to g ? 0.3 ? v cc 0.2 v v cc < 4.0 v 0.8 v cc = 4.0 to 5.5 v all output pins v oh v cc ? 0.5 ?? vi oh = ? 200 a output high voltage v cc ? 1.0 ?? vi oh = ? 1 ma all output pins v ol ?? 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma output low voltage ports 1, a to c ?? 1.0 v v cc 4 v i ol = 5 ma 4.0 < v cc 5.5 v i ol = 10 ma res | i in | ?? 10.0 a input leakage current stby , nmi, md 2 to md 0 ?? 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to v cc ? 0.5 v port 4 ?? 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to av cc ? 0.5 v three-state leakage current (off state) ports 1 to 3, a to g ? i tsi ? ?? 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to v cc ? 0.5 v section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 654 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 item symbol min typ max unit test conditions mos input pull-up current ports a to e ? i p 10 ? 300 a v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v in = 0 v res c in ?? 80 pf input capacitance nmi ?? 50 pf all input pins except res and nmi ?? 15 pf v in = 0 v f = 1 mhz t a = 25 c current dissipation * 2 normal operation i cc * 4 ? 18 (3.0 v) 45 ma f = 10 mhz sleep mode ? 11 (3.0 v) 37 ma f = 10 mhz ? 0.01 5.0 a t a 50 c standby mode * 3 ?? 20 50 c < t a during a/d and d/a conversion al cc ? 0.2 (3.0 v) 2.0 ma analog power supply current idle ? 0.01 5.0 a reference current during a/d and d/a conversion al cc ? 1.2 (3.0 v) 3.0 ma v ref = 3.0 v idle ? 0.01 5.0 a ram standby voltage v ram 2.0 ?? v notes: 1. if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and vref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . 2. current dissipation values are for v ih min = v cc ? 0.5 v and v il max = 0.5v with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state. 3. the values are for v ram v cc < 2.7 v, v ih min = v cc 0.9, and v il max = 0.3v. 4. i cc depends on v cc and f as follows: i cc max = 1.0 (ma) + 0.80 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f [normal mode] i cc max = 1.0 (ma) + 0.65 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f [sleep mode] section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 655 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table 20.13 permissible output currents conditions: v cc = av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit port 1, a to c i ol ?? 10 ma permissible output low current (per pin) other output pins ?? 2.0 ma permissible output low current (total) total of 28 pins including port 1 and a to c i ol ?? 80 ma total of all output pins, including the above ?? 120 ma permissible output high current (per pin) all output pins ? i oh ?? 2.0 ma permissible output high current (total) total of all output pins ? i oh ?? 40 ma notes: 1. to protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 20.13. 2. when driving a darlington pair or led directly, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as show in figures 20.4 and 20.5. 2 k ? h8s/2345 group port darlington pair figure 20.4 darlington pair drive circuit (example) section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 656 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 600 ? h8s/2345 group ports 1, a to c led figure 20.5 led drive circuit (example) 20.2.3 ac characteristics figure 20.6 show, the test conditions for the ac characteristics. c lsi output pin r h r l c = 90 pf: ports 1, a to f c = 30 pf: ports 2, 3, g r l = 2.4 k ? r h = 12 k ? i/o timing test levels low level: 0.8 v high level: 2.0 v 5 v figure 20.6 output load circuit section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 657 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 clock timing: table 20.14 lists the clock timing table 20.14 clock timing condition a: v cc = av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 10 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 20 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b item symbol min max min max unit test conditions clock cycle time t cyc 100 500 50 500 ns figure 20.7 clock high pulse width t ch 35 ? 20 ? ns clock low pulse width t cl 35 ? 20 ? ns clock rise time t cr ? 15 ? 5ns clock fall time t cf ? 15 ? 5ns clock oscillator setting time at reset (crystal) t osc1 20 ? 10 ? ms figure 20.8 clock oscillator setting time in software standby (crystal) t osc2 8 ? 8 ? ms figure 19.2 external clock output stabilization delay time t dext 500 ? 500 ? s figure 20.8 section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 658 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 control signal timing: table 20.15 lists the control signal timing. table 20.15 control signal timing condition a: v cc = av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 10 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 20 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b item symbol min max min max unit test conditions res setup time t ress 200 ? 200 ? ns figure 20.9 res pulse width t resw 20 ? 20 ? t cyc nmi reset setup time t nmirs 250 ? 200 ? ns nmi reset hold time t nmirh 200 ? 200 ? ns nmi setup time t nmis 250 ? 150 ? ns figure 20.10 nmi hold time t nmih 10 ? 10 ? ns nmi pulse width (exiting software standby mode) t nmiw 200 ? 200 ? ns irq setup time t irqs 250 ? 150 ? ns irq hold time t irqh 10 ? 10 ? ns irq pulse width (exiting software standby mode) t irqw 200 ? 200 ? ns section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 659 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bus timing: table 20.16 lists the bus timing. table 20.16 bus timing condition a: v cc = av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 10 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 20 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b item symbol min max min max unit test conditions address delay time t ad ? 40 ? 20 ns address setup time t as 0.5 t cyc ? 30 ? 0.5 t cyc ? 15 ? ns figure 20.11 to figure 20.15 address hold time t ah 0.5 t cyc ? 20 ? 0.5 t cyc ? 10 ? ns cs delay time 1 t csd1 ? 40 ? 20 ns as delay time t asd ? 40 ? 20 ns rd delay time 1 t rsd1 ? 40 ? 20 ns rd delay time 2 t rsd2 ? 40 ? 20 ns cas delay time t casd ? 40 ? 20 ns read data setup time t rds 30 ? 15 ? ns read data hold time t rdh 0 ? 0 ? ns read data access time 1 t acc1 ? 1.0 t cyc ? 50 ? 1.0 t cyc ? 25 ns read data access time 2 t acc2 ? 1.5 t cyc ? 50 ? 1.5 t cyc ? 25 ns read data access time 3 t acc3 ? 2.0 t cyc ? 50 ? 2.0 t cyc ? 25 ns read data access time 4 t acc4 ? 2.5 t cyc ? 50 ? 2.5 t cyc ? 25 ns read data access time 5 t acc5 ? 3.0 t cyc ? 50 ? 3.0 t cyc ? 25 ns section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 660 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 condition a condition b item symbol min max min max unit test conditions wr delay time 1 t wrd1 ? 40 ? 20 ns wr delay time 2 t wrd2 ? 40 ? 20 ns figure 20.11 to figure 20.15 wr pulse width 1 t wsw1 1.0 t cyc ? 40 ? 1.0 t cyc ? 20 ? ns wr pulse width 2 t wsw2 1.5 t cyc ? 40 ? 1.5 t cyc ? 20 ? ns write data delay time t wdd ? 60 ? 30 ns write data setup time t wds 0.5 t cyc ? 40 ? 0.5 t cyc ? 20 ? ns write data hold time t wdh 0.5 t cyc ? 20 ? 0.5 t cyc ? 10 ? ns wait setup time t wts 60 ? 30 ? ns figure 20.13 wait hold time t wth 10 ? 5 ? ns breq setup time t brqs 60 ? 30 ? ns figure 20.16 back delay time t bacd ? 30 ? 15 ns bus-floating time t bzd ? 100 ? 50 ns section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 661 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 timing of on-chip supporting modules: table 20.17 lists the timing of on-chip supporting modules. table 20.17 timing of on-chip supporting modules condition a: v cc = av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 10 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 20 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b item symbol min max min max unit test conditions i/o port output data delay time t pwd ? 100 ? 50 ns figure 20.17 input data setup time t prs 50 ? 30 ? input data hold time t prh 50 ? 30 ? tpu timer output delay time t tocd ? 100 ? 50 ns figure 20.18 timer input setup time t tics 50 ? 30 ? timer clock input setup time t tcks 50 ? 30 ? ns figure 20.19 single edge t tckwh 1.5 ? 1.5 ? t cyc timer clock pulse width both edges t tckwl 2.5 ? 2.5 ? 8-bit timer timer output delay time t tmod ? 100 ? 50 ns figure 20.20 timer reset input setup time t tmrs 50 ? 30 ? ns figure 20.22 timer clock input setup time t tmcs 50 ? 30 ? ns figure 20.21 single edge t tmcwh 1.5 ? 1.5 ? t cyc timer clock pulse width both edges t tmcwl 2.5 ? 2.5 ? section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 662 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 condition a condition b item symbol min max min max unit test conditions wdt overflow output delay time t wovd ? 100 ? 50 ns figure 20.23 sci asynchro- nous t scyc 4 ? 4 ? t cyc figure 20.24 input clock cycle synchro- nous 6 ? 6 ? input clock pulse width t sckw 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 t scyc input clock rise time t sckr ? 1.5 ? 1.5 t cyc input clock fall time t sckf ? 1.5 ? 1.5 transmit data delay time t txd ? 100 ? 50 ns figure 20.25 receive data setup time (synchronous) t rxs 100 ? 50 ? ns receive data hold time (synchronous) t rxh 100 ? 50 ? ns a/d converter trigger input setup time t trgs 50 ? 30 ? ns figure 20.26 section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 663 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 20.2.4 a/d conversion characteristics table 20.18 lists the a/d conversion characteristics. table 20.18 a/d conversion characteristics condition a: v cc = av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 10 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 20 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b item min typ max min typ max unit resolution 10 10 10 10 10 10 bits conversion time ?? 13.4 ?? 6.7 s analog input capacitance ?? 20 ?? 20 pf ?? 10 * 1 ?? 10 * 3 k ? permissible signal-source impedance ?? 5 * 2 ?? 5 * 4 nonlinearity error ?? 7.5 ?? 3.5 lsb offset error ?? 7.5 ?? 3.5 lsb full-scale error ?? 7.5 ?? 3.5 lsb quantization ?? 0.5 ?? 0.5 lsb absolute accuracy ?? 8.0 ?? 4.0 lsb notes: 1. 4.0 v av cc 5.5 v 2. 2.7 v av cc < 4.0 v 3. 12 mhz 4. > 12 mhz section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 664 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 20.2.5 d/a conversion characteristics table 20.19 lists the d/a conversion characteristics. table 20.19 d/a conversion characteristics condition a: v cc = av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 10 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, = 2 to 20 mhz, t a = ?20 to +75c (regular specifications), t a = ?40 to +85c (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b item min typ max min typ max unit test conditions resolution 8 8 8 8 8 8 bit conversion time ?? 10 ?? 10 s 20-pf capacitive load absolute accuracy ? 2.0 3.0 ? 1.0 1.5 lsb 2-m ? resistive load ?? 2.0 ?? 1.0 lsb 4-m ? resistive load section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 665 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 20.3 operation timing the operation timing is described below. 20.3.1 clock timing the clock timing is shown below. system clock timing: figure 20.7 shows the system clock timing. t ch t cf t cyc t cl t cr figure 20.7 system clock timing oscillator settling timing: figure 20.8 shows the oscillator settling timing. t osc1 t osc1 extal nmi v cc stby res t dext t dext figure 20.8 oscillator settling timing section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 666 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 20.3.2 control signal timing the control signal timing is shown below. reset input timing: figure 20.9 shows the reset input timing. interrupt input timing: figure 20.10 shows the interrupt input timing for nmi and irq . t ress t resw t nmirh t nmirs t mds t mds t ress res nmi md 2 to md 0 fwe t ress figure 20.9 reset input timing section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 667 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 t irqs t nmis t nmih irq edge input nmi t irqs t irqh irqi (i = 0 to 2) irq level input t nmiw t irqw figure 20.10 interrupt input timing 20.3.3 bus timing the bus timing is shown below. basic bus timing (two-state access): figure 20.11 shows the basic bus timing for external two- state access. basic bus timing (three-state access): figure 20.12 shows the basic bus timing for external three-state access. basic bus timing (three-state access with one wait state): figure 20.13 shows the basic bus timing for external three-state access with one wait state. burst rom access timing (two-state access): figure 20.14 shows the burst rom access timing for two-state access. burst rom access timing (one-state access): figure 20.15 shows the burst rom access timing for one-state access. external bus release timing: figure 20.16 shows the external bus release timing. section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 668 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 t rsd2 t 1 t ad as a 23 to a 0 t asd rd (read) t 2 t csd1 t as t asd t acc2 t as t as t rsd1 t acc3 t rds t rdh t wrd2 t wdd t wsw1 t wdh t ah cs3 to cs0 d 15 to d 0 (read) hwr , lwr (write) d 15 to d 0 (write) t ah t wrd2 figure 20.11 basic bus timing (two-state access) section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 669 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 t rsd2 t 2 as a 23 to a 0 t asd rd (read) t 3 t as t ah t asd t acc4 t rsd1 t acc5 t as t rds t rdh t wrd1 t wrd2 t wds t wsw2 t wdh t ah cs3 to cs0 d 15 to d 0 (read) hwr , lwr (write) d 15 to d 0 (write) t 1 t csd1 t wdd t ad figure 20.12 basic bus timing (three-state access) section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 670 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 t w as a 23 to a 0 rd (read) t 3 cs3 to cs0 d 15 to d 0 (read) hwr , lwr (write) d 15 to d 0 (write) t 2 t wts t 1 t wth t wts t wth wait figure 20.13 basic bus timing (three-state access with one wait state) section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 671 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 t rsd2 t 1 as a 23 to a 0 t 2 t ah t acc3 t rds cs3 to cs0 d 15 to d 0 (read) t 2 or t 3 t as t 1 t asd t asd t rdh t ad rd (read) figure 20.14 burst rom access timing (two-state access) section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 672 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 t rsd2 t 1 as a 23 to a 0 t 1 t acc1 cs3 to cs0 d 15 to d 0 (read) t 2 or t 3 t rdh t ad rd (read) t rds figure 20.15 burst rom access timing (one-state access) section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 673 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 breq a 23 to a 0 , cs3 to cs0 , t brqs t bacd t bzd t bacd t bzd t brqs back as , rd , hwr , lwr figure 20.16 external bus release timing 20.3.4 timing for on-chip supporting modules figure 20.17 to figure 20.26 show the timings for on-chip peripheral modules. ports 1 to 4, a to g (read) t 2 t 1 t pwd t prh t prs ports 1 to 3, a to g (write) figure 20.17 i/o port input/output timing section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 674 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 t tics t tocd output compare output * input capture input * note: * tioca0 to tioca5, tiocb0 to tiocb5, tiocc0, tiocc3, tiocd0, tiocd3 figure 20.18 tpu input/output timing t tcks t tcks tclka to tclkd t tckwh t tckwl figure 20.19 tpu clock input timing tmo0, tmo1 t tmod figure 20.20 8-bit timer output timing section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 675 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tmci0, tmci1 t tmcs t tmcs t tmcwh t tmcwl figure 20.21 8-bit timer clock input timing tmri0, tmri1 t tmrs figure 20.22 8-bit timer reset input timing wdtovf t wovd t wovd figure 20.23 wdt output timing (ztat version, mask rom version, and romless version only) sck0 and sck1 t sckw t sckr t sckf t scyc figure 20.24 sck clock input timing section 20 electrical characteristics rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 676 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 txd0 and txd1 transit data rxd0 and rxd1 receive data sck0 and sck1 t rxs t rxh t txd figure 20.25 sci input/output timing (clock synchronous mode) adtrg t trgs figure 20.26 a/d converter external trigger input timing 20.4 usage note although the f-ztat, ztat, mask rom, and romless versions fully meet the electrical specifications listed in this manual, due to differences in the fabrication process, the on-chip rom, and the layout patterns, there will be differences in the actual values of the electrical characteristics, the operating margins, the noise margins, and other aspects. therefore, if a system is estimated using the f-ztat or ztat version, a similar evaluation should also be performed using the mask rom version. appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 677 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 appendix a instruction set a.1 instruction list operand notation rd general register (destination) * 1 rs general register (source) * 1 rn general register * 1 ern general register (32-bit register) mac multiply-and-accumulate register (32-bit register) * 2 (ead) destination operand (eas) source operand exr extended control register ccr condition-code register n n (negative) flag in ccr z z (zero) flag in ccr v v (overflow) flag in ccr c c (carry) flag in ccr pc program counter sp stack pointer #imm immediate data disp displacement +add ? subtract multiply divide logical and logical or logical exclusive or transfer from the operand on the left to the operand on the right, or transition from the state on the left to the state on the right ? logical not (logical complement) ( ) < > contents of operand :8/:16/:24/:32 8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length notes: 1. general registers include 8-bit registers (r0h to r7h, r0l to r7l), 16-bit registers (r0 to r7, e0 to e7), and 32-bit registers (er0 to er7). 2. the mac register cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group. appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 678 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 condition code notation symbol changes according to the result of instruction * undetermined (no guaranteed value) 0 always cleared to 0 1 always set to 1 ? not affected by execution of the instruction appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 679 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table a.1 instruction set (1) data transfer instructions addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @?ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic mov mov.b #xx:8,rd b 2 mov.b rs,rd b 2 mov.b @ers,rd b 2 mov.b @(d:16,ers),rd b 4 mov.b @(d:32,ers),rd b 8 mov.b @ers+,rd b 2 mov.b @aa:8,rd b 2 mov.b @aa:16,rd b 4 mov.b @aa:32,rd b 6 mov.b rs,@erd b 2 mov.b rs,@(d:16,erd) b 4 mov.b rs,@(d:32,erd) b 8 mov.b rs,@-erd b 2 mov.b rs,@aa:8 b 2 mov.b rs,@aa:16 b 4 mov.b rs,@aa:32 b 6 mov.w #xx:16,rd w 4 mov.w rs,rd w 2 mov.w @ers,rd w 2 #xx:8 rd8 ? ? 0 ? 1 rs8 rd8 ? ? 0 ? 1 @ers rd8 ? ? 0 ? 2 @(d:16,ers) rd8 ? ? 0 ? 3 @(d:32,ers) rd8 ? ? 0 ? 5 @ers rd8,ers32+1 ers32 ? ? 0 ? 3 @aa:8 rd8 ? ? 0 ? 2 @aa:16 rd8 ? ? 0 ? 3 @aa:32 rd8 ? ? 0 ? 4 rs8 @erd ? ? 0 ? 2 rs8 @(d:16,erd) ? ? 0 ? 3 rs8 @(d:32,erd) ? ? 0 ? 5 erd32-1 erd32,rs8 @erd ? ? 0 ? 3 rs8 @aa:8 ? ? 0 ? 2 rs8 @aa:16 ? ? 0 ? 3 rs8 @aa:32 ? ? 0 ? 4 #xx:16 rd16 ? ? 0 ? 2 rs16 rd16 ? ? 0 ? 1 @ers rd16 ? ? 0 ? 2 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ??????????????????? ??????????????????? appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 680 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic mov mov.w @(d:16,ers),rd w 4 mov.w @(d:32,ers),rd w 8 mov.w @ers+,rd w 2 mov.w @aa:16,rd w 4 mov.w @aa:32,rd w 6 mov.w rs,@erd w 2 mov.w rs,@(d:16,erd) w 4 mov.w rs,@(d:32,erd) w 8 mov.w rs,@-erd w 2 mov.w rs,@aa:16 w 4 mov.w rs,@aa:32 w 6 mov.l #xx:32,erd l 6 mov.l ers,erd l 2 mov.l @ers,erd l 4 mov.l @(d:16,ers),erd l 6 mov.l @(d:32,ers),erd l 10 mov.l @ers+,erd l 4 mov.l @aa:16,erd l 6 mov.l @aa:32,erd l 8 @(d:16,ers) rd16 ? ? 0 ? 3 @(d:32,ers) rd16 ? ? 0 ? 5 @ers rd16,ers32+2 ers32 ? ? 0 ? 3 @aa:16 rd16 ? ? 0 ? 3 @aa:32 rd16 ? ? 0 ? 4 rs16 @erd ? ? 0 ? 2 rs16 @(d:16,erd) ? ? 0 ? 3 rs16 @(d:32,erd) ? ? 0 ? 5 erd32-2 erd32,rs16 @erd ? ? 0 ? 3 rs16 @aa:16 ? ? 0 ? 3 rs16 @aa:32 ? ? 0 ? 4 #xx:32 erd32 ? ? 0 ? 3 ers32 erd32 ? ? 0 ? 1 @ers erd32 ? ? 0 ? 4 @(d:16,ers) erd32 ? ? 0 ? 5 @(d:32,ers) erd32 ? ? 0 ? 7 @ers erd32,ers32+4 @ers32 ? ? 0 ? 5 @aa:16 erd32 ? ? 0 ? 5 @aa:32 erd32 ? ? 0 ? 6 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ??????????????????? ??????????????????? appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 681 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic mov pop push ldm stm movfpe movtpe mov.l ers,@erd l 4 mov.l ers,@(d:16,erd) l 6 mov.l ers,@(d:32,erd) l 10 mov.l ers,@-erd l 4 mov.l ers,@aa:16 l 6 mov.l ers,@aa:32 l 8 pop.w rn w 2 pop.l ern l 4 push.w rn w 2 push.l ern l 4 ldm @sp+,(erm-ern) l 4 stm (erm-ern),@-sp l 4 movfpe @aa:16,rd movtpe rs,@aa:16 ers32 @erd ? ? 0 ? 4 ers32 @(d:16,erd) ? ? 0 ? 5 ers32 @(d:32,erd) ? ? 0 ? 7 erd32-4 erd32,ers32 @ erd ? ? 0 ? 5 ers32 @aa:16 ? ? 0 ? 5 ers32 @aa:32 ? ? 0 ? 6 @sp rn16,sp+2 sp ? ? 0 ? 3 @sp ern32,sp+4 sp ? ? 0 ? 5 sp-2 sp,rn16 @sp ? ? 0 ? 3 sp-4 sp,ern32 @sp ? ? 0 ? 5 (@sp ern32,sp+4 sp) ? ? ? ? ? ? 7/9/11 [1] repeated for each register restored (sp-4 sp,ern32 @sp) ? ? ? ? ? ? 7/9/11 [1] repeated for each register saved [2] [2] operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ?????????? ?????????? cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 682 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (2) arithmetic instructions addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic add addx adds inc daa sub add.b #xx:8,rd b 2 add.b rs,rd b 2 add.w #xx:16,rd w 4 add.w rs,rd w 2 add.l #xx:32,erd l 6 add.l ers,erd l 2 addx #xx:8,rd b 2 addx rs,rd b 2 adds #1,erd l 2 adds #2,erd l 2 adds #4,erd l 2 inc.b rd b 2 inc.w #1,rd w 2 inc.w #2,rd w 2 inc.l #1,erd l 2 inc.l #2,erd l 2 daa rd b 2 sub.b rs,rd b 2 sub.w #xx:16,rd w 4 rd8+#xx:8 rd8 ? 1 rd8+rs8 rd8 ? 1 rd16+#xx:16 rd16 ? [3] 2 rd16+rs16 rd16 ? [3] 1 erd32+#xx:32 erd32 ? [4] 3 erd32+ers32 erd32 ? [4] 1 rd8+#xx:8+c rd8 ? [5] 1 rd8+rs8+c rd8 ? [5] 1 erd32+1 erd32 ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 erd32+2 erd32 ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 erd32+4 erd32 ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 rd8+1 rd8 ? ? ? 1 rd16+1 rd16 ? ? ? 1 rd16+2 rd16 ? ? ? 1 erd32+1 erd32 ? ? ? 1 erd32+2 erd32 ? ? ? 1 rd8 decimal adjust rd8 ? * * 1 rd8-rs8 rd8 ? 1 rd16-#xx:16 rd16 ? [3] 2 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ??? ? ???????? ?? ????? ???????? ???????? ???????? ?????? ???????? ?? ?? appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 683 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic sub subx subs dec das mulxu mulxs sub.w rs,rd w 2 sub.l #xx:32,erd l 6 sub.l ers,erd l 2 subx #xx:8,rd b 2 subx rs,rd b 2 subs #1,erd l 2 subs #2,erd l 2 subs #4,erd l 2 dec.b rd b 2 dec.w #1,rd w 2 dec.w #2,rd w 2 dec.l #1,erd l 2 dec.l #2,erd l 2 das rd b 2 mulxu.b rs,rd b 2 mulxu.w rs,erd w 2 mulxs.b rs,rd b 4 mulxs.w rs,erd w 4 rd16-rs16 rd16 ? [3] 1 erd32-#xx:32 erd32 ? [4] 3 erd32-ers32 erd32 ? [4] 1 rd8-#xx:8-c rd8 ? [5] 1 rd8-rs8-c rd8 ? [5] 1 erd32-1 erd32 ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 erd32-2 erd32 ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 erd32-4 erd32 ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 rd8-1 rd8 ? ? ? 1 rd16-1 rd16 ? ? ? 1 rd16-2 rd16 ? ? ? 1 erd32-1 erd32 ? ? ? 1 erd32-2 erd32 ? ? ? 1 rd8 decimal adjust rd8 ? * * ? 1 rd8 rs8 rd16 (unsigned multiplication) ? ? ? ? ? ? 12 rd16 rs16 erd32 ? ? ? ? ? ? 20 (unsigned multiplication) rd8 rs8 rd16 (signed multiplication) ? ? ? ? 13 rd16 rs16 erd32 ? ? ? ? 21 (signed multiplication) operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ?? ?? ?????? ?????? ????? ??? ????? ????? ????? ?? appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 684 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic divxu divxs cmp neg extu divxu.b rs,rd b 2 divxu.w rs,erd w 2 divxs.b rs,rd b 4 divxs.w rs,erd w 4 cmp.b #xx:8,rd b 2 cmp.b rs,rd b 2 cmp.w #xx:16,rd w 4 cmp.w rs,rd w 2 cmp.l #xx:32,erd l 6 cmp.l ers,erd l 2 neg.b rd b 2 neg.w rd w 2 neg.l erd l 2 extu.w rd w 2 extu.l erd l 2 rd16 rs8 rd16 (rdh: remainder, ? ? [6] [7] ? ? 12 rdl: quotient) (unsigned division) erd32 rs16 erd32 (ed: remainder, ? ? [6] [7] ? ? 20 rd: quotient) (unsigned division) rd16 rs8 rd16 (rdh: remainder, ? ? [8] [7] ? ? 13 rdl: quotient) (signed division) erd32 rs16 erd32 (ed: remainder, ? ? [8] [7] ? ? 21 rd: quotient) (signed division) rd8-#xx:8 ? 1 rd8-rs8 ? 1 rd16-#xx:16 ? [3] 2 rd16-rs16 ? [3] 1 erd32-#xx:32 ? [4] 3 erd32-ers32 ? [4] 1 0-rd8 rd8 ? 1 0-rd16 rd16 ? 1 0-erd32 erd32 ? 1 0 ( appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 685 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic exts tas mac clrmac ldmac stmac exts.w rd w 2 exts.l erd l 2 tas @erd b 4 mac @ern+, @erm+ clrmac ldmac ers,mach ldmac ers,macl stmac mach,erd stmac macl,erd ( appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 686 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (3) logical instructions addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic and or xor not and.b #xx:8,rd b 2 and.b rs,rd b 2 and.w #xx:16,rd w 4 and.w rs,rd w 2 and.l #xx:32,erd l 6 and.l ers,erd l 4 or.b #xx:8,rd b 2 or.b rs,rd b 2 or.w #xx:16,rd w 4 or.w rs,rd w 2 or.l #xx:32,erd l 6 or.l ers,erd l 4 xor.b #xx:8,rd b 2 xor.b rs,rd b 2 xor.w #xx:16,rd w 4 xor.w rs,rd w 2 xor.l #xx:32,erd l 6 xor.l ers,erd l 4 not.b rd b 2 not.w rd w 2 not.l erd l 2 rd8 #xx:8 rd8 ? ? 0 ? 1 rd8 rs8 rd8 ? ? 0 ? 1 rd16 #xx:16 rd16 ? ? 0 ? 2 rd16 rs16 rd16 ? ? 0 ? 1 erd32 #xx:32 erd32 ? ? 0 ? 3 erd32 ers32 erd32 ? ? 0 ? 2 rd8 #xx:8 rd8 ? ? 0 ? 1 rd8 rs8 rd8 ? ? 0 ? 1 rd16 #xx:16 rd16 ? ? 0 ? 2 rd16 rs16 rd16 ? ? 0 ? 1 erd32 #xx:32 erd32 ? ? 0 ? 3 erd32 ers32 erd32 ? ? 0 ? 2 rd8 #xx:8 rd8 ? ? 0 ? 1 rd8 rs8 rd8 ? ? 0 ? 1 rd16 #xx:16 rd16 ? ? 0 ? 2 rd16 rs16 rd16 ? ? 0 ? 1 erd32 #xx:32 erd32 ? ? 0 ? 3 erd32 ers32 erd32 ? ? 0 ? 2 ? rd8 rd8 ? ? 0 ? 1 ? rd16 rd16 ? ? 0 ? 1 ? erd32 erd32 ? ? 0 ? 1 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ????????????????????? ????????????????????? appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 687 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (4) shift instructions addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic shal shar shll shal.b rd b 2 shal.b #2,rd b 2 shal.w rd w 2 shal.w #2,rd w 2 shal.l erd l 2 shal.l #2,erd l 2 shar.b rd b 2 shar.b #2,rd b 2 shar.w rd w 2 shar.w #2,rd w 2 shar.l erd l 2 shar.l #2,erd l 2 shll.b rd b 2 shll.b #2,rd b 2 shll.w rd w 2 shll.w #2,rd w 2 shll.l erd l 2 shll.l #2,erd l 2 ? ? 1 ? ? 1 ? ? 1 ? ? 1 ? ? 1 ? ? 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ?????? ?????????????????? c msb lsb msb lsb 0 c msb lsb c 0 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 688 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic shlr rotxl rotxr shlr.b rd b 2 shlr.b #2,rd b 2 shlr.w rd w 2 shlr.w #2,rd w 2 shlr.l erd l 2 shlr.l #2,erd l 2 rotxl.b rd b 2 rotxl.b #2,rd b 2 rotxl.w rd w 2 rotxl.w #2,rd w 2 rotxl.l erd l 2 rotxl.l #2,erd l 2 rotxr.b rd b 2 rotxr.b #2,rd b 2 rotxr.w rd w 2 rotxr.w #2,rd w 2 rotxr.l erd l 2 rotxr.l #2,erd l 2 ? ? ? 0 0 1 ? ? ? 0 0 1 ? ? ? 0 0 1 ? ? ? 0 0 1 ? ? ? 0 0 1 ? ? ? 0 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ???????????? c msb lsb 0 c msb lsb c msb lsb appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 689 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 ? ? 0 1 ? ? ? 0 1 1 ? ? 0 1 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic rotl rotr rotl.b rd b 2 rotl.b #2,rd b 2 rotl.w rd w 2 rotl.w #2,rd w 2 rotl.l erd l 2 rotl.l #2,erd l 2 rotr.b rd b 2 rotr.b #2,rd b 2 rotr.w rd w 2 rotr.w #2,rd w 2 rotr.l erd l 2 rotr.l #2,erd l 2 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ???????????? ???????????? ???????????? c msb lsb c msb lsb appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 690 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (5) bit-manipulation instructions addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic bset bclr bset #xx:3,rd b 2 bset #xx:3,@erd b 4 bset #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 bset #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 bset #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 bset rn,rd b 2 bset rn,@erd b 4 bset rn,@aa:8 b 4 bset rn,@aa:16 b 6 bset rn,@aa:32 b 8 bclr #xx:3,rd b 2 bclr #xx:3,@erd b 4 bclr #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 bclr #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 bclr #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 bclr rn,rd b 2 bclr rn,@erd b 4 bclr rn,@aa:8 b 4 bclr rn,@aa:16 b 6 (#xx:3 of rd8) 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 (#xx:3 of @erd) 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 (#xx:3 of @aa:16) 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 (#xx:3 of @aa:32) 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 (rn8 of rd8) 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 (rn8 of @erd) 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 (rn8 of @aa:8) 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 (rn8 of @aa:16) 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 (rn8 of @aa:32) 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 (#xx:3 of rd8) 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 (#xx:3 of @erd) 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 (#xx:3 of @aa:16) 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 (#xx:3 of @aa:32) 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 (rn8 of rd8) 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 (rn8 of @erd) 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 (rn8 of @aa:8) 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 (rn8 of @aa:16) 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 691 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic bclr bnot btst bclr rn,@aa:32 b 8 bnot #xx:3,rd b 2 bnot #xx:3,@erd b 4 bnot #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 bnot #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 bnot #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 bnot rn,rd b 2 bnot rn,@erd b 4 bnot rn,@aa:8 b 4 bnot rn,@aa:16 b 6 bnot rn,@aa:32 b 8 btst #xx:3,rd b 2 btst #xx:3,@erd b 4 btst #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 btst #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 (rn8 of @aa:32) 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 (#xx:3 of rd8) [ ? (#xx:3 of rd8)] ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 (#xx:3 of @erd) ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 [ ? (#xx:3 of @erd)] (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 [ ? (#xx:3 of @aa:8)] (#xx:3 of @aa:16) ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 [ ? (#xx:3 of @aa:16)] (#xx:3 of @aa:32) ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 [ ? (#xx:3 of @aa:32)] (rn8 of rd8) [ ? (rn8 of rd8)] ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 (rn8 of @erd) [ ? (rn8 of @erd)] ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 (rn8 of @aa:8) [ ? (rn8 of @aa:8)] ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 (rn8 of @aa:16) ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 [ ? (rn8 of @aa:16)] (rn8 of @aa:32) ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 [ ? (rn8 of @aa:32)] ? (#xx:3 of rd8) z ? ? ? ? ? 1 ? (#xx:3 of @erd) z ? ? ? ? ? 3 ? (#xx:3 of @aa:8) z ? ? ? ? ? 3 ? (#xx:3 of @aa:16) z ? ? ? ? ? 4 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ???? appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 692 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic btst bld bild bst btst #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 btst rn,rd b 2 btst rn,@erd b 4 btst rn,@aa:8 b 4 btst rn,@aa:16 b 6 btst rn,@aa:32 b 8 bld #xx:3,rd b 2 bld #xx:3,@erd b 4 bld #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 bld #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 bld #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 bild #xx:3,rd b 2 bild #xx:3,@erd b 4 bild #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 bild #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 bild #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 bst #xx:3,rd b 2 bst #xx:3,@erd b 4 bst #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 ? (#xx:3 of @aa:32) z ? ? ? ? ? 5 ? (rn8 of rd8) z ? ? ? ? ? 1 ? (rn8 of @erd) z ? ? ? ? ? 3 ? (rn8 of @aa:8) z ? ? ? ? ? 3 ? (rn8 of @aa:16) z ? ? ? ? ? 4 ? (rn8 of @aa:32) z ? ? ? ? ? 5 (#xx:3 of rd8) c ? ? ? ? ? 1 (#xx:3 of @erd) c ? ? ? ? ? 3 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c ? ? ? ? ? 3 (#xx:3 of @aa:16) c ? ? ? ? ? 4 (#xx:3 of @aa:32) c ? ? ? ? ? 5 ? (#xx:3 of rd8) c ? ? ? ? ? 1 ? (#xx:3 of @erd) c ? ? ? ? ? 3 ? (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c ? ? ? ? ? 3 ? (#xx:3 of @aa:16) c ? ? ? ? ? 4 ? (#xx:3 of @aa:32) c ? ? ? ? ? 5 c (#xx:3 of rd8) ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 c (#xx:3 of @erd) ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ?????????? ?????? appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 693 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic bst bist band biand bor bst #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 bst #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 bist #xx:3,rd b 2 bist #xx:3,@erd b 4 bist #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 bist #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 bist #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 band #xx:3,rd b 2 band #xx:3,@erd b 4 band #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 band #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 band #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 biand #xx:3,rd b 2 biand #xx:3,@erd b 4 biand #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 biand #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 biand #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 bor #xx:3,rd b 2 bor #xx:3,@erd b 4 c (#xx:3 of @aa:16) ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 c (#xx:3 of @aa:32) ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 ? c (#xx:3 of rd8) ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 ? c (#xx:3 of @erd) ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 ? c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 ? c (#xx:3 of @aa:16) ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 ? c (#xx:3 of @aa:32) ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 c (#xx:3 of rd8) c ? ? ? ? ? 1 c (#xx:3 of @erd) c ? ? ? ? ? 3 c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c ? ? ? ? ? 3 c (#xx:3 of @aa:16) c ? ? ? ? ? 4 c (#xx:3 of @aa:32) c ? ? ? ? ? 5 c [ ? (#xx:3 of rd8)] c ? ? ? ? ? 1 c [ ? (#xx:3 of @erd)] c ? ? ? ? ? 3 c [ ? (#xx:3 of @aa:8)] c ? ? ? ? ? 3 c [ ? (#xx:3 of @aa:16)] c ? ? ? ? ? 4 c [ ? (#xx:3 of @aa:32)] c ? ? ? ? ? 5 c (#xx:3 of rd8) c ? ? ? ? ? 1 c (#xx:3 of @erd) c ? ? ? ? ? 3 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ???????????? appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 694 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic bor bior bxor bixor bor #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 bor #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 bor #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 bior #xx:3,rd b 2 bior #xx:3,@erd b 4 bior #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 bior #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 bior #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 bxor #xx:3,rd b 2 bxor #xx:3,@erd b 4 bxor #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 bxor #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 bxor #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 bixor #xx:3,rd b 2 bixor #xx:3,@erd b 4 bixor #xx:3,@aa:8 b 4 bixor #xx:3,@aa:16 b 6 bixor #xx:3,@aa:32 b 8 c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c ? ? ? ? ? 3 c (#xx:3 of @aa:16) c ? ? ? ? ? 4 c (#xx:3 of @aa:32) c ? ? ? ? ? 5 c [ ? (#xx:3 of rd8)] c ? ? ? ? ? 1 c [ ? (#xx:3 of @erd)] c ? ? ? ? ? 3 c [ ? (#xx:3 of @aa:8)] c ? ? ? ? ? 3 c [ ? (#xx:3 of @aa:16)] c ? ? ? ? ? 4 c [ ? (#xx:3 of @aa:32)] c ? ? ? ? ? 5 c (#xx:3 of rd8) c ? ? ? ? ? 1 c (#xx:3 of @erd) c ? ? ? ? ? 3 c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c ? ? ? ? ? 3 c (#xx:3 of @aa:16) c ? ? ? ? ? 4 c (#xx:3 of @aa:32) c ? ? ? ? ? 5 c [ ? (#xx:3 of rd8)] c ? ? ? ? ? 1 c [ ? (#xx:3 of @erd)] c ? ? ? ? ? 3 c [ ? (#xx:3 of @aa:8)] c ? ? ? ? ? 3 c [ ? (#xx:3 of @aa:16)] c ? ? ? ? ? 4 c [ ? (#xx:3 of @aa:32)] c ? ? ? ? ? 5 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ?????????????????? appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 695 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (6) branch instructions addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic bcc always ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 never ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 c z=0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 c z=1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 c=0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 c=1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 z=0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 z=1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 v=0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 operation condition code branching condition ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 bra d:8(bt d:8) ? 2 if condition is true then bra d:16(bt d:16) ? 4 pc pc+d brn d:8(bf d:8) ? 2 else next; brn d:16(bf d:16) ? 4 bhi d:8 ? 2 bhi d:16 ? 4 bls d:8 ? 2 bls d:16 ? 4 bcc d:b(bhs d:8) ? 2 bcc d:16(bhs d:16) ? 4 bcs d:8(blo d:8) ? 2 bcs d:16(blo d:16) ? 4 bne d:8 ? 2 bne d:16 ? 4 beq d:8 ? 2 beq d:16 ? 4 bvc d:8 ? 2 bvc d:16 ? 4 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 696 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic bcc v=1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 n=0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 n=1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 n v=0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 n v=1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 z (n v)=0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 z (n v)=1 ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 operation condition code branching condition ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 bvs d:8 ? 2 bvs d:16 ? 4 bpl d:8 ? 2 bpl d:16 ? 4 bmi d:8 ? 2 bmi d:16 ? 4 bge d:8 ? 2 bge d:16 ? 4 blt d:8 ? 2 blt d:16 ? 4 bgt d:8 ? 2 bgt d:16 ? 4 ble d:8 ? 2 ble d:16 ? 4 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 697 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic jmp bsr jsr rts jmp @ern ? 2 jmp @aa:24 ? 4 jmp @@aa:8 ? 2 bsr d:8 ? 2 bsr d:16 ? 4 jsr @ern ? 2 jsr @aa:24 ? 4 jsr @@aa:8 ? 2 rts ? 2 pc ern ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 pc aa:24 ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 pc @aa:8 ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 pc @-sp,pc pc+d:8 ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 pc @-sp,pc pc+d:16 ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 pc @-sp,pc ern ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 pc @-sp,pc aa:24 ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 pc @-sp,pc @aa:8 ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 pc @sp+ ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 698 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (7) system control instructions addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic trapa rte sleep ldc trapa #xx:2 ? rte ? sleep ? ldc #xx:8,ccr b 2 ldc #xx:8,exr b 4 ldc rs,ccr b 2 ldc rs,exr b 2 ldc @ers,ccr w 4 ldc @ers,exr w 4 ldc @(d:16,ers),ccr w 6 ldc @(d:16,ers),exr w 6 ldc @(d:32,ers),ccr w 10 ldc @(d:32,ers),exr w 10 ldc @ers+,ccr w 4 ldc @ers+,exr w 4 ldc @aa:16,ccr w 6 ldc @aa:16,exr w 6 ldc @aa:32,ccr w 8 ldc @aa:32,exr w 8 pc @-sp,ccr @-sp, 1 ? ? ? ? ? 8 [9] exr @-sp, appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 699 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic stc andc orc xorc nop stc ccr,rd b 2 stc exr,rd b 2 stc ccr,@erd w 4 stc exr,@erd w 4 stc ccr,@(d:16,erd) w 6 stc exr,@(d:16,erd) w 6 stc ccr,@(d:32,erd) w 10 stc exr,@(d:32,erd) w 10 stc ccr,@-erd w 4 stc exr,@-erd w 4 stc ccr,@aa:16 w 6 stc exr,@aa:16 w 6 stc ccr,@aa:32 w 8 stc exr,@aa:32 w 8 andc #xx:8,ccr b 2 andc #xx:8,exr b 4 orc #xx:8,ccr b 2 orc #xx:8,exr b 4 xorc #xx:8,ccr b 2 xorc #xx:8,exr b 4 nop ? 2 ccr rd8 ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 exr rd8 ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 ccr @erd ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 exr @erd ? ? ? ? ? ? 3 ccr @(d:16,erd) ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 exr @(d:16,erd) ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 ccr @(d:32,erd) ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 exr @(d:32,erd) ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 erd32-2 erd32,ccr @erd ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 erd32-2 erd32,exr @erd ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 ccr @aa:16 ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 exr @aa:16 ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 ccr @aa:32 ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 exr @aa:32 ? ? ? ? ? ? 5 ccr #xx:8 ccr 1 exr #xx:8 exr ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ccr #xx:8 ccr 1 exr #xx:8 exr ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 ccr #xx:8 ccr 1 exr #xx:8 exr ? ? ? ? ? ? 2 pc pc+2 ? ? ? ? ? ? 1 operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 700 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 (8) block transfer instructions addressing mode/ instruction length (bytes) operand size #xx rn @ern @(d,ern) @ ? ern/@ern+ @aa @(d,pc) @@aa ? mnemonic eepmov notes: 1. the number of states is the number of states required for execution when the instruction and its operands are located in on-chip memory. 2. n is the initial value of r4l or r4. [1] seven states for saving or restoring two registers, nine states for three registers, or eleven states for four registers. [2] cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group. [3] set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0. [4] set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 27; otherwise cleared to 0. [5] retains its previous value when the result is zero; otherwise cleared to 0. [6] set to 1 when the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. [7] set to 1 when the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0. [8] set to 1 when the quotient is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. [9] one additional state is required for execution when exr is valid. eepmov.b ? 4 eepmov.w ? 4 if r4l 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 4+2n * 2 repeat @er5 @er6 er5+1 er5 er6+1 er6 r4l-1 r4l until r4l=0 else next; if r4 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 4+2n * 2 repeat @er5 @er6 er5+1 er5 er6+1 er6 r4-1 r4 until r4=0 else next; operation condition code ihnzvc advanced no. of states * 1 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 701 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 a.2 instruction codes table a.2 shows the instruction codes. table a.2 instruction codes add.b #xx:8,rd add.b rs,rd add.w #xx:16,rd add.w rs,rd add.l #xx:32,erd add.l ers,erd adds #1,erd adds #2,erd adds #4,erd addx #xx:8,rd addx rs,rd and.b #xx:8,rd and.b rs,rd and.w #xx:16,rd and.w rs,rd and.l #xx:32,erd and.l ers,erd andc #xx:8,ccr andc #xx:8,exr band #xx:3,rd band #xx:3,@erd band #xx:3,@aa:8 band #xx:3,@aa:16 band #xx:3,@aa:32 bra d:8 (bt d:8) bra d:16 (bt d:16) brn d:8 (bf d:8) brn d:16 (bf d:16) mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion add adds addx and andc band bcc b b w w l l l l l b b b b w w l l b b b b b b b ? ? ? ? 1 0 0 ers imm erd 0 0 0 0 0 0 erd erd erd erd erd erd ers imm imm 0 erd 0 imm 0 imm 0 0 0 8 0 7 0 7 0 0 0 0 9 0 e 1 7 6 7 0 0 0 7 7 7 6 6 4 5 4 5 rd 8 9 9 a a b b b rd e rd 6 9 6 a 1 6 1 6 c e a a 0 8 1 8 rd rd rd rd rd rd rd 0 1 rd 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 7 7 6 6 6 6 0 0 76 0 76 0 imm imm imm imm abs disp disp rs 1 rs 1 0 8 9 rs rs 6 rs 6 f 4 1 3 0 1 imm imm abs disp disp imm imm abs imm appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 702 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bhi d:8 bhi d:16 bls d:8 bls d:16 bcc d:8 (bhs d:8) bcc d:16 (bhs d:16) bcs d:8 (blo d:8) bcs d:16 (blo d:16) bne d:8 bne d:16 beq d:8 beq d:16 bvc d:8 bvc d:16 bvs d:8 bvs d:16 bpl d:8 bpl d:16 bmi d:8 bmi d:16 bge d:8 bge d:16 blt d:8 blt d:16 bgt d:8 bgt d:16 ble d:8 ble d:16 mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion bcc ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 a 8 b 8 c 8 d 8 e 8 f 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp disp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 703 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bclr #xx:3,rd bclr #xx:3,@erd bclr #xx:3,@aa:8 bclr #xx:3,@aa:16 bclr #xx:3,@aa:32 bclr rn,rd bclr rn,@erd bclr rn,@aa:8 bclr rn,@aa:16 bclr rn,@aa:32 biand #xx:3,rd biand #xx:3,@erd biand #xx:3,@aa:8 biand #xx:3,@aa:16 biand #xx:3,@aa:32 bild #xx:3,rd bild #xx:3,@erd bild #xx:3,@aa:8 bild #xx:3,@aa:16 bild #xx:3,@aa:32 bior #xx:3,rd bior #xx:3,@erd bior #xx:3,@aa:8 bior #xx:3,@aa:16 bior #xx:3,@aa:32 mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion bclr biand bild bior b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 imm erd erd imm erd imm erd imm erd 0 1 1 1 imm imm imm imm 0 1 1 1 imm imm imm imm 7 7 7 6 6 6 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 2 d f a a 2 d f a a 6 c e a a 7 c e a a 4 c e a a 1 3 rn 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 rd 0 8 8 rd 0 8 8 rd 0 0 0 rd 0 0 0 rd 0 0 0 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 2 2 2 2 6 6 7 7 4 4 rn rn 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 6 7 7 7 2 2 6 7 4 rn 0 0 0 0 0 7 6 7 7 7 2 2 6 7 4 rn 0 0 0 0 0 abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 imm imm imm imm imm imm imm imm appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 704 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bist #xx:3,rd bist #xx:3,@erd bist #xx:3,@aa:8 bist #xx:3,@aa:16 bist #xx:3,@aa:32 bixor #xx:3,rd bixor #xx:3,@erd bixor #xx:3,@aa:8 bixor #xx:3,@aa:16 bixor #xx:3,@aa:32 bld #xx:3,rd bld #xx:3,@erd bld #xx:3,@aa:8 bld #xx:3,@aa:16 bld #xx:3,@aa:32 bnot #xx:3,rd bnot #xx:3,@erd bnot #xx:3,@aa:8 bnot #xx:3,@aa:16 bnot #xx:3,@aa:32 bnot rn,rd bnot rn,@erd bnot rn,@aa:8 bnot rn,@aa:16 bnot rn,@aa:32 mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion bist bixor bld bnot b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 imm erd imm erd imm erd imm erd erd imm imm imm imm imm imm imm imm 1 1 0 0 imm imm imm imm 1 1 0 0 imm imm imm imm 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 6 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 6 7 7 6 6 7 d f a a 5 c e a a 7 c e a a 1 d f a a 1 d f a a 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 rn 1 3 rd 0 8 8 rd 0 0 0 rd 0 0 0 rd 0 8 8 rd 0 8 8 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 6 6 7 7 5 5 7 7 1 1 1 1 rn rn 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 7 7 7 6 7 5 7 1 1rn 0 0 0 0 0 6 7 7 7 6 7 5 7 1 1rn 0 0 0 0 0 abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs abs appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 705 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bor #xx:3,rd bor #xx:3,@erd bor #xx:3,@aa:8 bor #xx:3,@aa:16 bor #xx:3,@aa:32 bset #xx:3,rd bset #xx:3,@erd bset #xx:3,@aa:8 bset #xx:3,@aa:16 bset #xx:3,@aa:32 bset rn,rd bset rn,@erd bset rn,@aa:8 bset rn,@aa:16 bset rn,@aa:32 bsr d:8 bsr d:16 bst #xx:3,rd bst #xx:3,@erd bst #xx:3,@aa:8 bst #xx:3,@aa:16 bst #xx:3,@aa:32 btst #xx:3,rd btst #xx:3,@erd btst #xx:3,@aa:8 btst #xx:3,@aa:16 btst #xx:3,@aa:32 btst rn,rd btst rn,@erd mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion bor bset bsr bst btst b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b ? ? b b b b b b b b b b b b 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 imm erd imm erd erd imm erd imm erd erd abs abs abs disp abs abs imm imm imm imm imm imm imm imm 0 0 0 0 imm imm imm imm 0 0 0 0 imm imm imm imm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 6 7 7 6 6 5 5 6 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 6 7 4 c e a a 0 d f a a 0 d f a a 5 c 7 d f a a 3 c e a a 3 c 1 3 1 3 rn 1 3 0 1 3 1 3 rn rd 0 0 0 rd 0 8 8 rd 0 8 8 0 rd 0 8 8 rd 0 0 0 rd 0 7 7 7 7 6 6 6 6 7 7 6 4 4 0 0 0 0 7 7 3 3 3 rn rn rn 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 6 6 7 4 0 0 7 3 rn 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 6 6 7 4 0 0 7 3 rn 0 0 0 0 0 abs abs abs disp abs abs abs abs abs abs abs appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 706 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 btst rn,@aa:8 btst rn,@aa:16 btst rn,@aa:32 bxor #xx:3,rd bxor #xx:3,@erd bxor #xx:3,@aa:8 bxor #xx:3,@aa:16 bxor #xx:3,@aa:32 clrmac cmp.b #xx:8,rd cmp.b rs,rd cmp.w #xx:16,rd cmp.w rs,rd cmp.l #xx:32,erd cmp.l ers,erd daa rd das rd dec.b rd dec.w #1,rd dec.w #2,rd dec.l #1,erd dec.l #2,erd divxs.b rs,rd divxs.w rs,erd divxu.b rs,rd divxu.w rs,erd eepmov.b eepmov.w mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion btst bxor clrmac cmp daa das dec divxs divxu eepmov b b b b b b b b ? b b w w l l b b b w w l l b w b w ? ? 0 0 1 imm erd ers 0 0 0 0 0 erd erd erd erd erd imm imm 0 erd 0 imm 0 imm 0 0 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 a 1 7 1 7 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 5 5 7 7 e a a 5 c e a a rd c 9 d a f f f a b b b b 1 1 1 3 b b 1 3 1 3 rs 2 rs 2 0 0 0 5 d 7 f d d rs rs 5 d 0 0 rd 0 0 0 rd rd rd rd rd rd rd rd 0 0 rd c 4 6 7 7 5 5 5 5 3 5 5 1 3 9 9 rn rs rs 8 8 0 0 0 rd f f 6 7 3 5 rn 0 0 6 7 3 5 rn 0 0 abs abs imm abs abs imm abs abs imm cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 707 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 exts.w rd exts.l erd extu.w rd extu.l erd inc.b rd inc.w #1,rd inc.w #2,rd inc.l #1,erd inc.l #2,erd jmp @ern jmp @aa:24 jmp @@aa:8 jsr @ern jsr @aa:24 jsr @@aa:8 ldc #xx:8,ccr ldc #xx:8,exr ldc rs,ccr ldc rs,exr ldc @ers,ccr ldc @ers,exr ldc @(d:16,ers),ccr ldc @(d:16,ers),exr ldc @(d:32,ers),ccr ldc @(d:32,ers),exr ldc @ers+,ccr ldc @ers+,exr ldc @aa:16,ccr ldc @aa:16,exr mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion exts extu inc jmp jsr ldc w l w l b w w l l ? ? ? ? ? ? b b b b w w w w w w w w w w 0 0 ern ern 0 0 0 0 erd erd erd erd ers ers ers ers ers ers ers ers 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 7 7 a b b b b 9 a b d e f 7 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 d f 5 7 0 5 d 7 f 4 0 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 rd rd rd rd rd 0 0 1 rs rs 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 6 6 6 6 7 7 6 6 6 6 7 9 9 f f 8 8 d d b b 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 6 b b 2 2 0 0 abs abs abs abs imm imm disp disp disp disp disp disp appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 708 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 0 0 rd abs rs rd ldc @aa:32,ccr ldc @aa:32,exr ldm.l @sp+, (ern-ern+1) ldm.l @sp+, (ern-ern+2) ldm.l @sp+, (ern-ern+3) ldmac ers,mach ldmac ers,macl mac @ern+,@erm+ mov.b #xx:8,rd mov.b rs,rd mov.b @ers,rd mov.b @(d:16,ers),rd mov.b @(d:32,ers),rd mov.b @ers+,rd mov.b @aa:8,rd mov.b @aa:16,rd mov.b @aa:32,rd mov.b rs,@erd mov.b rs,@(d:16,erd) mov.b rs,@(d:32,erd) mov.b rs,@-erd mov.b rs,@aa:8 mov.b rs,@aa :16 mov.b rs,@aa:32 mov.w #xx:16,rd mov.w rs,rd mov.w @ers,rd mov.w @(d:16,ers),rd mov.w @(d:32,ers),rd mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion ldc ldm ldmac mac mov w w l l l l l ? b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b w w w w w 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 ers ers ers ers erd erd erd erd ers ers ers 0 0 0 ern+1 ern+2 ern+3 0 0 0 0 0 f 0 6 6 7 6 2 6 6 6 6 7 6 3 6 6 7 0 6 6 7 1 1 1 1 1 rd c 8 e 8 c rd a a 8 e 8 c rs a a 9 d 9 f 8 4 4 1 2 3 rs 0 2 8 a 0 rs 0 1 0 0 0 rd rd rd 0 rd rd rd rs rs 0 rs rs rs rd rd rd rd 0 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 b b d d d a a b 2 2 7 7 7 2 a 2 imm abs abs disp abs disp abs imm disp abs abs abs abs disp disp disp cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 709 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 mov.w @ers+,rd mov.w @aa:16,rd mov.w @aa:32,rd mov.w rs,@erd mov.w rs,@(d:16,erd) mov.w rs,@(d:32,erd) mov.w rs,@-erd mov.w rs,@aa:16 mov.w rs,@aa:32 mov.l #xx:32,rd mov.l ers,erd mov.l @ers,erd mov.l @(d:16,ers),erd mov.l @(d:32,ers),erd mov.l @ers+,erd mov.l @aa:16 ,erd mov.l @aa:32 ,erd mov.l ers,@erd mov.l ers,@(d:16,erd) mov.l ers,@(d:32,erd) * mov.l ers,@-erd mov.l ers,@aa:16 mov.l ers,@aa:32 movfpe @aa:16,rd movtpe rs,@aa:16 mulxs.b rs,rd mulxs.w rs,erd mulxu.b rs,rd mulxu.w rs,erd mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion mov movfpe movtpe mulxs mulxu w w w w w w w w w l l l l l l l l l l l l l l b b b w b w 0 1 1 0 1 1 ers erd erd erd erd ers 0 0 0 erd erd erd ers ers ers ers erd erd erd erd 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 erd erd erd erd erd ers ers ers ers ers erd 0 0 erd ers 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 6 6 6 6 6 7 6 6 6 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 d b b 9 f 8 d b b a f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 0 2 8 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 c c rs rs rd rd rd rs rs 0 rs rs rs 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 rd 6 6 6 7 6 6 6 6 6 7 6 6 6 5 5 b 9 f 8 d b b 9 f 8 d b b 0 2 a 0 2 8 a rs rs rs 0 0 rd 6 6 b b 2 a abs disp abs abs abs imm disp abs disp abs disp abs abs cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group disp disp appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 710 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 neg.b rd neg.w rd neg.l erd nop not.b rd not.w rd not.l erd or.b #xx:8,rd or.b rs,rd or.w #xx:16,rd or.w rs,rd or.l #xx:32,erd or.l ers,erd orc #xx:8,ccr orc #xx:8,exr pop.w rn pop.l ern push.w rn push.l ern rotl.b rd rotl.b #2, rd rotl.w rd rotl.w #2, rd rotl.l erd rotl.l #2, erd mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion neg nop not or orc pop push rotl b w l ? b w l b b w w l l b b w l w l b b w w l l 0 0 0 0 0 erd erd erd erd erd 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 c 1 7 6 7 0 0 0 6 0 6 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 7 7 0 7 7 7 rd 4 9 4 a 1 4 1 d 1 d 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 9 b 0 0 1 3 rs 4 rs 4 f 4 7 0 f 0 8 c 9 d b f rd rd 0 rd rd rd rd rd 0 1 rn 0 rn 0 rd rd rd rd imm imm 6 0 6 6 4 4 d d ers 0 0 0 erd ern ern 0 7 f imm imm imm appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 711 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 rotr.b rd rotr.b #2, rd rotr.w rd rotr.w #2, rd rotr.l erd rotr.l #2, erd rotxl.b rd rotxl.b #2, rd rotxl.w rd rotxl.w #2, rd rotxl.l erd rotxl.l #2, erd rotxr.b rd rotxr.b #2, rd rotxr.w rd rotxr.w #2, rd rotxr.l erd rotxr.l #2, erd rte rts shal.b rd shal.b #2, rd shal.w rd shal.w #2, rd shal.l erd shal.l #2, erd mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion rotr rotxl rotxr rte rts shal b b w w l l b b w w l l b b w w l l ? ? b b w w l l 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 erd erd erd erd erd erd erd erd 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 c 9 d b f 0 4 1 5 3 7 0 4 1 5 3 7 7 7 8 c 9 d b f rd rd rd rd rd rd rd rd rd rd rd rd 0 0 rd rd rd rd appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 712 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 shar.b rd shar.b #2, rd shar.w rd shar.w #2, rd shar.l erd shar.l #2, erd shll.b rd shll.b #2, rd shll.w rd shll.w #2, rd shll.l erd shll.l #2, erd shlr.b rd shlr.b #2, rd shlr.w rd shlr.w #2, rd shlr.l erd shlr.l #2, erd sleep stc.b ccr,rd stc.b exr,rd stc.w ccr,@erd stc.w exr,@erd stc.w ccr,@(d:16,erd) stc.w exr,@(d:16,erd) stc.w ccr,@(d:32,erd) stc.w exr,@(d:32,erd) stc.w ccr,@-erd stc.w exr,@-erd mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion shar shll shlr sleep stc b b w w l l b b w w l l b b w w l l ? b b w w w w w w w w 0 0 0 0 0 0 erd erd erd erd erd erd 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 c 9 d b f 0 4 1 5 3 7 0 4 1 5 3 7 8 0 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 rd rd rd rd rd rd rd rd rd rd rd rd 0 rd rd 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 erd erd erd erd erd erd erd erd 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 6 6 6 6 7 7 6 6 9 9 f f 8 8 d d 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 6 b b a a 0 0 disp disp disp disp appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 713 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 stc.w ccr,@aa:16 stc.w exr,@aa:16 stc.w ccr,@aa:32 stc.w exr,@aa:32 stm.l(ern-ern+1), @-sp stm.l (ern-ern+2), @-sp stm.l (ern-ern+3), @-sp stmac mach,erd stmac macl,erd sub.b rs,rd sub.w #xx:16,rd sub.w rs,rd sub.l #xx:32,erd sub.l ers,erd subs #1,erd subs #2,erd subs #4,erd subx #xx:8,rd subx rs,rd tas @erd trapa #x:2 xor.b #xx:8,rd xor.b rs,rd xor.w #xx:16,rd xor.w rs,rd xor.l #xx:32,erd xor.l ers,erd mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion stc stm stmac sub subs subx tas trapa xor w w w w l l l l l b w w l l l l l b b b ? b b w w l l 1 00 ers imm 0 0 0 0 0 0 erd erd erd erd erd erd erd ers 0 0 0 0 ern ern ern erd 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 7 1 7 1 1 1 1 b 1 0 5 d 1 7 6 7 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 9 9 a a b b b rd e 1 7 rd 5 9 5 a 1 4 4 4 4 1 2 3 rs 3 rs 3 0 8 9 rs e rs 5 rs 5 f 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 rd rd rd rd 0 0 rd rd rd 0 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 6 b b b b d d d b 5 8 8 a a f f f 0 0 0 0 c abs abs abs abs imm imm imm imm imm imm cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 714 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 xorc #xx:8,ccr xorc #xx:8,exr mnemonic size instruction format 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte instruc- tion xorc b b 0 0 5 1 4 1 0 5 imm imm note: bit 7 of the 4th byte of the mov.l ers, @(d:32,erd) instruction can be either 1 or 0. legend: address register 32-bit register register field general register register field general register register field general register 000 001 111 er0 er1 er7 0000 0001 0111 1000 1001 1111 r0 r1 r7 e0 e1 e7 0000 0001 0111 1000 1001 1111 r0h r1h r7h r0l r1l r7l 16-bit register 8-bit register imm: abs: disp: rs, rd, rn: ers, erd, ern, erm: the register fields specify general registers as follows. immediate data (2, 3, 8, 16, or 32 bits) absolute address (8, 16, 24, or 32 bits) displacement (8, 16, or 32 bits) register field (4 bits specifying an 8-bit or 16-bit register. the symbols rs, rd, and rn correspond to operand symbols rs, rd, and rn.) register field (3 bits specifying an address register or 32-bit register. the symbols ers, erd, ern, and erm correspond to oper and symbols ers, erd, ern, and erm.) * appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 715 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 a.3 operation code map table a.3 shows the operation code map. table a.3 operation code map (1) instruction code 1st byte 2nd byte ah al bh bl instruction when most significant bit of bh is 0. instruction when most significant bit of bh is 1. 0 nop bra mulxu bset ah note: * cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group. al 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f 1 brn divxu bnot 2 bhi mulxu bclr 3 bls divxu btst stc stmac ldc ldmac 4 orc or bcc rts or bor bior 6 andc and bne rte and 5 xorc xor bcs bsr xor bxor bixor band biand 7 ldc beq trapa bst bist bld bild 8 bvc mov 9 bvs a bpl jmp b bmi eepmov c bge bsr d blt mov e addx subx bgt jsr f ble mov.b add addx cmp subx or xor and mov add sub mov mov cmp table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(2) table a.3(3) ** appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 716 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table a.3 operation code map (2) instruction code 1st byte 2nd byte ah al bh bl 01 0a 0b 0f 10 11 12 13 17 1a 1b 1f 58 6a 79 7a 0 mov inc adds daa dec subs das bra mov mov mov shll shlr rotxl rotxr not 1 ldm brn add add 2 bhi mov cmp cmp 3 stm not bls sub sub 4 shll shlr rotxl rotxr bcc movfpe * or or 5 inc extu dec bcs xor xor 6 mac bne and and 7 inc shll shlr rotxl rotxr extu dec beq ldc stc 8 sleep bvc mov adds shal shar rotl rotr neg subs 9 bvs a clrmac bpl mov b neg bmi add mov sub cmp c shal shar rotl rotr bge movtpe * d inc exts dec blt e tas bgt f inc shal shar rotl rotr exts dec ble bh ah al table a.3(3) table a.3(3) table a.3(3) table a.3(4) table a.3(4) * * note: * cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group. appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 717 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table a.3 operation code map (3) instruction code 1st byte 2nd byte ah al bh bl 3rd byte 4th byte ch cl dh dl r is the register specification field. aa is the absolute address specification. instruction when most significant bit of dh is 0. instruction when most significant bit of dh is 1. notes: ah al bh bl ch cl 01c05 01d05 01f06 7cr06 * 1 7cr07 * 1 7dr06 * 1 7dr07 * 1 7eaa6 * 2 7eaa7 * 2 7faa6 * 2 7faa7 * 2 0 mulxs bset bset bset bset 1 divxs bnot bnot bnot bnot 2 mulxs bclr bclr bclr bclr 3 divxs btst btst btst btst 4 or 5 xor 6 and 789abcdef 1. 2. bor bior bxor bixor band biand bld bild bst bist bor bior bxor bixor band biand bld bild bst bist appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 718 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table a.3 operation code map (4) instruction code 1st byte 2nd byte ah al bh bl 3rd byte 4th byte ch cl dh dl instruction when most significant bit of fh is 0. instruction when most significant bit of fh is 1. 5th byte 6th byte eh el fh fl instruction code 1st byte 2nd byte ah al bh bl 3rd byte 4th byte ch cl dh dl instruction when most significant bit of hh is 0. instruction when most significant bit of hh is 1. note: * aa is the absolute address specification. 5th byte 6th byte eh el fh fl 7th byte 8th byte gh gl hh hl 6a10aaaa6 * 6a10aaaa7 * 6a18aaaa6 * 6a18aaaa7 * ahalbhblchcldhdleh el 0 bset 1 bnot 2 bclr 3 btst bor bior bxor bixor band biand bld bild bst bist 456789abcdef 6a30aaaaaaaa6 * 6a30aaaaaaaa7 * 6a38aaaaaaaa6 * 6a38aaaaaaaa7 * ahalbhbl ... fhflgh gl 0 bset 1 bnot 2 bclr 3 btst bor bior bxor bixor band biand bld bild bst bist 456789abcdef appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 719 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 a.4 number of states required for instruction execution the tables in this section can be used to calculate the number of states required for instruction execution by the cpu. table a.5 indicates the number of instruction fetch, data read/write, and other cycles occurring in each instruction. table a.4 indicates the number of states required for each cycle. the number of states required for execution of an instruction can be calculated from these two tables as follows: execution states = i s i + j s j + k s k + l s l + m s m + n s n examples: advanced mode, program code and stack located in external memory, on-chip supporting modules accessed in two states with 8-bit bus width, external devices accessed in three states with one wait state and 16-bit bus width. 1. bset #0, @ffffc7:8 from table a.5: i = l = 2, j = k = m = n = 0 from table a.4: s i = 4, s l = 2 number of states required for execution = 2 4 + 2 2 = 12 2. jsr @@30 from table a.5: i = j = k = 2, l = m = n = 0 from table a.4: s i = s j = s k = 4 number of states required for execution = 2 4 + 2 4 + 2 4 = 24 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 720 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table a.4 number of states per cycle access conditions external device on-chip supporting module 8-bit bus 16-bit bus cycle on-chip memory 8-bit bus 16-bit bus 2-state access 3-state access 2-state access 3-state access instruction fetch s i 1 4 2 4 6 + 2m 2 3 + m branch address read s j stack operation s k byte data access s l 223 + m word data access s m 4 4 6 + 2m internal operation s n 1111111 legend: m: number of wait states inserted into external device access appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 721 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table a.5 number of cycles in instruction execution instruction fetch branch address read stack operation byte data access word data access internal operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n add add.b #xx:8,rd 1 add.b rs,rd 1 add.w #xx:16,rd 2 add.w rs,rd 1 add.l #xx:32,erd 3 add.l ers,erd 1 adds adds #1/2/4,erd 1 addx addx #xx:8,rd 1 addx rs,rd 1 and and.b #xx:8,rd 1 and.b rs,rd 1 and.w #xx:16,rd 2 and.w rs,rd 1 and.l #xx:32,erd 3 and.l ers,erd 2 andc andc #xx:8,ccr 1 andc #xx:8,exr 2 band band #xx:3,rd 1 band #xx:3,@erd 2 1 band #xx:3,@aa:8 2 1 band #xx:3,@aa:16 3 1 band #xx:3,@aa:32 4 1 bcc bra d:8 (bt d:8) 2 brn d:8 (bf d:8) 2 bhi d:8 2 bls d:8 2 bcc d:8 (bhs d:8) 2 bcs d:8 (blo d:8) 2 bne d:8 2 beq d:8 2 bvc d:8 2 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 722 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction fetch branch address read stack operation byte data access word data access internal operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n bcc bvs d:8 2 bpl d:8 2 bmi d:8 2 bge d:8 2 blt d:8 2 bgt d:8 2 ble d:8 2 bra d:16 (bt d:16) 2 1 brn d:16 (bf d:16) 2 1 bhi d:16 2 1 bls d:16 2 1 bcc d:16 (bhs d:16) 2 1 bcs d:16 (blo d:16) 2 1 bne d:16 2 1 beq d:16 2 1 bvc d:16 2 1 bvs d:16 2 1 bpl d:16 2 1 bmi d:16 2 1 bge d:16 2 1 blt d:16 2 1 bgt d:16 2 1 ble d:16 2 1 bclr bclr #xx:3,rd 1 bclr #xx:3,@erd 2 2 bclr #xx:3,@aa:8 2 2 bclr #xx:3,@aa:16 3 2 bclr #xx:3,@aa:32 4 2 bclr rn,rd 1 bclr rn,@erd 2 2 bclr rn,@aa:8 2 2 bclr rn,@aa:16 3 2 bclr rn,@aa:32 4 2 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 723 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction fetch branch address read stack operation byte data access word data access internal operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n biand biand #xx:3,rd 1 biand #xx:3,@erd 2 1 biand #xx:3,@aa:8 2 1 biand #xx:3,@aa:16 3 1 biand #xx:3,@aa:32 4 1 bild bild #xx:3,rd 1 bild #xx:3,@erd 2 1 bild #xx:3,@aa:8 2 1 bild #xx:3,@aa:16 3 1 bild #xx:3,@aa:32 4 1 bior bior #xx:8,rd 1 bior #xx:8,@erd 2 1 bior #xx:8,@aa:8 2 1 bior #xx:8,@aa:16 3 1 bior #xx:8,@aa:32 4 1 bist bist #xx:3,rd 1 bist #xx:3,@erd 2 2 bist #xx:3,@aa:8 2 2 bist #xx:3,@aa:16 3 2 bist #xx:3,@aa:32 4 2 bixor bixor #xx:3,rd 1 bixor #xx:3,@erd 2 1 bixor #xx:3,@aa:8 2 1 bixor #xx:3,@aa:16 3 1 bixor #xx:3,@aa:32 4 1 bld bld #xx:3,rd 1 bld #xx:3,@erd 2 1 bld #xx:3,@aa:8 2 1 bld #xx:3,@aa:16 3 1 bld #xx:3,@aa:32 4 1 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 724 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction fetch branch address read stack operation byte data access word data access internal operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n bnot bnot #xx:3,rd 1 bnot #xx:3,@erd 2 2 bnot #xx:3,@aa:8 2 2 bnot #xx:3,@aa:16 3 2 bnot #xx:3,@aa:32 4 2 bnot rn,rd 1 bnot rn,@erd 2 2 bnot rn,@aa:8 2 2 bnot rn,@aa:16 3 2 bnot rn,@aa:32 4 2 bor bor #xx:3,rd 1 bor #xx:3,@erd 2 1 bor #xx:3,@aa:8 2 1 bor #xx:3,@aa:16 3 1 bor #xx:3,@aa:32 4 1 bset bset #xx:3,rd 1 bset #xx:3,@erd 2 2 bset #xx:3,@aa:8 2 2 bset #xx:3,@aa:16 3 2 bset #xx:3,@aa:32 4 2 bset rn,rd 1 bset rn,@erd 2 2 bset rn,@aa:8 2 2 bset rn,@aa:16 3 2 bset rn,@aa:32 4 2 bsr bsr d:8 2 2 bsr d:16 2 2 1 bst bst #xx:3,rd 1 bst #xx:3,@erd 2 2 bst #xx:3,@aa:8 2 2 bst #xx:3,@aa:16 3 2 bst #xx:3,@aa:32 4 2 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 725 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction fetch branch address read stack operation byte data access word data access internal operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n btst btst #xx:3,rd 1 btst #xx:3,@erd 2 1 btst #xx:3,@aa:8 2 1 btst #xx:3,@aa:16 3 1 btst #xx:3,@aa:32 4 1 btst rn,rd 1 btst rn,@erd 2 1 btst rn,@aa:8 2 1 btst rn,@aa:16 3 1 btst rn,@aa:32 4 1 bxor bxor #xx:3,rd 1 bxor #xx:3,@erd 2 1 bxor #xx:3,@aa:8 2 1 bxor #xx:3,@aa:16 3 1 bxor #xx:3,@aa:32 4 1 clrmac clrmac cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group cmp cmp.b #xx:8,rd 1 cmp.b rs,rd 1 cmp.w #xx:16,rd 2 cmp.w rs,rd 1 cmp.l #xx:32,erd 3 cmp.l ers,erd 1 daa daa rd 1 das das rd 1 dec dec.b rd 1 dec.w #1/2,rd 1 dec.l #1/2,erd 1 divxs divxs.b rs,rd 2 11 divxs.w rs,erd 2 19 divxu divxu.b rs,rd 1 11 divxu.w rs,erd 1 19 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 726 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction fetch branch address read stack operation byte data access word data access internal operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n eepmov eepmov.b 2 2n+2 * 2 eepmov.w 2 2n+2 * 2 exts exts.w rd 1 exts.l erd 1 extu extu.w rd 1 extu.l erd 1 inc inc.b rd 1 inc.w #1/2,rd 1 inc.l #1/2,erd 1 jmp jmp @ern 2 jmp @aa:24 2 1 jmp @@aa:8 2 2 1 jsr jsr @ern 2 2 jsr @aa:24 2 2 1 jsr @@aa:8 2 2 2 ldc ldc #xx:8,ccr 1 ldc #xx:8,exr 2 ldc rs,ccr 1 ldc rs,exr 1 ldc @ers,ccr 2 1 ldc @ers,exr 2 1 ldc @(d:16,ers),ccr 3 1 ldc @(d:16,ers),exr 3 1 ldc @(d:32,ers),ccr 5 1 ldc @(d:32,ers),exr 5 1 ldc @ers+,ccr 2 1 1 ldc @ers+,exr 2 1 1 ldc @aa:16,ccr 3 1 ldc @aa:16,exr 3 1 ldc @aa:32,ccr 4 1 ldc @aa:32,exr 4 1 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 727 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction fetch branch address read stack operation byte data access word data access internal operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n ldm ldm.l @sp+, (ern-ern+1) 24 1 ldm.l @sp+, (ern-ern+2) 26 1 ldm.l @sp+, (ern-ern+3) 28 1 ldmac ldmac ers,mach cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group ldmac ers,macl mac mac @ern+,@erm+ cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group mov mov.b #xx:8,rd 1 mov.b rs,rd 1 mov.b @ers,rd 1 1 mov.b @(d:16,ers),rd 2 1 mov.b @(d:32,ers),rd 4 1 mov.b @ers+,rd 1 1 1 mov.b @aa:8,rd 1 1 mov.b @aa:16,rd 2 1 mov.b @aa:32,rd 3 1 mov.b rs,@erd 1 1 mov.b rs,@(d:16,erd) 2 1 mov.b rs,@(d:32,erd) 4 1 mov.b rs,@-erd 1 1 1 mov.b rs,@aa:8 1 1 mov.b rs,@aa:16 2 1 mov.b rs,@aa:32 3 1 mov.w #xx:16,rd 2 mov.w rs,rd 1 mov.w @ers,rd 1 1 mov.w @(d:16,ers),rd 2 1 mov.w @(d:32,ers),rd 4 1 mov.w @ers+,rd 1 1 1 mov.w @aa:16,rd 2 1 mov.w @aa:32,rd 3 1 mov.w rs,@erd 1 1 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 728 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction fetch branch address read stack operation byte data access word data access internal operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n mov mov.w rs,@(d:16,erd) 2 1 mov.w rs,@(d:32,erd) 4 1 mov.w rs,@-erd 1 1 1 mov.w rs,@aa:16 2 1 mov.w rs,@aa:32 3 1 mov.l #xx:32,erd 3 mov.l ers,erd 1 mov.l @ers,erd 2 2 mov.l @(d:16,ers),erd 3 2 mov.l @(d:32,ers),erd 5 2 mov.l @ers+,erd 2 2 1 mov.l @aa:16,erd 3 2 mov.l @aa:32,erd 4 2 mov.l ers,@erd 2 2 mov.l ers,@(d:16,erd) 3 2 mov.l ers,@(d:32,erd) 5 2 mov.l ers,@-erd 2 2 1 mov.l ers,@aa:16 3 2 mov.l ers,@aa:32 4 2 movfpe movfpe @:aa:16,rd can not be used in the h8s/2345 group movtpe movtpe rs,@:aa:16 mulxs mulxs.b rs,rd 2 11 mulxs.w rs,erd 2 19 mulxu mulxu.b rs,rd 1 11 mulxu.w rs,erd 1 19 neg neg.b rd 1 neg.w rd 1 neg.l erd 1 nop nop 1 not not.b rd 1 not.w rd 1 not.l erd 1 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 729 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction fetch branch address read stack operation byte data access word data access internal operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n or or.b #xx:8,rd 1 or.b rs,rd 1 or.w #xx:16,rd 2 or.w rs,rd 1 or.l #xx:32,erd 3 or.l ers,erd 2 orc orc #xx:8,ccr 1 orc #xx:8,exr 2 pop pop.w rn 1 1 1 pop.l ern 2 2 1 push push.w rn 1 1 1 push.l ern 2 2 1 rotl rotl.b rd 1 rotl.b #2,rd 1 rotl.w rd 1 rotl.w #2,rd 1 rotl.l erd 1 rotl.l #2,erd 1 rotr rotr.b rd 1 rotr.b #2,rd 1 rotr.w rd 1 rotr.w #2,rd 1 rotr.l erd 1 rotr.l #2,erd 1 rotxl rotxl.b rd 1 rotxl.b #2,rd 1 rotxl.w rd 1 rotxl.w #2,rd 1 rotxl.l erd 1 rotxl.l #2,erd 1 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 730 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction fetch branch address read stack operation byte data access word data access internal operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n rotxr rotxr.b rd 1 rotxr.b #2,rd 1 rotxr.w rd 1 rotxr.w #2,rd 1 rotxr.l erd 1 rotxr.l #2,erd 1 rte rte 2 2/3 * 1 1 rts rts 2 2 1 shal shal.b rd 1 shal.b #2,rd 1 shal.w rd 1 shal.w #2,rd 1 shal.l erd 1 shal.l #2,erd 1 shar shar.b rd 1 shar.b #2,rd 1 shar.w rd 1 shar.w #2,rd 1 shar.l erd 1 shar.l #2,erd 1 shll shll.b rd 1 shll.b #2,rd 1 shll.w rd 1 shll.w #2,rd 1 shll.l erd 1 shll.l #2,erd 1 shlr shlr.b rd 1 shlr.b #2,rd 1 shlr.w rd 1 shlr.w #2,rd 1 shlr.l erd 1 shlr.l #2,erd 1 sleep sleep 1 1 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 731 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction fetch branch address read stack operation byte data access word data access internal operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n stc stc.b ccr,rd 1 stc.b exr,rd 1 stc.w ccr,@erd 2 1 stc.w exr,@erd 2 1 stc.w ccr,@(d:16,erd) 3 1 stc.w exr,@(d:16,erd) 3 1 stc.w ccr,@(d:32,erd) 5 1 stc.w exr,@(d:32,erd) 5 1 stc.w ccr,@-erd 2 1 1 stc.w exr,@-erd 2 1 1 stc.w ccr,@aa:16 3 1 stc.w exr,@aa:16 3 1 stc.w ccr,@aa:32 4 1 stc.w exr,@aa:32 4 1 stm stm.l (ern-ern+1), @-sp 24 1 stm.l (ern-ern+2), @-sp 26 1 stm.l (ern-ern+3), @-sp 28 1 stmac stmac mach,erd cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group stmac macl,erd sub sub.b rs,rd 1 sub.w #xx:16,rd 2 sub.w rs,rd 1 sub.l #xx:32,erd 3 sub.l ers,erd 1 subs subs #1/2/4,erd 1 subx subx #xx:8,rd 1 subx rs,rd 1 tas tas @erd 2 2 trapa trapa #x:2 advanced 2 2 2/3 * 1 2 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 732 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction fetch branch address read stack operation byte data access word data access internal operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n xor xor.b #xx:8,rd 1 xor.b rs,rd 1 xor.w #xx:16,rd 2 xor.w rs,rd 1 xor.l #xx:32,erd 3 xor.l ers,erd 2 xorc xorc #xx:8,ccr 1 xorc #xx:8,exr 2 notes: 1. 2 when exr is invalid, 3 when exr is valid. 2. when n bytes of data are transferred. appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 733 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 a.5 bus states during instruction execution table a.6 indicates the types of cycles that occur during instruction execution by the cpu. see table a.4 for the number of states per cycle. how to read the table: instruction jmp@aa:24 r:w 2nd internal operation 1 state r:w ea 1 2345678 end of instruction order of execution read effective address (word-size read) no read or write read 2nd word of current instruction (word-size read) legend r:b byte-size read r:w word-size read w:b byte-size write w:w word-size write :m transfer of the bus is not performed immediately after this cycle 2nd address of 2nd word (3rd and 4th bytes) 3rd address of 3rd word (5th and 6th bytes) 4th address of 4th word (7th and 8th bytes) 5th address of 5th word (9th and 10th bytes) next address of next instruction ea effective address vec vector address appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 734 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 figure a.1 shows timing waveforms for the address bus and the rd , hwr , and lwr signals during execution of the above instruction with an 8-bit bus, using three-state access with no wait states. address bus rd hwr , lwr r:w 2nd fetching 2nd byte of instruction at jump address fetching 1nd byte of instruction at jump address fetching 4th byte of instruction fetching 3rd byte of instruction r:w ea high level internal operation figure a.1 address bus, rd rd rd rd , hwr hwr hwr hwr , and lwr lwr lwr lwr timing (8-bit bus, three-state access, no wait states) appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 735 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table a.6 instruction execution cycles instruction add.b #xx:8,rd r:w next add.b rs,rd r:w next add.w #xx:16,rd r:w 2nd r:w next add.w rs,rd r:w next add.l #xx:32,erd r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next add.l ers,erd r:w next adds #1/2/4,erd r:w next addx #xx:8,rd r:w next addx rs,rd r:w next and.b #xx:8,rd r:w next and.b rs,rd r:w next and.w #xx:16,rd r:w 2nd r:w next and.w rs,rd r:w next and.l #xx:32,erd r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next and.l ers,erd r:w 2nd r:w next andc #xx:8,ccr r:w next andc #xx:8,exr r:w 2nd r:w next band #xx:3,rd r:w next band #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next band #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next band #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b ea r:w:m next band #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b ea r:w:m next bra d:8 (bt d:8) r:w next r:w ea brn d:8 (bf d:8) r:w next r:w ea bhi d:8 r:w next r:w ea bls d:8 r:w next r:w ea bcc d:8 (bhs d:8) r:w next r:w ea bcs d:8 (blo d:8) r:w next r:w ea bne d:8 r:w next r:w ea beq d:8 r:w next r:w ea bvc d:8 r:w next r:w ea bvs d:8 r:w next r:w ea bpl d:8 r:w next r:w ea bmi d:8 r:w next r:w ea bge d:8 r:w next r:w ea blt d:8 r:w next r:w ea bgt d:8 r:w next r:w ea 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 736 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction ble d:8 r:w next r:w ea bra d:16 (bt d:16) r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state brn d:16 (bf d:16) r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state bhi d:16 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state bls d:16 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state bcc d:16 (bhs d:16) r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state bcs d:16 (blo d:16) r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state bne d:16 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state beq d:16 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state bvc d:16 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state bvs d:16 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state bpl d:16 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state bmi d:16 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state bge d:16 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state blt d:16 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state bgt d:16 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state ble d:16 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state bclr #xx:3,rd r:w next bclr #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bclr #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bclr #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 737 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction bclr #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bclr rn,rd r:w next bclr rn,@erd r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bclr rn,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bclr rn,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bclr rn,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea biand #xx:3,rd r:w next biand #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next biand #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next biand #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b ea r:w:m next biand #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b ea r:w:m next bild #xx:3,rd r:w next bild #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next bild #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next bild #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b ea r:w:m next bild #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b ea r:w:m next bior #xx:3,rd r:w next bior #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next bior #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next bior #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b ea r:w:m next bior #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b ea r:w:m next bist #xx:3,rd r:w next bist #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bist #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bist #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bist #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bixor #xx:3,rd r:w next bixor #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next bixor #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next bixor #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b ea r:w:m next bixor #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b ea r:w:m next bld #xx:3,rd r:w next bld #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next bld #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next bld #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b ea r:w:m next bld #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b ea r:w:m next bnot #xx:3,rd r:w next 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 738 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction bnot #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bnot #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bnot #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bnot #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bnot rn,rd r:w next bnot rn,@erd r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bnot rn,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bnot rn,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bnot rn,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bor #xx:3,rd r:w next bor #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next bor #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next bor #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b ea r:w:m next bor #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b ea r:w:m next bset #xx:3,rd r:w next bset #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bset #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bset #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bset #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bset rn,rd r:w next bset rn,@erd r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bset rn,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bset rn,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bset rn,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bsr d:8 r:w next r:w ea w:w :m stack (h) w:w stack (l) bsr d:16 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea w:w :m stack (h) w:w stack (l) 1 state bst #xx:3,rd r:w next bst #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bst #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bst #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea bst #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b:m ea r:w:m next w:b ea btst #xx:3,rd r:w next btst #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 739 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 btst #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next btst #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b ea r:w:m next btst #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b ea r:w:m next btst rn,rd r:w next btst rn,@erd r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next btst rn,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next btst rn,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b ea r:w:m next btst rn,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b ea r:w:m next bxor #xx:3,rd r:w next bxor #xx:3,@erd r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next bxor #xx:3,@aa:8 r:w 2nd r:b ea r:w:m next bxor #xx:3,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:b ea r:w:m next bxor #xx:3,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:b ea r:w:m next clrmac cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group cmp.b #xx:8,rd r:w next cmp.b rs,rd r:w next cmp.w #xx:16,rd r:w 2nd r:w next cmp.w rs,rd r:w next cmp.l #xx:32,erd r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next cmp.l ers,erd r:w next daa rd r:w next das rd r:w next dec.b rd r:w next dec.w #1/2,rd r:w next dec.l #1/2,erd r:w next divxs.b rs,rd r:w 2nd r:w next internal operation, 11 states divxs.w rs,erd r:w 2nd r:w next internal operation, 19 states divxu.b rs,rd r:w next internal operation, 11 states divxu.w rs,erd r:w next internal operation, 19 states eepmov.b r:w 2nd r:b eas * 1 r:b ead * 1 r:b eas * 2 w:b ead * 2 r:w next eepmov.w r:w 2nd r:b eas * 1 r:b ead * 1 r:b eas * 2 w:b ead * 2 r:w next exts.w rd r:w next repeated n times * 2 exts.l erd r:w next extu.w rd r:w next extu.l erd r:w next inc.b rd r:w next appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 740 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction inc.w #1/2,rd r:w next inc.l #1/2,erd r:w next jmp @ern r:w next r:w ea jmp @aa:24 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea 1 state jmp @@aa:8 r:w next r:w:m aa:8 r:w aa:8 internal operation, r:w ea 1 state jsr @ern r:w next r:w ea w:w :m stack (h) w:w stack (l) jsr @aa:24 r:w 2nd internal operation, r:w ea w:w :m stack (h) w:w stack (l) 1 state jsr @@aa:8 r:w next r:w:m aa:8 r:w aa:8 w:w :m stack (h) w:w stack (l) r:w ea ldc #xx:8,ccr r:w next ldc #xx:8,exr r:w 2nd r:w next ldc rs,ccr r:w next ldc rs,exr r:w next ldc @ers,ccr r:w 2nd r:w next r:w ea ldc @ers,exr r:w 2nd r:w next r:w ea ldc @(d:16,ers),ccr r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next r:w ea ldc @(d:16,ers),exr r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next r:w ea ldc @(d:32,ers),ccr r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:w 5th r:w next r:w ea ldc @(d:32,ers),exr r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:w 5th r:w next r:w ea ldc @ers+,ccr r:w 2nd r:w next internal operation, r:w ea 1 state ldc @ers+,exr r:w 2nd r:w next internal operation, r:w ea 1 state ldc @aa:16,ccr r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next r:w ea ldc @aa:16,exr r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next r:w ea ldc @aa:32,ccr r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:w next r:w ea ldc @aa:32,exr r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:w next r:w ea ldm.l @sp+, r:w 2nd r:w:m next internal operation, r:w:m stack (h) * 3 r:w stack (l) * 3 (ern ? ern+1) 1 state 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 741 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction ldm.l @sp+,(ern ? ern+2) r:w 2nd r:w next internal operation, r:w:m stack (h) * 3 r:w stack (l) * 3 1 state ldm.l @sp+,(ern ? ern+3) r:w 2nd r:w next internal operation, r:w:m stack (h) * 3 r:w stack (l) * 3 1 state ldmac ers,mach cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group ldmac ers,macl mac @ern+,@erm+ mov.b #xx:8,rd r:w next mov.b rs,rd r:w next mov.b @ers,rd r:w next r:b ea mov.b @(d:16,ers),rd r:w 2nd r:w next r:b ea mov.b @(d:32,ers),rd r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:w next r:b ea mov.b @ers+,rd r:w next internal operation, r:b ea 1 state mov.b @aa:8,rd r:w next r:b ea mov.b @aa:16,rd r:w 2nd r:w next r:b ea mov.b @aa:32,rd r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next r:b ea mov.b rs,@erd r:w next w:b ea mov.b rs,@(d:16,erd) r:w 2nd r:w next w:b ea mov.b rs,@(d:32,erd) r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:w next w:b ea mov.b rs,@ ? erd r:w next internal operation, w:b ea 1 state mov.b rs,@aa:8 r:w next w:b ea mov.b rs,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w next w:b ea mov.b rs,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next w:b ea mov.w #xx:16,rd r:w 2nd r:w next mov.w rs,rd r:w next mov.w @ers,rd r:w next r:w ea mov.w @(d:16,ers),rd r:w 2nd r:w next r:w ea mov.w @(d:32,ers),rd r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:w next r:w ea mov.w @ers+, rd r:w next internal operation, r:w ea 1 state mov.w @aa:16,rd r:w 2nd r:w next r:w ea mov.w @aa:32,rd r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next r:b ea mov.w rs,@erd r:w next w:w ea 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 742 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 mov.w rs,@(d:16,erd) r:w 2nd r:w next w:w ea mov.w rs,@(d:32,erd) r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:e 4th r:w next w:w ea mov.w rs,@ ? erd r:w next internal operation, w:w ea 1 state mov.w rs,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w next w:w ea mov.w rs,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next w:w ea mov.l #xx:32,erd r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next mov.l ers,erd r:w next mov.l @ers,erd r:w 2nd r:w:m next r:w:m ea r:w ea+2 mov.l @(d:16,ers),erd r:w 2nd r:w:m 3rd r:w next r:w:m ea r:w ea+2 mov.l @(d:32,ers),erd r:w 2nd r:w:m 3rd r:w:m 4th r:w 5th r:w next r:w:m ea r:w ea+2 mov.l @ers+,erd r:w 2nd r:w:m next internal operation, r:w:m ea r:w ea+2 1 state mov.l @aa:16,erd r:w 2nd r:w:m 3rd r:w next r:w:m ea r:w ea+2 mov.l @aa:32,erd r:w 2nd r:w:m 3rd r:w 4th r:w next r:w:m ea r:w ea+2 mov.l ers,@erd r:w 2nd r:w:m next w:w:m ea w:w ea+2 mov.l ers,@(d:16,erd) r:w 2nd r:w:m 3rd r:w next w:w:m ea w:w ea+2 mov.l ers,@(d:32,erd) r:w 2nd r:w:m 3rd r:w:m 4th r:w 5th r:w next w:w:m ea w:w ea+2 mov.l ers,@ ? erd r:w 2nd r:w:m next internal operation, w:w:m ea w:w ea+2 1 state mov.l ers,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w:m 3rd r:w next w:w:m ea w:w ea+2 mov.l ers,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w:m 3rd r:w 4th r:w next w:w:m ea w:w ea+2 movfpe @aa:16,rd cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group movtpe rs,@aa:16 mulxs.b rs,rd r:w 2nd r:w next internal operation, 11 states mulxs.w rs,erd r:w 2nd r:w next internal operation, 19 states mulxu.b rs,rd r:w next internal operation, 11 states mulxu.w rs,erd r:w next internal operation, 19 states neg.b rd r:w next neg.w rd r:w next neg.l erd r:w next nop r:w next not.b rd r:w next not.w rd r:w next not.l erd r:w next or.b #xx:8,rd r:w next or.b rs,rd r:w next appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 743 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction or.w #xx:16,rd r:w 2nd r:w next or.w rs,rd r:w next or.l #xx:32,erd r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next or.l ers,erd r:w 2nd r:w next orc #xx:8,ccr r:w next orc #xx:8,exr r:w 2nd r:w next pop.w rn r:w next internal operation, r:w ea 1 state pop.l ern r:w 2nd r:w:m next internal operation, r:w:m ea r:w ea+2 1 state push.w rn r:w next internal operation, w:w ea 1 state push.l ern r:w 2nd r:w:m next internal operation, w:w:m ea w:w ea+2 1 state rotl.b rd r:w next rotl.b #2,rd r:w next rotl.w rd r:w next rotl.w #2,rd r:w next rotl.l erd r:w next rotl.l #2,erd r:w next rotr.b rd r:w next rotr.b #2,rd r:w next rotr.w rd r:w next rotr.w #2,rd r:w next rotr.l erd r:w next rotr.l #2,erd r:w next rotxl.b rd r:w next rotxl.b #2,rd r:w next rotxl.w rd r:w next rotxl.w #2,rd r:w next rotxl.l erd r:w next rotxl.l #2,erd r:w next rotxr.b rd r:w next rotxr.b #2,rd r:w next rotxr.w rd r:w next rotxr.w #2,rd r:w next rotxr.l erd r:w next 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 744 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction rotxr.l #2,erd r:w next rte r:w next r:w stack (exr) r:w stack (h) r:w stack (l) internal operation, r:w * 4 1 state rts r:w next r:w:m stack (h) r:w stack (l) internal operation, r:w * 4 1 state shal.b rd r:w next shal.b #2,rd r:w next shal.w rd r:w next shal.w #2,rd r:w next shal.l erd r:w next shal.l #2,erd r:w next shar.b rd r:w next shar.b #2,rd r:w next shar.w rd r:w next shar.w #2,rd r:w next shar.l erd r:w next shar.l #2,erd r:w next shll.b rd r:w next shll.b #2,rd r:w next shll.w rd r:w next shll.w #2,rd r:w next shll.l erd r:w next shll.l #2,erd r:w next shlr.b rd r:w next shlr.b #2,rd r:w next shlr.w rd r:w next shlr.w #2,rd r:w next shlr.l erd r:w next shlr.l #2,erd r:w next sleep r:w next internal operation:m stc ccr,rd r:w next stc exr,rd r:w next stc ccr,@erd r:w 2nd r:w next w:w ea stc exr,@erd r:w 2nd r:w next w:w ea stc ccr,@(d:16,erd) r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next w:w ea 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 745 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction stc exr,@(d:16,erd) r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next w:w ea stc ccr,@(d:32,erd) r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:w 5th r:w next w:w ea stc exr,@(d:32,erd) r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:w 5th r:w next w:w ea stc ccr,@ ? erd r:w 2nd r:w next internal operation, w:w ea 1 state stc exr,@ ? erd r:w 2nd r:w next internal operation, w:w ea 1 state stc ccr,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next w:w ea stc exr,@aa:16 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next w:w ea stc ccr,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:w next w:w ea stc exr,@aa:32 r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w 4th r:w next w:w ea stm.l(ern ? ern+1),@ ? sp r:w 2nd r:w:m next internal operation, w:w:m stack (h) * 3 w:w stack (l) * 3 1 state stm.l(ern ? ern+2),@ ? sp r:w 2nd r:w:m next internal operation, w:w:m stack (h) * 3 w:w stack (l) * 3 1 state stm.l(ern ? ern+3),@ ? sp r:w 2nd r:w:m next internal operation, w:w:m stack (h) * 3 w:w stack (l) * 3 1 state stmac mach,erd cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group stmac macl,erd sub.b rs,rd r:w next sub.w #xx:16,rd r:w 2nd r:w next sub.w rs,rd r:w next sub.l #xx:32,erd r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next sub.l ers,erd r:w next subs #1/2/4,erd r:w next subx #xx:8,rd r:w next subx rs,rd r:w next tas @erd r:w 2nd r:w next r:b:m ea w:b ea trapa #x:2 r:w next internal operation, w:w stack (l) w:w stack (h) w:w stack (exr) r:w:m vec r:w vec+2 internal operation, r:w * 7 1 state 1 state xor.b #xx8,rd r:w next xor.b rs,rd r:w next xor.w #xx:16,rd r:w 2nd r:w next xor.w rs,rd r:w next xor.l #xx:32,erd r:w 2nd r:w 3rd r:w next 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 746 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction xor.l ers,erd r:w 2nd r:w next xorc #xx:8,ccr r:w next xorc #xx:8,exr r:w 2nd r:w next reset exception r:w:m vec r:w vec+2 internal operation, r:w * 5 handling 1 state interrupt exception r:w * 6 internal operation, w:w stack (l) w:w stack (h) w:w stack (exr) r:w:m vec r:w vec+2 internal operation, r:w * 7 handling 1 state 1 state notes: 1. eas is the contents of er5. ead is the contents of er6. 2. eas is the contents of er5. ead is the contents of er6. both registers are incremented by 1 after execution of the instruct ion. n is the initial value of r4l or r4. if n = 0, these bus cycles are not executed. 3. repeated two times to save or restore two registers, three times for three registers, or four times for four registers. 4. start address after return. 5. start address of the program. 6. prefetch address, equal to two plus the pc value pushed onto the stack. in recovery from sleep mode or software standby mod e the read operation is replaced by an internal operation. 7. start address of the interrupt-handling routine. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 747 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 a.6 condition code modification this section indicates the effect of each cpu instruction on the condition code. the notation used in the table is defined below. m = 31 for longword operands 15 for word operands 7 for byte operands si di ri dn ? 0 1 * z' c' the i-th bit of the source operand the i-th bit of the destination operand the i-th bit of the result the specified bit in the destination operand not affected modified according to the result of the instruction (see definition) always cleared to 0 always set to 1 undetermined (no guaranteed value) z flag before instruction execution c flag before instruction execution appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 748 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 table a.7 condition code modification instruction h n z v c definition add h = sm ? 4 dm ? 4 + dm ? 4 rm?4 + sm ? 4 rm?4 n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 v = sm dm rm + sm dm rm c = sm dm + dm rm + sm rm adds ????? addx h = sm ? 4 dm ? 4 + dm ? 4 rm?4 + sm ? 4 rm?4 n = rm z = z' rm ...... r0 v = sm dm rm + sm dm rm c = sm dm + dm rm + sm rm and ? 0 ? n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 andc stores the corresponding bits of the result. no flags change when the operand is exr. band ???? c = c' dn bcc ????? bclr ????? biand ???? c = c' dn bild ???? c = dn bior ???? c = c' + dn bist ????? bixor ???? c = c' dn + c' dn bld ???? c = dn bnot ????? bor ???? c = c' + dn bset ????? bsr ????? bst ????? btst ?? ?? z = dn bxor ???? c = c' dn + c' dn appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 749 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction h n z v c definition clrmac cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group cmp h = sm ? 4 dm?4 + dm?4 rm ? 4 + sm ? 4 rm ? 4 n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 v = sm dm rm + sm dm rm c = sm dm + dm rm + sm rm daa * * n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 c: decimal arithmetic carry das * * n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 c: decimal arithmetic borrow dec ? ? n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 v = dm rm divxs ? ?? n = sm dm + sm dm z = sm sm?1 ...... s0 divxu ? ?? n = sm z = sm sm?1 ...... s0 eepmov ????? exts ? 0 ? n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 extu ? 0 0 ? z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 inc ? ? n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 v = dm rm jmp ????? jsr ????? ldc stores the corresponding bits of the result. no flags change when the operand is exr. ldm ????? appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 750 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction h n z v c definition ldmac cannnot be used in the h8s/2345 group mac mov ? 0 ? n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 movfpe can not be used in the h8s/2345 group movtpe mulxs ? ?? n = r2m z = r2m r2m?1 ...... r0 mulxu ????? neg h = dm ? 4 + rm ? 4 n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 v = dm rm c = dm + rm nop ????? not ? 0 ? n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 or ? 0 ? n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 orc stores the corresponding bits of the result. no flags change when the operand is exr. pop ? 0 ? n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 push ? 0 ? n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 rotl ? 0 n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 c = dm (1-bit shift) or c = dm ? 1 (2-bit shift) rotr ? 0 n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 c = d0 (1-bit shift) or c = d1 (2-bit shift) appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 751 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction h n z v c definition rotxl ? 0 n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 c = dm (1-bit shift) or c = dm ? 1 (2-bit shift) rotxr ? 0 n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 c = d0 (1-bit shift) or c = d1 (2-bit shift) rte stores the corresponding bits of the result. rts ????? shal ? n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 v = dm dm ? 1 + dm dm?1 (1-bit shift) v = dm dm ? 1 dm ? 2 dm dm?1 dm?2 (2-bit shift) c = dm (1-bit shift) or c = dm ? 1 (2-bit shift) shar ? 0 n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 c = d0 (1-bit shift) or c = d1 (2-bit shift) shll ? 0 n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 c = dm (1-bit shift) or c = dm ? 1 (2-bit shift) shlr ? 0 0 n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 c = d0 (1-bit shift) or c = d1 (2-bit shift) sleep ????? stc ????? stm ????? stmac cannot be used in the h8s/2345 group appendix a instruction set rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 752 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 instruction h n z v c definition sub h = sm ? 4 dm?4 + dm?4 rm ? 4 + sm ? 4 rm ? 4 n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 v = sm dm rm + sm dm rm c = sm dm + dm rm + sm rm subs ????? subx h = sm ? 4 dm?4 + dm?4 rm ? 4 + sm ? 4 rm ? 4 n = rm z = z' rm ...... r0 v = sm dm rm + sm dm rm c = sm dm + dm rm + sm rm tas ? 0 ? n = dm z = dm dm?1 ...... d0 trapa ????? xor ? 0 ? n = rm z = rm rm?1 ...... r0 xorc stores the corresponding bits of the result. no flags change when the operand is exr. appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 753 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 appendix b internal i/o register b.1 addresses address (low) register name bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name data bus width mra sm1 sm0 dm1 dm0 md1 md0 dts sz dtc sar 16/32 * 1 bit h'f800 to h'fbff mrb chne disel ? ? ? ? ? ? dar cra crb h'fe80 tcr3 cclr2 cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 tpu3 16 bit h'fe81 tmdr3 ? ? bfb bfa md3 md2 md1 md0 h'fe82 tior3h iob3 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa3 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 h'fe83 tior3l iod3 iod2 iod1 iod0 ioc3 ioc2 ioc1 ioc0 h'fe84 tier3 ttge ? ? tciev tgied tgiec tgieb tgiea h'fe85 tsr3 ? ? ? tcfv tgfd tgfc tgfb tgfa h'fe86 tcnt3 h'fe87 h'fe88 tgr3a h'fe89 h'fe8a tgr3b h'fe8b h'fe8c tgr3c h'fe8d h'fe8e tgr3d h'fe8f appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 754 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 address (low) register name bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name data bus width h'fe90 tcr4 ? cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 tpu4 16 bit h'fe91 tmdr4 ? ? ? ? md3 md2 md1 md0 h'fe92 tior4 iob3 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa3 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 h'fe94 tier4 ttge ? tcieu tciev ? ? tgieb tgiea h'fe95 tsr4 tcfd ? tcfu tcfv ? ? tgfb tgfa h'fe96 tcnt4 h'fe97 h'fe98 tgr4a h'fe99 h'fe9a tgr4b h'fe9b h'fea0 tcr5 ? cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 tpu5 16 bit h'fea1 tmdr5 ? ? ? ? md3 md2 md1 md0 h'fea2 tior5 iob3 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa3 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 h'fea4 tier5 ttge ? tcieu tciev ? ? tgieb tgiea h'fea5 tsr5 tcfd ? tcfu tcfv ? ? tgfb tgfa h'fea6 tcnt5 h'fea7 h'fea8 tgr5a h'fea9 h'feaa tgr5b h'feab h'feb0 p1ddr p17ddr p16ddr p15ddr p14ddr p13ddr p12ddr p11ddr p10ddr port 8 bit h'feb1 p2ddr p27ddr p26ddr p25ddr p24ddr p23ddr p22ddr p21ddr p20ddr h'feb2 p3ddr ? ? p35ddr p34ddr p33ddr p32ddr p31ddr p30ddr h'feb9 paddr ? ? ? ? pa3ddr pa2ddr pa1ddr pa0ddr h'feba pbddr pb7ddr pb6ddr pb5ddr pb4ddr pb3ddr pb2ddr pb1ddr pb0ddr h'febb pcddr pc7ddr pc6ddr pc5ddr pc4ddr pc3ddr pc2ddr pc1ddr pc0ddr h'febc pdddr pd7ddr pd6ddr pd5ddr pd4ddr pd3ddr pd2ddr pd1ddr pd0ddr h'febd peddr pe7ddr pe6ddr pe5ddr pe4ddr pe3ddr pe2ddr pe1ddr pe0ddr h'febe pfddr pf7ddr pf6ddr pf5ddr pf4ddr pf3ddr pf2ddr pf1ddr pf0ddr h'febf pgddr ? ? ? pg4ddr pg3ddr pg2ddr pg1ddr pg0ddr appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 755 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 address (low) register name bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name data bus width h'fec4 ipra ? ipr6 ipr5 ipr4 ? ipr2 ipr1 ipr0 8 bit h'fec5 iprb ? ipr6 ipr5 ipr4 ? ipr2 ipr1 ipr0 interrupt controller h'fec6 iprc ? ipr6 ipr5 ipr4 ? ipr2 ipr1 ipr0 h'fec7 iprd ? ipr6 ipr5 ipr4 ? ipr2 ipr1 ipr0 h'fec8 ipre ? ipr6 ipr5 ipr4 ? ipr2 ipr1 ipr0 h'fec9 iprf ? ipr6 ipr5 ipr4 ? ipr2 ipr1 ipr0 h'feca iprg ? ipr6 ipr5 ipr4 ? ipr2 ipr1 ipr0 h'fecb iprh ? ipr6 ipr5 ipr4 ? ipr2 ipr1 ipr0 h'fecc ipri ? ipr6 ipr5 ipr4 ? ipr2 ipr1 ipr0 h'fecd iprj ? ipr6 ipr5 ipr4 ? ipr2 ipr1 ipr0 h'fece iprk ? ipr6 ipr5 ipr4 ? ? ? ? h'fed0 abwcr abw7 abw6 abw5 abw4 abw3 abw2 abw1 abw0 bus controller 8 bit h'fed1 astcr ast7 ast6 ast5 ast4 ast3 ast2 ast1 ast0 h'fed2 wcrh w71 w70 w61 w60 w51 w50 w41 w40 h'fed3 wcrl w31 w30 w21 w20 w11 w10 w01 w00 h'fed4 bcrh icis1 icis0 brstr m brsts1 brsts0 ? ? ? h'fed5 bcrl brle ? eae ? ? ? ? waite h'fedb ramer ? ? ? ? ? rams ram1 ram0 h'ff2c iscrh irq7scb irq7sca irq6scb irq6sca irq5scb irq5sca irq4scb irq4sca 8 bit h'ff2d iscrl irq3scb irq3sca irq2scb irq2sca irq1scb irq1sca irq0scb irq0sca h'ff2e ier irq7e irq6e irq5e irq4e irq3e irq2e irq1e irq0e h'ff2f isr irq7f irq6f irq5f irq4f irq3f irq2f irq1f irq0f interrupt controller h'ff30 to h'ff34 dtcer dtce7 dtce6 dtce5 dtce4 dtce3 dtce2 dtce1 dtce0 dtc 8 bit h'ff37 dtvecr swdte dtvec6 dtvec5 dtvec4 dtvec3 dtvec2 dtvec1 dtvec0 h'ff38 sbycr ssby sts2 sts1 sts0 ope ? ? ? power-down mode 8 bit h'ff39 syscr ? ? intm1 intm0 nmieg ? ? rame mcu 8 bit h'ff3a sckcr pstop ? ? ? ? sck2 sck1 sck0 clock pulse generator 8 bit h'ff3b mdcr ? ? ? ? ? mds2 mds1 mds0 mcu 8 bit h'ff3c mstpcrh mstp15 mstp14 mstp13 mstp12 mstp11 mstp10 mstp9 mstp8 8 bit h'ff3d mstpcrl mstp7 mstp6 mstp5 mstp4 mstp3 mstp2 mstp1 mstp0 power-down mode h'ff42 syscr2 ? ? ? ? flshe ? ? ? mcu 8 bit appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 756 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 address (low) register name bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name data bus width h'ff44reserved????????reserved? h'ff45reserved???????? h'ff50 port1 p17 p16 p15 p14 p13 p12 p11 p10 port 8 bit h'ff51 port2 p27 p26 p25 p24 p23 p22 p21 p20 h'ff52 port3 ? ? p35 p34 p33 p32 p31 p30 h'ff53 port4 p47 p46 p45 p44 p43 p42 p41 p40 h'ff59 porta ? ? ? ? pa3 pa2 pa1 pa0 h'ff5a portb pb7 pb6 pb5 pb4 pb3 pb2 pb1 pb0 h'ff5b portc pc7 pc6 pc5 pc4 pc3 pc2 pc1 pc0 h'ff5c portd pd7 pd6 pd5 pd4 pd3 pd2 pd1 pd0 h'ff5d porte pe7 pe6 pe5 pe4 pe3 pe2 pe1 pe0 h'ff5e portf pf7 pf6 pf5 pf4 pf3 pf2 pf1 pf0 h'ff5f portg ? ? ? pg4 pg3 pg2 pg1 pg0 h'ff60 p1dr p17dr p16dr p15dr p14dr p13dr p12dr p11dr p10dr h'ff61 p2dr p27dr p26dr p25dr p24dr p23dr p22dr p21dr p20dr h'ff62 p3dr ? ? p35dr p34dr p33dr p32dr p31dr p30dr h'ff69 padr ? ? ? ? pa3dr pa2dr pa1dr pa0dr h'ff6a pbdr pb7dr pb6dr pb5dr pb4dr pb3dr pb2dr pb1dr pb0dr h'ff6b pcdr pc7dr pc6dr pc5dr pc4dr pc3dr pc2dr pc1dr pc0dr h'ff6c pddr pd7dr pd6dr pd5dr pd4dr pd3dr pd2dr pd1dr pd0dr h'ff6d pedr pe7dr pe6dr pe5dr pe4dr pe3dr pe2dr pe1dr pe0dr h'ff6e pfdr pf7dr pf6dr pf5dr pf4dr pf3dr pf2dr pf1dr pf0dr h'ff6f pgdr ? ? ? pg4dr pg3dr pg2dr pg1dr pg0dr h'ff70 papcr ? ? ? ? pa3pcr pa2pcr pa1pcr pa0pcr h'ff71 pbpcr pb7pcr pb6pcr pb5pcr pb4pcr pb3pcr pb2pcr pb1pcr pb0pcr h'ff72 pcpcr pc7pcr pc6pcr pc5pcr pc4pcr pc3pcr pc2pcr pc1pcr pc0pcr h'ff73 pdpcr pd7pcr pd6pcr pd5pcr pd4pcr pd3pcr pd2pcr pd1pcr pd0pcr h'ff74 pepcr pe7pcr pe6pcr pe5pcr pe4pcr pe3pcr pe2pcr pe1pcr pe0pcr h'ff76 p3odr ? ? p35odr p34odr p33odr p32odr p31odr p30odr h'ff77 paodr ? ? ? ? pa3odr pa2odr pa1odr pa0odr appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 757 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 address (low) register name bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name data bus width h'ff78 smr0 c/ a / gm * 2 chr pe o/ e stop mp cks1 cks0 8 bit h'ff79 brr0 sci0, smart card interface 0 h'ff7a scr0 tie rie te re mpie teie cke1 cke0 h'ff7b tdr0 h'ff7c ssr0 tdre rdrf orer fer/ ers * 3 per tend mpb mpbt h'ff7d rdr0 h'ff7e scmr0 ? ? ? ? sdir sinv ? smif h'ff80 smr1 c/ a / gm * 2 chr pe o/ e stop mp cks1 cks0 8 bit h'ff81 brr1 sci1, smart card interface 1 h'ff82 scr1 tie rie te re mpie teie cke1 cke0 h'ff83 tdr1 h'ff84 ssr1 tdre rdrf orer fer/ ers * 3 per tend mpb mpbt h'ff85 rdr1 h'ff86 scmr1 ? ? ? ? sdir sinv ? smif h'ff90 addrah ad9 ad8 ad7 ad6 ad5 ad4 ad3 ad2 a/d converter 8 bit h'ff91 addral ad1 ad0 ? ? ? ? ? ? h'ff92 addrbh ad9 ad8 ad7 ad6 ad5 ad4 ad3 ad2 h'ff93 addrbl ad1 ad0 ? ? ? ? ? ? h"ff94 addrch ad9 ad8 ad7 ad6 ad5 ad4 ad3 ad2 h'ff95 addrcl ad1 ad0 ? ? ? ? ? ? h'ff96 addrdh ad9 ad8 ad7 ad6 ad5 ad4 ad3 ad2 h'ff97 addrdl ad1 ad0 ? ? ? ? ? ? h'ff98 adcsr adf adie adst scan cks ? ch1 ch0 h'ff99 adcr trgs1 trgs0 ? ? ? ? ? ? h'ffa4 dadr0 d/a converter 8 bit h'ffa5 dadr1 h'ffa6 dacr daoe1 daoe0 dae ? ? ? ? ? appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 758 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 address (low) register name bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name data bus width h'ffb0 tcr0 cmieb cmiea ovie cclr1 cclr0 cks2 cks1 cks0 16 bit h'ffb1 tcr1 cmieb cmiea ovie cclr1 cclr0 cks2 cks1 cks0 8-bit timer channel 0, 1 h'ffb2 tcsr0 cmfb cmfa ovf adte os3 os2 os1 os0 h'ffb3 tcsr1 cmfb cmfa ovf ? os3 os2 os1 os0 h'ffb4 tcora0 h'ffb5 tcora1 h'ffb6 tcorb0 h'ffb7 tcorb1 h'ffb8 tcnt0 h'ffb9 tcnt1 h'ffbc (read) tcsr ovf wt/ it tme ? ? cks2 cks1 cks0 wdt 16 bit h'ffbd (read) tcnt h'ffbf (read) rstcsr wovf rste rsts ? ? ? ? ? h'ffc0 tstr ? ? cst5 cst4 cst3 cst2 cst1 cst0 tpu 16 bit h'ffc1 tsyr ? ? sync5 sync4 sync3 sync2 sync1 sync0 h'ffc8 flmcr1 fwe swe ? ? ev pv e p flash 8 bit h'ffc9 flmcr2 fler ? ? ? ? ? esu psu h'ffca ebr1 ? ? ? ? ? ? eb9 eb8 h'ffcb ebr2 eb7 eb6 eb5 eb4 eb3 eb2 eb1 eb0 h'ffd0 tcr0 cclr2 cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 tpu0 16 bit h'ffd1 tmdr0 ? ? bfb bfa md3 md2 md1 md0 h'ffd2 tior0h iob3 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa3 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 h'ffd3 tior0l iod3 iod2 iod1 iod0 ioc3 ioc2 ioc1 ioc0 h'ffd4 tier0 ttge ? ? tciev tgied tgiec tgieb tgiea h'ffd5 tsr0 ? ? ? tcfv tgfd tgfc tgfb tgfa h'ffd6 tcnt0 h'ffd7 h'ffd8 tgr0a h'ffd9 h'ffda tgr0b h'ffdb appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 759 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 address (low) register name bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name data bus width h'ffdc tgr0c tpu1 16 bit h'ffdd h'ffde tgr0d h'ffdf h'ffe0 tcr1 ? cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 h'ffe1 tmdr1 ? ? ? ? md3 md2 md1 md0 h'ffe2 tior1 iob3 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa3 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 h'ffe4 tier1 ttge ? tcieu tciev ? ? tgieb tgiea h'ffe5 tsr1 tcfd ? tcfu tcfv ? ? tgfb tgfa h'ffe6 tcnt1 h'ffe7 h'ffe8 tgr1a h'ffe9 h'ffea tgr1b h'ffeb h'fff0 tcr2 ? cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 tpu2 16 bit h'fff1 tmdr2 ? ? ? ? md3 md2 md1 md0 h'fff2 tior2 iob3 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa3 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 h'fff4 tier2 ttge ? tcieu tciev ? ? tgieb tgiea h'fff5 tsr2 tcfd ? tcfu tcfv ? ? tgfb tgfa h'fff6 tcnt2 h'fff7 h'fff8 tgr2a h'fff9 h'fffa tgr2b h'fffb notes: 1. located in on-chip ram. the bus width is 32 bits when the dtc accesses this area as register information, and 16 bits otherwise. 2. functions as c/ a for sci use, and as gm for smart card interface use. 3. functions as fer for sci use, and as ers for smart card interface use. appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 760 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 b.2 functions mra?dtc mode register a h'f800?h'fbff dtc 7 sm1 undefined ? 6 sm0 undefined ? 5 dm1 undefined ? 4 dm0 undefined ? 3 md1 undefined ? 0 sz undefined ? 2 md0 undefined ? 1 dts undefined ? bit initial value read/write : : : 0 1 source address mode ? 0 1 0 1 destination address mode ? 0 1 dtc mode 0 1 normal mode repeat mode block transfer mode ? 0 1 0 1 dtc data transfer size 0 1 byte-size transfer dtc transfer mode select 0 1 word-size transfer destination side is repeat area or block area source side is repeat area or block area dar is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when sz = 0; by +2 when sz = 1) dar is decremented after a transfer (by -1 when sz = 0; by -2 when sz = 1) dar is fixed sar is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when sz = 0; by +2 when sz = 1) sar is decremented after a transfer (by -1 when sz = 0; by -2 when sz = 1) sar is fixed appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 761 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 mrb?dtc mode register b h'f800?h'fbff dtc 7 chne undefined ? 6 disel undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 ? undefined ? 3 ? undefined ? 0 ? undefined ? 2 ? undefined ? 1 ? undefined ? bit initial value read/write : : : dtc chain transfer enable 0 1 end of dtc data transfer dtc chain transfer dtc interrupt select reserved only 0 should be written to these bits 0 1 after a data transfer ends, the cpu interrupt is disabled unless the transfer counter is 0 after a data transfer ends, the cpu interrupt is enabled sar?dtc source address register h'f800?h'fbff dtc 23 bit initial value read/write : : : 22 21 20 19 43210 - - - - - - - - - - - - specifies transfer data source address unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined ????? dar?dtc destination address register h'f800?h'fbff dtc 23 bit initial value read/write : : : 22 21 20 19 43210 - - - - - - - - - - - - specifies transfer data destination address unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 762 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 cra?dtc transfer count register a h'f800?h'fbff dtc 15 bit initial value read/write : : : 14 13 12 11109876543210 crah cral specifies the number of dtc data transfers unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined ????? unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined ????? unde- fined ? crb?dtc transfer count register b h'f800?h'fbff dtc 15 14 13 12 11109876543210 specifies the number of dtc block data transfers bit initial value read/write : : : unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined ? unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined ????? unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined unde- fined ????? unde- fined ? appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 763 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcr3?timer control register 3 h'fe80 tpu3 7 cclr2 0 r/w 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : tcnt clearing disabled tcnt cleared by tgra compare match/input capture tcnt cleared by tgrb compare match/input capture tcnt clearing disabled tcnt cleared by tgrc compare match/input capture * 2 tcnt cleared by tgrd compare match/input capture * 2 counter clear 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 clock edge 0 1 ? count at rising edge count at falling edge count at both edges internal clock: counts on /1 internal clock: counts on /4 internal clock: counts on /16 internal clock: counts on /64 external clock: counts on tclka pin input internal clock: counts on /1024 internal clock: counts on /256 internal clock: counts on /4096 timer prescaler 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 tcnt cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/synchronous operation * 1 tcnt cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/synchronous operation * 1 notes: 1. 2. synchronous operation setting is performed by setting the sync bit in tsyr to 1. when tgrc or tgrd is used as a buffer register, tcnt is not cleared because the buffer register setting has priority, and compare match/input capture does not occur. appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 764 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tmdr3?timer mode register 3 h'fe81 tpu3 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 bfb 0 r/w 4 bfa 0 r/w 3 md3 0 r/w 0 md0 0 r/w 2 md2 0 r/w 1 md1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : 0 buffer operation b tgrb operates normally 0 buffer operation a tgra operates normally 0 1 normal operation reserved pwm mode 1 pwm mode 2 phase counting mode 1 phase counting mode 2 phase counting mode 3 phase counting mode 4 ? mode 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * notes: 1. 2. * : don ? t care md3 is a reserved bit. in a write, it should always be written with 0. phase counting mode cannot be set for channels 0 and 3. in this case, 0 should always be written to md2. tgra and tgrc used together for buffer operation 1 tgrb and tgrd used together for buffer operation 1 appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 765 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tior3h?timer i/o control register 3h h'fe82 tpu3 0 1 tgr3b i/o control 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * * 0 1 tgr3a is output compare register tgr3a i/o control 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * * output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges * : don ? t care * : don ? t care 7 iob3 0 r/w 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 ioa3 0 r/w 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : tgr3a is input capture register initial output is 0 output output disabled initial output is 1 output capture input source is tioca3 pin capture input source is channel 4/count clock input capture at tcnt4 count-up/ count-down tgr3b is output compare register output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges tgr3b is input capture register initial output is 0 output output disabled initial output is 1 output capture input source is tiocb3 pin capture input source is channel 4/count clock input capture at tcnt4 count-up/ count-down * 1 note: 1. if bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr4 are set to b'000, and /1 is used as the tcnt4 count clock, this setting will be invalid and input capture will not occur. appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 766 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tior3l?timer i/o control register 3l h'fe83 tpu3 0 1 tgr3d i/o control 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * * 0 1 tgr3c is output compare register trg3c i/o control 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * * output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match * : don ? t care * : don ? t care notes: note: when the bfa bit in tmdr3 is set to 1 and tgr3c is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. note: when tgrc or tgrd is designated for buffer operation, this setting is invalid and the register operates as a buffer register. 7 iod3 0 r/w 6 iod2 0 r/w 5 iod1 0 r/w 4 iod0 0 r/w 3 ioc3 0 r/w 0 ioc0 0 r/w 2 ioc2 0 r/w 1 ioc1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : initial output is 0 output output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match initial output is 1 output input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges capture input source is tiocc3 pin tgr3c is input capture register capture input source is channel 4/count clock input capture at tcnt4 count-up/ count-down tgr3d is output compare register output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match initial output is 0 output output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match initial output is 1 output input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges capture input source is tiocd3 pin tgr3d is input capture register capture input source is channel 4/count clock input capture at tcnt4 count-up/ count-down * 1 when the bfb bit in tmdr3 is set to 1 and tgr3d is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. 1. when bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr4 are set to b'000 and /1 is used as the tcnt4 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 767 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tier3?timer interrupt enable register 3 h'fe84 tpu3 7 ttge 0 r/w 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 tciev 0 r/w 3 tgied 0 r/w 0 tgiea 0 r/w 2 tgiec 0 r/w 1 tgieb 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : 0 1 a/d conversion start request generation disabled a/d conversion start request generation enabled a/d conversion start request enable 0 1 interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv disabled interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv enabled overflow interrupt enable tgr interrupt enable d tgr interrupt enable c tgr interrupt enable b 0 1 interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit disabled tgr interrupt enable a 0 1 0 1 0 1 interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit enabled interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit disabled interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit enabled interrupt requests (tgic) by tgfc bit disabled interrupt requests (tgic) by tgfc bit enabled interrupt requests (tgid) by tgfd bit disabled interrupt requests (tgid) by tgfd bit enabled appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 768 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tsr3?timer status register 3 h'fe85 tpu3 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 tcfv 0 r/(w) * 3 tgfd 0 r/(w) * 0 tgfa 0 r/(w) * 2 tgfc 0 r/(w) * 1 tgfb 0 r/(w) * bit initial value read/write : : : note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. 0 [clearing condition] when 0 is written to tcfv after reading tcfv = 1 overflow flag 1 [setting condition] when the tcnt value overflows (changes from h'ffff to h'0000 ) 0 [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgid interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfd after reading tgfd = 1 input capture/output compare flag d 1 [setting conditions] 0 [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgic interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfc after reading tgfc = 1 input capture/output compare flag c 1 [setting conditions] 0 [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgib interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfb after reading tgfb = 1 input capture/output compare flag b 1 [setting conditions] 0 [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgia interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfa after reading tgfa = 1 input capture/output compare flag a 1 [setting conditions] when tcnt=tgra while tgra is function- ing as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgra by input capture signal while tgra is functioning as input capture register when tcnt = tgrb while tgrb is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgrb by input capture signal while tgrb is functioning as input capture register when tcnt = tgrc while tgrc is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgrc by input capture signal while tgrc is functioning as input capture register when tcnt = tgrd while tgrd is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgrd by input capture signal while tgrd is functioning as input capture register appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 769 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcnt3?timer counter 3 h'fe86 tpu3 15 0 r/w 14 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 9 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w up-counter tgr3a?timer general register 3a h'fe88 tpu3 tgr3b?timer general register 3b h'fe8a tpu3 tgr3c?timer general register 3c h'fe8c tpu3 tgr3d?timer general register 3d h'fe8e tpu3 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 770 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcr4?timer control register 4 h'fe90 tpu4 tcnt clearing disabled tcnt cleared by tgra compare match/input capture tcnt cleared by tgrb compare match/input capture counter clear 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 clock edge 0 1 ? count at rising edge count at falling edge count at both edges internal clock: counts on /1 internal clock: counts on /4 internal clock: counts on /16 internal clock: counts on /64 external clock: counts on tclka pin input external clock: counts on tclkc pin input internal clock: counts on /1024 counts on tcnt5 overflow/underflow timer prescaler 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 7 ? 0 ? 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : note: this setting is ignored when channel 4 is in phase counting mode. note: * synchronous operating setting is performed by setting the sync bit tsyr to 1. note: this setting is ignored when channel 4 is in phase counting mode. tcnt cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/synchronous operation * appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 771 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tmdr4?timer mode register 4 h'fe91 tpu4 0 1 normal operation reserved pwm mode 1 pwm mode 2 phase counting mode 1 phase counting mode 2 phase counting mode 3 phase counting mode 4 ? mode 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * note: * : don ? t care 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 md3 0 r/w 0 md0 0 r/w 2 md2 0 r/w 1 md1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : md3 is a reserved bit. in a write, it should always be written with 0. appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 772 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tior4?timer i/o control register 4 h'fe92 tpu4 7 iob3 0 r/w 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 ioa3 0 r/w 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : 0 1 tgr4b is output compare register tgr4b i/o control 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * * tgr4a i/o control * : don ? t care 0 1 tgr4a is output compare register 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * * output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match * : don ? t care initial output is 0 output output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match initial output is 1 output input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges tgr4a is input capture register capture input source is tioca4 pin input capture at generation of tgr3a compare match/input capture capture input source is tgr3a compare match/ input capture output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match initial output is 0 output output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match initial output is 1 output input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges tgr4b is input capture register capture input source is tiocb4 pin input capture at generation of tgr3c compare match/input capture capture input source is tgr3c compare match/ input capture appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 773 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tier4?timer interrupt enable register 4 h'fe94 tpu4 7 ttge 0 r/w 6 ? 1 ? 5 tcieu 0 r/w 4 tciev 0 r/w 3 ? 0 ? 0 tgiea 0 r/w 2 ? 0 ? 1 tgieb 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : 0 1 0 1 0 1 interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit disabled tgr interrupt enable a 0 1 0 1 interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit enabled interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit disabled interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit enabled tgr interrupt enable b interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv disabled interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv enabled overflow interrupt enable underflow interrupt enable interrupt requests (tciu) by tcfu disabled interrupt requests (tciu) by tcfu enabled a/d conversion start request enable a/d conversion start request generation disabled a/d conversion start request generation enabled appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 774 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tsr4?timer status register 4 h'fe95 tpu4 7 tcfd 1 r 6 ? 1 ? 5 tcfu 0 r/(w) * 4 tcfv 0 r/(w) * 3 ? 0 ? 0 tgfa 0 r/(w) * 2 ? 0 ? 1 tgfb 0 r/(w) * bit initial value read/write : : : 0 1 tcnt counts down tcnt counts up count direction flag 0 [clearing condition] when 0 is written to tcfu after reading tcfu = 1 underflow flag 1 [setting condition] when the tcnt value underflows (changes from h'0000 to h'ffff) 0 [clearing condition] when 0 is written to tcfv after reading tcfv = 1 overflow flag 1 [setting condition] when the tcnt value overflows (changes from h'ffff to h'0000 ) 0 input capture/output compare flag b 1 0 [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgia interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfa after reading tgfa = 1 input capture/output compare flag a 1 [setting conditions] note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. when tcnt = tgra while tgra is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgra by input capture signal while tgra is functioning as input capture register [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgib interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfb after reading tgfb = 1 [setting conditions] when tcnt = tgrb while tgrb is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgrb by input capture signal while tgrb is functioning as input capture register appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 775 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcnt4?timer counter 4 h'fe96 tpu4 15 0 r/w 14 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 9 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w note: * this timer counter can be used as an up/down-counter only in phase counting mode or when performing overflow/underflow counting on another channel. in other cases it functions as an up-counter. up/down-counter * tgr4a?timer general register 4a h'fe98 tpu4 tgr4b?timer general register 4b h'fe9a tpu4 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 776 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcr5?timer control register 5 h'fea0 tpu5 tcnt clearing disabled tcnt cleared by tgra compare match/input capture tcnt cleared by tgrb compare match/input capture counter clear 0 1 0 1 0 1 internal clock: counts on /1 internal clock: counts on /4 internal clock: counts on /16 internal clock: counts on /64 external clock: counts on tclka pin input external clock: counts on tclkc pin input internal clock: counts on /256 external clock: counts on tclkd pin input time prescaler 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 7 ? 0 ? 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : note: 0 1 clock edge 0 1 ? count at rising edge count at falling edge count at both edges this setting is ignored when channel 5 is in phase counting mode. note: * synchronous operating setting is performed by setting the sync bit tsyr to 1. note: this setting is ignored when channel 5 is in phase counting mode. tcnt cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/synchronous operation * appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 777 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tmdr5?timer mode register 5 h'fea1 tpu5 0 1 normal operation reserved pwm mode 1 pwm mode 2 phase counting mode 1 phase counting mode 2 phase counting mode 3 phase counting mode 4 ? mode 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * note: md3 is a reserved bit. in a write, it should always be written with 0. * : don ? t care 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 md3 0 r/w 0 md0 0 r/w 2 md2 0 r/w 1 md1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 778 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tior5?timer i/o control register 5 h'fea2 tpu5 7 iob3 0 r/w 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 ioa3 0 r/w 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : 0 1 tgr5b i/o control 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 tgr5a is output compare register tgr5a i/o control 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match * : don ? t care tgr5a is input capture register initial output is 0 output output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match initial output is 1 output input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges capture input source is tioca5 pin tgr5b is output compare register output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match * : don ? t care tgr5b is input capture register initial output is 0 output output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match initial output is 1 output input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges capture input source is tiocb5 pin appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 779 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tier5?timer interrupt enable register 5 h'fea4 tpu5 7 ttge 0 r/w 6 ? 1 ? 5 tcieu 0 r/w 4 tciev 0 r/w 3 ? 0 ? 0 tgiea 0 r/w 2 ? 0 ? 1 tgieb 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : 0 1 a/d conversion start request generation disabled a/d conversion start request generation enabled a/d conversion start request enable 0 1 interrupt requests (tciu) by tcfu disabled interrupt requests (tciu) by tcfu enabled underflow interrupt enable tgr interrupt enable b 0 1 interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit disabled tgr interrupt enable a 0 1 0 1 overflow interrupt enable interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit enabled interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit disabled interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit enabled interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv disabled interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv enabled appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 780 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tsr5?timer status register 5 h'fea5 tpu5 7 tcfd 1 r 6 ? 1 ? 5 tcfu 0 r/(w) * 4 tcfv 0 r/(w) * 3 ? 0 ? 0 tgfa 0 r/(w) * 2 ? 0 ? 1 tgfb 0 r/(w) * bit initial value read/write : : : 0 1 tcnt counts down tcnt counts up count direction flag 0 underflow flag 1 0 overflow flag 1 0 input capture/output compare flag b 1 0 [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgia interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfa after reading tgfa = 1 input capture/output compare flag a 1 [setting conditions] when tcnt = tgra while tgra is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgra by input capture signal while tgra is functioning as input capture register note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgib interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfb after reading tgfb = 1 [setting conditions] when tcnt = tgrb while tgrb is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgrb by input capture signal while tgrb is functioning as input capture register [clearing condition] when 0 is written to tcfv after reading tcfv = 1 [setting condition] when the tcnt value overflows (changes from h'ffff to h'0000 ) [clearing condition] when 0 is written to tcfu after reading tcfu = 1 [setting condition] when the tcnt value underflows (changes from h'0000 to h'ffff) appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 781 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcnt5?timer counter 5 h'fea6 tpu5 15 0 r/w 14 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 9 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w note: * this timer counter can be used as an up/down-counter only in phase counting mode or when performing overflow/underflow counting on another channel. in other cases it functions as an up-counter. up/down-counter * tgr5a?timer general register 5a h'fea8 tpu5 tgr5b?timer general register 5b h'feaa tpu5 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w p1ddr?port 1 data direction register h'feb0 port 1 7 p17ddr 0 w 6 p16ddr 0 w 5 p15ddr 0 w 4 p14ddr 0 w 3 p13ddr 0 w 0 p10ddr 0 w 2 p12ddr 0 w 1 p11ddr 0 w bit initial value read/write : : : specify input or output for individual port 1 pins appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 782 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 p2ddr?port 2 data direction register h'feb1 port 2 7 p27ddr 0 w 6 p26ddr 0 w 5 p25ddr 0 w 4 p24ddr 0 w 3 p23ddr 0 w 0 p20ddr 0 w 2 p22ddr 0 w 1 p21ddr 0 w specify input or output for individual port 2 pins bit initial value read/write : : : p3ddr?port 3 data direction register h'feb2 port 3 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 p35ddr 0 w 4 p34ddr 0 w 3 p33ddr 0 w 0 p30ddr 0 w 2 p32ddr 0 w 1 p31ddr 0 w specify input or output for individual port 3 pins bit initial value read/write : : : paddr?port a data direction register h'feb9 port a 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 ? undefined ? 3 pa3ddr 0 w 0 pa0ddr 0 w 2 pa2ddr 0 w 1 pa1ddr 0 w bit initial value read/write : : : specify input or output for individual port a pins appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 783 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pbddr?port b data direction register h'feba port b 7 pb7ddr 0 w 6 pb6ddr 0 w 5 pb5ddr 0 w 4 pb4ddr 0 w 3 pb3ddr 0 w 0 pb0ddr 0 w 2 pb2ddr 0 w 1 pb1ddr 0 w specify input or output for individual port b pins bit initial value read/write : : : pcddr?port c data direction register h'febb port c 7 pc7ddr 0 w 6 pc6ddr 0 w 5 pc5ddr 0 w 4 pc4ddr 0 w 3 pc3ddr 0 w 0 pc0ddr 0 w 2 pc2ddr 0 w 1 pc1ddr 0 w specify input or output for individual port c pins bit initial value read/write : : : pdddr?port d data direction register h'febc port d 7 pd7ddr 0 w 6 pd6ddr 0 w 5 pd5ddr 0 w 4 pd4ddr 0 w 3 pd3ddr 0 w 0 pd0ddr 0 w 2 pd2ddr 0 w 1 pd1ddr 0 w bit initial value read/write : : : specify input or output for individual port d pins appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 784 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 peddr?port e data direction register h'febd port e 7 pe7ddr 0 w 6 pe6ddr 0 w 5 pe5ddr 0 w 4 pe4ddr 0 w 3 pe3ddr 0 w 0 pe0ddr 0 w 2 pe2ddr 0 w 1 pe1ddr 0 w specify input or output for individual port e pins bit initial value read/write : : : pfddr?port f data direction register h'febe port f 7 pf7ddr 1 w 0 w 6 pf6ddr 0 w 0 w 5 pf5ddr 0 w 0 w 4 pf4ddr 0 w 0 w 3 pf3ddr 0 w 0 w 0 pf0ddr 0 w 0 w 2 pf2ddr 0 w 0 w 1 pf1ddr 0 w 0 w specify input or output for individual port f pins bit modes 1, 2, 4 to 6 initial value read/write modes 3, 7 initial value read/write : : : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 785 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pgddr?port g data direction register h'febf port g 7 ? undefined ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? undefined ? 4 pg4ddr 1 w 0 w 3 pg3ddr 0 w 0 w 0 pg0ddr 0 w 0 w 2 pg2ddr 0 w 0 w 1 pg1ddr 0 w 0 w specify input or output for individual port g pins bit modes 1, 4, 5 initial value read/write modes 2, 3, 6, 7 initial value read/write : : : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 786 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ipra?interrupt priority register a h'fec4 interrupt controller iprb?interrupt priority register b h'fec5 interrupt controller iprc?interrupt priority register c h'fec6 interrupt controller iprd?interrupt priority register d h'fec7 interrupt controller ipre?interrupt priority register e h'fec8 interrupt controller iprf?interrupt priority register f h'fec9 interrupt controller iprg?interrupt priority register g h'feca interrupt controller iprh?interrupt priority register h h'fecb interrupt controller ipri?interrupt priority register i h'fecc interrupt controller iprj?interrupt priority register j h'fecd interrupt controller iprk?interrupt priority register k h'fece interrupt controller 7 ? 0 ? 6 ipr6 1 r/w 5 ipr5 1 r/w 4 ipr4 1 r/w 3 ? 0 ? 0 ipr0 1 r/w 2 ipr2 1 r/w 1 ipr1 1 r/w set priority (levels 7 to 0) for interrupt sources ipra iprb iprc iprd ipre iprf iprg iprh ipri iprj iprk register bits irq0 irq2 irq3 irq6 irq7 wdt ? * tpu channel 0 tpu channel 2 tpu channel 4 8-bit timer channel 0 ? * sci channel 1 irq1 irq4 irq5 dtc ? * a/d converter tpu channel 1 tpu channel 3 tpu channel 5 8-bit timer channel 1 sci channel 0 ? * 6 to 4 2 to 0 correspondence between interrupt sources and ipr settings note: * reserved bits. may be read or written, but the setting is ignored. bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 787 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 abwcr?bus width control register h'fed0 bus controller 7 abw7 1 r/w 0 r/w 6 abw6 1 r/w 0 r/w 5 abw5 1 r/w 0 r/w 4 abw4 1 r/w 0 r/w 3 abw3 1 r/w 0 r/w 0 abw0 1 r/w 0 r/w 2 abw2 1 r/w 0 r/w 1 abw1 1 r/w 0 r/w bit modes 1 to 3, 5 to 7 initial value r/w mode 4 initial value read/write : : : : : area 7 to 0 bus width control 0 1 area n is designated for 16-bit access area n is designated for 8-bit access (n = 7 to 0) astcr?access state control register h'fed1 bus controller 7 ast7 1 r/w 6 ast6 1 r/w 5 ast5 1 r/w 4 ast4 1 r/w 3 ast3 1 r/w 0 ast0 1 r/w 2 ast2 1 r/w 1 ast1 1 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : area 7 to 0 access state control 0 1 area n is designated for 2-state access wait state insertion in area n external space is disabled area n is designated for 3-state access wait state insertion in area n external space is enabled (n = 7 to 0) appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 788 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 wcrh?wait control register h h'fed2 bus controller 7 w71 1 r/w 6 w70 1 r/w 5 w61 1 r/w 4 w60 1 r/w 3 w51 1 r/w 0 w40 1 r/w 2 w50 1 r/w 1 w41 1 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : area 7 wait control area 6 wait control area 5 wait control area 4 wait control 0 1 0 1 0 1 program wait not inserted 1 program wait state inserted 2 program wait states inserted 3 program wait states inserted 0 1 0 1 0 1 program wait not inserted 1 program wait state inserted 2 program wait states inserted 3 program wait states inserted 0 1 0 1 0 1 program wait not inserted 1 program wait state inserted 2 program wait states inserted 3 program wait states inserted 0 1 0 1 0 1 program wait not inserted 1 program wait state inserted 2 program wait states inserted 3 program wait states inserted appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 789 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 wcrl?wait control register l h'fed3 bus controller 7 w31 1 r/w 6 w30 1 r/w 5 w21 1 r/w 4 w20 1 r/w 3 w11 1 r/w 0 w00 1 r/w 2 w10 1 r/w 1 w01 1 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : area 3 wait control area 2 wait control area 1 wait control area 0 wait control 0 1 0 1 0 1 program wait not inserted 1 program wait state inserted 2 program wait states inserted 3 program wait states inserted 0 1 0 1 0 1 program wait not inserted 1 program wait state inserted 2 program wait states inserted 3 program wait states inserted 0 1 0 1 0 1 program wait not inserted 1 program wait state inserted 2 program wait states inserted 3 program wait states inserted 0 1 0 1 0 1 program wait not inserted 1 program wait state inserted 2 program wait states inserted 3 program wait states inserted appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 790 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bcrh?bus control register h h'fed4 bus controller 7 icis1 1 r/w 6 icis0 1 r/w 5 brstrm 0 r/w 4 brsts1 1 r/w 3 brsts0 0 r/w 0 ? 0 r/w 2 ? 0 r/w 1 ? 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : idle cycle insert 1 0 1 idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external read cycles in different areas idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read cycles in different areas idle cycle insert 0 0 1 idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles area 0 burst rom enable 0 1 area 0 is basic bus interface area 0 is burst rom interface burst cycle select 1 0 1 burst cycle comprises 1 state burst cycle comprises 2 states burst cycle select 0 reserved only 0 should be written to these bits 0 1 max. 4 words in burst access max. 8 words in burst access appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 791 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 bcrl?bus control register l h'fed5 bus controller 7 brle 0 r/w 6 ? 0 r/w 5 eae 1 r/w 4 ? 1 r/w 3 ? 1 r/w 0 waite 0 r/w 2 ? 1 r/w 1 ? 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : bus release enable 0 1 external bus release is disabled external bus release is enabled wait pin enable reserved only 0 should be written to this bit reserved only 0 should be written to this bit reserved only 1 should be written to these bits 0 1 wait input by wait pin disabled wait input by wait pin enabled external addresses h'010000 to h'01ffff enable 0 1 note: * do not access a reserved area. on-chip rom (h8s/2345) or reserved area * (h8s/2343) external addresses (in external expansion mode) or reserved area (in single-chip mode) appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 792 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ramer?ram emulation register h'fedb bus controller 7 ? 0 ? 6 ? 0 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 ? 0 ? 0 ram0 0 r/w 2 rams 0 r/w 1 ram1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : ram select, flash memory area select rams 0 1 ram1 * 0 1 ram0 * 0 1 0 1 ram area h'ffec00 ? h'ffefff h'000000 ? h'0003ff h'000400 ? h'0007ff h'000800 ? h'000bff h'000c00 ? h'000fff *: don ? t care appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 793 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 iscrh?irq sense control register h h'ff2c interrupt controller iscrl?irq sense control register l h'ff2d interrupt controller 15 irq7scb 0 r/w 14 irq7sca 0 r/w 13 irq6scb 0 r/w 12 irq6sca 0 r/w 11 irq5scb 0 r/w 8 irq4sca 0 r/w 10 irq5sca 0 r/w 9 irq4scb 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : iscrh 7 irq3scb 0 r/w 6 irq3sca 0 r/w 5 irq2scb 0 r/w 4 irq2sca 0 r/w 3 irq1scb 0 r/w 0 irq0sca 0 r/w 2 irq1sca 0 r/w 1 irq0scb 0 r/w irq7 to irq4 sense control irq3 to irq0 sense control 0 1 0 1 0 1 irqn input low level falling edge of irqn input rising edge of irqn input both falling and rising edges of irqn input irqnscb irqnsca interrupt request generation (n = 7 to 0) bit initial value read/write : : : iscrl appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 794 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ier?irq enable register h'ff2e interrupt controller 7 irq7e 0 r/w 6 irq6e 0 r/w 5 irq5e 0 r/w 4 irq4e 0 r/w 3 irq3e 0 r/w 0 irq0e 0 r/w 2 irq2e 0 r/w 1 irq1e 0 r/w irqn enable 0 1 irqn interrupt disabled irqn interrupt enabled (n = 7 to 0) bit initial value read/write : : : isr?irq status register h'ff2f interrupt controller 7 irq7f 0 r/(w) * 6 irq6f 0 r/(w) * 5 irq5f 0 r/(w) * 4 irq4f 0 r/(w) * 3 irq3f 0 r/(w) * 0 irq0f 0 r/(w) * 2 irq2f 0 r/(w) * 1 irq1f 0 r/(w) * bit initial value read/write note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. : : : indicate the status of irq7 to irq0 interrupt requests appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 795 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 dtcera to dtcerf?dtc enable registers h'ff30 to h'ff34 dtc 7 dtce7 0 r/w 6 dtce6 0 r/w 5 dtce5 0 r/w 4 dtce4 0 r/w 3 dtce3 0 r/w 0 dtce0 0 r/w 2 dtce2 0 r/w 1 dtce1 0 r/w dtc activation enable bit initial value read/write : : : dtc activation by this interrupt is disabled [clearing conditions] when the disel bit is 1 and data transfer has ended when the specified number of transfers have ended 0 1 dtc activation by this interrupt is enabled [holding condition] when the disel bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended correspondence between interrupt sources and dtcer bits register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 dtcera irq0 irq1 irq2 irq3 irq4 irq5 irq6 irq7 dtcerb ? adi tgi0a tgi0b tgi0c tgi0d tgi1a tgi1b dtcerc tgi2a tgi2b tgi3a tgi3b tgi3c tgi3d tgi4a tgi4b dtcerd ?? tgi5a tgi5b cmia0 cmib0 cmia1 cmib1 dtcere ???? rxi0 txi0 rxi1 txi1 appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 796 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 dtvecr?dtc vector register h'ff37 dtc 7 swdte 0 r/(w) * 6 dtvec6 0 r/w 5 dtvec5 0 r/w 4 dtvec4 0 r/w 3 dtvec3 0 r/w 0 dtvec0 0 r/w 2 dtvec2 0 r/w 1 dtvec1 0 r/w a value of 1 can always be written to the swdte bit, but 0 can only be written after 1 is read. note: * dtc software activation enable 0 1 dtc software activation is disabled [clearing condition] when the disel bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended dtc software activation is enabled [holding conditions] when the disel bit is 1 and data transfer has ended when the specified number of transfers have ended during data transfer due to software activation sets vector number for dtc software activation bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 797 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 sbycr?standby control register h'ff38 power-down state 7 ssby 0 r/w 6 sts2 0 r/w 5 sts1 0 r/w 4 sts0 0 r/w 3 ope 1 r/w 0 ? 0 r/w 2 ? 0 ? 1 ? 0 ? software standby 0 1 transition to sleep mode after execution of sleep instruction transition to software standby mode after execution of sleep instruction standby timer select 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 standby time = 8192 states standby time = 16384 states standby time = 32768 states standby time = 65536 states standby time = 131072 states standby time = 262144 states reserved standby time = 16 states output port enable reserved only 0 should be written to this bit 0 1 in software standby mode, address bus and bus control signals are high-impedance bit initial value read/write : : : in software standby mode, address bus and bus control signals retain output state appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 798 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 syscr?system control register h'ff39 mcu 7 ? 0 r/w 6 ? 0 r/w 5 intm1 0 r/w 4 intm0 0 r/w 3 nmieg 0 r/w 0 rame 1 r/w 2 ? 0 r/w 1 ? 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : interrupt control mode selection 0 1 0 1 0 1 interrupt control mode 0 ? interrupt control mode 2 ? nmi input edge select 0 1 falling edge rising edge ram enable reserved only 0 should be written to this bit reserved only 0 should be written to this bit 0 1 on-chip ram disabled on-chip ram enabled appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 799 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 sckcr?system clock control register h'ff3a clock pulse generator 7 pstop 0 r/w 6 ? 0 r/w 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 ? 0 ? 0 sck0 0 r/w 2 sck2 0 r/w 1 sck1 0 r/w 0 1 pstop normal operation output fixed high high impedance high impedance fixed high fixed high clock output control bus master clock select 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 ? bus master is in high-speed mode medium-speed clock is /2 medium-speed clock is /4 medium-speed clock is /8 medium-speed clock is /16 medium-speed clock is /32 ? output fixed high sleep mode bit initial value read/write : : : software standby mode hardware standby mode appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 800 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 mdcr?mode control register h'ff3b mcu 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 0 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 ? 0 ? 0 mds0 ? * r 2 mds2 ? * r 1 mds1 ? * r current mode pin operating mode bit initial value read/write : : : note: * determined by pins md 2 to md 0 mstpcrh?module stop control register h h'ff3c power-down state mstpcrl?module stop control register l h'ff3d power-down state 15 0 r/w 14 0 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w mstpcrh mstpcrl specifies module stop mode 0 1 module stop mode cleared module stop mode set bit initial value read/write : : : syscr2 ? system control register 2 h'ff42 mcu 7 ? 0 ? 6 ? 0 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 flshe 0 r/w 0 ? 0 ? 2 ? 0 ? 1 ? 0 ? bit initial value read/write : : : flash memory control register enable 0 1 flash memory control register is not selected flash memory control register is selected appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 801 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 reserved register h'ff44 7 ? 0 ? 6 ? 0 ? 5 ? 0 r/w 4 ? 0 ? 3 ? 0 ? 0 ? 0 ? 2 ? 0 ? 1 ? 0 ? bit initial value read/write : : : reserved only 0 should be written to these bits reserved register h'ff45 7 ? 0 r/w 6 ? 0 r/w 5 ? 0 r/w 4 ? 0 r/w 3 ? 1 r/w 0 ? 1 r/w 2 ? 1 r/w 1 ? 1 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : reserved port1?port 1 register h'ff50 port 1 7 p17 ? * r 6 p16 ? * r 5 p15 ? * r 4 p14 ? * r 3 p13 ? * r 0 p10 ? * r 2 p12 ? * r 1 p11 ? * r note: * determined by the state of pins p1 7 to p1 0 . state of port 1 pins bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 802 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port2?port 2 register h'ff51 port 2 7 p27 ? * r 6 p26 ? * r 5 p25 ? * r 4 p24 ? * r 3 p23 ? * r 0 p20 ? * r 2 p22 ? * r 1 p21 ? * r state of port 2 pins note: * determined by the state of pins p2 7 to p2 0 . bit initial value read/write : : : port3?port 3 register h'ff52 port 3 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 p35 ? * r 4 p34 ? * r 3 p33 ? * r 0 p30 ? * r 2 p32 ? * r 1 p31 ? * r state of port 3 pins note: * determined by the state of pins p3 5 to p3 0 . bit initial value read/write : : : port4?port 4 register h'ff53 port 4 7 p47 ? * r 6 p46 ? * r 5 p45 ? * r 4 p44 ? * r 3 p43 ? * r 0 p40 ? * r 2 p42 ? * r 1 p41 ? * r state of port 4 pins note: * determined by the state of pins p4 7 to p4 0 . bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 803 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 porta?port a register h'ff59 port a 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 ? undefined ? 3 pa3 ? * r 0 pa0 ? * r 2 pa2 ? * r 1 pa1 ? * r state of port a pins note: * determined by the state of pins pa 3 to pa 0 . bit initial value read/write : : : portb?port b register h'ff5a port b 7 pb7 ? * r 6 pb6 ? * r 5 pb5 ? * r 4 pb4 ? * r 3 pb3 ? * r 0 pb0 ? * r 2 pb2 ? * r 1 pb1 ? * r state of port b pins note: * determined by the state of pins pb 7 to pb 0 . bit initial value read/write : : : portc?port c register h'ff5b port c 7 pc7 ? * r 6 pc6 ? * r 5 pc5 ? * r 4 pc4 ? * r 3 pc3 ? * r 0 pc0 ? * r 2 pc2 ? * r 1 pc1 ? * r state of port c pins note: * determined by the state of pins pc 7 to pc 0 . bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 804 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 portd?port d register h'ff5c port d 7 pd7 ? * r 6 pd6 ? * r 5 pd5 ? * r 4 pd4 ? * r 3 pd3 ? * r 0 pd0 ? * r 2 pd2 ? * r 1 pd1 ? * r state of port d pins note: * determined by the state of pins pd 7 to pd 0 . bit initial value read/write : : : porte?port e register h'ff5d port e 7 pe7 ? * r 6 pe6 ? * r 5 pe5 ? * r 4 pe4 ? * r 3 pe3 ? * r 0 pe0 ? * r 2 pe2 ? * r 1 pe1 ? * r state of port e pins note: * determined by the state of pins pe 7 to pe 0 . bit initial value read/write : : : portf?port f register h'ff5e port f 7 pf7 ? * r 6 pf6 ? * r 5 pf5 ? * r 4 pf4 ? * r 3 pf3 ? * r 0 pf0 ? * r 2 pf2 ? * r 1 pf1 ? * r state of port f pins note: * determined by the state of pins pf 7 to pf 0 . bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 805 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 portg?port g register h'ff5f port g 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 pg4 ? * r 3 pg3 ? * r 0 pg0 ? * r 2 pg2 ? * r 1 pg1 ? * r state of port g pins note: * determined by the state of pins pg 4 to pg 0 . bit initial value read/write : : : p1dr?port 1 data register h'ff60 port 1 7 p17dr 0 r/w 6 p16dr 0 r/w 5 p15dr 0 r/w 4 p14dr 0 r/w 3 p13dr 0 r/w 0 p10dr 0 r/w 2 p12dr 0 r/w 1 p11dr 0 r/w stores output data for port 1 pins (p1 7 to p1 0 ) bit initial value read/write : : : p2dr?port 2 data register h'ff61 port 2 7 p27dr 0 r/w 6 p26dr 0 r/w 5 p25dr 0 r/w 4 p24dr 0 r/w 3 p23dr 0 r/w 0 p20dr 0 r/w 2 p22dr 0 r/w 1 p21dr 0 r/w stores output data for port 2 pins (p2 7 to p2 0 ) bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 806 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 p3dr?port 3 data register h'ff62 port 3 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 p35dr 0 r/w 4 p34dr 0 r/w 3 p33dr 0 r/w 0 p30dr 0 r/w 2 p32dr 0 r/w 1 p31dr 0 r/w stores output data for port 3 pins (p3 5 to p3 0 ) bit initial value read/write : : : padr?port a data register h'ff69 port a 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 ? undefined ? 3 pa3dr 0 r/w 0 pa0dr 0 r/w 2 pa2dr 0 r/w 1 pa1dr 0 r/w stores output data for port a pins (pa 3 to pa 0 ) bit initial value read/write : : : pbdr?port b data register h'ff6a port b 7 pb7dr 0 r/w 6 pb6dr 0 r/w 5 pb5dr 0 r/w 4 pb4dr 0 r/w 3 pb3dr 0 r/w 0 pb0dr 0 r/w 2 pb2dr 0 r/w 1 pb1dr 0 r/w stores output data for port b pins (pb 7 to pb 0 ) bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 807 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pcdr?port c data register h'ff6b port c 7 pc7dr 0 r/w 6 pc6dr 0 r/w 5 pc5dr 0 r/w 4 pc4dr 0 r/w 3 pc3dr 0 r/w 0 pc0dr 0 r/w 2 pc2dr 0 r/w 1 pc1dr 0 r/w stores output data for port c pins (pc 7 to pc 0 ) bit initial value read/write : : : pddr?port d data register h'ff6c port d 7 pd7dr 0 r/w 6 pd6dr 0 r/w 5 pd5dr 0 r/w 4 pd4dr 0 r/w 3 pd3dr 0 r/w 0 pd0dr 0 r/w 2 pd2dr 0 r/w 1 pd1dr 0 r/w stores output data for port d pins (pd 7 to pd 0 ) bit initial value read/write : : : pedr?port e data register h'ff6d port e 7 pe7dr 0 r/w 6 pe6dr 0 r/w 5 pe5dr 0 r/w 4 pe4dr 0 r/w 3 pe3dr 0 r/w 0 pe0dr 0 r/w 2 pe2dr 0 r/w 1 pe1dr 0 r/w stores output data for port e pins (pe 7 to pe 0 ) bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 808 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pfdr?port f data register h'ff6e port f 7 pf7dr 0 r/w 6 pf6dr 0 r/w 5 pf5dr 0 r/w 4 pf4dr 0 r/w 3 pf3dr 0 r/w 0 pf0dr 0 r/w 2 pf2dr 0 r/w 1 pf1dr 0 r/w stores output data for port f pins (pf 7 to pf 0 ) bit initial value read/write : : : pgdr?port g data register h'ff6f port g 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 pg4dr 0 r/w 3 pg3dr 0 r/w 0 pg0dr 0 r/w 2 pg2dr 0 r/w 1 pg1dr 0 r/w stores output data for port g pins (pg 4 to pg 0 ) bit initial value read/write : : : papcr?port a mos pull-up control register h'ff70 port a 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 ? undefined ? 3 pa3pcr 0 r/w 0 pa0pcr 0 r/w 2 pa2pcr 0 r/w 1 pa1pcr 0 r/w controls the mos input pull-up function incorporated into port a on a bit-by-bit basis bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 809 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pbpcr?port b mos pull-up control register h'ff71 port b 7 pb7pcr 0 r/w 6 pb6pcr 0 r/w 5 pb5pcr 0 r/w 4 pb4pcr 0 r/w 3 pb3pcr 0 r/w 0 pb0pcr 0 r/w 2 pb2pcr 0 r/w 1 pb1pcr 0 r/w controls the mos input pull-up function incorporated into port b on a bit-by-bit basis bit initial value read/write : : : pcpcr?port c mos pull-up control register h'ff72 port c 7 pc7pcr 0 r/w 6 pc6pcr 0 r/w 5 pc5pcr 0 r/w 4 pc4pcr 0 r/w 3 pc3pcr 0 r/w 0 pc0pcr 0 r/w 2 pc2pcr 0 r/w 1 pc1pcr 0 r/w controls the mos input pull-up function incorporated into port c on a bit-by-bit basis bit initial value read/write : : : pdpcr?port d mos pull-up control register h'ff73 port d 7 pd7pcr 0 r/w 6 pd6pcr 0 r/w 5 pd5pcr 0 r/w 4 pd4pcr 0 r/w 3 pd3pcr 0 r/w 0 pd0pcr 0 r/w 2 pd2pcr 0 r/w 1 pd1pcr 0 r/w controls the mos input pull-up function incorporated into port d on a bit-by-bit basis bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 810 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 pepcr?port e mos pull-up control register h'ff74 port e 7 pe7pcr 0 r/w 6 pe6pcr 0 r/w 5 pe5pcr 0 r/w 4 pe4pcr 0 r/w 3 pe3pcr 0 r/w 0 pe0pcr 0 r/w 2 pe2pcr 0 r/w 1 pe1pcr 0 r/w controls the mos input pull-up function incorporated into port e on a bit-by-bit basis bit initial value read/write : : : p3odr?port 3 open drain control register h'ff76 port 3 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 p35odr 0 r/w 4 p34odr 0 r/w 3 p33odr 0 r/w 0 p30odr 0 r/w 2 p32odr 0 r/w 1 p31odr 0 r/w controls the pmos on/off status for each port 3 pin (p3 5 to p3 0 ) bit initial value read/write : : : paodr?port a open drain control register h'ff77 port a 7 ? undefined ? 6 ? undefined ? 5 ? undefined ? 4 ? undefined ? 3 pa3odr 0 r/w 0 pa0odr 0 r/w 2 pa2odr 0 r/w 1 pa1odr 0 r/w controls the pmos on/off status for each port a pin (pa 3 to pa 0 ) bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 811 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 smr0?serial mode register 0 h'ff78 sci0 7 c/ a 0 r/w 6 chr 0 r/w 5 pe 0 r/w 4 o/ e 0 r/w 3 stop 0 r/w 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 mp 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w 0 1 asynchronous mode synchronous mode asynchronous mode/synchronous mode select 0 1 parity bit addition and checking disabled parity bit addition and checking enabled parity enable 0 1 even parity odd parity parity mode 0 1 0 1 0 1 clock /4 clock /16 clock /64 clock clock select 0 1 multiprocessor function disabled multiprocessor format selected multiprocessor mode 0 1 1 stop bit 2 stop bits stop bit length 0 1 8-bit data 7-bit data * character length note: * when 7-bit data is selected, the msb (bit 7) of tdr is not transmitted. bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 812 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 smr0?serial mode register 0 h'ff78 smart card interface 0 7 gm 0 r/w 6 chr 0 r/w 5 pe 0 r/w 4 o/ e 0 r/w 3 stop 0 r/w 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 mp 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w 0 1 normal smart card interface mode operation tend flag generated 12.5 etu after beginning of start bit clock output on/off control only gsm mode smart card interface mode operation tend flag generated 11.0 etu after beginning of start bit fixed high/low-level control possible (set in scr) in addition to clock output on/off control gsm mode 0 1 setting prohibited parity bit addition and checking enabled parity enable 0 1 even parity odd parity parity mode 0 1 0 1 0 1 clock /4 clock /16 clock /64 clock clock select 0 1 multiprocessor function disabled setting prohibited multiprocessor mode 0 1 setting prohibited 2 stop bits stop bit length 0 1 8-bit data setting prohibited character length bit initial value read/write : : : note: etu (elementary time unit): time for transfer of one bit appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 813 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 brr0?bit rate register 0 h'ff79 sci0, smart card interface 0 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w sets the serial transfer bit rate note: see section 12.2.8, bit rate register (brr), for details. bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 814 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 scr0?serial control register 0 h'ff7a sci0 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 0 cke0 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w 0 0 asynchronous mode internal clock/sck pin functions as i/o port clock enable 0 1 transmit end interrupt (tei) request disabled transmit end interrupt (tei) request enabled transmit end interrupt enable 0 multiprocessor interrupts disabled [clearing conditions] when the mpie bit is cleared to 0 when mpb= 1 data is received multiprocessor interrupt enable 0 1 reception disabled reception enabled receive enable 0 1 transmission disabled transmission enabled transmit enable 0 receive data full interrupt (rxi) request and receive error interrupt (eri) request disabled receive interrupt enable 0 1 transmit data empty interrupt (txi) requests disabled transmit data empty interrupt (txi) requests enabled transmit interrupt enable notes: bit initial value read/write : : : synchronous mode internal clock/sck pin functions as serial clock output asynchronous mode internal clock/sck pin functions as clock output * 1 synchronous mode internal clock/sck pin functions as serial clock output asynchronous mode external clock/sck pin functions as clock input * 2 synchronous mode external clock/sck pin functions as serial clock input asynchronous mode external clock/sck pin functions as clock input * 2 synchronous mode external clock/sck pin functions as serial clock input 1. outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate. 2. inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate. multiprocessor interrupts enabled receive interrupt (rxi) requests, receive error interrupt (eri) requests, and setting of the rdrf, fer, and orer flags in ssr are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received 1 0 1 1 1 1 receive data full interrupt (rxi) request and receive error interrupt (eri) request enabled appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 815 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 scr0?serial control register 0 h'ff7a smart card interface 0 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 0 cke0 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w smcr smif 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 smr c/ a ,gm cke1 cke0 see sci specification sck pin function clock enable scr setting 0 1 transmit end interrupt (tei) request disabled transmit end interrupt (tei) request enabled transmit end interrupt enable 0 multiprocessor interrupts disabled [clearing conditions] when the mpie bit is cleared to 0 when mpb= 1 data is received multiprocessor interrupt enable 0 1 reception disabled reception enabled receive enable 0 1 transmission disabled transmission enabled transmit enable 0 receive data full interrupt (rxi) request and receive error interrupt (eri) request disabled receive interrupt enable 0 1 transmit data empty interrupt (txi) requests disabled transmit data empty interrupt (txi) requests enabled transmit interrupt enable bit initial value read/write : : : multiprocessor interrupts enabled receive interrupt (rxi) requests, receive error interrupt (eri) requests, and setting of the rdrf, fer, and orer flags in ssr are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received 1 1 receive data full interrupt (rxi) request and receive error interrupt (eri) request enabled operates as port input pin clock output as sck output pin fixed-low output as sck output pin clock output as sck output pin fixed-high output as sck output pin clock output as sck output pin appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 816 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tdr0?transmit data register 0 h'ff7b sci0, smart card interface 0 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w stores data for serial transmission bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 817 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ssr0?serial status register 0 h'ff7c sci0 [setting condition] when serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from rsr to rdr 7 tdre 1 r/(w) * 6 rdrf 0 r/(w) * 5 orer 0 r/(w) * 4 fer 0 r/(w) * 3 per 0 r/(w) * 0 mpbt 0 r/w 2 tend 1 r 1 mpb 0 r note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. 0 transmit data register empty 0 receive data register full 0 overrun error 0 framing error 0 parity error 0 transmit end [clearing conditions] when 0 is written to tdre after reading tdre = 1 when the dtc is activated by a txi interrupt and writes data to tdr 0 multiprocessor bit [clearing condition] when data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received [setting condition] when data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received multiprocessor bit transfer 0 1 data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted bit initial value read/write : : : [setting conditions] when the te bit in scr is 0 when tdre = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character [clearing condition] when 0 is written to per after reading per = 1 [setting condition] when, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit does not match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the o/ e bit in smr [clearing condition] when 0 is written to fer after reading fer = 1 [setting condition] when the sci checks whether the stop bit at the end of the receive data when reception ends, and the stop bit is 0 [clearing condition] when 0 is written to orer after reading orer = 1 [setting condition] when the next serial reception is completed while rdrf = 1 [clearing conditions] when 0 is written to rdrf after reading rdrf = 1 when the dtc is activated by an rxi interrupt and reads data from rdr [clearing conditions] when 0 is written to tdre after reading tdre = 1 when the dtc is activated by a txi interrupt and writes data to tdr [setting conditions] when the te bit in scr is 0 when data is transferred from tdr to tsr and data can be written to tdr 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 818 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ssr0?serial status register 0 h'ff7c smart card interface 0 7 tdre 1 r/(w) * 6 rdrf 0 r/(w) * 5 orer 0 r/(w) * 4 ers 0 r/(w) * 3 per 0 r/(w) * 0 mpbt 0 r/w 2 tend 1 r 1 mpb 0 r note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. 0 transmit data register empty 0 receive data register full 0 overrun error 0 error signal status 0 parity error 0 transmit end [clearing conditions] when 0 is written to tdre after reading tdre = 1 when the dtc is activated by a txi interrupt and writes data to tdr 0 multiprocessor bit [clearing condition] when data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received [setting condition] when data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received multiprocessor bit transfer 0 1 data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted bit initial value read/write : : : [setting conditions] on reset, or in standby mode or module stop mode when the te bit in scr is 0 and the ers bit is 0 when tdre = 1 and ers = 0 (normal transmission) 2.5 etu after a 1-byte serial character is transmitted when gm = 0 when tdre = 1 and ers = 0 (normal transmission) 1.0 etu after a 1-byte serial character is transmitted when gm = 1 [clearing condition] when 0 is written to per after reading per = 1 [setting condition] when, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit does not match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the o/ e bit in smr [clearing conditions] on reset, or in standby mode or module stop mode when 0 is written to ers after reading ers = 1 [setting condition] when the error signal is sampled at the low level [clearing condition] when 0 is written to orer after reading orer = 1 [setting condition] when the next serial reception is completed while rdrf = 1 [clearing conditions] when 0 is written to rdrf after reading rdrf = 1 when the dtc is activated by an rxi interrupt and reads data from rdr [setting condition] when serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from rsr to rdr [clearing conditions] when 0 is written to tdre after reading tdre = 1 when the dtc is activated by a txi interrupt and writes data to tdr [setting conditions] when the te bit in scr is 0 when data is transferred from tdr to tsr and data can be written to tdr note: etu: elementary time unit (the time taken to transmit one bit) note: clearing the te bit in scr to 0 does not affect the ers flag, which retains its prior state. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 819 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 rdr0?receive data register 0 h'ff7d sci0, smart card interface 0 7 0 r 6 0 r 5 0 r 4 0 r 3 0 r 0 0 r 2 0 r 1 0 r bit initial value read/write : : : stores received serial data scmr0?smart card mode register 0 h'ff7e sci0, smart card interface 0 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 1 ? 4 ? 1 ? 3 sdir 0 r/w 0 smif 0 r/w 2 sinv 0 r/w 1 ? 1 ? 0 1 tdr contents are transmitted lsb-first receive data is stored in rdr lsb-first smart card data direction 0 1 tdr contents are transmitted as they are receive data is stored in rdr as it is smart card data invert 0 1 smart card interface function is disabled smart card interface mode select bit initial value read/write : : : smart card interface function is enabled tdr contents are inverted before being transmitted receive data is stored in rdr in inverted form tdr contents are transmitted msb-first receive data is stored in rdr msb-first appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 820 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 smr1?serial mode register 1 h'ff80 sci1 7 c/ a 0 r/w 6 chr 0 r/w 5 pe 0 r/w 4 o/ e 0 r/w 3 stop 0 r/w 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 mp 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w 0 1 asynchronous mode synchronous mode asynchronous mode/synchronous mode select 0 1 parity bit addition and checking disabled parity bit addition and checking enabled parity enable 0 1 even parity odd parity parity mode 0 1 0 1 0 1 clock /4 clock /16 clock /64 clock clock select 0 1 multiprocessor function disabled multiprocessor format selected multiprocessor mode 0 1 1 stop bit 2 stop bits stop bit length 0 1 8-bit data 7-bit data * character length note: * when 7-bit data is selected, the msb (bit 7) of tdr is not transmitted. bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 821 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 smr1?serial mode register 1 h'ff80 smart card interface 1 7 gm 0 r/w 6 chr 0 r/w 5 pe 0 r/w 4 o/ e 0 r/w 3 stop 0 r/w 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 mp 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w 0 1 normal smart card interface mode operation tend flag generated 12.5 etu after beginning of start bit clock output on/off control only gsm mode smart card interface mode operation tend flag generated 11.0 etu after beginning of start bit fixed high/low-level control possible (set in scr) in addition to clock output on/off control gsm mode 0 1 setting prohibited parity bit addition and checking enabled parity enable 0 1 even parity odd parity parity mode 0 1 0 1 0 1 clock /4 clock /16 clock /64 clock clock select 0 1 multiprocessor function disabled setting prohibited multiprocessor mode 0 1 setting prohibited 2 stop bits stop bit length 0 1 8-bit data setting prohibited character length bit initial value read/write : : : note: etu (elementary time unit): time for transfer of one bit appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 822 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 brr1?bit rate register 1 h'ff81 sci1, smart card interface 1 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w note: see section 12.2.8, bit rate register (brr), for details. sets the serial transfer bit rate bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 823 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 scr1?serial control register 1 h'ff82 sci1 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 0 cke0 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w 1 0 asynchronous mode internal clock/sck pin functions as i/o port clock enable 0 1 transmit end interrupt (tei) request disabled transmit end interrupt (tei) request enabled transmit end interrupt enable 0 multiprocessor interrupts disabled [clearing conditions] when the mpie bit is cleared to 0 when mpb= 1 data is received multiprocessor interrupt enable 0 1 reception disabled reception enabled receive enable 0 1 transmission disabled transmission enabled transmit enable 0 receive data full interrupt (rxi) request and receive error interrupt (eri) request disabled receive interrupt enable 0 1 transmit data empty interrupt (txi) requests disabled transmit data empty interrupt (txi) requests enabled transmit interrupt enable notes: bit initial value read/write : : : synchronous mode internal clock/sck pin functions as serial clock output asynchronous mode internal clock/sck pin functions as clock output * 1 synchronous mode internal clock/sck pin functions as serial clock output asynchronous mode external clock/sck pin functions as clock input * 2 synchronous mode external clock/sck pin functions as serial clock input asynchronous mode external clock/sck pin functions as clock input * 2 synchronous mode external clock/sck pin functions as serial clock input 1. outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate. 2. inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate. multiprocessor interrupts enabled receive interrupt (rxi) requests, receive error interrupt (eri) requests, and setting of the rdrf, fer, and orer flags in ssr are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received 1 1 receive data full interrupt (rxi) request and receive error interrupt (eri) request enabled 1 0 1 0 appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 824 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 scr1?serial control register 1 h'ff82 smart card interface 1 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 0 cke0 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w smcr smif 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 smr c/ a ,gm cke1 cke0 see sci specification sck pin function clock enable scr setting 0 1 transmit end interrupt (tei) request disabled transmit end interrupt (tei) request enabled transmit end interrupt enable 0 multiprocessor interrupts disabled [clearing conditions] when the mpie bit is cleared to 0 when mpb= 1 data is received multiprocessor interrupt enable 0 1 reception disabled reception enabled receive enable 0 1 transmission disabled transmission enabled transmit enable 0 receive data full interrupt (rxi) request and receive error interrupt (eri) request disabled receive interrupt enable 0 1 transmit data empty interrupt (txi) requests disabled transmit data empty interrupt (txi) requests enabled transmit interrupt enable bit initial value read/write : : : multiprocessor interrupts enabled receive interrupt (rxi) requests, receive error interrupt (eri) requests, and setting of the rdrf, fer, and orer flags in ssr are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received 1 1 receive data full interrupt (rxi) request and receive error interrupt (eri) request enabled operates as port input pin clock output as sck output pin fixed-low output as sck output pin clock output as sck output pin fixed-high output as sck output pin clock output as sck output pin appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 825 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tdr1?transmit data register 1 h'ff83 sci1, smart card interface 1 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w stores data for serial transmission bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 826 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ssr1?serial status register 1 h'ff84 sci1 7 tdre 1 r/(w) * 6 rdrf 0 r/(w) * 5 orer 0 r/(w) * 4 fer 0 r/(w) * 3 per 0 r/(w) * 0 mpbt 0 r/w 2 tend 1 r 1 mpb 0 r note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. 0 transmit data register empty 0 receive data register full 0 overrun error 0 framing error 0 parity error 0 transmit end 0 multiprocessor bit [clearing condition] when data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received multiprocessor bit transfer 0 1 data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted bit initial value read/write : : : [setting condition] when data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received [clearing conditions] when 0 is written to tdre after reading tdre = 1 when the dtc is activated by a txi interrupt and writes data to tdr [setting conditions] when the te bit in scr is 0 when tdre = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character 1 [clearing condition] when 0 is written to per after reading per = 1 [setting condition] when, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit does not match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the o/ e bit in smr 1 [clearing condition] when 0 is written to fer after reading fer = 1 [setting condition] when the sci checks whether the stop bit at the end of the receive data when reception ends, and the stop bit is 0 [clearing condition] when 0 is written to orer after reading orer = 1 [setting condition] when the next serial reception is completed while rdrf = 1 [clearing conditions] when 0 is written to rdrf after reading rdrf = 1 when the dtc is activated by an rxi interrupt and reads data from rdr [setting condition] when serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from rsr to rdr [clearing conditions] when 0 is written to tdre after reading tdre = 1 when the dtc is activated by a txi interrupt and writes data to tdr [setting conditions] when the te bit in scr is 0 when data is transferred from tdr to tsr and data can be written to tdr 1 1 1 1 1 appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 827 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ssr1?serial status register 1 h'ff84 smart card interface 1 7 tdre 1 r/(w) * 6 rdrf 0 r/(w) * 5 orer 0 r/(w) * 4 ers 0 r/(w) * 3 per 0 r/(w) * 0 mpbt 0 r/w 2 tend 1 r 1 mpb 0 r note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. transmit data register empty 0 receive data register full 0 overrun error 0 error signal status 0 parity error 0 transmit end 0 multiprocessor bit [clearing condition] when data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received multiprocessor bit transfer 0 1 data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted bit initial value read/write : : : [setting condition] when data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received [clearing conditions] when 0 is written to tdre after reading tdre = 1 when the dtc is activated by a txi interrupt and writes data to tdr [setting conditions] on reset, or in standby mode or module stop mode when the te bit in scr is 0 and the ers bit is 0 when tdre = 1 and ers = 0 (normal transmission) 2.5 etu after a 1-byte serial character is transmitted when gm = 0 when tdre = 1 and ers = 0 (normal transmission) 1.0 etu after a 1-byte serial character is transmitted when gm = 1 1 [clearing condition] when 0 is written to per after reading per = 1 [setting condition] when, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit does not match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the o/ e bit in smr 1 [clearing conditions] on reset, or in standby mode or module stop mode when 0 is written to ers after reading ers =1 [setting condition] when the error signal is sampled at the low level [clearing condition] when 0 is written to orer after reading orer = 1 [setting condition] when the next serial reception is completed while rdrf = 1 [clearing conditions] when 0 is written to rdrf after reading rdrf = 1 when the dtc is activated by an rxi interrupt and reads data from rdr [setting condition] when serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from rsr to rdr [clearing conditions] when 0 is written to tdre after reading tdre = 1 when the dtc is activated by a txi interrupt and writes data to tdr [setting conditions] when the te bit in scr is 0 when data is transferred from tdr to tsr and data can be written to tdr note: etu: elementary time unit (time for transfer of one bit) 1 note: clearing the te bit in scr to 0 does not affect the ers flag, which retains its prior state. 1 1 1 0 1 appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 828 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 rdr1?receive data register 1 h'ff85 sci1, smart card interface 1 7 0 r 6 0 r 5 0 r 4 0 r 3 0 r 0 0 r 2 0 r 1 0 r stores received serial data bit initial value read/write : : : scmr1?smart card mode register 1 h'ff86 sci1, smart card interface 1 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 1 ? 4 ? 1 ? 3 sdir 0 r/w 0 smif 0 r/w 2 sinv 0 r/w 1 ? 1 ? 0 1 tdr contents are transmitted lsb-first receive data is stored in rdr lsb-first smart card data direction 0 tdr contents are transmitted as they are receive data is stored in rdr as it is smart card data invert 0 1 smart card interface function is disabled smart card interface mode select bit initial value read/write : : : smart card interface function is enabled tdr contents are inverted before being transmitted receive data is stored in rdr in inverted form 1 tdr contents are transmitted msb-first receive data is stored in rdr msb-first appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 829 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 addrah?a/d data register ah h'ff90 a/d converter addral?a/d data register al h'ff91 a/d converter addrbh?a/d data register bh h'ff92 a/d converter addrbl?a/d data register bl h'ff93 a/d converter addrch?a/d data register ch h'ff94 a/d converter addrcl?a/d data register cl h'ff95 a/d converter addrdh?a/d data register dh h'ff96 a/d converter addrdl?a/d data register dl h'ff97 a/d converter 15 ad9 0 r 14 ad8 0 r 13 ad7 0 r 12 ad6 0 r 11 ad5 0 r 10 ad4 0 r 9 ad3 0 r 8 ad2 0 r 7 ad1 0 r 6 ad0 0 r 5 ? 0 r 4 ? 0 r 3 ? 0 r 2 ? 0 r 1 ? 0 r 0 ? 0 r stores the results of a/d conversion analog input channel a/d data register bit initial value read/write : : : group 0 an0 an1 an2 an3 group 1 an4 an5 an6 an7 addra addrb addrc addrd appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 830 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 adcsr?a/d control/status register h'ff98 a/d converter [clearing conditions] when 0 is written to the adf flag after reading adf = 1 when the dtc is activated by an adi interrupt, and addr is read 7 adf 0 r/(w) * 6 adie 0 r/w 5 adst 0 r/w 4 scan 0 r/w 3 cks 0 r/w 0 ch0 0 r/w 2 ch2 0 r/w 1 ch1 0 r/w note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. 0 1 conversion time= 266 states (max.) conversion time= 134 states (max.) group select 0 1 a/d conversion end interrupt (adi) request disabled a/d conversion end interrupt (adi) request enabled a/d interrupt enable 0 1 single mode scan mode scan mode 0 1 a/d conversion stopped a/d start 0 a/d end flag ch1 0 1 0 1 ch0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 single mode an0 an0, an1 an0 to an2 an0 to an3 an4 an4, an5 an4 to an6 an4 to an7 channel select bit initial value read/write : : : single mode: a/d conversion is started. cleared to 0 automatically when conversion ends scan mode: a/d conversion is started. conversion continues sequentially on the selected channels until adst is cleared to 0 by software, a reset, or transition to standby mode or module stop mode [setting conditions] single mode: when a/d conversion ends scan mode: when one round of conversion has been performed on all specified channels 1 ch2 0 1 group select channel select an0 an1 an2 an3 an4 an5 an6 an7 scan mode appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 831 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 adcr?a/d control register h'ff99 a/d 7 trgs1 0 r/w 6 trgs0 0 r/w 5 ? 1 ? 4 ? 1 ? 3 ? 1 r/w 0 ? 1 ? 2 ? 1 ? 1 ? 1 ? 0 1 0 1 0 description timer trigger select reserved bit. write as 1. bit initial value read/write : : : a/d conversion start by external trigger is disabled a/d conversion start by external trigger (tpu) is enabled a/d conversion start by external trigger (8-bit timer) is enabled a/d conversion start by external trigger pin ( adtrg ) is enabled 1 trgs0 trgs1 dadr0?d/a data register 0 h'ffa4 d/a dadr1?d/a data register 1 h'ffa5 d/a 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w stores data for d/a conversion bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 832 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 dacr?d/a control register h'ffa6 d/a 7 daoe1 0 r/w 6 daoe0 0 r/w 5 dae 0 r/w 4 ? 1 ? 3 ? 1 ? 0 ? 1 ? 2 ? 1 ? 1 ? 1 ? d/a conversion control daoe1 daoe0 dae description 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 * channel 0 and 1 d/a conversion disabled channel 0 d/a conversion enabled channel 1 d/a conversion disabled channel 0 and 1 d/a conversions enabled channel 0 d/a conversion disabled channel 1 d/a conversion enabled channel 0 and 1 d/a conversion enabled channel 0 and 1 d/a conversion enabled * : don ? t care 0 1 analog output da0 is disabled channel 0 d/a conversion is enabled d/a output enable 0 0 1 analog output da1 is disabled channel 1 d/a conversion is enabled d/a output enable 1 bit initial value read/write : : : analog output da0 is enabled analog output da1 is enabled appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 833 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcr0?time control register 0 h'ffb0 8-bit timer channel 0 tcr1?time control register 1 h'ffb1 8-bit timer channel 1 7 cmieb 0 r/w 6 cmiea 0 r/w 5 ovie 0 r/w 4 cclr1 0 r/w 3 cclr0 0 r/w 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 cks2 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w note: * 000 1 clock input disabled internal clock: counted at falling edge of /8 internal clock: counted at falling edge of /64 10 internal clock: counted at falling edge of /8192 1 1 0 0 for channel 0: count at tcnt1 overflow signal * for channel 1: count at tcnt0 compare match a * external clock: counted at rising edge external clock: counted at falling edge 1 0 1 external clock: counted at both rising and falling edges 1 clock select 0 1 cmfb interrupt requests (cmib) are disabled cmfb interrupt requests (cmib) are enabled compare match interrupt enable b 0 1 cmfa interrupt requests (cmia) are disabled cmfa interrupt requests (cmia) are enabled compare match interrupt enable a 0 1 ovf interrupt requests (ovi) are disabled ovf interrupt requests (ovi) are enabled timer overflow interrupt enable 0 1 clear is disabled clear by compare match a clear by compare match b clear by rising edge of external reset input 0 1 0 1 counter clear bit initial value read/write if the count input of channel 0 is the tcnt1 overflow signal and that of channel 1 is the tcnt0 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. do not use this setting. : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 834 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcsr0?timer control/status register 0 h'ffb2 8-bit timer channel 0 tcsr1?timer control/status register 1 h'ffb3 8-bit timer channel 1 7 cmfb 0 r/(w) * 6 cmfa 0 r/(w) * 5 ovf 0 r/(w) * 4 ? 1 ? 3 os3 0 r/w 0 os0 0 r/w 2 os2 0 r/w 1 os1 0 r/w tcsr1 7 cmfb 0 r/(w) * 6 cmfa 0 r/(w) * 5 ovf 0 r/(w) * 4 adte 0 r/w 3 os3 0 r/w 0 os0 0 r/w 2 os2 0 r/w 1 os1 0 r/w tcsr0 note: * only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. 0 1 compare match flag b 0 1 compare match flag a 0 [clearing condition] cleared by reading ovf when ovf = 1, then writing 0 to ovf 1 timer overflow flag 0 1 a/d converter start requests by compare match a are disabled a/d converter start requests by compare match a are enabled a/d trigger enable (tcsr0 only) 0 1 no change when compare match b occurs 0 is output when compare match b occurs 1 is output when compare match b occurs 0 1 0 1 output select bit initial value read/write : : : bit initial value read/write : : : [setting condition] set when tcnt overflows (changes from h'ff to h'00) [clearing conditions] cleared by reading cmfa when cmfa = 1, then writing 0 to cmfa when the dtc is activated by a cmia interrupt, while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0. [setting condition] set when tcnt matches tcora [clearing conditions] cleared by reading cmfb when cmfb = 1, then writing 0 to cmfb when the dtc is activated by a cmib interrupt, while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0. [setting condition] set when tcnt matches tcorb output is inverted when compare match b occurs (toggle output) 0 no change when compare match a occurs 0 output select output is inverted when compare match a occurs (toggle output) 1 is output when compare match a occurs 0 is output when compare match a occurs 1 1 0 1 appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 835 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcora0?time constant register a0 h'ffb4 8-bit timer channel 0 tcora1?time constant register a1 h'ffb5 8-bit timer channel 1 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w tcora0 tcora1 bit initial value read/write : : : tcorb0?time constant register b0 h'ffb6 8-bit timer channel 0 tcorb1?time constant register b1 h'ffb7 8-bit timer channel 1 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w tcorb0 tcorb1 bit initial value read/write : : : tcnt0?timer counter 0 h'ffb8 8-bit timer channel 0 tcnt1?timer counter 1 h'ffb9 8-bit timer channel 1 15 0 r/w 14 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 9 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 0 0 r/w tcnt0 tcnt1 bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 836 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcsr?timer control/status register h'ffbc (w) h'ffbc (r) wdt 7 ovf 0 r/(w) * 6 wt/ it 0 r/w 5 tme 0 r/w 4 ? 1 ? 3 ? 1 ? 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 cks2 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w the method for writing to tcsr is different from that for general registers to prevent inadvertent overwriting. for details see section 11.2.4, notes on register access. 0 [clearing condition] cleared by reading tcsr when ovf = 1, then writing 0 to ovf 1 overflow flag 0 interval timer mode: sends the cpu an interval timer interrupt request (wovi) when tcnt overflows watchdog timer mode: generates the wdtovf signal when tcnt overflows 1 timer mode select 0 1 tcnt is initialized to h'00 and halted tcnt counts timer enable clock select cks2 cks1 cks0 clock overflow period * (when = 20 mhz) 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 /2 (initial value) /64 /128 /512 /2048 /8192 /32768 /131072 25.6s 819.2s 1.6ms 6.6ms 26.2ms 104.9ms 419.4ms 1.68s note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. note: * bit initial value read/write : : : the overflow period is the time from when tcnt starts counting up from h'00 until overflow occurs. [setting condition] set when tcnt overflows from h'ff to h'00 in interval timer mode appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 837 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcnt?timer counter h'ffbc (w) h'ffbd (r) wdt 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write the method for writing to tcnt is different from that for general registers to prevent inadvertent overwriting. for details, see section 11.2.4, notes on register access. : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 838 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 rstcsr?reset control/status register h'ffbe (w) h'ffbf (r) wdt 7 wovf 0 r/(w) * 6 rste 0 r/w 5 rsts 0 r/w 4 ? 1 ? 3 ? 1 ? 0 ? 1 ? 2 ? 1 ? 1 ? 1 ? 0 1 [clearing condition] cleared by reading tcsr when wovf = 1, then writing 0 to wovf watchdog timer overflow flag note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. the method for writing to rstcsr is different from that for general registers to prevent inadvertent overwriting. for details see section 11.2.4, notes on register access. 0 1 reset enable reset signal is not generated if tcnt overflows * reset signal is generated if tcnt overflows 0 1 reset select power-on reset manual reset bit initial value read/write : : : [setting condition] set when tcnt overflows (changed from h'ff to h'00) during watchdog timer operation note: * the modules h8s/2345 group are not reset, but tcnt and tcsr in wdt are reset. appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 839 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tstr?timer start register h'ffc0 tpu 7 ? 0 ? 6 ? 0 ? 5 cst5 0 r/w 4 cst4 0 r/w 3 cst3 0 r/w 0 cst0 0 r/w 2 cst2 0 r/w 1 cst1 0 r/w counter start 0 1 tcntn count operation is stopped tcntn performs count operation note: (n = 5 to 0) if 0 is written to the cst bit during operation with the tioc pin designated for output, the counter stops but the tioc pin output compare output level is retained. if tior is written to when the cst bit is cleared to 0, the pin output level will be changed to the set initial output value. bit initial value read/write : : : tsyr?timer synchro register h'ffc1 tpu 7 ? 0 ? 6 ? 0 ? 5 sync5 0 r/w 4 sync4 0 r/w 3 sync3 0 r/w 0 sync0 0 r/w 2 sync2 0 r/w 1 sync1 0 r/w timer synchronization 0 1 tcntn operates independently (tcnt presetting/ clearing is unrelated to other channels) (n = 5 to 0) notes: to set synchronous operation, the sync bits for at least two channels must be set to 1. to set synchronous clearing, in addition to the sync bit , the tcnt clearing source must also be set by means of bits cclr2 to cclr0 in tcr. 1. 2. bit initial value read/write : : : tcntn performs synchronous operation tcnt synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 840 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 flmcr1?flash memory control register 1 h'ffc8 flash 7 fwe ? * r 6 swe 0 r/w 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 ev 0 r/w 0 p 0 r/w 2 pv 0 r/w 1 e 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : program 0 program mode cleared 1 transition to program mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1, swe = 1, and psu = 1 erase 0 erase mode cleared 1 transition to erase mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1, swe = 1, and esu = 1 program-verify 0 program-verify mode cleared 1 transition to program-verify mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1 and swe = 1 software write enable 0 writes disabled 1 writes enabled [setting condition] when fwe = 1 flash write enable note: * determined by the state of the fwe pin. 0 when a low level is input to the fwe pin (hardware-protected state) 1 when a high level is input to the fwe pin erase-verify 0 erase-verify mode cleared 1 transition to erase-verify mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1 and swe = 1 appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 841 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 flmcr2?flash memory control register 2 h'ffc9 flash 7 fler 0 r 6 ? 0 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 ? 0 ? 0 psu 0 r/w 2 ? 0 ? 1 esu 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : program setup 0 program setup cleared 1 program setup [setting condition] when fwe = 1, and swe = 1 erase setup 0 erase setup cleared 1 erase setup [setting condition] when fwe = 1, and swe = 1 flash memory error 0 flash memory is operating normally flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled [clearing condition] reset or hardware standby mode 1 an error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled [setting condition] see section 17.10.3, error protection appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 842 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 ebr1?erase block register 1 h'ffca flash ebr2?erase block register 2 h'ffcb flash 7 ? 0 ? 6 ? 0 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 ? 0 ? 0 eb8 0 r/w 2 ? 0 ? 1 eb9 0 r/w bit ebr1 initial value read/write : : : 7 eb7 0 r/w 6 eb6 0 r/w 5 eb5 0 r/w 4 eb4 0 r/w 3 eb3 0 r/w 0 eb0 0 r/w 2 eb2 0 r/w 1 eb1 0 r/w bit ebr2 initial value read/write : : : flash memory erase blocks eb0 (1 kbyte) eb1 (1 kbyte) eb2 (1 kbyte) eb3 (1 kbyte) eb4 (28 kbytes) eb5 (16 kbytes) eb6 (8 kbytes) eb7 (8 kbytes) eb8 (32 kbytes) eb9 (32 kbytes) h'000000 to h'0003ff h'000400 to h'0007ff h'000800 to h'000bff h'000c00 to h'000fff h'001000 to h'007fff h'008000 to h'00bfff h'00c000 to h'00dfff h'00e000 to h'00ffff h'010000 to h'017fff h'018000 to h'01ffff block (size) address appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 843 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcr0?timer control register 0 h'ffd0 tpu0 7 cclr2 0 r/w 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w tcnt clearing disabled tcnt cleared by tgra compare match/input capture tcnt cleared by tgrb compare match/input capture counter clear 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 clock edge 0 1 * count at rising edge count at falling edge count at both edges * : don ? t care internal clock: counts on /1 internal clock: counts on /4 internal clock: counts on /16 internal clock: counts on /64 external clock: counts on tclka pin input external clock: counts on tclkb pin input external clock: counts on tclkc pin input external clock: counts on tclkd pin input time prescaler 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 bit initial value read/write : : : notes: 1. synchronous operation setting is performed by setting the sync bit in tsyr to 1. 2. when tgrc or tgrd is used as a buffer register, tcnt is not cleared because the buffer register setting has priority, and compare match/input capture does not occur. tcnt cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/synchronous operation * 1 tcnt cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/synchronous operation * 1 10 1 0 1 0 1 tcnt clearing disabled tcnt cleared by tgrc compare match/input capture * 2 tcnt cleared by tgrd compare match/input capture * 2 appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 844 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tmdr0?timer mode register 0 h'ffd1 tpu0 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 bfb 0 r/w 4 bfa 0 r/w 3 md3 0 r/w 0 md0 0 r/w 2 md2 0 r/w 1 md1 0 r/w 0 1 tgrb buffer operation tgrb operates normally 0 1 tgra buffer operation tgra operates normally 0 1 normal operation reserved pwm mode 1 pwm mode 2 phase counting mode 1 phase counting mode 2 phase counting mode 3 phase counting mode 4 ? mode 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * notes: 1. 2. md3 is a reserved bit. in a write, it should always be written with 0. phase counting mode cannot be set for channels 0 and 3. in this case, 0 should always be written to md2. * : don ? t care bit initial value read/write : : : tgra and tgrc used together for buffer operation tgrb and tgrd used together for buffer operation appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 845 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tior0h?timer i/o control register 0h h'ffd2 tpu0 7 iob3 0 r/w 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 ioa3 0 r/w 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w 0 1 tgr0b i/o control 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * * 0 1 tgr0a is output compare register tgr0a i/o control 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * * output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges * : don ? t care * : don ? t care note: 1. when bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr1 are set to b'000, and /1 is used as the tcnt1 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. bit initial value read/write : : : initial output is 0 output tgr0a is input capture register output disabled initial output is 1 output capture input source is tioca0 pin capture input source is channel 1/count clock input capture at tcnt1 count-up/ count-down tgr0b is output compare register output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges initial output is 0 output tgr0b is input compare register output disabled initial output is 0 output capture input source is tiocb0 pin capture input source is channel 1/count clock input capture at tcnt1 count-up/ count-down * 1 appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 846 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tior0l?timer i/o control register 0l h'ffd3 tpu0 0 1 tgr0d i/o control 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * * 0 1 tgr0c i/o control 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * * * : don ? t care * : don ? t care notes: 1. when bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr1 are set to b'000, and /1 is used as the tcnt1 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. 2. when the bfb bit in tmdr0 is set to 1 and tgr0d is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. note: 1. when the bfa bit in tmdr0 is set to 1 and tgr0c is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. 7 iod3 0 r/w 6 iod2 0 r/w 5 iod1 0 r/w 4 iod0 0 r/w 3 ioc3 0 r/w 0 ioc0 0 r/w 2 ioc2 0 r/w 1 ioc1 0 r/w note: when tgrc or tgrd is designated for buffer operation, this setting is invalid and the register operates as a buffer regi ster. bit initial value read/write : : : : tgr0c is output compare register output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges initial output is 0 output tgr0c is input capture register * 1 output disabled initial output is 1 output capture input source is tiocc0 pin capture input source is channel 1/count clock input capture at tcnt1 count-up/ count-down tgr0d is output compare register output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges initial output is 0 output tgr0d is input capture register * 2 output disabled initial output is 1 output capture input source is tiocd0 pin capture input source is channel 1/count clock input capture at tcnt1 count-up/ count-down * 1 appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 847 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tier0?timer interrupt enable register 0 h'ffd4 tpu0 7 ttge 0 r/w 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 tciev 0 r/w 3 tgied 0 r/w 0 tgiea 0 r/w 2 tgiec 0 r/w 1 tgieb 0 r/w 0 1 a/d conversion start request generation disabled a/d conversion start request generation enabled a/d conversion start request enable 0 1 interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv disabled interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv enabled overflow interrupt enable tgr interrupt enable d tgr interrupt enable c tgr interrupt enable b 0 1 interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit disabled tgr interrupt enable a 0 1 interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit disabled 0 1 interrupt requests (tgic) by tgfc bit disabled 0 1 interrupt requests (tgid) by tgfd bit disabled bit initial value read/write : : : interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit enabled interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit enabled interrupt requests (tgic) by tgfc bit enabled interrupt requests (tgid) by tgfd bit enabled appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 848 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tsr0?timer status register 0 h'ffd5 tpu0 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 tcfv 0 r/(w) * 3 tgfd 0 r/(w) * 0 tgfa 0 r/(w) * 2 tgfc 0 r/(w) * 1 tgfb 0 r/(w) * note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. 0 overflow flag 1 0 input capture/output compare flag d 1 0 input capture/output compare flag c 1 0 input capture/output compare flag b 1 0 [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgia interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfa after reading tgfa = 1 input capture/output compare flag a 1 bit initial value read/write : : : [setting conditions] when tcnt = tgra while tgra is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgra by input capture signal while tgra is functioning as input capture register [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgib interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfb after reading tgfb = 1 [setting conditions] when tcnt = tgrb while tgrb is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgrb by input capture signal while tgrb is functioning as input capture register [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgic interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfc after reading tgfc = 1 [setting conditions] when tcnt = tgrc while tgrc is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgrc by input capture signal while tgrc is functioning as input capture register [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgid interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfd after reading tgfd = 1 [setting conditions] when tcnt = tgrd while tgrd is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgrd by input capture signal while tgrd is functioning as input capture register [clearing condition] when 0 is written to tcfv after reading tcfv = 1 [setting condition] when the tcnt value overflows (changes from h'ffff to h'0000 ) appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 849 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcnt0?timer counter 0 h'ffd6 tpu0 15 0 r/w 14 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 9 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w up-counter tgr0a?timer general register 0a h'ffd8 tpu0 tgr0b?timer general register 0b h'ffda tpu0 tgr0c?timer general register 0c h'ffdc tpu0 tgr0d?timer general register 0d h'ffde tpu0 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 850 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcr1?timer control register 1 h'ffe0 tpu1 tcnt clearing disabled tcnt cleared by tgra compare match/input capture tcnt cleared by tgrb compare match/input capture counter clear 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 clock edge 0 1 * count at rising edge count at falling edge count at both edges * : don ? t care internal clock: counts on /1 internal clock: counts on /4 internal clock: counts on /16 internal clock: counts on /64 external clock: counts on tclka pin input external clock: counts on tclkb pin input internal clock: counts on /256 counts on tcnt2 overflow/underflow time prescaler 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 7 ? 0 ? 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w note: this setting is ignored when channel 1 is in phase counting mode. note: * synchronous operating setting is performed by setting the sync bit in tsyr to 1. bit initial value read/write : : : note: this setting is ignored when channel 1 is in phase counting mode. tcnt cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/synchronous operation * appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 851 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tmdr1?timer mode register 1 h'ffe1 tpu1 0 1 normal operation reserved pwm mode 1 pwm mode 2 phase counting mode 1 phase counting mode 2 phase counting mode 3 1phase counting mode 4 ? mode 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * note: md3 is a reserved bit. in a write, it should always be written with 0. * : don ? t care 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 md3 0 r/w 0 md0 0 r/w 2 md2 0 r/w 1 md1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 852 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tior1?timer i/o control register 1 h'ffe2 tpu1 7 iob3 0 r/w 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 ioa3 0 r/w 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w 0 1 tgr1b i/o control 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * * tgr1a i/o control * : don ? t care 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * * * : don ? t care bit initial value read/write : : : tgr1a is output compare register output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges initial output is 0 output tgr1a is input capture register output disabled initial output is 1 output capture input source is tioca1 pin capture input source is tgr0a compare match/ input capture input capture at generation of channel 0/tgr0a compare match/ input capture tgr1b is output compare register output disabled 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges initial output is 0 output tgr1b is input capture register output disabled initial output is 1 output capture input source is tiocb1 pin capture input source is tgr0c compare match/ input capture input capture at generation of tgr0b compare match/input capture appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 853 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tier1?timer interrupt enable register 1 h'ffe4 tpu1 7 ttge 0 r/w 6 ? 1 ? 5 tcieu 0 r/w 4 tciev 0 r/w 3 ? 0 ? 0 tgiea 0 r/w 2 ? 0 ? 1 tgieb 0 r/w 0 1 a/d conversion start request generation disabled a/d conversion start request generation enabled a/d conversion start request enable 0 1 interrupt requests (tciu) by tcfu disabled interrupt requests (tciu) by tcfu enabled underflow interrupt enable tgr interrupt enable b 0 1 interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit disabled tgi interrupt enable a 0 1 interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit disabled 0 1 interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv disabled interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv enabled overflow interrupt enable bit initial value read/write : : : interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit enabled interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit enabled appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 854 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tsr1?timer status register 1 h'ffe5 tpu1 7 tcfd 1 r 6 ? 1 ? 5 tcfu 0 r/(w) * 4 tcfv 0 r/(w) * 3 ? 0 ? 0 tgfa 0 r/(w)* 2 ? 0 ? 1 tgfb 0 r/(w)* 0 1 tcnt counts down tcnt counts up count direction flag 0 underflow flag 1 0 overflow flag 1 0 input capture/output compare flag b 1 0 [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgia interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfa after reading tgfa = 1 input capture/output compare flag a 1 note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. bit initial value read/write : : : [setting conditions] when tcnt = tgra while tgra is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgra by input capture signal while tgra is functioning as input capture register [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgib interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfb after reading tgfb = 1 [setting conditions] when tcnt = tgrb while tgrb is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgrb by input capture signal while tgrb is functioning as input capture register [clearing condition] when 0 is written to tcfv after reading tcfv = 1 [setting condition] when the tcnt value overflows (changes from h'ffff to h'0000 ) [clearing condition] when 0 is written to tcfu after reading tcfu = 1 [setting condition] when the tcnt value underflows (changes from h'0000 to h'ffff) appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 855 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcnt1?timer counter 1 h'ffe6 tpu1 15 0 r/w 14 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 9 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w note: * up/down-counter * bit initial value read/write : : : this timer counter can be used as an up/down-counter only in phase counting mode or when performing overflow/underflow counting on another channel. in other cases it functions as an up-counter. tgr1a?timer general register 1a h'ffe8 tpu1 tgr1b?timer general register 1b h'ffea tpu1 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 856 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcr2?timer control register 2 h'fff0 tpu2 tcnt clearing disabled tcnt cleared by tgra compare match/input capture tcnt cleared by tgrb compare match/input capture counter clear 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 clock edge 0 1 * count at rising edge count at falling edge count at both edges * : don ? t care internal clock: counts on /1 internal clock: counts on /4 internal clock: counts on /16 internal clock: counts on /64 external clock: counts on tclka pin input external clock: counts on tclkb pin input external clock: counts on tclkc pin input internal clock: counts on /1024 time prescaler 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 7 ? 0 ? 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w note: this setting is ignored when channel 2 is in phase counting mode. note: * synchronous operating setting is performed by setting the sync bit tsyr to 1. bit initial value read/write : : : note: this setting is ignored when channel 2 is in phase counting mode. tcnt cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/synchronous operation * appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 857 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tmdr2?timer mode register 2 h'fff1 tpu2 0 1 normal operation reserved pwm mode 1 pwm mode 2 phase counting mode 1 phase counting mode 2 phase counting mode 3 phase counting mode 4 ? mode 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * note: md3 is a reserved bit. in a write, it should always be written with 0. * : don ? t care 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 0 ? 4 ? 0 ? 3 md3 0 r/w 0 md0 0 r/w 2 md2 0 r/w 1 md1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 858 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tior2?timer i/o control register 2 h'fff2 tpu2 7 iob3 0 r/w 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 ioa3 0 r/w 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w 0 1 tgr2b i/o control 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * * : don ? t care 0 1 tgr2a is output compare register tgr2a i/o control 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges * : don ? t care bit initial value read/write : : : output disabled initial output is 0 output output disabled initial output is 1 output tgr2a is input capture register capture input source is tioca2 pin tgr2b is output compare register 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match toggle output at compare match input capture at rising edge input capture at falling edge input capture at both edges output disabled initial output is 0 output output disabled initial output is 1 output tgr2b is input capture register capture input source is tiocb2 pin appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 859 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tier2?timer interrupt enable register 2 h'fff4 tpu2 7 ttge 0 r/w 6 ? 1 ? 5 tcieu 0 r/w 4 tciev 0 r/w 3 ? 0 ? 0 tgiea 0 r/w 2 ? 0 ? 1 tgieb 0 r/w 0 1 a/d conversion start request generation disabled a/d conversion start request generation enabled a/d conversion start request enable 0 1 interrupt requests (tciu) by tcfu disabled interrupt requests (tciu) by tcfu enabled underflow interrupt enable tgr interrupt enable b 0 1 interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit disabled tgr interrupt enable a 0 1 interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit disabled 0 1 interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv disabled interrupt requests (tciv) by tcfv enabled overflow interrupt enable bit initial value read/write : : : interrupt requests (tgia) by tgfa bit enabled interrupt requests (tgib) by tgfb bit enabled appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 860 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tsr2?timer status register 2 h'fff5 tpu2 7 tcfd 1 r 6 ? 1 ? 5 tcfu 0 r/(w) * 4 tcfv 0 r/(w) * 3 ? 0 ? 0 tgfa 0 r/(w) * 2 ? 0 ? 1 tgfb 0 r/(w) * 0 1 tcnt counts down tcnt counts up count direction flag 0 underflow flag 1 0 overflow flag 1 0 input capture/output compare flag b 1 0 [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgia interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfa after reading tgfa = 1 input capture/output compare flag a 1 note: * can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. bit initial value read/write : : : [setting conditions] when tcnt = tgra while tgra is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgra by input capture signal while tgra is functioning as input capture register [clearing conditions] when dtc is activated by tgib interrupt while disel bit of mrb in dtc is 0 when 0 is written to tgfb after reading tgfb = 1 [setting conditions] when tcnt = tgrb while tgrb is functioning as output compare register when tcnt value is transferred to tgrb by input capture signal while tgrb is functioning as input capture register [clearing condition] when 0 is written to tcfv after reading tcfv = 1 [setting condition] when the tcnt value overflows (changes from h'ffff to h'0000 ) [clearing condition] when 0 is written to tcfu after reading tcfu = 1 [setting condition] when the tcnt value underflows (changes from h'0000 to h'ffff) appendix b internal i/o register rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 861 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 tcnt2?timer counter 2 h'fff6 tpu2 15 0 r/w 14 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 9 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w note: * this timer counter can be used as an up/down-counter only in phase counting mode or when performing overflow/underflow counting on another channel. in other cases it functions as an up-counter. up/down-counter * bit initial value read/write : : : tgr2a?timer general register 2a h'fff8 tpu2 tgr2b?timer general register 2b h'fffa tpu2 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w bit initial value read/write : : : appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 862 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 appendix c i/o port block diagrams c.1 port 1 block diagram r p1nddr c qd reset wddr1 mode 1/2/3/7 mode 4/5/6 reset wdr1 r p1ndr c qd p1 n rdr1 rpor1 internal data bus internal address bus tpu module output compare output/pwm output enable output compare output/pwm output input capture input legend: wddr1 wdr1 rdr1 rpor1 note: n = 0 or 1 : write to p1ddr : write to p1dr : read p1dr : read port 1 figure c.1 (a) port 1 block diagram (pins p1 0 and p1 1 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 863 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r p1nddr c qd reset wddr1 reset mode 1/2/3/7 mode 4/5/6 wdr1 r p1ndr c qd p1 n rdr1 rpor1 internal data bus internal address bus tpu module output compare output/pwm output enable output compare output/pwm output external clock input input capture input legend: wddr1 wdr1 rdr1 rpor1 note: n = 2 or 3 : write to p1ddr : write to p1dr : read p1dr : read port 1 figure c.1 (b) port 1 block diagram (pins p1 2 and p1 3 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 864 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r p1nddr c qd reset wddr1 reset wdr1 r p1ndr c qd p1 n rdr1 rpor1 internal data bus tpu module output compare output / pwm output enable output compare output / pwm output input capture input legend: wddr1 wdr1 rdr1 rpor1 note: n = 4 or 6 : write to p1ddr : write to p1dr : read p1dr : read port 1 figure c.1 (c) port 1 block diagram (pins p1 4 and p1 6 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 865 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r p1nddr c qd reset wddr1 reset wdr1 r p1ndr c qd p1 n rdr1 rpor1 internal data bus tpu module output compare output / pwm output enable output compare output / pwm output external clock input input capture input legend: wddr1 wdr1 rdr1 rpor1 note: n = 5 or 7 : write to p1ddr : write to p1dr : read p1dr : read port 1 figure c.1 (d) port 1 block diagram (pins p1 5 and p1 7 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 866 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 c.2 port 2 block diagram r p2nddr c qd reset wddr2 reset wdr2 r p2ndr c qd p2 n rdr2 rpor2 internal data bus tpu module output compare output / pwm output enable output compare output / pwm output input capture input wddr2 wdr2 rdr2 rpor2 notes: n = 0 or 1 * priority order: output compare output/pwm output > dr output : write to p2ddr : write to p2dr : read p2dr : read port 2 * legend: figure c.2 (a) port 2 block diagram (pins p2 0 and p2 1 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 867 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r p2nddr c qd reset wddr2 reset wdr2 r p2ndr c qd p2 n rdr2 rpor2 internal data bus tpu module output compare output / pwm output enable counter external reset input output compare output / pwm output 8-bit timer module input capture input wddr2 wdr2 rdr2 rpor2 notes: n = 2 or 4 * priority order: output compare output/pwm output > dr output : write to p2ddr : write to p2dr : read p2dr : read port 2 * legend: figure c.2 (b) port 2 block diagram (pins p2 2 and p2 4 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 868 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r p2nddr c qd reset wddr2 reset wdr2 r p2ndr c qd p2 n rdr2 rpor2 internal data bus tpu module output compare output / pwm output enable counter external clock input output compare output / pwm output 8-bit timer module input capture input wddr2 wdr2 rdr2 rpor2 notes: n = 3 or 5 * priority order: output compare output/pwm output > dr output : write to p2ddr : write to p2dr : read p2dr : read port 2 * legend: figure c.2 (c) port 2 block diagram (pins p2 3 and p2 5 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 869 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r p2nddr c qd reset wddr2 reset wdr2 r p2ndr c qd p2 n * rdr2 rpor2 internal data bus 8-bit timer tpu module compare-match output enable compare-match output output compare output / pwm output enable output compare output / pwm output input capture input wddr2 wdr2 rdr2 rpor2 notes: n = 6 or 7 * priority order: output compare output/pwm output > compare match output > dr output : write to p2ddr : write to p2dr : read p2dr : read port 2 legend: figure c.2 (d) port 2 block diagram (pins p2 6 and p2 7 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 870 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 c.3 port 3 block diagram r p3nddr c qd reset wddr3 reset wdr3 r c qd p3 n rdr3 rodr3 rpor3 internal data bus sci module serial transmit enable serial transmit data wddr3 wdr3 wodr3 rdr3 rpor3 rodr3 notes: n = 0 or 1 1. output enable signal 2. open drain control signal : write to p3ddr : write to p3dr : write to p3odr : read p3dr : read port 3 : read p3odr p3ndr reset wodr3 r c qd p3nodr * 1 * 2 legend: figure c.3 (a) port 3 block diagram (pins p3 0 and p3 1 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 871 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r p3nddr c qd reset wddr3 reset wdr3 r c qd p3 n rdr3 rodr3 rpor3 internal data bus sci module serial receive data enable serial receive data wddr3 wdr3 wodr3 rdr3 rpor3 rodr3 notes: n = 2 or 3 1. output enable signal 2. open drain control signal : write to p3ddr : write to p3dr : write to p3odr : read p3dr : read port 3 : read p3odr p3ndr reset wodr3 r c qd p3nodr * 1 * 2 legend: figure c.3 (b) port 3 block diagram (pins p3 2 and p3 3 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 872 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r p3nddr c qd reset wddr3 reset wdr3 r c qd p3 n rdr3 rodr3 rpor3 internal data bus sci module serial clock output enable serial clock output serial clock input enable serial clock input wddr3 wdr3 wodr3 rdr3 rpor3 rodr3 notes: n = 4 or 5 1. priority order: serial clock input > serial clock output > dr output 2. output enable signal 3. open drain control signal : write to p3ddr : write to p3dr : write to p3odr : read p3dr : read port 3 : read p3odr p3ndr reset wodr3 r c qd p3nodr * 2 * 3 * 1 legend: figure c.3 (c) port 3 block diagram (pins p3 4 and p3 5 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 873 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 c.4 port 4 block diagram p4 n rpor4 internal data bus a/d converter module analog input legend: rpor4 : read port 4 note: n = 0 to 5 figure c.4 (a) port 4 block diagram (pins p4 0 to p4 5 ) p4 n rpor4 internal data bus a/d converter module analog input d/a converter module output enable analog output legend: rpor4 : read port 4 note: n = 6 or 7 figure c.4 (b) port 4 block diagram (pins p4 6 and p4 7 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 874 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 c.5 port a block diagram r panpcr c qd reset wpcra reset wdra r c qd pa n rdra rodra rpora internal data bus internal address bus wddra wdra wodra wpcra rdra rpora rodra rpcra : write to paddr : write to padr : write to paodr : write to papcr : read padr : read port a : read paodr : read papcr pandr reset wddra r mode 4/5 * 3 s c qd panddr reset wodra rpcra r c qd panodr * 1 * 2 mode 1/2/3/6/7 mode 4/5 notes: n = 0 to 3 1. output enable signal 2. open d rain control signal 3. set priority legend: figure c.5 port a block diagram (pins pa 0 to pa 3 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 875 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 c.6 port b block diagram r pbnpcr c qd reset wpcrb reset wdrb r c qd pb n rdrb rporb internal data bus internal address bus wddrb wdrb wpcrb rdrb rporb rpcrb notes: n = 0 to 7 * set priority : write to pbddr : write to pbdr : write to pbpcr : read pbdr : read port b : read pbpcr pbndr reset wddrb r mode 1/4/5 * s c qd pbnddr rpcrb mode 3/7 mode 1/2/4/5/6 legend: figure c.6 port b block diagram (pin pb n ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 876 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 c.7 port c block diagram r pcnpcr c qd reset wpcrc reset wdrc r c qd pc n rdrc rporc pcndr reset wddrc r mode 1/4/5 * s c qd pcnddr rpcrc mode 3/7 mode 1/2/4/5/6 internal data bus internal address bus wddrc wdrc wpcrc rdrc rporc rpcrc notes: n = 0 to 7 * set priority : write to pcddr : write to pcdr : write to pcpcr : read pcdr : read port c : read pcpcr legend: figure c.7 port c block diagram (pin pc n ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 877 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 c.8 port d block diagram r pdnpcr c qd reset wpcrd reset wdrd r c qd pd n rdrd rpord internal upper data bus internal lower data bus external address upper write wddrd wdrd wpcrd rdrd rpord rpcrd note: n = 0 to 7 : write to pdddr : write to pddr : write to pdpcr : read pddr : read port d : read pdpcr pdndr wddrd c qd pdnddr rpcrd mode 3/7 mode 1/2/4/5/6 external address write reset r external address upper read external address lower read external address lower write legend: figure c.8 port d block diagram (pin pd n ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 878 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 c.9 port e block diagram r penpcr c qd reset wpcre reset wdre r c qd pe n rdre rpore pendr wddre c qd penddr rpcre reset r internal upper data bus internal lower data bus mode 3/7 mode 1/2/4/5/6 external address write external address lower read wddre wdre wpcre rdre rpore rpcre : write to peddr : write to pedr : write to pepcr : read pedr : read port e : read pepcr legend: note: n = 0 to 7 figure c.9 port e block diagram (pin pe n ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 879 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 c.10 port f block diagram r pf0ddr c qd reset wddrf reset wdrf r c qd pf 0 rdrf rporf internal data bus bus request input wddrf wdrf rdrf rporf : write to pfddr : write to pfdr : read pfdr : read port f pf0dr bus controller brle bit interrupt controller irq interrupt input mode 1/2/4/5/6 legend: figure c.10 (a) port f block diagram (pin pf 0 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 880 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r pf1ddr c qd reset wddrf mode 1/2/4/5/6 reset wdrf r pf1dr c qd pf 1 rdrf rporf internal data bus bus controller brle output bus request acknowledge output wddrf wdrf rdrf rporf : write to pfddr : write to pfdr : read pfdr : read port f legend: interrupt controller irq interrupt input figure c.10 (b) port f block diagram (pin pf 1 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 881 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r pf2ddr c qd reset wddrf reset wdrf r pf2dr c qd pf 2 rdrf rporf internal data bus wait input wddrf wdrf rdrf rporf : write to pfddr : write to pfdr : read pfdr : read port f bus controller wait enable mode 1/2/4/5/6 legend: interrupt controller irq interrupt input figure c.10 (c) port f block diagram (pin pf 2 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 882 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r pf3ddr c qd reset wddrf mode 1/2/4/5/6 reset wdrf r pf3dr c qd pf 3 rdrf rporf internal data bus bus controller lwr output wddrf wdrf rdrf rporf : write to pfddr : write to pfdr : read pfdr : read port f mode 3/7 mode 1/2/4/5/6 legend: interrupt controller irq interrupt input figure c.10 (d) port f block diagram (pin pf 3 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 883 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r pf4ddr c qd reset wddrf mode 1/2/4/5/6 reset wdrf r pf4dr c qd pf 4 rdrf rporf internal data bus bus controller hwr output wddrf wdrf rdrf rporf : write to pfddr : write to pfdr : read pfdr : read port f mode 3/7 mode 1/2/4/5/6 legend: figure c.10 (e) port f block diagram (pin pf 4 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 884 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r pf5ddr c qd reset wddrf mode 1/2/4/5/6 reset wdrf r pf5dr c qd pf 5 rdrf rporf internal data bus bus controller rd output wddrf wdrf rdrf rporf : write to pfddr : write to pfdr : read pfdr : read port f mode 3/7 mode 1/2/4/5/6 legend: figure c.10 (f) port f block diagram (pin pf 5 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 885 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r pf6ddr c qd reset wddrf mode 1/2/4/5/6 reset wdrf r pf6dr c qd pf 6 rdrf rporf internal data bus bus controller as output wddrf wdrf rdrf rporf : write to pfddr : write to pfdr : read pfdr : read port f mode 3/7 mode 1/2/4/5/6 legend: figure c.10 (g) port f block diagram (pin pf 6 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 886 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 wddrf reset wdrf r pf7dr c qd pf 7 rdrf rporf internal data bus wddrf wdrf rdrf rporf note: * set priority reset r mode 1/2/4/5/6 * s c q pf7ddr : write to pfddr : write to pfdr : read pfdr : read port f d legend: figure c.10 (h) port f block diagram (pin pf 7 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 887 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 c.11 port g block diagram r pg0ddr c qd reset wddrg reset wdrg r pg0dr c qd pg 0 rdrg rporg internal data bus wddrg wdrg rdrg rporg : write to pgddr : write to pgdr : read pgdr : read port g legend: interrupt controller irq interrupt input a/d converter a/d converter external trigger input figure c.11 (a) port g block diagram (pin pg 0 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 888 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r pg1ddr c qd reset wddrg reset wdrg r pg1dr c qd pg 1 rdrg rporg internal data bus bus controller chip select legend: wddrg wdrg rdrg rporg : write to pgddr : write to pgdr : read pgdr : read port g mode 1/2/3/7 mode 4/5/6 interrupt controller irq interrupt input figure c.11 (b) port g block diagram (pin pg 1 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 889 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 r pgnddr c qd reset wddrg reset wdrg r pgndr c qd pg n rdrg rporg internal data bus bus controller chip select wddrg wdrg rdrg rporg note: n = 2 or 3 : write to pgddr : write to pgdr : read pgdr : read port g mode 1/2/3/7 mode 4/5/6 legend: figure c.11 (c) port g block diagram (pins pg 2 and pg 3 ) appendix c i/o port block diagrams rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 890 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 wddrg reset wdrg r pg4dr c qd pg 4 rdrg rporg internal data bus bus controller chip select wddrg wdrg rdrg rporg : write to pgddr : write to pgdr : read pgdr : read port g mode 3/7 mode 1/2/4/5/6 reset r mode 1/4/5 mode 2/3/6/7 s c pg4ddr qd legend: figure c.11 (d) port g block diagram (pin pg 4 ) appendix d pin states rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 891 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 appendix d pin states d.1 port states in each mode table d.1 i/o port states in each processing state port name pin name mcu operating mode power- on reset manual reset hardware standby mode software standby mode bus release state program execution state sleep mode p1 7 /tiocb2/ tclkd p1 6 /tioca2 p1 5 /tiocb1/ tclkc p1 4 /tioca1 1 to 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port 1 to 3, 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port p1 3 /tiocd0/ tclkb/a 23 p1 2 /tiocc0/ tclka/a 22 p1 1 /tiocb0/ a 21 p1 0 /tioca0/ a 20 4 to 6 t kept t [ddr ope = 0] t [ddr ope = 1] kept t [ddr = 0] input port [ddr = 1] address output port 2 1 to 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port port 3 1 to 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port p4 7 /da1 1 to 7 t t t [daoe1 = 1] kept [daoe1 = 0] t kept i/o port p4 6 /da0 1 to 7 t t t [daoe0 = 1] kept [daoe0 = 0] t kept i/o port p4 5 to p4 0 1 to 7 t t t t t input port appendix d pin states rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 892 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port name pin name mcu operating mode power- on reset manual reset hardware standby mode software standby mode bus release state program execution state sleep mode port a 1 to 3, 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port 4, 5 l kept t [ope = 0] t [ope = 1] kept t address output 6 t kept t [ddr ope = 0] t [ddr ope = 1] kept t [ddr = 0] input port [ddr = 1] address output port b 1, 4, 5 l kept t [ope = 0] t [ope = 1] kept t address output 2, 6 t kept t [ddr ope = 0] t [ddr ope = 1] kept t [ddr = 0] input port [ddr = 1] address output 3, 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port port c 1, 4, 5 l kept t [ope = 0] t [ope = 1] kept t address output 2, 6 t kept t [ddr ope = 0] t [ddr ope = 1] kept t [ddr = 0] input port [ddr = 1] address output 3, 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port port d 1, 2, 4 to 6 t t * t t t data bus 3, 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port port e 1, 2, 4 to 6 8 bit bus t kept t kept kept i/o port 16 bit bus tt * t t t data bus 3, 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port appendix d pin states rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 893 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port name pin name mcu operating mode power- on reset manual reset hardware standby mode software standby mode bus release state program execution state sleep mode pf 7 / 1, 2, 4 to 6 clock output [ddr = 0] t [ddr = 1] clock output t [ddr = 0] input port [ddr = 1] h [ddr = 0] input port [ddr = 1] clock output [ddr = 0] input port [ddr = 1] clock output 3, 7 t kept t [ddr = 0] input port [ddr = 1] h [ddr = 0] input port [ddr = 1] clock output [ddr = 0] input port [ddr = 1] clock output 1, 2, 4 to 6 h h * t[ope = 0] t [ope = 1] h t as , rd , hwr , lwr pf 6 / as pf 5 / rd pf 4 / hwr pf 3 / lwr / irq3 3, 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port pf 2 / wait / irq2 1, 2, 4 to 6 t [waite = 0] kept [waite = 1] t t [waite = 0] kept [waite = 1] t [waite = 0] kept [waite = 1] t [waite = 0] i/o port [waite = 1] wait 3, 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port pf 1 / back / irq1 1, 2, 4 to 6 t [brle = 0] kept [brle = 1] back t[brle = 0] kept [brle = 1] h l[brle = 0] i/o port [brle = 1] back 3, 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port pf 0 / breq / irq0 1, 2, 4 to 6 t [brle = 0] kept [brle = 1] breq t[brle = 0] kept [brle = 1] t t[brle = 0] i/o port [brle = 1] breq 3, 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port pg 4 / cs0 1, 4, 5 h [ddr = 0] t [ddr ope = 0] t [ddr = 0] 2, 6 t t [ddr = 1] h * t [ddr ope = 1] h input port [ddr = 1] cs 0 3, 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port appendix d pin states rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 894 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 port name pin name mcu operating mode power- on reset manual reset hardware standby mode software standby mode bus release state program execution state sleep mode 1 to 3, 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port pg 3 / cs1 pg 2 / cs2 pg 1 / cs3 / irq7 4 to 6 t [ddr = 0] t [ddr = 1] h * t [ddr ope = 0] t [ddr ope = 1] h t [ddr = 0] input port [ddr = 1] cs 1 to cs 3 1 to 3, 7 t kept t kept kept i/o port pg 0 / adtrg / irq6 4 to 6 t kept t kept t i/o port legend: h : high level l : low level t : high impedance kept : input port becomes high-impedance, output port retains state ddr : data direction register ope : output port enable waite : wait input enable brle : bus release enable note: * indicates the state after completion of the executing bus cycle. appendix e timing of transition to and recovery from hardware standby mode rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 895 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 appendix e timing of transition to and recovery from hardware standby mode timing of transition to hardware standby mode (1) to retain ram contents with the rame bit set to 1 in syscr, drive the res signal low at least 10 states before the stby signal goes low, as shown below. res must remain low until stby signal goes low (delay from stby low to res high: 0 ns or more). stby res t 2 0ns t 1 10t cyc figure e.1 timing of transition to hardware standby mode (2) to retain ram contents with the rame bit cleared to 0 in syscr, or when ram contents do not need to be retained, res does not have to be driven low as in (1). timing of recovery from hardware standby mode drive the res signal low and the nmi signal high approximately 100 ns or more before stby goes high to execute a power-on reset. stby res t osc t nmirh t 100ns nmi figure e.2 timing of recovery from hardware standby mode appendix f product code lineup rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 896 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 appendix f product code lineup table f.1 h8s/2345 group product code lineup product type product code mark code package (package code) h8s/2345 mask rom hd6432345 hd6432345( *** )te 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6432345( *** )tf 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100g) hd6432345( *** )f 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) hd6432345( *** )fa 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) ztat? hd6472345 hd6472345te 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) HD6472345TF 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100g) hd6472345f 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) hd6472345fa 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) f-ztat? hd64f2345 hd64f2345te 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd64f2345tf 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100g) hd64f2345f 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) hd64f2345fa 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) h8s/2344 mask rom hd6432344 hd6432344( *** )te 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6432344( *** )tf 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100g) hd6432344( *** )f 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) hd6432344( *** )fa 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) h8s/2343 mask rom hd6432343 hd6432343( *** )te 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6432343( *** )tf 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100g) hd6432343( *** )f 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) hd6432343( *** )fa 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) h8s/2341 mask rom hd6432341 hd6432341( *** )te 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6432341( *** tf 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100g) hd6432341( *** )f 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) hd6432341( *** )fa 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) h8s/2340 romless hd6412340 hd6412340te 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6412340tf 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100g) hd6412340f 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) hd6412340fa 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) note: ( *** ) indicates the rom code. appendix g package dimensions rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 897 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 appendix g package dimensions figures g.1 to g.4 show the package dimensions of the h8s/2345 group. note) 1. dimensions" * 1"and" * 2" do not include mold flash 2. dimension" * 3"does not include trim offset. 1.00 1.00 0.08 0.10 0.5 8 0 15.8 16.0 16.2 0.15 0.20 1.20 0.20 0.10 0.00 0.27 0.22 0.17 0.22 0.17 0.12 l 1 z e z d y x c b 1 b p a h d a 2 e d a 1 c 1 e e l h e 0.6 0.5 0.4 max nom min dimension in millimeters symbol reference 14 1.00 16.2 16.0 15.8 1.0 14 index mark * 1 * 2 * 3 p e d e d 100 1 f xm y 26 25 76 75 50 51 z z h e h d b 2 1 1 detail f c l a a a l terminal cross section p 1 1 b c b c p-tqfp100-14x14-0.50 0.5g mass[typ.] tfp-100b/tfp-100bv ptqp0100ka-a renesas code jeita package code previous code figure g.1 tfp-100b package dimensions appendix g package dimensions rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 898 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 note) 1. dimensions" * 1"and" * 2" do not include mold flash 2. dimension" * 3"does not include trim offset. index mark * 1 * 2 * 3 p e d e d ym x f 100 125 26 76 75 50 51 e h d h b z z 2 1 1 detail f c a a l a l terminal cross section 1 1 p b c c b h e l e e c 1 a 1 d e a 2 h d a b p b 1 c x y z d z e l 1 reference symbol dimension in millimeters min nom max 1.0 0.10 0 8 0.4 0.12 0.17 0.22 0.13 0.18 0.23 0.00 0.10 0.20 1.20 13.8 14.0 14.2 1.00 12 0.16 0.15 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.07 14.2 14.0 13.8 1.2 12 1.2 p-tqfp100-12x12-0.40 0.4g mass[typ.] tfp-100g/tfp-100gv ptqp0100lc-a renesas code jeita package code previous code figure g.2 tfp-100g package dimensions appendix g package dimensions rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 899 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 note) 1. dimensions" * 1"and" * 2" do not include mold flash 2. dimension" * 3"does not include trim offset. 0.83 0.58 0.15 0.13 0.65 10 0 19.2 18.8 18.4 3.10 0.12 0.17 0.22 0.24 0.32 0.40 0.00 0.30 0.15 0.20 0.30 20 14 l 1 d z e z d y x c b 1 b p a h d a 2 e a 1 c 1 e e l h e 2.4 24.4 24.8 25.2 2.70 reference symbol dimension in millimeters min nom max 1.0 1.2 1.4 * 1 * 2 * 3 p e d e d 51 50 80 81 30 31 1 100 f ym x z z b h e h d 2 1 1 detail f c l a a a l terminal cross section p 1 1 b c b c p-qfp100-14x20-0.65 1.7g mass[typ.] fp-100a/fp-100av prqp0100je-b renesas code jeita package code previous code figure g.3 fp-100a package dimensions appendix g package dimensions rev. 4.00 feb 15, 2006 page 900 of 900 rej09b0291-0400 note) 1. dimensions" * 1"and" * 2" do not include mold flash 2. dimension" * 3"does not include trim offset. * 1 * 2 * 3 p e d e d f 100 125 26 76 75 51 50 xm y z z d h e h b terminal cross section p 1 1 c b c b 2 1 1 detail f c a a l l a 1.0 1.0 0.08 0.10 0.5 8 0 0.25 0.12 0.15 0.20 0.00 0.27 0.22 0.17 0.22 0.17 0.12 3.05 16.3 16.0 15.7 l 1 z e z d y x c b 1 b p a h d a 2 e d a 1 c 1 e e l h e 0.7 0.5 0.3 max nom min dimension in millimeters symbol reference 14 2.70 16.3 16.0 15.7 1.0 14 p-qfp100-14x14-0.50 1.2g mass[typ.] fp-100b/fp-100bv prqp0100ka-a renesas code jeita package code previous code figure g.4 fp-100b package dimensions renesas 16-bit single-chip microcomputer hardware manual h8s/2345 group, h8s/2345 f-ztat? publication date: 1st edition, september 1997 rev.4.00, february 15, 2006 published by: sales strategic planning div. renesas technology corp. edited by: customer support department global strategic communication div. renesas solutions corp. ?2006. renesas technology corp., all rights reserved. printed in japan. sales strategic planning div. nippon bldg., 2-6-2, ohte-machi, chiyoda-ku, tokyo 100-0004, japan http://www.renesas.com refer to " http://www.renesas.com/en/network " for the latest and detailed information. renesas technology america, inc. 450 holger way, san jose, ca 95134-1368, u.s.a tel: <1> (408) 382-7500, fax: <1> (408) 382-7501 renesas technology europe limited dukes meadow, millboard road, bourne end, buckinghamshire, sl8 5fh, u.k. tel: <44> (1628) 585-100, fax: <44> (1628) 585-900 renesas technology (shanghai) co., ltd. unit 204, 205, aziacenter, no.1233 lujiazui ring rd, pudong district, shanghai, china 200120 tel: <86> (21) 5877-1818, fax: <86> (21) 6887-7898 renesas technology hong kong ltd. 7th floor, north tower, world finance centre, harbour city, 1 canton road, tsimshatsui, kowloon, hong kong tel: <852> 2265-6688, fax: <852> 2730-6071 renesas technology taiwan co., ltd. 10th floor, no.99, fushing north road, taipei, taiwan tel: <886> (2) 2715-2888, fax: <886> (2) 2713-2999 renesas technology singapore pte. ltd. 1 harbour front avenue, #06-10, keppel bay tower, singapore 098632 tel: <65> 6213-0200, fax: <65> 6278-8001 renesas technology korea co., ltd. kukje center bldg. 18th fl., 191, 2-ka, hangang-ro, yongsan-ku, seoul 140-702, korea tel: <82> (2) 796-3115, fax: <82> (2) 796-2145 renesas technology malaysia sdn. bhd unit 906, block b, menara amcorp, amcorp trade centre, no.18, jalan persiaran barat, 46050 petaling jaya, selangor darul ehsan, malaysia tel: <603> 7955-9390, fax: <603> 7955-9510 renesas sales offices colophon 6.0 h8s/2345 group, h8s/2345 f-ztat? hardware manual |
Price & Availability of HD6472345TF
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |